事業／計画（する） Gutenberg Australia a treasure-trove of literature treasure 設立する hidden with no 証拠 of 所有権

BROWSE the 場所／位置 for other 作品 by this author (and our other authors) or get HELP Reading, Downloading and 変えるing とじ込み／提出するs) or SEARCH the entire 場所／位置 with Google 場所／位置 Search

A 事業／計画（する） Gutenberg of Australia eBook

肩書を与える:      A New Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World
Author:     William Dampier
eBook No.:  0500461h.html
版:    1
Language:   English
Character 始める，決める encoding:     HTML--ASCII--7 bit
Date first 地位，任命するd:          May 2005
Date most recently updated: Oct 2015

This eBook was produced by: 告訴する Asscher

事業／計画（する） Gutenberg of Australia eBooks are created from printed 版s
which are in the public domain in Australia, unless a copyright notice
is 含むd. We do NOT keep any eBooks in 同意／服従 with a particular
paper 版.

Copyright 法律s are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
copyright 法律s for your country before downloading or redistributing this
とじ込み／提出する.

This eBook is made 利用できる at no cost and with almost no 制限s
どれでも. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the 条件
of the 事業／計画（する） Gutenberg of Australia License which may be 見解（をとる）d online at
http://gutenberg.逮捕する.au/licence.html

To 接触する 事業／計画（する） Gutenberg of Australia go to http://gutenberg.逮捕する.au

A
NEW VOYAGE ROUND
THE WORLD

BY

WILLIAM DAMPIER.

With an Introduction
by
SIR ALBERT GRAY, K.C.B., K.C.
大統領 of the Hakluyt Society.

ADAM AND CHARLES BLACK
4, 5 & 6 SOHO SQUARE, LONDON, W. 1.

1937.

FIRST PUBLISHED 1927 BY THE ARGONAUT PRESS
IN AN EDITION DE LUXE LIMITED TO 975 COPIES
EDITED BY N.M. PENZER, M.A., F.R.G.S.
REPRINTED 1937 AND PUBLISHED BY A. AND C. BLACK LTD.

Go to TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE. (1927, N. M. Penzer.)

After reading Sir Albert Gray's excellent Introduction to this 版 of Dampier's New Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World, I was at once 納得させるd that nothing remained to be said except from the bibliographical 味方する.

At the very 手始め of my 研究s I was 直面するd with a 集まり of contradictory and incorrect 言及／関連s--the work of past cataloguers for whom the intricacies of the 非常に／多数の 問題／発行するs and 版s had 証明するd too 複雑にするd. Even now I cannot 明言する／公表する with 絶対の certainty that the results of my work have produced a bibliography of Dampier's 作品 完全にする in every 詳細（に述べる）. At the same time, it is gratifying to know that the Library of the British Museum has 受託するd it, and has 設立する it necessary to 改訂する in toto the pages of the General 目録 含む／封じ込めるing the Dampier 入ること／参加（者）s. Although the Bodleian does not 所有する copies of all the さまざまな 版s, the librarian tells me that those they have 確認する my 声明s.

After his return to England in 1691 Dampier must have 用意が出来ている his manuscript for the 圧力（をかける） during the intervals between the 非常に／多数の short voyages he made in the next half dozen years.

The New Voyage appeared in 1697 and was an 即座の success, a second 版 に引き続いて the same year. A third 版 was published in 1698. Both these later 版s had PARTIALLY 具体的に表現するd an errata sheet which was affixed to the end of the first 版. Dampier's publisher, James Knapton, encouraged by the success of the work, 需要・要求するd more 構成要素 for a その上の 容積／容量. This consisted of A 補足（する） to the Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World, together with the Voyages to Campeachy and the Discourse on the 貿易（する） 勝利，勝つd. It was 問題／発行するd in 1699 under the general 肩書を与える of Voyages and 発見s, and bore the imprint "Vol. II." With it a fourth 版 of the New Voyage appeared, also 時代遅れの 1699. It had been more carefully 改訂するd, and the COMPLETE errata sheet from the first 版 had been 具体的に表現するd.*

(*Footnote. E.g. the errata sheet tells us that on page 501 "Malucca" should read "Malacca." In spite of the 2nd and 3rd 版s 存在 "訂正するd, " we find this 不変の till the 4th 版 of 1699.)

It now bore the imprint "Vol. I" on the 肩書を与える page. An 索引 (unpaginated) to both 容積／容量s appeared in 容積／容量 2.

This year (1699) was a 広大な／多数の／重要な publishing year for Knapton, for beside the Dampier 容積／容量s he had also 問題／発行するd Lionel Wafer's New Voyage and Description of the Isthmus of America and William 切り開く／タクシー／不正アクセス's Collection of 初めの Voyages, which consisted of Cowley's Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the Globe, Sharp's 旅行 over the Isthmus of Darien, * 支持を得ようと努めるd's Magellan and Roberts' Levant. As we shall see すぐに, all these were to be 会社にする／組み込むd in a later 版 of Dampier's Voyages.

(*Footnote. Sharp's Voyages and Adventures in the South Sea had already appeared in 1684.)

Now, although the 1699 版 of Dampier can be 正確に 述べるd as a two-容積／容量 work, each 容積／容量 was reprinted as occasion 需要・要求するd.*

(*Footnote. This is 証明するd by the 宣伝s at the end of the other 容積／容量s published by Knapton in 1699.)

The New Voyage, in reality, still remained an individual work. Thus the 5th 版 appeared in 1703, and the 6th in 1717.

一方／合間 the Voyages and 発見s had reached its 2nd 版 in 1700 and 3rd in 1705. But with the 5th 版 of the New Voyage in 1703 appeared the 1st 版 of Dampier's third 容積／容量, the Voyage to New Holland. It 証明するd a success, although it took six years to be exhausted. The 2nd 版 appeared in 1709, and with it was also 問題／発行するd the 1st 版 of the 延長／続編 of the New Voyage.

Thus, it was not until 1709 that all Dampier's 容積／容量s had appeared, and although librarians often speak of the "three 容積／容量 Dampier, " they must remember that each 容積／容量 bore a different date and each date 代表するd a different 版 of that 容積／容量. Thus, there was no "three 容積／容量 Dampier" in the 一般に-受託するd meaning of the 称する，呼ぶ／期間／用語, and nothing could 妨げる such a 始める，決める 存在 made up of any 半端物 版s. In fact, this is, to a large extent, 正確に／まさに what happened, and one will find a 1st 版 of the New Voyage bound up conformably with, say, a 2nd 版 of Voyages and 発見s and a mixed 版 of the two parts of New Holland.

We now come to the four-容積／容量 版 Of 1729, of which the 現在の work forms a reprint of 容積／容量 1.

Knapton conceived the idea of 問題／発行するing all his explorer 容積／容量s in one collection. Accordingly, he first reprinted the three 容積／容量s of Dampier's Voyages (omitting the dedication in 容積／容量 1). The New Voyage was called "Seventh 版 訂正するd, " and Voyages and 発見s was the fourth 版 (though 無名の as such). 容積／容量 3 consisted of the New Holland voyage followed by a reprint of Wafer's Voyages. Both parts of the New Holland voyage now appeared for the first time in continuous pagination.* Wafer's Voyages formed the 3rd 版, as the first had appeared in 1699 and the 2nd in 1704. 容積／容量 4 含む／封じ込めるd the voyages of Funnell, Cowley, Sharp, 支持を得ようと努めるd, and Roberts.

(*Footnote. They were reprinted as one narrative in Harris' Collection of Voyages Navigantium atque Itinerantium Bibliotheca 1744.)

We have already 公式文書，認めるd the previous 問題／発行する of the four latter voyages, and Funnell's Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World, which was an account of Dampier's St. George voyage, had been published by Knapton in 1707.

With regard to the manuscript copy of Dampier's New Voyage (Sloane Manuscripts 3236) little need be said here, as Sir Albert Gray has 扱う／治療するd it in the 結論 of his Introduction. I would 単に 公式文書，認める that the 簡潔な／要約する passage referring to New Holland was printed in 早期に Voyages to Terra Australis, Hakluyt Society, 1859, pages 108 to 111. The 容積／容量 also reprinted those 部分s of the printed 版 of the New Voyage to New Holland which 含む／封じ込めるd direct 言及／関連 to Australia.

It would be superfluous to について言及する all the reprints of Dampier's Voyages after 1729. I would, therefore, 単に draw attention to the Collections of Voyages, in which Dampier's Voyages, and those of Funnell, Cowley, etc., appeared.

HARRIS. 1744 to 1748. 容積／容量 1. Dampier, Funnell, Cowley.

Allgemeine Historie. 1747 to 1777. 容積／容量 12. Dampier, 支持を得ようと努めるd. (Cowley's Voyage appeared in 容積／容量 18.)

CALLANDER. 1766 to 1768. 容積／容量 2. Dampier, Sharp, Cowley, Wafer. (Funnell's Voyage appeared in 容積／容量 3.)

New Collection. 1767. 容積／容量 3, page 608. Dampier.

World 陳列する，発揮するd. 1767 to 1768. 容積／容量 6, page 609. Dampier.

[DAVID HENRY.] English 航海士s. 1774. 容積／容量 1. Dampier, Cowley.

PINKERTON. 1808 to 1814. 容積／容量 11. Dampier.

KERR. 1811 to 1824. 容積／容量 10. Dampier, Funnell, Cowley.

LAHARPE. 1816. 容積／容量 15. Dampier.

(The に引き続いて （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する shows, at a ちらりと見ること, the correlation of the different 版s of the 作品 which 構成する Dampier's Voyages.)

1927. N.M. PENZER.

CONTENTS.

PREFACE 1927, N.M. PENZER.

AN INTRODUCTION BY SIR ALBERT GRAY, K.C.B., K.C.

LIFE BEFORE THE NEW VOYAGE.
HIS FIRST CIRCUMNAVIGATION.
FIRST STAGE.
BUCCANEERING.
SECOND STAGE.
THIRD STAGE.
FOURTH STAGE.
FIFTH STAGE.
SIXTH STAGE.
SEVENTH STAGE.
EIGHTH STAGE.
DAMPIER'S SUBSEQUENT LIFE.
THE ROEBUCK VOYAGE.
THE ST. GEORGE VOYAGE.
THE DUKE AND DUTCHESS VOYAGE.
DAMPIER THE MAN.
THE TEXT OF A NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.

DEDICATION.

PREFACE.

THE INTRODUCTION.

THE AUTHOR'S DEPARTURE FROM ENGLAND, AND ARRIVAL IN JAMAICA.
HIS FIRST GOING OVER THE ISTHMUS OF AMERICA INTO THE SOUTH SEAS.
HIS COASTING PERU AND CHILE, AND BACK AGAIN, TO HIS PARTING WITH CAPTAIN SHARP NEAR THE ISLE OF PLATA, IN ORDER TO RETURN OVERLAND.

CHAPTER 1.

AN ACCOUNT OF THE AUTHOR'S RETURN OUT OF THE SOUTH SEAS, TO HIS LANDING NEAR CAPE ST. LAWRENCE, IN THE ISTHMUS OF DARIEN: WITH AN OCCASIONAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MOSKITO INDIANS.

CHAPTER 2.

THE AUTHOR'S LAND JOURNEY FROM THE SOUTH TO THE NORTH SEA, OVER THE TERRA FIRMA, OR ISTHMUS OF DARIEN.

CHAPTER 3.

THE AUTHOR'S CRUISING WITH THE PRIVATEERS IN THE NORTH SEAS ON THE WEST INDIA COAST.
THEY GO TO THE ISLE OF SAN ANDREAS.
OF THE CEDARS THERE.
THE CORN ISLANDS, AND THEIR INHABITANTS.
BLUEFIELD'S RIVER, AND AN ACCOUNT OF THE MANATEE THERE, OR SEA-COW; WITH THE MANNER HOW THE MOSKITO INDIANS KILL THEM, AND TORTOISE, ETC.
THE MAHO-TREE.
THE SAVAGES OF BOCA TORO.
HE TOUCHES AGAIN AT POINT SAMBALAS, AND ITS ISLANDS.
THE GROVES OF SAPADILLOES THERE, THE SOLDIER'S INSECT, AND MANCHANEEL-TREE.
THE RIVER OF DARIEN, AND THE WILD INDIANS NEAR IT; MONASTERY OF MADRE DE POPA, RIO GRANDE, SANTA MARTA TOWN, AND THE HIGH MOUNTAIN THERE; RIO LA HACHA TOWN, RANCHO REYS, AND PEARL FISHERY THERE; THE INDIAN INHABITANTS AND COUNTRY.
DUTCH ISLE OF CURACAO, ETC.
COUNT D'ESTREE'S UNFORTUNATE EXPEDITION THITHER.
ISLE OF BONAIRE.
ISLE OF AVES, THE BOOBY AND MAN-OF-WAR-BIRD.
THE WRECK OF D'ESTREE'S FLEET, AND CAPTAIN PAIN'S ADVENTURE HERE.
LITTLE ISLE OF AVES.
THE ISLES LOS ROQUES, THE NODDY AND TROPIC-BIRD, MINERAL WATER, EGG-BIRDS; THE MANGROVE-TREES, BLACK, RED, AND WHITE, ISLE OF TORTUGA, ITS 戦力兵器制限交渉 PONDS.
ISLE OF BLANCO; THE IGUANA ANIMAL, THEIR VARIETY; AND THE BEST SEA-TORTOISE.
MODERN ALTERATIONS IN THE WEST INDIES.
THE COAST OF CARACAS, ITS REMARKABLE LAND, AND PRODUCT OF THE BEST COCOA-NUTS.
THE COCOA DESCRIBED AT LARGE, WITH THE HUSBANDRY OF IT.
CITY OF CARACAS.
LA GUAIRE FORT AND HAVEN.
TOWN OF CUMANA.
VERINA, ITS FAMOUS BEST SPANISH TOBACCO.
THE RICH TRADE OF THE COAST OF CARACAS.
OF THE SUCKING FISH, OR REMORA.
THE AUTHOR'S ARRIVAL IN VIRGINIA.

CHAPTER 4.

THE AUTHOR'S VOYAGE TO THE ISLE OF JUAN FERNANDEZ IN THE SOUTH SEAS.
HE ARRIVES AT THE ISLES OF CAPE VERDE.
ISLE OF SAL; ITS 戦力兵器制限交渉 PONDS.
THE FLAMINGO, AND ITS REMARKABLE NEST.
AMBERGRIS WHERE FOUND.
THE ISLES OF ST. NICHOLAS, MAYO, ST. JAGO, FOGO, A BURNING MOUNTAIN; WITH THE REST OF THE ISLES OF CAPE VERDE.
SHERBOROUGH RIVER ON THE COAST OF GUINEA.
THE COMMODITIES AND NEGROES THERE.
A TOWN OF THEIRS DESCRIBED.
TORNADOES, SHARKS, FLYING-FISH.
A SEA DEEP AND CLEAR, YET PALE.
ISLES OF SIBBEL DE WARD.
SMALL RED LOBSTERS.
STRAIT LE MAIRE.
STATES ISLAND.
CAPE HORN IN TIERRA DEL FUEGO.
THEIR MEETING WITH CAPTAIN EATON IN THE SOUTH SEAS, AND THEIR GOING TOGETHER TO THE ISLE OF JUAN FERNANDEZ.
OF A MOSKITO MAN LEFT THERE ALONE THREE YEARS: HIS ART AND SAGACITY; WITH THAT OF OTHER INDIANS.
THE ISLAND DESCRIBED.
THE SAVANNAHS OF AMERICA.
GOATS AT JUAN FERNANDEZ.
SEALS.
SEA-LIONS.
SNAPPER, A SORT OF FISH.
ROCK-FISH.
THE BAYS, AND NATURAL STRENGTH OF THIS ISLAND.

CHAPTER 5.

THE AUTHOR DEPARTS FROM JUAN FERNANDEZ.
OF THE PACIFIC SEA.
OF THE ANDES, OR HIGH MOUNTAINS IN PERU AND CHILE.
A PRIZE TAKEN.
ISLE OF LOBOS: PENGUINS AND OTHER BIRDS THERE.
THREE PRIZES MORE.
THE ISLANDS GALAPAGOS: THE DILDOE-TREE, BURTON-WOOD, MAMMEE-TREES, IGUANAS, LAND-TORTOISE, THEIR SEVERAL KIND; GREEN SNAKES, TURTLE-DOVES, TORTOISE, OR TURTLE-GRASS.
SEA-TURTLE, THEIR SEVERAL KINDS.
THE AIR AND WEATHER AT THE GALAPAGOS.
SOME OF THE ISLANDS DESCRIBED, THEIR SOIL, ETC.
THE ISLAND COCOS DESCRIBED, CAPE BLANCO, AND THE BAY OF CALDERA; THE SAVANNAHS THERE.
CAPTAIN COOK DIES.
OF NICOYA, AND A RED WOOD FOR DYEING, AND OTHER COMMODITIES.
A NARROW ESCAPE OF TWELVE MEN.
LANCE-WOOD.
VOLCAN VIEJO, A BURNING MOUNTAIN ON THE COAST OF RIO LEJO.
A TORNADO.
THE ISLAND AND HARBOUR OF RIO LEJO.
THE GULF OF AMAPALLA AND POINT GASIVINA.
ISLES OF MANGERA AND AMAPALLA.
THE INDIAN INHABITANTS.
HOG-PLUM-TREE.
OTHER ISLANDS IN THE GULF OF AMAPALLA.
CAPTAIN EATON AND CAPTAIN DAVIS CAREEN THEIR SHIPS HERE, AND AFTERWARDS PART.

CHAPTER 6.

THEY DEPART FROM AMAPALLA.
TORNADOES.
CAPE SAN FRANCISCO.
THEY MEET CAPTAIN EATON, AND PART AGAIN.
ISLE OF PLATA DESCRIBED.
ANOTHER MEETING WITH CAPTAIN EATON, AND THEIR FINAL PARTING.
POINT SANTA HELENA.
ALGATRANE, A SORT OF TAR.
A SPANISH WRECK.
CRUISINGS.
MANTA, NEAR CAPE SAN LORENZO.
MONTE CHRISTO.
CRUISINGS.
CAPE BLANCO.
PAYTA.
THE BUILDINGS IN PERU.
THE SOIL OF PERU.
COLAN.
BARK LOGS DESCRIBED.
PIURA.
THE ROAD OF PAYTA.
LOBOS DE TERRA.
THEY COME AGAIN TO LOBOS DE LA MAR.
THE BAY OF GUAYAQUIL.
ISLE OF SANTA CLARA.
A RICH SPANISH WRECK THERE.
CATFISH.
PUNTA ARENA IN THE ISLE PUNA.
THE ISLAND DESCRIBED.
THE PALMETTO-TREE.
TOWN AND HARBOUR OF PUNA.
RIVER OF GUAYAQUIL.
GUAYAQUIL TOWN.
ITS COMMODITIES, COCOA, SARSAPARILLA, QUITO CLOTH.
OF THE CITY, AND GOLD, AND AIR OF QUITO.
THEY ENTER THE BAY IN ORDER TO MAKE AN ATTEMPT ON THE TOWN OF GUAYAQUIL.
A GREAT ADVANTAGE SLIPPED THAT MIGHT HAVE BEEN MADE OF A COMPANY OF NEGROES TAKEN IN GUAYAQUIL RIVER.
THEY GO TO PLATA AGAIN.
ISLE PLATA.

CHAPTER 7.

THEY LEAVE THE ISLE OF PLATA.
CAPE PASSAO.
THE COAST BETWEEN THAT AND CAPE SAN FRANCISCO; AND FROM THENCE ON TO PANAMA.
THE RIVER OF ST. JAGO.
THE RED AND THE WHITE COTTON-TREE.
THE CABBAGE-TREE.
THE INDIANS OF ST. JAGO RIVER, AND ITS NEIGHBOURHOOD.
THE ISLE OF GALLO.
THE RIVER AND VILLAGE OF TOMACO.
ISLE OF GORGONA, THE PEARL-OYSTERS THERE AND IN OTHER PARTS.
THE LAND ON THE MAIN.
CAPE CORRIENTES.
POINT GARACHINA.
ISLAND GALLERA.
THE KING'S, OR PEARL, ISLANDS, PACHEQUE ST. PAUL'S ISLAND.
LAVELIA.
NATA.
THE CATFISH.
OYSTERS.
THE PLEASANT PROSPECTS IN THE BAY OF PANAMA.
OLD PANAMA.
THE NEW CITY.
THE GREAT CONCOURSE THERE FROM LIMA AND PORTOBELLO, ETC. UPON THE ARRIVAL OF THE SPANISH ARMADA IN THE WEST INDIES.
THE COURSE THE ARMADA TAKES; WITH AN INCIDENTAL ACCOUNT OF THE FIRST INDUCEMENTS THAT MADE THE PRIVATEERS UNDERTAKE THE PASSAGE OVER THE ISTHMUS OF DARIEN INTO THE SOUTH SEAS, AND OF THE PARTICULAR BEGINNING OF THEIR CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE INDIANS THAT INHABIT THAT ISTHMUS.
OF THE AIR AND WEATHER AT PANAMA.
THE ISLES OF PERICO.
TABAGO, A PLEASANT ISLAND.
THE MAMMEE-TREE.
THE VILLAGE TABAGO.
A SPANISH STRATAGEM OR TWO OF CAPTAIN BOND THEIR ENGINEER.
THE IGNORANCE OF THE SPANIARDS OF THESE PARTS IN SEA-AFFAIRS.
A PARTY OF FRENCH PRIVATEERS ARRIVE FROM OVERLAND.
OF THE COMMISSIONS THAT ARE GIVEN OUT BY THE FRENCH GOVERNOUR OF PETIT GUAVRES.
OF THE GULF OF ST. MICHAEL, AND THE RIVERS OF CONGOS, SAMBO, AND SANTA MARIA: AND AN ERROR OF THE COMMON MAPS, IN THE PLACING POINT GARACHINA AND CAPE SAN LORENZO, CORRECTED.
OF THE TOWN AND GOLD-MINES OF SANTA MARIA; AND THE TOWN OF SCUCHADERO.
CAPTAIN TOWNLEY'S ARRIVAL WITH SOME MORE ENGLISH PRIVATEERS OVERLAND.
JARS OF PISCO-WINE.
A BARK OF CAPTAIN KNIGHT'S JOINS THEM.
POINT GARACHINA AGAIN.
PORTO DE PINAS.
ISLE OF OTOQUE.
THE PACKET FROM LIMA TAKEN.
OTHER ENGLISH AND FRENCH PRIVATEERS ARRIVE.
CHEPELIO, ONE OF THE SWEETEST ISLANDS IN THE WORLD.
THE SAPADILLO, AVOCADO-PEAR, MAMMEE-SAPOTA.
WILD MAMMEE AND STAR-APPLE.
CHEAPO RIVER AND TOWN.
SOME TRAVERSINGS IN THE BAY OF PANAMA; AND AN ACCOUNT OF THE STRENGTH OF THE SPANISH FLEET, AND OF THE PRIVATEERS, AND THE ENGAGEMENT BETWEEN THEM.

CHAPTER 8.

THEY SET OUT FROM TABAGO.
ISLE OF CHUCHE.
THE MOUNTAIN CALLED MORO DE PORCOS.
THE COAST TO THE WESTWARD OF THE BAY OF PANAMA.
ISLES OF QUIBO, QUICARO, RANCHERIA.
THE PALMA-MARIA-TREE.
THE ISLES CANALES AND CANTARRAS.
THEY BUILD CANOES FOR A NEW EXPEDITION; AND TAKE PUEBLA NOVA.
CAPTAIN KNIGHT JOINS THEM.
CANOES HOW MADE.
THE COAST AND WINDS BETWEEN QUIBO AND NICOYA.
VOLCAN VIEJO AGAIN.
TORNADOES, AND THE SEA ROUGH.
RIO LEJO HARBOUR.
THE CITY OF LEON TAKEN AND BURNT.
RIO LEJO CREEK; THE TOWN AND COMMODITIES; THE GUAVA-FRUIT, AND PRICKLY-PEAR: A RANSOM PAID HONOURABLY UPON PAROLE: THE TOWN BURNT.
CAPTAIN DAVIS AND OTHERS GO OFF FOR THE SOUTH COAST.
A CONTAGIOUS SICKNESS AT RIO LEJO.
TERRIBLE TORNADOES.
THE VOLCANO OF GUATEMALA; THE RICH COMMODITIES OF THAT COUNTRY, INDIGO, OTTA OR ANATTA, COCHINEEL, SILVESTER.
DRIFTWOOD, AND PUMICE-STONES.
THE COAST FURTHER ON THE NORTH-WEST.
CAPTAIN TOWNLEY'S FRUITLESS EXPEDITION TOWARDS TECOANTEPEQUE.
THE ISLAND TANGOLA, AND NEIGHBOURING CONTINENT.
GUATULCO PORT.
THE BUFFADORE, OR WATER-SPOUT.
RUINS OF GUATULCO VILLAGE.
THE COAST ADJOINING.
CAPTAIN TOWNLEY MARCHES TO THE RIVER CAPALITA.
TURTLE AT GUATULCO.
AN INDIAN SETTLEMENT.
THE VINELLO-PLANT AND FRUIT.

CHAPTER 9.

THEY SET OUT FROM GUATULCO.
THE ISLE SACRIFICIO.
PORT ANGELS.
JACKALS.
A NARROW ESCAPE.
THE ROCK ALGATROSS, AND THE NEIGHBOURING COAST.
SNOOK, A SORT OF FISH.
THE TOWN OF ACAPULCO.
OF THE TRADE IT DRIVES WITH THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.
THE HAVEN OF ACAPULCO.
A TORNADO.
PORT MARQUIS.
CAPTAIN TOWNLEY MAKES A FRUITLESS ATTEMPT.
A LONG SANDY BAY, BUT VERY ROUGH SEAS.
THE PALM-TREE, GREAT AND SMALL.
THE HILL OF PETAPLAN.
A POOR INDIAN VILLAGE.
JEW-FISH.
CHEQUETAN, A GOOD HARBOUR.
ESTAPA; MUSSELS THERE.
A CARAVAN OF MULES TAKEN.
A HILL NEAR THELUPAN.
THE COAST HEREABOUTS.
THE VOLCANO, TOWN, VALLEY, AND BAY OF COLIMA.
SALLAGUA PORT.
ORRHA.
RAGGED HILLS.
CORONADA, OR THE CROWN LAND.
CAPE CORRIENTES.
ISLES OF CHAMETLY.
THE CITY PURIFICATION.
VALDERAS; OR THE VALLEY OF FLAGS.
THEY MISS THEIR DESIGN ON THIS COAST.
CAPTAIN TOWNLEY LEAVES THEM WITH THE DARIEN INDIANS.
THE POINT AND ISLES OF PONTIQUE.
OTHER ISLES OF CHAMETLY.
THE PENGUIN-FRUIT, THE YELLOW AND THE RED.
SEALS HERE.
OF THE RIVER OF CULIACAN, AND THE TRADE OF A TOWN THERE WITH CALIFORNIA.
MASSACLAN.
RIVER AND TOWN OF ROSARIO.
CAPUT CAVALLI, AND ANOTHER HILL.
THE DIFFICULTY OF INTELLIGENCE ON THIS COAST.
THE RIVER OF OLETTA.
RIVER OF ST. JAGO.
MAXENTELBA ROCK, AND ZELISCO HILL.
SANTA PECAQUE TOWN IN THE RIVER OF ST. JAGO.
OF COMPOSTELLA.
MANY OF THEM CUT OFF AT SANTA PECAQUE.
OF CALIFORNIA; WHETHER AN ISLAND OR NOT: AND OF THE NORTH-WEST AND NORTH-EAST PASSAGE.
A METHOD PROPOSED FOR DISCOVERY OF THE NORTH-WEST AND NORTH-EAST PASSAGES.
ISLE OF SANTA MARIA.
A PRICKLY PLANT.
CAPTAIN SWAN PROPOSES A VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES.
VALLEY OF VALDERAS AGAIN, AND CAPE CORRIENTES.
THE REASON OF THEIR ILL SUCCESS ON THE MEXICAN COAST, AND DEPARTURE THENCE FOR THE EAST INDIES.

CHAPTER 10.

THEIR DEPARTURE FROM CAPE CORRIENTES FOR THE LADRONE ISLANDS, AND THE EAST INDIES.
THEIR COURSE THITHER, AND ACCIDENTS BY THE WAY: WITH A TABLE OF EACH DAY'S RUN, ETC.
OF THE DIFFERENT ACCOUNTS OF THE BREADTH OF THESE SEAS.
GUAM, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS.
THE COCONUT-TREE, FRUIT, ETC.
THE TODDY, OR ARAK THAT DISTILS FROM IT; WITH OTHER USES THAT ARE MADE OF IT.
COIR CABLES.
THE LIME, OR CRAB-LEMON.
THE BREAD-FRUIT.
THE NATIVE INDIANS OF GUAM.
THEIR PROAS, A REMARKABLE SORT OF BOATS: AND OF THOSE USED IN THE EAST INDIES.
THE STATE OF GUAM: AND THE PROVISIONS WITH WHICH THEY WERE FURNISHED THERE.

CHAPTER 11.

THEY RESOLVE TO GO TO MINDANAO.
THEIR DEPARTURE FROM GUAM.
OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.
THE ISLE LUCONIA, AND ITS CHIEF TOWN AND PORT, MANILO, MANILA, OR MANILBO.
OF THE RICH TRADE WE MIGHT ESTABLISH WITH THESE ISLANDS.
ST. JOHN'S ISLAND.
THEY ARRIVE AT MINDANAO.
THE ISLAND DESCRIBED.
ITS FERTILITY.
THE LIBBY-TREES, AND THE SAGO MADE OF THEM.
THE PLANTAIN-TREE, FRUIT, LIQUOR, AND CLOTH.
A SMALLER PLANTAIN AT MINDANAO.
THE BANANA.
OF THE CLOVE-BARK, CLOVES AND NUTMEGS, AND THE METHODS TAKEN BY THE DUTCH TO MONOPOLIZE THE SPICES.
THE BETEL-NUT, AND AREK-TREE.
THE DURIAN, AND THE JACA-TREE AND FRUIT.
THE BEASTS OF MINDANAO.
CENTIPEDES OR FORTY-LEGS, A VENOMOUS INSECT, AND OTHERS.
THEIR FOWLS, FISH, ETC.
THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CLIMATE, WITH THE COURSE OF THE WINDS, TORNADOES, RAIN, AND TEMPER OF THE AIR THROUGHOUT THE YEAR.

CHAPTER 12.

OF THE INHABITANTS, AND CIVIL STATE OF THE ISLE OF MINDANAO.
THE MINDANAYANS, HILLANOONES, SOLOGUES, AND ALFOORES.
OF THE MINDANAYANS, PROPERLY SO CALLED; THEIR MANNERS AND HABITS.
THE HABITS AND MANNERS OF THEIR WOMEN.
A COMICAL CUSTOM AT MINDANAO.
THEIR HOUSES, THEIR DIET, AND WASHINGS.
THE LANGUAGES SPOKEN THERE, AND TRANSACTIONS WITH THE SPANIARDS.
THEIR FEAR OF THE DUTCH, AND SEEMING DESIRE OF THE ENGLISH.
THEIR HANDICRAFTS, AND PECULIAR SORT OF SMITH'S BELLOWS.
THEIR SHIPPING, COMMODITIES, AND TRADE.
THE MINDANAO AND MANILA TOBACCO.
A SORT OF LEPROSY THERE, AND OTHER DISTEMPERS.
THEIR MARRIAGES.
THE SULTAN OF MINDANAO, HIS POVERTY, POWER, FAMILY, ETC.
THE PROAS OR BOATS HERE.
RAJA LAUT THE GENERAL, BROTHER TO THE SULTAN, AND HIS FAMILY.
THEIR WAY OF FIGHTING.
THEIR RELIGION.
RAJA LAUT'S DEVOTION.
A CLOCK OR DRUM IN THEIR MOSQUES.
OF THEIR CIRCUMCISION, AND THE SOLEMNITY THEN USED.
OF THEIR OTHER RELIGIOUS OBSERVATIONS AND SUPERSTITIONS.
THEIR ABHORRENCE OF SWINES' FLESH, ETC.

CHAPTER 13.

THEIR COASTING ALONG THE ISLE OF MINDANAO, FROM A BAY ON THE EAST SIDE TO ANOTHER AT THE SOUTH-EAST END.
TORNADOES AND BOISTEROUS WEATHER.
THE SOUTH-EAST COAST, AND ITS SAVANNAH AND PLENTY OF DEER.
THEY COAST ALONG THE SOUTH SIDE TO THE RIVER OF MINDANAO CITY, AND ANCHOR THERE.
THE SULTAN'S BROTHER AND SON COME ABOARD THEM, AND INVITE THEM TO SETTLE THERE.
OF THE FEASIBLENESS AND PROBABLE ADVANTAGE OF SUCH A SETTLEMENT FROM THE NEIGHBOURING GOLD AND SPICE ISLANDS.
OF THE BEST WAY TO MINDANAO BY THE SOUTH SEA AND TERRA AUSTRALIS; AND OF AN ACCIDENTAL DISCOVERY THERE BY CAPTAIN DAVIS, AND A PROBABILITY OF A GREATER.
THE CAPACITY THEY WERE IN TO SETTLE HERE.
THE MINDANAYANS MEASURE THEIR SHIP.
CAPTAIN SWAN'S PRESENT TO THE SULTAN: HIS RECEPTION OF IT, AND AUDIENCE GIVEN TO CAPTAIN SWAN, WITH RAJA LAUT, THE SULTAN'S BROTHER'S ENTERTAINMENT OF HIM.
THE CONTENTS OF TWO ENGLISH LETTERS SHOWN THEM BY THE SULTAN OF MINDANAO.
OF THE COMMODITIES AND THE PUNISHMENTS THERE.
THE GENERAL'S CAUTION HOW TO DEMEAN THEMSELVES; AT HIS PERSUASION THEY LAY UP THEIR SHIPS IN THE RIVER.
THE MINDANAYANS' CARESSES.
THE GREAT RAINS AND FLOODS OF THE CITY.
THE MINDANAYANS HAVE CHINESE ACCOUNTANTS.
HOW THEIR WOMEN DANCE.
A STORY OF ONE JOHN THACKER.
THEIR BARK EATEN UP, AND THEIR SHIP ENDANGERED BY THE WORM.
OF THE WORMS HERE AND ELSEWHERE.
OF CAPTAIN SWAN.
RAJA LAUT, THE GENERAL'S DECEITFULNESS.
HUNTING WILD KINE.
THE PRODIGALITY OF SOME OF THE ENGLISH.
CAPTAIN SWAN TREATS WITH A YOUNG INDIAN OF A SPICE ISLAND.
A HUNTING-VOYAGE WITH THE GENERAL.
HIS PUNISHING A SERVANT OF HIS.
OF HIS WIVES AND WOMEN.
A SORT OF STRONG RICE-DRINK.
THE GENERAL'S FOUL DEALING AND EXACTIONS.
CAPTAIN SWAN'S UNEASINESS AND INDISCREET MANAGEMENT.
HIS MEN MUTINY.
OF A SNAKE TWISTING ABOUT ONE OF THEIR NECKS.
THE MAIN PART OF THE CREW GO AWAY WITH THE SHIP, LEAVING CAPTAIN SWAN AND SOME OF HIS MEN: SEVERAL OTHERS POISONED THERE.

CHAPTER 14.

THEY DEPART FROM THE RIVER OF MINDANAO.
OF THE TIME LOST OR GAINED IN SAILING ROUND THE WORLD: WITH A CAUTION TO SEAMEN, ABOUT THE ALLOWANCE THEY ARE TO TAKE FOR THE DIFFERENCE OF THE SUN'S DECLINATION.
THE SOUTH COAST OF MINDANAO.
CHAMBONGO TOWN AND HARBOUR, WITH ITS NEIGHBOURING KEYS.
GREEN TURTLE.
RUINS OF A SPANISH FORT.
THE WESTERMOST POINT OF MINDANAO.
TWO PROAS OF THE SOLOGUES LADEN FROM MANILA.
AN ISLE TO THE WEST OF SEBO.
WALKING-CANES.
ISLE OF BATS, VERY LARGE; AND NUMEROUS TURTLE AND MANATEE.
A DANGEROUS SHOAL.
THEY SAIL BY PANAY BELONGING TO THE SPANIARDS, AND OTHERS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.
ISLE OF MINDORO.
TWO BARKS TAKEN.
A FURTHER ACCOUNT OF THE ISLE LUCONIA, AND THE CITY AND HARBOUR OF MANILA.
THEY GO OFF PULO CONDORE TO LIE THERE.
THE SHOALS OF PRACEL, ETC.
PULO CONDORE.
THE TAR-TREE.
THE MANGO.
GRAPE-TREE.
THE WILD OR BASTARD-NUTMEG.
THEIR ANIMALS.
OF THE MIGRATION OF THE TURTLE FROM PLACE TO PLACE.
OF THE COMMODIOUS SITUATION OF PULO CONDORE; ITS WATER, AND ITS COCHIN-CHINESE INHABITANTS.
OF THE MALAYAN TONGUE.
THE CUSTOM OF PROSTITUTING THEIR WOMEN IN THESE COUNTRIES, AND IN GUINEA.
THE IDOLATRY HERE, AT TONQUIN, AND AMONG THE CHINESE SEAMEN, AND OF A PROCESSION AT FORT ST. GEORGE.
THEY REFIT THEIR SHIP.
TWO OF THEM DIE OF POISON THEY TOOK AT MINDANAO.
THEY TAKE IN WATER, AND A PILOT FOR THE BAY OF SIAM.
PULO UBI; AND POINT OF CAMBODIA.
TWO CAMBODIAN VESSELS.
ISLES IN THE BAY OF SIAM.
THE TIGHT VESSELS AND SEAMEN OF THE KINGDOM OF CHAMPA.
STORMS.
A CHINESE JUNK FROM PALIMBAM IN SUMATRA.
THEY COME AGAIN TO PULO CONDORE.
A BLOODY FRAY WITH A MALAYAN VESSEL.
THE SURGEON'S AND THE AUTHOR'S DESIRES OF LEAVING THEIR CREW.

CHAPTER 15.

THEY LEAVE PULO CONDORE, DESIGNING FOR MANILA, BUT ARE DRIVEN OFF FROM THENCE, AND FROM THE ISLE OF PRATAS, BY THE WINDS, AND BROUGHT UPON THE COAST OF CHINA.
ISLE OF ST. JOHN, ON THE COAST OF THE PROVINCE OF CANTON; ITS SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS, CHINA HOGS, ETC.
THE INHABITANTS; AND OF THE TARTARS FORCING THE CHINESE TO CUT OFF THEIR HAIR.
THEIR HABITS, AND THE LITTLE FEET OF THEIR WOMEN, CHINA-WARE, CHINA-ROOTS, TEA, ETC.
A VILLAGE AT ST. JOHN'S ISLAND, AND OF THEIR HUSBANDRY OF THEIR RICE.
A STORY OF A CHINESE PAGODA, OR IDOL-TEMPLE, AND IMAGE.
OF THE CHINA-JUNKS, AND THEIR RIGGING.
THEY LEAVE ST. JOHN'S AND THE COAST OF CHINA.
A MOST OUTRAGEOUS STORM.
CORPUS SANT, A LIGHT, OR METEOR APPEARING IN STORMS.
THE PISCADORES, OR FISHERS ISLANDS NEAR FORMOSA.
A TARTARIAN GARRISON, AND CHINESE TOWN ON ONE OF THESE ISLANDS.
THEY ANCHOR IN THE HARBOUR NEAR THE TARTARS' GARRISON, AND TREAT WITH THE GOVERNOR.
OF AMOY IN THE PROVINCE OF FOKIEN, AND MACAO, A CHINESE AND PORTUGUESE TOWN NEAR CANTON IN CHINA.
THE HABITS OF A TARTARIAN OFFICER AND HIS RETINUE.
THEIR PRESENTS, EXCELLENT BEEF.
SAM SHU, A SORT OF CHINESE ARAK, AND HOC SHU, A KIND OF CHINESE MUM, AND THE JARS IT IS BOTTLED IN.
OF THE ISLE OF FORMOSA, AND THE FIVE ISLANDS; TO WHICH THEY GAVE THE NAMES OF ORANGE, MONMOUTH, GRAFTON, BASHEE, AND GOAT ISLANDS, IN GENERAL, THE BASHEE ISLANDS.
A DIGRESSION CONCERNING THE DIFFERENT DEPTHS OF THE SEA NEAR HIGH OR LOW LANDS, SOIL, ETC., AS BEFORE.
THE SOIL, FRUITS AND ANIMALS OF THESE ISLANDS.
THE INHABITANTS AND THEIR CLOTHING.
RINGS OF A YELLOW METAL LIKE GOLD.
THEIR HOUSES BUILT ON REMARKABLE PRECIPICES.
THEIR BOATS AND EMPLOYMENTS.
THEIR FOOD, OF GOAT-SKINS, ENTRAILS, ETC.
PARCHED LOCUSTS.
BASHEE, OR SUGAR-CANE DRINK.
OF THEIR LANGUAGE AND ORIGIN.
LANCES AND BUFFALO COATS.
NO IDOLS, NOR CIVIL FORM OF GOVERNMENT.
A YOUNG MAN BURIED ALIVE BY THEM; SUPPOSED TO BE FOR THEFT.
THEIR WIVES AND CHILDREN, AND HUSBANDRY.
THEIR MANNERS, ENTERTAINMENTS, AND TRAFFIC.
OF THE SHIP'S FIRST INTERCOURSE WITH THESE PEOPLE, AND BARTERING WITH THEM.
THEIR COURSE AMONG THE ISLANDS; THEIR STAY THERE, AND PROVISION TO DEPART.
THEY ARE DRIVEN OFF BY A VIOLENT STORM, AND RETURN.
THE NATIVES' KINDNESS TO SIX OF THEM LEFT BEHIND.
THE CREW DISCOURAGED BY THOSE STORMS, QUIT THEIR DESIGN OF CRUISING OFF MANILA FOR THE ACAPULCO SHIP; AND IT IS RESOLVED TO FETCH A COMPASS TO CAPE COMORIN, AND SO FOR THE RED SEA.

CHAPTER 16.

THEY DEPART FROM THE BASHEE ISLANDS, AND PASSING BY SOME OTHERS, AND THE NORTH END OF LUCONIA.
ST. JOHN'S ISLE, AND OTHER OF THE PHILIPPINES.
THEY STOP AT THE TWO ISLES NEAR MINDANAO; WHERE THEY REFIT THEIR SHIP, AND MAKE A PUMP AFTER THE SPANISH FASHION.
BY THE YOUNG PRINCE OF THE SPICE ISLAND THEY HAVE NEWS OF CAPTAIN SWAN, AND HIS MEN, LEFT AT MINDANAO.
THE AUTHOR PROPOSES TO THE CREW TO RETURN TO HIM; BUT IN VAIN.
THE STORY OF HIS MURDER AT MINDANAO.
THE CLOVE ISLANDS.
TERNATE.
TIDORE, ETC.
THE ISLAND CELEBES, AND DUTCH TOWN OF MACASSAR.
THEY COAST ALONG THE EAST SIDE OF CELEBES, AND BETWEEN IT AND OTHER ISLANDS AND SHOALS, WITH GREAT DIFFICULTY.
SHY TURTLE.
VAST COCKLES.
A WILD VINE OF GREAT VIRTUE FOR SORES.
GREAT TREES; ONE EXCESSIVELY BIG.
BEACONS INSTEAD OF BUOYS ON THE SHOALS.
A SPOUT: A DESCRIPTION OF THEM, WITH A STORY OF ONE.
UNCERTAIN TORNADOES.
TURTLE.
THE ISLAND BOUTON, AND ITS CHIEF TOWN AND HARBOUR CALLASUSUNG.
THE INHABITANTS.
VISITS GIVEN AND RECEIVED BY THE SULTAN.
HIS DEVICE IN THE FLAG OF HIS PROA.
HIS GUARDS, HABIT AND CHILDREN.
THEIR COMMERCE.
THEIR DIFFERENT ESTEEM (AS THEY PRETEND) OF THE ENGLISH AND DUTCH.
MARITIME INDIANS SELL OTHERS FOR SLAVES.
THEIR RECEPTION IN THE TOWN.
A BOY WITH FOUR ROWS OF TEETH.
PARAKEETS.
COCKATOOS, A SORT OF WHITE PARROTS.
THEY PASS AMONG OTHER INHABITED ISLANDS.
OMBA, PENTARE, TIMOR, ETC.
SHOALS.
NEW HOLLAND; LAID DOWN TOO MUCH NORTHWARD.
ITS SOIL, AND DRAGON-TREES.
THE POOR WINKING INHABITANTS: THEIR FEATHERS, HABIT, FOOD, ARMS, ETC.
THE WAY OF FETCHING FIRE OUT OF WOOD.
THE INHABITANTS ON THE ISLANDS.
THEIR HABITATIONS, UNFITNESS FOR LABOUR, ETC.
THE GREAT TIDES HERE.
THEY DESIGN FOR THE ISLAND COCOS, AND CAPE COMORIN.

CHAPTER 17.

LEAVING NEW HOLLAND THEY PASS BY THE ISLAND COCOS, AND TOUCH AT ANOTHER WOODY ISLAND NEAR IT.
A LAND-ANIMAL LIKE LARGE CRAWFISH.
COCONUTS, FLOATING IN THE SEA.
THE ISLAND TRISTE BEARING COCONUTS, YET OVERFLOWN EVERY SPRING-TIDE.
THEY ANCHOR AT A SMALL ISLAND NEAR THAT OF NASSAU.
HOG ISLAND, AND OTHERS.
A PROA TAKEN BELONGING TO ACHIN.
NICOBAR ISLAND, AND THE REST CALLED BY THAT NAME.
AMBERGRIS, GOOD AND BAD.
THE MANNERS OF THE INHABITANTS OF THESE ISLANDS.
THEY ANCHOR AT NICOBAR ISLE.
ITS SITUATION, SOIL, AND PLEASANT MIXTURE OF ITS BAYS, TREES, ETC.
THE MELORY-TREE AND FRUIT, USED FOR BREAD.
THE NATIVES OF NICOBAR ISLAND, THEIR FORM, HABIT, LANGUAGE, HABITATIONS; NO FORM OF RELIGION OR GOVERNMENT: THEIR FOOD AND CANOES.
THEY CLEAN THE SHIP.
THE AUTHOR PROJECTS AND GETS LEAVE TO STAY ASHORE HERE, AND WITH HIM TWO ENGLISHMEN MORE, THE PORTUGUESE, AND FOUR MALAYANS OF ACHIN.
THEIR FIRST RENCOUNTERS WITH THE NATIVES.
OF THE COMMON TRADITIONS CONCERNING CANNIBALS, OR MAN-EATERS.
THEIR ENTERTAINMENT ASHORE.
THEY BUY A CANOE, TO TRANSPORT THEM OVER TO ACHIN; BUT OVERSET HER AT FIRST GOING OUT.
HAVING RECRUITED AND IMPROVED HER, THEY SET OUT AGAIN FOR THE EAST SIDE OF THE ISLAND.
THEY HAVE A WAR WITH THE ISLANDERS; BUT PEACE BEING REESTABLISHED, THEY LAY IN STORES, AND MAKE PREPARATIONS FOR THEIR VOYAGE.

CHAPTER 18.

THE AUTHOR, WITH SOME OTHERS, PUT TO SEA IN AN OPEN BOAT, DESIGNING FOR ACHIN.
THEIR ACCOMMODATIONS FOR THEIR VOYAGE.
CHANGE OF WEATHER; A HALO ABOUT THE SUN, AND A VIOLENT STORM.
THEIR GREAT DANGER AND DISTRESS.
CUDDA, A TOWN AND HARBOUR ON THE COAST OF MALACCA.
PULO WAY.
GOLDEN MOUNTAIN ON THE ISLE OF SUMATRA.
RIVER AND TOWN OF PASSANGE JONCA ON SUMATRA, NEAR DIAMOND POINT; WHERE THEY GO ASHORE VERY SICK, AND ARE KINDLY ENTERTAINED BY THE OROMKAY, AND INHABITANTS.
THEY GO THENCE TO ACHIN.
THE AUTHOR IS EXAMINED BEFORE THE SHABANDER; AND TAKES PHYSICK OF A MALAYAN DOCTOR.
HIS LONG ILLNESS.
HE SETS OUT TOWARDS NICOBAR AGAIN, BUT RETURNS SUDDENLY TO ACHIN ROAD.
HE MAKES SEVERAL VOYAGES THENCE, TO TONQUIN, TO MALACCA, TO FORT ST. GEORGE, AND TO BENCOOLEN, AN ENGLISH FACTORY ON SUMATRA.
AN ACCOUNT OF THE SHIP'S CREW 世界保健機構 SET THE AUTHOR ASHORE AT NICOBAR.
SOME GO TO TRANGAMBAR, A DANISH FORT ON COROMANDEL; OTHERS TO FORT ST. GEORGE; MANY TO THE MOGUL'S CAMP.
OF THE PEUNS; AND HOW JOHN OLIVER MADE HIMSELF A CAPTAIN.
CAPTAIN READ, WITH THE REST, HAVING PLUNDERED A RICH PORTUGUESE SHIP NEAR CEYLON, GOES TO MADAGASCAR, AND SHIPS HIMSELF OFF THENCE IN A NEW YORK SHIP.
THE TRAVERSES OF THE REST TO JOHANNA, ETC.
THEIR SHIP, THE CYGNET OF LONDON, NOW LIES SUNK IN AUGUSTIN BAY AT MADAGASCAR.
OF PRINCE JEOLY THE PAINTED MAN, WHOM THE AUTHOR BROUGHT WITH HIM TO ENGLAND, AND 世界保健機構 DIED AT OXFORD.
OF HIS COUNTRY THE ISLE OF MEANGIS; THE CLOVES THERE, ETC.
THE AUTHOR IS MADE GUNNER OF BENCOOLEN, BUT IS FORCED TO SLIP AWAY FROM THENCE TO COME FOR ENGLAND.

CHAPTER 19.

THE AUTHOR'S DEPARTURE FROM BENCOOLEN, ON BOARD THE DEFENCE, UNDER CAPTAIN HEATH.
OF A FIGHT BETWEEN SOME FRENCH MEN-OF-WAR FROM PONDICHERRY, AND SOME DUTCH SHIPS FROM PALLACAT, JOINED WITH SOME ENGLISH, IN SIGHT OF FORT ST. GEORGE.
OF THE BAD WATER TAKEN IN AT BENCOOLEN; AND THE STRANGE SICKNESS AND DEATH OF THE SEAMEN, SUPPOSED TO BE OCCASIONED THEREBY.
A SPRING AT BENCOOLEN RECOMMENDED.
THE GREAT EXIGENCIES ON BOARD.
A CONSULT HELD AND A PROPOSAL MADE TO GO TO JOHANNA.
A RESOLUTION TAKEN TO PROSECUTE THEIR VOYAGE TO THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE.
THE WIND FAVOURS THEM.
THE CAPTAIN'S CONDUCT.
THEY ARRIVE AT THE CAPE, AND ARE HELPED INTO HARBOUR BY THE DUTCH.
A DESCRIPTION OF THE CAPE, ITS PROSPECT, SOUNDINGS, TABLE MOUNTAIN, HARBOUR, SOIL, ETC., LARGE POMEGRANATES, AND GOOD WINES.
THE LAND-ANIMALS.
A VERY BEAUTIFUL KIND OF ONAGER, OR WILD ASS, STRIPED REGULARLY BLACK AND WHITE.
OSTRICHES.
FISH.
SEALS.
THE DUTCH FORT AND FACTORY.
THEIR FINE GARDEN.
THE TRAFFIC HERE.

CHAPTER 20.

OF THE NATURAL INHABITANTS OF THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE, THE HODMADODS OR HOTTENTOTS.
THEIR PERSONAGE, GARB, BESMEARING THEMSELVES; THEIR CLOTHING, HOUSES, FOOD, WAY OF LIVING, AND DANCING AT THE FULL OF THE MOON: COMPARED IN THOSE RESPECTS WITH OTHER NEGROES AND WILD INDIANS.
CAPTAIN HEATH REFRESHES HIS MEN AT THE CAPE, AND GETTING SOME MORE HANDS, DEPARTS IN COMPANY WITH THE JAMES AND MARY, AND THE JOSIAH.
A GREAT SWELLING SEA FROM SOUTH-WEST.
THEY ARRIVE AT ST. HELENA AND THERE MEET WITH THE PRINCESS ANN, HOMEWARD BOUND.
THE AIR, SITUATION, AND SOIL OF THAT ISLAND.
ITS FIRST DISCOVERY, AND CHANGE OF MASTERS SINCE.
HOW THE ENGLISH GOT IT.
ITS STRENGTH, TOWN, INHABITANTS, AND THE PRODUCT OF THEIR PLANTATIONS.
THE ST. HELENA MANATEE NO OTHER THAN THE SEA-LION.
OF THE ENGLISH WOMEN AT THIS ISLE.
THE ENGLISH SHIPS REFRESH THEIR MEN HERE; AND DEPART ALL TOGETHER.
OF THE DIFFERENT COURSES FROM HENCE TO ENGLAND.
THEIR COURSE AND ARRIVAL IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL AND THE DOWNS.

INDEX

ILLUSTRATIONS AND MAPS.

TITLE PAGE OF THE FIRST EDITION OF A NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.

WILLIAM DAMPIER. BY T. MURRAY. FROM THE PAINTING IN THE NATIONAL PORTRAIT GALLERY.

A PAGE OF DAMPIER'S JOURNAL (SLOANE MANUSCRIPTS 3236).

MAP OF THE WORLD.

MAP OF THE MIDDLE PART OF AMERICA.

MAP OF THE EAST INDIES.

MAP OF THE BASHEE ISLANDS, PULO CONDORE, ETC.

INDEX OF PERSONS, PLACES AND SHIPS MENTIONED IN A NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.

A NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY WILLIAM DAMPIER.

AN INTRODUCTION BY SIR ALBERT GRAY, K.C.B., K.C.

Dampier's New Voyage on its 出版（物） won 即座の success, and has ever since 持続するd its place in the 前線 階級 の中で the most 著名な 記録，記録的な／記録するs of 海上の adventure. It stands 中途の between the epic tales of Hakluyt and the 公式の／役人 narratives of the world voyages of Anson and Cook. As a 記録，記録的な／記録する of buccaneering it comes between the 拍手喝采する filibustering of Hawkins and Drake and the 非難するd piracy of the eighteenth century. The stories of the buccaneers are on the 瀬戸際 of romance. On an episode in the life of one of them Defoe 設立するd one of the 広大な／多数の／重要な romances of all time--"a most circumstantial and (a)手の込んだ／(v)詳述する 嘘（をつく）," as Leslie Stephen calls it, "for which we are all 感謝する." No buccaneer's story has had anything like the 人気 of Robinson Crusoe: but it may be 公式文書，認めるd that when Defoe essayed to tell lying tales of 著作権侵害者s such as Captain Avery, 設立するd on Dampier and other writers of fact, the その後の 人気 has been with the true story.

In his Preface Dampier 述べるs his 調書をとる／予約する as "composed of a mixed relation of places and 活動／戦闘s," a modest and 不十分な 指示，表示する物 which would hardly be 認可するd by the advertising 専門家s of the 現在の day. The relation of places was, in fact, an 広範囲にわたる 出資／貢献 to the geographical and ethnographical knowledge of his time. Nor does the description take count of the たびたび（訪れる） excursions in the realm of natural history which diversify the main story with 詳細（に述べる）d accounts of 熱帯の animals and 工場／植物s, not 高度に 科学の indeed, but 正確な for the most part and novel to his readers.

Another more general description is that of the 肩書を与える page, "A voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the world." A reader must 推定する from such a 肩書を与える some 意向 of circumnavigation at the start, and some continuous 起訴 of the 目的（とする）. Dampier, however, left England without any 目的 of 一連の会議、交渉／完成するing the globe, and 明らかに had no mind to do so until, after many years of devotion to other 追跡s, he 設立する himself already halfway home. His was no 選び出す／独身 voyage, rather the haphazard resultant of episodical voyages, some only of which were in the line of circumnavigation; in the course of these voyages he must have sailed in a dozen ships, apart from canoes and other boats. He 遂行するd the grand 小旅行する, however, a feat which in his time could with luck have been 達成するd in two years--it took him twelve and a half.

Many men who recount adventures in which they have borne a part 述べる fully their own 活動／戦闘s and 行為／行う; some with a particularity trying to the reader's patience. Dampier is not one of these. In the New Voyage, which began when he was 27, he says nothing of his previous life and throughout shows a too strict reserve in regard to his 株 in the events 関係のある. To enable readers of the 現在の 容積／容量 to form some 見積（る） of the man a sketch of his life, however 不十分な, has to be 供給するd. The 詳細（に述べる）s of his その後の career, which 含むs a second circumnavigation and two other 著名な voyages, would be hardly appropriate here. They will not be touched その上の than seems necessary for an appraisement of Dampier's 行為／行う and character.

LIFE BEFORE THE NEW VOYAGE.

All that is known of Dampier's 早期に life is told by himself in the first 一時期／支部 of his Voyages to the Bay of Campeachy. He was born in the earlier half of 1652, the son of a 農業者 at East Coker, 近づく Yeovil. His father died in 1662, and his mother in 1668. His parents had designed him for 商業の life; he was sent to school, probably at Yeovil, and …に出席するd the Latin class. On the death of his mother his 後見人s "took other 対策" and "除去するd me from the Latin school to learn 令状ing and arithmetic," in other words, transferred him to the Modern 味方する. A year or so later, having had "very 早期に inclinations to see the world," he was 見習い工d to the master of a Weymouth ship and with him made a voyage to フラン and then to Newfoundland. He was "pinched with the rigour of that 冷淡な 気候" and 始める，決める his heart on a long voyage in summer seas. Soon after his return to London his chance （機の）カム and, now 19 years of age, he 乗る，着手するd on a voyage to Bantam, serving before the mast. Returning home 早期に in 1672, he spent the 残り／休憩（する） of the year with his brother in Somersetshire.

He soon tired of home life and the Second Dutch War was now 進行中で. Dampier enlisted and fought under Sir Edward Spragge in his first two 約束／交戦s. A day or two before the third, in which Sir Edward was killed, he fell sick and after a long illness went home to his brother. There a 隣人ing gentleman, 陸軍大佐 Hillier, made him an 申し込む／申し出 of 雇用 in the 管理／経営 of his 農園 in Jamaica under a Mr. Whalley, and he 始める，決める 前へ／外へ in the Content of London, working his passage as a 船員, under 協定 for his 発射する／解雇する on arrival. This he みなすd necessary lest he should be "trepanned and sold as a servant after my arrival in Jamaica." For six months he worked with Mr. Whalley on the 農園 "16-Mile walk," i.e. from Spanish Town: then took service under Captain Heming on his 農園 at St. Ann's, in the north of the island. He soon left an 雇用 in which, as he says, he was 明確に out of his element, and spent some months in 貿易（する）ing 巡航するs 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the island, during which he "（機の）カム 熟知させるd with all the ports and bays about Jamaica and with their 製造（する）s, as also with the 利益 of the land and sea-勝利，勝つd." He thus 早期に began his habits of の近くに 観察 of men and nature. Now also began his practice of keeping a 定期刊行物, which he had omitted in his voyage to Bantam.

Between 1675 and 1678 Dampier spent about two years in cutting and 負担ing スピードを出す／記録につける-支持を得ようと努めるd on the Bay of Campeachy, an 占領／職業 which he seemed to have enjoyed. The 抵抗 of Spain to foreign 侵入占拠 was becoming feeble, and Dampier reckons there were 270 Englishmen engaged in the スピードを出す／記録につける-支持を得ようと努めるd 貿易（する）. "It is not my 商売／仕事," he 追加するs, "to 決定する how far we might have a 権利 of cutting 支持を得ようと努めるd there." He did not, however, get rich on it, and at length in straightened circumstances was constrained to take a turn with some privateers along the 湾 as far as Vera Cruz. For a short time he 再開するd work at Campeachy, thence returning to Jamaica and 支援する to London (August 1678). He gave himself only a six months' leave, during which he married Judith* ----, from the 世帯 of the Duke of Grafton (see below). It does not appear that they had any children, and nothing more is known of the wife till some 25 years later. He had to work for his living and now 事業／計画（する）d another 探検隊／遠征隊 to Campeachy--"but it 証明するd to be a voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the world."

(*Footnote. Her Christian 指名する appears in a codicil to a 取り消すd will of 1703.)

HIS FIRST CIRCUMNAVIGATION.*

(*Footnote. The に引き続いて writers were comrades of Dampier in parts of the voyage. The extent to which they are more or いっそう少なく synoptical is shown by 言及／関連 to the 一時期／支部s of this 調書をとる／予約する. (1) Basil Ringrose, Part 4 of the History of the Buccaneers, Sloane Manuscripts 3820 (Dampier, Introduction and 一時期／支部s 1 to 3); (2) Lionel Wafer, New Voyage and Description, etc., 1699 (Dampier, Introduction and 一時期／支部s 1 to 3); (3) William Ambrosia Cowley, Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World, 1699 (Dampier 一時期／支部s 4 to 5); (4) Bartholomew Sharp, Voyages and Adventures, in the Dampier Voyages, 1727, Sloane Manuscripts 45, 46B (Dampier, Introduction and 一時期／支部s 1 to 3); (5) John Cox, An account of our 訴訟／進行s, etc., Sloane Manuscripts 49 (Dampier, 一時期／支部s 1 to 3).)

As has been 公式文書，認めるd the circumnavigation was a haphazard 小旅行する interrupted by digressions as 偶発の and whimsical as some in the Autobiography of Tristram Shandy. For the convenience of the reader I have divided the whole into eight 行う／開催する／段階s, each of which is a more or いっそう少なく separate 巡航する, defined by change of direction, ship or captain.

FIRST STAGE.

Dampier 始める，決める out on the memorable adventures 記録，記録的な／記録するd in the 現在の 容積／容量 in an 早期に month of 1679, 乗る，着手するing as a 乗客 in the Loyal Merchant of London, Captain Knapman. On arrival in Jamaica in April he spent the 残りの人，物 of the year there. Having bought a small 広い地所 in Dorsetshire, he was 近づく returning home to 完全にする the 購入（する） when Mr. Hobby 招待するd him to join in a 貿易（する）ing voyage to the Moskito shore, and he "sent the 令状ing of my new 購入（する）" to England by the 手渡すs of friends. As 運命／宿命 would have it Mr. Hobby put into Negril Bay at the west end of Jamaica, where a 騎兵大隊 of buccaneers was 組み立てる／集結するd under Captains John Coxon, Sawkins, Bartholomew Sharp, and other worthies. The 誘惑 which led many an honest man to the buccaneering life could not be resisted. "Mr. Hobby's men all left him to go with them upon an 探検隊／遠征隊 they had contrived, leaving not one with him beside myself." After three or four days Dampier went too, and no more is heard of Mr. Hobby.

BUCCANEERING.

I 許す myself at this point, に引き続いて Shandean precedent, to interpose a digression on buccaneering. Under this polite West Indian synonym for piracy, the profession was at the zenith of its 繁栄 when Dampier joined in: it had acquired indeed some 手段 of respectability. Some knowledge of its history in the West Indies, and of the 現在の 明言する／公表する of public opinion in regard to it, is needed for understanding how a man of Dampier's character, and many like him, （機の）カム to be associated with it, untroubled by more than 時折の twinges of 良心.

Earlier in the century the hunters of Hispaniola were 行うing a not unrighteous 戦争 against Spanish tyranny. From the boucans, でっちあげる，人を罪に陥れるs or 障害物s, on which their meat was roasted, they got the 指名する of buccaneers. They 得るd the 援助 of French and English adventurers, and the war was 延長するd to the sea. With the 即位 of more and more 無謀な spirits from Europe whose only 反対する was booty, the 地元の justification was lost, and the buccaneers, whose 偉業／利用するs are told by Esquemeling, Dampier and Burney, and ever since followed with zest and sympathy by boys young and old (含むing Charles Kingsley) were for the most part 著作権侵害者s.*

(*Footnote. Some had （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s of さまざまな 輸入する from French or English 当局. Thus Captain Swan had one from the Duke of York, neither to give offence to the Spaniards nor to receive any affront from them. With this Swan, under 嘆願 of such an affront, "thought he had a lawful （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限 of his own to 権利 himself." Dampier had not seen the French （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s, but heard that they were "to fish, fowl, and 追跡（する）," and were 名目上 限定するd to Hispaniola: the French, にもかかわらず, "make them a pretence for a general 荒廃させる in any part of America, by sea or land." (See below.) Captain Cook 後継するd to one of these by 権利 of 掴むing the French Captain Tristian's bark! Most of the buccaneers, however, did not trouble about （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s. In his 脅すing letter to the 大統領，／社長 of パナマ, Captain Sawkins 約束d to visit that city when his 軍隊 was ready, 宣言するing, in language 罰金 enough to glorify a better 原因（となる）, that he would "bring our （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s on the muzzles of our guns, at which time he should read them as plain as the 炎上 of gunpowder could make them" (Ringrose, History of the Buccaneers Part 4 一時期／支部 8).)

The glamour which surrounds the buccaneers can be partly accounted for. Their 企業s have seemed to be a 延長／続編 of those of Hawkins and Drake, the 国家の heroes of the 先行する century, and thus worthy of a 手段 of their 賞賛する.*

(*Footnote. "The 偉業／利用するs of Drake and Raleigh were imitated, upon a smaller 規模 indeed, but with 平等に desperate valour, by small 禁止（する）d of 著作権侵害者s, gathered from all nations, but 主として French and English." Sir W. Scott Rokeby, Canto 1 公式文書，認める D). The 規模 was in fact much larger.)

True, the enemy in both 事例／患者s was Spain, and in Dampier's time, にもかかわらず the friendly 政策 of James I and Charles I, Spain was still regarded as the 国家の 敵. Spanish cruelties to the natives and to honest 仲買人s whom they 拘留するd rankled in the hearts of Englishmen. There was, however, no 国家の or 宗教的な enthusiasm behind the buccaneers, whose 操作／手術s had a different origin and were 扇動するd 単独で by 動機s of plunder. Mr. Andrew Lang's description of the buccaneers* as "the most hideously ruthless miscreants that ever 不名誉d the earth and the sea" is true enough of the leaders of the 先行する １０年間s, such as L'Olonnois (French) Bartholomew Portuquez, Roche Braziliano (Dutch) and we may 追加する Henry Morgan (Welsh). Even these villains had their several accounts for 解決／入植地 with the Spaniards. L'Olonnois had been kidnapped and sold as a slave; Morgan, too, had been sold as a slave; Esquemeling, their historian, had been beaten, 拷問d and nearly 餓死するd to death. The captains whom Dampier served were of a more humane stamp. The change may be seen by a comparison of the 初めの Esquemeling with the 補足（する） of Ringrose and with the stories of Dampier and the others of his time. Though engaged in a lawless war the later captains 行為／行うd it more によれば the 存在するing 法律s of war, and they 扱う／治療するd their Spanish enemies with 尊敬（する）・点 and 時折の chivalry. As for the men 構成するing the 乗組員s they were of no worse class than those who 乗組員を乗せた the ships of war or merchantmen of the time. They were 簡単に children of fortune, some of good behaviour, some vicious and drunken, a few 供給するd with education,** many with 非，不，無, like the mixed companies who some 60 or 70 years ago （人が）群がるd to the goldfields of Australia and California.

(*Footnote. Essays in Little and Preface to Esquemeling's History of the Buccaneers Broadway Translations 1893.)

(**Footnote. Ringrose, who was one of these, tells us of another, Richard Gopson, who died on the return 旅行 across the Isthmus. He had been 見習い工 to a druggist in London but "was an ingenious man and a good scholar, and had with him a Greek Testament which he frequently read, and would translate ex tempore into English to such of the company as were 性質の／したい気がして to hear him.")

As the 企業s of the buccaneers were lawless, so were the relations of the captains and 乗組員s. Readers of this 容積／容量 will 公式文書，認める the fitful 忠誠 of the captains to the 指揮官-in-長，指導者, and of the 乗組員s to the captains. Dissensions led to たびたび（訪れる） 反乱（を起こす）s and desertions: these however seem to have been 扱う／治療するd as no more 異常な than changes of the 天候. They were settled without 暴力／激しさ, and in most 事例／患者s 友好的に, the men に引き続いて the captains they liked best.

The troubles of Spanish America are rightly traced to the Bull of the Borgia ローマ法王 who divided the Spanish and Portuguese （人命などを）奪う，主張するs of conquest by lines of longitude, and to the 排除的 商業の 政策 based on that award. The filibustering of the Elizabethan seamen was England's 抗議する against the preposterous （人命などを）奪う，主張する 設立するd on a papal 法令, not 許可／制裁d by more than sparse 解決／入植地s on the 広大な coasts of two continents. As Sir Charles Lucas says, the Spaniards "（人命などを）奪う，主張するd rather than 所有するd, and did little either in conquest or 解決／入植地."*

(*Footnote. Historical 地理学 of the British 植民地s West Indies page 296.)

England's 抗議する brought 前へ／外へ the Spanish Armada; its 破壊, however, did not produce a 解決／入植地 of the 国際情勢 in America. More than 80 years later the 操作／手術s of the buccaneers, 侮辱ing to Spain and cruelly destructive of Spanish life and 所有物／資産／財産, impossible as they were for the English 政府 to defend, led to the 結論 of the 条約 of 1670. It was a one-味方するd 協定 which 保護するd for England little more than Jamaica, while for Spain the whole of her 解決／入植地s on both 味方するs of America were to be 免疫の. Exemplifying the foolish ideas of the time in regard to 商業の 政策 it 提案するd to 安全な・保証する not 相互の but 排除的 貿易（する）. It 供給するd that the 支配するs of the confederates "shall 棄権する and forbear to sail and 貿易（する） in the ports and 港／避難所s which have 要塞s, 城s, magazines, or 倉庫／問屋s, and in all places whatever 所有するd by the other party in the West Indies." The 知事s of Jamaica did what they could, without 十分な 力／強力にする to their 肘s, to carry the 条約 into 影響. Some buccaneers were punished, but when Dampier, nine years later, （機の）カム on the scene, the game was more popular than ever and attracted many hundreds of adventurers from both England and フラン. At this time the French were more 占領するd with 伸び（る）ing a 地盤 in Hispaniola, and thus most of the sea work "on the account," such was the euphemism, was done by the English.*

(*Footnote. Nulli melius piraticum exercant quam Angli, says Scaliger.)

貿易（する）ing between nations is a natural propensity, and an 排除的 貿易協定 was one 確かな to be resented and 無視（する）d. The Spaniards on their 味方する did little to 緩和する the 状況／情勢.* Englishmen and Frenchmen when they fell into their 力／強力にする were put to death or 拘留するd with barbarous severities.** They did not on all occasions feel bound to keep their word with 異端者s. Their oppressive 治療 of the natives led many tribes to give active or covert 援助 to the 侵入者s. Although at times, as we shall see, they fought with their old valour, in most 事例／患者s they lived in a 明言する／公表する of terror, vacated their towns at the first 強襲，強姦, and were held in contempt by the English freebooters.

(*Footnote. Sir Henry Morgan does, however, in 1680 (Cal SP America and West Indies) について言及する the arrival at Port 王室の of a "good English merchantman" which had been 貿易（する）ing with the Spaniards on the Main. She 報告（する）／憶測d a friendly 歓迎会 of herself, but 広大な／多数の／重要な desolation of the 海上の towns through the たびたび（訪れる） 解雇（する）ing of the privateers.)

(**Footnote. See despatch of sir Thomas Lynch 26 July 1683 in Cal SP America and West Indies.)

Public opinion at home was not 本気で 逆の to the buccaneers.* Morgan, the most 悪名高い professor of the （手先の）技術, after 存在 alternately （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限d and 起訴するd as a privateer, was knighted and 任命するd 中尉／大尉／警部補-知事 of Jamaica. Some of Dampier's associates, 起訴するd on their return to England on 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金s of piracy, were acquitted or 解放するd after short 監禁，拘置. At this time, when 窃盗罪 of a sheep or ass was 罰せられるべき with death, the 刑罰，罰則 of piracy, under the 法令 28 Henry VIII c 15, unless …を伴ってd by 殺人, was only 罰金 and 監禁，拘置.** James II had 布告するd a 容赦 for buccaneers, and the open 自白 of piracy in Ringrose's and Dampier's narratives created little or no danger of 起訴: there was evidently no 恐れる even of 逆の public 批評. In Dampier's 事例／患者 his 調書をとる／予約する opened for him the door of 雇用 under 政府.

(*Footnote. The New Englanders heartily supported buccaneering and throve on it. On 25 August 1684 知事 Cranfield 記録，記録的な／記録するs the arrival at Boston of a French privateer of 35 guns. When she was sighted the Bostonians sent a messenger and a 操縦する to 軍用車隊 her into port in 反抗 of the King's 布告／宣言, which they tore 負かす／撃墜する. He 追加するs that the 著作権侵害者s were likely to leave the greatest part of their booty behind them (量ing to 700 続けざまに猛撃するs a man) as they had bought up most of the choice goods in Boston. Cal SP America and West Indies. Much その上の 証拠 is 供給（する）d by the 公式の／役人 correspondence.)

(**Footnote. Under the date 20 May 1680 the 会議 of Jamaica wrote to the commissioners of 貿易（する） and 農園s of the "detestable depredations of some of our nation (who pass for inhabitants of Jamaica) under colour of French （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s," referring to them as "ravenous vermin." They 示唆するd that piracy should be punished as 重罪 without 利益 of clergy.)

SECOND STAGE.

The 探検隊／遠征隊 contrived by the 著作権侵害者 leaders was an attack on Portobello, the rich isthmus city 近づく the 場所／位置 of the famous Nombre de Dios.*

(*Footnote. The 逮捕（する） of Portobello is 述べるd in the History of the Buccaneers Part 3 一時期／支部 12. The 詳細（に述べる）s of other events, すぐに summarised by Dampier in his 一時期／支部 1, are 供給（する）d by Basil Ringrose in Part 4 of that History. For this first period my quotations are from Ringrose. Another account of this 行う／開催する／段階 of Dampier's voyage is given by Lionel Wafer, the 外科医, in his New Voyage and Description, who was with him in one ship or another till 25 August 1685 when Davis and Swan parted company (see 一時期／支部 8). Wafer's 調書をとる／予約する was not published till after Dampier's in 1699.)

The buccaneer 軍隊 consisted of nine ships, two of them French, and 477 men. The place was easily taken and, though it had been 解雇（する）d by Morgan only 11 years ago, the booty gave a （株主への）配当 of 40 続けざまに猛撃するs per man. A 提案 was now made, on the instigation of friendly Indians, to march across the Isthmus to the city of Santa Maria. The French broke off: they "were not willing to go to パナマ, 宣言するing themselves 一般に against a long march by land." The 軍隊 was thus 減ずるd by two ships and 111 men. Two of the captains with a party of seamen were left "to guard our ships in our absence with which we ーするつもりであるd to return home." The expeditionary 軍隊 of 331 men landed and marched 今後 in seven companies carrying 旗s of さまざまな colours; "all or most of them were 武装した with fusee, ピストル and hanger." The adventurous march with this trivial 軍備 was 完全にするd in ten days: Santa Maria was taken with no loss of men but produced little or no booty. The 軍隊, which had been 供給するd by the Indians with 35 canoes, then got separated and one party appeared off パナマ at the island of Perico, where were 錨，総合司会者d "five 広大な／多数の／重要な ships and three pretty big barks." The buccaneers numbered only 68 men in five canoes: they にもかかわらず attacked and took the barks after a desperate 抵抗. An 海軍大将 was killed and in one of the barks the Spaniards lost 61 out of 86 men: all but eight of the 残り／休憩（する） were 負傷させるd. The buccaneers' 死傷者s were 18 killed and 22 負傷させるd. It was then 設立する that the five ships were 砂漠d, their 乗組員s having been transferred to man the barks; the biggest was La Santissima Trinidad of 400 トンs. The freebooters 設立する themselves in 所有／入手 of more than 十分な shipping to carry them wither they would. The 活動／戦闘, however, occasioned a second 違反 in the brotherhood. Captain Coxon, the 指揮官-in-長，指導者, was 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金d with backwardness in the 約束／交戦, and some "sticked not to defame or brand him with the 公式文書，認める of cowardice." Coxon thereupon withdrew from the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い taking 70 men with him, and recrossed the Isthmus.* The next adventure, an attack on Puebla Nova, was a grievous 失敗, costing the death of Captain Sawkins, the new 指揮官-in-長，指導者, "a man as stout as could be, and beloved above any other that ever we had amongst us, as he 井戸／弁護士席 deserved."** A 少数，小数派, 63 in number, who so lamented Sawkins that they could not serve his 後継者 Sharp, 反乱（を起こす）d and left for the Isthmus in an old ship 割り当てるd to them. They had hardly gone when another 反乱（を起こす） broke out. The men on one of the prizes to which Captain Edmund Cook was 任命するd by Sharp 辞退するd to serve under him: Cook joined Sharp's ship and Captain Cox took over the 命令（する） of the mutinous 乗組員, with the status "as it were of 副／悪徳行為-海軍大将."

(*Footnote. Coxon's その後の career is told by Mr. Masefield (容積／容量 1 page 531). He spent the 残り／休憩（する） of his life in the Caribbean Sea, alternately in piracy and as a 政府 スパイ／執行官 in the 鎮圧 of piracy. Latterly he went 貿易（する）ing with the Moskito Indians and died の中で them in 1688.)

(**Footnote. So wrote Ringrose (Sloane Manuscripts 3820). in his published story (History of the Buccaneers Part 4) the passage appears thus: "a man who was as valiant and 勇敢な as any could be, and likewise, next to Captain Sharp, the best beloved of our company or the most part thereof." The discrepancy is thus accounted for. Ringrose returned to England in 1682 and sailed again with Captain Swan in October 1683. in his absence his manuscript was doctored by Sharp, or his shipmate 切り開く／タクシー／不正アクセス, before its 出版（物） in 1685 in the 補足（する） to the History. Sharp perhaps 心配するd that Ringrose would never return to confute him; and he did not, 存在 killed in Mexico, as we shall see, in February 1686.)

Off Guayaquil they 逮捕（する）d a bark which they sank after 取って代わるing from her their 船の索具 損失d in the 遭遇（する）. A designed attack on Arica failed 借りがあるing to 激しい 天候 which 妨げるd a 上陸 from the boats. With little difficulty they next 逮捕（する）d the city of La Serena, an 偉業／利用する not even について言及するd by Dampier, but 述べるd with much zest by Ringrose. The city had no いっそう少なく than seven 広大な／多数の／重要な churches and each had its 組織／臓器. The houses had charming gardens and orchards "同様に and as neatly furnished as those in England, producing strawberries as big as walnuts and very delicious to the taste." Sad to relate, 借りがあるing to the Spaniards' 失敗 to 支払う／賃金 the 95,000 pieces-of-eight 需要・要求するd as 身代金, this agreeable city was 燃やすd to the ground.

At Juan Fernandez, the most southerly point of the 巡航する, another 反乱（を起こす） broke out. によれば Ringrose there was a 分割 of opinion, some for going home by way of the 海峡s of Magellan, others for a その上の 巡航する on the 太平洋の coast. Sharp was 退位させる／宣誓証言するd from his 命令（する） in favour of Watling. The ships left the island on 14 January 1681, the 乗組員s in smouldering discontent. The leaders seem to have thought that the best chance of harmony lay in carrying out a successful クーデター: a second attack on Arica was accordingly 解決するd upon. At Iquique Island 近づく that town （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） for the 強襲，強姦 was 需要・要求するd from four 囚人s: that given by one old mestizo was あわてて believed to be 誤った, and he was summarily 発射. This 残虐な 行為／法令／行動する raised その上の dissension and Captain Sharp, in one of his apocryphal 新規加入s to Ringrose's text, 明言する／公表するs that, after a vain 抗議する, he, Pilate-fashion, "took water and washed his 手渡すs 説, 'Gentlemen, I am （疑いを）晴らす of the 血 of this old man: and I will 令状 you a hot day for this piece of cruelty whenever we come to fight at Arica!'" Ringrose says not a word of this, nor does Sharp himself in his own 定期刊行物: he probably invented the 嘘（をつく） because the attack on Arica in fact turned out a 血まみれの and profitless 事件／事情／状勢. Captain Watling and both quartermasters--28 men in all--were killed; 18 others 猛烈に 負傷させるd, and some, 含むing three 外科医s who were drinking instead of fighting or …に出席するing the 負傷させるd, were taken 囚人s. The town was 嵐／襲撃するd with 無謀な courage and half taken against a stubborn defence. The Spaniards with superior numbers 反対する-attacked again and again and finally drove the marauders 支援する to their ships.*

(*Footnote. Cox せいにするs the 失敗 at Arica to "having landed on Sunday 30 January, it 存在 the 周年記念日 of King Charles the First and a 致命的な day for the English to engage on.")

広大な／多数の／重要な 期待s were thus disappointed, Arica 存在 the port from which "is fetched all the plate that is carried to Lima, the 長，率いる city of Peru." On the death of Watling Sharp 再開するd the 命令（する）. Ringrose (as emended by Sharp himself) eulogises this captain as "a man of undaunted courage and of an excellent 行為／行う," while によれば Dampier the company were "not 満足させるd either with his courage or behaviour." The opinion of the 乗組員s was put to the 実験（する） by 投票（する）ing at the island of Plata. The 大多数, 含むing Ringrose, went for Sharp: the 少数，小数派 of 44, 含むing Dampier and Wafer,* 脱退するd. At this point Dampier takes up the chronicle, but we part from Ringrose with 悔いる.**

(*Footnote. Wafer says: "I was of Mr. Dampier's 味方する in that 事柄 and chose to go 支援する to the Isthmus rather than stay under a captain in whom we experienced neither courage nor 行為／行う." It need not be inferred from this that Dampier took a lead in the 反乱（を起こす）. Wafer's 調書をとる／予約する, published two years later, was 演説（する）／住所d to readers 推定では 熟知させるd with Dampier's.)

(**Footnote. His spirited and admirably written narrative shows him to have been a man of education, 証言，証人／目撃する that on an 緊急 he was able to make 転換 with Latin for talk with a Spaniard. He went home with Captain Sharp and wrote his story which forms Part 4 of the History of the Buccaneers. He （機の）カム out again with Captain Cook to Virginia, where Dampier joined them. He was killed in an 待ち伏せ／迎撃する 近づく Santa Pecaque, in Mexico, February 1686 (see below).)

Now that Dampier tells his story in 詳細（に述べる） いっそう少なく commentary is needed. In 一時期／支部s 1 and 3 he has much to say about the friendly Moskito Indians and their wonderful 技術 in striking fish, 海がめ and manatees. On this account they were "esteemed and coveted by all privateers," and some of them were always part of the ships' complements in the 巡航するs on both 味方するs of the Isthmus: they are the men to whom Dampier frequently 言及するs as "strikers." In his account of the laborious 旅行 of 23 days over the Isthmus (一時期／支部 2)--the outward crossing had taken them only ten--the reader will 特に 公式文書，認める how he 保存するd his 定期刊行物 in a 共同の of bamboo, waxed at both ends. The exhausted party were taken on board Captain Tristian's ship on 24 May 1681,* and here is 結論するd the second 行う／開催する／段階 of the voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the world. Since Portobello the 探検隊／遠征隊 had been a 失敗 in 逮捕（する） of plate. Other booty had to be discarded for want of 中立の ports for its realisation, and Dampier's party brought 支援する little or nothing. It was about 2 1/2 years since he had left London.

(*Footnote. Later they were there joined by Lionel Wafer, the 外科医, who had been 厳しく 負傷させるd by an 爆発 of 砕く during the 輸送, and was left with other stragglers in the 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金 of friendly Indians, with whom he remained some five months. Wafer, by 推論する／理由 of his 医療の 技術, lived "in 広大な／多数の／重要な splendour and repute," and was so "adored" by his hosts that they tattooed him "in yellow, red, and blue, very 有望な and lovely." When he 再結合させるd his friends at La Sound's 重要な he was at first not recognised, and then with hilarity.)

Dampier is so reticent about himself that it is difficult to hazard an opinion as to the part he took in this or any other buccaneering 巡航する. There is nothing to go upon: throughout the voyages of this 容積／容量 he never 命令（する）d a ship nor an 探検隊／遠征隊: he does not tell us how he was 率d, or what part he took in 事件／事情／状勢s--he gave his advice occasionally, and joined in the 反乱（を起こす） at Plata, intimating, however, that he took no active 株 in it. Nor does he appear to have been much in the 最前部 of 戦う／戦い, as Ringrose was. The only friendship he seems to have formed was with Ringrose, whom he called friend and "worthy consort." He is not even について言及するd by Sharp, Cowley, or Cox. His 態度 に向かって the wild men with whom he associated was one of aloofness. His 長，指導者 関心 was the 熟考する／考慮する of 地理学, the 勝利，勝つd and tides, the 工場／植物s and animals, and keeping his 定期刊行物 地位，任命するd up.

THIRD STAGE.

From Captain Tristian Dampier was transferred to another Frenchman, Captain Archemboe (probably Archambaut) but soon grew "疲れた／うんざりした of living with the French." Their sailors were "the saddest creatures that ever I was の中で." By 主張 he compelled Captain Wright to 追加する him with other English to his 乗組員. The 巡航する in the Caribbean Sea 述べるd in 一時期／支部 3, though it brought the 著作権侵害者s little 利益（をあげる）, gave Dampier plenty of time for his favourite 熟考する／考慮するs and 観察s. He was at the island of Aves little more than a year after the 災害 to Count d'Estree's (n)艦隊／(a)素早い (February 1681) which he 述べるs from hearsay. Off the Caracas coast he and 20 others took one of the ships and their 株 of the spoil and sailed off to Virginia. He does not 明示する the 原因（となる） of the defection or the 意向 in choosing that 目的地. Of his 13 months' stay there he says no more than that he fell into troubles of some sort.

FOURTH STAGE.

In August 1683 he again joins the buccaneers in the 復讐, Captain Cook. The 巡航する was a long one 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the Horn and up the 太平洋の coast as 述べるd in 一時期／支部s 4 to 9. The course taken was to the Cape Verde Islands and Sierra Leone. Here the buccaneers boarded and took a 罰金 Danish 大型船, the Bachelor's Delight, 36 guns, to which Cook transferred his 乗組員. It was an 行為／法令／行動する of piracy so 極悪の, committed against a friendly nation, without such 影をつくる／尾行する of excuse as was みなすd to 正当化する 害（を与える）s to Spain, that Dampier is evidently ashamed to について言及する it. Cowley relates the 出来事/事件 without compunction. Dampier sailed with Cook till his death at Cape Blanco in June 1684, thereafter with his 後継者, Captain Davis. On the Bachelor's Delight he 設立する "the men more under 命令（する） than I have ever seen privateers, yet I could not 推定する／予想する to find them at a minute's call." This is the only 指示，表示する物 Dampier gives of his 率ing and Mr. Masefield 示唆するs with some probability that he was second master or master's mate under Ambrosia Cowley.* Cook was joined (March 1684) by Captain Eaton in the Nicholas, and in October, at Plata, by Captain Swan in the Cygnet.

(*Footnote. William Ambrosia Cowley was master and 操縦する of the 復讐 and sailed in her and the Bachelor's Delight until the parting of Captains Davis and Eaton (September 1684). He joined Eaton and reached England by way of the East Indies in October 1686, having 砂漠d Eaton at the Philippines. He published his narrative Captain Cowley's Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World in 1699 (see その上の Masefield 容積／容量 1 page 532). The 調書をとる／予約する is 利益／興味ing on some points of 詳細（に述べる）, but untrustworthy.)

Swan's 事例／患者 was a pitiful one: the Cygnet, fitted out by London merchants for lawful 貿易（する）, had met Captain Peter Harris and a party of buccaneers at Nicoya with a かなりの booty in 手渡す. Swan's men, with whom he had already had difficulties at the 海峡s, were now seduced, and he was compelled to turn 著作権侵害者. He was no backslider, however--it was by his order that Payta was 燃やすd to the ground in default of 身代金 (一時期／支部 6). にもかかわらず his deflection from the path of virtue and 義務 重さを計るd ひどく on his mind. In a letter from パナマ to a friend, 引用するd by Mr. Masefield, he asks him to 保証する his 雇用者s that "I do all I can to 保存する their 利益／興味s and that what I do now I could in no wise 妨げる. So 願望（する） them to do what they can with the King for me, for as soon as I can I shall 配達する myself to the King's 司法（官）." His 見解（をとる） now was that if the buccaneers were 支援するd by the 政府 "the King might make this whole kingdom of Peru 支流 to him in two years' time." As he wrote the attack on the Lima (n)艦隊／(a)素早い was 差し迫った, and he 追加するs in a message to his wife, "I shall, with God's help, do things which (were it with my Prince's leave) would make her a lady: but now I cannot tell but it may bring me to a halter." His end is told in 一時期／支部 16.

The 最高潮 of this 巡航する was to have been the 逮捕（する） of the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い carrying treasure from Lima to パナマ. Davis and Swan had now (May 1685) been joined by Captains Townley and Harris, and by a French 次第で変わる／派遣部隊 under Captain Gronet. The growth of the piratical movement is seen in the numbers given by Dampier. The buccaneers had ten sail (six ships and four tenders, etc.) carrying no いっそう少なく than 960 men. They had, however, only 52 guns, these 存在 in Davis's and Swan's ships. The Spaniards on the other 手渡す had 14 sail, six of them "of good 軍隊," with 174 guns in all. Everything went against the 著作権侵害者s. While they had the 天候-gage Gronet failed them: the Spaniards by a ruse 得るd the 天候-gage, and a running fight 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the bay 続いて起こるd, from which the 加害者s were glad to escape. In the event of success there would have been no booty of plate, that having been already landed at Lavelia in 見解（をとる） of a probable attack.*

(*Footnote. The 失敗 was せいにするd to Gronet, and he was cashiered, as Dampier relates at the の近くに of 一時期／支部 7. After a long 巡航する he fell in with Townley again and with him had better success. They 解雇（する）d Grenada and Realejo. Subsequently in April 1686 he 解雇（する）d Guayaquil and took a large booty, but he died of 負傷させるs received in the attack. Townley after parting with Gronet attacked and took Lavelia with much spoil, but in August 1686 met his end in an 活動／戦闘 with Spanish ships in the 湾 of パナマ. Masefield 容積／容量 1 page 538.)

The noteworthy events of this 巡航する, besides 逮捕（する）s of casual prizes, are the taking and 燃やすing of Payta, and the abortive 試みる／企てる on Guayaquil (一時期／支部 6) the taking and 燃やすing of Leon in Nicaragua, where was killed an old buccaneer who had fought with Cromwell in Ireland; and the parting of Davis and Swan* (一時期／支部 8). Dampier, "not from any dislike to my old captain but to get some knowledge of the Mexican coast," joined up with Swan, who was minded to pass over to the East Indies, "which was a way very agreeable to my inclination." Thus is first inferentially 表明するd his 意向 of circumnavigation, more than 6 1/2 years after he 始める，決める out from England.

(*Footnote. Davis 巡航するd for some time on the 太平洋の coast, returning with Lionel Wafer by way of the Horn to Virginia, where they settled for about three years. 逮捕（する）d there for piracy they were sent to London for 裁判，公判 but were acquitted. After some years spent partly in London he returned to Jamaica, and on the 突発／発生 of the War of the Spanish Succession joined a privateer in （警察の）手入れ，急襲s on the Spanish gold-地雷s. His account of this adventure is appended to the second 版 of Wafer's 調書をとる／予約する 1704.)

FIFTH STAGE.

On breaking with Davis Swan's 長，指導者 反対する in crossing the 太平洋の (Dampier probably 株ing it) was to have done with buccaneering, and by honest 貿易（する）ing to 復帰させる himself in the good graces of his 雇用者s. To induce his men to go with him, however, he was 強いるd to 持つ／拘留する out hopes of その上の piracy in the East Indies. At Guam in the Ladrones he made no 試みる／企てる to 追求する an Acapulco ship, 存在 "now wholly averse to any 敵意を持った 活動／戦闘." At Mindanao the party 行為／行うd themselves as 仲買人s and were hospitably entertained by the 暴君. Little 貿易（する） was 利用できる and thoughts were entertained of settling there, the men 存在 now 疲れた／うんざりした lotus-eaters. The six months' 住居 at this place led to serious trouble: Swan became 残虐な and tyrannical に向かって his men, succumbed to the attractions of the town, and made long absences from his ship. Another 反乱（を起こす） was the result; the 大多数 of the 乗組員 掴むd the ship, left Swan 岸に, and sailed off under a new captain--Read. Dampier's 行為／行う on this occasion 展示（する）s the same aloofness as on other occasions. He took no part in the men's 共謀, nor, on the other 手渡す, as it would seem, in the 試みる／企てる to get Swan 船内に. In spite of his better feelings he became a 著作権侵害者 for another 18 months.

SIXTH STAGE.

The voyage under Captain Read, from the buccaneering point of 見解（をとる）, was a 完全にする 失敗. Though "our 商売／仕事 was to 略奪する," only two prizes were taken and those of little account. Much sea and land, however, was 調査するd, as is seen by the 大勝する--Manila, Pulo Condore, Formosa, Celebes, the north coast of Australia and the Nicobars. Here Dampier ended his buccaneering career of 8 1/2 years. The men had become more and more drunken, quarrelsome, and unruly, and Dampier looked for an 適切な時期 to escape from "this mad 乗組員."* A canoe was 得るd and Dampier, the 外科医, and another Englishman, with a few natives, 始める，決める out for Achin. In his terror during a 嵐／襲撃する which 脅すd to 圧倒する their puny （手先の）技術 Dampier "made sad reflections on my former life and looked 支援する with horror and detestation on 活動／戦闘s which before I disliked but now I trembled at the remembrance of." In his escape from the dangers attendant on those 活動／戦闘s curiously enough he recognised the 保護 of Heaven. "I did also call to mind the many miraculous 行為／法令／行動するs of God's Providence に向かって me in the whole course of my life."

(*Footnote. See below: "I did ever abhor drunkenness, which now our men that were abroad abandoned themselves wholly to.")

Whatever 激しい非難 may be passed on Dampier's long 協会 with 著作権侵害者s it must be 公式文書，認めるd to his credit that during the whole period of this 巡航する in the 群島, while his companions were drinking and brawling, he was studiously 記録，記録的な／記録するing his 観察s. His six months' 住居 at Mindanao 供給するs us with a 十分な description of 工場／植物 and animal life, as also of the inhabitants, their 政府, 宗教, manners, and customs (一時期／支部s 11 and 12). Here too comes on the scene that curious Prince Jeoly, the "painted prince," whom Dampier brought to England for show and there sold as his only 資産.*

(*Footnote. Mr. Masefield 引用するs a broadsheet of the time (Dampier Voyage 容積／容量 1 page 539) from which it appears that the prince was on 見解（をとる） at the Blue Boar's 長，率いる in (n)艦隊／(a)素早い Street.)

SEVENTH STAGE.

From Achin, and for the 残り／休憩（する） of the circumnavigation, Dampier was for the most part a mere 乗客. First a voyage to Tonquin with Captain Welden (July 1688 to April 1689) thence to Malacca and Fort George and 支援する to Achin and Bencoolen, where he was 雇うd as gunner in the English fort for five months. This section of his travels is omitted from the New Voyage and reserved for the Voyage to Tonquin. At Achin, as will be seen in 一時期／支部 18, he learns the その上の adventures of Captain Read and his 乗組員 whom he had 砂漠d at the Nicobars.

EIGHTH STAGE.

His eventful voyage now draws to a の近くに (一時期／支部s 19 and 20). Getting a passage from Bencoolen in the Defence, Captain ヒース／荒れ地, Dampier arrived in the 負かす／撃墜するs on 16 September 1691, 12 1/2 years since he had left England. All buccaneer's 見通しs of a home-coming with ample booty in 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業 gold or pieces-of-eight had 消えるd, and he landed with no more marketable 商品／必需品s than a tattooed native.

DAMPIER'S SUBSEQUENT LIFE.

On his return to England Dampier was 39 years of age. その上の 広大な／多数の／重要な voyages were in 蓄える／店 for him, each of which would 要求する its own commentary. 非，不，無, however, has been so attractive to the reading public as the New Voyage, it may be because the other 探検隊／遠征隊s, though 構成するing 偉業／利用するs and adventure, are hardly so attractive to 法律-がまんするing 国民s as those to which 付加 zest is 供給するd by contempt of 法律.

For six years nothing is known of Dampier's life except that he was at Corunna in 1694, probably in a merchant ship. It is likely that he made other such voyages: in the intervals he was 準備するing his New Voyage for 出版（物） 早期に in 1697. Its 即座の success 得るd for him an 任命 at the customs house as land-carriage man, and in June of that year he was 診察するd before the 会議 of 貿易（する） and 農園 with 尊敬（する）・点 to possible 解決／入植地s on the Isthmus of Darien. 早期に in 1698 he was again 診察するd before the 会議 with regard to an 探検隊／遠征隊 against the 著作権侵害者s to the east of the Cape of Good Hope. His advice may have been sought partly on account of his piratical experience and partly because his 調書をとる／予約する had shown that he had little heart in the 商売／仕事.

THE ROEBUCK VOYAGE.

He now submitted to the 政府 提案s for a new voyage of 探検 to New Holland, which were 受託するd. He was 任命するd captain of the Roebuck, 21 guns, his first 命令（する）, at the age of 47. He tells the story of his 巡航する in his Voyage to New Holland, published in two parts, 1703 and 1709. The 探検隊／遠征隊 went awry from the first and for divers 原因（となる）s. His ship was unseaworthy for a long voyage, and he quarrelled with his men, 特に with his 中尉／大尉／警部補, Fisher, whom he put in アイロンをかけるs and 手渡すd over as a 囚人 to the Portuguese 知事 at Bahia. At Shark's Bay, in Western Australia, scurvy and the 欠如（する） of water and 準備／条項s broke his spirit and he turned homewards. After touching at Timor, Batavia, and the Cape he got his crazy 大型船 as far as Ascension where she 創立者d. There he got a passage in a man-of-war to Barbados and so home in a merchantman. From the point of 見解（をとる） of 探検 the voyage was no 広大な／多数の／重要な success: he might have 心配するd Cook, Furneaux, and Flinders, and he touched only the barren coast of Western Australia.* His 失敗 was 大部分は 予定 to his 雇用者s, who gave him an unseaworthy and 不正に 準備／条項d ship, and to his mutinous 乗組員. It would be 不正な to せいにする the 失敗 to his incompetency as a leader of men: all that is to be said is that in the 条件s he did not 後継する as such.

(*Footnote. His 指名する has, however, been rightly honoured in Australasia. There is the Dampier 海峡 at the west end of New Guinea and also a Dampier Island. Western Australia gives his 指名する to a 地区 and an 群島: New South むちの跡s to a 郡.)

On his return he had to 会合，会う not only 逆の 批評 on his 失敗 as an explorer, but also a 法廷，裁判所 戦争の at the instance of 中尉／大尉／警部補 Fisher. He was 設立する 有罪の of "very hard and cruel usage に向かって 中尉／大尉／警部補 Fisher," for which the 法廷，裁判所 held there were no grounds. He was 罰金d all his 支払う／賃金* and 宣言するd to be "not a fit person to be 雇うd as 指揮官 of any of His Majesty's ships." We cannot question the judgment of a 法廷，裁判所 the 主要な／長／主犯 members of which were Sir George Rooke and Sir Cloudesley Shovell. It was one which in our time, when public opinion 支持するs 合法的な 決定／判定勝ち（する）s and 要求するs 政府s to 尊敬（する）・点 them, would be the end of an officer's career. It was not so in Dampier's 事例／患者. We need not here consider whether the 政府 同意しないd with the judgment or 単に 無視（する）d it, because the War of the Spanish Succession had now broken out and Dampier's buccaneering experience was 手配中の，お尋ね者 on に代わって of the country. 私的な owners fitted out two privateers, the St. George and the Fame, Dampier 存在 任命するd to the former as 指揮官. Ten months after the 法廷，裁判所 戦争の he had an audience of the Queen to whom he was introduced by the Lord High 海軍大将, and kissed 手渡すs on his 使節団.

(*Footnote. That is his 支払う／賃金 as captain: his 支払う／賃金 as land-carriage man at the customs was by special order paid to him during his absence and went to the support of his wife.)

THE ST. GEORGE VOYAGE.

The only account we 所有する of this privateering voyage is that of William Funnell, who was 率d mate of the St. George, as he himself （人命などを）奪う，主張するs, or as steward によれば Dampier. Funnell is a dull and malicious reporter and is not to be 信用d when he 取引，協定s with Dampier's 動機s and 行為／行う. Trouble began at the start, Captain Pulling in the Fame 砂漠ing him in the 負かす／撃墜するs. His place was taken at Kinsale (August 1703) by Captain Pickering in the Cinque Ports. On the Brazilian coast Pickering died and was 後継するd by his 中尉／大尉／警部補, Stradling. More quarrelling 続いて起こるd, 高めるd by the hardships of the passage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the Horn. Dissension between Stradling and his men led to the marooning of Alexander Selkirk on Juan Fernandez. The 失敗 to take two enemy ships led to その上の recriminations and desertions. Dampier quarrelled with Stradling and left him at Tobago: he quarrelled also with his own mate, Clipperton, who went off with 21 men in a prize bark. After another 失敗 to 逮捕（する） a Manila bark, he was 砂漠d by Funnell and 34 men. His ship, 存在 unseaworthy, was abandoned, and with his now 減ずるd 乗組員 of about 30, in a prize brigantine, he crossed the 太平洋の to a Dutch island where they were 拘留するd. Dampier did not reach England till the の近くに of 1707. So began, continued and ended in 災害 his second voyage of circumnavigation. 一方／合間 Funnell had already published his 損失ing 調書をとる／予約する.* Dampier would perhaps have written the story of the voyage himself but, 存在 already engaged to go to sea, he contented himself with publishing his Vindication in language strangely different from that of the New Voyage. Mr. Masefield 述べるs it as "angry and incoherent," but it may 公正に／かなり be regarded as 存在 no more than a collection of 公式文書，認めるs jotted 負かす／撃墜する in indignation and hot haste, 準備の to a more 推論する／理由d vindication later.**

(*Footnote. Funnell by his 言及／関連s in his preface to the 人気 of Dampier's previous work evidently ーするつもりであるd to forestall Dampier by passing off his 調書をとる／予約する as another Dampier voyage.)

(**Footnote. Funnell's Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World was published in 1707. Dampier got home later in that year and left again with Woodes Rogers 2 August 1708. Some of Funnell's passages relating to Dampier and the Vindication, also the Answers to the Vindication, by John Welbe, a midshipman on board Captain Dampier's ship, are 始める，決める out in Mr. Masefield's admirable 版 of the Voyages, 容積／容量 2 pages 576 to 593. Welbe's answers are spiteful and probably in 広大な／多数の／重要な part untrue. As Mr. Masefield points out he 否定するs them in a 構成要素 particular in a その後の letter of 1722 保存するd in the Townshend manuscripts.)

THE DUKE AND DUTCHESS VOYAGE.

When Dampier returned from his second voyage as captain the merchants of Bristol were already organising a privateering 探検隊／遠征隊 to the 太平洋の under Captain Woodes Rogers, and the honourable office of 操縦する was 申し込む／申し出d to Dampier. Of all his voyages this was probably the happiest to himself. The 探検隊／遠征隊 was lawful and gave him no qualms of 良心; he was 解放する／自由な from the cares and 責任／義務s of 最高の 命令（する）; he served under one of the most competent captains of the time, and his experience and ability as a 航海士, 同様に as his wise counsel, enabled him to 与える／捧げる 大部分は to the success of the 投機・賭ける. The two 大型船s were the Duke and Dutchess, Dampier sailing on the former with Rogers. In the 名簿（に載せる）／表（にあげる） of officers he is 述べるd as "William Dampier, 操縦する for the South Seas, who had been already three times there and twice 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World." Perhaps 利益（をあげる）ing by the experience of Dampier's previous ill-equipped 探検隊／遠征隊s, the merchants had 供給するd the ships so liberally with 準備／条項s and gear that the between decks were 不正に encumbered, and the ships "altogether in a very unfit 明言する／公表する to engage an enemy." The 乗組員s indeed were of the same unpromising 構成要素 with which Dampier was familiar. About one-third were foreigners, the 残り／休憩（する） landsmen, "tailors, tinkers, pedlars, fiddlers and hay-製造者s." Between Cork, "where our 乗組員 were continually marrying," and the Canaries a dangerous 反乱（を起こす） broke out which Rogers 敏速に put 負かす／撃墜する, 課すing upon a ringleader the 侮辱／冷遇 of 存在 whipped by a fellow-conspirator. Troubles with the 乗組員 were, however, to a large extent obviated by the 支払い（額） of 正規の／正選手 給料: the 契約 of 雇用 on the St. George had been the vicious one of "no prey, no 支払う／賃金." Moreover Rogers was wise enough to 株 his 責任／義務 with his officers, and all questions of importance were referred to 委員会s, Dampier's 指名する 存在 on nearly every 名簿（に載せる）／表（にあげる）. Discipline was thus 保存するd and the 巡航する resulted in the 逮捕（する） of many prizes and a very large booty, which unhappily did not 利益 Dampier, as the 配当 was 延期するd till after his death.*

(*Footnote. The booty 量d to about 170,000 続けざまに猛撃するs, a large 株 going to Woodes Rogers. He was able to rent the Bahama Islands from the lords proprietors for 21 years and became their 知事. See Rogers, W., in the Dictionary of 国家の Biography.)

The most 利益／興味ing feature of this voyage was the 救助（する） of Alexander Selkirk from the island of Juan Fernandez, which the ships might not have 攻撃する，衝突する without Dampier's knowledge of the 勝利，勝つd. The 会合 with his countrymen after his desolate life of four years is told by Woodes Rogers* with unconscious art, and one cannot help favourably comparing the inarticulate Selkirk with the expansive Ben Gunn of Treasure Island. Dampier took a 主要な part in the scene; he was able to tell Rogers that Selkirk was the best man in the Cinque Ports, from which he had been marooned; so, says Rogers, "I すぐに agreed with him to be a mate on board our ship."**

(*Footnote. Woodes Rogers published the account of the voyage, A New 巡航するing Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World 1712.)

(**Footnote. The さまざまな lives of Alexander Selkirk are 井戸／弁護士席 summarised in the Dictionary of 国家の Biography. It is probable that Selkirk did not alone 供給する the suggestion of Robinson Crusoe. Defoe had also before him Dampier's account of the 救助（する） of the marooned Moskito Indian in 一時期／支部 4.)

After his return from his last voyage Dampier lived 3 1/2 years more, probably in London, where he died in the parish of St. Stephen, Coleman Street, in March 1715. His will 時代遅れの 29 November 1714 was 証明するd on 23 March 1715. He 述べるd himself as "病気d and weak of 団体／死体, but of sound and perfect mind," and left nine-tenths of his 所有物／資産／財産 to his cousin, Grace Mercer, the remaining tenth to his brother, George Dampier, of Porton, in the 郡 of somerset. the large 株 of his 所有物／資産／財産 bequeathed to his cousin may 示す that she looked after him in his last years. His wife had probably predeceased him, as she is not について言及するd in the will. By a previous will made before 1703 he had left a sum of 200 続けざまに猛撃するs to his friend, Edward Southwell, to be 性質の／したい気がして of as he should think best for his wife's use. On the starting of the St. George 巡航する however he was constrained to put that sum into the 投機・賭ける.

DAMPIER THE MAN.

Dampier is an attractive character, but do what one will, one cannot make a hero of him. Nor indeed does he seem to be やめる in his 権利 place on the roll of Men of 活動／戦闘, with a biography by W. Clark Russell.*

(*Footnote. Dampier, by W. Clark Russell Men of 活動／戦闘 Series. The author is strangely 不確かの in some 事柄s. He says it does not appear that Dampier was ever married, and he 観察するs that after the Roebuck voyage Dampier had already twice circumnavigated the globe. The second 一連の会議、交渉／完成する was that on which he started in the St. George.)

During the whole of the 巡航するs 構成するd in the New Voyage he served either before the mast or as a subordinate officer, and was never chosen for the 命令（する） of a ship or an 探検隊／遠征隊; his advice does not appear to have been asked, and when proffered was seldom followed. He took no 主要な part in the さまざまな 反乱（を起こす）s, keeping his mind to himself until he had to take one 味方する or the other. He is once respectfully について言及するd as Mr. William Dampier by Cowley, but never once, so far as I have discovered, in the other narratives of Ringrose, Cox or Sharp. His whole time, so far as not interrupted by （警察の）手入れ，急襲s or the quarrels of his rowdy associates, was 充てるd to の近くに 観察 of 勝利，勝つd and tides, 地理学, 工場／植物s and animal life. He was in fact a student carrying for the nonce the fusee and hanger of a buccaneer. In happier days, and with a sounder 科学の education, his status in a world 巡航する might have been that of Darwin on the Beagle.

His first 命令（する） of a ship at the age of 47 could not have been conferred 借りがあるing to 評判 as a leader of men. The Roebuck 探検隊／遠征隊 was an 公式の／役人 voyage of 探検 始めるd by his own suggestion, and the 行為／行う of it was given to him, there can be little 疑問, on the strength of his 調書をとる／予約する, the New Voyage. The 欠如（する） of success, however attributable to the unseaworthiness and ill-準備／条項ing of the ship, and to the unmanageable 乗組員, was not so 損失ing to his 評判 as an explorer as was the judgment of the 法廷，裁判所 戦争の to his capacity as a captain. His second chance, as privateersman in the St. George, was 平等に unfortunate in the result. Here again he had to を取り引きする an unseaworthy ship and dissolute 乗組員s. In both these 事例／患者s he （機の）カム home without his ship, and had to 会合，会う 逆の 批評 by recriminations. Whatever excuse may be 設立する in the 逆の 条件s--and there is undoubtedly much--it can hardly be said that Dampier has 設立するd a （人命などを）奪う，主張する to be regarded as a leader of men. His rough experience and 科学の attainments no 疑問 made him a first-率 航海士, but a 評判 as an explorer cannot be 設立するd upon a 選び出す／独身 ineffectual visit to the coasts of Australia.

Dampier's true distinction seems to me to 嘘（をつく） in the 科学の and literary 長所s of his writings. There is 科学の 研究 in all his 調書をとる／予約するs, 顕著に in his Discourse of 勝利，勝つd, 微風s, 嵐／襲撃するs, Tides and 現在のs, a treatise which has 保存するd its usefulness to the 現在の day. The exciting adventures of his buccaneering life are told in the modest and simple language of his time, which charms us 平等に in the autobiographical fiction of Swift and Defoe. As Leslie Stephen says of Treasure Island, we throw ourselves into the events, enjoy the thrilling excitement, and do not bother ourselves with questions of psychology. His 出資／貢献s to 航海の science are extolled by those best qualified to 裁判官. I will 引用する two 海軍の 当局 who 証言する also to the literary charm of the 令状ing. First Captain Burney*: "It is not 平易な to 指名する another voyager or traveller who has given more useful （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） to the world; to whom the merchant and 水夫 are so much indebted; or who has communicated his （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） in a more unembarrassed and intelligible a manner. And this he has done in a style perfectly unassuming, 平等に 解放する／自由な from affectation and from the most distant 外見 of 発明." 海軍大将 Smyth** is 平等に eulogistic: "The （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） he affords flows as from a mind which 所有するs the mastery of its 支配する, and is desirous to communicate it. He delights and 教えるs by the truth and discernment with which he narrates the 出来事/事件s of a peculiar life; and 述べるs the attractive and important realities of nature with a fidelity and sagacity that 心配する the deductions of philosophy. Hence he was the first who discovered and 扱う／治療するd of the 地質学の structure of sea coasts; and though the 地元の 磁石の attraction in ships had fallen under the notice of seamen, he was の中で the first to lead the way to its 調査 since the facts that 'つまずくd' him at the Cape of Good Hope, 尊敬（する）・点ing the variations of the compass, excited the mind of Flinders, his ardent admirer, to 熟考する／考慮する the anomaly. His 英貨の／純銀の sense enabled him to give the character without the strict forms of science to his faithful delineations and physical suggestions: and inductive enquirers have rarely been so much indebted to any adventurer whose 追跡s were so 完全に remote from their 支配するs of 憶測."

(*Footnote. A Chronological History of the 発見s in the South Sea or 太平洋の Ocean 1803 to 1817.)

(**Footnote. 部隊d Service 定期刊行物 1837 Parts 2 and 3.)

Those who have excellently 井戸／弁護士席 adjudged Dampier's 長所s in science and literature have hardly done 司法（官） to his personal character. On the debit 味方する some will reckon the unfortunate 法廷，裁判所 戦争の, but any good man may, in the 強調する／ストレス of difficulties …に出席するing a sea-命令（する）, 演習 undue severity in the 維持／整備 of his 当局: and no 疑問 中尉／大尉／警部補 Fisher was a trying subordinate. The Admiralty do not seem to have taken やめる the same 見解（をとる） of the 事例／患者 as the 法廷，裁判所, as they すぐに afterwards gave Dampier a privateer's （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限. Then there is the fact that he was a buccaneer. On this point 言及／関連s have already been made to the laxity of public opinion on that 支配する in his day. It cannot be said that in joining the buccaneers Dampier mistook his vocation. That in modern parlance was 研究, and he could not in his day have 得るd 適切な時期s for 研究 in the distant Caribbean and 太平洋の Seas except with the buccaneers.* He was with them, but hardly one of them. As he was いっそう少なく of a buccaneer, so, as I believe, he was more of a gentleman. I have thus no need to （人命などを）奪う，主張する or 収容する／認める that "he was the mildest-mannered man that ever scuttled ship or 削減（する） a throat." There is no 証拠 that he did either, and one likes to think he did not.

(*Footnote. Mr. Masefield 引用するs one of Dampier's ごくわずかの 公式文書，認めるs on the Sloane Manuscript 3236: "I （機の）カム into these seas this second time more to indulge my curiosity than to get wealth, though I must 自白する at that time I did think the 貿易（する） lawful.")

Although he was not an active buccaneer he seems to have done his 義務 by his associates; at any 率 no （民事の）告訴s against him in this 尊敬（する）・点 are 記録，記録的な／記録するd. He took his 株 in their strenuous 労働 whether afloat or 岸に, without mingling in their drinking 一区切り／（ボクシングなどの）試合s and quarrels; and all the while he was carefully 令状ing up his 定期刊行物 day by day, and 追加するing to his 観察s of nature. He affords a 有望な example of strength of character in the 追跡 of knowledge under the most 逆の 条件s.

What is most 目だつ in Dampier's writings is his modesty and self-effacement; and I 結論する that this, one of the hallmarks of a gentleman, was his demeanour in conversation and society. He unconsciously gives us a glimpse of his character when he tells us in 一時期／支部 3 of the 圧力（をかける）ing 招待 which he had from the captain and 中尉／大尉／警部補 of a French man-of-war to go 支援する with them to フラン. Evidently charmed with his conversation, they saw how different a man he was from his ruffian associates. Though engaged in piracy he was always in favour of 司法（官）, and thus 令状s of Captain Davis's men (he 存在 a Davis man himself) as 存在 "so 不当な that they would not 許す Captain Eaton's men an equal 株 with them in what they got" (see below). It is a その上の 尊敬の印 to his character that when he was at home he had the patronage and help of Charles Montagu, Earl of Halifax, and the friendship of such men as Sir Robert Southwell, a 大統領，／社長 of the 王室の Society, his son Edward Southwell, a 国務長官 for Ireland, and Sir Hans Sloane, who showed his 尊敬（する）・点 for Dampier by having his portrait painted by Thomas Murray*--the 直面する is that of a 墓／厳粛／彫る／重大な, thoughtful and resolute man. Much the most 利益／興味ing sidelight on his social 質, however, is thrown by John Evelyn's 記録，記録的な／記録する of his dinner with Mr. Pepys on 6 August 1698:

"I dined with Mr. Pepys, where was Captain Dampier, who had been a famous buccaneer, had brought hither the painted prince 職業, and printed a relation of his very strange adventure, and his 観察s. He was now going abroad again by the King's 激励, who furnished a ship of 290 トンs. He seemed a more modest man than one would imagine by relation of the 乗組員 he had assorted with. He brought a 地図／計画する of his 観察s of the course of the 勝利，勝つd in the South Seas, and 保証するd us that the 地図／計画するs hitherto extant were all 誤った as to the 太平洋の Sea, which he makes on the south of the line, that on the north end running by the coast of Peru 存在 極端に tempestuous."

(*Footnote. The picture now in the 国家の Portrait Gallery is 再生するd here.)

It would seem that Evelyn 推定する／予想するd to 会合，会う a swashbuckler and 設立する a modest and courteous gentleman, with perhaps much to tell of his life's adventures, but for the moment 主として 関心d with his 反対 to calling an ocean pacific unless it is so. How pleasant it would have been for any person, however 著名な, to have made a fourth at that dinner!

THE TEXT OF A NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.

When we come to 調査／捜査する the text of this delightful 調書をとる／予約する we find some difficulties which have to be met and solved. The story and the 科学の 観察s are undoubtedly Dampier's, for which he must have the entire credit. It was however 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金d against him in his own day that the literary style or polish was 与える／捧げるd by some unknown assistant or 協力者. This was believed by Swift, who evidently loved Dampier and was probably much 影響（力）d by him in his methods of narration as, indeed, is 示すd by his 言及／関連 to Dampier as Lemuel Gulliver's cousin. That Dampier had some 援助（する） in 準備するing his work for the 圧力（をかける） is 認める by himself in the Preface to the Voyage to New Holland. He there 言及するs to the 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金 that he has "published things digested and drawn up by others," and he retorts: "I think it so far a diminution to one of my education and 雇用 to have what I 令状 改訂するd and 訂正するd by friends; that on the contrary the best and most 著名な authors are not ashamed to own the same thing, and look upon it as an advantage."

It is difficult, if not impossible, now to discover the extent or nature of the 援助 which Dampier 得るd. The "copy" of the voyage as printed does not appear to 存在する, and the Sloane Manuscript account of it is in the （疑いを）晴らす script of a copyist, the ごくわずかの 公式文書，認めるs only 存在 in Dampier's 手渡す. The manuscript is much shorter than the printed 調書をとる／予約する. It 構成するs the story of the voyage, but 欠如（する）s the 観察s in natural history: on the other 手渡す it 含むs (1) Wafer's account (taken "out of his own 令状ing") of his life の中で the Indians of the Isthmus, (2) the account of the voyage of captain Swan before he joined Dampier's party, and (3) the antecedent adventures of Captain Harris, all of which are omitted from the 調書をとる／予約する. A perplexing factor is that the Sloane Manuscript 含む／封じ込めるs in the copyist's 令状ing the 言及／関連s (A) (B) etc., to the ごくわずかの 公式文書，認めるs afterwards 供給（する）d by Dampier. Other ごくわずかの 公式文書，認めるs are 追加するd, these 示すd by a pointing 手渡す. In some 事例／患者s the ごくわずかの 公式文書，認める is 会社にする／組み込むd in the 調書をとる／予約する, in others 無視（する）d. いつかs, too, a jotting from the 定期刊行物 as to an unimportant day's doing is omitted from the 調書をとる／予約する. In some places the printed 調書をとる／予約する alters the manuscript in a 構成要素 point.* Thus the manuscript 代表するs only one step in the 準備 of the 調書をとる／予約する text. 存在 in a copyist's 手渡す, it may be only a fair copy of Dampier's not always やめる legible 令状ing: or it may be a 見解／翻訳／版 of his 定期刊行物 with some little polish 治めるd by a literary friend. It is （疑いを）晴らす that his natural history 公式文書，認めるs were composed and kept 分かれて from his 定期刊行物. They 構成する 観察s made at さまざまな places and at different and often その後の periods of his travels: and they are いつかs pitch-forked into the 調書をとる／予約する at 半端物 junctures.

(*Footnote. For instance (see below 30 April 1681) we read "that we might the better work our escape from our enemies." In the manuscript the words are "that we might the better work our designs on our enemies.")

A NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.

述べるing 特に The Isthmus of America, Several Coasts and Islands in the West Indies, the 小島s of Cape Verde, the Passage by Tierra del Fuego, the South Sea Coasts of Chile, Peru, and Mexico; the 小島 of Guam one of the Ladrones, Mindanao, and other Philippine and East India Islands 近づく Cambodia, 中国, Formosa, Luconia, Celebes, etc. New Holland, Sumatra, Nicobar 小島s, the Cape of Good Hope, and St. Helena.

Their 国／地域, Rivers, Harbours, 工場／植物s, Fruits, Animals, and Inhabitants.

Their Customs, 宗教, 政府, 貿易（する）, etc.

VOLUME 1.

By Captain WILLIAM DAMPIER.

Illustrated with MAPS and DRAUGHTS.

The SEVENTH EDITION, 訂正するd.

LONDON:
Printed for JAMES and JOHN KNAPTON, at the
栄冠を与える in St. Paul's Churchyard. M DCC XXIX.

DEDICATION.

To the 権利 Honourable
Charles Montagu, Esquire;
大統領 of the 王室の Society,
One of the Lords Commissioners of the 財務省, etc.

SIR,

May it please you to 容赦 the boldness of a stranger to your person, if upon the 激励 of ありふれた fame, he 推定するs so much upon your candour, as to lay before you this account of his travels. As the scene of them is not only remote, but for the most part little たびたび（訪れる）d also, so there may be some things in them new even to you; and some, かもしれない, not altogether unuseful to the public: and that just veneration which the world 支払う／賃金s, as to your general 価値（がある）, so 特に to that zeal for the 進歩 of knowledge, and the 利益／興味 of your country, which you 表明する upon all occasions, gives you a particular 権利 to whatever may any way tend to the 促進するing these 利益／興味s, as an 申し込む／申し出ing 予定 to your 長所. I have not so much of the vanity of a traveller as to be fond of telling stories, 特に of this 肉親，親類d; nor can I think this plain piece of 地雷 deserves a place の中で your more curious collections: much いっそう少なく have I the arrogance to use your 指名する by way of patronage for the too obvious faults, both of the author and the work. Yet dare I avow, によれば my 狭くする sphere and poor abilities, a hearty zeal for the 促進するing of useful knowledge, and of anything that may never so remotely tend to my country's advantage: and I must own an ambition of transmitting to the public through your 手渡すs these essays I have made toward those 広大な／多数の／重要な ends, of which you are so deservedly esteemed the patron. This has been my design in this 出版（物）, 存在 desirous to bring in my gleanings here and there in remote 地域s to that general magazine of the knowledge of foreign parts, which the 王室の Society thought you most worthy the 保護／拘留 of, when they chose you for their 大統領: and if in perusing these papers your goodness shall so far distinguish the experience of the author from his faults as to 裁判官 him 有能な of serving his country, either すぐに, or by serving you, he will endeavour by some real proofs to show himself,

SIR,

Your Most Faithful,

充てるd, Humble Servant,

W. Dampier.

PREFACE

Before the reader proceed any その上の in the perusal of this work I must bespeak a little of his patience here to take along with him this short account of it. It is composed of a mixed relation of places and 活動／戦闘s in the same order of time in which they occurred: for which end I kept a 定期刊行物 of every day's 観察s.

In the description of places, their 製品, etc., I have endeavoured to give what satisfaction I could to my countrymen; though かもしれない to the 述べるing several things that may have been much better accounted for by others: choosing to be more particular than might be needful, with 尊敬（する）・点 to the intelligent reader, rather than to omit what I thought might tend to the （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） of persons no いっそう少なく sensible and inquisitive, though not so learned or experienced. For which 推論する／理由 my 長，指導者 care has been to be as particular as was 一貫した with my ーするつもりであるd brevity in setting 負かす／撃墜する such observables as I met with. Nor have I given myself any 広大な／多数の／重要な trouble since my return to compare my 発見s with those of others: the rather because, should it so happen that I have 述べるd some places or things which others have done before me, yet in different accounts, even of the same things, it can hardly be but there will be some new light afforded by each of them. But after all, considering that the main of this voyage has its scene laid in long tracts of the remoter parts both of the East and West Indies, some of which very seldom visited by Englishmen, and others as rarely by any Europeans, I may without vanity encourage the reader to 推定する／予想する many things wholly new to him, and many others more fully 述べるd than he may have seen どこかよそで; for which not only in this voyage, though itself of many years continuance, but also several former long and distant voyages have qualified me.

As for the 活動／戦闘s of the company の中で whom I made the greatest part of this voyage, a thread of which I have carried on through it, it is not to コースを変える the reader with them that I について言及する them, much いっそう少なく that I take any 楽しみ in relating them: but for method's sake, and for the reader's satisfaction; who could not so 井戸／弁護士席 acquiesce in my description of places, etc., without knowing the particular 横断するs I made の中で them; nor in these, without an account of the concomitant circumstances: besides, that I would not prejudice the truth and 誠実 of my relation, though by omissions only. And as for the 横断するs themselves, they make for the reader's advantage, how little soever for 地雷; since その為に I have been the better enabled to gratify his curiosity; as one who rambles about a country can give usually a better account of it than a 運送／保菌者 who jogs on to his inn without ever going out of his road.

As to my style, it cannot be 推定する／予想するd that a 船員 should 影響する／感情 politeness; for were I able to do it, yet I think I should be little solicitous about it in a work of this nature. I have frequently indeed divested myself of sea-phrases to gratify the land reader; for which the seamen will hardly 許す me: and yet, かもしれない, I shall not seem complaisant enough to the other; because I still 保持する the use of so many sea-条件. I 自白する I have not been at all scrupulous in this 事柄, either as to the one or the other of these; for I am 説得するd that, if what I say be intelligible, it 事柄s not 大いに in what words it is 表明するd.

For the same 推論する／理由 I have not been curious as to the （一定の）期間ing of the 指名するs of places, 工場／植物s, fruits, animals, etc., which in any of these remoter parts are given at the 楽しみ of travellers, and 変化させる によれば their different humours: neither have I 限定するd myself to such 指名するs as are given by learned authors, or so much as enquired after many of them. I 令状 for my countrymen; and have therefore, for the most part, used such 指名するs as are familiar to our English seamen, and those of our 植民地s abroad, yet without neglecting others that occurred. As it might 十分である me to have given such 指名するs and descriptions as I could I shall leave to those of more leisure and 適切な時期 the trouble of comparing these with those which other authors have 割り当てるd.

The reader will find as he goes along some 言及／関連s to an 虫垂 which I once designed to this 調書をとる／予約する; as, to a 一時期／支部 about the 勝利，勝つd in different parts of the world; to a description of the Bay of Campeachy in the West Indies, where I lived long in a former voyage; and to a particular chorographical description of all the South Sea coast of America, partly from a Spanish manuscript, and partly from my own and other travellers' 観察s, besides those 含む／封じ込めるd in this 調書をとる／予約する. But such an 虫垂 would have swelled it too unreasonably: and therefore I chose rather to publish it hereafter by itself, as 適切な時期 shall serve. And the same must be said also as to a particular voyage from Achin in the 小島 of Sumatra, to Tonquin, Malacca, etc., which should have been 挿入するd as part of this general one; but it would have been too long, and therefore, omitting it for the 現在の, I have carried on this, next way from Sumatra to England; and so made the 小旅行する of the world 特派員 to the 肩書を与える.

For the better apprehending the course of the voyage and the 状況／情勢 of the places について言及するd in it I have 原因（となる）d several 地図／計画するs to be engraven, and some particular charts of my own composure. の中で them there is in the 地図／計画する of the American Isthmus, a new 計画／陰謀 of the 隣接するing Bay of パナマ and its islands, which to some may seem superfluous after that which Mr. Ringrose has published in the History of the Buccaneers; and which he 申し込む／申し出s as a very exact chart. I must needs 同意しない with him in that, and 疑問 not but this which I here publish will be 設立する more agreeable to that bay, by one who shall have 適切な時期 to 診察する it; for it is a 収縮過程 of a larger 地図／計画する which I took from several 駅／配置するs in the bay itself. The reader may 裁判官 how 井戸／弁護士席 I was able to do it by my several 横断するs about it, について言及するd in this 調書をとる／予約する; those, 特に, which are 述べるd in the 7th 一時期／支部, which I have 原因（となる）d to be 示すd out with a pricked line; as the course of my voyage is 一般に in all the 地図／計画するs, for the reader's more 平易な tracing it.

I have nothing more to 追加する, but that there are here and there some mistakes made as to 表現 and the like, which will need a favourable 是正 as they occur upon reading. For instance, the スピードを出す／記録につける of 支持を得ようと努めるd lying out at some distance from 味方するs of the boats 述べるd at Guam, and 平行の to their keel, which for distinction's sake I have called the little boat, might more 明確に and 適切に have been called the 味方する スピードを出す／記録につける, or by some such 指名する; for though fashioned at the 底（に届く） and ends boatwise, yet is not hollow at 最高の，を越す, but solid throughout. In other places also I may not have 表明するd myself so fully as I ought: but any かなりの omission that I shall recollect or be 知らせるd of I shall endeavour to （不足などを）補う in those accounts I have yet to publish; and for any faults I leave the reader to the 共同の use of his judgment and candour.

THE INTRODUCTION.

THE AUTHOR'S DEPARTURE FROM ENGLAND, AND ARRIVAL IN JAMAICA.

I first 始める，決める out of England on this voyage at the beginning of the year 1679, in the Loyal Merchant of London, bound for Jamaica, Captain Knapman 指揮官. I went a 乗客, designing when I （機の）カム thither to go from thence to the Bay of Campeachy in the 湾 of Mexico, to 削減（する） スピードを出す／記録につける-支持を得ようと努めるd: where in a former voyage I had spent about three years in that 雇う; and so was 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd with the place and the work.

We sailed with a 繁栄する 強風 without any 妨害 or remarkable passage in our voyage: unless that when we （機の）カム in sight of the island Hispaniola, and were coasting along on the south 味方する of it by the little 小島s of Vacca, or Ash, I 観察するd Captain Knapman was more vigilant than ordinary, keeping at a good distance off shore, for 恐れる of coming too 近づく those small low islands; as he did once, in a voyage from England, about the year 1673, losing his ship there, by the carelessness of his mates. But we 後継するd better; and arrived 安全な at Port 王室の in Jamaica some time in April 1679, and went すぐに 岸に.

I had brought some goods with me from England which I ーするつもりであるd to sell here, and 在庫／株 myself with rum and sugar, saws, axes, hats, stockings, shoes, and such other 商品／必需品s, as I knew would sell の中で the Campeachy スピードを出す／記録につける-支持を得ようと努めるd-切断機，沿岸警備艇s. Accordingly I sold my English 貨物 at Port 王室の; but upon some maturer considerations of my ーするつもりであるd voyage to Campeachy I changed my thoughts of that design, and continued at Jamaica all that year in 期待 of some other 商売／仕事.

I shall not trouble the reader with my 観察s at that 小島, so 井戸／弁護士席 known to Englishmen; nor with the particulars of my own 事件／事情／状勢s during my stay there. But in short, having there made a 購入（する） of a small 広い地所 in Dorsetshire, 近づく my native country of Somerset, of one whose 肩書を与える to it I was 井戸／弁護士席 保証するd of, I was just 乗る，着手するing myself for England, about Christmas 1679, when one Mr. Hobby 招待するd me to go first a short 貿易（する）ing voyage to the country of the Moskitos, of whom I shall speak in my first 一時期／支部. I was willing to get up some money before my return, having laid out what I had at Jamaica; so I sent the 令状ing of my new 購入（する） along with the same friends whom I should have …を伴ってd to England, and went on board Mr. Hobby.

Soon after our setting out we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 again in Negril Bay, at the west end of Jamaica; but finding there Captain Coxon, Sawkins, Sharp, and other privateers, Mr. Hobby's men all left him to go with them upon an 探検隊／遠征隊 they had contrived, leaving not one with him beside myself; and 存在 thus left alone, after three or four days' stay with Mr. Hobby I was the more easily 説得するd to go with them too.

HIS FIRST GOING OVER THE ISTHMUS OF AMERICA INTO THE SOUTH SEAS.

It was すぐに after Christmas 1679 when we 始める，決める out. The first 探検隊／遠征隊 was to Portobello; which 存在 遂行するd it was 解決するd to march by land over the Isthmus of Darien upon some new adventures in the South Seas. Accordingly on the 5th of April 1680 we went 岸に on the Isthmus, 近づく Golden Island, one of the Samballoes, to the number of between three and four hundred men, carrying with us such 準備／条項s as were necessary, and toys wherewith to gratify the wild Indians through whose country we were to pass. In about nine days' march we arrived at Santa Maria and took it, and after a stay there of about three days we went on to the South Sea coast, and there 乗る，着手するd ourselves in such canoes and periagos as our Indian friends furnished us withal. We were in sight of パナマ by the 23rd of April, and having in vain 試みる／企てるd Puebla Nova, before which Sawkins, then 指揮官 in 長，指導者, and others, were killed, we made some stay at the 隣人ing 小島s of Quibo.

HIS COASTING PERU AND CHILE, AND BACK AGAIN, TO HIS PARTING WITH CAPTAIN SHARP NEAR THE ISLE OF PLATA, IN ORDER TO RETURN OVERLAND.

Here we 解決するd to change our course and stand away to the southward for the coast of Peru. Accordingly we left the 重要なs or 小島s of Quibo the 6th of June, and spent the 残り／休憩（する） of the year in that southern course; for, touching at the 小島s of Gorgona and Plata, we （機の）カム to Ylo, a small town on the coast of Peru, and took it. This was in October, and in November we went thence to Coquimbo on the same coast, and about Christmas were got as far as the 小島 of Juan Fernandez, which was the farthest of our course to the southward.

After Christmas we went 支援する again to the northward, having a design upon Arica, a strong town advantageously 据えるd in the hollow of the 肘, or bending, of the Peruvian coast. But 存在 there 撃退するd with 広大な／多数の／重要な loss, we continued our course northward, till by the middle of April we were come in sight of the 小島 of Plata, a little to the southward of the Equinoctial Line.

I have 関係のある this part of my voyage thus summarily and concisely, 同様に because the world has accounts of it already, in the relations that Mr. Ringrose and others have given of Captain Sharp's 探検隊／遠征隊, who was made 長，指導者 指揮官 upon Sawkins' 存在 killed; as also because in the 起訴 of this voyage I shall come to speak of these parts again, upon occasion of my going the second time into the South Seas: and shall there 述べる 捕まらないで the places both of the North and South America as they occurred to me. And for this 推論する／理由, that I might 避ける needless repetitions, and 急いで to such particulars as the public has hitherto had no account of, I have chosen to 構成する the relation of my voyage hitherto in this short compass, and place it as an Introduction before the 残り／休憩（する）, that the reader may the better perceive where I mean to begin to be particular; for there I have placed the 肩書を与える of my first 一時期／支部.

All therefore that I have to 追加する to the Introduction is this; that, while we lay at the 小島 of Juan Fernandez, Captain Sharp was, by general 同意, 追い出すd from 存在 指揮官; the company 存在 not 満足させるd either with his courage or behaviour. In his stead Captain Watling was 前進するd: but, he 存在 killed すぐに after before Arica, we were without a 指揮官 during all the 残り／休憩（する） of our return に向かって Plata. Now Watling 存在 killed, a 広大な／多数の／重要な number of the meaner sort began to be as earnest for choosing Captain Sharp again into the vacancy as before they had been as 今後 as any to turn him out: and on the other 味方する the abler and more experienced men, 存在 altogether 不満な with Sharp's former 行為／行う, would by no means 同意 to have him chosen. In short, by that time we were come in sight of the island Plata, the difference between the 競うing parties was grown so high that they 解決するd to part companies; having first made an 協定 that, which party soever should upon 投票ing appear to have the 大多数, they should keep the ship: and the other should content themselves with the 開始する，打ち上げる, or longboat, and canoes, and return 支援する over the Isthmus, or go to 捜し出す their fortune other-ways, as they would.

Accordingly we put it to the 投票（する）; and, upon dividing, Captain Sharp's party carried it. I, who had never been pleased with his 管理／経営, though I had hitherto kept my mind to myself, now 宣言するd myself on the 味方する of those that were out-投票（する）d; and, によれば our 協定, we took our 株 of such necessaries as were fit to carry 陸路の with us (for that was our 決意／決議) and so 用意が出来ている for our 出発.

WILLIAM DAMPIER'S NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.

CHAPTER 1.

1681.

AN ACCOUNT OF THE AUTHOR'S RETURN OUT OF THE SOUTH SEAS, TO HIS LANDING NEAR CAPE ST. LAWRENCE, IN THE ISTHMUS OF DARIEN: WITH AN OCCASIONAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MOSKITO INDIANS.

April the 17th 1681, about ten o'clock in the morning, 存在 12 leagues north-west from the island Plata, we left Captain Sharp and those who were willing to go with him in the ship and 乗る，着手するd into our 開始する，打ち上げる and canoes, designing for the river of Santa Maria, in the 湾 of St. Michael, which is about 200 leagues from the 小島 of Plata. We were in number 44 white men who bore 武器, a Spanish Indian who bore 武器 also; and two Moskito Indians who always 耐える 武器 amongst the privateers and are much valued by them for striking fish, and 海がめ or tortoise, and manatee or sea-cow; and five slaves taken in the South Seas, who fell to our 株.

The （手先の）技術 which carried us was a 開始する，打ち上げる, or longboat, one canoe, and another canoe which had been sawn asunder in the middle ーするために have made bumkins, or 大型船s for carrying water, if we had not separated from our ship. This we joined together again and made it tight; 供給するing sails to help us along: and for 3 days before we parted we 精査するd so much flower as we could 井戸／弁護士席 carry, and rubbed up 20 or 30 続けざまに猛撃する of chocolate with sugar to sweeten it; these things and a kettle the slaves carried also on their 支援するs after we landed. And, because there were some who designed to go with us that we knew were not 井戸／弁護士席 able to march, we gave out that if any man 滞るd in the 旅行 陸路の he must 推定する／予想する to be 発射 to death; for we knew that the Spaniards would soon be after us, and one man 落ちるing into their 手渡すs might be the 廃虚 of us all by giving an account of our strength and 条件; yet this would not 阻止する them from going with us. We had but little 勝利，勝つd when we parted from the ship; but before 12 o'clock the sea-微風 （機の）カム in strong, which was like to 創立者 us before we got in with the shore; for our 安全 therefore we 削減（する） up an old 乾燥した，日照りの hide that we brought with us, and バリケードd the 開始する，打ち上げる all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する with it to keep the water out. About 10 o'clock at night we got in about 7 leagues to windward of Cape Passao under the Line, and then it 証明するd 静める; and we lay and drove all night, 存在 疲労，（軍の）雑役d the 先行する day. The 18th day we had little 勝利，勝つd till the afternoon; and then we made sail, standing along the shore to the northward, having the 勝利，勝つd at south-south-west and 好天.

At 7 o'clock we （機の）カム abreast of Cape Passao and 設立する a small bark at an 錨，総合司会者 in a small bay to leeward of the cape, which we took, our own boats 存在 too small to 輸送（する） us. We took her just under the Equinoctial Line, she was not only a help to us, but in taking her we were 安全な from 存在 述べるd: we did not design to have meddled with any when we parted with our consorts, nor to have seen any if we could have helped it. The bark （機の）カム from Gallo laden with 木材／素質, and was bound for Guayaquil.

The 19th day in the morning we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 about 12 leagues to the southward of Cape San Francisco to put our new bark into a better 削減する. In 3 or 4 hours time we finished our 商売／仕事, and （機の）カム to sail again, and steered along the coast with the 勝利，勝つd at south-south-west, ーするつもりであるing to touch at Gorgona.

存在 to the northward of Cape San Francisco we met with very wet 天候; but the 勝利，勝つd continuing we arrived at Gorgona the 24th day in the morning, before it was light; we were afraid to approach it in the daytime for 恐れる the Spaniards should 嘘（をつく） there for us, it 存在 the place where we careened lately, and there they might 推定する／予想する us.

When we （機の）カム 岸に we 設立する the Spaniards had been there to 捜し出す after us, by a house they had built, which would entertain 100 men, and by a 広大な／多数の／重要な cross before the doors. This was 記念品 enough that the Spaniards did 推定する／予想する us this day again; therefore we 診察するd our 囚人s if they knew anything of it, who 自白するd they had heard of a periago (or large canoe) that 列／漕ぐ／騒動d with 14 oars, which was kept in a river on the Main, and once in 2 or three days （機の）カム over to Gorgona purposely to see for us; and that having discovered us, she was to make all 速度(を上げる） to パナマ with the news; where they had three ships ready to send after us.

We lay here all the day, and scrubbed our new bark, that if ever we should be chased we might the better escape: we filled our water and in the evening went from thence, having the 勝利，勝つd at south-west a きびきびした 強風.

The 25th day we had much 勝利，勝つd and rain, and we lost the canoe that had been 削減（する） and was joined together; we would have kept all our canoes to carry us up the river, the bark not 存在 so convenient.

The 27th day we went from thence with a 穏健な 強風 of 勝利，勝つd at south-west. In the afternoon we had 過度の にわか雨s of rain.

The 28th day was very wet all the morning; betwixt 10 and 11 it （疑いを）晴らすd up and we saw two 広大な／多数の／重要な ships about a league and a half to the 西方の of us, we 存在 then two leagues from the shore, and about 10 leagues to the southward of point Garrachina. These ships had been 巡航するing between Gorgona and the 湾 6 months; but whether our 囚人s did know it I cannot tell.

We presently furled our sails and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d in の近くに under the shore, knowing that they were 巡洋艦s; for if they had been bound to パナマ this 勝利，勝つd would have carried them thither; and no ships bound from パナマ come on this 味方する of the bay, but keep the north 味方する of the bay till as far as the 重要なs of Quibo to the 西方の; and then if they are bound to the southward they stand over and may fetch Gallo, or betwixt it and Cape San Francisco.

The glare did not continue long before it rained again, and kept us from the sight of each other: but if they had seen and chased us we were 解決するd to run our bark and canoes 岸に, and take ourselves to the mountains and travel 陸路の; for we knew that the Indians which lived in these parts never had any 商業 with the Spaniards; so we might have had a chance for our lives.

The 29th day at 9 o'clock in the morning we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 at Point Garrachina, about 7 leagues from the 湾 of St. Michael, which was the place where we first （機の）カム into the South Seas, and the way by which we designed to return.

Here we lay all the day, and went 岸に and 乾燥した，日照りのd our 着せる／賦与するs, cleaned our guns, 乾燥した，日照りのd our 弾薬／武器, and 直す／買収する，八百長をするd ourselves against our enemies, if we should be attacked; for we did 推定する／予想する to find some 対立 at 上陸: we likewise kept a good 警戒／見張り all the day, for 恐れる of those two ships that we saw the day before.

The 30th day in the morning at 8 o'clock we （機の）カム into the 湾 of St. Michael's mouth; for we put from Point Garrachina in the evening, designing to have reached the islands in the 湾 before day; that we might the better work our escape from our enemies, if we should find any of them waiting to stop our passage.

About 9 o'clock we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 a mile without a large island, which lies 4 miles from the mouth of the river; we had other small islands without us, and might have gone up into the river, having a strong tide of flood, but would not adventure さらに先に till we had looked 井戸／弁護士席 about us.

We すぐに sent a canoe 岸に on the island, where we saw (what we always 恐れるd) a ship at the mouth of the river, lying の近くに by the shore, and a large テント by it, by which we 設立する it would be a hard 仕事 for us to escape them.

When the canoe （機の）カム 船内に with this news some of our men were a little disheartened; but it was no more than I ever 推定する／予想するd.

Our care was now to get 安全な 陸路の, seeing we could not land here によれば our 願望（する）: therefore before the tide of flood was spent we 乗組員を乗せた our canoe and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d again to the island to see if the enemy was yet in 動議. When we （機の）カム 岸に we 分散させるd ourselves all over the island to 妨げる our enemies from coming any way to 見解（をとる） us; and presently after high-water we saw a small canoe coming over from the ship to the island that we were on; which made us all get into our canoe and wait their coming; and we lay の近くに till they （機の）カム within ピストル-発射 of us, and then, 存在 ready, we started out and took them. There were in her one white man and two Indians; who 存在 診察するd told us that the ship which we saw at the river's mouth had lain there six months, guarding the river, waiting for our coming; that she had 12 guns and 150 seamen and 兵士s: that the seamen all lay 船内に, but the 兵士s lay 岸に in their テントs; that there were 300 men at the 地雷s, who had all small 武器, and would be 船内に in two tides' time. They likewise told us that there were two ships 巡航するing in the bay between this place and Gorgona; the biggest had 20 guns and 200 men, the other 10 guns and 150 men: besides all this they told us that the Indians on this 味方する the country were our enemies; which was the worse news of all. However we presently brought these 囚人s 船内に and got under sail, turning out with the tide of ebb, for it was not convenient to stay longer there.

We did not long consider what to do; but ーするつもりであるd to land that night or the next day betimes; for we did not question but we should either get a good 商業 with the Indians by such toys as we had purposely brought with us, or else 軍隊 our way through their country in spite of all their 対立; and we did not 恐れる what these Spaniards could do against us in 事例／患者 they should land and come after us. We had a strong southerly 勝利，勝つd which blew 権利 in; and, the tide of ebb 存在 far spent, we could not turn out.

I 説得するd them to run into the river of Congo, which is a large river about three leagues from the island where we lay; which with a southerly 勝利，勝つd we could have done: and, when we were got so high as the tide flows, then we might have landed. But all the arguments I could use were not of 軍隊 十分な to 納得させる them that there was a large river so 近づく us, but they would land somewhere, they neither did know how, where, nor when.

When we had 列／漕ぐ／騒動d and 牽引するd against the 勝利，勝つd all night we just got about Cape San Lorenzo in the morning; and sailed about 4 miles さらに先に to the 西方の, and run into a small creek within two 重要なs, or little islands, and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d up to the 長，率いる of the creek, 存在 about a mile up, and there we landed May 1 1681.

We got out all our 準備／条項 and 着せる／賦与するs and then sunk our 大型船.

While we were 上陸 and 直す／買収する，八百長をするing our snap-解雇（する）s to march our Moskito Indians struck a plentiful dish of fish, which we すぐに dressed, and therewith 満足させるd our hunger.

Having made について言及する of the Moskito Indians it may not be amiss to 結論する this 一時期／支部 with a short account of them. They are tall, 井戸／弁護士席 made, raw-boned, lusty, strong, and nimble of foot, long-visaged, lank 黒人／ボイコット hair, look 厳しい, hard favoured, and of a dark 巡査-colour complexion. They are but a small nation or family, and not 100 men of them in number, 住むing on the Main on the north 味方する, 近づく Cape Gracias a Dios; between Cape Honduras and Nicaragua. They are very ingenious at throwing the lance, fishgig, harpoon, or any manner of dart, 存在 bred to it from their 幼少／幼藍期; for the children, imitating their parents, never go abroad without a lance in their 手渡すs, which they throw at any 反対する, till use has made them masters of the art. Then they learn to put by a lance, arrow, or dart: the manner is thus. Two boys stand at a small distance, and dart a blunt stick at one another; each of them 持つ／拘留するing a small stick in his 権利 手渡す, with which he strikes away that which was darted at him. As they grow in years they become more dexterous and 勇敢な, and then they will stand a fair 示す to anyone that will shoot arrows at them; which they will put by with a very small stick, no bigger than the 棒 of a fowling-piece; and when they are grown to be men they will guard themselves from arrows, though they come very 厚い at them, 供給するd two do not happen to come at once. They have 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の good 注目する，もくろむs, and will descry a sail at sea さらに先に, and see anything better, than we. Their chiefest 雇用 in their own country is to strike fish, 海がめ, or manatee, the manner of which I 述べる どこかよそで, 一時期／支部 3. For this they are esteemed and coveted by all privateers; for one or two of them in a ship will 持続する 100 men: so that when we careen our ships we choose 一般的に such places where there is plenty of 海がめ or manatee for these Moskito men to strike: and it is very rare to find privateers destitute of one or more of them when the 指揮官 or most of the men are English; but they do not love the French, and the Spaniards they hate mortally. When they come の中で privateers, they get the use of guns, and 証明する very good marksmen: they behave themselves very bold in fight, and never seem to flinch nor hang 支援する; for they think that the white men with whom they are know better than they do when it is best to fight, and, let the disadvantage of their party be never so 広大な／多数の／重要な, they will never 産する／生じる nor give 支援する while any of their party stand. I could never perceive any 宗教 nor any 儀式s or superstitious 観察s の中で them, 存在 ready to imitate us in どれでも they saw us do at any time. Only they seem to 恐れる the devil, whom they call Wallesaw; and they say he often appears to some の中で them, whom our men 一般的に call their priest, when they 願望（する） to speak with him on 緊急の 商売／仕事; but the 残り／休憩（する） know not anything of him, nor how he appears, さもなければ than as these priests tell them. Yet they all say they must not 怒り／怒る him, for then he will （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 them, and that いつかs he carries away these their priests. Thus much I have heard from some of them who speak good English.

They marry but one wife, with whom they live till death separates them. At their first coming together the man makes a very small 農園, for there is land enough, and they may choose what 位置／汚点／見つけ出す they please. They delight to settle 近づく the sea, or by some river, for the sake of striking fish, their beloved 雇用.

For within land there are other Indians, with whom they are always at war. After the man has （疑いを）晴らすd a 位置／汚点／見つけ出す of land, and has 工場／植物d it, he seldom minds it afterwards, but leaves the managing of it to his wife, and he goes out a-striking. いつかs he 捜し出すs only for fish, at other times for 海がめ, or manatee, and whatever he gets he brings home to his wife, and never 動かすs out to 捜し出す for more till it is all eaten. When hunger begins to bite he either takes his canoe and 捜し出すs for more game at sea or walks out into the 支持を得ようと努めるd and 追跡（する）s about for peccary, warree, each a sort of wild hogs or deer; and seldom returns empty-手渡すd, nor 捜し出すs for any more so long as any of it lasts. Their 農園s are so small that they cannot subsist with what they produce: for their largest 農園s have not above 20 or 30 plantain-trees, a bed of yams and potatoes, a bush of Indian pepper, and a small 位置／汚点／見つけ出す of pineapples; which last fruit as a main thing they delight in; for with these they make a sort of drink which our men call pine-drink, much esteemed by those Moskitos, and to which they 招待する each other to be merry, 供給するing fish and flesh also. Whoever of them makes of this アルコール飲料 扱う／治療するs his 隣人s, making a little canoe 十分な at a time, and so enough to make them all drunk; and it is seldom that such feasts are made but the party that makes them has some design either to be 復讐d for some 傷害 done him, or to 審議 of such differences as have happened between him and his 隣人s, and to 診察する into the truth of such 事柄s. Yet before they are warmed with drink they never speak one word of their grievances: and the women, who 一般的に know their husband's designs, 妨げる them from doing any 傷害 to each other by hiding their lances, harpoons, 屈服するs and arrows, or any other 武器 that they have.

The Moskitos are in general very civil and 肉親，親類d to the English, of whom they receive a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of 尊敬（する）・点, both when they are 船内に their ships, and also 岸に, either in Jamaica, or どこかよそで, whither they often come with the seamen. We always humour them, letting them go any whither as they will, and return to their country in any 大型船 bound that way, if they please. They will have the 管理／経営 of themselves in their striking, and will go in their own little canoe, which our men could not go in without danger of oversetting: nor will they then let any white man come in their canoe, but will go a-striking in it just as they please: all which we 許す them. For should we cross them, though they should see shoals of fish, or 海がめ, or the like, they will purposely strike their harpoons and 海がめ-アイロンをかけるs aside, or so ちらりと見ること them as to kill nothing. They have no form of 政府 の中で them, but 認める the King of England for their 君主. They learn our language, and take the 知事 of Jamaica to be one of the greatest princes in the world.

While they are の中で the English they wear good 着せる／賦与するs, and take delight to go neat and tight; but when they return again to their own country they put by all their 着せる／賦与するs, and go after their own country fashion, wearing only a small piece of linen tied about their waists, hanging 負かす／撃墜する to their 膝s.

CHAPTER 2.

THE AUTHOR'S LAND JOURNEY FROM THE SOUTH TO THE NORTH SEA, OVER THE TERRA FIRMA, OR ISTHMUS OF DARIEN.

存在 landed May the 1st, we began our march about 3 o'clock in the afternoon, directing our course by our pocket compasses north-east and, having gone about 2 miles, we （機の）カム to the foot of a hill where we built small huts and lay all night; having 過度の rains till 12 o'clock.

The 2nd day in the morning having 好天 we 上がるd the hill, and 設立する a small Indian path which we followed till we 設立する it run too much easterly, and then, 疑問ing it would carry us out of the way, we climbed some of the highest trees on the hill, which was not meanly furnished with as large and tall trees as ever I saw: at length we discovered some houses in a valley on the north 味方する of the hill, but it 存在 法外な could not descend on that 味方する, but followed the small path which led us 負かす／撃墜する the hill on the east 味方する, where we presently 設立する several other Indian houses. The first that we （機の）カム to at the foot of the hill had 非，不，無 but women at home who could not speak Spanish, but gave each of us a good calabash or 爆撃する-十分な of corn-drink. The other houses had some men at home, but 非，不，無 that spoke Spanish; yet we made a 転換 to buy such food as their houses or 農園s afforded, which we dressed and ate all together; having all sorts of our 準備／条項 in ありふれた, because 非，不，無 should live better than others, or 支払う／賃金 dearer for anything than it was 価値（がある）. This day we had marched 6 mile.

In the evening the husbands of those women （機の）カム home and told us in broken Spanish that they had been on board of the guard-ship, which we fled from two days before, that we were now not above 3 mile from the mouth of the river Congo, and that they could go from thence 船内に the guard-ship in half a tide's time.

This evening we supped plentifully on fowls and peccary; a sort of wild hogs which we bought of the Indians; yams, potatoes, and plantains served us for bread, whereof we had enough. After supper we agreed with one of these Indians to guide us a day's march into the country, に向かって the north 味方する; he was to have for his 苦痛s a hatchet, and his 取引 was to bring us to a 確かな Indian's habitation, who could speak Spanish, from whom we were in hopes to be better 満足させるd of our 旅行.

The 3rd day having 好天 we began to 動かす betimes, and 始める，決める out between 6 and 7 o'clock, marching through several old 廃虚d 農園s. This morning one of our men 存在 tired gave us the slip. By 12 o'clock we had gone 8 mile, and arrived at the Indian's house, who lived on the bank of the river Congo and spoke very good Spanish; to whom we 宣言するd the 推論する／理由 of this visit.

At first he seemed to be very 疑わしい of entertaining any discourse with us, and gave impertinent answers to the questions that we 需要・要求するd of him; he told us he knew no way to the north 味方する of the country, but could carry us to Cheapo, or Santa Maria, which we knew to be Spanish 守備隊s; the one lying to the eastward of us, the other to the 西方の: either of them at least 20 miles out of our way. We could get no other answer from him, and all his discourse was in such an angry トン as plainly 宣言するd he was not our friend. However we were 軍隊d to make a virtue of necessity and humour him, for it was neither time nor place to be angry with the Indians; all our lives lying in their 手渡す.

We were now at a 広大な／多数の／重要な loss, not knowing what course to take, for we tempted him with beads, money, hatchets, machetes, or long knives; but nothing would work on him, till one of our men took a sky-coloured petticoat out of his 捕らえる、獲得する and put it on his wife; who was so much pleased with the 現在の that she すぐに began to chatter to her husband, and soon brought him into a better humour. He could then tell us that he knew the way to the north 味方する, and would have gone with us, but that he had 削減（する） his foot two days before, which made him incapable of serving us himself: but he would take care that we should not want a guide; and therefore he 雇うd the same Indian who brought us hither to 行為／行う us two days' march その上の for another hatchet. The old man would have stayed us here all the day because it rained very hard; but our 商売／仕事 要求するd more haste, our enemies lying so 近づく us, for he told us that he could go from his house 船内に the guard-ship in a tide's time; and this was the 4th day since they saw us. So we marched 3 miles さらに先に, and then built huts, where we stayed all night; it rained all the afternoon, and the greatest part of the night.

The 4th day we began our march betimes, for the forenoons were 一般的に fair, but much rain after noon: though whether it rained or 向こうずねd it was much at one with us, for I verily believe we crossed the rivers 30 times this day: the Indians having no paths to travel from one part of the country to another; and therefore guided themselves by the rivers. We marched this day 12 miles, and then built our hut, and lay 負かす／撃墜する to sleep; but we always kept two men on the watch; さもなければ our own slaves might have knocked us on the 長，率いる while we slept. It rained violently all the afternoon and most part of the night. We had much ado to kindle a 解雇する／砲火／射撃 this evening: our huts were but very mean or ordinary, and our 解雇する／砲火／射撃 small, so that we could not 乾燥した，日照りの our 着せる／賦与するs, 不十分な warm ourselves, and no sort of food for the belly; all which made it very hard with us. I 自白する these hardships やめる expelled the thoughts of an enemy, for now, having been 4 days in the country, we began to have but few other cares than how to get guides and food, the Spaniards were seldom in our thoughts.

The 5th day we 始める，決める out in the morning betimes, and, having travelled 7 miles in those wild pathless 支持を得ようと努めるd, by 10 o'clock in the morning we arrived at a young Spanish Indian's house, who had 以前は lived with the Bishop of パナマ. The young Indian was very きびきびした, spoke very good Spanish, and received us very kindly. This 農園 afforded us 蓄える／店 of 準備／条項s, yams, and potatoes, but nothing of any flesh besides 2 fat monkeys we 発射, part whereof we 分配するd to some of our company, who were weak and sickly; for others we got eggs and such refreshments as the Indians had, for we still 供給するd for the sick and weak. We had a Spanish Indian in our company, who first took up 武器 with Captain Sawkins, and had been with us ever since his death. He was 説得するd to live here by the master of the house, who 約束d him his sister in marriage, and to be assistant to him in （疑いを）晴らすing a 農園: but we would not 同意 to part from him here for 恐れる of some treachery, but 約束d to 解放（する） him in two or three days, when we were certainly out of danger of our enemies. We stayed here all the afternoon, and 乾燥した，日照りのd our 着せる／賦与するs and 弾薬／武器, （疑いを）晴らすd our guns, and 供給するd ourselves for a march the next morning.

Our 外科医, Mr. Wafer, （機の）カム to a sad 災害 here: 存在 乾燥した，日照りのing his 砕く, a careless fellow passed by with his 麻薬を吸う lighted and 始める，決める 解雇する／砲火／射撃 to his 砕く, which blew up and scorched his 膝, and 減ずるd him to that 条件 that he was not able to march; wherefore we 許すd him a slave to carry his things, 存在 all of us the more 関心d at the 事故, because liable ourselves every moment to misfortune, and 非，不，無 to look after us but him. This Indian 農園 was seated on the bank of the river Congo, in a very fat 国／地域, and thus far we might have come in our canoe if I could have 説得するd them to it.

The 6th day we 始める，決める out again, having 雇うd another guide. Here we first crossed the river Congo in a canoe, having been from our first 上陸 on the west 味方する of the river, and, 存在 over, we marched to the eastward two miles, and （機の）カム to another river, which we forded several times though it was very 深い. Two of our men were not able to keep company with us, but （機の）カム after us as they were able. The last time we forded the river it was so 深い that our tallest men stood in the deepest place and 手渡すd the sick, weak and short men; by which means we all got over 安全な, except those two who were behind. 予知するing a necessity of wading through rivers frequently in our land-march, I took care before I left the ship to 供給する myself a large 共同の of bamboo, which I stopped at both ends, の近くにing it with wax, so as to keep out any water. In this I 保存するd my 定期刊行物 and other writings from 存在 wet, though I was often 軍隊d to swim. When we were over this river, we sat 負かす／撃墜する to wait the coming of our consorts who were left behind, and in half an hour they （機の）カム. But the river by that time was so high that they could not get over it, neither could we help them over, but 企て，努力，提案 them be of good 慰安, and stay till the river did 落ちる: but we marched two miles さらに先に by the 味方する of the river, and there built our huts, having gone this day six miles. We had 不十分な finished our huts before the river rose much higher, and, 洪水ing the banks, 強いるd us to 除去する into higher ground: but the next night （機の）カム on before we could build more huts, so we lay straggling in the 支持を得ようと努めるd, some under one tree, some under another, as we could find conveniency, which might have been indifferent comfortable if the 天候 had been fair; but the greatest part of the night we had 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の hard rain, with much 雷, and terrible claps of 雷鳴. These hardships and inconveniencies made us all careless, and there was no watch kept (though I believe nobody did sleep) so our slaves, taking the 適切な時期, went away in the night; all but one who was hid in some 穴を開ける and knew nothing of their design, or else fell asleep. Those that went away carried with them our 外科医's gun and all his money.

The next morning 存在 the 8th day, we went to the river's 味方する, and 設立する it much fallen; and here our guide would have us ford it again, which, 存在 深い and the 現在の running swift, we could not. Then we contrived to swim over; those that could not swim we were 解決するd to help over 同様に as we could: but this was not so feasible: for we should not be able to get all our things over. At length we 結論するd to send one man over with a line, who should 運ぶ／漁獲高 over all our things first, and then get the men over. This 存在 agreed on, one George Gayny took the end of a line and made it 急速な／放蕩な about his neck, and left the other end 岸に, and one man stood by the line to （疑いを）晴らす it away to him. But when Gayny was in the 中央 of the water the, line in 製図／抽選 after him, chanced to kink or grow entangled; and he that stood by to （疑いを）晴らす it away stopped the line, which turned Gayny on his 支援する, and he that had the line in his 手渡す threw it all into the river after him, thinking he might 回復する himself; but the stream running very swift, and the man having three hundred dollars at his 支援する, was carried 負かす／撃墜する, and never seen more by us. Those two men whom we left behind the day before, told us afterwards that they 設立する him lying dead in a creek where the eddy had driven him 岸に, and the money on his 支援する; but they meddled not with any of it, 存在 only in care how to work their way through a wild unknown country. This put a period to that contrivance. This was the fourth man that we lost in this land-旅行; for these two men that we left the day before did not come to us till we were in the North Seas, so we 産する／生じるd them also for lost. 存在 失望させるd at getting over the river this way, we looked about for a tree to fell across the river. At length we 設立する one, which we 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する, and it reached （疑いを）晴らす over: on this we passed to the other 味方する, where we 設立する a small plantain-walk, which we soon ransacked.

While we were busy getting plantains our guide was gone, but in いっそう少なく than two hours （機の）カム to us again, and brought with him an old Indian to whom he 配達するd up his 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金; and we gave him a hatchet and 解任するd him, and entered ourselves under the 行為／行う of our new guide: who すぐに led us away, and crossed another river, and entered into a large valley of the fattest land I did ever take notice of; the trees were not very 厚い, but the largest that I saw in all my travels; we saw 広大な／多数の／重要な 跡をつけるs which were made by the peccaries, but saw 非，不，無 of them. We marched in this pleasant country till 3 o'clock in the afternoon, in all about 4 miles, and then arrived at the old man's country house, which was only a habitation for 追跡（する）ing: there was a small plantain-walk, some yams, and potatoes. Here we took up our ４半期/4分の1s for this day and refreshed ourselves with such food as the place afforded, and 乾燥した，日照りのd our 着せる／賦与するs and 弾薬／武器. At this place our young Spanish Indian 供給するd to leave us, for now we thought ourselves past danger. This was he that was 説得するd to stay at the last house we （機の）カム from, to marry the young man's sister; and we 解任するd him によれば our 約束.

The 9th day the old man 行為／行うd us に向かって his own habitation. We marched about 5 miles in this valley; and then 上がるd a hill and travelled about 5 miles さらに先に over two or three small hills before we （機の）カム to any 解決／入植地. Half a mile before we （機の）カム to the 農園s we light of a path, which carried us to the Indians habitations. We saw many 木造の crosses 築くd in the way, which created some jealousy in us that here were some Spaniards: therefore we new-primed all our guns, and 供給するd ourselves for an enemy; but coming into the town 設立する 非，不，無 but Indians, who were all got together in a large house to receive us: for the old man had a little boy with him that he sent before.

They made us welcome to such as they had, which was very mean; for these were new 農園s, the corn 存在 not eared. Potatoes, yams, and plantains they had 非，不，無 but what they brought from their old 農園s. There was 非，不，無 of them spoke good Spanish: two young men could speak a little, it 原因（となる）d us to take more notice of them. To these we made a 現在の, and 願望（する）d them to get us a guide to 行為／行う us to the north 味方する, or part of the way, which they 約束d to do themselves; if we would reward them for it, but told us we must 嘘（をつく） still the next day. But we thought ourselves nearer the North Sea than we were, and 提案するd to go without a guide rather than stay here a whole day: however some of our men who were tired 解決するd to stay behind; and Mr. Wafer our 外科医, who marched in 広大な／多数の／重要な 苦痛 ever since his 膝 was 燃やすd with 砕く, was 解決するd to stay with them.

The 10th day we got up betimes, 解決するing to march, but the Indians …に反対するd it as much as they could; but, seeing they could not 説得する us to stay, they （機の）カム with us; and, having taken leave of our friends, we 始める，決める out.

Here therefore we left the 外科医 and two more, as we said, and marched away to the eastward に引き続いて our guides. But we often looked on our pocket compasses and showed them to the guides, pointing at the way that we would go, which made them shake their 長，率いるs and say they were pretty things, but not convenient for us. After we had descended the hills on which the town stood we （機の）カム 負かす／撃墜する into a valley, and guided ourselves by a river, which we crossed 22 times; and, having marched 9 miles, we built huts and lay there all night: this evening I killed a quaum, a large bird as big as a turkey, wherewith we 扱う／治療するd our guides, for we brought no 準備／条項 with us. This night our last slave ran away.

The eleventh day we marched 10 mile さらに先に, and built huts at night; but went supperless to bed.

The twelfth in the morning we crossed a 深い river, passing over it on a tree, and marched 7 mile in a low swampy ground; and （機の）カム to the 味方する of a 広大な／多数の／重要な 深い river, but could not get over. We built huts upon its banks and lay there all night, upon our borbecus, or でっちあげる，人を罪に陥れるs of sticks raised about 3 foot from the ground.

The thirteenth day when we turned out the river had 洪水d its banks, and was 2 foot 深い in our huts, and our guides went from us, not telling us their 意図, which made us think they were returned home again. Now we began to repent our haste in coming from the 解決／入植地s, for we had no food since we （機の）カム from thence. Indeed we got macaw-berries in this place, wherewith we 満足させるd ourselves this day though coarsely.

The fourteenth day in the morning betimes our guides （機の）カム to us again; and, the waters 存在 fallen within their bounds, they carried us to a tree that stood on the bank of the river, and told us if we could fell that tree across it we might pass: if not, we could pass no さらに先に. Therefore we 始める，決める two of the best axe-men that we had, who felled it 正確に／まさに across the river, and the boughs just reached over; on this we passed very 安全な. We afterwards crossed another river three times, with much difficulty, and at 3 o'clock in the afternoon we （機の）カム to an Indian 解決／入植地, where we met a drove of monkeys, and killed 4 of them, and stayed here all night, having marched this day 6 miles. Here we got plantains enough, and a 肉親，親類d 歓迎会 of the Indian that lived here all alone, except one boy to wait on him.

The fifteenth day when we 始める，決める out, the 肉親，親類d Indian and his boy went with us in a canoe, and 始める，決める us over such places as we could not ford: and, 存在 past those 広大な／多数の／重要な rivers, he returned 支援する again, having helped us at least 2 mile. We marched afterwards 5 mile, and （機の）カム to large plantain-walks, where we took up our ４半期/4分の1s that night; we there fed plentifully on plantains, both 熟した and green, and had 好天 all the day and night. I think these were the largest plantain-walks, and the biggest plantains that ever I saw, but no house 近づく them: we gathered what we pleased by our guide's orders.

The sixteenth day we marched 3 mile and （機の）カム to a large 解決／入植地 where we abode all day: not a man of us but wished the 旅行 at an end; our feet 存在 blistered, and our thighs stripped with wading through so many rivers; the way 存在 almost continually through rivers or pathless 支持を得ようと努めるd. In the afternoon five of us went to 捜し出す for game and killed 3 monkeys, which we dressed for supper. Here we first began to have 好天, which continued with us till we （機の）カム to the North Seas.

The eighteenth day we 始める，決める out at 10 o'clock, and the Indians with 5 canoes carried us a league up a river; and when we landed the 肉親，親類d Indians went with us and carried our 重荷（を負わせる）s. We marched 3 mile さらに先に, and then built our huts, having travelled from the last 解決／入植地s 6 mile.

The nineteenth day our guides lost their way, and we did not march above 2 mile.

The twentieth day by 12 o'clock we （機の）カム to Cheapo River. The rivers we crossed hitherto run all into the South Seas; and this of Cheapo was the last we met with that run that way. Here an old man who （機の）カム from the last 解決／入植地s 分配するd his burthen of plantains amongst us and, taking his leave, returned home. Afterward we forded the river and marched to the foot of a very high mountain, where we lay all night. This day we marched about 9 miles.

The 21st day some of the Indians returned 支援する, and we marched up a very high mountain; 存在 on the 最高の，を越す, we went some miles on a 山の尾根, and 法外な on both 味方するs; then descended a little, and （機の）カム to a 罰金 spring, where we lay all night, having gone this day about 9 miles, the 天候 still very fair and （疑いを）晴らす.

The 22nd day we marched over another very high mountain, keeping on the 山の尾根 5 miles. When we （機の）カム to the north end we, to our 広大な／多数の／重要な 慰安, saw the sea; then we descended, and parted ourselves into 3 companies, and lay by the 味方する of a river, which was the first we met that runs into the North Sea.

The 23rd day we （機の）カム through several large plantain-walks, and at 10 o'clock （機の）カム to an Indian habitation not far from the North Seas. Here we got canoes to carry as 負かす／撃墜する the river Concepcion to the seaside; having gone this day 7 miles. We 設立する a 広大な／多数の／重要な many Indians at the mouth of the river. They had settled themselves here for the 利益 of 貿易（する） with the privateers; and their 商品／必需品s were yams, potatoes, plantains, sugarcane, fowls, and eggs.

The Indians told us that there had been a 広大な／多数の／重要な many English and French ships here, which were all gone but one barcolongo, a French privateer that lay at La Sounds 重要な or Island. This island is about 3 leagues from the mouth of the river Concepcion, and is one of the Samballoes, a 範囲 of islands reaching for about 20 leagues from Point Samballas to Golden Island eastward. These islands or 重要なs, as we call them, were first made the rendezvous of privateers in the year 1679, 存在 very convenient for careening, and had 指名するs given to some of them by the captains of the privateers: as this La Sounds 重要な 特に.

Thus we finished our 旅行 from the South Sea to the North in 23 days; in which time by my account we travelled 110 miles, crossing some very high mountains; but our ありふれた march was in the valleys の中で 深い and dangerous rivers. At our first 上陸 in this country, we were told that the Indians were our enemies; we knew the rivers to be 深い, the wet season to be coming in; yet, excepting those we left behind, we lost but one man, who was 溺死するd, as I said. Our first 上陸 place on the south coast was very disadvantageous, for we travelled at least fifty miles more than we need to have done, could we have gone up Cheapo River, or Santa Maria River; for at either of these places a man may pass from sea to sea in three days time with 緩和する. The Indians can do it in a day and a half, by which you may see how 平易な it is for a party of men to travel over. I must 自白する the Indians did 補助装置 us very much, and I question whether ever we had got over without their 援助, because they brought us from time to time to their 農園s where we always got 準備／条項, which else we should have 手配中の，お尋ね者. But if a party of 500 or 600 men or more were minded to travel from the North to the South Seas they may do it without asking leave of the Indians; though it be much better to be friends with them.

The 24th of May (having lain one night at the river's mouth) we all went on board the privateer, who lay at La Sound's 重要な. It was a French 大型船, Captain Tristian 指揮官. The first thing we did was to get such things as we could to gratify our Indian guides, for we were 解決するd to reward them to their hearts' content. This we did by giving them beads, knives, scissors, and looking-glasses, which we bought of the privateer's 乗組員: and half a dollar a man from each of us; which we would have bestowed in goods also, but could not get any, the privateer having no more toys. They were so 井戸／弁護士席 満足させるd with these that they returned with joy to their friends; and were very 肉親，親類d to our consorts whom we left behind; as Mr. Wafer our 外科医 and the 残り／休憩（する） of them told us when they （機の）カム to us some months afterwards, as shall be said hereafter.

I might have given a その上の account of several things relating to this country; the inland parts of which are so little known to the Europeans. But I shall leave this 州 to Mr. Wafer, who made a longer abode in it than I, and is better able to do it than any man that I know, and is now 準備するing a particular description of this country for the 圧力（をかける）.

CHAPTER 3.

THE AUTHOR'S CRUISING WITH THE PRIVATEERS IN THE NORTH SEAS ON THE WEST INDIA COAST.

The privateer on board which we went 存在 now cleaned, and our Indian guides thus 満足させるd and 始める，決める 岸に, we 始める，決める sail in two days for Springer's 重要な, another of the Samballoes 小島s, and about 7 or 8 leagues from La Sound's 重要な. Here lay 8 sail of privateers more, すなわち:

English 指揮官s and Englishmen:
Captain Coxon, 10 guns, 100 men.
Captain Payne, 10 guns, 100 men.
Captain Wright, a barcolongo. 4 guns, 40 men.
Captain Williams, a small barcolongo.

Captain Yankes, a barcolongo, 4 guns, about 60 men, English, Dutch and French; himself a Dutchman.

French 指揮官s and men:
Captain Archemboe, 8 guns, 40 men.
Captain Tucker, 6 guns, 70 men.
Captain Rose, a barcolongo.

An hour before we （機の）カム to the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い Captain Wright, who had been sent to Chagra River, arrived at Springer's 重要な with a large canoe or periago laden with flour, which he took there. Some of the 囚人s belonging to the periago （機の）カム from パナマ not above six days before he took her, and told the news of our coming 陸路の, and likewise 関係のある the 条件 and strength of パナマ, which was the main thing they enquired after; for Captain Wright was sent thither purposely to get a 囚人 that was able to 知らせる them of the strength of that city, because these privateers designed to join all their 軍隊, and, by the 援助 of the Indians (who had 約束d to be their guides) to march 陸路の to パナマ; and there is no other way of getting 囚人s for that 目的 but by absconding between Chagra and Portobello, because there are much goods brought that way from パナマ; 特に when the armada lies at Portobello. All the 指揮官s were 船内に of Captain Wright when we （機の）カム into the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い; and were mighty inquisitive of the 囚人s to know the truth of what they 関係のある 関心ing us. But as soon as they knew we were come they すぐに （機の）カム 船内に of Captain Tristian, 存在 all overjoyed to see us; for Captain Coxon and many others had left us in the South Seas about 12 months since, and had never heard what became of us since that time. They enquired of us what we did there? how we lived? how far we had been? and what 発見s we made in those seas? After we had answered these general questions they began to be more particular in 診察するing us 関心ing our passage through the country from the South Seas. We 関係のある the whole 事柄; giving them an account of the 疲労，（軍の）雑役s of our march, and the inconveniencies we 苦しむd by the rains; and disheartened them やめる from that design.

Then they 提案するd several other places where such a party of men as were now got together might make a voyage; but the 反対s of some or other still 妨げるd any 訴訟／進行: for the privateers have an account of most towns within 20 leagues of the sea, on all the coast from Trinidad 負かす／撃墜する to La Vera Cruz; and are able to give a 近づく guess of the strength and riches of them: for they make it their 商売／仕事 to 診察する all 囚人s that 落ちる into their 手渡すs 関心ing the country, town, or city that they belong to; whether born there, or how long they have known it? how many families, whether most Spaniards? or whether the major part are not 巡査-coloured, as Mulattoes, Mestizos, or Indians? whether rich, and what their riches do consist in? and what their chiefest 製造（する）s? if 防備を堅める／強化するd, how many 広大な／多数の／重要な guns, and what number of small 武器? whether it is possible to come undescribed on them? How many 警戒／見張りs or sentinels; for such the Spaniards always keep? and how the 警戒／見張りs are placed? Whether possible to 避ける the 警戒／見張りs, or take them? If any river or creek comes 近づく it, or where the best 上陸; with innumerable other such questions, which their curiosities lead them to 需要・要求する. And if they have had any former discourse of such places from other 囚人s they compare one with the other; then 診察する again, and enquire if he or any of them are 有能な to be guides to 行為／行う a party of men thither: if not, where and how any 囚人 may be taken that may do it; and from thence they afterwards lay their 計画／陰謀s to 起訴する whatever design they take in 手渡す.

It was 7 or 8 days after before any 決意／決議 was taken, yet 協議s were held every day. The French seemed very 今後 to go to any town that the English could or would 提案する, because the 知事 of Petit Guavres (from whom the privateers take （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s) had recommended a gentleman lately come from フラン to be general of the 探検隊／遠征隊, and sent word by Captain Tucker, with whom this gentleman （機の）カム, that they should, if possible, make an 試みる／企てる on some town before he returned again. The English, when they were in company with the French, seemed to 認可する of what the French said, but never looked on that general to be fit for the service in 手渡す.

THEY GO TO THE ISLE OF SAN ANDREAS. OF THE CEDARS THERE.

At length it was 結論するd to go to a town, the 指名する of which I have forgot; it lies a 広大な／多数の／重要な way in the country, but not such a tedious march as it would be from hence to パナマ. Our way to it lay up Carpenter's River, which is about 60 leagues to the 西方の of Portobello. Our greatest obstruction in this design was our want of boats: therefore it was 結論するd to go with all our (n)艦隊／(a)素早い to San Andreas, a small uninhabited island lying 近づく the 小島 of Providence, to the 西方の of it, in 13 degrees 15 minutes north latitude, and from Portobello north-north-west about 70 leagues; where we should be but a little way from Carpenter's River. And besides, at this island we might build canoes, it 存在 plentifully 蓄える／店d with large cedars for such a 目的; and for this 推論する／理由 the Jamaica men come hither frequently to build sloops; cedar 存在 very fit for building, and it 存在 to be had here at 解放する／自由な cost; beside other 支持を得ようと努めるd. Jamaica is 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with cedars of its own, 主として の中で the Rocky Mountains: these also of San Andreas grow in stony ground, and are the largest that ever I knew or heard of; the 団体／死体s alone 存在 ordinarily 40 or 50 foot long, many 60 or 70 and 上向きs, and of a proportionable bigness. The Bermudas 小島s are 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with them; so is Virginia, which is 一般に a sandy 国／地域. I saw 非，不，無 in the East Indies, nor in the South Sea coast, except on the Isthmus as I （機の）カム over it. We reckon the periagos and canoes that are made of cedar to be the best of any; they are nothing but the tree itself made hollow boat-wise, with a flat 底（に届く）, and the canoe 一般に sharp at both ends, the periago at one only, with the other end flat. But what is 一般的に said of cedar, that the worm will not touch it, is a mistake, for I have seen of it very much worm-eaten.

All things 存在 thus 結論するd on, we sailed from thence, directing our course に向かって San Andreas. We kept company the first day, but at night it blew a hard 強風 at north-east and some of our ships bore away: the next day others were 軍隊d to leave us, and the second night we lost all our company. I was now belonging to Captain Archembo, for all the 残り／休憩（する） of the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い were over-乗組員を乗せた: Captain Archembo wanting men, we that （機の）カム out of the South Seas must either sail with him or remain の中で the Indians. Indeed we 設立する no 原因（となる） to dislike the captain; but his French seamen were the saddest creatures that ever I was の中で; for though we had bad 天候 that 要求するd many 手渡すs aloft, yet the biggest part of them never stirred out of their hammocks but to eat or 緩和する themselves. We made a 転換 to find the island the fourth day, where we met Captain Wright, who （機の）カム thither the day before, and had taken a Spanish tartane, wherein were 30 men, all 井戸／弁護士席 武装した: she had 4 patereroes and some long guns placed in the swivel on the gunwale. They fought an hour before they 産する／生じるd. The news they 関係のある was that they （機の）カム from Cartagena in company of 11 armadillos (which are small 大型船s of war) to 捜し出す for the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い of privateers lying in the Samballoes: that they parted from the armadillos 2 days before: that they were ordered to search the Samballoes for us, and if they did not find us then they were ordered to go to Portobello, and lay there till they had さらに先に 知能 of us, and he supposed these armadillos to be now there.

We that （機の）カム 陸路の out of the South Seas, 存在 疲れた／うんざりした of living の中で the French, 願望（する）d Captain Wright to fit up his prize the tartane, and make a man-of-war of her for us, which he at first seemed to 拒絶する／低下する, because he was settled の中で the French in Hispaniola, and was very 井戸／弁護士席 beloved both by the 知事 of Petit Guavres, and all the gentry; and they would resent it ill that Captain Wright, who had no occasion of men, should be so unkind to Captain Archembo as to seduce his men from him, he 存在 so meanly 乗組員を乗せた that he could hardly sail his ship with his Frenchmen. We told him we would no longer remain with Captain Archembo, but would go 岸に there and build canoes to 輸送（する） ourselves 負かす／撃墜する to the Moskitos if he would not entertain us; for privateers are not 強いるd to any ship, but 解放する／自由な to go 岸に where they please, or to go into any other ship that will entertain them, only 支払う／賃金ing for their 準備／条項.

When Captain Wright saw our 決意／決議s he agreed with us on 条件 we should be under his 命令（する） as one ship's company, to which we 全員一致で 同意d.

THE CORN ISLANDS, AND THEIR INHABITANTS.

We stayed here about 10 days to see if any more of our (n)艦隊／(a)素早い would come to us; but there （機の）カム no more of us to the island but three, すなわち, Captain Wright, Captain Archembo, and Captain Tucker. Therefore we 結論するd the 残り／休憩（する） were bore away either for Boca Toro or Bluefield's River on the Main; and we designed to 捜し出す them. We had 罰金 天候 while we lay here, only some トルネード，竜巻s, or thundershowers: but in this 小島 of San Andreas, there 存在 neither fish, fowl, nor deer, and it 存在 therefore but an ordinary place for us, who had but little 準備／条項, we sailed from hence again in 追求（する），探索（する） of our scattered (n)艦隊／(a)素早い, directing our course for some islands lying 近づく the Main, called by the privateers the Corn Islands; 存在 in hopes to get corn there. These islands I take to be the same which are 一般に called in the 地図／計画するs the Pearl Islands, lying about the latitude of 12 degrees 10 minutes north. Here we arrived the next day, and went 岸に on one of them, but 設立する 非，不，無 of the inhabitants; for here are but a few poor naked Indians that live here; who have been so often plundered by the privateers that they have but little 準備／条項; and when they see a sail they hide themselves; さもなければ ships that come here would take them, and make slaves of them; and I have seen some of them that have been slaves. They are people of a mean stature, yet strong 四肢s; they are of a dark 巡査-colour, 黒人／ボイコット hair, 十分な 一連の会議、交渉／完成する 直面するs, small 黒人／ボイコット 注目する，もくろむs, their eyebrows hanging over their 注目する，もくろむs, low foreheads, short 厚い noses, not high, but flattish; 十分な lips, and short chins. They have a fashion to 削減（する） 穴を開けるs in the lips of the boys when they are young, の近くに to their chin; which they keep open with little pegs till they are 14 or 15 years old: then they wear 耐えるd in them, made of 海がめ or tortoiseshell, in the form you see in the illustration. The little notch at the upper end they put in through the lip, where it remains between the teeth and the lip; the under-part hangs 負かす／撃墜する over their chin. This they 一般的に wear all day, and when they sleep they take it out. They have likewise 穴を開けるs bored in their ears, both men and women when young; and, by continual stretching them with 広大な／多数の／重要な pegs, they grow to be as big as a milled five-shilling piece. Herein they wear pieces of 支持を得ようと努めるd 削減（する） very 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and smooth, so that their ear seems to be all 支持を得ようと努めるd with a little 肌 about it. Another ornament the women use is about their 脚s, which they are very curious in; for from the 幼少／幼藍期 of the girls their mothers make 急速な／放蕩な a piece of cotton cloth about the small of their 脚, from the ankle to the calf, very hard; which makes them have a very 十分な calf: this the women wear to their dying day. Both men and women go naked, only a clout about their waists; yet they have but little feet, though they go barefoot. Finding no 準備／条項 here we sailed に向かって Bluefield's River, where we careened our tartane; and there Captain Archembo and Captain Tucker left us, and went に向かって Boca Toro.

BLUEFIELD'S RIVER, AND AN ACCOUNT OF THE MANATEE THERE, OR SEA-COW; WITH THE MANNER HOW THE MOSKITO INDIANS KILL THEM, AND TORTOISE, ETC.

This Bluefield's River comes out between the rivers of Nicaragua and Veragna. At its mouth is a 罰金 sandy bay where barks may clean: it is 深い at its mouth but a shoal within; so that ships may not enter, yet barks of 60 or 70 tuns may. It had this 指名する from Captain Bluefield, a famous privateer living on Providence Island long before Jamaica was taken. Which island of Providence was settled by the English, and belonged to the Earls of Warwick.

In this river we 設立する a canoe coming 負かす／撃墜する the stream; and though we went with our canoes to 捜し出す for inhabitants yet we 設立する 非，不，無, but saw in two or three places 調印するs that Indians had made on the 味方する of the river. The canoe which we 設立する was but meanly made for want of 道具s, therefore we 結論するd these Indians have no 商業 with the Spaniards, nor with other Indians that have.

While we lay here, our Moskito men went in their canoe and struck us some manatee, or sea-cow. Besides this Bluefield's River, I have seen of the manatee in the Bay of Campeachy, on the coasts of Boca del Drago, and Boca del Toro, in the river of Darien, and の中で the South 重要なs or little islands of Cuba. I have heard of their 存在 設立する on the north of Jamaica a few, and in the rivers of Surinam in 広大な／多数の／重要な multitudes, which is a very low land. I have seen of them also at Mindanao, one of the Philippine Islands, and on the coast of New Holland. This creature is about the bigness of a horse, and 10 or 12 foot long. The mouth of it is much like the mouth of a cow, having 広大な／多数の／重要な 厚い lips. The 注目する，もくろむs are no bigger than a small pea; the ears are only two small 穴を開けるs on each 味方する of the 長，率いる. The neck is short and 厚い, bigger than the 長，率いる. The biggest part of this creature is at the shoulders where it has two large fins, one on each 味方する of its belly. Under each of these fins the 女性（の） has a small dug to suckle her young. From the shoulders に向かって the tail it 保持するs its bigness for about a foot, then grows smaller and smaller to the very tail, which is flat, and about 14 インチs 幅の広い and 20 インチs long, and in the middle 4 or 5 インチs 厚い, but about the 辛勝する／優位s of it not above 2 インチs 厚い. From the 長，率いる to the tail it is 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and smooth without any fin but those two before について言及するd. I have heard that some have 重さを計るd above 1200 続けざまに猛撃するs, but I never saw any so large. The manatee delights to live in brackish water; and they are 一般的に in creeks and rivers 近づく the sea. It is for this 推論する／理由 かもしれない they are not seen in the South Seas (that ever I could 観察する) where the coast is 一般に a bold shore, that is, high land and 深い water の近くに home by it, with a high sea or 広大な／多数の／重要な 殺到するs, except in the Bay of パナマ; yet even there is no manatee. 反して the West Indies, 存在 as it were one 広大な／多数の／重要な bay composed of many smaller, are mostly low land and shoal water, and afford proper pasture (as I may say) for the manatee. いつかs we find them in salt water, いつかs in fresh; but never far at sea. And those that live in the sea at such places where there is no river nor creek fit for them to enter yet do 一般的に come once or twice in 24 hours to the mouth of any fresh-water river that is 近づく their place of abode. They live on grass 7 or 8 インチs long, and of a 狭くする blade, which grows in the sea in many places, 特に の中で islands 近づく the Main. This grass grows likewise in creeks, or in 広大な／多数の／重要な rivers 近づく the 味方するs of them, in such places where there is but little tide or 現在の. They never come 岸に, nor into shallower water than where they can swim. Their flesh is white, both the fat and the lean, and 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 甘い, wholesome meat. The tail of a young cow is most esteemed; but if old both 長，率いる and tail are very 堅い. A calf that sucks is the most delicate meat; privateers 一般的に roast them; as they do also 広大な／多数の／重要な pieces 削減（する） out of the bellies of the old ones.

The 肌 of the manatee is of 広大な／多数の／重要な use to privateers for they 削減（する） them into ひもで縛るs which they make 急速な／放蕩な on the 味方するs of their canoes, through which they put their oars in 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing, instead of tholes or pegs. The 肌 of the bull or of the 支援する of the cow is too 厚い for this use; but of it they make horse-whips, cutting them 2 or 3 foot long: at the 扱う they leave the 十分な 実体 of the 肌, and from thence 削減（する） it away 次第に減少するing, but very even and square all the four 味方するs. While the thongs are green they 新たな展開 them and hang them to 乾燥した，日照りの; which in a week's time become as hard as 支持を得ようと努めるd. The Moskito men have always a small canoe for their use to strike fish, tortoise, or manatee, which they keep usually to themselves, and very neat and clean. They use no oars but paddles, the 幅の広い part of which does not go 次第に減少するing に向かって the staff, 政治家 or 扱う of it, as in the oar; nor do they use it in the same manner by laying it on the 味方する of the 大型船; but 持つ／拘留する it perpendicular, gripping the staff hard with both 手渡すs, and putting 支援する the water by main strength, and very quick 一打／打撃s. One of the Moskitos (for they go but two in a canoe) sits in the 厳しい, the other ひさまづくs 負かす／撃墜する in the 長，率いる, and both paddle till they come to the place where they 推定する／予想する their game. Then they 嘘（をつく） still or paddle very softly, looking 井戸／弁護士席 about them; and he that is in the 長，率いる of the canoe lays 負かす／撃墜する his paddle, and stands up with his striking-staff in his 手渡す. This staff is about 8 foot long, almost as big as a man's arm at the 広大な／多数の／重要な end, in which there is a 穴を開ける to place his harpoon in. At the other end of his staff there is a piece of light 支持を得ようと努めるd called （頭が）ひょいと動く-支持を得ようと努めるd, with a 穴を開ける in it, through which the small end of the staff comes; and on this piece of （頭が）ひょいと動く-支持を得ようと努めるd there is a line of 10 or 12 fathom 負傷させる neatly about, and the end of the line made 急速な／放蕩な to it. The other end of the line is made 急速な／放蕩な to the harpoon, which is at the 広大な／多数の／重要な end of the staff, and the Moskito men keep about a fathom of it loose in his 手渡す. When he strikes, the harpoon presently comes out of the staff, and as the manatee swims away the line runs off from the （頭が）ひょいと動く; and although at first both staff and （頭が）ひょいと動く may be carried under water, yet as the line runs off it will rise again. Then the Moskito men paddle with all their might to get 持つ／拘留する of the （頭が）ひょいと動く again, and spend usually a ４半期/4分の1 of an hour before they get it. When the Manatee begins to be tired, it lies still, and then the Moskito men paddle to the （頭が）ひょいと動く and take it up, and begin to 運ぶ／漁獲高 in the line. When the manatee feels them he swims away again, with the canoe after him; then he that steers must be nimble to turn the 長，率いる of the canoe that way that his consort points, who, 存在 in the 長，率いる of the canoe, and 持つ／拘留するing the line, both sees and feels which way the manatee is swimming. Thus the canoe is 牽引するd with a violent 動議, till the manatee's strength decays. Then they gather in the line, which they are often 軍隊d to let all go to the very end. At length, when the creature's strength is spent, they 運ぶ／漁獲高 it up to the canoe's 味方する, and knock it on the 長，率いる, and 牽引する it to the nearest shore, where they make it 急速な／放蕩な and 捜し出す for another; which having taken, they get on shore with it to put it into their canoe: for it is so 激しい that they cannot 解除する it in, but they 運ぶ／漁獲高 it up in shoal water, as 近づく the shore as they can, and then overset the canoe, laying one 味方する の近くに to the manatee. Then they roll it in, which brings the canoe upright again; and when they have heaved out the water they fasten a line to the other manatee that lies afloat, and 牽引する it after them. I have known two Moskito men for a week every day bring 船内に 2 manatee in this manner; the least of which has not 重さを計るd いっそう少なく than 600 続けざまに猛撃する, and that in a very small canoe, that three Englishmen would 不十分な adventure to go in. When they strike a cow that has a young one they seldom 行方不明になる the calf, for she 一般的に takes her young under one of her fins. But if the calf is so big that she cannot carry it, or so 脅すd that she only minds to save her own life, yet the young never leaves her till the Moskito men have an 適切な時期 to strike her.

The manner of striking manatee and tortoise is much the same; only when they 捜し出す for manatee they paddle so gently that they make no noise, and never touch the 味方する of their canoe with their paddle, because it is a creature that hears very 井戸／弁護士席. But they are not so nice when they 捜し出す for tortoise, whose 注目する，もくろむs are better than his ears. They strike the tortoise with a square sharp アイロンをかける peg, the other with a harpoon. The Moskito men make their own striking 器具s, as harpoons, fishhooks, and tortoise-アイロンをかけるs or pegs. These pegs, or tortoise-アイロンをかけるs, are made 4-square, sharp at one end, and not much above an インチ in length, of such a 人物／姿／数字 as you see in the illustration. The small spike at the 幅の広い end has a line fastened to it, and goes also into a 穴を開ける at the end of the striking-staff, which when the tortoise is struck 飛行機で行くs off, the アイロンをかける and the end of the line fastened to it going やめる within the 爆撃する, where it is so buried that the tortoise cannot かもしれない escape.

THE MAHO-TREE.

They make their lines both for fishing and striking with the bark of maho; which is a sort of tree or shrub that grows plentifully all over the West Indies, and whose bark is made up of strings, or threads very strong. You may draw it off either in flakes or small threads, as you have occasion. It is fit for any manner of cordage; and privateers often make their 船の索具 of it. So much by way of digression.

When we had cleaned our tartane we sailed from hence, bound for Boca Toro, which is an 開始 between 2 islands about 10 degrees 10 minutes north latitude between the rivers of Veragne and Chagre. Here we met with Captain Yankes, who told us that there had been a (n)艦隊／(a)素早い of Spanish armadillos to 捜し出す us: that Captain Tristian, having fallen to leeward, was coming to Boca Toro, and fell in amongst them, supposing them to be our (n)艦隊／(a)素早い: that they 解雇する／砲火／射撃d and chased him, but he 列／漕ぐ／騒動d and 牽引するd, and they supposed he got away: that Captain 苦痛 was likewise chased by them and Captain Williams; and that they had not seen them since they lay within the islands: that the Spaniards never （機の）カム in to him; and that Captain Coxon was in at the careening-place.

THE SAVAGES OF BOCA TORO.

This Boca Toro is a place that the privateers use to 訴える手段／行楽地 to as much as any place on all the coast, because here is plenty of green tortoise, and a good careening place. The Indians here have no 商業 with the Spaniards; but are very barbarous and will not be dealt with. They have destroyed many privateers, as they did not long after this some of Captain 苦痛's men; who, having built a テント 岸に to put his goods in while he careened his ship, and some men lying there with their 武器, in the night the Indians crept softly into the テント, and 削減（する） off the 長，率いるs of three or four men, and made their escape; nor was this the first time they had served the privateers so. There grow on this coast vinelloes in 広大な／多数の／重要な 量, with which chocolate is perfumed. These I shall 述べる どこかよそで.

HE TOUCHES AGAIN AT POINT SAMBALAS, AND ITS ISLANDS. THE GROVES OF SAPADILLOES THERE, THE SOLDIER'S INSECT, AND MANCHANEEL-TREE.

Our (n)艦隊／(a)素早い 存在 thus scattered, there were now no hopes of getting together again; therefore everyone did what they thought most conducing to 得る their ends. Captain Wright, with whom I now was, was 解決するd to 巡航する on the coast of Cartagena; and, it 存在 now almost the westerly-勝利，勝つd season, we sailed from hence, and Captain Yankes with us; and we consorted, because Captain Yankes had no （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限, and was afraid the French would take away his bark. We passed by Scuda, a small island (where it is said Sir Francis Drake's bowels were buried) and （機の）カム to a small river to 西方の of Chagre; where we took two new canoes, and carried them with us into the Samballoes. We had the 勝利，勝つd at west, with much rain; which brought us to Point Samballas. Here Captain Wright and Captain Yankes left us in the tartane to 直す／買収する，八百長をする the canoes, while they went on the coast of Cartagena to 捜し出す for 準備／条項. We 巡航するd in の中で the islands, and kept our Moskito men, or strikers-out, who brought 船内に some half-grown tortoise; and some of us went 岸に every day to 追跡（する） for what we could find in the 支持を得ようと努めるd: いつかs we got peccary, warree or deer; at other times we light on a drove of large fat monkeys, or quames, curassows (each a large sort of fowl) pigeons, parrots, or 海がめ-doves. We lived very 井戸／弁護士席 on what we got, not staying long in one place; but いつかs we would go on the islands, where there grow 広大な／多数の／重要な groves of sapadilloes, which is a sort of fruit much like a pear, but more juicy; and under those trees we 設立する plenty of 兵士s, a little 肉親，親類d of animals that live in 爆撃するs and have two 広大な／多数の／重要な claws like a crab, and are good food. One time our men 設立する a 広大な／多数の／重要な many large ones, and 存在 sharp-始める，決める had them dressed, but most of them were very sick afterwards, 存在 毒（薬）d by them: for on this island were many manchaneel-trees, whose fruit is like a small crab, and smells very 井戸／弁護士席, but they are not wholesome; and we 一般的に take care of 干渉 with any animals that eat them. And this we take for a general 支配する; when we find any fruits that we have not seen before, if we see them つつく／ペックd by birds, we may 自由に eat, but if we see no such 調印する we let them alone; for of this fruit no birds will taste. Many of these islands have of these manchaneel trees growing on them.

Thus, 巡航するing in の中で these islands, at length we （機の）カム again to La Sound's 重要な; and the day before having met with a Jamaica sloop that was come over on the coast to 貿易（する）, she went with us. It was in the evening when we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者, and the next morning we 解雇する／砲火／射撃d two guns for the Indians that lived on the Main to come 船内に; for by this time we 結論するd we should hear from our five men that we left in the heart of the country の中で the Indians, this 存在 about the latter end of August, and it was the beginning of May when we parted from them. によれば our 期待s the Indians （機の）カム 船内に and brought our friends with them: Mr. Wafer wore a clout about him, and was painted like an Indian; and he was some time 船内に before I knew him. One of them, 指名するd Richard Cobson, died within three or four days after, and was buried on La Sound's 重要な.

After this we went to other 重要なs, to the eastward of these, to 会合，会う Captain Wright and Captain Yankes, who met with a (n)艦隊／(a)素早い of periagos laden with Indian corn, hog and fowls, going to Cartagena; 存在 軍用車隊d by a small armadillo of two guns and six patereroes. Her they chased 岸に, and most of the periagos; but they got two of them off, and brought them away.

THE RIVER OF DARIEN, AND THE WILD INDIANS NEAR IT; MONASTERY OF MADRE DE POPA, RIO GRANDE, SANTA MARTA TOWN, AND THE HIGH MOUNTAIN THERE; RIO LA HACHA TOWN, RANCHO REYS, AND PEARL FISHERY THERE; THE INDIAN INHABITANTS AND COUNTRY.

Here Captain Wright's and Captain Yankes's barks were cleaned; and we 在庫／株d ourselves with corn, and then went に向かって the coast of Cartagena. In our way thither we passed by the river of Darien; which is very 幅の広い at the mouth, but not above 6 foot water on a spring-tide; for the tide rises but little here. Captain Coxon, about 6 months before we （機の）カム out of the South Seas, went up this river with a party of men: every man carried a small strong 捕らえる、獲得する to put his gold in; 推定する／予想するing 広大な／多数の／重要な riches there, though they got little or 非，不，無. They 列／漕ぐ／騒動d up about 100 leagues before they （機の）カム to any 解決／入植地, and then 設立する some Spaniards, who lived there to トラックで運ぶ with the Indians for gold; there 存在 gold 規模s in every house. The Spaniards admired how they （機の）カム so far from the mouth of the river, because there are a sort of Indians living between that place and the sea who are very dreadful to the Spaniards, and will not have any 商業 with them, nor with any white people. They use trunks about 8 foot long, out of which they blow 毒（薬）d darts; and are so silent in their attacks on their enemies, and 退却／保養地 so nimbly again, that the Spaniards can never find them. Their darts are made of macaw-支持を得ようと努めるd, 存在 about the bigness and length of a knitting-needle; one end is 負傷させる about with cotton, the other end is 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の sharp and small; and is jagged with notches like a harpoon: so that whatever it strikes into it すぐに breaks off by the 負わせる of the biggest end; which it is not of strength to 耐える (it 存在 made so slender for that 目的) and is very difficult to be got out again by 推論する／理由 of those notches. These Indians have always war with our Darien friendly Indians, and live on both 味方するs this 広大な／多数の／重要な river 50 or 60 leagues from the sea, but not 近づく the mouth of the river. There are 豊富 of manatee in this river, and some creeks belonging to it. This relation I had from several men who …を伴ってd Captain Coxon in that 発見; and from Mr. Cook in particular, who was with them, and is a very intelligent person: he is now 長，指導者 mate of a ship bound to Guinea. To return therefore to the 起訴 of our voyage: 会合 with nothing of 公式文書，認める, we passed by Cartagena; which is a city so 井戸／弁護士席 known that I shall say nothing of it. We sailed by in sight of it, for it lies open to the sea: and had a fair 見解（をとる） of Madre de Popa, or Nuestra Senora de Popa, a 修道院 of the Virgin Mary, standing on the 最高の，を越す of a very 法外な hill just behind Cartagena. It is a place of incredible wealth, by 推論する／理由 of the offerings made here continually; and for this 推論する／理由 often in danger of 存在 visited by the privateers, did not the neighbourhood of Cartagena keep them in awe. It is in short the very Loreto of the West Indies: it has innumerable 奇蹟s 関係のある of it. Any misfortune that 生じるs the privateers is せいにするd to this lady's doing; and the Spaniards 報告（する）／憶測 that she was abroard that night the Oxford man-of-war was blown up at the 小島 of Vacca 近づく Hispaniola, and that she （機の）カム home all wet; as belike she often returns with her 着せる／賦与するs dirty and torn with passing through 支持を得ようと努めるd and bad ways when she has been out upon any 探検隊／遠征隊; deserving doubtless a new 控訴 for such 著名な pieces of service.

From hence we passed on to the Rio Grande, where we took up fresh water at sea, a league off the mouth of that river. From thence we sailed eastwards passing by Santa Marta, a large town and good harbour belonging to the Spaniards: yet has it within these few years been twice taken by the privateers. It stands の近くに upon the sea, and the hill within land is a very large one, 非常に高い up a 広大な／多数の／重要な 高さ from a 広大な 団体／死体 of land. I am of opinion that it is higher than the Pike of Tenerife; others also that have seen both think the same; though its bigness makes its 高さ いっそう少なく sensible. I have seen it in passing by, 30 leagues off at sea; others, as they told me, above 60: and several have told me that they have seen at once Jamaica, Hispaniola, and the high land of Santa Marta; and yet the nearest of these two places is distant from it 120 leagues; and Jamaica, which is farthest off, is accounted 近づく 150 leagues; and I question whether any land on either of those two islands may be seen 50 leagues. Its 長，率いる is 一般に hid in the clouds; but in （疑いを）晴らす 天候, when the 最高の，を越す appears, it looks white; supposed to be covered with snow. Santa Marta lies in the latitude of 12 degrees north.

存在 前進するd 5 or 6 leagues to the eastward of Santa Marta, we left our ships at 錨，総合司会者 and returned 支援する in our canoes to the Rio Grande; entering it by a mouth of it that disembogues itself 近づく Santa Marta: 目的ing to 試みる／企てる some towns that 嘘（をつく） a pretty way up that river. But, this design 会合 with discouragements, we returned to our ships and 始める，決める sail to the Rio la Hacha. This has been a strong Spanish town, and is 井戸／弁護士席 built; but 存在 often taken by the privateers the Spaniards 砂漠d it some time before our arrival. It lies to the 西方の of a river; and 権利 against the town is a good road for ships, the 底（に届く） clean and sandy. The Jamaica sloops used often to come over to 貿易（する） here: and I am 知らせるd that the Spaniards have again settled themselves in it, and made it very strong. We entered the fort and brought two small guns 船内に. From thence we went to the Rancho Reys, one or two small Indian villages where the Spaniards keep two barks to fish for pearl. The pearl-banks 嘘（をつく） about 4 or 5 leagues off from the shore, as I have been told; thither the fishing barks go and 錨，総合司会者; then the divers go 負かす／撃墜する to the 底（に届く） and fill a basket (which is let 負かす／撃墜する before) with oysters; and when they come up others go 負かす／撃墜する, two at a time; this they do till the bark is 十分な, and then go 岸に, where the old men, women, and children of the Indians open the oysters, there 存在 a Spanish overseer to look after the pearl. Yet these Indians do very often 安全な・保証する the best pearl for themselves, as many Jamaica men can 証言する who daily 貿易（する） with them. The meat they string up, and hang it a-乾燥した，日照りのing. At this place we went 岸に, where we 設立する one of the barks, and saw 広大な／多数の／重要な heaps of oyster-爆撃するs, but the people all fled: yet in another place, between this and Rio La Receba, we took some of the Indians, who seem to be a stubborn sort of people: they are long-visaged, 黒人／ボイコット hair, their noses somewhat rising in the middle, and of a 厳しい look. The Spaniards 報告（する）／憶測 them to be a very 非常に／多数の nation; and that they will not 支配する themselves to their yoke. Yet they have Spanish priests の中で them; and by 貿易（する）ing have brought them to be somewhat sociable; but cannot keep a 厳しい を引き渡す them. The land is but barren, it 存在 of a light sand 近づく the sea, and most savannah, or champaign; and the grass but thin and coarse, yet they 料金d plenty of cattle. Every man knows his own and looks after them; but the land is in ありふれた, except only their houses or small 農園s where they live, which every man 持続するs with some 盗品故買者 about it. They may 除去する from one place to another as they please, no man having 権利 to any land but what he 所有するs. This part of the country is not so 支配する to rain as to the 西方の of Santa Marta; yet here are トルネード，竜巻s, or thundershowers; but neither so violent as on the coast of Portobello, nor so たびたび（訪れる）. The westerly 勝利，勝つd in the westerly-勝利，勝つd season blow here, though not so strong nor 継続している as on the coasts of Cartagena and Portobello.

When we had spent some time here we returned again に向かって the coast of Cartagena; and, 存在 between Rio Grande and that place, we met with westerly 勝利，勝つd, which kept us still to the eastward of Cartagena 3 or 4 days; and then in the morning we descried a sail off at sea, and we chased her at noon: Captain Wright, who sailed best, （機の）カム up with her, and engaged her; and in half an hour after Captain Yankes, who sailed better than the tartane (the 大型船 that I was in) （機の）カム up with her likewise, and laid her 船内に, then Captain Wright also; and they took her before we （機の）カム up. They lost 2 or 3 men, and had 7 or 8 負傷させるd. The prize was a ship of 12 guns and 40 men, who had all good small 武器. She was laden with sugar and タバコ, and 8 or 10 tuns of marmalett on board: she （機の）カム from St. Jago on Cuba, and was bound to Cartagena.

We went 支援する with her to Rio Grande to 直す／買収する，八百長をする our 船の索具 which was 粉々にするd in the fight, and to consider what to do with her; for these were 商品／必需品s of little use to us, and not 価値（がある） going into a port with. At the Rio Grande Captain Wright 需要・要求するd the prize as his 予定 by virtue of his （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限: Captain Yankes said it was his 予定 by the 法律 of privateers. Indeed Captain Wright had the most 権利 to her, having by his （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限 保護するd Captain Yankes from the French, who would have turned him out because he had no （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限; and he likewise began to engage her first. But the company were all afraid that Captain Wright would presently carry her into a port; therefore most of Captain Wright's men stuck to Captain Yankes, and Captain Wright losing his prize 燃やすd his own bark, and had Captain Yankes's, it 存在 bigger than his own; the tartane was sold to a Jamaica 仲買人, and Captain Yankes 命令（する）d the prize-ship. We went again from hence to Rio la Hacha, and 始める，決める the 囚人s 岸に; and it 存在 now the beginning of November we 結論するd to go to Curacao to sell our sugar, if favoured by westerly 勝利，勝つd, which were now come in.

DUTCH ISLE OF CURACAO, ETC.

We sailed from thence, having 好天 and 勝利，勝つd to our mind, which brought us to Curacao, a Dutch island. Captain Wright went 岸に to the 知事, and 申し込む／申し出d him the sale of the sugar: but the 知事 told him he had a 広大な／多数の／重要な 貿易（する） with the Spaniards, therefore he could not 収容する／認める us in there; but if we could go to St. Thomas, which is an island and 解放する／自由な port belonging to the Danes, and a 聖域 for privateers, he would send a sloop with such goods as we 手配中の，お尋ね者, and money to buy the sugar, which he would take at a 確かな 率; but it was not agreed to.

Curacao is the only island of importance that the Dutch have in the West Indies. It is about 5 leagues in length, and may be 9 or 10 in circumference: the northermost point is laid 負かす／撃墜する in north latitude 12 degrees 40 minutes, and it is about 7 or 8 leagues from the main, 近づく Cape Roman. On the south 味方する of the east end is a good harbour called Santa Barbara; but the chiefest harbour is about 3 leagues from the south-east end, on the south 味方する of it where the Dutch have a very good town and a very strong fort. Ships bound in thither must be sure to keep の近くに to the harbour's mouth, and have a hawser or rope ready to send one end 岸に to the fort: for there is no 錨，総合司会者ing at the 入り口 of the harbour, and the 現在の always 始める，決めるs to the 西方の. But 存在 got in, it is a very 安全な・保証する port for ships, either to careen or 嘘（をつく） 安全な. At the east end are two hills, one of them is much higher than the other, and steepest に向かって the north 味方する. The 残り／休憩（する） of the island is indifferent level; where of late some rich men have made sugar-作品; which 以前は was all pasture for cattle: there are also some small 農園s of potatoes and yams, and they have still a 広大な／多数の／重要な many cattle on the island; but it is not so much esteemed for its produce as for its 状況／情勢 for the 貿易（する） with the Spaniard. 以前は the harbour was never without ships from Cartagena and Portobello that did use to buy of the Dutch 1000 or 1500 Negroes at once, besides 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s of European 商品／必需品s; but of late that 貿易（する） is fallen into the 手渡すs of the English at Jamaica: yet still the Dutch have a 広大な 貿易（する） over all the West Indies, sending from Holland ships of good 軍隊 laden with European goods, whereby they make very profitable returns. The Dutch have two other islands here, but of little moment in comparison of Curacao; the one lies 7 or 8 leagues to the 西方の of Curacao, called Aruba; the other 9 or 10 leagues to the eastward of it, called Bonaire. From these islands the Dutch fetch in sloops 準備／条項 for Curacao to 持続する their 守備隊 and Negroes. I was never at Aruba, therefore cannot say anything of it as to my own knowledge; but by 報告（する）／憶測 it is much like Bonaire, which I shall 述べる, only not so big. Between Curacao and Bonaire is a small island called Little Curacao, it is not above a league from 広大な／多数の／重要な Curacao. The king of フラン has long had an 注目する，もくろむ on Curacao and made some 試みる／企てるs to take it, but never yet 後継するd. I have heard that about 23 or 24 years since the 知事 had sold it to the French, but died a small time before the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い （機の）カム to 需要・要求する it, and by his death that design failed.

COUNT D'ESTREE'S UNFORTUNATE EXPEDITION THITHER.

Afterwards, in the year 1678, the Count D'Estree, who a year before had taken the 小島 of Tobago from the Dutch, was sent thither also with a 騎兵大隊 of stout ships, very 井戸／弁護士席 乗組員を乗せた, and fitted with 爆弾s and carcasses; ーするつもりであるing to take it by 嵐／襲撃する. This (n)艦隊／(a)素早い first （機の）カム to Martinique; where, while they stayed, orders were sent to Petit Guavres for all privateers to 修理 thither and 補助装置 the count in his design. There were but two privateers' ships that went thither to him, which were 乗組員を乗せた partly with French, partly with Englishmen. These 始める，決める out with the count; but in their way to Curacao the whole (n)艦隊／(a)素早い was lost on a 暗礁, or 山の尾根 of 激しく揺するs, that runs off from the 小島 of Aves; not above two ships escaping, one of which was one of the privateers; and so that design 死なせる／死ぬd.

ISLE OF BONAIRE.

Wherefore, not 運動ing a 取引 for our sugar with the 知事 of Curacao, we went from thence to Bonaire, another Dutch island, where we met a Dutch sloop come from Europe, laden with Irish beef; which we bought in 交流 for some of our sugar.

Bonaire is the eastermost of the Dutch islands, and is the largest of the three, though not the most かなりの. The middle of the island is laid 負かす／撃墜する in latitude 12 degrees 16 minutes. It is about 20 leagues from the Main, and 9 or 10 from Curacao, and is accounted 16 or 17 leagues 一連の会議、交渉／完成する. The road is on the south-west 味方する, 近づく the middle of the island; where there is a pretty 深い bay runs in. Ships that come from the eastward luff up の近くに to the eastern shore: and let go their 錨，総合司会者 in 60 fathom water, within half a cable's length of the shore. But at the same time they must be ready with a boat to carry a hawser or rope, and make it 急速な／放蕩な 岸に; さもなければ, when the land-勝利，勝つd comes in the night, the ship would 運動 off to sea again; for the ground is so 法外な that no 錨，総合司会者 can 持つ／拘留する if once it starts. About half a mile to the 西方の of this 錨，総合司会者ing-place there is a small low island, and a channel between it and the main island.

The houses are about half a mile within land, 権利 in the road: there is a 知事 lives here, a 副 to the 知事 of Curacao, and 7 or 8 兵士s, with 5 or 6 families of Indians. There is no fort; and the 兵士s in peaceable times have little to do but to eat and sleep, for they never watch but in time of war. The Indians are husbandmen, and 工場／植物 maize and guinea-corn, and some yams, and potatoes: but their chiefest 商売／仕事 is about cattle: for this island is plentifully 在庫／株d with goats: and they send 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s every year in salt to Curacao. There are some horses, and bulls and cows; but I never saw any sheep, though I have been all over the island. The south 味方する is plain low land, and there are several sorts of trees, but 非，不，無 very large. There is a small spring of water by the houses, which serves the inhabitants, though it is blackish. At the west end of the island there is a good spring of fresh water, and three or four Indian families live there, but no water nor houses at any other place. On the south 味方する 近づく the east end is a good salt pond where Dutch sloops come for salt.

1682.

ISLE OF AVES, THE BOOBY AND MAN-OF-WAR-BIRD.

From Bonaire we went to the 小島 of Aves, or Birds; so called from its 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of birds, as men-of-war and ばか者s; but 特に ばか者s. The ばか者 is a waterfowl, somewhat いっそう少なく than a 女／おっせかい屋, of a light grayish colour. I 観察するd the ばか者s of this island to be whiter than others. This bird has a strong 法案, longer and bigger than a crow's and broader at the end: her feet are flat like a duck's feet. It is a very simple creature and will hardly go out of a man's way. In other places they build their nests on the ground, but here they build on trees; which I never saw anywhere else; though I have seen of them in a 広大な／多数の／重要な many places. Their flesh is 黒人／ボイコット and eats fishy, but are often eaten by the privateers. Their numbers have been much 少なくなるd by the French (n)艦隊／(a)素早い which was lost here, as I shall give an account.

The man-of-war (as it is called by the English) is about the bigness of a 道具, and in 形態／調整 like it, but 黒人／ボイコット; and the neck is red. It lives on fish, yet never lights on the water, but 急に上がるs aloft like a 道具, and when it sees its prey it 飛行機で行くs 負かす／撃墜する 長，率いる 真っ先の to the water's 辛勝する／優位 very 速く, takes its prey out of the sea with its 法案, and すぐに 開始するs again as 速く, and never touching the water with his 法案. His wings are very long; his feet are like other land-fowl, and he builds on trees where he finds any; but where they are wanting, on the ground.

This island Aves lies about 8 or 9 leagues to the eastward of the island Bonaire, about 14 or 15 leagues from the Main, and about the latitude of 11 degrees 45 minutes north. It is but small, not above four mile in length, and に向かって the east end not half a mile 幅の広い. On the north 味方する it is low land, 一般的に overflown with the tide; but on the south 味方する there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な rocky bank of 珊瑚 thrown up by the sea. The west end is, for 近づく a mile space, plain even savannah land, without any trees. There are 2 or 3 井戸／弁護士席s dug by privateers, who often たびたび（訪れる） this island, because there is a good harbour about the middle of it on the north 味方する where they may conveniently careen. The 暗礁 or bank of 激しく揺するs on which the French (n)艦隊／(a)素早い was lost, as I について言及するd above, runs along from the east end to the northward about 3 mile, then 傾向s away to the 西方の, making as it were a half moon. This 暗礁 breaks off all the sea, and there is good riding in even sandy ground to the 西方の of it. There are 2 or 3 small low sandy 重要なs or islands within this 暗礁, about 3 miles from the main island.

THE WRECK OF D'ESTREE'S FLEET, AND CAPTAIN PAIN'S ADVENTURE HERE.

The Count d'Estree lost his (n)艦隊／(a)素早い here in this manner. Coming from the eastward, he fell in on the 支援する of the 暗礁, and 解雇する／砲火／射撃d guns to give 警告 to the 残り／休憩（する） of his (n)艦隊／(a)素早い: but they supposing their 海軍大将 was engaged with enemies, hoisted up their topsails, and （人が）群がるd all the sails they could make, and ran 十分な sail 岸に after him; all within half a mile of each other. For his light 存在 in the main-最高の，を越す was an unhappy beacon for them to follow; and there escaped but one king's ship and one privateer. The ships continued whole all day, and the men had time enough, most of them, to get 岸に, yet many 死なせる／死ぬd in the 難破させる; and many of those that got 安全な on the island, for want of 存在 accustomed to such hardships, died like rotten sheep. But the privateers who had been used to such 事故s lived merrily, from whom I had this relation: and they told me that if they had gone to Jamaica with 30 続けざまに猛撃するs a man in their pockets, they could not have enjoyed themselves more: for they kept in a ギャング（団） by themselves, and watched when the ships broke, to get the goods that （機の）カム from them, and though much was 突き破るd against the 激しく揺するs, yet 豊富 of ワイン and brandy floated over the 暗礁, where the privateers waited to take it up. They lived here about three weeks, waiting an 適切な時期 to 輸送（する） themselves 支援する again to Hispaniola; in all which time they were never without two or three hogsheads of ワイン and brandy in their テントs, and バーレル／樽s of beef and pork; which they could live on without bread 井戸／弁護士席 enough, though the newcomers out of フラン could not. There were about forty Frenchmen on board in one of the ships where there was good 蓄える／店 of アルコール飲料, till the after-part of her broke away and floated over the 暗礁, and was carried away to sea, with all the men drinking and singing, who 存在 in drink, did not mind the danger, but were never heard of afterwards.

In a short time after this 広大な／多数の／重要な shipwreck Captain 苦痛, 指揮官 of a privateer of six guns, had a pleasant 事故 生じる him at this island. He （機の）カム hither to careen, ーするつもりであるing to fit himself very 井戸／弁護士席; for here lay driven on the island masts, yards, 木材／素質s, and many things that he 手配中の，お尋ね者, therefore he 運ぶ／漁獲高d into the harbour, の近くに to the island, and unrigged his ship. Before he had done a Dutch ship of twenty guns was sent from Curacao to （問題を）取り上げる the guns that were lost on the 暗礁: but seeing a ship in the harbour, and knowing her to be a French privateer, they thought to take her first, and （機の）カム within a mile of her, and began to 解雇する／砲火／射撃 at her, ーするつもりであるing to warp in the next day, for it is very 狭くする going in. Captain 苦痛 got 岸に some of his guns, and did what he could to resist them; though he did in a manner 結論する he must be taken. But while his men were thus busied he 秘かに調査するd a Dutch sloop turning to get into the road, and saw her at the evening 錨，総合司会者 at the west end of the island. This gave him some hope of making his escape; which he did by sending two canoes in the night 船内に the sloop, who took her, and got かなりの 購入（する） in her; and he went away in her, making a good 報復 and leaving his own empty ship to the Dutch man-of-war.

LITTLE ISLE OF AVES.

There is another island to the eastward of the 小島 of Aves about four league, called by privateers the little 小島 of Aves, which is overgrown with mangrove-trees. I have seen it but was never on it. There are no inhabitants that I could learn on either of these islands, but ばか者s and a few other birds.

Whilst we were at the 小島 of Aves we careened Captain Wright's bark and scrubbed the sugar-prize, and got two guns out of the 難破させるs; continuing here till the beginning of February 1681/2.

We went from hence to the 小島s Los Roques to careen the sugar-prize, which the 小島 of Aves was not a place so convenient for. Accordingly we 運ぶ／漁獲高d の近くに to one of the small islands and got our guns 岸に the first thing we did, and built a breast-work on the point, and 工場／植物d all our guns there to 妨げる an enemy from coming to us while we lay on the careen: then we made a house and covered it with our sails to put our goods and 準備／条項s in. While we lay here, a French man-of-war of 36 guns （機の）カム through the 重要なs or little islands; to whom we sold about 10 tun of sugar. I was 船内に twice or thrice, and very kindly welcomed both by the captain and his 中尉／大尉／警部補, who was a cavalier of Malta; and they both 申し込む／申し出d me 広大な／多数の／重要な 激励 in フラン if I would go with them; but I ever designed to continue with those of my own nation.

THE ISLES LOS ROQUES, THE NODDY AND TROPIC-BIRD, MINERAL WATER, EGG-BIRDS; THE MANGROVE-TREES, BLACK, RED, AND WHITE, ISLE OF TORTUGA, ITS 戦力兵器制限交渉 PONDS.

The islands Los Roques are a 小包 of small uninhabited islands lying about the latitude of 11 degrees 40 minutes about 15 or 16 leagues from the Main, and about 20 leagues north-west by west from Tortuga, and 6 or 7 leagues to the 西方の of Orchilla, another island lying about the same distance from the Main; which island I have seen, but was never at it. Los Roques stretch themselves east and west about 5 leagues, and their breadth about 3 leagues. The 最北の of these islands is the most remarkable by 推論する／理由 of a high white rocky hill at the west end of it, which may be seen a 広大な／多数の／重要な way; and on it there are 豊富 of tropic-birds, men-of-war, ばか者 and noddies, which 産む／飼育する there. The ばか者 and man-of-war I have 述べるd already. The noddy is a small 黒人／ボイコット bird, about the bigness of the English blackbird, and indifferent good meat. They build in 激しく揺するs. We never find them far off from shore. I have seen of them in other places, but never saw any of their nests but in this island, where there is 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of them. The tropic-bird is as big as a pigeon but 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and plump like a partridge. They are all white, except two or three feathers in each wing of a light grey. Their 法案s are of a yellowish colour, 厚い and short. They have one long feather, or rather a quill about 7 インチs long, grows out at the 残余, which is all the tail they have. They are never seen far without either Tropic, for which 推論する／理由 they are called tropic-birds. They are very good food, and we 会合，会う with them a 広大な／多数の／重要な way at sea, and I never saw of them anywhere but at sea and in this island, where they build and are 設立する in 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty.

By the sea on the south 味方する of that high hill there's fresh water comes out of the 激しく揺するs, but so slowly that it 産する／生じる not above 40 gallons in 24 hours, and it tastes so copperish, or aluminous rather, and rough in the mouth, that it seems very unpleasant at first drinking: but after two or three days any water will seem to have no taste.

The middle of this island is low plain land, overgrown with long grass, where there are multitudes of small grey fowls no bigger than a blackbird, yet lay eggs bigger than a magpie's; and they are therefore by privateers called egg-birds. The east end of the island is overgrown with 黒人／ボイコット mangrove-trees.

There are three sorts of mangrove-trees, 黒人／ボイコット, red and white. The 黒人／ボイコット mangrove is the largest tree; the 団体／死体 about as big as an oak, and about 20 feet high. It is very hard and serviceable 木材／素質, but 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 激しい, therefore not much made use of for building. The red mangrove grows 一般的に by the seaside, or by rivers or creeks. The 団体／死体 is not so big as that of the 黒人／ボイコット mangrove, but always grows out of many roots about the bigness of a man's 脚, some bigger some いっそう少なく, which at about 6, 8, or 10 foot above the ground join into one trunk or 団体／死体 that seems to be supported by so many 人工的な 火刑／賭けるs. Where this sort of tree grows it is impossible to march by 推論する／理由 of these 火刑／賭けるs, which grow so mixed one amongst another that I have, when 軍隊d to go through them, gone half a mile, and never 始める，決める my foot on the ground, stepping from root to root. The 木材／素質 is hard and good for many uses. The inside of the bark is red, and it is used for tanning of leather very much all over the West Indies. The white mangrove never grows so big as the other two sorts, neither is it of any 広大な／多数の／重要な use: of the young trees privateers use to make ぼんやり現れる, or 扱うs for their oars, for it is 一般的に straight, but not very strong, which is the fault of them. Neither the 黒人／ボイコット nor white mangrove grow 非常に高い up from stilts or rising roots as the red does; but the 団体／死体 すぐに out of the ground, like other trees.

The land of this east end is light sand which is いつかs overflown with the sea at spring tides. The road for ships is on the south 味方する against the middle of the island. The 残り／休憩（する） of the islands of Los Roques are low. The next to this on the south 味方する is but small, flat, and even, without trees, 耐えるing only grass. On the south 味方する of it is a pond of brackish water which いつかs privateers use instead of better; there is likewise good riding by it. About a league from this are two other islands, not 200 yards distant from each other; yet a 深い channel for ships to pass through. They are both overgrown with red mangrove-trees; which trees, above any of the mangroves, do 繁栄する best in wet 溺死するd land, such as these two islands are; only the east point of the westermost island is 乾燥した，日照りの sand, without tree or bush. On this point we careened, lying on the south 味方する of it.

The other islands are low, and have red mangroves and other trees on them. Here also ships may ride, but no such place for careening as where we lay, because at that place ships may 運ぶ／漁獲高 の近くに to the shore; and, if they had but four guns on the point, may 安全な・保証する the channel, and 妨げる any enemy from coming 近づく them. I 観察するd that within の中で the islands was good riding in many places, but not without the islands, except to the 西方の or south-west of them. For on the east or north-east of these islands the ありふれた 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd blows, and makes a 広大な／多数の／重要な sea: and to the southward of them there is no ground under 70, or 80, or 100 fathom, の近くに by the land.

After we had filled what water we could from hence we 始める，決める out again in April 1682 and （機の）カム to Salt Tortuga, so called to distinguish it from the shoals of 乾燥した，日照りの Tortugas, 近づく Cape Florida, and from the 小島 of Tortugas by Hispaniola, which was called 以前は French Tortugas; though, not having heard any について言及する of that 指名する a 広大な／多数の／重要な while, I am apt to think it is swallowed up in that of Petit Guavres, the 長，指導者 守備隊 the French have in those parts. This island we arrived at is pretty large, uninhabited, and abounds with salt. It is in latitude 11 degrees north, and lies west and a little northerly from Margarita, an island 住むd by the Spaniards, strong and 豊富な; it is distant from it about 14 leagues, and 17 or 18 from Cape Blanco on the Main: a ship 存在 within these islands a little to the southward may see at once the Main, Magarita and Tortuga when it is （疑いを）晴らす 天候. The east end of Tortuga is 十分な of rugged, 明らかにする, broken 激しく揺するs which stretch themselves a little way out to sea. At the south-east part is an indifferent good road for ships, much たびたび（訪れる）d in peaceable times by merchant-ships that come thither to lade salt in the months of May, June, July, and August. For at the east end is a large salt pond, within 200 paces of the sea. The salt begins to kern or 穀物 in April, except it is a 乾燥した，日照りの season; for it is 観察するd that rain makes the salt kern. I have seen above 20 sail at a time in this road come to lade salt; and these ships coming from some of the Caribbean Islands are always 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with rum, sugar and lime-juice to make punch, to hearten their men when they are at work, getting and bringing 船内に the salt; and they 一般的に 供給する the more, in hopes to 会合，会う with privateers who 訴える手段／行楽地 hither in the aforesaid months purposely to keep a Christmas, as they call it; 存在 sure to 会合，会う with アルコール飲料 enough to be merry with, and are very 自由主義の to those that 扱う／治療する them. 近づく the west end of the island, on the south 味方する, there is a small harbour and some fresh water: that end of the island is 十分な of shrubby trees, but the east end is rocky and barren as to trees, producing only coarse grass. There are some goats on it, but not many; and 海がめ or tortoise come upon the sandy bays to lay their eggs, and from thence the island has its 指名する. There is no riding anywhere but in the roads where the salt ponds are, or in the harbour.

ISLE OF BLANCO; THE IGUANA ANIMAL, THEIR VARIETY; AND THE BEST SEA-TORTOISE.

At this 小島 we thought to have sold our sugar の中で the English ships that come hither for salt; but, failing there, we designed for Trinidad, an island 近づく the Main, 住むd by the Spaniards, tolerably strong and 豊富な; but, the 現在の and easterly 勝利，勝つd 妨げるing us, we passed through between Margarita and the Main, and went to Blanco, a pretty large island almost north of Margarita; about 30 leagues from the Main, and in 11 degrees 50 minutes north latitude. It is a flat, even, low, uninhabited island, 乾燥した，日照りの and healthy: most savannah of long grass, and has some trees of lignum-vitae growing in 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs, with shrubby bushes of other 支持を得ようと努めるd about them. It is plentifully 蓄える／店d with iguanas, which are an animal like a lizard, but much bigger. The 団体／死体 is as big as the small of a man's 脚, and from the hindquarter the tail grows 次第に減少するing to the end, which is very small. If a man takes 持つ／拘留する of the tail, except very 近づく the hindquarter, it will part and break off in one of the 共同のs, and the iguana will get away. They lay eggs, as most of those 水陸両性の creatures do, and are very good to eat. Their flesh is much esteemed by privateers, who 一般的に dress them for their sick men; for they make very good broth. They are of divers colours, as almost 黒人／ボイコット, dark brown, light brown, dark green, light green, yellow and speckled. They all live 同様に in the water as on land, and some of them are 絶えず in the water, and の中で 激しく揺するs: these are 一般的に 黒人／ボイコット. Others that live in swampy wet ground are 一般的に on bushes and trees, these are green. But such as live in 乾燥した，日照りの ground, as here at Blanco, are 一般的に yellow; yet these also will live in the water, and are いつかs on trees. The road is on the north-west end against a small cove, or little sandy bay. There is no riding anywhere else, for it is 深い water, and 法外な の近くに to the land. There is one small spring on the west 味方する, and there are sandy bays 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the island, where 海がめ or tortoise come up in 広大な／多数の／重要な 豊富, going 岸に in the night. These that たびたび（訪れる） this island are called green 海がめ, and they are the best of that sort, both for largeness and sweetness of any in all the West Indies. I would here give a particular description of these and other sorts of 海がめ in these seas; but because I shall have occasion to について言及する some other sort of 海がめ when I come again into the South Seas, that are very different from all these, I shall there give a 一般会計 of all these several sorts at once, that the difference between them may be the better discerned. Some of our modern descriptions speak of goats on this island. I know not what there may have been 以前は, but there are 非，不，無 now to my 確かな knowledge; for myself, and many more of our 乗組員, have been all over it.

MODERN ALTERATIONS IN THE WEST INDIES.

Indeed these parts have undergone 広大な／多数の／重要な changes in this last age, 同様に in places themselves as in their owners, and 商品／必需品s of them; 特に Nombre de Dios, a city once famous, and which still 保持するs a かなりの 指名する in some late accounts, is now nothing but a 指名する. For I have lain 岸に in the place where that city stood; but it is all overgrown with 支持を得ようと努めるd, so as to leave no 調印する that any town has been there.

THE COAST OF CARACAS, ITS REMARKABLE LAND, AND PRODUCT OF THE BEST COCOA-NUTS.

We stayed at the 小島 of Blanco not above ten days, and then went 支援する to Salt Tortuga again, where Captain Yankes parted with us: and from thence, after about four days, all which time our men were drunk and quarrelling, we in Captain Wright's ship went to the coast of Caracas on the 本土／大陸. This coast is upon several accounts very remarkable: it is a continued tract of high 山の尾根s of hills and small valleys intermixed for about 20 leagues, stretching east and west but in such manner that the 山の尾根s of hills and the valleys alternately run pointing upon the shore from south to north: the valleys are some of them about 4 or 5, others not above 1 or 2 furlongs wide, and in length from the sea 不十分な any of them above 4 or 5 mile at most; there 存在 a long 山の尾根 of mountains at that distance from the sea-coast, and in a manner 平行の to it, that joins those shorter 山の尾根s, and の近くにs up the south end of the valleys, which at the north ends of them 嘘（をつく） open to the sea, and make so many little sandy bays that are the only 上陸-places on the coast. Both the main 山の尾根 and these shorter ribs are very high land, so that 3 or 4 leagues off at sea the valleys 不十分な appear to the 注目する，もくろむ, but all look like one 広大な／多数の／重要な mountain. From the 小島s of Los Roques about 15, and from the 小島 of Aves about 20 leagues off, we see this coast very plain from on board our ships, yet when at 錨，総合司会者 on this coast we cannot see those 小島s; though again from the 最高の，を越すs of these hills they appear as if at no 広大な／多数の／重要な distance, like so many hillocks in a pond. These hills are barren, except the lower 味方するs of them that are covered with some of the same rich 黒人／ボイコット mould that fills the valleys, and is as good as I have seen. In some of the valleys there's a strong red clay, but in the general they are 極端に fertile, 井戸／弁護士席-watered, and 住むd by Spaniards and their Negroes. They have maize and plantains for their support, with Indian fowls and some hogs.

THE COCOA DESCRIBED AT LARGE, WITH THE HUSBANDRY OF IT.

But the main 製品 of these valleys, and indeed the only 商品／必需品 it vends, are the cocoa-nuts, of which the chocolate is made. The cocoa-tree grows nowhere in the North Seas but in the Bay of Campeachy, on Costa Rica, between Portobello and Nicaragua, 主として up Carpenter's River; and on this coast as high as the 小島 of Trinidad. In the South Seas it grows in the river of Guayaquil, a little to the southward of the Line, and in the valley of Colima, on the south 味方する of the continent of Mexico; both which places I shall hereafter 述べる. Besides these I am 確信して there's no places in the world where the cocoa grows, except those in Jamaica, of which there are now but few remaining, of many and large walks or 農園s of them 設立する there by the English at their first arrival, and since 工場／植物d by them; and even these, though there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of 苦痛s and care bestowed on them, yet seldom come to anything, 存在 一般に blighted. The nuts of this coast of Caracas, though いっそう少なく than those of Costa Rica, which are large flat nuts, yet are better and fatter, in my opinion, 存在 so very oily that we are 軍隊d to use water in rubbing them up; and the Spaniards that live here, instead of parching them to get off the 爆撃する before they 続けざまに猛撃する or rub them to make chocolate, do in a manner 燃やす them to 乾燥した，日照りの up the oil; for else, they say, it would fill them too 十分な of 血, drinking chocolate as they do five or six times a day. My worthy consort Mr. Ringrose commends most the Guayaquil nut; I 推定する because he had little knowledge of the 残り／休憩（する）; for, 存在 intimately 熟知させるd with him, I know the course of his travels and experience: but I am 説得するd, had he known the 残り／休憩（する） so 井戸／弁護士席 as I pretend to have done, who have at several times been long used to, and in a manner lived upon all the several sorts of them above について言及するd, he would prefer the Caracas nuts before any other; yet かもしれない the 乾燥した，日照りのing up of these nuts so much by the Spaniards here, as I said, may 少なくなる their esteem with those Europeans that use their chocolate ready rubbed up: so that we always chose to make it up ourselves.

The cocoa-tree has a 団体／死体 about a foot and a half 厚い (the largest sort) and 7 or 8 foot high, to the 支店s, which are large and spreading like an oak, with a pretty 厚い, smooth, dark green leaf, 形態／調整d like that of a plum-tree, but larger. The nuts are enclosed in cods as big as both a man's 握りこぶしs put together: at the 幅の広い end of which there is a small, 堅い, limber stalk, by which they hang pendulous from the 団体／死体 of the tree, in all parts of it from 最高の，を越す to 底（に届く）, scattered at 不規律な distances, and from the greater 支店s a little way up; 特に at the 共同のs of them or partings, where they hang thickest, but never on the smaller boughs. There may be ordinarily about 20 or 30 of these cods upon a 井戸／弁護士席-耐えるing tree; and they have two 刈るs of them in a year, one in December, but the best in June. The cod itself or 爆撃する is almost half an インチ 厚い; neither spongy nor woody, but of a 実体 between both, brittle, yet harder than the rind of a lemon; like which its surface is 穀物d or knobbed, but more coarse and unequal. The cods at first are of a dark green, but the 味方する of them next the sun of a muddy red. As they grow 熟した, the green turns to a 罰金 有望な yellow, and the muddy to a more lively, beautiful red, very pleasant to the 注目する，もくろむ. They neither ripen nor are gathered at once: but for three weeks or a month when the season is the overseers of the 農園s go every day about to see which are turned yellow; cutting at once, it may be, not above one from a tree. The cods thus gathered they lay in several heaps to sweat, and then, bursting the 爆撃する with their 手渡すs, they pull out the nuts which are the only 実体 they 含む／封じ込める, having no stalk or pith の中で them, and (excepting that these nuts 嘘（をつく） in 正規の／正選手 列／漕ぐ／騒動s) are placed like the 穀物s of maize, but sticking together, and so closely stowed that, after they have been once separated, it would be hard to place them again in so 狭くする a compass. There are 一般に 近づく 100 nuts in a cod; in 割合 to the greatness of which, for it 変化させるs, the nuts are bigger or いっそう少なく. When taken out they 乾燥した，日照りの them in the sun upon mats spread on the ground: after which they need no more care, having a thin hard 肌 of their own, and much oil, which 保存するs them. Salt water will not 傷つける them; for we had our 捕らえる、獲得するs rotten, lying in the 底（に届く） of our ship, and yet the nuts never the worse. They raise the young trees of nuts 始める，決める with the 広大な／多数の／重要な end downward in 罰金 黒人／ボイコット mould, and in the same places where they are to 耐える; which they do in 4 or 5 years' time, without the trouble of 移植（する）ing. There are ordinarily of these trees from 500 to 2000 and 上向き in a 農園 or cocoa-walk, as they call them; and they 避難所 the young trees from the 天候 with plantains 始める，決める about them for two or three years; destroying all the plantains by such time the cocoa-trees are of a pretty good 団体／死体 and able to 耐える the heat; which I take to be the most pernicious to them of anything; for, though these valleys 嘘（をつく） open to the north 勝利，勝つd, unless a little 避難所d here and there by some groves of plantain-trees, which are purposely 始める，決める 近づく the shores of the several bays, yet, by all that I could either 観察する or learn, the cocoas in this country are never blighted, as I have often known them to be in other places. Cocoa-nuts are used as money in the Bay of Campeachy.

CITY OF CARACAS.

The 長，指導者 town of this country is called Caracas; a good way within land, it is a large 豊富な place, where live most of the owners of these cocoa-walks that are in the valleys by the shore; the 農園s 存在 managed by overseers and Negroes. It is in a large savannah country that abounds with cattle; and a Spaniard of my 知識, a very sensible man who has been there, tells me that it is very populous, and he 裁判官s it to be three times as big as Corunna in Galicia. The way to it is very 法外な and craggy, over that 山の尾根 of hills which I say の近くにs up the valleys and partition hills of the cocoa coast.

LA GUAIRE FORT AND HAVEN.

In this coast itself the 長，指導者 place is La Guaira, a good town の近くに by the sea; and, though it has but a bad harbour, yet it is much たびたび（訪れる）d by the Spanish shipping; for the Dutch and English 錨，総合司会者 in the sandy bays that 嘘（をつく） here and there, in the mouths of several valleys, and where there is very good riding. The town is open, but has a strong fort; yet both were taken some years since by Captain Wright and his privateers. It is seated about 4 or 5 leagues to the 西方の of Cape Blanco, which cape is the eastermost 境界 of this coast of Caracas. その上の eastward about 20 leagues is a 広大な／多数の／重要な lake or 支店 of the sea called Laguna de Venezuela; about which are many rich towns, but the mouth of the lake is shallow, that no ship can enter.

TOWN OF CUMANA.

近づく this mouth is a place called Cumana where the privateers were once 撃退するd without daring to 試みる／企てる it any more, 存在 the only place in the North Seas they 試みる／企てるd in vain for many years; and the Spaniards since throw it in their teeth frequently, as a word of reproach or 反抗 to them.

VERINA, ITS FAMOUS BEST SPANISH TOBACCO.

Not far from that place is Verina, a small village and Spanish 農園, famous for its タバコ, という評判の the best in the world.

But to return to Caracas, all this coast is 支配する to 乾燥した，日照りの 勝利，勝つd, 一般に north-east, which 原因（となる）d us to have scabby lips; and we always 設立する it thus, and that in different seasons of the year, for I have been on this coast several times. In other 尊敬（する）・点s it is very healthy, and a 甘い （疑いを）晴らす 空気／公表する. The Spaniards have 警戒／見張りs or scouts on the hills, and breast-作品 in the valleys, and most of their Negroes are furnished with 武器 also for defence of the bays.

THE RICH TRADE OF THE COAST OF CARACAS.

The Dutch have a very profitable 貿易（する） here almost to themselves. I have known three or four 広大な／多数の／重要な ships at a time on the coast, each it may be of thirty or forty guns. They carry hither all sorts of European 商品／必需品s, 特に linen; making 広大な returns, 主として in silver and cocoa. And I have often wondered and regretted it that 非，不，無 of my own countrymen find the way thither 直接／まっすぐに from England; for our Jamaica men 貿易（する） thither indeed, and find the 甘い of it, though they carry English 商品／必需品s at second or third 手渡す.

While we lay on this coast, we went 岸に in some of the bays, and took 7 or 8 tun of cocoa; and after that 3 barks, one laden with hides, the second with European 商品／必需品s, the third with earthenware and brandy. With these 3 barks we went again to the island of Los Roques, where we 株d our 商品／必需品s and separated, having 大型船s enough to 輸送（する） us all whither we thought most convenient. Twenty of us (for we were about 60) took one of the 大型船s and our 株 of the goods, and went 直接／まっすぐに for Virginia.

OF THE SUCKING FISH, OR REMORA.

In our way thither we took several of the sucking-fishes: for when we see them about the ship, we cast out a line and hook, and they will take it with any manner of bait, whether fish or flesh. The sucking-fish is about the bigness of a large whiting, and much of the same make に向かって the tail, but the 長，率いる is flatter. From the 長，率いる to the middle of its 支援する there grows a sort of flesh of a hard gristly 実体 like that of the limpet (a 貝類と甲殻類 次第に減少するing up pyramidically) which sticks to the 激しく揺するs; or like the 長，率いる or mouth of a 爆撃する-snail, but harder. This excrescence is of a flat and oval form, about seven or eight インチs long and five or six 幅の広い; and rising about half an インチ high. It is 十分な of small 山の尾根s with which it will fasten itself to anything that it 会合，会うs with in the sea, just as a snail does to a 塀で囲む. When any of them happen to come about a ship they seldom leave her, for they will 料金d on such filth as is daily thrown overboard, or on mere excrements. When it is 好天, and but little 勝利，勝つd, they will play about the ship; but in blustering 天候, or when the ship sails quick, they 一般的に fasten themselves to the ship's 底（に届く）, from whence neither the ship's 動議, though never so swift, nor the most tempestuous sea can 除去する them. They will likewise fasten themselves to any other bigger fish; for they never swim 急速な／放蕩な themselves if they 会合，会う with anything to carry them. I have 設立する them sticking to a shark after it was 運ぶ／漁獲高d in on the deck, though a shark is so strong and boisterous a fish, and throws about him so 熱心に for half an hour together, it may be, when caught, that did not the sucking-fish stick at no ordinary 率, it must needs be cast off by so much 暴力／激しさ. It is usual also to see them sticking to 海がめ, to any old trees, planks, or the like, that 嘘（をつく） driven at sea. Any knobs or 不平等s at a ship's 底（に届く） are a 広大な／多数の／重要な hindrance to the swiftness of its sailing; and 10 or 12 of these sticking to it must needs retard it as much, in a manner, as if its 底（に届く） were foul. So that I am inclined to think that this fish is the remora, of which the 古代のs tell such stories; if it be not I know no other that is, and I leave the reader to 裁判官. I have seen of these sucking-fishes in 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty in the Bay of Campeachy and in all the sea between that and the coast of Caracas, as about those islands 特に I have lately 述べるd, Los Roques, Blanco, Tortugas, etc. They have no 規模s, and are very good meat.

THE AUTHOR'S ARRIVAL IN VIRGINIA.

We met nothing else 価値（がある） 発言／述べる in our voyage to Virginia, where we arrived in July 1682. That country is so 井戸／弁護士席 known to our nation that I shall say nothing of it, nor shall I 拘留する the reader with the story of my own 事件／事情／状勢s, and the trouble that befell me during about thirteen months of my stay there; but in the next 一時期／支部 enter すぐに upon my second voyage into the South Seas, and 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the globe.

CHAPTER 4.

1683.

THE AUTHOR'S VOYAGE TO THE ISLE OF JUAN FERNANDEZ IN THE SOUTH SEAS.

存在 now entering upon the relation of a new voyage which makes up the main 団体／死体 of this 調書をとる／予約する, 訴訟／進行 from Virginia by the way of Tierra del Fuego, and the South Seas, the East Indies, and so on, till my return to England by the way of the Cape of Good Hope, I shall give my reader this short account of my first 入り口 upon it. の中で those who …を伴ってd Captain Sharp into the South Seas in our former 探検隊／遠征隊, and leaving him there, returned 陸路の, as is said in the Introduction and in the 1st and 2nd 一時期／支部s there was one Mr. Cook, an English native of St. Christopher's, a Cirole, as we call all born of European parents in the West Indies. He was a sensible man, and had been some years a privateer. At our joining ourselves with those privateers, we met at our coming again to the North Seas; his lot was to be with Captain Yankes, who kept company for some かなりの time with Captain Wright, in whose ship I was, and parted with us at our 2nd 錨，総合司会者ing at the 小島 of Tortugas; as I have said in the last 一時期／支部. After our parting, this Mr. Cook 存在 quartermaster under Captain Yankes, the second place in the ship によれば the 法律 of privateers, laid （人命などを）奪う，主張する to a ship they took from the Spaniards; and such of Captain Yankes's men as were so 性質の／したい気がして, 特に all those who （機の）カム with us 陸路の, went 船内に this prize-ship under the new Captain Cook. This 配当 was made at the 小島 of Vacca, or the 小島 of Ash, as we call it; and here they parted also such goods as they had taken. But Captain Cook having no （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限, as Captain Yankes, Captain Tristian, and some other French 指揮官s had, who lay then at that island, and they grudging the English such a 大型船, they all joined together, plundered the English of their ships, goods, and 武器, and turned them 岸に. Yet Captain Tristian took in about 8 or 10 of these English, and carried them with him to Petit Guavres: of which number Captain Cook was one, and Captain Davis another, who with the 残り／休憩（する） 設立する means to 掴む the ship as she lay at 錨，総合司会者 in the road, Captain Tristian and many of his men 存在 then 岸に: and the English sending 岸に such Frenchmen as remained in the ship and were mastered by them, though superior in number, stood away with her すぐに for the 小島 of Vacca before any notice of this surprise could reach the French 知事 of that 小島; so, deceiving him also by a stratagem, they got on board the 残り／休憩（する） of their countrymen who had been left on that island; and going thence they took a ship newly come from フラン laden with ワインs. They also took a ship of good 軍隊, in which they 解決するd to 乗る，着手する themselves, and make a new 探検隊／遠征隊 into the South Seas, to 巡航する on the coast of Chile and Peru. But first they went for Virginia with their prizes; where they arrived the April after my coming thither. The best of their prizes carried 18 guns; this they fitted up there with sails, and everything necessary for so long a voyage; selling the ワインs they had taken for such 準備／条項s as they 手配中の，お尋ね者. Myself and those of our fellow-travellers over the Isthmus of America who （機の）カム with me to Virginia the year before this (most of which had since made a short voyage to Carolina, and were again returned to Virginia) 解決するd to join ourselves to these new adventurers: and as many more engaged in the same design as made our whole 乗組員 consist of about 70 men. So, having furnished ourselves with necessary 構成要素s, and agreed upon some particular 支配するs, 特に of temperance and sobriety, by 推論する／理由 of the length of our ーするつもりであるd voyage, we all went on board our ship.

August 23 1683 we sailed from Achamack in Virginia under the 命令（する） of Captain Cook bound for the South Seas. I shall not trouble the reader with an account of every day's run, but 急いで to the いっそう少なく known parts of the world to give a description of them; only relating such memorable 事故s as happened to us and such places as we touched at by the way.

HE ARRIVES AT THE ISLES OF CAPE VERDE.

We met nothing 価値（がある） 観察 till we （機の）カム to the Islands of Cape Verde, excepting a terrible 嵐／襲撃する which we could not escape: this happened in a few days after we left Virginia; with a south-south-east 勝利，勝つd just in our teeth. The 嵐／襲撃する lasted above a week: it drenched us all like so many 溺死するd ネズミs, and was one of the worst 嵐／襲撃するs I ever was in. One I met with in the East Indies was more violent for the time; but of not above 24 hours continuance.

ISLE OF SAL; ITS 戦力兵器制限交渉 PONDS.

After that 嵐／襲撃する we had favourable 勝利，勝つd and good 天候; and in a short time we arrived at the island Sal, which is one of the eastermost of the Cape Verde Islands. Of these there are 10 in number (so かなりの as to 耐える 際立った 指名するs) and they 嘘（をつく） several degrees off from Cape Verde in Africa, whence they receive that 呼称; taking up about 5 degrees of longitude in breadth, and about as many of latitude in their length, すなわち, from 近づく 14 to 19 north. They are most 住むd by Portuguese banditti. This of Sal is an island lying in the latitude of 16, in longitude 19 degrees 33 minutes west from the Lizard in England, stretching from north to south about 8 or 9 leagues, and not above a league and a half or two leagues wide. It has its 指名する from the 豊富 of salt that is 自然に congealed there, the whole island 存在 十分な of large salt ponds. The land is very barren, producing no tree that I could see, but some small shrubby bushes by the seaside. Neither could I discern any grass; yet there are some poor goats on it.

THE FLAMINGO, AND ITS REMARKABLE NEST.

I know not whether there are any other beasts on the island: there are some wildfowl, but I 裁判官 not many. I saw a few flamingos, which is a sort of large fowl, much like a heron in 形態／調整, but bigger, and of a 赤みを帯びた colour. They delight to keep together in 広大な／多数の／重要な companies, and 料金d in mud or ponds, or in such places where there is not much water: they are very shy, therefore it is hard to shoot them. Yet I have lain obscured in the evening 近づく a place where they 訴える手段／行楽地, and with two more in my company have killed 14 of them at once; the first 発射 存在 made while they were standing on the ground, the other two as they rose. They build their nests in shallow ponds where there is much mud, which they 捨てる together, making little hillocks like small islands appearing out of the water a foot and a half high from the 底（に届く）. They make the 創立／基礎 of these hillocks 幅の広い, bringing them up 次第に減少するing to the 最高の，を越す, where they leave a small hollow 炭坑，オーケストラ席 to lay their eggs in; and when they either lay their eggs or hatch them they stand all the while, not on the hillock but の近くに by it with their 脚s on the ground and in the water, 残り／休憩（する）ing themselves against the hillock and covering the hollow nest upon it with their 残余s: for their 脚s are very long; and building thus, as they do, upon the ground, they could neither draw their 脚s conveniently into their nests, nor sit 負かす／撃墜する upon them さもなければ than by 残り／休憩（する）ing their whole 団体／死体s there, to the prejudice of their eggs or their young, were it not for this admirable contrivance which they have by natural instinct. They never lay more than two eggs and seldom より小数の. The young ones cannot 飛行機で行く till they are almost 十分な-grown; but will run prodigiously 急速な／放蕩な; yet we have taken many of them. The flesh of both young and old is lean and 黒人／ボイコット, yet very good meat, tasting neither fishy nor any way unsavoury. Their tongues are large, having a large knob of fat at the root, which is an excellent bit: a dish of flamingo's tongues 存在 fit for a prince's （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する.

When many of them are standing together by a pond's 味方する, 存在 half a mile distant from a man, they appear to him like a brick 塀で囲む; their feathers 存在 of the colour of new red brick: and they 一般的に stand upright and 選び出す／独身, one by one, 正確に／まさに in a 列／漕ぐ／騒動 (except when feeding) and の近くに by each other. The young ones at first are of a light grey; and as their wing-feathers spring out they grow darker; and never come to their 権利 colour, or any beautiful 形態／調整, under ten or eleven months old. I have seen flamingoes at Rio la Hacha, and at an island lying 近づく the Main of America, 権利 against Curacao, called by privateers Flamingo 重要な, from the multitude of these fowls that 産む／飼育する there: and I never saw of their nests and young but here.

There are not above 5 or 6 men on this island of Sal, and a poor 知事, as they called him, who （機の）カム 船内に in our boat, and about 3 or 4 poor lean goats for a 現在の to our captain, telling him they were the best that the island did afford. The captain, minding more the poverty of the giver than the value of the 現在の, gave him in requital a coat to 着せる／賦与する him; for he had nothing but a few rags on his 支援する and an old hat not 価値（がある） three farthings; which yet I believe he wore but seldom, for 恐れる he should want before he might get another; for he told us there had not been a ship in 3 years before. We bought of him about 20 bushels of salt for a few old 着せる／賦与するs: and he begged a little 砕く and 発射. We stayed here 3 days; in which time one of these Portuguese 申し込む／申し出d to some of our men a lump of ambergris in 交流 for some 着せる／賦与するs, 願望（する）ing them to keep it secret, for he said if the 知事 should know it he should be hanged. At length one Mr. Coppinger bought for a small 事柄; yet I believe he gave more than it was 価値（がある）.

AMBERGRIS WHERE FOUND.

We had not a man in the ship that knew ambergris; but I have since seen it in other places, and therefore am 確かな it was not 権利. It was of a dark colour, like sheep dung, and very soft, but of no smell, and かもしれない it was some of their goat's dung. I afterwards saw some sold at the Nicobars in the East Indies which was of a はしけ colour, but very hard, neither had it any smell; and this also I suppose was a cheat. Yet it is 確かな that in both these places there is ambergris 設立する.

I was told by one John Read, a Bristol man, that he was 見習い工 to a master who 貿易（する）d to these islands of Cape Verde and once as he was riding at an 錨，総合司会者 at Fogo, another of these islands, there was a lump of it swam by the ship, and the boat 存在 岸に he 行方不明になるd it, but knew it to be ambergris, having taken up a lump swimming in the like manner the voyage before, and his master having at several times bought pieces of it of the natives of the 小島 of Fogo so as to 濃厚にする himself その為に. And so at the Nicobars Englishmen have bought, as I have been credibly 知らせるd, 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s of very good ambergris. Yet the inhabitants are so subtle that they will 偽造の it, both there and here: and I have heard that in the 湾 of Florida, whence much of it comes, the native Indians there use the same 詐欺.

Upon this occasion I cannot omit to tell my reader what I learnt from Mr. Hill the 外科医 upon his showing me once a piece of ambergris, which was thus. One Mr. Benjamin Barker, a man that I have been long 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd with, and know him to be a very diligent and 観察するing person, and likewise very sober and 信頼できる, told this Mr. Hill that, 存在 in the Bay of Honduras to procure スピードを出す／記録につける-支持を得ようと努めるd, which grows there in 広大な／多数の／重要な 豊富, and, passing in a canoe over to one of the islands in that bay, he 設立する upon the shore, on a sandy bay there, a lump of ambergris so large that, when carried to Jamaica, he 設立する it to 重さを計る a hundred 続けざまに猛撃する and 上向きs. When he first 設立する it it lay 乾燥した，日照りの above the 示す which the sea then （機の）カム to at high-water; and he 観察するd in it a 広大な／多数の／重要な multitude of beetles: it was of a dusky colour, に向かって 黒人／ボイコット, and about the hardness of mellow cheese, and of a very fragrant smell: this that Mr. Hill showed me, 存在 some of it which Mr. Barker gave him. Besides those already について言及するd, all the places where I have heard that ambergris has been 設立する, at Bermuda and the Bahama Islands in the West Indies, and that part of the coast of Africa with its 隣接する islands which reaches from Mozambique to the Red Sea.

THE ISLES OF ST. NICHOLAS, MAYO, ST. JAGO, FOGO, A BURNING MOUNTAIN; WITH THE REST OF THE ISLES OF CAPE VERDE.

We went from this Island of Sal to St. Nicholas, another of the Cape Verde Islands lying west-south-west from Sal about 22 leagues. We arrived there the next day after we left the other, and 錨，総合司会者d on the south-east 味方する of the island. This is a pretty large island; it is one of the biggest of all the Cape Verde, and lies in a triangular form. The longest 味方する, which lies to the east, is about 30 leagues long, and the other two about 20 leagues each. It is a 山地の barren island, and rocky all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する に向かって the sea; yet in the heart of it there are valleys where the Portuguese, which 住む here, have vineyards and 農園s, and 支持を得ようと努めるd for 燃料. Here are many goats, which are but poor in comparison with those in other places, yet much better than those at Sal: there are likewise many asses. The 知事 of this island （機の）カム 船内に us with three or four gentlemen more in his company who were all indifferently 井戸／弁護士席 着せる／賦与するd, and accoutred with swords and ピストルs; but the 残り／休憩（する） that …を伴ってd him to the seaside, which were about twenty or thirty men more, were but in a ragged garb. The 知事 brought 船内に some ワイン made in the island, which tasted much like Madeira ワイン: it was of a pale colour, and looked 厚い. He told us the 長，指導者 town was in the valley fourteen mile from the bay where we 棒; that he had there under him above one hundred families, besides other inhabitants that lived scattering in valleys more remote. They were all very swarthy; the 知事 was the clearest of them, yet of a dark tawny complexion.

At this island we scrubbed the 底（に届く） of our ship, and here also we dug 井戸／弁護士席s 岸に on the bay, and filled all our water, and after 5 or 6 days stay we went from hence to Mayo, another of the Cape Verde Islands, lying about forty mile east and by south from the other, arriving there the next day and 錨，総合司会者ing on the north-west 味方する of the island. We sent our boat on shore, ーするつもりであるing to have 購入（する）d some 準備／条項, as beef or goats, with which this island is better 在庫／株d than the 残り／休憩（する） of the islands. But the inhabitants would not 苦しむ our men to land; for about a week before our arrival there （機の）カム an English ship, the men of which （機の）カム 岸に pretending friendship, and 掴むd on the 知事 with some others, and, carrying them 船内に, made them send 岸に for cattle to 身代金 their liberties: and yet after this 始める，決める sail, and carried them away, and they had not heard of them since. The Englishman that did this (as I was afterwards 知らせるd) was one Captain 社債 of Bristol. Whether ever he brought 支援する those men again I know not: he himself and most of his men have since gone over to the Spaniards: and it was he who had like to have burnt our ship after this in the Bay of パナマ; as I shall have occasion to relate.

This 小島 of Mayo is but small and environed with shoals, yet a place much たびたび（訪れる）d by shipping for its 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of salt: and though there is but bad 上陸, yet many ships lade here every year. Here are plenty of bulls, cows, and goats; and at a 確かな season of the year, as May, June, July, and August, a sort of small sea-tortoise come hither to lay their eggs; but these 海がめ are not so 甘い as those in the West Indies. The inhabitants 工場／植物 corn, yams, potatoes, and some plantains, and 産む／飼育する a few fowls; living very poor, yet much better than the inhabitants of any other of these islands, St. Jago excepted, which lies four or five leagues to the 西方の of Mayo and is the 長，指導者, the most 実りの多い／有益な, and best 住むd of all the islands of Cape Verde; yet 山地の, and much barren land in it.

On the east 味方する of the 小島 St. Jago is a good port, which in peaceable times 特に is seldom without ships; for this has been long a place which ships have been wont to touch at for water and refreshments, as those outward-bound to the East Indies, English, French and Dutch; many of the ships bound to the coast of Guinea, the Dutch to Surinam, and their own Portuguese (n)艦隊／(a)素早い going for Brazil, which is 一般に about the latter end of September: but few ships call in here in their return to Europe. When any ships are here the country people bring 負かす／撃墜する their 商品／必需品s to sell to the seamen and 乗客s, すなわち, bullocks, hogs, goats, fowls, eggs, plantains, and coconuts, which they will give in 交流 for shirts, drawers, handkerchiefs, hats, waistcoats, breeches, or in a manner for any sort of cloth, 特に linen, for woollen is not much esteemed there. They care not willingly to part with their cattle of any sort but in 交流 for money, or linen, or some other 価値のある 商品／必需品. Travellers must have a care of these people, for they are very thievish; and if they see an 適切な時期 will snatch anything from you and run away with it. We did not touch at this island in this voyage; but I was there before this in the year 1670, when I saw a fort here lying on the 最高の，を越す of a hill and 命令（する）ing the harbour.

The 知事 of this island is 長，指導者 over all the 残り／休憩（する） of the islands. I have been told that there are two large towns on this island, some small villages, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な many inhabitants; and that they make a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of ワイン, such as is that of St. Nicholas. I have not been on any other of the Cape Verde Islands, nor 近づく them; but have seen most of them at a distance. They seem to be 山地の and barren; some of these before-について言及するd 存在 the most 実りの多い／有益な and most たびたび（訪れる）d by strangers, 特に St. Jago and Mayo. As to the 残り／休憩（する） of them, Fogo and Brava are two small islands lying to the 西方の of St. Jago, but of little 公式文書，認める; only Fogo is remarkable for its 存在 a 火山: it is all of it one large mountain of a good 高さ, out of the 最高の，を越す whereof 問題／発行するs 炎上s of 解雇する／砲火／射撃, yet only discerned in the night: and then it may be seen a 広大な／多数の／重要な way at sea. Yet this island is not without inhabitants, who live at the foot of the mountain 近づく the sea. Their 実体 is much the same as in the other islands; they have some goats, fowls, plantains, coconuts, etc., as I am 知らせるd. Of the plantains and coconuts I shall have occasion to speak when I come into the East Indies; and shall defer the giving an account of them till then.

The 残りの人，物 of these Islands of Cape Verde are St. Antonia, St. Lucia, St. Vicente, and Buena Vista: of which I know nothing かなりの.

SHERBOROUGH RIVER ON THE COAST OF GUINEA.

Our 入り口 の中で these islands was from the north-east; for in our passage from Virginia we ran pretty fair toward the coast of Gualata in Africa to 保存する the 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd, lest we should be borne off too much to the 西方の and so lose the islands. We 錨，総合司会者d at the south of Sal and passing by the south of St. Nicholas 錨，総合司会者d again at Mayo, as has been said; where we made the shorter stay, because we could get no flesh の中で the inhabitants, by 推論する／理由 of the 悔いる they had at their 知事, and his men 存在 carried away by Captain 社債. So leaving the 小島s of Cape Verde we stood away to the southward with the 勝利，勝つd at east-north-east, ーするつもりであるing to have touched no more till we （機の）カム to the 海峡s of Magellan. But when we （機の）カム into the latitude of 10 degrees north we met the 勝利，勝つd at south by west and south-south-west. Therefore we altered our 決意／決議s and steered away for the coast of Guinea, and in few days （機の）カム to the mouth of the river of Sherborough, which is an English factory lying south of Sierra Leone. We had one of our men who was 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd there; and by his direction we went in の中で the shoals, and （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者.

THE COMMODITIES AND NEGROES THERE. A TOWN OF THEIRS DESCRIBED.

Sherborough was a good way from us so I can give no account of the place, or our factory there; save that I have been 知らせるd that there is a かなりの 貿易（する） driven there for a sort of red 支持を得ようと努めるd for dyeing, which grows in that country very plentifully, it is called by our people （機の）カム-支持を得ようと努めるd. A little within the shore where we 錨，総合司会者d was a town of Negroes, natives of this coast. It was 審査するd from our sight by a large grove of trees that grew between them and the shore; but we went thither to them several times during the 3 or 4 days of our stay here to refresh ourselves; and they as often （機の）カム 船内に us, bringing with them plantains, sugar-茎, palm-ワインs, rice, fowls, and honey, which they sold us. They were no way shy of us, 存在 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd with the English, by 推論する／理由 of our Guinea factories and 貿易（する）. This town seemed pretty large; the houses are but low and ordinary: but one 広大な／多数の／重要な house in the 中央 of it where their 長，指導者 men 会合，会う and receive strangers: and here they 扱う／治療するd us with palm-ワイン. As to their persons, they are like other Negroes. While we lay here we scrubbed the 底（に届く） of our ship and then filled all our water-樽s; and, buying up 2 puncheons of rice for our voyage, we 出発／死d from hence about the middle of November 1683, 起訴するing our ーするつもりであるd course に向かって the 海峡s of Magellan.

TORNADOES, SHARKS, FLYING-FISH.

We had but little 勝利，勝つd after we got out, and very hot 天候 with some 猛烈な／残忍な トルネード，竜巻s, 一般的に rising out of the north-east which brought 雷鳴, 雷, and rain. These did not last long; いつかs not a ４半期/4分の1 of an hour, and then the 勝利，勝つd would shuffle about to the southward again, and 落ちる flat 静める; for these トルネード，竜巻s 一般的に come against the 勝利，勝つd that is then blowing, as our 雷鳴-clouds are often 観察するd to do in England; but the トルネード，竜巻s I shall 述べる more 大部分は in my 一時期／支部 of 勝利，勝つd, in the 虫垂 to this 調書をとる／予約する. At this time many of our men were taken with fevers yet we lost but one. While we lay in the 静めるs we caught several 広大な／多数の／重要な sharks; いつかs two or three in a day, and ate them all, boiling and squeezing them 乾燥した，日照りの, and then stewing them with vinegar, pepper, etc., for we had but little flesh 船内に. We took the 利益 of every トルネード，竜巻, which （機の）カム いつかs three or four in a day, and carried what sail we could to get to the southward, for we had but little 勝利，勝つd when they were over; and those small 勝利，勝つd between the トルネード，竜巻s were much against us, at south by east and south-south-east till we passed the Equinoctial Line, which we crossed about a degree to the eastward of the meridian of the 小島 of St. Jago, one of the Cape Verde Islands.

1684.

At first we could scarcely 嘘（をつく） south-west but, 存在 got a degree to the southward of the Line, the 勝利，勝つd veered most easterly, and then we stemmed south-west by south and as we got さらに先に to the southward, so the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム about to the eastward and freshened upon us. In the latitude of 3 south we had the 勝利，勝つd at south-east. In the latitude of 5 we had it at east south where it stood a かなりの time and blew a fresh 最高の，を越す-gallant 強風. We then made the best use of it, steering on briskly with all the sail we could make; and this 勝利，勝つd, by the 18th of January carried us into the latitude of 36 south. In all this time we met with nothing worthy 発言／述べる; not so much as a fish except 飛行機で行くing fish, which have been so often 述べるd that I think it needless to do it.

A SEA DEEP AND CLEAR, YET PALE.

Here we 設立する the sea much changed from its natural greenness to a white or palish colour, which 原因（となる）d us to sound, supposing we might strike ground: for whenever we find the colour of the sea to change we know we are not far from land or shoals which stretch out into the sea, running from some land. But here we 設立する no ground with one hundred fathom line. I was this day at noon by reckoning 48 degrees 50 minutes west from the Lizard, the variation by our morning amplitude 15 degrees 10 minutes east, the variation 増加するing. The 20th day one of our 外科医s died much lamented, because we had but one more for such a dangerous voyage.

ISLES OF SIBBEL DE WARD.

January 28 we made the Sibbel de 区s which are 3 islands lying in the latitude of 51 degrees 25 minutes south and longitude west from the Lizard in England, by my account, 57 degrees 28 minutes. The variation here we 設立する to be 23 degrees 10 minutes. I had for a month before we （機の）カム hither endeavoured to 説得する Captain Cook and his company to 錨，総合司会者 at these islands, where I told them we might probably get water, as I then thought, and in 事例／患者 we should 行方不明になる of it here, yet by 存在 good husbands of what we had we might reach Juan Fernandez in the South Seas before our water was spent. This I 勧めるd to 妨げる their designs of going through the 海峡s of Magellan, which I knew would 証明する very dangerous to us; the rather because, our men 存在 privateers and so more wilful and いっそう少なく under 命令（する）, would not be so ready to give a watchful 出席 in a passage so little known. For, although these men were more under 命令（する） than I had ever seen any privateers, yet I could not 推定する／予想する to find them at a minute's call in coming to an 錨，総合司会者 or 重さを計るing 錨，総合司会者: beside, if ever we should have occasion to moor or cast out two 錨，総合司会者s, we had not a boat to carry out or 重さを計る an 錨，総合司会者. These islands of Sibbel de 区s were so 指名するd by the Dutch. They are all three rocky barren islands without any tree, only some dildoe-bushes growing on them: and I do believe there is no water on any one of them, for there was no 外見 of any water. The two northermost we could not come 近づく; but the southermost we （機の）カム の近くに by, but could not strike ground till within two cables' length of the shore, and there 設立する it to be foul rocky ground.

SMALL RED LOBSTERS.

From the time that we were in 10 degrees south till we （機の）カム to these islands we had the 勝利，勝つd between east-north-east and the north-north-east, 好天 and a きびきびした 強風. The day that we made these islands we saw 広大な／多数の／重要な shoals of small lobsters which coloured the sea in red 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs for a mile in compass, and we drew some of them out of the sea in our water-buckets. They were no bigger than the 最高の，を越す of a man's little finger, yet all their claws, both 広大な／多数の／重要な and small, like a lobster. I never saw any of this sort of fish 自然に red but here; for ours on the English coast, which are 黒人／ボイコット 自然に, are not red till they are boiled: neither did I ever anywhere else 会合，会う with any fish of the lobster 形態／調整 so small as these; unless, it may be, shrimps or prawns: Captain Swan and Captain Eaton met also with shoals of this fish in much the same latitude and longitude.

STRAIT LE MAIRE.

Leaving therefore the Sibbel de 区 Islands, as having neither good 船の停泊地 nor water, we sailed on, directing our course for the 海峡s of Magellan. But, the 勝利，勝つd hanging in the wester-board and blowing hard, oft put us by our topsails, so that we could not fetch it. The 6th day of February we fell in with the 海峡s Le Maire, which is very high land on both 味方するs, and the 海峡s very 狭くする. We had the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-west a fresh 強風; and, seeing the 開始 of the 海峡s, we ran in with it, till within four mile of the mouth, and then it fell 静める, and we 設立する a strong tide setting out of the 海峡s to the northward, and like to 創立者 our ship; but whether flood or ebb I know not; only it made such a short cockling sea as if it had been in a race, or place where two tides 会合，会う; for it ran every way, いつかs breaking in over our waist, いつかs over our poop, いつかs over our 屈服する, and the ship 投げ上げる／ボディチェックするd like an eggshell, so that I never felt such uncertain jerks in a ship. At 8 o'clock in the evening we had a small 微風 at west-north-west and steered away to the eastward, ーするつもりであるing to go 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the 明言する／公表するs Island, the east end of which we reached the next day by noon, having a fresh 微風 all night.

STATES ISLAND.

The 7th day at noon, 存在 off the east end of 明言する／公表するs Island, I had a good 観察 of the sun, and 設立する myself in latitude 54 degrees 52 minutes south.

At the east end of 明言する／公表するs Island are three small islands, or rather 激しく揺するs, pretty high, and white with the dung of fowls.

CAPE HORN IN TIERRA DEL FUEGO.

Wherefore having 観察するd the sun, we 運ぶ／漁獲高d up south, designing to pass 一連の会議、交渉／完成する to the southward of Cape Horne, which is the southermost Land of Tierra del Fuego. The 勝利，勝つd hung in the western ４半期/4分の1 betwixt the north-west and the west, so that we could not get much to the 西方の, and we never saw Tierra del Fuego after that evening that we made the 海峡s Le Maire. I have heard that there have been smokes and 解雇する／砲火／射撃s on Tierra del Fuego, not on the 最高の，を越すs of hills, but in plains and valleys, seen by those who have sailed through the 海峡s of Magellan; supposed to be made by the natives.

We did not see the sun at rising or setting ーするために make an amplitude after we left the Sibbel de 区s till we got into the South Sea: therefore I know not whether the variation 増加するd any more or no. Indeed I had an 観察 of the sun at noon in latitude 59 degrees 30 minutes and we were then standing to the southward with the 勝利，勝つd at west by north, and that night the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム about more to the southward of the west and we tacked. I was then in latitude 60 by reckoning, which was the farthest south latitude that ever I was in.

The 14th day of February, 存在 in latitude 57 and to the west of Cape Horne, we had a violent 嵐／襲撃する, which held us to the 3rd day of March, blowing 一般的に south-west and south-west by west and west-south-west, 厚い 天候 all the time with small 霧雨ing rain, but not hard. We made a 転換 however to save 23 バーレル／樽s of rainwater besides what we dressed our victuals withal.

March the 3rd the 勝利，勝つd 転換d at once, and （機の）カム about at south, blowing a 猛烈な／残忍な 強風 of 勝利，勝つd; soon after it （機の）カム about to the eastward, and we stood into the South Seas.

The 9th day, having an 観察 of the sun, not having seen it of late, we 設立する ourselves in latitude 47 degrees 10 minutes and the variation to be but 15 degrees 30 minutes east.

The 勝利，勝つd stood at south-east, we had 好天, and a 穏健な 強風, and the 17th day we were in latitude 36 by 観察, and then 設立する the variation to be but 8 degrees east.

THEIR MEETING WITH CAPTAIN EATON IN THE SOUTH SEAS, AND THEIR GOING TOGETHER TO THE ISLE OF JUAN FERNANDEZ.

The 19th day when we looked out in the morning we saw a ship to the southward of us, coming with all the sail she could make after us: we lay muzzled to let her come up with us, for we supposed her to be a Spanish ship come from Valdivia bound to Lima: we 存在 now to the northward of Valdivia and this 存在 the time of the year when ships that 貿易（する） thence to Valdivia return home. They had the same opinion of us, and therefore made sure to take us, but coming nearer we both 設立する our mistakes. This 証明するd to be one Captain Eaton in a ship sent purposely from London to the South Seas. We あられ／賞賛するd each other, and the captain （機の）カム on board, and told us of his 活動／戦闘s on the coast of Brazil, and in the river of Plate.

He met Captain Swan (one that （機の）カム from England to 貿易（する） here) at the east 入り口 into the 海峡s of Magellan, and they …を伴ってd each other through the 海峡s, and were separated after they were through by the 嵐／襲撃する before-について言及するd. Both we and Captain Eaton 存在 bound for Juan Fernandez 小島, we kept company, and we spared him bread and beef, and he spared us water, which he took in as he passed through the 海峡s.

OF A MOSKITO MAN LEFT THERE ALONE THREE YEARS: HIS ART AND SAGACITY; WITH THAT OF OTHER INDIANS.

March the 22nd 1684, we （機の）カム in sight of the island, and the next day got in and 錨，総合司会者d in a bay at the south end of the island, and 25 fathom water, not two cables' length from the shore. We presently got out our canoe, and went 岸に to see for a Moskito Indian whom we left here when we were chased hence by three Spanish ships in the year 1681, a little before we went to Arica; Captain Watling 存在 then our 指揮官, after Captain Sharp was turned out.

This Indian lived here alone above three years and, although he was several times sought after by the Spaniards, who knew he was left on the island, yet they could never find him. He was in the 支持を得ようと努めるd 追跡（する）ing for goats when Captain Watling drew off his men, and the ship was under sail before he （機の）カム 支援する to shore. He had with him his gun and a knife, with a small horn of 砕く and a few 発射; which, 存在 spent, he contrived a way by notching his knife to saw the バーレル／樽 of his gun into small pieces wherewith he made harpoons, lances, hooks, and a long knife, heating the pieces first in the 解雇する／砲火／射撃, which he struck with his gunflint, and a piece of the バーレル／樽 of his gun, which he 常習的な; having learnt to do that の中で the English. The hot pieces of アイロンをかける he would 大打撃を与える out and bend as he pleased with 石／投石するs, and saw them with his jagged knife; or grind them to an 辛勝する／優位 by long 労働, and harden them to a good temper as there was occasion. All this may seem strange to those that are not 熟知させるd with the sagacity of the Indians; but it is no more than these Moskito men are accustomed to in their own country, where they make their own fishing and striking-器具s, without either (1)偽造する／(2)徐々に進む or anvil; though they spend a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of time about them.

Other wild Indians who have not the use of アイロンをかける, which the Moskito men have from the English, make hatchets of a very hard 石／投石する, with which they will 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する trees (the cotton-tree 特に, which is a soft tender 支持を得ようと努めるd) to build their houses or make canoes; and, though in working their canoes hollow, they cannot dig them so neat and thin, yet they will make them fit for their service. This their digging or hatchet-work they help out by 解雇する／砲火／射撃; whether for the felling of trees or for the making the inside of their canoe hollow. These contrivances are used 特に by the savage Indians of Bluefield's River, 述べるd in the 3rd 一時期／支部, whose canoes and 石／投石する hatchets I have seen. These 石／投石する hatchets are about 10 インチs long, 4 幅の広い, and three インチs 厚い in the middle. They are ground away flat and sharp at both ends: 権利 in the 中央 and （疑いを）晴らす 一連の会議、交渉／完成する it they make a notch, so wide and 深い that a man might place his finger along it and, taking a stick or withe about 4 foot long, they 貯蔵所d it 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the hatchet 長，率いる, in that notch, and so, 新たな展開ing it hard, use it as a 扱う or helve; the 長，率いる 存在 held by it very 急速な／放蕩な. Nor are other wild Indians いっそう少なく ingenious. Those of Patagonia 特に 長，率いる their arrows with flint, 削減（する） or ground; which I have seen and admired. But to return to our Moskito man on the 小島 of Juan Fernandez. With such 器具s as he made in that manner, he got such 準備／条項 as the island afforded; either goats or fish. He told us that at first he was 軍隊d to eat 調印（する）, which is very ordinary meat, before he had made hooks: but afterwards he never killed any 調印（する）s but to make lines, cutting their 肌s into thongs. He had a little house or hut half a mile from the sea, which was lined with goat's 肌; his couch or barbecue of sticks lying along about two foot distant from the ground, was spread with the same, and was all his bedding. He had no 着せる／賦与するs left, having worn out those he brought from Watling's ship, but only a 肌 about his waist. He saw our ship the day before we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者, and did believe we were English, and therefore killed three goats in the morning before we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者, and dressed them with cabbage, to 扱う／治療する us when we （機の）カム 岸に. He （機の）カム then to the seaside to congratulate our 安全な arrival. And when we landed a Moskito Indian 指名するd コマドリ first leapt 岸に and, running to his brother Moskito man, threw himself flat on his 直面する at his feet, who helping him up, and embracing him, fell flat with his 直面する on the ground at コマドリ's feet, and was by him taken up also. We stood with 楽しみ to behold the surprise, and tenderness, and solemnity of this interview, which was exceedingly affectionate on both 味方するs; and when their 儀式s of civility were over we also that stood gazing at them drew 近づく, each of us embracing him we had 設立する here, who was overjoyed to see so many of his old friends come hither, as he thought purposely to fetch him. He was 指名するd Will, as the other was コマドリ. These were 指名するs given them by the English, for they had no 指名するs の中で themselves; and they take it as a 広大な／多数の／重要な favour to be 指名するd by any of us; and will complain for want of it if we do not 任命する them some 指名する when they are with us: 説 of themselves they are poor men, and have no 指名する.

THE ISLAND DESCRIBED.

This island is in latitude 34 degrees 45 minutes and about 120 leagues from the Main. It is about 12 leagues 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, 十分な of high hills, and small pleasant valleys; which if manured would probably produce anything proper for the 気候. The 味方するs of the mountains are part savannahs, part woodland. Savannahs are （疑いを）晴らす pieces of land without 支持を得ようと努めるd; not because more barren than the woodland, for they are frequently 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs of as good land as any, and often are intermixed with woodland.

THE SAVANNAHS OF AMERICA.

In the Bay of Campeachy are very large savannahs, which I have seen 十分な of cattle: but about the river of Plate are the largest that ever I heard of, 50, 60, or 100 miles in length; and Jamaica, Cuba, and Hispaniola have many savannahs intermixed with 支持を得ようと努めるd. Places （疑いを）晴らすd of 支持を得ようと努めるd by art and 労働 do not go by this 指名する, but those only which are 設立する so in the uninhabited parts of America, such as this 小島 of Juan Fernandez; or which were 初めは （疑いを）晴らす in other parts.

The grass in these savannahs at Juan Fernandez is not a long flaggy grass, such as is usually in the savannahs in the West Indies, but a sort of kindly grass, 厚い and 繁栄するing the biggest part of the year. The 支持を得ようと努めるd afford divers sorts of trees; some large and good 木材／素質 for building, but 非，不，無 fit for masts. The cabbage trees of this 小島 are but small and low; yet afford a good 長，率いる, and the cabbage very 甘い. This tree I shall 述べる in the 虫垂, in the Bay of Campeachy.

GOATS AT JUAN FERNANDEZ.

The savannahs are 在庫／株d with goats in 広大な／多数の／重要な herds: but those that live on the east end of the island are not so fat as those on the west end; for though there is much more grass, and plenty of water in every valley, にもかかわらず they 栄える not so 井戸／弁護士席 here as on the west end, where there is いっそう少なく food; and yet there are 設立する greater flocks, and those too fatter and sweeter.

The west end of the island is all high 支持する／優勝者 ground without any valley, and but one place to land; there is neither 支持を得ようと努めるd nor any fresh water, and the grass short and 乾燥した，日照りの.

Goats were first put on the island by Juan Fernandez, who first discovered it on his voyage from Lima to Valdivia; (and discovered also another island about the same bigness, 20 leagues to the 西方の of this.) From those goats these were propagated, and the island has taken its 指名する from this its first discoverer who, when he returned to Lima, 願望（する）d a 特許 for it, designing to settle here; and it was in his second voyage hither that he 始める，決める 岸に three or four goats which have since, by their 増加する, so 井戸／弁護士席 在庫／株d the whole island. But he could never get a 特許 for it, therefore it lies still destitute of inhabitants, though doubtless 有能な of 持続するing 4 or 500 families, by what may be produced off the land only. I speak much within compass; for the savannahs would at 現在の 料金d 1000 長，率いる of cattle besides goats, and the land 存在 cultivated would probably 耐える corn, or wheat, and good peas, yams, or potatoes; for the land in their valleys and 味方するs of the mountains is of a good 黒人／ボイコット 実りの多い／有益な mould. The sea about it is likewise very 生産力のある of its inhabitants.

SEALS. SEA-LIONS.

調印（する）s 群れている as 厚い about this island as if they had no other place in the world to live in; for there is not a bay nor 激しく揺する that one can get 岸に on but is 十分な of them. Sea-lions are here in 広大な／多数の／重要な companies, and fish, 特に snapper and 激しく揺する-fish, are so plentiful that two men in an hour's time will take with hook and line as many as will serve 100 men.

The 調印（する）s are a sort of creatures pretty 井戸／弁護士席 known, yet it may not be amiss to 述べる them. They are as big as calves, the 長，率いる of them like a dog, therefore called by the Dutch the sea-hounds. Under each shoulder grows a long 厚い fin: these serve them to swim with when in the sea, and are instead of 脚s to them when on the land for raising their 団体／死体s up on end, by the help of these fins or stumps, and so having their tail-parts drawn の近くに under them, they 回復する as it were, and throw their 団体／死体s 今後, 製図／抽選 their 妨げる parts after them; and then again rising up, and springing 今後 with their fore parts alternately, they 嘘（をつく） 宙返り／暴落するing thus up and 負かす／撃墜する all the while they are moving on land. From their shoulders to their tails they grow 次第に減少するing like fish, and have two small fins on each 味方する the 残余; which is 一般的に covered with their fins. These fins serve instead of a tail in the sea; and on land they sit on them when they give suck to their young. Their hair is of divers colours, as 黒人／ボイコット, grey, dun, spotted, looking very sleek and pleasant when they come first out of the sea: for these at Juan Fernandez have 罰金 厚い short fur; the like I have not taken notice of anywhere but in these seas. Here are always thousands, I might say かもしれない millions of them, either sitting on the bays, or going and coming in the sea 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the island; which is covered with them (as they 嘘（をつく） at the 最高の，を越す of the water playing and sunning themselves) for a mile or two from the shore. When they come out of the sea they bleat like sheep for their young; and, though they pass through hundreds of others' young ones before they come to their own, yet they will not 苦しむ any of them to suck. The young ones are like puppies, and 嘘（をつく） much 岸に; but when beaten by any of us, they, 同様に as the old ones, will make に向かって the sea, and swim very swift and nimble; though on shore they 嘘（をつく） very sluggishly and will not go out of our ways unless we （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 them, but snap at us. A blow on the nose soon kills them. Large ships might here 負担 themselves with 調印（する）-肌s, and train-oil; for they are 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の fat. 調印（する）s are 設立する 同様に in 冷淡な as hot 気候s; and in the 冷淡な places they love to get on lumps of ice, where they will 嘘（をつく） and sun themselves, as here on the land: they are たびたび（訪れる） in the northern parts of Europe and America, and in the southern parts of Africa, as about the Cape of Good Hope and at the 海峡s of Magellan: and though I never saw any in the West Indies but in the Bay of Campeachy, at 確かな islands called the Alceranes, and at others called the Desarts; yet they are over all the American coast of the South Seas, from Tierra del Fuego up to the Equinoctial Line; but to the north of the Equinox again, in these seas, I never saw any till as far as 21 north latitude. Nor did I ever see any in the East Indies. In general they seem to 訴える手段／行楽地 where there is plenty of fish, for that is their food; and fish, such as they 料金d on, as cods, groupers, etc., are most plentiful on rocky coasts: and such is mostly this western coast of the South America; as I shall その上の relate.

The sea-lion is a large creature about 12 or 14 foot long. The biggest part of his 団体／死体 is as big as a bull: it is 形態／調整d like a 調印（する）, but six times as big. The 長，率いる is like a lion's 長，率いる; it has a 幅の広い 直面する with many long hairs growing about its lips like a cat. It has a 広大な／多数の／重要な goggle 注目する，もくろむ, the teeth three インチs long, about the bigness of a man's thumb: in Captain Sharp's time, some of our men made dice with them. They have no hair on their 団体／死体s like the 調印（する）; they are of a dun colour, and are all 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の fat; one of them 存在 削減（する） up and boiled will 産する／生じる a hogshead of oil which is very 甘い and wholesome to fry meat withal. The lean flesh is 黒人／ボイコット, and of a coarse 穀物; yet indifferent good food. They will 嘘（をつく） a week at a time 岸に if not 乱すd. Where 3 or 4 or more of them come 岸に together they 密談する／（身体を）寄せ集める one on another like swine, and grunt like them, making a hideous noise. They eat fish, which I believe is their ありふれた food.

SNAPPER, A SORT OF FISH.

The snapper is a fish much like a roach, but a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 bigger. It has a large 長，率いる and mouth, and 広大な／多数の／重要な gills. The 支援する is of a 有望な red, the belly of a silver colour: the 規模s are as 幅の広い as a shilling. The snapper is excellent meat. They are in many places in the West Indies and the South Seas: I have not seen them anywhere beside.

ROCK-FISH.

The 激しく揺する-fish is called by seamen a grouper; the Spaniards call it a baccalao, which is the 指名する for cod, because it is much like it. It is rounder than the snapper, of a dark brown colour; and has small 規模s no bigger than a silver penny. This fish is good 甘い meat, and is 設立する in 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty on all the coast of Peru and Chile.

THE BAYS, AND NATURAL STRENGTH OF THIS ISLAND.

There are only two bays in the whole island where ships may 錨，総合司会者; these are both at the east end, and in both of them is a rivulet of good fresh water. Either of these bays may be 防備を堅める／強化するd with little 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金, to that degree that 50 men in each may be able to keep off 1000; and there is no coming into these bays from the west end but with 広大な／多数の／重要な difficulty over the mountains, where if 3 men are placed they may keep 負かす／撃墜する as many as come against them on any 味方する. This was partly experienced by 5 Englishmen that Captain Davis left here, who defended themselves against a 広大な／多数の／重要な 団体／死体 of Spaniards who landed in the bays, and （機の）カム here to destroy them; and though the second time one of their consorts 砂漠d and fled to the Spaniards, yet the other four kept their ground, and were afterwards taken in from hence by Captain Strong of London.

We remained at Juan Fernandez sixteen days; our sick men were 岸に all the time, and one of Captain Eaton's doctors (for he had four in his ship) tending and feeding them with goat and several herbs, whereof here is plenty growing in the brooks; and their 病気s were 主として scorbutic.

CHAPTER 5.

THE AUTHOR DEPARTS FROM JUAN FERNANDEZ. OF THE PACIFIC SEA.

The 8th of April 1684 we sailed from the 小島 of Juan Fernandez with the 勝利，勝つd at south-east. We were now two ships in company: Captain Cook's, whose ship I was in, and who here took the sickness of which he died a while after, and Captain Eaton's. Our passage lay now along the 太平洋の Sea, 適切に so called. For though it be usual with our 地図／計画する-製造者s to give that 指名する to this whole ocean, calling it 損なう Australe, Mal del Zur, or 損なう Pacificum; yet in my opinion the 指名する of the 太平洋の Sea ought not to be 延長するd from south to north さらに先に than from 30 to about 4 degrees south latitude, and from the American shore 西方の 無期限に／不明確に, with 尊敬（する）・点 to my 観察; who have been in these parts 250 leagues or more from land, and still had the sea very 静かな from 勝利，勝つd. For in all this tract of water of which I have spoken there are no dark 雨の clouds, though often a 厚い horizon so as to 妨げる an 観察 of the sun with the quadrant; and in the morning 煙霧のかかった 天候 frequently, and 厚い もやs, but 不十分な able to wet one. Nor are there in this sea any 勝利，勝つd but the 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd, no tempests, no トルネード，竜巻s or ハリケーンs (though north of the 赤道 they are met with 同様に in this ocean as in the 大西洋) yet the sea itself at the new and 十分な of the moon runs with high, large, long 殺到するs, but such as never 勃発する at sea and so are 安全な enough; unless that where they 落ちる in and break upon the shore they make it bad 上陸.

OF THE ANDES, OR HIGH MOUNTAINS IN PERU AND CHILE.

In this sea we made the best of our way toward the Line till in the latitude of 24 south where we fell in with the 本土／大陸 of the South America. All this course of the land, both of Chile and Peru, is vastly high; therefore we kept 12 or 14 leagues off from shore, 存在 unwilling to be seen by the Spaniards dwelling there. The land (特に beyond this, from 24 degrees south latitude 17, and from 14 to 10) is of a most prodigious 高さ. It lies 一般に in 山の尾根s 平行の to the shore, and 3 or 4 山の尾根s one with another, each より勝るing other in 高さ; and those that are farthest within land are much higher than others. They always appear blue when seen at sea: いつかs they are obscured with clouds, but not so often as the high lands in other parts of the world, for here are seldom or never any rains on these hills, any more than in the sea 近づく it; neither are they 支配する to 霧s. These are the highest mountains that ever I saw, far より勝るing the Pike of Tenerife or Santa Marta and, I believe, any mountains in the world.

I have seen very high land in the latitude of 30 south, but not so high as in the latitudes before 述べるd. In Sir John Narborough's voyage also to Valdivia (a city on this coast) について言及する is made of very high land seen 近づく Valdivia: and the Spaniards with whom I have discoursed have told me that there is a very high land all the way between Coquimbo (which lies in about 30 degrees south latitude) and Valdivia, which is in 40 south; so that by all 見込み these 山の尾根s of mountains do run in a continued chain from one end of Peru and Chile to the other, all along this South Sea coast, called usually the Andes, or Sierra Nevada des Andes. The 過度の 高さ of these mountains may かもしれない be the 推論する／理由 that there are no rivers of 公式文書，認める that 落ちる into these seas. Some small rivers indeed there are, but very few of them, for in some places there is not one that comes out into the sea in 150 or 200 leagues, and where they are thickest they are 30, 40, or 50 leagues asunder, and too little and shallow to be navigable. Besides, some of these do not 絶えず run, but are 乾燥した，日照りの at 確かな seasons of the year; as the river of Ylo runs 紅潮／摘発する with a quick 現在の at the latter end of January, and so continues till June, and then it 減少（する）s by degrees, growing いっそう少なく, and running slow till the latter end of September, when it fails wholly, and runs no more till January again: this I have seen at both seasons in two former voyages I made hither, and have been 知らせるd by the Spaniards that other rivers on this coast are of the like nature, 存在 rather 激流s or land-floods 原因（となる）d by their rains at 確かな seasons far within land than perennial streams.

A PRIZE TAKEN.

We kept still along in sight of this coast but at a good distance from it, 遭遇（する）ing with nothing of 公式文書，認める till in the latitude of 9 degrees 40 minutes south. On the 3rd of May we descried a sail to the northward of us. She was plying to windward, we chased her, and Captain Eaton 存在 ahead soon took her: she （機の）カム from Guayaquil about a month before, laden with 木材／素質, and was bound to Lima. Three days before we took her she （機の）カム from Santa, whither she had gone for water, and where they had news of our 存在 in these seas by an 表明する from Valdivia, for, as we afterwards heard, Captain Swan had been at Valdivia to 捜し出す a 貿易（する） there; and he having met Captain Eaton in the 海峡s of Magellan, the Spaniards of Valdivia were doubtless 知らせるd of us by him, 嫌疑者，容疑者／疑うing him also to be one of us, though he was not. Upon this news the viceroy of Lima sent 表明するs to all the sea ports, that they might 供給する themselves against our 強襲，強姦s.

ISLE OF LOBOS: PENGUINS AND OTHER BIRDS THERE.

We すぐに steered away for the island Lobos which lies in latitude 6 degrees 24 minutes south latitude (I took the elevation of it 岸に with an astrolabe) and it is 5 leagues from the Main. It is called Lobos de la 損なう, to distinguish it from another that is not far from it, and 極端に like it, called Lobos de la Terra, for it lies nearer the main. Lobos, or Lovos, is the Spanish 指名する for a 調印（する）, of which there are 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty about these and several other islands in these seas that go by this 指名する.

The 9th of May we arrived at this 小島 of Lobos de la 損なう and （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 with our prize. This Lobos consists indeed of two little islands, each about a mile 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, of an indifferent 高さ, a small channel between, fit for boats only; and several 激しく揺するs lying on the north 味方する of the islands, a little way from shore. There is a small cove or sandy bay 避難所d from the 勝利，勝つd at the west end of the eastermost island, where ships may careen: the 残り／休憩（する） of the shore, 同様に 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the two islands as between them, is a rocky coast consisting of small cliffs. Within land they are both of them partly rocky, and partly sandy, barren, without any fresh water, tree, shrub, grass, or herbs; or any land animals (for the 調印（する）s and sea-lions come 岸に here) but fowls, of which there are 広大な／多数の／重要な multitudes; as ばか者s, but mostly penguins, which I have seen plentifully all over the South Seas, on the coast of Newfoundland, and of the Cape of Good Hope. They are a sea-fowl, about as big as a duck, and such feet; but a sharp 法案, feeding on fish. They do not 飛行機で行く, but ぱたぱたする, having rather stumps like a young gosling's than wings: and these are instead of fins to them in the water. Their feathers are downy. Their flesh is but ordinary food but their eggs are good meat. There is another sort of small 黒人／ボイコット fowl that makes 穴を開けるs in the sand for their night habitations whose flesh is good 甘い meat. I never saw any of them but here and at Juan Fernandez.

There is good riding between the eastermost island and the 激しく揺するs in ten, twelve, or fourteen fathom, for the 勝利，勝つd is 一般的に at south or south-south-east, and the eastermost island lying east and west, 避難所s that road.

Here we scrubbed our ships and, 存在 in a 準備完了 to sail, the 囚人s were 診察するd to know if any of them could 行為／行う us to some town where we might make some 試みる／企てる; for they had before 知らせるd us that we were descried by the Spaniards, and by that we knew that they would send no riches by sea so long as we were here. Many towns were considered on, as Guayaquil, Zana, Truxillo, and others: at last Truxillo was pitched on as the most important, therefore the likeliest to make us a voyage if we could 征服する／打ち勝つ it: which we did not much question though we knew it to be a very populous city. But the greatest difficulty was in 上陸; for Guanchaquo, which is the nearest sea port to it, but six miles off, is an ill place to land, since いつかs the very fishermen that live there are not able to go in three or four days.

THREE PRIZES MORE.

However the 17th of May in the afternoon our men were 召集（する）d of both ships' companies, and their 武器 証明するd. We were in all 108 men fit for service besides the sick: and the next day we ーするつもりであるd to sail and take the 支持を得ようと努めるd prize with us. But the next day, one of our men 存在 岸に betimes on the island, 述べるd three sail bound to the northward; two of them without the island to the 西方の, the other between it and the continent.

We soon got our 錨，総合司会者s up and chased: and Captain Eaton, who drew the least draught of water, put through between the westermost island and the 激しく揺するs, and went after those two that were without the islands. We in Captain Cook's ship went after the other, which stood in for the 本土／大陸, but we soon fetched her up and, having taken her, stood in again with her to the island; for we saw that Captain Eaton 手配中の，お尋ね者 no help, having taken both those that he went after. He （機の）カム in with one of his prizes; but the other was so far to leeward and so 深い that he could not then get her in, but he hoped to get her in the next day: but 存在 深い laden, as designed to go 負かす／撃墜する before the 勝利，勝つd to パナマ, she would not 耐える sail.

The 19th day she turned all day, but got nothing nearer the island. Our Moskito strikers, によれば their custom, went and struck six 海がめs; for here are indifferent plenty of them. These ships that we took the day before we （機の）カム from Guanchaquo, all three laden with flour, bound for パナマ. Two of them were laden as 深い as they could swim, the other was not above half laden, but was ordered by the viceroy of Lima to sail with the other two, or else she should not sail till we were gone out of the seas; for he hoped they might escape us by setting out 早期に. In the biggest ship was a letter to the 大統領，／社長 of パナマ from the viceroy of Lima; 保証するing him that there were enemies come into that sea; for which 推論する／理由 he had 派遣（する）d these three ships with flour, that they might not want (for パナマ is 供給（する）d from Peru) and 願望（する）d him to be frugal of it, for he knew not when he should send more. In this ship were likewise 7 or 8 tuns of marmalade of quinces, and a stately mule sent to the 大統領，／社長, and a very large image of the Virgin Mary in 支持を得ようと努めるd, carved and painted to adorn a new church at パナマ, and sent from Lima by the viceroy; for this 広大な／多数の／重要な ship （機の）カム from thence not long before. She brought also from Lima 800,000 pieces-of-eight to carry with her to パナマ: but while she lay at Guanchaco, taking in her lading of flour, the merchants, 審理，公聴会 of Captain Swan's 存在 in Valdivia, ordered the money 岸に again. These 囚人s likewise 知らせるd us that the gentlemen (inhabitants of Truxillo) were building a fort at Guanchaquo (which is the sea port for Truxillo) の近くに by the sea, purposely to 妨げる the designs of any that should 試みる／企てる to land there. Upon this news we altered our former 決意／決議s, and 解決するd to go with our three prizes to the Galapagos; which are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many large islands lying some under the 赤道, others on each 味方する of it. I shall here omit the description of Truxillo, because in my 虫垂, at the latter end of the 調書をとる／予約する, I ーするつもりである to give a general relation of most of the towns of 公式文書，認める on this coast from Valdivia to パナマ, and from thence に向かって California.

The 19th day in the evening we sailed from the island Lobos with Captain Eaton in our company. We carried the three flour prizes with us, but our first prize laden with 木材／素質 we left here at an 錨，総合司会者; the 勝利，勝つd was at south by east which is the ありふれた 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd here, and we steered away north-west by north ーするつもりであるing to run into the latitude of the 小島s Galapagos, and steer off west, because we did not know the 確かな distance, and therefore could not 形態／調整 a direct course to them. When we （機の）カム within 40 minutes of the 赤道 we steered west, having the 勝利，勝つd at south, a very 穏健な gentle 強風.

THE ISLANDS GALAPAGOS: THE DILDOE-TREE, BURTON-WOOD, MAMMEE-TREES, IGUANAS, LAND-TORTOISE, THEIR SEVERAL KIND; GREEN SNAKES, TURTLE-DOVES, TORTOISE, OR TURTLE-GRASS.

It was the 31st day of May when we first had sight of the islands Galapagos: some of them appeared on our 天候 屈服する, some on our 物陰／風下 屈服する, others 権利 ahead. We at first sight trimmed our sails and steered as nigh the 勝利，勝つd as we could, 努力する／競うing to get to the southermost of them but, our prizes 存在 深い laden, their sails but small and thin, and a very small 強風, they could not keep up with us; therefore we likewise 辛勝する／優位d away again a point from the 勝利，勝つd to keep 近づく them; and in the evening the ship that I was in and Captain Eaton 錨，総合司会者d on the east 味方する of one of the eastermost islands, a mile from the shore, in sixteen fathom water, clean, white, hard sand.

The Galapagos Islands are a 広大な／多数の／重要な number of uninhabited islands lying under and on both 味方するs of the 赤道. The eastermost of them are about 110 leagues from the Main. They are laid 負かす／撃墜する in the longitude of 181, reaching to the 西方の as far as 176, therefore their longitude from England 西方の is about 68 degrees. But I believe our hydrographers do not place them far enough to the 西方の. The Spaniards who first discovered them, and in whose charts alone they are laid 負かす／撃墜する, 報告（する）／憶測 them to be a 広大な／多数の／重要な number stretching north-west from the Line, as far as 5 degrees north, but we saw not above 14 or 15. They are some of them 7 or 8 leagues long, and 3 or 4 幅の広い. They are of a good 高さ, most of them flat and even on the 最高の，を越す; 4 or 5 of the eastermost are rocky, barren and hilly, producing neither tree, herb, nor grass, but a few dildoe-trees, except by the seaside. The dildoe-tree is a green prickly shrub that grows about 10 or 12 foot high, without either leaf or fruit. It is as big as a man's 脚, from the root to the 最高の，を越す, and it is 十分な of sharp prickles growing in 厚い 列／漕ぐ／騒動s from 最高の，を越す to 底（に届く）; this shrub is fit for no use, not so much as to 燃やす. の近くに by the sea there grows in some places bushes of burton-支持を得ようと努めるd, which is very good 解雇する／砲火／射撃ing. This sort of 支持を得ようと努めるd grows in many places in the West Indies, 特に in the Bay of Campeachy and the Samballoes. I did never see any in these seas but here. There is water on these barren islands in ponds and 穴を開けるs の中で the 激しく揺するs. Some other of these islands are mostly plain and low, and the land more fertile, producing trees of divers sorts unknown to us. Some of the westermost of these islands are nine or ten leagues long and six or seven 幅の広い; the mould 深い and 黒人／ボイコット. These produce trees of 広大な／多数の／重要な and tall 団体／死体s, 特に mammee-trees, which grow here in 広大な／多数の／重要な groves. In these large islands there are some pretty big rivers; and in many of the other lesser islands there are brooks of good water. The Spaniards when they first discovered these islands 設立する multitudes of iguanas, and land-海がめ or tortoise, and 指名するd them the Galapagos Islands. I do believe there is no place in the world that is so plentifully 蓄える／店d with those animals. The iguanas here are fat and large as any that I ever saw; they are so tame that a man may knock 負かす／撃墜する twenty in an hour's time with a club. The land-海がめ are here so 非常に／多数の that 5 or 600 men might subsist on them alone for several months without any other sort of 準備／条項: they are 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の large and fat; and so 甘い that no pullet eats more pleasantly. One of the largest of these creatures will 重さを計る 150 or 200 負わせる, and some of them are 2 foot, or 2 foot 6 インチs over the challapee or belly. I did never see any but at this place that will 重さを計る above 30 続けざまに猛撃する 負わせる. I have heard that at the 小島 of St. Lawrence or Madagascar, and at the English Forest, an island 近づく it called also Don Mascarin and now 所有するd by the French, there are very large ones, but whether so big, fat, and 甘い as these, I know not. There are 3 or 4 sorts of these creatures in the West Indies. One is called by the Spaniards hecatee; these live most in fresh-water ponds, and seldom come on land. They 重さを計る about 10 or 15 続けざまに猛撃する; they have small 脚s and flat feet, and small long necks. Another sort is called tenapen; these are a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 いっそう少なく than the hecatee; the 爆撃する on their 支援するs is all carved 自然に, finely wrought, and 井戸／弁護士席 clouded: the 支援するs of these are rounder than those before について言及するd; they are さもなければ much of the same form: these delight to live in wet swampy places, or on the land 近づく such places. Both these sorts are very good meat. They are in 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty on the 小島s of Pines 近づく Cuba: there the Spanish hunters when they 会合，会う them in the 支持を得ようと努めるd bring them home to their huts, and 示す them by notching their 爆撃するs, then let them go; this they do to have them at 手渡す, for they never ramble far from thence. When these hunters return to Cuba, after about a month or six weeks' stay, they carry with them 3 or 400 or more of these creatures to sell; for they are very good meat, and every man knows his own by their 示すs. These tortoise in the Galapagos are more like the hecatee except that, as I said before, they are much bigger; and they have very long small necks and little 長，率いるs. There are some green snakes on these islands, but no other land animal that I did ever see. There are 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of 海がめ-doves so tame that a man may kill 5 or 6 dozen in a forenoon with a stick. They are somewhat いっそう少なく than a pigeon, and are very good meat, and 一般的に fat.

There are good wide channels between these islands fit for ships to pass, and in some places shoal water where there grows plenty of 海がめ-grass; therefore these islands are plentifully 蓄える／店d with sea-海がめ of that sort which is called the green 海がめ. I have hitherto deferred the description of these creatures therefore I shall give it here.

SEA-TURTLE, THEIR SEVERAL KINDS.

There are 4 sorts of sea-海がめ, すなわち, the trunk-海がめ, the loggerhead, the hawksbill, and the green 海がめ. The trunk-海がめ is 一般的に bigger than the other, their 支援するs are higher and rounder, and their flesh 階級 and not wholesome. The loggerhead is so called because it has a 広大な／多数の／重要な 長，率いる, much bigger than the other sorts; their flesh is likewise very 階級, and seldom eaten but in 事例／患者 of necessity: they 料金d on moss that grows about 激しく揺するs. The hawksbill-海がめ is the least 肉親，親類d, they are so called because their mouths are long and small, somewhat 似ているing the 法案 of a 強硬派: on the 支援するs of these hawksbill 海がめ grows that 爆撃する which is so much esteemed for making 閣僚s, 徹底的に捜すs, and other things. The largest of them may have 3 続けざまに猛撃する and a half of 爆撃する; I have taken some that have had 3 続けざまに猛撃する 10 ounces: but they 一般的に have a 続けざまに猛撃する and a half or two 続けざまに猛撃する; some not so much. These are but ordinary food, but 一般に sweeter than the loggerhead: yet these hawksbills in some places are unwholesome, 原因（となる）ing them that eat them to 粛清する and vomit 過度に, 特に those between the Samballoes and Portobello. We 会合，会う with other fish in the West Indies of the same malignant nature: but I shall 述べる them in the 虫垂. These hawksbill-海がめs are better or worse によれば their feeding. In some places they 料金d on grass, as the green tortoise also does; in other places they keep の中で 激しく揺するs and 料金d on moss or 海草s; but these are not so 甘い as those that eat grass, neither is their 爆撃する so （疑いを）晴らす; for they are 一般的に overgrown with barnacles which spoil the 爆撃する; and their flesh is 一般的に yellow, 特に the fat.

Hawksbill-海がめ are in many places of the West Indies: they have islands and places peculiar to themselves where they lay their eggs, and seldom come の中で any other 海がめ. These and all other 海がめ lay eggs in the sand; their time of laying is in May, June, July. Some begin sooner, some later. They lay 3 times in a season, and at each time 80 or 90 eggs. Their eggs are as big as a 女／おっせかい屋's egg, and very 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, covered only with a white 堅い 肌. There are some bays on the north 味方する of Jamaica where these hawksbills 訴える手段／行楽地 to lay. In the Bay of Honduras are islands which they likewise make their 産む／飼育するing-places, and many places along all the coast on the Main of the West Indies from Trinidad de La Vera Cruz in the Bay of Nova Hispania. When a sea-海がめ turns out of the sea to lay she is at least an hour before she returns again, for she is to go above high-water 示す, and if it be low-water when she comes 岸に, she must 残り／休憩（する） once or twice, 存在 激しい, before she comes to the place where she lays. When she has 設立する a place for her 目的 she makes a 広大な／多数の／重要な 穴を開ける with her fins in the sand, wherein she lays her eggs, then covers them 2 foot 深い with the same sand which she threw out of the 穴を開ける, and so returns. いつかs they come up the night before they ーするつもりである to lay, and take a 見解（をとる） of the place, and so having made a 小旅行する, or semicircular march, they return to the sea again, and they never fail to come 岸に the next night to lay 近づく that place. All sorts of 海がめ use the same methods in laying. I knew a man in Jamaica that made 8 続けざまに猛撃する 英貨の／純銀の of the 爆撃する of these hawksbill 海がめ which he got in one season and in one small bay, not half a mile long. The manner of taking them is to watch the bay by walking from one part to the other all night, making no noise, nor keeping any sort of light. When the 海がめ comes 岸に the man that watches for them turns them on their 支援するs, then 運ぶ／漁獲高s them above high-water 示す, and leaves them till the morning. A large green 海がめ, with her 負わせる and struggling, will puzzle 2 men to turn her. The hawksbill-海がめ are not only 設立する in the West Indies but on the coast of Guinea, and in the East Indies. I never saw any in the South Seas.

The green 海がめ are so called because their 爆撃する is greener than any other. It is very thin and （疑いを）晴らす and better clouded than the hawksbill; but it is used only for inlays, 存在 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の thin. These 海がめs are 一般に larger than the hawksbill; one will 重さを計る 2 or 3 hundred 続けざまに猛撃する. Their 支援するs are flatter than the hawksbill, their 長，率いるs 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and small. Green 海がめ are the sweetest of all the 肉親，親類d: but there are degrees of them both in 尊敬（する）・点 to their flesh and their bigness. I have 観察するd that at Blanco in the West Indies the green 海がめ (which is the only 肉親，親類d there) are larger than any other in the North Seas. There they will 一般的に 重さを計る 280 or 300 続けざまに猛撃する: their fat is yellow, and the lean white, and their flesh 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 甘い. At Boca Toro, west of Portobello, they are not so large, their flesh not so white, nor the fat so yellow. Those in the Bay of Honduras and Campeachy are somewhat smaller still; their fat is green, and the lean of a darker colour than those at Boca Toro. I heard of a monstrous green 海がめ once taken at Port 王室の in the Bay of Campeachy that was four foot 深い from the 支援する to the belly, and the belly six foot 幅の広い; Captain Roch's son, of about nine or ten years of age, went in it as in a boat on board his father's ship, about a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile from the shore. The leaves of fat afforded eight gallons of oil. The 海がめ that live の中で the 重要なs or small islands on the south 味方する of Cuba are a mixed sort, some bigger, some いっそう少なく; and so their flesh is of a mixed colour, some green, some dark, some yellowish. With these Port 王室の in Jamaica is 絶えず 供給（する）d by sloops that come hither with 逮捕するs to take them. They carry them alive to Jamaica where the 海がめs have wires made with 火刑／賭けるs in the sea to 保存する them alive; and the market is every day plentifully 蓄える／店d with 海がめ, it 存在 the ありふれた food there, 主として for the ordinary sort of people.

Green 海がめ live on grass which grows in the sea in 3, 4, 5, or 6 fathom water, at most of the places before について言及するd. This grass is different from manatee-grass, for that is a small blade; but this a ４半期/4分の1 of an インチ 幅の広い and six インチs long. The 海がめ of these islands Galapagos are a sort of a bastard green 海がめ; for their 爆撃する is 厚い than other green 海がめ in the West or East Indies, and their flesh is not so 甘い. They are larger than any other green 海がめ; for it is ありふれた for these to be two or three foot 深い, and their callapees or bellies five foot wide: but there are other green 海がめ in the South Seas that are not so big as the smallest hawksbill. These are seen at the island Plata, and other places thereabouts: they 料金d on moss and are very 階級 but fat.

Both these sorts are different from any others, for both he's and she's come 岸に in the daytime and 嘘（をつく） in the sun; but in other places 非，不，無 but the she's go 岸に, and that in the night only to lay their eggs. The best feeding for 海がめ in the South Seas is の中で these Galapagos Islands, for here is plenty of grass.

There is another sort of green 海がめ in the South Seas which are but small, yet pretty 甘い: these 嘘（をつく） 西方の on the coast of Mexico. One thing is very strange and remarkable in these creatures; that at the 産む／飼育するing time they leave for two or three months their ありふれた haunts, where they 料金d most of the year, and 訴える手段／行楽地 to other places only to lay their eggs: and it is not thought that they eat anything during this season: so that both he's and she's grow very lean; but the he's to that degree that 非，不，無 will eat them. The most remarkable places that I did ever hear of for their 産む／飼育するing is at an island in the West Indies called Caymans, and the 小島 Ascension in the Western Ocean: and when the 産む／飼育するing time is past there are 非，不，無 remaining. Doubtless they swim some hundreds of leagues to come to those two places: for it has been often 観察するd that at Cayman, at the 産む／飼育するing time, there are 設立する all those sort of 海がめ before 述べるd. The South 重要なs of Cuba are above 40 leagues from thence, which is the nearest place that these creatures can come from; and it is most 確かな that there could not live so many there as come here in one season.

Those that go to lay at Ascension must needs travel much さらに先に; for there is no land nearer it than 300 leagues: and it is 確かな that these creatures live always 近づく the shore. In the South Sea likewise the Galapagos is the place where they live the biggest part of the year; yet they go from thence at their season over to the Main to lay their eggs; which is 100 leagues the nearest place. Although multitudes of these 海がめs go from their ありふれた places of feeding and abode to those laying-places, yet they do not all go: and at the time when the 海がめ 訴える手段／行楽地 to these places to lay their eggs they are …を伴ってd with 豊富 of fish, 特に sharks; the places which the 海がめ then leave 存在 at that time destitute of fish, which follow the 海がめ.

When the she's go thus to their places to lay the male …を伴って them, and never leave them till they return: both male and 女性（の） are fat the beginning of the season; but before they return the male, as I said, are so lean that they are not fit to eat, but the 女性（の） are good to the very last; yet not so fat as at the beginning of the season. It is 報告（する）／憶測d of these creatures that they are nine days engendering, and in the water, the male on the 女性（の）'s 支援する. It is observable that the male, while engendering, do not easily forsake their 女性（の）: for I have gone and taken 持つ／拘留する of the male when engendering: and a very bad striker may strike them then, for the male is not shy at all: but the 女性（の）, seeing a boat when they rise to blow, would make her escape, but that the male しっかり掴むs her with his two fore fins, and 持つ／拘留するs her 急速な／放蕩な. When they are thus coupled it is best to strike the 女性（の） first, then you are sure of the male also. These creatures are thought to live to a 広大な／多数の／重要な age; and it is 観察するd by the Jamaica turtlers that they are many years before they come to their 十分な growth.

THE AIR AND WEATHER AT THE GALAPAGOS.

The 空気／公表する of these islands is temperate enough considering the clime. Here is 絶えず a fresh sea-微風 all day, and 冷静な／正味のing refreshing 勝利，勝つd in the night: therefore the heat is not so violent here as in most places 近づく the 赤道. The time of the year for the rains is in November, December, and January. Then there is oftentimes 過度の hard tempestuous 天候, mixed with much 雷鳴 and 雷. いつかs before and after these months there are 穏健な refreshing にわか雨s; but in May, June, July, and August the 天候 is always very fair.

We stayed at one of these islands which lies under the 赤道 but one night because our prizes could not get in to 錨，総合司会者. We refreshed ourselves very 井戸／弁護士席 both with land and sea-海がめs; and the next day we sailed from thence.

SOME OF THE ISLANDS DESCRIBED, THEIR SOIL, ETC.

The next island of the Galapagos that we （機の）カム to is but two leagues from this: it is rocky and barren like this; it is about five or six leagues long and four 幅の広い. We 錨，総合司会者d in the afternoon at the north 味方する of the island, a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile from the shore in 16 fathom water. It is 法外な all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する this island and no 錨，総合司会者ing only at this place. Here it is but ordinary riding; for the ground is so 法外な that if an 錨，総合司会者 starts it never 持つ／拘留するs again; and the 勝利，勝つd is 一般的に off from the land except in the night when the land-勝利，勝つd comes more from the west, for there it blows 権利 along the shore, though but faintly. Here is no water but in ponds and 穴を開けるs of the 激しく揺するs.

That which we first 錨，総合司会者d at has water on the north end 落ちるing 負かす／撃墜する in a stream from high 法外な 激しく揺するs upon the sandy bay, where it may be taken up. As soon as we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者, we made a テント 岸に for Captain Cook who was sick. Here we 設立する the sea-海がめ lying 岸に on the sand; this is not customary in the West Indies. We turned them on their 支援するs that they might not get away. The next day more （機の）カム up, when we 設立する it to be their custom to 嘘（をつく） in the sun: so we never took care to turn them afterwards; but sent 岸に the cook every morning, who killed as many as served for the day. This custom we 観察するd all the time we lay here, feeding いつかs on land-海がめ, いつかs on sea-海がめ, there 存在 plenty of either sort. Captain Davis （機の）カム hither again a second time; and then he went to other islands on the west 味方する of these. There he 設立する such plenty of land-海がめ that he and his men ate nothing else for three months that he stayed there. They were so fat that he saved sixty jars of oil out of those that he spent: this oil served instead of butter to eat with doughboys or dumplings, in his return out of these seas. He 設立する very convenient places to careen, and good channels between the islands; and very good 錨，総合司会者ing in many places. There he 設立する also plenty of brooks of good fresh water, and firewood enough, there 存在 plenty of trees fit for many uses. Captain Harris, one that we shall speak of hereafter, （機の）カム thither likewise, and 設立する some islands that had plenty of mammee-trees, and pretty large rivers. The sea about these islands is plentifully 蓄える／店d with fish such as are at Juan Fernandez. They are both large and fat and as plentiful here as at Juan Fernandez. Here are 特に 豊富 of sharks. The north part of this second 小島 we 錨，総合司会者d at lies 28 minutes north of the 赤道. I took the 高さ of the sun with an astrolabe. These 小島s of the Galapagos have plenty of salt. We stayed here but 12 days in which time we put 岸に 5000 packs of flour for a reserve if we should have occasion of any before we left these seas. Here one of our Indian 囚人s 知らせるd us that he was born at Realejo, and that he would engage to carry us thither. He 存在 診察するd of the strength and riches of it 満足させるd the company so 井戸／弁護士席 that they were 解決するd to go thither.

Having thus 結論するd; the 12th of June we sailed from hence, designing to touch at the island Cocos, 同様に to put 岸に some flour there as to see the island, because it was in our way to Realejo. We steered north till in latitude 4 degrees 40 minutes, ーするつもりであるing then to steer west by north, for we 推定する／予想するd to have had the 勝利，勝つd at south by east or south-south-east as we had on the south 味方する of the 赤道. Thus I had 以前は 設立する the 勝利，勝つd 近づく the shore in these latitudes; but when we first parted from the Galapagos we had the 勝利，勝つd at south, and as we sailed さらに先に north we had the 勝利，勝つd at south by west then at south-south-west, 勝利，勝つd which we did not 推定する／予想する. We thought at first that the 勝利，勝つd would come about again to the south; but when we （機の）カム to sail off west to the island Cocos we had the 勝利，勝つd at south-west by south and could 嘘（をつく） but west by north. Yet we stood that course till we were in the latitude 5 degrees 40 minutes north and then despairing, as the 勝利，勝つd were, to find the island Cocos, we steered over to the Main; for had we seen the island then, we could not have fetched it, 存在 so far to the north of it.

THE ISLAND COCOS DESCRIBED, CAPE BLANCO, AND THE BAY OF CALDERA; THE SAVANNAHS THERE.

The island Cocos is so 指名するd by the Spaniards because there are 豊富 of coconut-trees growing on it. They are not only in one or two places but grow in 広大な／多数の／重要な groves, all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the island, by the sea. This is an uninhabited island, it is 7 or 8 leagues 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and pretty high in the middle, where it is destitute of trees, but looks very green and pleasant with a herb called by the Spaniards gramadael. It is low land by the seaside.

This island is in 5 degrees 15 minutes north of the 赤道; it is environed with 激しく揺するs, which makes it almost inaccessible: only at the north-east end there is a small harbour where ships may 安全に enter and ride 安全な・保証する. In this harbour there is a 罰金 brook of fresh water running into the sea. This is the account that the Spaniards give of it, and I had the same also from Captain Eaton, who was there afterward.

Any who like us had not experienced the nature of the 勝利，勝つd in these parts might reasonably 推定する／予想する that we could have sailed with a flown sheet to Realejo; but we 設立する ourselves mistaken, for as we （機の）カム nearer the shore we 設立する the 勝利，勝つd 権利 in our teeth. But I shall 言及する my reader to the 一時期／支部 of 勝利，勝つd in the 虫垂 for a さらに先に account of this.

We had very 好天 and small 勝利，勝つd in this voyage from the Galapagos, and at the beginning of July we fell in with Cape Blanco, on the Main of Mexico. This is so called from two white 激しく揺するs lying off it. When we are off at sea 権利 against the cape they appear as part of the cape; but 存在 近づく the shore, either to the eastward or 西方の of the cape, they appear like two ships under sail at first 見解（をとる） but, coming nearer, they are like two high towers; they 存在 small, high and 法外な on all 味方するs, and they are about half a mile from the cape. This cape is in latitude 9 degrees 56 minutes. It is about the 高さ of Beachy 長，率いる in England, on the coast of Sussex. It is a 十分な point, with 法外な 激しく揺するs to the sea. The 最高の，を越す of it is flat and even for about a mile; then it 徐々に 落ちるs away on each 味方する with a gentle 降下／家系. It appears very pleasant, 存在 covered with 広大な／多数の／重要な lofty trees. From the cape on the north-west 味方する the land runs in north-east for about 4 leagues, making a small bay called by the Spaniards Caldera. A league within Cape Blanco, on the north-west 味方する of it and at the 入り口 of this bay, there is a small brook of very good water running into the sea. Here the land is low, making a saddling between 2 small hills. It is very rich land, producing large tall trees of many sorts; the mould is 黒人／ボイコット and 深い, which I have always taken notice of to be a fat 国／地域. About a mile from this brook に向かって the north-east the woodland 終結させるs. Here the savannah land begins, and runs some leagues into the country, making many small hills and dales. These savannahs are not altogether （疑いを）晴らす of trees, but are here and there ぱらぱら雨d with small groves, which （判決などを）下す them very delightful. The grass which grows here is very kindly, 厚い and long; I have seen 非，不，無 better in the West Indies. Toward the 底（に届く） of the bay the land by the sea is low and 十分な of mangroves, but さらに先に in the country the land is high and 山地の. The mountains are part woodland, part savannah. The trees in those 支持を得ようと努めるd are but small and short; and the mountain savannahs are 着せる／賦与するd but with indifferent grass. From the 底（に届く） of this bay it is but 14 or 15 leagues to the Lake of Nicaragua on the North Sea coast: the way between is somewhat 山地の, but most savannah.

CAPTAIN COOK DIES.

Captain Cook, who was then sick at Juan Fernandez, continued so till we （機の）カム within 2 or 3 leagues of Cape Blanco, and then died of a sudden; though he seemed that morning to be as likely to live, as he had been some weeks before; but it is usual with sick men coming from the sea, where they have nothing but the sea 空気／公表する, to die off as soon as ever they come within the 見解（をとる） of the land. About four hours after we all （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 (すなわち the ship that I was in, Captain Eaton, and the 広大な／多数の／重要な meal prize) a league within the cape, 権利 against the brook of fresh water, in 14 fathom clean hard sand. Presently after we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 Captain Cook was carried 岸に to be buried, twelve men carried their 武器 to guard those that were ordered to dig the 墓／厳粛／彫る／重大な: for although we saw no 外見 of inhabitants, yet we did not know but the country might be 厚い 住むd. And before Captain Cook was interred three Spanish Indians （機の）カム to the place where our men were digging the 墓／厳粛／彫る／重大な and 需要・要求するd what they were, and from whence they （機の）カム? To whom our men answered they （機の）カム from Lima and were bound to Realejo, but that the captain of one of the ships dying at sea, 強いるd them to come into this place to give him Christian burial. The three Spanish Indians who were very shy at first began to be very bold and, 製図／抽選 近づく, asked many silly questions; and our men did not stick to soothe them up with as many falsehoods, purposely to draw them into their clutches. Our men often laughed at their temerity; and asked them if they never saw any Spaniards before? They told them that they themselves were Spaniards and that they lived の中で Spaniards, and that although they were born there yet they had never seen 3 ships there before: our men told them that neither now might they have seen so many if it had not been on an 緊急の occasion. At length they 演習d them by discourse so 近づく that our men laid 持つ／拘留する on all three at once; but before Captain Cook was buried one of them made his escape, the other two were brought off 船内に our ship. Captain Eaton すぐに （機の）カム 船内に and 診察するd them; they 自白するd that they （機の）カム purposely to 見解（をとる） our ship and if possible to 知らせる themselves what we were; for the 大統領，／社長 of パナマ not long before sent a letter of advice to Nicoya, 知らせるing the 治安判事s thereof that some enemies were come into these seas, and that therefore it behoved them to be careful of themselves. Nicoya is a small Mulatto town about 12 or 14 leagues east from hence, standing on the banks of a river of that 指名する. It is a place very fit for building ships, therefore most of the inhabitants are carpenters who are 一般的に 雇うd in building new or 修理ing old ships. It was here that Captain Sharp (just after I left him in the year 1681) got carpenters to 直す／買収する，八百長をする his ship before he returned to England: and for that 推論する／理由 it behoved the Spaniards to be careful (によれば the 知事 of パナマ's advice) lest any men at other times wanting such necessaries as that place afforded might again be 供給（する）d there.

OF NICOYA, AND A RED WOOD FOR DYEING, AND OTHER COMMODITIES.

These Spanish Indians told us likewise that they were sent to the place where they were taken ーするために 見解（をとる） our ships, as 恐れるing these were those について言及するd by the 大統領，／社長 of パナマ: it 存在 需要・要求するd of them to give an account of the 広い地所 and riches of the country; they said that the inhabitants were most husbandmen, who were 雇うd either in 工場／植物ing and manuring of corn, or 主として about cattle; they having large savannahs, which were 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with bulls, cows and horses; that by the seaside in some places there grew some red-支持を得ようと努めるd, useful in dyeing; of this they said there was little 利益（をあげる） made, because they were 軍隊d to send it to the Lake of Nicaragua, which runs into the North Seas: that they sent thither also 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s of bull and cow-hides, and brought from thence in 交流 Europe 商品／必需品s; as hats, linen and woollen, wherewith they 着せる／賦与するd themselves; that the flesh of the cattle turned to no other 利益（をあげる） than sustenance for their families; as for butter and cheese they make but little in those parts. After they had given this relation they told us that if we 手配中の，お尋ね者 準備／条項 there was a beef estancia, or farm of bulls and cows, about three mile off where we might kill what we pleased. This was welcome news for we had no sort of flesh since we left the Galapagos; therefore twenty-four of us すぐに entered into two boats, taking one of these Spanish Indians with us for a 操縦する, and went 岸に about a league from the ship. There we 運ぶ／漁獲高d up our boats 乾燥した，日照りの and marched all away, に引き続いて our guide, who soon brought us to some houses and a large pen for cattle. This pen stood in a large savannah, about two mile from our boats: there were a 広大な／多数の／重要な many fat bulls and cows feeding in the savannahs; some of us would have killed three or four to carry on board, but others …に反対するd it, and said it was better to stay all night, and in the morning 運動 the cattle into the pen, and then kill 20 or 30, or as many as we pleased.

A NARROW ESCAPE OF TWELVE MEN.

I was minded to return 船内に, and endeavoured to 説得する them all to go with me, but some would not, therefore I returned with 12, which was half, and left the other 12 behind. At this place I saw three or four tun of the redwood; which I take to be that sort of 支持を得ようと努めるd, called in Jamaica 血-支持を得ようと努めるd, or Nicaragua-支持を得ようと努めるd. We who returned 船内に met no one to …に反対する us, and the next day we 推定する／予想するd our consorts that we left 岸に, but 非，不，無 （機の）カム; therefore at four o'clock in the afternoon ten men went in our canoe to see what was become of them: when they （機の）カム to the bay where we landed to go to the estancia they 設立する our men all on a small 激しく揺する, half a mile from the shore, standing in the water up to their waists. These men had slept 岸に in the house and turned out betimes in the morning to pen the cattle; 2 or 3 went one way and as many another way to get the cattle to the pen, and others stood at the pen to 運動 them in. When they were thus scattered about 40 or 50 武装した Spaniards （機の）カム in の中で them. Our men すぐに called to each other and drew together in a 団体／死体 before the Spaniards could attack them; and marched to their boat, which was 運ぶ／漁獲高d up 乾燥した，日照りの on the sand. But when they （機の）カム to the sandy bay they 設立する their boat all in 炎上s. This was a very unpleasing sight for they knew not how to get 船内に unless they marched by land to the place where Captain Cook was buried, which was 近づく a league. The greatest part of the way was 厚い 支持を得ようと努めるd, where the Spaniards might easily lay an 待ち伏せ／迎撃する for them, at which they are very 専門家. On the other 味方する, the Spaniards now thought them 安全な・保証する; and therefore （機の）カム to them, and asked them if they would be pleased to walk to their 農園s, with many other such 侮辱する／軽蔑するs; but our men answered never a word. It was about half ebb when one of our men took notice of a 激しく揺する a good distance from the shore, just appearing above water; he showed it to his consorts, and told them it would be a good 城 for them if they could get thither. They all wished themselves there; for the Spaniards, who lay as yet at a good distance from them behind the bushes, as 安全な・保証する of their prey, began to whistle now and then a 発射 の中で them. Having therefore 井戸／弁護士席 considered the place together with the danger they were in, they 提案するd to send one of the tallest men to try if the sea between them and the 激しく揺する were fordable. This counsel they presently put in 死刑執行 and 設立する it によれば their 願望（する）. So they all marched over to the 激しく揺する, where they remained till the canoe （機の）カム to them; which was about seven hours. It was the latter part of the ebb when they first went over, and then the 激しく揺する was 乾燥した，日照りの; but when the tide of flood returned again the 激しく揺する was covered, and the water still flowing; so that if our canoe had stayed but one hour longer they might have been in as 広大な／多数の／重要な danger of their lives from the sea as before from the Spaniards; for the tide rises here about eight foot. The Spaniards remained on the shore, 推定する／予想するing to see them destroyed, but never （機の）カム from behind the bushes where they first 工場／植物d themselves; they having not above 3 or 4 手渡す-guns, the 残り／休憩（する） of them 存在 武装した with lances. The Spaniards in these parts are very 専門家 in heaving or darting the lance; with which upon occasion, they will do 広大な／多数の／重要な feats, 特に in ambuscades: and by their good will, they care not for fighting さもなければ, but content themselves with standing aloof, 脅すing and calling 指名するs, at which they are as 専門家 as the other; so that if their tongues be 静かな, we always take it for 認めるd they have laid some 待ち伏せ／迎撃する. Before night our canoe （機の）カム 船内に, and brought our men all 安全な. The next day two canoes were sent to the 底（に届く） of the bay to 捜し出す for a large canoe, which we were 知らせるd was there. The Spaniards have neither ships nor barks here, and but a few canoes, which they seldom use: neither are there any fishermen here, as I 裁判官, because fish is very 不十分な; for I never saw any here, neither could any of our men ever take any; and yet wherever we come to an 錨，総合司会者 we always send out our strikers, and put our hooks and lines overboard, to try for fish. The next day our men returned out of the bay and brought the canoe with them, which they were sent for, and three or four days afterwards the two canoes were sent out again for another, which they likewise brought 船内に. These canoes were fitted with 妨害するs or （法廷の）裁判s, ひもで縛るs and oars fit for service; and one of these Captain Eaton had for his 株, and we the other, which we 直す／買収する，八百長をするd for 上陸 men when occasion 要求するd.

LANCE-WOOD.

While we lay here we filled our water and 削減（する） a 広大な／多数の／重要な many ぼんやり現れるs, or 扱うs, or 突き破るs for oars; for here is plenty of lance-支持を得ようと努めるd, which is most proper for that use. I never saw any in the South Seas but in this place: there is plenty of it in Jamaica, 特に at a place called Bluefields (not Bluefield's River which is on the Main) 近づく the west end of that island. The lance-支持を得ようと努めるd grows straight like our young ash; it is very hard, 堅い, and 激しい, therefore privateers esteem it very much, not only to make ぼんやり現れるs for oars, but scouring-棒s for their guns; for they have seldom いっそう少なく than three or four spare 棒s for 恐れる one should break, and they are much better than 棒s made of ash.

The day before we went from hence Mr. Edward Davis, the company's quartermaster, was made Captain by 同意 of all the company; for it was his place by succession. The 20th day of July we sailed from this bay of Caldera with Captain Eaton and our prize which we brought from Galapagos in company, directing our course for Realejo. The 勝利，勝つd was at north, which although but an ordinary 勝利，勝つd yet carried us in three days abreast of our ーするつもりであるd port.

VOLCAN VIEJO, A BURNING MOUNTAIN ON THE COAST OF REALEJO.

Realejo is the most remarkable land on all this coast, for there is a high 頂点（に達する）d 燃やすing mountain, called by the Spaniards Volcan Viejo, or the Old 火山. This must be brought to 耐える north-east then steer in 直接／まっすぐに with the mountain, and that course will bring you to the harbour. The sea-勝利，勝つd are here at south-south-west, therefore ships that come hither must take the sea-勝利，勝つd, for there is no going in with the land-勝利，勝つd. The 火山 may be easily known, because there is not any other so high a mountain 近づく it, neither is there any that appears in the like form all along the coast; besides it smokes all the day, and in the night it いつかs sends 前へ／外へ 炎上s of 解雇する／砲火／射撃. This mountain may be seen twenty leagues; 存在 within three leagues of the harbour, the 入り口 into it may be seen; there is a small flat low island which makes the harbour. It is about a mile long and a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile 幅の広い, and is from the Main about a mile and a half. There is a channel at each end of the island, the west channel is the widest and safest, yet at the north-west point of the island there is a shoal which ships must take 注意する of going in. 存在 past that shoal, you must keep の近くに to the island, for there is a whole sandy point strikes over from the Main almost half way. The east channel is not so wide, besides there runs a stronger tide; therefore ships seldom or never go in that way. This harbour is 有能な of receiving 200 sail of ships; the best riding is 近づく the Main, where there is seven or eight fathom water, clean hard sand.

Realejo Town is two leagues from hence, and there are 2 creeks that run に向かって it; the westermost comes 近づく the 支援する 味方する of the town, the other runs up to the town, but neither ships nor barks can go so far. These creeks are very 狭くする, and the land on each 味方する 溺死するd and 十分な of red mangrove-trees. About a mile and a half below the town, on the banks of the east creek, the Spaniards had cast up a strong breast-work; it was likewise 報告（する）／憶測d they had another on the west creek, both so advantageously placed that ten men might with 緩和する keep 200 men from 上陸. I shall give a description of the town in my return hither, and therefore forbear to do it here. Wherefore, to 再開する the thread of our course, we were now in sight of the 火山, 存在 by estimation 7 or 8 leagues from the shore, and the mountain 耐えるing north-east we took in our topsails and 運ぶ／漁獲高d up our courses, ーするつもりであるing to go with our canoes into the harbour in the night.

A TORNADO.

In the evening we had a very hard トルネード，竜巻 out of the north-east with much 雷鳴, 雷, and rain. The 暴力／激しさ of the 勝利，勝つd did not last long, yet it was 11 o'clock at night before we got out our canoes, and then it was やめる 静める. We 列／漕ぐ／騒動d in 直接／まっすぐに for the shore and thought to have reached it before day, but it was 9 o'clock in the morning before we got into the harbour.

THE ISLAND AND HARBOUR OF REALEJO.

When we （機の）カム within a league of the island of Realejo, that makes the harbour, we saw a house on it, and coming nearer we saw two or three men, who stood and looked on us till we （機の）カム within half a mile of the island, then they went into their canoe, which lay on the inside of the island, and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d に向かって the Main; but we overtook them before they got over, and brought them 支援する again to the island. There was a horseman 権利 against us on the Main when we took the canoe, who すぐに 棒 away に向かって the town as 急速な／放蕩な as he could. The 残り／休憩（する） of our canoes 列／漕ぐ／騒動d ひどく and did not come to the island till 12 o'clock, therefore we were 軍隊d to stay for them. Before they （機の）カム we 診察するd the 囚人s who told us that they were 始める，決める there to watch, for the 知事 of Realejo received a letter about a month before, wherein he was advised of some enemies come into the sea, and therefore admonished him to be careful; that すぐに thereupon the 知事 had 原因（となる）d a house to be built on this island, and ordered four men to be continually there to watch night and day; and if they saw any ship coming thither they were to give notice of it. They said they did not 推定する／予想する to see boats or canoes, but looked out for a ship. At first they took us in our 前進するd canoe to be some men that had been cast away and lost our ship; till, seeing 3 or 4 canoes more, they began to 嫌疑者，容疑者／疑う what we were. They told us likewise that the horseman which we saw did come to them every morning, and that in いっそう少なく than an hour's time he could be at the town. When Captain Eaton and his canoes （機の）カム 岸に we told them what had happened. It was now three hours since the horseman 棒 away, and we could not 推定する／予想する to get to the town in いっそう少なく than two hours; in which time the 知事 having notice of our coming might be 供給するd to receive us at his breast-作品; therefore we thought it best to defer this design till another time.

THE GULF OF AMAPALLA AND POINT GASIVINA.

There is a 罰金 spring of fresh water on the island; there are some trees also, but the biggest part is savannah, whereon is good grass, though there is no sort of beast to eat it. This island is in latitude 12 degrees 10 minutes north. Here we stayed till 4 o'clock in the afternoon; then, our ships 存在 come within a league of the shore, we all went on board, and steered for the 湾 of Amapalla, ーするつもりであるing there to careen our ships.

The 26th of July Captain Eaton （機の）カム 船内に our ship to 協議する with Captain Davis how to get some Indians to 補助装置 us in careening: it was 結論するd that, when we （機の）カム 近づく the 湾, Captain Davis should take two canoes 井戸／弁護士席 乗組員を乗せた and go before, and Captain Eaton should stay 船内に. によれば this 協定 Captain Davis went away for the 湾 the next day.

ISLES OF MANGERA AND AMAPALLA.

The 湾 of Amapalla is a 広大な／多数の／重要な arm of the sea running 8 or 10 leagues into the country. It is bounded on the south 味方する of its 入り口 with Point Casivina, and on the north-west 味方する with St. Michael's 開始する. Both these places are very remarkable: Point Casivina is in latitude 12 degrees 40 minutes north: it is a high 一連の会議、交渉／完成する point which at sea appears like an island; because the land within it is very low. St. Michael's 開始する is a very high 頂点（に達する）d hill, not very 法外な: the land at the foot of it on the south-east 味方する is low and even, for at least a mile. From this low land the 湾 of Amapalla enters on that 味方する. Between this low land and Point Casivina there are two かなりの high islands; the southermost is called Mangera, the other is called Amapalla; and they are two miles asunder.

Mangera is a high 一連の会議、交渉／完成する island, about 2 leagues in compass, appearing like a tall grove. It is environed with 激しく揺するs all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, only a small cove, or sandy bay, on the north-east 味方する. The mould and 国／地域 of this island is 黒人／ボイコット, but not 深い; it is mixed with 石／投石するs, yet very 生産力のある of large tall 木材／素質 trees.

THE INDIAN INHABITANTS.

In the middle of the island there is an Indian town, and a fair Spanish church. The Indians have 農園s of maize 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the town, and some plantains: they have a few cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s, but no other sort of tame fowl; neither have they any sort of beast, but cats and dogs. There is a path from the town to the sandy bay, but the way is 法外な and rocky. At this sandy bay there are always 10 or 12 canoes 嘘（をつく） 運ぶ／漁獲高d up 乾燥した，日照りの, except when they are in use.

Amapalla is a larger island than Mangera; the 国／地域 much the same. There are two towns on it, about two miles asunder; one on the north 味方する, the other on the east 味方する: that on the east 味方する is not above a mile from the sea; it stands on a plain on the 最高の，を越す of a hill, the path to it is so 法外な and rocky that a few men might keep 負かす／撃墜する a 広大な／多数の／重要な number only with 石／投石するs. There is a very fair church standing in the 中央 of the town. The other town is not so big, yet it has a good handsome church. One thing I have 観察するd in all the Indian towns under the Spanish 政府, as 井戸／弁護士席 in these parts in the Bay of Campeachy and どこかよそで, that the images of the Virgin Mary and other saints (with which all their churches were filled) are still painted in an Indian complexion, and partly in that dress; but in those towns which are 住むd 主として by Spaniards, the saints also 適合する themselves to the Spanish garb and complexion.

HOG-PLUM-TREE.

The houses here are but mean; the Indians of both plains have good field maize, remote from the town: they have but few plantains, but they have 豊富 of large hog-plum-trees growing about their houses. The tree that 耐えるs this fruit is as big as our largest plum-tree: the leaf is of a dark green colour and as 幅の広い as the leaf of a plum-tree; but they are 形態／調整d like the hawthorn leaf. The trees are very brittle 支持を得ようと努めるd; the fruit is oval, and as big as a small horse-plum. It is at first very green, but when it is 熟した one 味方する is yellow, the other red. It has a 広大な／多数の／重要な 石／投石する, and but little 実体 about it: the fruit is pleasant enough; but I do not, remember that ever I saw one 完全に 熟した that had not a maggot or two in it. I do not remember that I did ever see any of this fruit in the South Seas but at this place. In the Bay of Campeachy they are very plentiful, and in Jamaica they 工場／植物 them to 盗品故買者 their ground. These Indians have also some fowls, as those at Mangera: no Spaniards dwell の中で them but only one padre or priest, who serves for all three towns; these two at Amapalla and that at Mangera. They are under the 知事 of the town of St. Michael's, at the foot of St. Michael's 開始する, to whom they 支払う／賃金 their 尊敬の印 in maize; 存在 極端に poor, yet very contented. They have nothing to make money of but their 農園s of maize and their fowls; the padre or friar has his tenths of it, and knows to a つつく／ペック how much every man has, and how many fowls, of which they dare not kill one, though they are sick, without leave from him. There was (as I said) never another white man on these islands but the friar. He could speak the Indian language, as all friars must that live の中で them. In this 広大な country of America there are divers nations of Indians, different in their language, therefore those friars that are minded to live の中で any nations of Indians must learn the language of those people they 提案する to teach. Although these here are but poor, yet the Indians in many other places have 広大な／多数の／重要な riches which the Spaniards draw from them for trifles: in such places the friars get plentiful incomes; as 特に in the Bay of Campeachy, where the Indians have large cocoa-walks; or in other places where they 工場／植物 cochineel-trees, or silvester-trees; or where they gather vinelloes, and in such places where they gather gold. In such places as these the friars do get a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of wealth. There was but one of all the Indians on both these islands that could speak Spanish; he could 令状 Spanish also, 存在 bred up purposely to keep the 登録（する）s and 調書をとる／予約するs of account: he was 長官 to both islands. They had a casica too (a small sort of 治安判事 the Indians have amongst themselves) but he could neither 令状 nor speak Spanish.

OTHER ISLANDS IN THE GULF OF AMAPALLA.

There are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many more islands in this bay, but 非，不，無 住むd as these. There is one pretty large island belonging to a nunnery, as the Indians told us, this was 在庫／株d with bulls and cows; there were 3 or 4 Indians lived there to look after the cattle, for the sake of which we often たびたび（訪れる）d this island while we lay in the bay: they are all low islands except Amapalla and Mangera. There are two channels to come into this 湾, one between Point Casivina and Mangera, the other between Mangera and Amapalla: the latter is the best. The riding-place is on the east 味方する of Amapalla, 権利 against a 位置／汚点／見つけ出す of low ground; for all the island except this one place is high land. Running in さらに先に ships may 錨，総合司会者 近づく the Main, on the north-east 味方する of the island Amapalla. This is the place most たびたび（訪れる）d by Spaniards: it is called the Port of ツバメ Lopez. This 湾 or lake runs in some leagues beyond all the islands; but it is shoal water and not 有能な of ships.

It was into this 湾 that Captain Davis was gone with the two canoes to endeavour for a 囚人, to 伸び（る） 知能, if possible, before our ships （機の）カム in: he （機の）カム the first night to Mangera, but for want of a 操縦する did not know where to look for the town. In the morning he 設立する a 広大な／多数の／重要な many canoes 運ぶ／漁獲高d up on the bay; and from that bay 設立する a path which led him and his company to the town. The Indians saw our ships in the evening coming に向かって the island, and, 存在 before 知らせるd of enemies in the sea, they kept scouts out all night for 恐れる: who, seeing Captain Davis coming, ran into the town, and alarmed all the people. When Captain Davis （機の）カム thither they all run into the 支持を得ようと努めるd. The friar happened to be there at this time; who, 存在 unable to ramble into the 支持を得ようと努めるd, fell into Captain Davis's 手渡すs: there were two Indian boys with him who were likewise taken. Captain Davis went only to get a 囚人, therefore was 井戸／弁護士席 満足させるd with the friar, and すぐに （機の）カム 負かす／撃墜する to the seaside. He went from thence to the island Amapalla, carrying the friar and the two Indian boys with him. These were his 操縦するs to 行為／行う him to the 上陸-place, where they arrived about noon. They made no stay here, but left three or four men to look after the canoes, and Captain Davis with the 残り／休憩（する） marched to the town, taking the friar with them. The town, as is before 公式文書，認めるd, is about a mile from the 上陸-place, standing in a plain on the 最高の，を越す of a hill, having a very 法外な ascent to go to it. All the Indians stood on the 最高の，を越す of the hill waiting Captain Davis's coming.

The 長官, について言及するd before, had no 広大な／多数の／重要な 親切 for the Spaniards. It was he that 説得するd the Indians to wait Captain Davis's coming; for they were all running into the 支持を得ようと努めるd; but he told them that if any of the Spaniard's enemies （機の）カム thither it was not to 傷つける them, but the Spaniards whose slaves they were; and that their poverty would 保護する them. This man with the casica stood more 今後 than the 残り／休憩（する）, at the bank of the hill, when Captain Davis with his company appeared beneath. They called out therefore in Spanish, 需要・要求するing of our men what they were, and from whence they （機の）カム? To whom Captain Davis and his men replied they were Biscayers, and that they were sent thither by the king of Spain to （疑いを）晴らす those seas from enemies; that their ships were coming into the 湾 to careen, and that they （機の）カム thither before the ships to 捜し出す a convenient place for it, as also to 願望（する） the Indian's 援助. The 長官, who, as I said before, was the only man that could speak Spanish, told them that they were welcome, for he had a 広大な／多数の／重要な 尊敬（する）・点 for any Old Spain men, 特に for the Biscayers, of whom he had heard a very honourable 報告（する）／憶測; therefore he 願望（する）d them to come up to their town. Captain Davis and his men すぐに 上がるing the hill, the friar going before; and they were received with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of affection by the Indians. The casica and 長官 embraced Captain Davis, and the other Indians received his men with the like 儀式. These salutations 存在 ended, they all marched に向かって the church, for that is the place of all public 会合s, and all plays and pastimes are 行為／法令／行動するd there also; therefore in the churches belonging to Indian towns they have all sorts of vizards, and strange antick dresses both for men and women, and 豊富 of musical hautboys and strumstrums. The strumstrum is made somewhat like a sittern; most of those that the Indians use are made of a large gourd 削減（する） in the 中央, and a thin board laid over the hollow, and which is fastened to the 味方するs; this serves for the belly; over which the strings are placed. The nights before any holidays, or the nights 続いて起こるing, are the times when they all 会合，会う to make merry. Their mirth consists in singing, dancing, and 冒険的な in those antick habits, and using as many antick gestures. If the moon 向こうずね they use but few たいまつs, if not, the church is 十分な of light. There 会合，会う at these times all sorts of both sexes. All the Indians that I have been 熟知させるd with who are under the Spaniards seem to be more melancholy than other Indians that are 解放する／自由な; and at these public 会合s, when they are in the greatest of their jollity, their mirth seems to be rather 軍隊d than real. Their songs are very melancholy and doleful; so is their music: but whether it be natural to the Indians to be thus melancholy, or the 影響 of their slavery, I am not 確かな : but I have always been 傾向がある to believe that they are then only condoling their misfortunes, the loss of their country and liberties: which although these that are now living do not know, nor remember what it was to be 解放する／自由な, yet there seems to be a 深い impression of the thoughts of the slavery which the Spaniards have brought them under, 増加するd probably by some traditions of their 古代の freedom.

Captain Davis ーするつもりであるd when they were all in the church to shut the doors and then make a 取引 with them, letting them know what he was, and so draw them afterwards by fair means to our 援助: the friar 存在 with him, who had also 約束d to engage them to it: but before they were all in the church, one of Captain Davis's men 押し進めるd one of the Indians to 急いで him into the church. The Indian すぐに ran away, and all the 残り／休憩（する） taking the alarm sprang out of the church like deer; it was hard to say which was first: and Captain Davis, who knew nothing of what happened, was left in the church only with the friar. When they were all fled, Captain Davis's men 解雇する／砲火／射撃d and killed the 長官; and thus our hopes 死なせる／死ぬd by the indiscretion of one foolish fellow.

CAPTAIN EATON AND CAPTAIN DAVIS CAREEN THEIR SHIPS HERE, AND AFTERWARDS PART.

In the afternoon the ships （機の）カム into the 湾 between Point Casivina and Mangera, and 錨，総合司会者d 近づく the island Amapalla on the east 味方する in 10 fathom water, clean hard sand. In the evening Captain Davis and his company （機の）カム 船内に, and brought the friar with them; who told Captain Davis that if the 長官 had not been killed he could have sent him a letter by one of the Indians that was taken at Mangera, and 説得するd him to come to us; but now the only way was to send one of those Indians to 捜し出す the casica, and that himself would 教える him what to say, and did not question but the casica would come in on his word. The next day we sent 岸に one of the Indians, who before night returned with the casica and six other Indians, who remained with us all the time that we stayed here. These Indians did us good service; 特に in 操縦するing us to an island where we killed beef whenever we 手配中の，お尋ね者; and for this their service we 満足させるd them to their hearts' content. It was at this island Amapalla that a party of Englishmen and Frenchmen （機の）カム afterwards, and stayed a 広大な／多数の／重要な while, and at last landed on the Main, and marched 陸路の to the Cape River, which disembogues into the North Seas 近づく Cape Gracias a Dios, and is therefore called the Cape River: 近づく the 長，率いる of this river they made bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs (which I shall 述べる in the next 一時期／支部) and so went into the North Seas. This was the way that Captain Sharp had 提案するd to go if he had been put to it; for this way was partly known by privateers by the 発見 that was made into the country about 30 years since, by a party of Englishmen that went up that river in canoes, about as far as the place where these Frenchmen made their bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs: there they landed and marched to a town called Segovia in the country. They were 近づく a month getting up the river, for there were many cataracts where they were often 軍隊d to leave the river and 運ぶ／漁獲高 their canoes 岸に over the land till they were past the cataracts, and then 開始する，打ち上げる their canoes again into the river. I have discoursed several men that were in that 探検隊／遠征隊, and if I mistake not Captain Sharp was one of them. But to return to our voyage in 手渡す; when both our ships were clean and our water filled Captain Davis and Captain Eaton broke off consortships. Captain Eaton took 船内に of his ship 400 packs of flour, and sailed out of the 湾 the second day of September.

CHAPTER 6.

THEY DEPART FROM AMAPALLA.

The third day of September 1684 we sent the friar 岸に and left the Indians in 所有／入手 of the prize which we brought in hither, though she was still half laden with flour, and we sailed out with the land-勝利，勝つd, passing between Amapalla and Mangera. When we were a league out we saw a canoe coming with sail and oars after us; therefore we 縮めるd sail and stayed for her. She was a canoe sent by the 知事 of St. Michael's Town to our captain, 願望（する）ing him not to carry away the friar. The messenger 存在 told that the friar was 始める，決める 岸に again at Amapalla he returned with joy, and we made sail again, having the 勝利，勝つd at west-north-west.

TORNADOES.

We steered に向かって the coast of Peru; we had トルネード，竜巻s every day till we made Cape San Francisco, which from June to November are very ありふれた on these coasts; and we had with the トルネード，竜巻s very much 雷鳴, 雷, and rain. When the トルネード，竜巻s were over the 勝利，勝つd, which while they lasted was most from the south-east, （機の）カム about again to the west, and never failed us till we were in sight of Cape San Francisco, where we 設立する the 勝利，勝つd at south with 好天.

CAPE SAN FRANCISCO.

This cape is in latitude 01 degrees 00 north. It is a high bluff, or 十分な point of land, 着せる／賦与するd with tall 広大な／多数の／重要な trees. Passing by this point, coming from the north, you will see a small low point which you might suppose to be the cape; but you are then past it, and presently afterwards it appears with three points. The land in the country within this cape is very high, and the mountains 一般的に appear very 黒人／ボイコット.

THEY MEET CAPTAIN EATON, AND PART AGAIN.

When we （機の）カム in with this cape we overtook Captain Eaton, plying under the shore: he in his passage from Amapalla, while he was on that coast, met with such terrible トルネード，竜巻s of 雷鳴 and 雷 that, as he and all his men 関係のある, they had never met with the like in any place. They were very much affrighted by them, the 空気／公表する smelling very much of sulphur, and they apprehending themselves in 広大な／多数の／重要な danger of 存在 burnt by the 雷. He touched at the island Cocos, and put 岸に 200 packs of flour there, and 負担d his boat with coconuts, and took in fresh water. In the evening we separated again from Captain Eaton; for he stood off to sea and we plied up under the shore, making our best advantage both of sea and land-勝利，勝つd. The sea-勝利，勝つd are here at south, the land-勝利，勝つd at south-south-east, but いつかs when we （機の）カム abreast of the river we should have the 勝利，勝つd at south-east.

ISLE OF PLATA DESCRIBED.

The 20th day of September we （機の）カム to the island Plata, and 錨，総合司会者d in 16 fathom. We had very good 天候 from the time that we fell in with Cape San Francisco; and were now fallen in again with the same places from whence I begin the account of this voyage in the first 一時期／支部, having now compassed in the whole continent of the South America.

The island Plata, as some 報告（する）／憶測, was so 指名するd by the Spaniards after Sir Francis Drake took the Cacafoga, a ship 主として laden with plate, which they say he brought hither and divided it here with his men. It is about four mile long, and a mile and a half 幅の広い, and of a good 高さ. It is bounded with high 法外な cliffs （疑いを）晴らす 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, only at one place on the east 味方する. The 最高の，を越す of it is flat and even, the 国／地域 sandy and 乾燥した，日照りの: the trees it produces are but small-団体／死体d, low, and grow thin; and there are only three or four sorts of trees, all unknown to us. I 観察するd they were much overgrown with long moss. There is good grass, 特に in the beginning of the year. There is no water on this island but at one place on the east 味方する, の近くに by the sea; there it 演習s slowly 負かす／撃墜する from the 激しく揺するs, where it may be received into 大型船s. There was plenty of goats but they are now all destroyed. There is no other sort of land-animal that I did ever see: here are plenty of ばか者s and men-of-war-birds. The 錨，総合司会者ing-place is on the east 味方する 近づく the middle of the island の近くに by the shore, within 2 cables' length of the sandy bay: there is about 18 or 20 fathom good 急速な／放蕩な oazy ground and smooth water; for the south-east point of the island 避難所s from the south 勝利，勝つd which 絶えず blow here. From the south-east point there strikes out a small shoal a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile into the sea, where there is 一般的に a 広大な／多数の／重要な rippling or working of short waves during all the flood. The tide runs pretty strong, the flood to the south and the ebb to the north. There is good 上陸 on the sandy bay against the 錨，総合司会者ing-place, from whence you may go up into the island, and at no place besides. There are 2 or 3 high, 法外な, small 激しく揺するs at the south-east point, not a cable's length from the island; and another much bigger at the north-east end: it is 深い water all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, but at the 錨，総合司会者ing-place, and at the shoal at the south-east point. This island lies in latitude 01 degrees 10 minutes south. It is distant from Cape San Lorenzo 4 or 5 leagues, 耐えるing from it west-south-west and half a point westerly. At this island are plenty of those small sea-海がめ spoken of in my last 一時期／支部.

ANOTHER MEETING WITH CAPTAIN EATON, AND THEIR FINAL PARTING.

The 21st day Captain Eaton （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 by us: he was very willing to have consorted with us again; but Captain Davis's men were so 不当な that they would not 許す Captain Eaton's men an equal 株 with them in what they got: therefore Captain Eaton stayed here but one night, and the next day sailed from hence, steering away to the southward. We stayed no longer than the day 続いて起こるing, and then we sailed に向かって Point Santa Helena, ーするつもりであるing there to land some men purposely to get 囚人s for 知能.

POINT SANTA HELENA.

Point Santa Helena 耐えるs south from the island Plata. It lies in latitude 2 degrees 15 minutes south. The point is pretty high, flat, and even at 最高の，を越す, overgrown with many 広大な／多数の／重要な thistles, but no sort of tree; at a distance it appears like an island because the land within it is very low.

This point strikes out west into the sea, making a pretty large bay on the north 味方する. A mile within the point on the sandy bay の近くに by the sea there is a poor small Indian village called Santa Helena; the land about it is low, sandy and barren, there are no trees nor grass growing 近づく it; neither do the Indians produce any fruit, 穀物, or 工場／植物 but watermelons only, which are large and very 甘い. There is no fresh water at this place nor 近づく it; therefore the inhabitants are 強いるd to fetch all their water from the river Colanche, which is in the 底（に届く） of the bay, about 4 leagues from it.

ALGATRANE, A SORT OF TAR.

Not far from this town, on the bay の近くに by the sea, about 5 paces from high-water 示す, there is a sort of bituminous 事柄 boils out of a little 穴を開ける in the earth; it is like thin tar: the Spaniards call it algatrane. By much boiling it becomes hard like pitch. It is frequently used by the Spaniards instead of pitch; and the Indians that 住む here save it in jars. It boils up most at high water; and then the Indians are ready to receive it. These Indians are fishermen and go out to sea on bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs. Their 長，指導者 subsistence is maize, most of which they get from ships that come hither from Algatrane. There is good 錨，総合司会者ing to leeward of the point 権利 against the village: but on the west 味方する of the point it is 深い water and no 錨，総合司会者ing.

A SPANISH WRECK.

The Spaniards do 報告（する）／憶測 that there was once a very rich ship driven 岸に here in 静める for want of 勝利，勝つd to work her. As soon as ever she struck she heeled off to sea, 7 or 8 fathom water, where she lies to this day; 非，不，無 having 試みる／企てるd to fish for her, because she lies 深い, and there 落ちるs in here a 広大な／多数の／重要な high sea.

CRUISINGS.

When we were abreast of this point, we sent away our canoes in the night to take the Indian village. They landed in the morning betimes の近くに by the town and took some 囚人s. They took likewise a small bark which the Indians had 始める，決める on 解雇する／砲火／射撃, but our men quenched it and took the Indians that did it; who 存在 asked wherefore he 始める，決める the bark on 解雇する／砲火／射撃 said that there was an order from the viceroy lately 始める，決める out 命令（する）ing all seamen to 燃やす their 大型船s if attacked by us, and betake themselves to their boats. There was another bark in a small cove a mile from the village, thither our men went, thinking to take her, but the seamen that were 船内に 始める，決める her in 炎上s and fled: in the evening our men （機の）カム 船内に and brought the small bark with them, the 解雇する／砲火／射撃 of which they had quenched; and then we returned again に向かって Plata; where we arrived the 26th day of September.

MANTA, NEAR CAPE SAN LORENZO.

In the evening we sent out some men in our bark lately taken, and canoes, to an Indian village called Manta, two or three leagues to the 西方の of Cape San Lorenzo; hoping there to get other 囚人s, for we could not learn from those we took at Point Santa Helena the 推論する／理由 why the viceroy should give such orders to 燃やす the ships. They had a fresh sea-微風 till about 12 o'clock at night, and then it 証明するd 静める; wherefore they 列／漕ぐ／騒動d away with their canoes as 近づく to the town as they thought convenient, and lay still till day.

Manta is a small Indian village on the Main, distant from the island Plata 7 or 8 leagues. It stands so advantageously to be seen, 存在 built on a small ascent, that it makes a very fair prospect to the sea; yet but a few poor scattering Indian houses. There is a very 罰金 church, adorned with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of carved work. It was 以前は a habitation for Spaniards, but they are all 除去するd from hence now. The land about it is 乾燥した，日照りの and sandy, 耐えるing only a few shrubby trees. These Indians 工場／植物 no manner of 穀物 or root, but are 供給（する）d from other places; and 一般的に keep a 在庫／株 of 準備／条項 to relieve ships that want; for this is the first 解決／入植地 that ships can touch at which come from パナマ bound to Lima, or any other port in Peru. The land, 存在 乾燥した，日照りの and sandy, is not fit to produce 刈るs of maize; which is the 推論する／理由 they 工場／植物 非，不，無. There is a spring of good water between the village and the sea.

MONTE CHRISTO.

On the 支援する of the town, a pretty way up in the country, there is a very high mountain, 非常に高い up like a sugar-loaf, called Monte Christo. It is a very good sea-示す, for there is 非，不，無 like it on all the coast. The 団体／死体 of this mountain 耐えるs 予定 south from Manta. About a mile and a half from the shore, 権利 against the village, there is a 激しく揺する, which is very dangerous, because it never appears above water; neither does the sea break on it, because there is seldom any 広大な／多数の／重要な sea; yet it is now so 井戸／弁護士席 known that all ships bound to this place do easily 避ける it. A mile within this 激しく揺する there is good 錨，総合司会者ing in 6, 8, or 10 fathom water, good hard sand and （疑いを）晴らす ground. And a mile from the road on the west 味方する there is a shoal running out a mile into the sea. From Manta to Cape San Lorenzo the land is plain and even, of an indifferent 高さ. [See a さらに先に account of these coasts in the 虫垂.]

CRUISINGS.

As soon as ever the day appeared our men landed, and marched に向かって the village, which was about a mile and a half from their 上陸-place: some of the Indians who were stirring saw them coming and alarmed their 隣人s; so that all that were able got away. They took only two old women who both said that it was 報告（する）／憶測d that a 広大な／多数の／重要な many enemies were come 陸路の through the country of Darien into the South Seas, and that they were at 現在の in canoes and periagos: and that the viceroy upon this news had 始める，決める out the forementioned order for 燃やすing their own ships. Our men 設立する no sort of 準備／条項 here; the viceroy having likewise sent orders to all sea ports to keep no 準備／条項, but to just 供給（する） themselves. These women also said that the Manta Indians were sent over to the island Plata to destroy all the goats there; which they 成し遂げるd about a month agone. With this news our men returned again, and arrived at Plata the next day.

We lay still at the island Plata, 存在 not 解決するd what to do; till the 2nd day of October, and then Captain Swan in the Cygnet of London arrived there. He was fitted out by very 著名な merchants of that city, on a design only to 貿易（する） with the Spaniards or Indians, having a very かなりの 貨物 井戸／弁護士席 sorted for these parts of the world; but 会合 with divers 失望s and, 存在 out of hopes to 得る a 貿易（する） in these seas, his men 軍隊d him to entertain a company of privateers which he met with 近づく Nicoya, a town whither he was going to 捜し出す a 貿易（する）, and these privateers were bound thither in boats to get a ship. These were the men that we had heard of at Manta; they （機の）カム 陸路の under the 命令（する） of Captain Peter Harris, 甥 to that Captain Harris who was killed before パナマ. Captain Swan was still 指揮官 of his own ship, and Captain Harris 命令（する）d a small bark under Captain Swan. There was much joy on all 味方するs when they arrived; and すぐに hereupon Captain Davis and Captain Swan consorted, wishing for Captain Eaton again. Our little bark, which was taken at Santa Helena, was すぐに sent out to 巡航する, while the ships were fitting; for Captain Swan's ship 存在 十分な of goods was not fit to entertain his new guest till the goods were 性質の／したい気がして of; therefore he by the 同意 of the supercargo got up all his goods on deck, and sold to anyone that would buy upon 信用: the 残り／休憩（する） was thrown overboard into the sea except 罰金 goods, as silks, muslins, stockings, etc., and except the アイロンをかける, whereof he had a good 量, both wrought and in 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業s: this was saved for ballast.

The third day after our bark was sent to 巡航する she brought in a prize of 400 tuns, laden with 木材／素質: they took her in the Bay of Guayaquil; she （機の）カム from a town of that 指名する and was bound to Lima. The 指揮官 of this prize said that it was 一般に 報告（する）／憶測d and believed at Guayaquil that the viceroy was fitting out 10 sail of フリゲート艦s to 運動 us out of these seas. This news made our unsettled 乗組員 wish that they had been 説得するd to 受託する of Captain Eaton's company on reasonable 条件. Captain Davis and Captain Swan had some discourse 関心ing Captain Eaton; they at last 結論するd to send our small bark に向かって the coast of Lima, as far as the island Lobos, to 捜し出す Captain Eaton. This 存在 認可するd by all 手渡すs she was cleaned the next day and sent away, 乗組員を乗せた with twenty men, ten of Captain Davis's, and ten of Swan's men, and Captain Swan 令状 a letter directed to Captain Eaton, 願望（する）ing his company, and the 小島 of Plata was 任命するd for the general rendezvous. When this bark was gone we turned another bark which we had into a 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship; having six or seven carpenters who soon 直す／買収する，八百長をするd her; and while the carpenters were at work about the 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship we scrubbed and cleaned our men-of-war 同様に as time and place would 許す.

The 19th day of October we finished our 商売／仕事, and the 20th day we sailed に向かって the island Lobos, where our bark was ordered to stay for us, or 会合，会う us again at Plata. We had but little 勝利，勝つd, therefore it was the 23rd day before we passed by Point Santa Helena. The 25th day we crossed over the Bay of Guayaquil.

CAPE BLANCO.

The 30th day we 二塁打d Cape Blanco. This cape is in latitude 3 degrees 45 minutes. It is counted the worst cape in all the South Seas to 二塁打, passing to the southward; for in all other places ships may stand off to sea 20 or 30 leagues off if they find they cannot get anything under the shore; but here they dare not do it: for, by relation of the Spaniards, they find a 現在の setting north-west which will carry a ship off more in two hours than they can run in again in five. Besides, setting to the northward they lose ground: therefore they always （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 up in under the shore, which ofttimes they find very difficult because the 勝利，勝つd 一般的に blows very strong at south-south-west or south by west without altering; for here are never any land-勝利，勝つd. This cape is of an indifferent 高さ: it is 盗品故買者d with white 激しく揺するs to the sea; for which 推論する／理由, I believe, it has this 指名する. The land in the country seems to be 十分な of high, 法外な, rugged and barren 激しく揺するs.

PAYTA.

The 2nd day of November we got as high as Payta: we lay about six leagues off shore all the day, that the Spaniards might not see us; and in the evening sent our canoes 岸に to take it, 乗組員を乗せた with 110 men.

Payta is a small Spanish sea port town in the latitude of 5 degrees 15 minutes. It is built on the sand, の近くに by the sea, in a nook, 肘, or small bay, under a pretty high hill. There are not above 75 or 80 houses and two churches. The houses are but low and ill built.

THE BUILDINGS IN PERU.

The building in this country of Peru is much alike on all the sea-coast. The 塀で囲むs are built of brick made with earth and straw kneaded together: they are about three foot long, two foot 幅の広い, and a foot and a half 厚い: they never 燃やす them, but lay them a long time in the sun to 乾燥した，日照りの before they are used in building. In some places they have no roofs, only 政治家s laid across from the 味方する 塀で囲むs and covered with mats; and then those 塀で囲むs are carried up to a かなりの 高さ. But where they build roofs upon their houses the 塀で囲むs are not made so high, as I said before. The houses in general all over this kingdom are but meanly built, one 長，指導者 推論する／理由, with the ありふれた people 特に, is the want of 構成要素s to build withal; for however it be more within land, yet here is neither 石／投石する nor 木材／素質 to build with, nor any 構成要素s but such brick as I have 述べるd; and even the 石／投石する which they have in some places is so brittle that you may rub it into sand with your fingers. Another 推論する／理由 why they build so meanly is because it never rains; therefore they only endeavour to 盗品故買者 themselves from the sun. Yet their 塀で囲むs, which are built but with an ordinary sort of brick in comparison with what is made in other parts of the world, continue a long time as 会社／堅い as when first made, having never any 勝利，勝つd nor rains to rot, moulder, or shake them. However, the richer sort have 木材／素質, which they make use of in building; but it is brought from other places.

THE SOIL OF PERU.

This 乾燥した，日照りの country 開始するs to the northward, from about Cape Blanco to Coquimbo, in about 30 degrees south, having no rain that I could ever 観察する or hear of; nor any green thing growing in the mountains: neither yet in the valleys, except where here and there watered with a few small rivers 分散させるd up and 負かす／撃墜する. So that the northermost parts of this tract of land are 供給（する）d with 木材／素質 from Guayaquil, Gallo, Tornato, and other places that are watered with rains; where there are plenty of all sorts of 木材／素質. In the south parts, as about Guasco and Coquimbo, they fetch their 木材／素質 from the island Chiloe, or other places thereabouts. The 塀で囲むs of churches and rich men's houses are whitened with lime, both within and without; and the doors and 地位，任命するs are very large, and adorned with carved work, and the beams also in the churches: the inside of the houses are hung 一連の会議、交渉／完成する with rich embroidered or painted cloths. They have likewise 豊富 of 罰金 pictures, which 追加するs no small ornament to their houses: these, I suppose, they have from Old Spain. But the houses of Payta are 非，不，無 of them so richly furnished. The churches were large and 公正に／かなり carved: at one end of the town there was a small fort の近くに by the sea, but no 広大な／多数の／重要な guns in it. This fort, only with muskets, will 命令（する） all the bay so as to 妨げる any boats from 上陸. There is another fort on the 最高の，を越す of the hill, just over the town, which 命令（する）s both it and the lower fort.

COLAN.

There is neither 支持を得ようと努めるd nor water to be had there: they fetch their water from an Indian town called Colan, about two leagues north-north-east from Payta: for at Colan there is a small river of fresh water which runs out into the sea; from whence ships that touch at Payta are 供給（する）d with water and other refreshments, as fowls, hogs, plantains, yams, and maize: Payta 存在 destitute of all these things, only as they fetch them from Colan, as they have occasion.

BARK LOGS DESCRIBED.

The Indians of Colan are all fishermen: they go out to sea and fish from bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs. Bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs are made of many 一連の会議、交渉／完成する スピードを出す／記録につけるs of 支持を得ようと努めるd, in manner of a raft, and very different によれば the use that they are designed for, or the humour of the people that make them, or the 事柄 that they are made of. If they are made for fishing then they are only 3 or 4 スピードを出す／記録につけるs of light 支持を得ようと努めるd, of 7 or 8 foot long, placed by the 味方する of each other, pinned 急速な／放蕩な together with 木造の pins and bound hard with withes. The スピードを出す／記録につけるs are so placed that the middlemost are longer than those by the 味方するs, 特に at the 長，率いる or fore part, which grows narrower 徐々に into an angle or point, the better to 削減（する） through the water. Others are made to carry goods: the 底（に届く） of these is made of 20 or 30 広大な／多数の／重要な trees of about 20, 30, or 40 foot long, fastened like the other, 味方する to 味方する, and so 形態／調整d: on the 最高の，を越す of these they place another shorter 列／漕ぐ／騒動 of trees across them, pinned 急速な／放蕩な to each other and then pinned to the undermost 列／漕ぐ／騒動: this 二塁打 列／漕ぐ／騒動 of planks makes the 底（に届く） of the float, and of a かなりの breadth. From this 底（に届く） the raft is raised to about 10 foot higher, with 列／漕ぐ／騒動s of 地位，任命するs いつかs 始める，決める upright, and supporting a 床に打ち倒す or two: but those I 観察するd were raised by 厚い trees laid across each other, as in 支持を得ようと努めるd-piles; only not の近くに together as in the 底（に届く） of the float, but at the ends and 味方するs only, so as to leave the middle all hollow like a 議会; except that here and there a beam goes across it to keep the float more compact. In this hollow at about 4 foot 高さ from the beams at the 底（に届く） they lay small 政治家s along and の近くに together to make a 床に打ち倒す for another room, on the 最高の，を越す of which also they lay another such 床に打ち倒す made of 政治家s; and the 入り口s into both these rooms is only by creeping between the 広大な／多数の／重要な 横断する trees which make the 塀で囲むs of this sea-house. The lowest of these storeys serves as a cellar: there they lay 広大な／多数の／重要な 石／投石するs for ballast, and their jars of fresh water の近くにd up, and whatever may 耐える 存在 wet; for, by the 負わせる of the ballast and 貨物, the 底（に届く） of this room, and of the whole 大型船, is sunk so 深い as to 嘘（をつく） 2 or 3 feet within the surface of the water. The second story is for the seamen and their necessaries. Above this second story the goods are stowed to what 高さ they please, usually about 8 or 10 feet, and kept together by 政治家s 始める，決める upright やめる 一連の会議、交渉／完成する: only there is a little space abaft for the steersmen (for they have a large rudder) and afore for the 解雇する／砲火／射撃-hearth, to dress their victuals, 特に when they make long voyages, as from Lima to Truxillo, or Guayaquil, or パナマ, which last voyage is 5 or 600 leagues. In the 中央 of all, の中で the goods, rises a mast, to which is fastened a large sail, as in our West Country 船s in the Thames. They always go before the 勝利，勝つd, 存在 unable to ply against it; and therefore are fit only for these seas, where the 勝利，勝つd is always in a manner the same, not 変化させるing above a point or two all the way from Lima, till such time as they come into the Bay of パナマ: and even there they 会合，会う with no 広大な／多数の／重要な sea; but いつかs northerly 勝利，勝つd; and then they lower their sails, and 運動 before it, waiting a change. All their care then is only to keep off from shore; for they are so made that they cannot 沈む at sea. These rafts carry 60 or 70 tuns of goods and 上向きs; their 貨物 is 主として ワイン, oil, flour, sugar, Quito-cloth, soap, goat-肌s dressed, etc. The float is managed usually by 3 or 4 men, who, 存在 unable to return with it against the 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd, when they come to パナマ 配置する／処分する／したい気持ちにさせる of the goods and 底（に届く） together; getting a passage 支援する again for themselves in some ship or boat bound to the port they （機の）カム from; and there they make a new bark-スピードを出す／記録につける for their next 貨物.

The smaller sort of bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs, 述べるd before, which 嘘（をつく） flat on the water and are used for fishing, or carrying water to ships, or the like (half a tun or a tun at a time) are more governable than the other, though they have masts and sails too. With these they go out at night by the help of the land-勝利，勝つd (which is seldom wanting on this coast) and return 支援する in the daytime with the sea-勝利，勝つd.

This sort of floats are used in many places both in the East and West Indies. On the coast of Coromandel in the East Indies they call them catamarans. These are but one スピードを出す／記録につける, or two いつかs of a sort of light 支持を得ようと努めるd, and are made without sail or rudder, and so small that they carry but one man, whose 脚s and breech are always in the water, and he manages his スピードを出す／記録につける with a paddle, appearing at a distance like a man sitting on a fish's 支援する.

PIURA.

The country about Payta is 山地の and barren like all the 残り／休憩（する） of the Kingdom of Peru. There is no town of consequence nearer it than Piura, which is a large town in the country 40 miles distant. It lies, by 報告（する）／憶測 of our Spanish 囚人s, in a valley which is watered with a small river that disembogues itself into the Bay of Chirapee, in about 7 degrees of north latitude. This bay is nearer to Piura than Payta; yet all goods 輸入するd by sea for Piura are landed at Payta, for the bay of Chirapee is 十分な of dangerous shoals, and therefore not たびたび（訪れる）d by shipping.

THE ROAD OF PAYTA.

The road of Payta is one of the best on the coast of Peru. It is 避難所d from the south-west by a point of land which makes a large bay and smooth water for ships to ride in. There is room enough for a good (n)艦隊／(a)素早い of ships, and good 錨，総合司会者ing in any depth, from 6 fathom water to 20 fathom. 権利 against the town, the nearer the town, the shallower the water and the smoother the riding, it is clean sand all over the bay. Most ships passing either to the north or the south touch at this place for water, for, though here is 非，不，無 at the town, yet those Indian fishermen of Colan will, and do, 供給（する） all ships very reasonably; and good water is much prized on all this coast through the scarcity of it.

November the 3rd at 6 o'clock in the morning our men landed about 4 miles to the south of the town and took some 囚人s that were sent thither to watch for 恐れる of us; and these 囚人s said that the 知事 of Piura （機の）カム with 100 武装した men to Payta the night before, purposely to …に反対する our 上陸 there if we should 試みる／企てる it.

Our men marched 直接／まっすぐに to the fort on the hill, and took it without the loss of one man. Hereupon the 知事 of Piura with all his men and the inhabitants of the town ran away as 急速な／放蕩な as they could. Then our men entered the town and 設立する it emptied both of money and goods; there was not so much as a meal of victuals left for them.

The 囚人s told us a ship had been here a little before and burnt a 広大な／多数の／重要な ship in the road, but did not land their men; and that here they put 岸に all their 囚人s and 操縦するs. We knew this must be Captain Eaton's ship which had done this, and by these circumstances we supposed he was gone to the East Indies, it 存在 always designed by him. The 囚人s told us also that, since Captain Eaton was here, a small bark had been off the harbour and taken a pair of bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs a-fishing, and made the fishermen bring 船内に 20 or 30 jars of fresh water. This we supposed was our bark that was sent to the Lobos to 捜し出す Captain Eaton.

In the evening we （機の）カム in with our ships and 錨，総合司会者d before the town in 10 fathom water, 近づく a mile from the shore. Here we stayed till the sixth day, in hopes to get a 身代金 from the town. Our captains 需要・要求するd 300 packs of flour, 3000 続けざまに猛撃する of Sugar, 25 jars of ワイン, and 1000 jars of water to be brought off to us; but we got nothing of it. Therefore Captain Swan ordered the town to be 解雇する／砲火／射撃d, which was presently done. Then all our men （機の）カム 船内に, and Captain Swan ordered the bark which Captain Harris 命令（する）d to be burnt because she did not sail 井戸／弁護士席.

At night, when the land-勝利，勝つd （機の）カム off, we sailed from hence に向かって Lobos. The 10th day in the evening we saw a sail 耐えるing north-west by north as far as we could 井戸／弁護士席 discern her on our deck. We すぐに chased, separating ourselves the better to 会合，会う her in the night; but we 行方不明になるd her. Therefore the next morning we again trimmed sharp and made the best of our way to Lobos de la 損なう.

LOBOS DE TERRA.

The 14th day we had sight of the island Lobos de Terra: it bore east from us; we stood in に向かって it, and betwixt 7 and 8 o'clock in the night （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 at the north-east end of the island, in 4 fathom water. This island at sea is of an indifferent 高さ, and appears like Lobos de la 損なう. About a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile from the north end there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な hollow 激しく揺する, and a good channel between, where there is 7 fathom water. The 15th day we went 岸に and 設立する 豊富 of penguins and ばか者s, and 調印（する） in 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s. We sent 船内に of all these to be dressed, for we had not tasted any flesh in a 広大な／多数の／重要な while before; therefore some of us did eat very heartily. Captain Swan, to encourage his men to eat this coarse flesh, would commend it for 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の food, comparing the 調印（する） to a roasted pig, the ばか者s to 女／おっせかい屋s, and the penguins to ducks: this he did to train them to live contentedly on coarse meat, not knowing but we might be 軍隊d to make use of such food before we 出発／死d out of these seas; for it is 一般に seen の中で privateers that nothing emboldens them sooner to 反乱（を起こす） than want, which we could not 井戸／弁護士席 苦しむ in a place where there are such 量s of these animals to be had if men could be 説得するd to be content with them.

THEY COME AGAIN TO LOBOS DE LA MAR.

In the afternoon we sailed from Lobos de Terra with the 勝利，勝つd at south by east and arrived at Lobos de la 損なう on the 19th day. Here we 設立する a letter, left by our bark that was sent to 捜し出す Captain Eaton, by which we understood that Captain Eaton had been there but was gone before they arrived, and had left no letter to advise us which way he was gone; and that our bark was again returned to Plata in hopes to find us there, or 会合，会う us by the way, else 解決するing to stay for us there. We were sorry to hear that Captain Eaton was gone, for now we did not 推定する／予想する to 会合，会う with him any more in these seas.

The 21st day we sent out our Moskito strikers for 海がめ, who brought 船内に enough to serve both ships' companies; and this they did all the time that we abode here. While we lay at this island Captain Swan made new yards, squarer than those he had before, and made his sails larger, and our ship's company in the 合間 分裂（する） plank for firewood, and put 船内に as many planks as we could conveniently stow for other uses: here 存在 plank enough of all sorts which we had brought hither in the first prize that we took and left here.

The 26th day in the evening we saw a small bark about 3 leagues north-north-west from the island, but, we supposing her to be our own bark, did not go after her. The next morning she was two leagues south of the island, standing off to sea; but we did not now chase her neither, although we knew she was not our bark; for, 存在 to windward of us, she could have made her escape if we had chased her. This bark, as we were afterwards 知らせるd, was sent out purposely to see if we were at this island. Her orders were not to come too 近づく, only to appear in sight; they supposing that if we were here we should soon be after her; as indeed it was a wonder we had not chased her: but our not doing so, and lying の近くに under the island undiscerned by them, was a 広大な／多数の／重要な occasion of our coming upon Puna afterwards 突然に, they 存在 now without 恐れる of any enemy so 近づく them.

THE BAY OF GUAYAQUIL.

The 28th day we scrubbed our ship's 底（に届く）, ーするつもりであるing to sail the next day に向かって Guayaquil; it 存在 結論するd upon to 試みる／企てる that town before we returned again to Plata. Accordingly, on the 29th day in the morning, we loosed from hence, steering 直接／まっすぐに for the Bay of Guayaquil. This bay runs in between Cape Blanco on the south 味方する, and Point Chandy on the north.

ISLE OF SANTA CLARA.

About 25 leagues from Cape Blanco, 近づく the 底（に届く） of the bay, there is a small island called Santa Clara, which lies east and west: it is of an indifferent length, and it appears like a dead man stretched out in a shroud. The east end 代表するs the 長，率いる, and the west end the feet. Ships that are bound into the river of Guayaquil pass on the south 味方する to 避ける the shoals which 嘘（をつく） on the north 味方する of it; whereon 以前は ships have been lost.

A RICH SPANISH WRECK THERE.

It is 報告（する）／憶測d by the Spaniards that there is a very rich 難破させる lies on the north 味方する of that island, not far from it; and that some of the plate has been taken up by one who （機の）カム from Old Spain, with a 特許 from the king to fish in those seas for 難破させるs; but he dying, the 事業／計画（する） 中止するd, and the 難破させる still remains as he left it; only the Indians by stealth do いつかs （問題を）取り上げる some of it; and they might have taken up much more if it were not for the cat-fish which 群れているs hereabouts.

CATFISH.

The cat-fish is much like a whiting, but the 長，率いる is flatter and bigger. It has a 広大な／多数の／重要な wide mouth, and 確かな small strings pointing out from each 味方する of it, like cat's whiskers; and for that 推論する／理由 it is called a cat-fish. It has three fins; one growing on the 最高の，を越す of his 支援する, and one on either 味方する. Each of these fins has a stiff sharp bone which is very venomous if it strikes into a man's flesh; therefore it is dangerous 飛び込み where many of these fish are. The Indians that adventured to search this 難破させる have to their 悲しみ experienced it; some having lost their lives, others the use of their 四肢s by it: this we were 知らせるd of by an Indian who himself had been fishing on it by stealth. I myself have known some white men that have lost the use of their 手渡すs only by a small prick with the fin of these fish: therefore when we catch them with a hook we tread on them to take the hook out of their mouths, or さもなければ, in flurting about (as all fish will when first taken) they might accidentally strike their sharp fins into the 手渡すs of those that caught them. Some of the fish are seven or eight 続けざまに猛撃する 負わせる: some again, in some particular places, are 非，不，無 of them bigger than a man's thumb, but their fins are all alike venomous. They use to be at the mouths of rivers, or where there is much mud and oaze, and they are 設立する all over the American coast, both in the North and South Sea, at least in the hot countries, as also in the East Indies: where, sailing with Captain Minchin の中で 確かな islands 近づく the 海峡s of Malacca, he pointed to an island at which he told me he lost the use of his 手渡す by one of these only in going to take the hook out of its mouth. The 負傷させる was 不十分な 明白な yet his 手渡す was much swollen, and the 苦痛 lasted about 9 weeks; during most part of which the 激怒（する）ing heat of it was almost ready to distract him. However, though the bony fins of these fish are so venomous, yet the bones in their 団体／死体s are not so; at least we never perceived any such 影響 in eating the fish; and their flesh is very 甘い, delicious and wholesome meat.

PUNTA ARENA IN THE ISLE PUNA.

From the island Santa Clara to Punta 円形競技場 is 7 leagues east-north-east. This Punta 円形競技場, or Sandy Point, is the westermost point of the island Puna. Here all ships bound into the river of Guayaquil 錨，総合司会者, and must wait for a 操縦する, the 入り口 存在 very dangerous for strangers.

THE ISLAND DESCRIBED.

The island Puna is a pretty large flat low island, stretching east and west about 12 or 14 leagues long, and about four or five leagues wide. The tide runs very strong all about this island, but so many different ways, by 推論する／理由 of the 支店s, creeks, and rivers that run into the sea 近づく it, that it casts up many dangerous shoals on all 味方するs of it. There is in the island only one Indian town on the south 味方する of it, の近くに by the sea, and seven leagues from Punta 円形競技場, which town is also called Puna. The Indians of this town are all seamen, and are the only 操縦するs in these seas, 特に for this river. Their chiefest 雇用 when they are not at sea is fishing. These men are 強いるd by the Spaniards to keep good watch for ships that 錨，総合司会者 at Punta 円形競技場; which, as I said before, is 7 leagues from the town Puna. The place where they keep this watch is at a point of land on the island Puna that starts out into the sea; from whence they can see all ships that 錨，総合司会者 at Punta 円形競技場. The Indians come thither in the morning, and return at night on horseback. From this watching point to Punta 円形競技場 it is 4 leagues, all 溺死するd mangrove-land: and in the 中途の between these two points is another small point, where these Indians are 強いるd to keep another watch when they 恐れる an enemy. The sentinel goes thither in a canoe in the morning, and returns at night; for there is no coming thither by land through that mangrove marshy ground. The middle of the island Puna is savannah or pasture.

THE PALMETTO-TREE.

There are some 山の尾根s of good woodland which is of a light yellow or sandy mould, producing large tall trees, most unknown even to travellers: but there are plenty of palmetto-trees which, because I am 熟知させるd with, I shall 述べる. The palmetto-tree is about the bigness of an ordinary ash: it is about 30 foot high; the 団体／死体 straight, without any 四肢, or 支店, or leaf, except at the 長，率いる only, where it spreads 前へ／外へ into many small 支店s, not half so big as a man's arm, some no bigger than one's finger: these 支店s are about three or four foot long, （疑いを）晴らす from any knot: at the end of the 支店 there grows one 幅の広い leaf, about the bigness of a large fan. This, when it first shoots 前へ／外へ, grows in 倍のs, like a fan when it is の近くにd; and still as it grows bigger so it opens, till it becomes like a fan spread abroad. It is 強化するd に向かって the stalk with many small ribs springing from thence, and growing into the leaf; which as they grow 近づく the end of the leaf, grow thinner and smaller. The leaves that make the 小衝突 part of the 旗-brooms which are brought into England grow just in this manner; and are indeed a small 肉親，親類d of palmetto; for there are of them of several dimensions. In Bermuda and どこかよそで they make hats, baskets, brooms, fans to blow the 解雇する／砲火／射撃 instead of bellows, with many other house 器具／実施するs, of palmetto leaves. On the 山の尾根s where these trees grow the Indians have here and there 農園s of maize, yams, and potatoes.

TOWN AND HARBOUR OF PUNA.

There are in the town of Puna about 20 houses and a small church. The houses stand all on 地位，任命するs, 10 or 12 foot high, with ladders on the outside to go up into them. I did never see the like building anywhere but の中で the Malayans in the East Indies. They are thatched with palmetto-leaves, and their 議会s 井戸／弁護士席 boarded, in which last they 越える the Malayans. The best place for ships to 嘘（をつく） at an 錨，総合司会者 is against the middle of the town. There is five fathom water within a cables' length of the shore, and good soft 深い oaze where ships may careen or 運ぶ／漁獲高 岸に; it stows 15 or 16 foot water up and 負かす／撃墜する.

RIVER OF GUAYAQUIL.

From Puna to Guayaquil is reckoned 7 leagues. It is 1 league before you come to the river of Guayaquil's mouth, where it is about two mile wide; from thence 上向きs the river lies pretty straight without any かなりの turnings. Both 味方するs of the river are low swampy land, overgrown with red mangroves, so that there is no 上陸.

GUAYAQUIL TOWN.

Four mile before you come to the town of Guayaquil there's a low island standing in the river. This island divides the river into two parts, making two very fair channels for ships to pass up and 負かす／撃墜する. The south-west channel is the widest, the other is as 深い, but narrower and narrower yet, by 推論する／理由 of many trees and bushes which spread over the river, both from the main and from the island; and there are also several 広大な／多数の／重要な stumps of trees standing upright in the water on either 味方する. The island is above a mile long. From the upper part of the island to the town of Guayaquil is almost a league, and 近づく as much from one 味方する of the river to the other. In that spacious place ships of the greatest 重荷（を負わせる） may ride afloat; but the best place for ships is nearest to that part of the land where the town stands; and this place is seldom without ships. Guayaquil stands 直面するing the island, の近くに by the river, partly on the 味方する and partly at the foot of a gentle hill 拒絶する／低下するing に向かって the river, by which the lower part of it is often overflown. There are two forts, one standing on the low ground, the other on the hill. This town makes a very 罰金 prospect, it 存在 beautified with several churches and other good buildings. Here lives a 知事 who, as I have been 知らせるd, has his 特許 from the king of Spain.

ITS COMMODITIES, COCOA, SARSAPARILLA, QUITO CLOTH.

Guayaquil may be reckoned one of the chiefest sea ports in the South Seas: the 商品／必需品s which are 輸出（する）d from hence are cocoa, hides, tallow, sarsaparilla, and other 麻薬s, and woollen cloth, 一般的に called cloth of Quito.

The cocoa grows on both 味方するs of the river above the town. It is a small nut, like the Campeachy nut: I think, the smallest of the two; they produce as much cocoa here as serves all the kingdom of Peru; and much of it is sent to Acapulco and from thence to the Philippine Islands.

Sarsaparilla grows in the water by the 味方するs of the river, as I have been 知らせるd.

The Quito-cloth comes from a rich town in the country within land called Quito. There is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 made, both serges and broadcloth. This cloth is not very 罰金, but it is worn by the ありふれた sort of people throughout the whole kingdom of Peru. This and all other 商品／必需品s which come from Quito are shipped off at Guayaquil for other parts; and all 輸入するd goods for the city of Quito pass by Guayaquil: by which it may appear that Guayaquil is a place of no mean 貿易（する）.

OF THE CITY, AND GOLD, AND AIR OF QUITO.

Quito, as I have been 知らせるd, is a very populous city, seated in the heart of the country. It is 住むd partly by Spaniards; but the major part of its inhabitants are Indians, under the Spanish 政府.

It is environed with mountains of a 広大な 高さ, from whose bowels many 広大な／多数の／重要な rivers have their rise. These mountains abound in gold, which by violent rains is washed with the sand into the 隣接する brooks where the Indians 訴える手段／行楽地 in 軍隊／機動隊s, washing away the sand and putting up the gold dust in their calabashes or gourd-爆撃するs: but for the manner of 集会 the gold I 言及する you to Mr. Wafer's 調書をとる／予約する: only I shall 発言／述べる here that Quito is the place in all the kingdom of Peru that abounds most with this rich metal, as I have been often 知らせるd.

The country is 支配する to 広大な／多数の／重要な rains and very 厚い 霧s, 特に the valleys. For that 推論する／理由 it is very unwholesome and sickly. The chiefest distempers are fevers, violent 頭痛, 苦痛s in the bowels, and fluxes. I know no place where gold is 設立する but what is very unhealthy, as I shall more 特に relate when I come to speak of Achin in the 小島 of Sumatra in the East Indies. Guayaquil is not so sickly as Quito and other towns さらに先に within land; yet in comparison with the towns that are on the coast of 損なう Pacifico, south of Cape Blanco, it is very sickly.

THEY ENTER THE BAY IN ORDER TO MAKE AN ATTEMPT ON THE TOWN OF GUAYAQUIL.

It was to this town of Guayaquil that we were bound; therefore we left our ships off Cape Blanco and ran into the Bay of Guayaquil with our bark and canoes, steering in for the island Santa Clara, where we arrived the next day after we left our ships, and from thence we sent away two canoes the next evening to Punta 円形競技場. At this point there are 豊富 of oysters and other 貝類と甲殻類, as cockles and mussels; therefore the Indians of Puna often come hither to get these fish. Our canoes got over before day and absconded in a creek to wait for the coming of the Puna Indians. The next morning some of them, によれば their custom, （機の）カム thither on bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs at the latter part of the ebb, and were all taken by our men. The next day, by their advice, the two watchmen of the Indian town Puna were taken by our men, and all its inhabitants, not one escaping. The next ebb they took a small bark laden with Quito-cloth. She （機の）カム from Guayaquil that tide and was bound to Lima, they having advice that we were gone off the coast by the bark which I said we saw while we lay at the island Lobos.

A GREAT ADVANTAGE SLIPPED THAT MIGHT HAVE BEEN MADE OF A COMPANY OF NEGROES TAKEN IN GUAYAQUIL RIVER.

The master of this cloth-bark 知らせるd our men that there were three barks coming from Guayaquil, laden with Negroes: he said they would come from thence the next tide. The same tide of ebb that they took the cloth-bark they sent a canoe to our bark, where the biggest part of the men were, to 急いで them away with 速度(を上げる） to the Indian town. The bark was now riding at Punta 円形競技場; and the next flood she （機の）カム with all the men and the 残り／休憩（する） of the canoes to Puna. The tide of flood 存在 now far spent we lay at this town till the last of the ebb and then 列／漕ぐ／騒動d away, leaving five men 船内に our bark who were ordered to 嘘（をつく） still till eight o'clock the next morning, and not to 解雇する／砲火／射撃 at any boat or bark, but after that time they might 解雇する／砲火／射撃 at any 反対する: for it was supposed that before that time we should be masters of Guayaquil. We had not 列／漕ぐ／騒動d above two mile before we met and took one of the three barks laden with Negroes; the master of her said that the other two would come from Guayaquil the next tide of ebb. We 削減（する） her main-mast 負かす／撃墜する and left her at an 錨，総合司会者. It was now strong flood, and therefore we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d with all 速度(を上げる） に向かって the town in hopes to get thither before the flood was 負かす／撃墜する, but we 設立する it さらに先に than we did 推定する／予想する it to be, or else our canoes, 存在 very 十分な of men, did not 列／漕ぐ／騒動 so 急速な／放蕩な as we would have them. The day broke when we were two leagues from the town, and then we had not above an hour's flood more; therefore our captains 願望（する）d the Indian 操縦する to direct us to some creek where we might abscond all day, which was すぐに done, and one canoe was sent toward Puna to our bark to order them not to move nor 解雇する／砲火／射撃 till the next day. But she （機の）カム too late to countermand the first orders; for the two barks before について言及するd laden with Negroes come from the town the last ４半期/4分の1 of the evening tide, and lay in the river の近くに by the shore on one 味方する, and we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d upon the other 味方する and 行方不明になるd them; neither did they see nor hear us. As soon as the flood was spent the two barks 重さを計るd and went 負かす／撃墜する with the ebb に向かって Puna. Our bark, seeing them coming 直接／まっすぐに に向かって them and both 十分な of men, supposed that we by some 事故 had been destroyed, and that the two barks were 乗組員を乗せた with Spanish 兵士s and sent to take our ships, and therefore they 解雇する／砲火／射撃d three guns at them a league before they （機の）カム 近づく. The two Spanish barks すぐに （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者, and the masters got into their boats and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d for the shore; but our canoe that was sent from us took them both. The 解雇する／砲火／射撃ing of these three guns made a 広大な／多数の／重要な disorder の中で our 前進するd men, for most of them did believe they were heard at Guayaquil, and that therefore it could be no 利益（をあげる） to 嘘（をつく） still in the creek; but either 列／漕ぐ／騒動 away to the town or 支援する again to our ships. It was now ４半期/4分の1 ebb, therefore we could not move 上向きs if we had been 性質の／したい気がして so to do. At length Captain Davis said he would すぐに land in the creek where they lay, and march 直接／まっすぐに to the town, if but forty men would …を伴って him: and without 説 more words he landed の中で the mangroves in the 沼s. Those that were so minded followed him, to the number of forty or fifty. Captain Swan lay still with the 残り／休憩（する） of the party in the creek, for they thought it impossible to do any good that way. Captain Davis and his men were absent about four hours, and then returned all wet and やめる tired, and could not find any passage out into the 会社／堅い land. He had been so far that he almost despaired of getting 支援する again: for a man cannot pass through those red mangroves but with very much 労働. When Captain Davis was returned we 結論するd to be going に向かって the town the beginning of the next flood; and, if we 設立する that the town was alarmed, we 目的d to return again without 試みる／企てるing anything there. As soon as it was flood we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d away and passed by the island through the north-east channel, which is the narrowest. There are so many stumps in the river that it is very dangerous passing in the night (and that is the time we always take for such 試みる／企てるs) for the river runs very swift, and one of our canoes stuck on a stump and had certainly overset if she had not been すぐに 救助（する）d by others. When we were come almost to the end of the island, there was a musket 解雇する／砲火／射撃d at us out of the bushes on the Main. We then had the town open before us, and presently saw lighted たいまつs, or candles, all the town over; 反して before the gun was 解雇する／砲火／射撃d there was but one light: therefore we now 結論するd we were discovered: yet many of our men said that it was a 宗教上の day the next day, as it was indeed, and that therefore the Spaniards were making 花火s, which they often do in the night against such times. We 列／漕ぐ／騒動d therefore a little さらに先に, and 設立する 会社／堅い land, and Captain Davis pitched his canoe 岸に and landed with his men. Captain Swan and most of his men did not think it convenient to 試みる／企てる anything, seeing the town was alarmed; but at last, 存在 upbraided with cowardice, Captain Swan and his men landed also. The place where we landed was about two mile from the town: it was all overgrown with 支持を得ようと努めるd so 厚い that we could not march through in the night; and therefore we sat 負かす／撃墜する, waiting for the light of the day. We had two Indian 操縦するs with us; one that had been with us a month, who, having received some 乱用s from a gentleman of Guayaquil, to be 復讐d 申し込む／申し出d his service to us, and we 設立する him very faithful: the other was taken by us not above two or three days before, and he seemed to be as willing as the other to 補助装置 us. This latter was led by one of Captain Davis's men, who showed himself very 今後 to go to the town, and upbraided others with faint-heartedness: yet this man (as he afterwards 自白するd) notwithstanding his courage, 個人として 削減（する） the string that the guide was made 急速な／放蕩な with, and let him go to the town by himself, not caring to follow him; but when he thought the guide was got far enough from us, he cried out that the 操縦する was gone, and that somebody had 削減（する） the cord that tied him. This put every man in a moving posture to 捜し出す the Indian, but all in vain; and our びっくり仰天 was 広大な／多数の／重要な, 存在 in the dark and の中で 支持を得ようと努めるd; so the design was wholly dashed, for not a man after that had the heart to speak of going さらに先に. Here we stayed till day and then 列／漕ぐ／騒動d out into the middle of the river, where we had a fair 見解（をとる） of the town; which, as I said before, makes a very pleasant prospect. We lay still about half an hour, 存在 a mile or something better from the town. They did not 解雇する／砲火／射撃 one gun at us, nor we at them. Thus our design on Guayaquil failed: yet Captain Townley and Captain Francois Gronet took it a little while after this. When we had taken a 十分な 見解（をとる） of the town we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d over the river, where we went 岸に to a beef estancia or farm and killed a cow, which we dressed and ate. We stayed there till the evening tide of ebb, and then 列／漕ぐ／騒動d 負かす／撃墜する the river, and the 9th day in the morning arrived at Puna. In our way thither we went 船内に the three barks laden with Negroes, that lay at their 錨，総合司会者 in the river, and carried the barks away with us. There were 1000 Negroes in the three barks, all lusty young men and women. When we （機の）カム to Puna we sent a canoe to Punta 円形競技場 to see if the ships were come thither. The 12th day she returned again with tidings that they were both there at 錨，総合司会者. Therefore in the afternoon we all went 船内に of our ships and carried the cloth-bark with us, and about forty of the stoutest Negro men, leaving their three barks with the 残り／休憩（する）; and out of these also Captain Davis and Captain Swan chose about 14 or 15 apiece, and turned the 残り／休憩（する） 岸に.

There was never a greater 適切な時期 put into the 手渡すs of men to 濃厚にする themselves than we had to have gone with these Negroes and settled ourselves at Santa Maria, on the Isthmus of Darien, and 雇うd them in getting gold out of the 地雷s there. Which might have been done with 緩和する: for about six months before this Captain Harris (who was now with us) coming 陸路の from the North Seas with his 団体／死体 of Privateers, had 大勝するd the Spaniards away from the town and gold-地雷s of Santa Maria, so that they had never 試みる／企てるd to settle there again since: 追加する to this that the Indian neighbourhood, who were mortal enemies to the Spaniards and had been 紅潮／摘発するd by their successes against them, through the 援助 of the privateers, for several years, were our 急速な／放蕩な friends and ready to receive and 補助装置 us. We had, as I have said, 1000 Negroes to work for us, we had 200 tun of flour that lay at the Galapagos, there was the river of Santa Maria, where we could careen and fit our ships; and might 防備を堅める／強化する the mouth so that if all the strength the Spaniards have in Peru had come against us we could have kept them out. If they lay with guard-ships of strength to keep us in, yet we had a 広大な／多数の／重要な country to live in, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な nation of Indians that were our friends: besides, which was the 主要な／長／主犯 thing, we had the North Seas to befriend us; from whence we could 輸出（する） ourselves, or 影響s, or 輸入する goods or men to our 援助; for in a short time we should have had 援助 from all parts of the West Indies; many thousands of privateers from Jamaica and the French islands 特に would have flocked over to us; and long before this time we might have been masters not only of those 地雷s (the richest gold-地雷s ever yet 設立する in America) but of all the coast as high as Quito: and much more than I say might then probably have been done.

THEY GO TO PLATA AGAIN.

But these may seem to the reader but golden dreams: to leave them therefore; the 13th day we sailed from Punta 円形競技場 に向かって Plata to 捜し出す our bark that was sent to the island Lobos in search of Captain Eaton. We were two ships in company and two barks; and the 16th day we arrived at Plata, but 設立する no bark there, nor any letter. The next day we went over to the main to fill water, and in our passage met our bark: she had been a second time at the island Lobos and, not finding us, was coming to Plata again. They had been in some want of 準備／条項 since they left us, and therefore they had been at Santa Helena, and taken it; where they got as much maize as served them three or four days; and that, with some fish and 海がめ which they struck, lasted them till they （機の）カム to the island Lobos de Terra. They got ばか者s' and penguins' eggs, of which they laid in a 蓄える／店; and went from thence to Lobos de la 損なう where they 補充するd their 在庫／株 of eggs, and salted up a few young 調印（する）, for 恐れる they should want: and, 存在 thus victualled, they returned again に向かって Plata.

ISLE PLATA.

When our water was filled we went over again to the island Plata. There we parted the cloths that were taken in the cloth-bark into two lots or 株; Captain Davis and his men had one part and Captain Swan and his men had the other part. The bark which the cloth was in Captain Swan kept for a tender. At this time here were at Plata a 広大な／多数の／重要な many large 海がめs, which I 裁判官 （機の）カム from the Galapagos, for I had never seen any here before though I had been here several times. This was their coupling-time, which is much sooner in the year here than in the West Indies, 適切に so called. Our strikers brought 船内に every day more than we could eat. Captain Swan had no striker, and therefore had no 海がめ but what was sent him from Captain Davis; and all his flour too he had from Captain Davis: but since our 失望 at Guayaquil Captain Davis's men murmured against Captain Swan, and did not willingly give him any 準備／条項, because he was not so 今後 to go thither as Captain Davis. However at last these differences were made up and we 結論するd to go into the Bay of パナマ, to a town called La Velia; but, because we had not canoes enough to land our men, we were 解決するd to search some rivers where the Spaniards have no 商業, there to get Indian canoes.

CHAPTER 7.

THEY LEAVE THE ISLE OF PLATA.

The 23rd day of December 1684 we sailed from the island Plata に向かって the Bay of パナマ: the 勝利，勝つd at south-south-east a 罰金 きびきびした 強風 and 罰金 天候.

CAPE PASSAO.

The next morning we passed by Cape Passao. This cape is in latitude 00 degrees 08 minutes south of the 赤道. It runs out into the sea with a high 一連の会議、交渉／完成する point which seems to be divided in the 中央. It is bald against the sea, but within land and on both 味方するs it is 十分な of short trees. The land in the country is very high and 山地の and it appears to be very woody.

THE COAST BETWEEN THAT AND CAPE SAN FRANCISCO; AND FROM THENCE ON TO PANAMA.

Between Cape Passao and Cape San Francisco the land by the sea is 十分な of small points, making as many little sandy bays between them; and is of an indifferent 高さ covered with trees of divers sorts; so that sailing by this coast you see nothing but a 広大な grove or 支持を得ようと努めるd; which is so much the more pleasant because the trees are of several forms, both in 尊敬（する）・点 to their growth and colour.

Our design was, as I said in my first 一時期／支部, to search for canoes in some river where the Spaniards have neither 解決／入植地 or 貿易（する） with the native Indians. We had Spanish 操縦するs, and Indians bred under the Spaniards, who were able to carry us into any harbour or river belonging to the Spaniards, but were wholly unacquainted with those rivers which were not たびたび（訪れる）d by the Spaniards. There are many such unfrequented rivers between Plata and パナマ: indeed all the way from the Line to the 湾 of St. Michaels, or even to パナマ itself, the coast is not 住むd by any Spaniards, nor are the Indians that 住む there any way under their subjection: except only 近づく the 小島 Gallo, where, on the banks of a gold river or two, there are some Spaniards who work there to find gold.

Now our 操縦するs 存在 at a loss on these いっそう少なく-たびたび（訪れる）d coasts, we 供給（する）d that defect out of the Spanish 操縦する-調書をとる／予約するs, which we took in their ships; these we 設立する by experience to be very good guides. Yet にもかかわらず the country in many places by the sea 存在 low, and 十分な of 開始s, creeks and rivers, it is somewhat difficult to find any particular river that a man designs to go to, where he is not 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd.

This however could be no discouragement to us; for one river might probably be 同様に furnished with Indian canoes as another; and, if we 設立する them, it was to us indifferent where, yet we pitched on the river St. Jago, not because there were not other rivers as large and as likely to be 住むd with Indians as it; but because that river was not far from Gallo, an island where our ships could 錨，総合司会者 安全に and ride securely. We passed by Cape San Francisco, 会合 with 広大な／多数の／重要な and continued rains. The land by the sea to the north of the cape is low and 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の woody; the trees are very 厚い and seem to be of a prodigious 高さ and bigness. From Cape San Francisco the land runs more easterly into the Bay of パナマ. I take this cape to be its bounds on the south 味方する, and the 小島s of Cobaya or Quibo to bound it on the north 味方する. Between this cape and the 小島 Gallo there are many large and navigable rivers. We passed by them all till we （機の）カム to the river St. Jago.

THE RIVER OF ST. JAGO.

This river is 近づく 2 degrees north of the 赤道. It is large and navigable some leagues up, and seven leagues from the sea it divides itself into two parts, making an island that is four leagues wide against the sea. The widest 支店 is that on the south-west 味方する of the island. Both 支店s are very 深い, but the mouth of the narrower is so choked with shoals that at low water even canoes can't enter. Above the island it is a league wide, and the stream runs pretty straight and very swift. The tide flows about three leagues up the river, but to what 高さ I know not. Probably the river has its 初めの from some of the rich mountains 近づく the city Quibo, and it runs through a country as rich in 国／地域 as perhaps any in the world, 特に when it draws within 10 or 12 leagues of the sea. The land there, both on the island and on both 味方するs of the river, is of a 黒人／ボイコット 深い mould, producing 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 広大な／多数の／重要な tall trees of many sorts, such as usually grow in these hot 気候s. I shall only give an account of the cotton and cabbage-trees, whereof there is 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty; and they are as large of their 肉親，親類d as ever I saw.

THE RED AND THE WHITE COTTON-TREE.

There are two sorts of cotton-trees, one is called the red, the other the white cotton-tree. The white cotton-tree grows like an oak, but 一般に much bigger and taller than our oaks: the 団体／死体 is straight and （疑いを）晴らす from knots or boughs to the very 長，率いる: there it spreads 前へ／外へ many 広大な／多数の／重要な 四肢s just like an oak. The bark is smooth and of a grey colour: the leaves are as big as a large plum-leaf, jagged at the 辛勝する／優位; they are oval, smooth, and of a dark green colour. Some of these trees have their 団体／死体s much bigger 18 or 20 foot high than nearer the ground, 存在 big-bellied like ninepins. They 耐える a very 罰金 sort of cotton, called silk-cotton. When this cotton is 熟した the trees appear like our apple-trees in England when 十分な of blossoms. If I do not mistake the cotton 落ちるs 負かす／撃墜する in November or December: then the ground is covered white with it. This is not 相当な and continuous, like that which grows upon the cotton-shrubs in 農園s, but like the 負かす／撃墜する of thistles; so that I did never know any use made of it in the West Indies, because it is not 価値（がある） the 労働 of 集会 it: but in the East Indies the natives gather and use it for pillows. It has a small 黒人／ボイコット seed の中で it. The leaves of this tree 落ちる off the beginning of April; while the old leaves are 落ちるing off the young ones spring out, and in a week's time the tree casts off her old 式服s and is 着せる／賦与するd in a new pleasant garb. The red cotton-tree is like the other, but hardly so big: it 耐えるs no cotton, but its 支持を得ようと努めるd is somewhat harder of the two, yet both sorts are soft spongy 支持を得ようと努めるd, fit for no use that I know but only for canoes, which, 存在 straight and tall, they are very good for; but they will not last long, 特に if not drawn 岸に often and tarred; さもなければ the worm and the water soon rot them. They are the biggest trees, or perhaps 少しのd rather, in the West Indies. They are ありふれた in the East and West Indies in good fat land.

THE CABBAGE-TREE.

As the cotton is the biggest tree in the 支持を得ようと努めるd, so the cabbage-tree is the tallest: the 団体／死体 is not very big, but very high and straight. I have 手段d one in the Bay of Campeachy 120 feet long as it lay on the ground, and there are some much higher. It has no 四肢s nor boughs, but at the 長，率いる there are many 支店s bigger than a man's arm. These 支店s are not covered but flat with sharp 辛勝する／優位s; they are 12 or 14 foot long. About two foot from the trunk the 支店s shoot 前へ／外へ small long leaves about an インチ 幅の広い, which grow so 定期的に on both 味方するs of the 支店 that the whole 支店 seems to be but one leaf made up of many small ones. The cabbage-fruit shoots out in the 中央 of these 支店s from the 最高の，を越す of the tree; it is 投資するd with many young leaves or 支店s which are ready to spread abroad as the old 支店s 減少（する） and 落ちる 負かす／撃墜する. The cabbage itself, when it is taken out of the leaves which it seems to be 倍のd in, is as big as the small of a man's 脚 and a foot long; it is as white as milk and as 甘い as a nut if eaten raw, and it is very 甘い and wholesome if boiled. Besides the cabbage itself there grow out between the cabbage and the large 支店s small twigs, as of a shrub, about two foot long from their stump. At the end of those twigs (which grow very 厚い together) there hang berries hard and 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and as big as a cherry. These the trees shed every year, and they are very good for hogs: for this 推論する／理由 the Spaniards 罰金 any who shall 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する any of these in their 支持を得ようと努めるd. The 団体／死体 of the tree is 十分な of （犯罪の）一味s 一連の会議、交渉／完成する it, half a foot asunder from the 底（に届く） to the 最高の，を越す. The bark is thin and brittle; the 支持を得ようと努めるd is 黒人／ボイコット and very hard, the heart or middle of the tree is white pith. They do not climb to get the cabbage but 削減（する） them 負かす／撃墜する; for should they gather it off the tree as it stands, yet its 長，率いる 存在 gone it soon dies. These trees are much used by planters in Jamaica to board the 味方するs of the houses, for it is but splitting the trunk into four parts with an axe, and there are so many planks. Those trees appear very pleasant, and they beautify the whole 支持を得ようと努めるd, spreading their green 支店s above all other trees.

All this country is 支配する to very 広大な／多数の／重要な rains, so that this part of Peru 支払う／賃金s for the 乾燥した，日照りの 天候 which they have about Lima and all that coast. I believe that is one 推論する／理由 why the Spaniards have made such small 発見s in this and other rivers on this coast. Another 推論する／理由 may be because it lies not so 直接／まっすぐに in their way; for they do not coast it along in going from パナマ to Lima, but first go 西方の as far as to the 重要なs or 小島s of Cobaya, for a westerly 勝利，勝つd, and from thence stand over に向かって Cape San Francisco, not touching anywhere usually till they come to Manta 近づく Cape San Lorenzo. In their return indeed from Lima to パナマ they may keep along the coast hereabouts; but then their ships are always laden; 反して the light ships that go from パナマ are most at leisure to make 発見s. A third 推論する／理由 may be the wildness and 敵意 of all the natives on this coast, who are 自然に 防備を堅める／強化するd by their rivers and 広大な 支持を得ようと努めるd, from whence with their arrows they can easily annoy any that shall land there to 強襲，強姦 them. At this river 特に there are no Indians live within 6 leagues of the sea, and all the country so far is 十分な of impassable 支持を得ようと努めるd; so that to get at the Indians, or the 地雷s and mountains, there is no way but by 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing up the river; and if any who are enemies to the natives 試みる／企てる this (as the Spaniards are always hated by them) they must all the way be exposed to the arrows of those who would 嘘（をつく） purposely in 待ち伏せ／迎撃する in the 支持を得ようと努めるd for them. These wild Indians have small 農園s of maize and good plantain-gardens; for plantains are their chiefest food. They have also a few fowls and hogs.

THE INDIANS OF ST. JAGO RIVER, AND ITS NEIGHBOURHOOD.

It was to this river that we were bound to 捜し出す for canoes, therefore the 26th, supposing ourselves to be abreast of it, we went from our ships with 4 canoes. The 27th day in the morning we entered at half flood into the smaller 支店 of that river, and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d up six leagues before we met any inhabitants. There we 設立する two small huts thatched with palmetto-leaves. The Indians, seeing us 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing に向かって their houses, got their wives and little ones, with their 世帯 stuff, into their canoes, and paddled away faster than we could 列／漕ぐ／騒動; for we were 軍隊d to keep in the middle of the river because of our oars, but they with their paddles kept の近くに under the banks, and so had not the strength of the stream against them, as we had. These huts were の近くに by the river on the east 味方する of it, just against the end of the island. We saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な many other houses a league from us on the other 味方する of the river; but the main stream into which we were now come seemed to be so swift that we were afraid to put over for 恐れる we should not be able to get 支援する again. We 設立する only a hog, some Fowls and plantains in the huts: we killed the hog and the Fowls, which were dressed presently. Their hogs they got (as I suppose) from the Spaniards by some 事故, or from some 隣人ing Indians who converse with the Spaniards; for this that we took was of their European 肉親，親類d, which the Spaniards have introduced into America very plentifully, 特に into the islands Jamaica, Hispaniola, and Cuba above all, 存在 very 大部分は 蓄える／店d with them; where they 料金d in the 支持を得ようと努めるd in the daytime, and at night come in at the sounding of a conch-爆撃する, and are put up in their crauls or pens, and yet some turn wild, which にもかかわらず are often おとりd in by the other, which 存在 all 示すd, whenever they see an unmarked hog in the pen, they know it is a wild one, and shoot him presently. These crauls I have not seen on the Continent where the Spaniards keep them tame at home. の中で the wild Indians, or in their 支持を得ようと努めるd, are no hogs, but peccary and warree, a sort I have について言及するd before.

After we had refreshed ourselves we returned toward the mouth of the river. It was the evening when we （機の）カム from thence, and we got to the river's mouth the next morning before day: our ships when we left them were ordered to go to Gallo, where they were to stay for us.

THE ISLE OF GALLO.

Gallo is a small uninhabited island lying in between two and three degrees north latitude. It lies in a wide bay about three leagues from the mouth of the river Tomaco; and four leagues and a half from a small Indian village called Tomaco: the island Gallo is of an indifferent 高さ; it is 着せる／賦与するd with very good 木材／素質-trees, and is therefore often visited with barks from Guayaquil and other places: for most of the 木材／素質 carried from Guayaquil to Lima is first fetched from Gallo. There is a spring of good water at the north-east end: at that place there is a 罰金 small sandy bay, where there is good 上陸. The road for ships is against this bay, where there is good 安全な・保証する riding in six or seven fathom water; and here ships may careen. It is but shoal water all about this island; yet there is a channel to come in at, where there is no いっそう少なく than four fathom water: you must go in with the tide of flood and come out with ebb, sounding all the way.

Tomaco is a large river that takes its 指名する from an Indian village so called: it is 報告（する）／憶測d to spring from the rich mountains about Quito. It is 厚い 住むd with Indians; and there are some Spaniards that live there who traffic with the Indians for gold. It is shoal at the mouth of the river yet barks may enter.

THE RIVER AND VILLAGE OF TOMACO.

This village Tomaco is but small, and is seated not far from the mouth of the river. It is a place to entertain the Spanish merchants that come to Gallo to 負担 木材／素質, or to traffic with the Indians for gold. At this place one Doleman, with seven or eight men more, once of Captain Sharp's 乗組員, were killed in the year 1680. From the 支店 of the river St. Jago, where we now lay, to Tomaco is about five leagues; the land low and 十分な of creeks so that canoes may pass within land through those creeks, and from thence into Tomaco River.

The 28th day we left the river of St. Jago, crossing some creeks in our way with our canoes; and （機の）カム to an Indian house where we took the man and all his family. We stayed here till the afternoon, and then 列／漕ぐ／騒動d に向かって Tomaco, with the man of this house for our guide. We arrived at Tomaco about 12 o'clock at night. Here we took all the inhabitants of the village and a Spanish knight called Don Diego de Pinas. This knight （機の）カム in a ship from Lima to lade 木材／素質. The ship was riding in a creek about a mile off, and there were only one Spaniard and 8 Indians 船内に. We went in a canoe with 7 men and took her; she had no goods but 12 or 13 jars of good ワイン, which we took out, and the next day let the ship go. Here an Indian canoe （機の）カム 船内に with three men in her. These men could not speak Spanish, neither could they distinguish us from Spaniards; the wild Indians usually thinking all white men to be Spaniards. We gave them 3 Or 4 calabashes of ワイン, which they 自由に drank. They were straight-団体／死体d and 井戸／弁護士席-四肢d men of a mean 高さ; their hair 黒人／ボイコット, long-visaged, small noses and 注目する，もくろむs; and were thin-直面するd, ill-looked men, of a very dark 巡査 colour. A little before night Captain Swan and all of us returned to Tomaco and left the 大型船 to the seamen. The 31st day two of our canoes who had been up the river of Tomaco returned 支援する again to the village. They had 列／漕ぐ／騒動d seven or eight leagues up and 設立する but one Spanish house, which they were told did belong to a lady who lived at Lima; she had servants here that 貿易（する）d with the Indians for gold; but they seeing our men coming ran away: yet our men 設立する there several ounces of gold in calabashes.

1685.

The first day of January 1685 we went from Tomaco に向かって Gallo. We carried the knight with us and two small canoes which we took there, and while we were 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing over one of our canoes took a packet-boat that was sent from パナマ to Lima. The Spaniards threw the packet of letters overboard with a line and a ブイ，浮標 to it, but our men seeing it took it up, and brought the letters and all the 囚人s 船内に our ships that were then at an 錨，総合司会者 at Gallo. Here we stayed till the 6th day, reading the letters, by which we understood that the armada from Old Spain was come to Portobello: and that the 大統領，／社長 of パナマ had sent this packet on 目的 to 急いで the Plate (n)艦隊／(a)素早い thither from Lima.

We were very joyful of this news, and therefore sent away the packet-boat with all her letters; and we altered our former 決意／決議s of going to Lavelia. We now 結論するd to careen our ships as speedily as we could, that we might be ready to 迎撃する this (n)艦隊／(a)素早い. The properest place that we could think on for doing it was の中で the King's Islands or Pearl 重要なs, because they are 近づく パナマ and all ships bound to パナマ from the coast of Lima pass by them; so that 存在 there we could not かもしれない 行方不明になる the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い. によれば these 決意／決議s we sailed the next morning, ーするために 遂行する／発効させる what we designed. We were two ships and three barks in company, すなわち, Captain Davis, Captain Swan, a 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship, and two small barks as tenders; one on Captain Davis's ship, the other on Captain Swan's. We 重さを計るd before day and got out all but Captain Swan's tender, which never budged; for the men were all asleep when we went out and, the tide of flood coming on before they waked, we were 軍隊d to stay for them till the next day.

The 8th day in the morning we descried a sail to the west of us; the 勝利，勝つd was at south and we chased her and before noon took her. She was a ship of about 90 tun laden with flour; she （機の）カム from Truxillo and was bound to パナマ. This ship （機の）カム very opportunely to us for flour began to grow 不十分な, and Captain Davis's men grudged at what was given to Captain Swan; who, as I said before, had 非，不，無 but what he had from Captain Davis.

We jogged on after this with a gentle 強風 に向かって Gorgona, an island lying about 25 leagues from the island Gallo. The 9th day we 錨，総合司会者d at Gorgona, on the west 味方する of the island in 38 fathom clean ground, not two cables' length from the shore. Gorgona is an uninhabited island in latitude about three degrees north: it is a pretty high island, and very remarkable by 推論する／理由 of two saddles, or risings and fallings on the 最高の，を越す. It is about 2 leagues long and a league 幅の広い; and it is four leagues from the Main: at the west end is another small island. The land against the 錨，総合司会者ing-place is low; there is a small sandy bay and good 上陸. The 国／地域 or mould of it is 黒人／ボイコット and 深い in the low ground, but on the 味方する of the high land it is a 肉親，親類d of a red clay. This island is very 井戸／弁護士席 着せる／賦与するd with large trees of several sorts that are 繁栄するing and green all the year. It's very 井戸／弁護士席 watered with small brooks that 問題／発行する from the high land. Here are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many little 黒人／ボイコット monkeys, some Indian conies, and a few snakes, which are all the land animals that I know there. It is 報告（する）／憶測d of this island that it rains on every day in the year more or いっそう少なく; but that I can disprove: however, it is a very wet coast, and it rains abundantly here all the year long. There are but few fair days; for there is little difference in the seasons of the year between the wet and 乾燥した，日照りの; only in that season which should be the 乾燥した，日照りの time the rains are いっそう少なく たびたび（訪れる） and more 穏健な than in the wet season, for then it 注ぐs as out of a sieve. It is 深い water and no 錨，総合司会者ing anywhere about this island, only at the west 味方する: the tide rises and 落ちるs seven or eight foot up and 負かす／撃墜する. Here are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many periwinkles and mussels to be had at low water. Then the monkeys come 負かす／撃墜する by the seaside and catch them; digging them out of their 爆撃するs with their claws.

Here are pearl-oysters in 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty: they grow to the loose 激しく揺するs in 4, 5, or 6 fathom water by 耐えるd, or little small roots, as a mussel: these oysters are 一般的に flatter and thinner than other oysters; さもなければ much alike in 形態／調整. The fish is not 甘い nor very wholesome; it is as slimy as a 爆撃する-snail; they taste very copperish if eaten raw, and are best boiled. The Indians who gather them for the Spaniards hang the meat of them on strings like jews-ears, and 乾燥した，日照りの them before they eat them. The pearl is 設立する at the 長，率いる of the oyster lying between the meat and the 爆撃する. Some will have 20 or 30 small seed-pearl, some 非，不，無 at all, and some will have one or two pretty large ones. The inside of the 爆撃する is more glorious than the pearl itself. I did never see any in the South Seas but here. It is 報告（する）／憶測d there are some at the south end of California. In the West Indies, the Rancho Reys, or Rancheria, spoken of in 一時期／支部 3, is the place where they are 設立する most plentifully. It is said there are some at the island Margarita, 近づく St. Augustin, a town in the 湾 of Florida, etc. In the East Indies the island Ainam, 近づく the south end of 中国, is said to have plenty of these oysters, more 生産力のある of large 一連の会議、交渉／完成する pearl than those in other places. They are 設立する also in other parts of the East Indies, and on the Persian coast.

ISLE OF GORGONA, THE PEARL-OYSTERS THERE AND IN OTHER PARTS.

At this island Gorgona we rummaged our prize and 設立する a few boxes of marmalade and three or four jars of brandy, which were 平等に 株d between Captain Davis and Captain Swan and their men. Here we filled all our water and Captain Swan furnished himself with flour: afterward we turned 岸に a 広大な／多数の／重要な many 囚人s but kept the chiefest to put them 岸に in a better place.

The 13th day we sailed from hence に向かって the King's Islands. We were now six sail, two men-of-war, two tenders, a 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship, and the prize. We had but little 勝利，勝つd but what we had was the ありふれた 貿易（する） at south.

THE LAND ON THE MAIN.

The land we sailed by on the Main is very low に向かって the seaside, but in the country there are very high mountains.

CAPE CORRIENTES.

The 16th day we passed by Cape Corrientes. This cape is in latitude 5 degrees 10 minutes. It is high bluff land with three or four small hillocks on the 最高の，を越す. It appears at a distance like an island. Here we 設立する a strong 現在の running to the north, but whether it be always so I know not. The day after we passed by the cape we saw a small white island which we chased, supposing it had been a sail, till coming 近づく we 設立する our error.

POINT GARACHINA.

The 21st day we saw Point Garachina. This point is in latitude 7 degrees 20 minutes north; it is pretty high land, rocky, and destitute of trees; yet within land it is woody. It is 盗品故買者d with 激しく揺するs against the sea. Within the point by the sea at low water you may find 蓄える／店 of oysters and mussels.

The King's Islands, or Pearl 重要なs, are about twelve leagues distant from this point.

ISLAND GALLERA.

Between Point Garachina and them there is a small low flat barren island called Gallera, at which Captain Harris was 株ing with his men the gold he took in his 略奪するing Santa Maria, which I spoke of a little before, when on a sudden five Spanish barks fitted out on 目的 at パナマ （機の）カム upon him; but he fought them so stoutly with one small bark he had and some few canoes, 搭乗 their 海軍大将 特に, that they were all glad to leave him. By this island we 錨，総合司会者d and sent our boats to the King's Islands for a good careening-place.

THE KING'S, OR PEARL, ISLANDS, PACHEQUE ST. PAUL'S ISLAND.

The King's Islands are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many low woody islands lying north-west by north and south-east by south. They are about 7 leagues from the Main and 14 leagues in length, and from パナマ about 12 leagues. Why they are called the King's Islands I know not; they are いつかs, and mostly in 地図／計画するs, called the Pearl Islands. I cannot imagine wherefore they are called so, for I did never see one pearl-oyster about them, nor any pearl-oyster-爆撃するs; but on the other oysters I have made many a meal there: the northermost island of all this 範囲 is called Pacheca, or Pacheque. This is but a small island distant from パナマ 11 or 12 leagues. The southermost of them is called St. Paul's. Besides these two I know no more that are called by any particular 指名する, though there are many that far 越える either of the two in bigness. Some of these islands are 工場／植物d with plantains and 気が狂って; and there are fields of rice on others of them. The gentlemen of パナマ, to whom they belong, keep Negroes there to 工場／植物, 少しのd, and husband the 農園s. Many of them, 特に the largest, are wholly untilled, yet very good fat land 十分な of large trees. These unplanted islands 避難所 many runaway Negroes, who abscond in the 支持を得ようと努めるd all day, and in the night boldly 略奪する the plantain-walks. Betwixt these islands and the Main is a channel of 7 or 8 leagues wide; there is good depth of water, and good 錨，総合司会者ing all the way. The islands 国境 厚い on each other; yet they make many small 狭くする 深い channels, fit only for boats to pass between most of them. At the south-east end, about a league from St. Pauls Island, there is a good place for ships to careen, or 運ぶ／漁獲高 岸に. It is surrounded with the land, and has a good 深い channel on the north 味方する to go in at. The tide rises here about ten foot perpendicular.

We brought our ships into this place the 25th day but were 軍隊d to tarry for a spring-tide before we could have water enough to clean them; therefore we first cleaned our barks that they might 巡航する before パナマ while we lay here. The 27th day our barks 存在 clean we sent them out with 20 men in each. The 4th day after they returned with a prize laden with maize, or Indian corn, salt-beef, and fowls. She （機の）カム from Lavelia and was bound to パナマ.

LAVELIA.

Lavelia is a town we once designed to 試みる／企てる. It is pretty large, and stands on the bank of a river on the north 味方する of the Bay of パナマ, six or seven leagues from the sea.

NATA. THE CATFISH. OYSTERS.

Nata is another such town, standing in a plain 近づく another 支店 of the same river. In these towns, and some others on the same coast, they 産む／飼育する hogs, fowls, bulls, and cows, and 工場／植物 maize purposely for the support of パナマ, which is 供給（する）d with 準備／条項 mostly from other towns and the 隣人ing islands.

The beef and fowl our men took （機の）カム to us in a good time, for we had eaten but little flesh since we left the island Plata. The harbour where we careened was encompassed with three islands, and our ships 棒 in the middle. That on which we 運ぶ／漁獲高d our ships 岸に was a little island on the north 味方する of the harbour. There was a 罰金 small sandy bay, but all the 残り／休憩（する） of the island was environed with 激しく揺するs on which at low water we did use to gather oysters, clams, mussels, and limpets. The clam is a sort of oyster which grows so 急速な／放蕩な to the 激しく揺する that there is no separating it from thence, therefore we did open it where it grows, and take out the meat, which is very large, fat, and 甘い. Here are a few ありふれた oysters such as we have in England, of which sort I have met with 非，不，無 in these seas but here, at Point Garachina, at Puna, and on the Mexican coast, in the latitude of 23 degrees north. I have a manuscript of Mr. Teat, Captain Swan's 長，指導者 mate, which gives an account of oysters plentifully 設立する in Port St. Julian, on the east 味方する and somewhat to the north of the 海峡s of Magellan; but there is no について言及する made of what oysters they are. Here are some iguanas, but we 設立する no other sort of land-animal. Here are also some pigeons and 海がめ-doves. The 残り／休憩（する） of the islands that encompass this harbour had of all these sorts of creatures. Our men therefore did every day go over in canoes to them to fish, fowl, or 追跡（する） for iguanas; but, having one man surprised once by some Spaniards lying there in 待ち伏せ／迎撃する, and carried off by them to パナマ, we were after that more 用心深い of straggling.

The 14th day of February 1685 we made an end of きれいにする our ship, filled all our water, and 在庫／株d ourselves with firewood. The 15th day we went out from の中で the islands and 錨，総合司会者d in the channel between them and the Main, in 25 fathom water, soft oazy ground. The Plate (n)艦隊／(a)素早い was not yet arrived; therefore we ーするつもりであるd to 巡航する before the city of パナマ, which is from this place about 25 leagues. The next day we sailed に向かって パナマ, passing in the channel between the King's Islands and the Main.

THE PLEASANT PROSPECTS IN THE BAY OF PANAMA.

It is very pleasant sailing here, having the Main on one 味方する, which appears in divers forms. It is beautified with many small hills, 着せる／賦与するd with 支持を得ようと努めるd of divers sort of trees, which are always green and 繁栄するing. There are some few small high islands within a league of the Main, scattering here and there one: these are partly woody, partly 明らかにする; and they 同様に as the Main appear very pleasant. The King's Islands are on the other 味方する of this channel, and make also a lovely prospect as you sail by them. These, as I have already 公式文書，認めるd, are low and flat, appearing in several 形態／調整s, （許可，名誉などを）与えるing as they are 自然に formed by many small creeks and 支店s of the sea. The 16th day we 錨，総合司会者d at Pacheca in 17 fathom water about a league from the island, and sailed from thence the next day, with the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-east directing our course に向かって パナマ.

OLD PANAMA.

When we （機の）カム abreast of Old パナマ we 錨，総合司会者d and sent our canoe 岸に with our 囚人 Don Diego de Pinas, with a letter to the 知事 to 扱う／治療する about an 交流 for our man they had spirited away, as I said; and another Captain Harris left in the river of Santa Maria the year before, coming 陸路の. Don Diego was desirous to go on this errand in the 指名する and with the 同意 of the 残り／休憩（する） of our Spanish 囚人s; but by some 事故 he was killed before he got 岸に, as we heard afterwards.

Old パナマ was 以前は a famous place, but it was taken by Sir Henry Morgan about the year 1673, and at that time 広大な／多数の／重要な part of it was 燃やすd to ashes, and it was never re-edified since.

THE NEW CITY.

New パナマ is a very fair city, standing の近くに by the sea, about four miles from the 廃虚s of the old town. It gives 指名する to a large bay which is famous for a 広大な／多数の／重要な many navigable rivers, some whereof are very rich in gold; it is also very pleasantly ぱらぱら雨d with islands that are not only profitable to their owners, but very delightful to the 乗客s and seamen that sail by them; some of which I have already 述べるd. It is encompassed on the 支援する 味方する with a pleasant country which is 十分な of small hills and valleys, beautified with many groves and 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs of trees that appear in the savannahs like so many little islands. This city is all compassed with a high 石／投石する 塀で囲む; the houses are said to be of brick. Their roofs appear higher than the 最高の，を越す of the city 塀で囲む. It is beautified with a 広大な／多数の／重要な many fair churches and 宗教的な houses besides the 大統領，／社長's house and other 著名な buildings; which altogether make one of the finest 反対するs that I did ever see, in America 特に. There are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many guns on her 塀で囲むs, most of which look toward the land. They had 非，不，無 at all against the sea when I first entered those seas with Captain Sawkins, Captain Coxon, Captain Sharp, and others; for till then they did not 恐れる any enemy by sea: but since that they have 工場／植物d guns （疑いを）晴らす 一連の会議、交渉／完成する.

THE GREAT CONCOURSE THERE FROM LIMA AND PORTOBELLO, ETC. UPON THE ARRIVAL OF THE SPANISH ARMADA IN THE WEST INDIES.

This is a 繁栄するing city by 推論する／理由 it is a thoroughfare for all 輸入するd or 輸出（する）d goods and treasure, to and from all parts of Peru and Chile; whereof their 蓄える／店-houses are never empty. The road also is seldom or never without ships. Besides, once in three years, when the Spanish armada comes to Portobello, then the Plate (n)艦隊／(a)素早い also from Lima comes hither with the King's treasure, and 豊富 of merchant-ships 十分な of goods and Plate; at that time the city is 十分な of merchants and gentlemen; the seamen are busy in 上陸 the treasure and goods, and the 運送／保菌者s, or caravan masters, 雇うd in carrying it 陸路の on mules (in 広大な droves every day) to Portobello, and bringing 支援する European goods from thence: though the city be then so 十分な yet during this heat of 商売／仕事 there is no 雇うing of an ordinary slave under a piece-of-eight a day; houses, also 議会s, beds and victuals, are then 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の dear.

THE COURSE THE ARMADA TAKES; WITH AN INCIDENTAL ACCOUNT OF THE FIRST INDUCEMENTS THAT MADE THE PRIVATEERS UNDERTAKE THE PASSAGE OVER THE ISTHMUS OF DARIEN INTO THE SOUTH SEAS, AND OF THE PARTICULAR BEGINNING OF THEIR CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE INDIANS THAT INHABIT THAT ISTHMUS.

Now I am on this 支配する I think it will not be amiss to give the reader an account of the 進歩 of the armada from Old Spain, which comes thus every three years into the Indies. Its first arrival is at Cartagena, from whence, as I have been told, an 表明する is すぐに sent 陸路の to Lima, through the southern continent, and another by sea to Portobello with two packets of letters, one for the viceroy of Lima, the other for the viceroy of Mexico. I know not which way that of Mexico goes after its arrival at Portobello, whether by land or sea: but I believe by sea to La Vera Cruz. That for Lima is sent by land to パナマ and from thence by sea to Lima.

Upon について言及する of these packets I shall digress yet a little その上の and 熟知させる my reader that before my first going over into the South Seas with Captain Sharp (and indeed before any privateers, at least since Drake and Oxenham had gone that way which we afterwards went, except La Sound, a French captain, who by Captain Wright's 指示／教授／教育s had 投機・賭けるd as far as Cheapo Town with a 団体／死体 of men but was driven 支援する again) I 存在 then on board Captain Coxon, in company with three or four more privateers, about four leagues to the east of Portobello, we took the packets bound thither from Cartagena. We opened a 広大な／多数の／重要な 量 of the merchants' letters and 設立する the contents of many of them to be very surprising, the merchants of several parts of Old Spain その為に 知らせるing their 特派員s of パナマ and どこかよそで of a 確かな prophecy that went about Spain that year, the tenor of which was THAT THERE WOULD BE ENGLISH PRIVATEERS THAT YEAR IN THE WEST INDIES, 世界保健機構 WOULD MAKE SUCH GREAT DISCOVERIES AS TO OPEN A DOOR INTO THE SOUTH SEAS; which they supposed was fastest shut: and the letters were accordingly 十分な of 警告を与えるs to their friends to be very watchful and careful of their coasts.

This door they spoke of we all 結論するd must be the passage 陸路の through the country of the Indians of Darien, who were a little before this become our friends, and had lately fallen out with the Spaniards, breaking off the intercourse which for some time they had with them: and upon calling also to mind the たびたび（訪れる） 招待s we had from those Indians a little before this time to pass through their country and 落ちる upon the Spaniards in the South Seas, we from henceforward began to entertain such thoughts in earnest, and soon （機の）カム to a 決意／決議 to make those 試みる／企てるs which we afterwards did with Captain Sharp, Coxon, etc., so that the taking these letters gave the first life to those bold undertakings: and we took the advantage of the 恐れるs the Spaniards were in from that prophecy, or probable conjecture, or whatever it were; for we 調印（する）d up most of the letters again, and sent them 岸に to Portobello.

The occasion of this our late friendship with those Indians was thus: about 15 years before this time, Captain Wright 存在 巡航するing 近づく that coast and going in の中で the Samballoes 小島s to strike fish and 海がめ, took there a young Indian lad as he was paddling about in a canoe. He brought him 船内に his ship and gave him the 指名する of John Gret, 着せる／賦与するing him and ーするつもりであるing to 産む／飼育する him の中で the English. But his Moskito strikers, taking a fancy to the boy, begged him of Captain Wright, and took him with them at their return into their own country, where they taught him their art, and he married a wife の中で them and learnt their language, as he had done some broken English while he was with Captain Wright, which he 改善するd の中で the Moskitos, who, corresponding so much with us, do all of them smatter English after a sort; but his own language he had almost forgot. Thus he lived の中で them for many years; till, about six or eight months before our taking these letters, Captain Wright 存在 again の中で the Samballoes, took thence another Indian boy about 10 or 12 years old, the son of a man of some account の中で those Indians; and, wanting a striker, he went away to the Moskito's country, where he took John Gret, who was now very 専門家 at it. John Gret was much pleased to see a lad there of his own country, and it （機の）カム into his mind to 説得する Captain Wright upon this occasion to endeavour a friendship with those Indians; a thing our privateers had long coveted but never durst 試みる／企てる, having such dreadful 逮捕s of their numbers and fierceness: but John Gret 申し込む／申し出d the captain that he would go 岸に and 交渉する the 事柄; who accordingly sent him in his canoe till he was 近づく the shore, which of a sudden was covered with Indians standing ready with their 屈服するs and arrows. John Gret, who had only a clout about his middle as the fashion of the Indians is, leapt then out of the boat and swam, the boat retiring a little way 支援する; and the Indians 岸に, seeing him in that habit and 審理，公聴会 him call to them in their own tongue (which he had 回復するd by conversing with the boy lately taken) 苦しむd him 静かに to land, and gathered all about to hear how it was with him. He told them 特に that he was one of their countrymen, and how he had been taken many years ago by the English, who had used him very kindly; that they were mistaken in 存在 so much afraid of that nation who were not enemies to them but to the Spaniards: to 確認する this he told them how 井戸／弁護士席 the English 扱う／治療するd another young lad of theirs they had lately taken, such a one's son; for this he had learnt of the 青年, and his father was one of the company that was got together on the shore. He 説得するd them therefore to make a league with these friendly people, by whose help they might be able to 鎮圧する the Spaniards; 保証するing also the father of the boy that, if he would but go with him to the ship which they saw at 錨，総合司会者 at an island there (it was Golden Island, the eastermost of the Samballoes, a place where there is good striking for 海がめ) he should have his son 回復するd to him and they might all 推定する／予想する a very 肉親，親類d 歓迎会. Upon these 保証／確信s 20 or 30 of them went off presently in two or three canoes laden with plantains, 気が狂って, fowls, etc. And, Captain Wright having 扱う／治療するd them on board, went 岸に with them, and was entertained by them, and 現在のs were made on each 味方する. Captain Wright gave the boy to his father in a very handsome English dress which he had 原因（となる）d to be made purposely for him; and an 協定 was すぐに struck up between the English and these Indians who 招待するd the English through their country into the South Seas.

Pursuant to this 協定 the English, when they （機の）カム upon any such design, or for traffic with them, were to give a 確かな signal which they pitched upon, whereby they might be known. But it happened that Mr. La Sound, the French captain spoken of a little before, 存在 then one of Captain Wright's men, learnt this signal, and, staying 岸に at Petit Guavres upon Captain Wright's going thither soon after, who had his （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限 from thence, he gave the other French there such an account of the 協定 before について言及するd, and the easiness of entering the South Seas thereupon, that he got at the 長，率いる of about 120 of them who made that 不成功の 試みる／企てる upon Cheapo, as I said; making use of the signal they had learnt for passing the Indians' country, who at that time could not distinguish so 井戸／弁護士席 between the several nations of the Europeans as they can since.

From such small beginnings arose those 広大な／多数の／重要な 動かすs that have been since made over the South Seas, すなわち, from the letters we took, and from the friendship 契約d with these Indians by means of John Gret. Yet this friendship had like to have been stifled in its 幼少／幼藍期; for within a few months after an English 貿易（する）ing sloop （機の）カム on this coast from Jamaica, and John Gret, who by this time had 前進するd himself as a grandee の中で these Indians, together with five or six more of that 質, went off to the sloop in their long gowns, as the custom is for such to wear の中で them. 存在 received 船内に they 推定する／予想するd to find everything friendly, and John Gret talked to them in English; but these Englishmen, having no knowledge at all of what had happened, endeavoured to make them slaves (as is 一般的に done) for upon carrying them to Jamaica they could have sold them for 10 or 12 続けざまに猛撃する apiece. But John Gret and the 残り／休憩（する） perceiving this, leapt all overboard, and were by the others killed every one of them in the water. The Indians on shore never （機の）カム to the knowledge of it; if they had it would have 危うくするd our correspondence. Several times after, upon our conversing with them, they enquired of us what was become of their countrymen: but we told them we knew not, as indeed it was a 広大な／多数の／重要な while after that we heard this story; so they 結論するd the Spaniards had met with them and killed or taken them.

But to return to the account of the 進歩 of the armada which we left at Cartagena. After an 任命するd stay there of about 60 days, as I take it, it goes thence to Portobello, where it lies 30 days and no longer. Therefore the viceroy of Lima, on notice of the armada's arrival at Cartagena, すぐに sends away the King's treasure to パナマ, where it is landed and lies ready to be sent to Portobello upon the first news of the armada's arrival there. This is the 推論する／理由 partly of their sending 表明するs so 早期に to Lima, that upon the armada's first coming to Portobello, the treasure and goods may 嘘（をつく） ready at パナマ to be sent away upon the mules, and it 要求するs some time for the Lima (n)艦隊／(a)素早い to unlade, because the ships ride not at パナマ but at Perica, which are three small islands 2 leagues from thence. The King's treasure is said to 量 一般的に to about 24,000,000 of pieces-of-eight: besides 豊富 of merchants' money. All this treasure is carried on mules, and there are large stables at both places to 宿泊する them. いつかs the merchants to steal the custom pack up money の中で goods and send it to Venta de Cruzes on the river Chagre; from thence 負かす／撃墜する the river, and afterwards by sea to Portobello; in which passage I have known a whole (n)艦隊／(a)素早い of periagos and canoes taken. The merchants who are not ready to sail by the thirteenth day after the armada's arrival are in danger to be left behind, for the ships all 重さを計る the 30th day 正確に, and go to the harbour's mouth: yet いつかs, on 広大な／多数の／重要な importunity, the 海軍大将 may stay a week longer; for it is impossible that all the merchants should get ready, for want of men. When the armada 出発／死s from Portobello it returns again to Cartagena, by which time all the King's 歳入 which comes out of the country is got ready there. Here also 会合，会うs them again a 広大な／多数の／重要な ship called the Pattache, one of the Spanish galleons, which before their first arrival at Cartagena goes from the 残り／休憩（する） of the armada on 目的 to gather the 尊敬の印 of the coast, touching at the Margaritas and other places in her way thence to Cartagena, as Punta de Guaira Moracaybo, Rio de la Hacha, and Santa Marta; and at all these places takes in treasure for the king. After the 始める，決める stay at Cartagena the armada goes away to the Havana in the 小島 of Cuba, to 会合，会う there the flota, which is a small number of ships that go to La Vera Cruz, and there takes in the 影響s of the city and country of Mexico, and what is brought thither in the ship which comes thither every year from the Philippine Islands; and, having joined the 残り／休憩（する） at the Havana, the whole armada 始める，決めるs sail for Spain through the 湾 of Florida. The ships in the South Seas 嘘（をつく） a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 longer at パナマ before they return to Lima. The merchants and gentlemen which come from Lima stay as little time as they can at Portobello, which is at the best but a sickly place, and at this time is very 十分な of men from all parts. But パナマ, as it is not overcharged with men so unreasonably as the other, though very 十分な, so it enjoys a good 空気／公表する, lying open to the sea-勝利，勝つd which rises 一般的に about 10 or 11 o'clock in the morning, and continues till 8 or 9 o'clock at night: then the land-勝利，勝つd comes and blows till 8 or 9 in the morning.

OF THE AIR AND WEATHER AT PANAMA.

There are no 支持を得ようと努めるd nor 沼s 近づく パナマ, but a 勇敢に立ち向かう 乾燥した，日照りの 支持する／優勝者 land, not 支配する to 霧s nor もやs. The wet season begins in the latter end of May and continues till November. At that time the sea-微風s are at south-south-west and the land-勝利，勝つd at north. At the 乾燥した，日照りの season the 勝利，勝つd are most betwixt the east-north-east and the north. Yet off in the bay they are 一般的に at south; but of this I shall be more particular in my 一時期／支部 of 勝利，勝つd in the 虫垂. The rains are not so 過度の about パナマ itself as on either 味方する of the bay; yet in the months of June, July, and August, they are 厳しい enough. Gentlemen that come from Peru to パナマ, 特に in these months, 削減（する） their hair の近くに to 保存する them from fevers; for the place is sickly to them, because they come out of a country which never has any rains or 霧s but enjoys a constant serenity; but I am apt to believe this city is healthy enough to any other people. Thus much for パナマ.

THE ISLES OF PERICO.

The 20th day we went and 錨，総合司会者d within a league of the islands Perico (which are only 3 little barren rocky islands) in 期待 of the 大統領，／社長 of パナマ's answer to the letter I said we sent him by Don Diego, 扱う／治療するing about 交流 of 囚人s; this 存在 the day on which he had given us his 仮釈放（する） to return with an answer. The 21st day we took another bark laden with hogs, fowls, salt-beef and molasses; she （機の）カム from Lavelia, and was going to パナマ. In the afternoon we sent another letter 岸に by a young Mestizo (a mixed brood of Indians and Europeans) directed to the 大統領，／社長, and 3 or 4 copies of it to be 分散させるd abroad の中で the ありふれた people. This letter, which was 十分な of 脅しs, together with the young man's managing the 商売／仕事, wrought so powerfully の中で the ありふれた people that the city was in an uproar. The 大統領，／社長 すぐに sent a gentleman 船内に, who 需要・要求するd the flour-prize that we took off of Gallo and all the 囚人s for the 身代金 of our two men: but our captains told him they would 交流 man for man. The gentleman said he had not orders for that, but if we would stay till the next day he would bring the 知事s' answer. The next day he brought 船内に our two men and had about 40 囚人s in 交流.

TABAGO, A PLEASANT ISLAND.

The 24th day we ran over to the island Tabago. Tabago is in the bay and about six leagues south of パナマ. It is about 3 mile long and 2 幅の広い, a high 山地の island. On the north 味方する it 拒絶する／低下するs with a gentle 降下／家系 to the sea. The land by the sea is of a 黒人／ボイコット mould and 深い; but に向かって the 最高の，を越す of the mountain it is strong and 乾燥した，日照りの. The north 味方する of this island makes a very pleasant show, it seems to be a garden of fruit enclosed with many high trees; the chiefest fruits are plantains and 気が狂って. They 栄える very 井戸／弁護士席 from the foot to the middle of it; but those 近づく the 最高の，を越す are but small, as wanting moisture. の近くに by the sea there are many coconut-trees, which make a very pleasant sight.

THE MAMMEE-TREE.

Within the coconut-trees there grow many mammee-trees. The mammee is a large, tall, and straight-団体／死体d tree, clean without knots or 四肢s for 60 or 70 foot or more. The 長，率いる spreads abroad into many small 四肢s which grow pretty 厚い and の近くに together. The bark is of a dark grey colour, 厚い and rough, 十分な of large chops. The fruit is bigger than a quince; it is 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and covered with a 厚い rind of a grey colour: when the fruit is 熟した the rind is yellow and 堅い; and it will then peel off like leather; but before it is 熟した it is brittle: the juice is then white and clammy; but when 熟した not so. The 熟した fruit under the rind is yellow as a carrot, and in the middle are two large rough 石／投石するs, flat, and each of them much bigger than an almond. The fruit smells very 井戸／弁護士席 and the taste is 責任のある to the smell. The south-west end of the island has never been （疑いを）晴らすd but is 十分な of firewood and trees of divers sorts. There is a very 罰金 small brook of fresh water that springs out of the 味方する of the mountain and, gliding through the grove of fruit-trees, 落ちるs into the sea on the north 味方する.

THE VILLAGE TABAGO.

There was a small town standing by the sea with a church at one end, but now the biggest part of it is destroyed by the privateers. There is good 錨，総合司会者ing 権利 against the town about a mile from the shore, where you may have 16 or 18 fathom water, soft oazy ground. There is a small island の近くに by the north-west end of this called Tabogilla, with a small channel to pass between. There is another woody island about a mile on the north-east 味方する of Tabago, and a good channel between them: this island has no 指名する that ever I heard.

A SPANISH STRATAGEM OR TWO OF CAPTAIN BOND THEIR ENGINEER.

While we lay at Tabago we had like to have had a scurvy trick played us by a pretended merchant from パナマ, who （機の）カム as by stealth to traffic with us 個人として; a thing ありふれた enough with the Spanish merchants, both in the North and South Seas, notwithstanding the 厳しい 禁止 of the 知事s; who yet いつかs connive at it and will even 貿易（する） with the privateers themselves.

Our merchant was by 協定 to bring out his bark laden with goods in the night, and we to go and 錨，総合司会者 at the south of Perico. Out he （機の）カム, with a 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship instead of a bark, and approached very 近づく, あられ／賞賛するing us with the watch-word we had agreed upon. We, 嫌疑者，容疑者／疑うing the worst, called to them to come to an 錨，総合司会者, and upon their not doing so 解雇する／砲火／射撃d at them; when すぐに their men, going out into the canoes, 始める，決める 解雇する／砲火／射撃 to their ship, which blew up, and burnt の近くに by us so that we were 軍隊d to 削減（する） our cables in all haste and scamper away 同様に as we could.

The Spaniard was not altogether so politick in 任命するing to 会合，会う us at Perico for there we had sea-room; 反して, had he come thus upon us at Tabago, the land-勝利，勝つd 耐えるing hard upon us as it did, we must either have been burnt by the 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship or, upon loosing our cables, have been driven 岸に: but I suppose they chose Perico rather for the scene of their 企業, partly because they might there best skulk の中で the islands, and partly because, if their 偉業／利用する failed, they could thence escape best from our canoes to パナマ, but two leagues off.

During this 偉業／利用する Captain Swan (whose ship was いっそう少なく than ours, and so not so much 目的（とする）d at by the Spaniards) lay about a mile off, with a canoe at the ブイ，浮標 of his 錨，総合司会者, as 恐れるing some treachery from our pretended merchant; and a little before the bark blew up he saw a small float on the water and, as it appeared, a man on it making に向かって his ship; but the man dived and disappeared of a sudden, as thinking probably that he was discovered.

This was supposed to be one coming with some combustible 事柄 to have stuck about the rudder. For such a trick Captain Sharp was served at Coquimbo, and his ship had like to have been burnt by it if, by mere 事故, it had not been discovered: I was then 船内に Captain Sharp's ship. Captain Swan, seeing the 炎 by us, 削減（する） his cables as we did, his bark did the like; so we kept under sail all the night, 存在 more 脅すd than 傷つける. The bark that was on 解雇する／砲火／射撃 drove 燃やすing に向かって Tabago; but after the first 爆破 she did not 燃やす （疑いを）晴らす, only made a smother, for she was not 井戸／弁護士席 made, though Captain 社債 had the でっちあげる，人を罪に陥れるing and 管理／経営 of it.

This Captain 社債 was he of whom I made について言及する in my 4th 一時期／支部. He, after his 存在 at the 小島s of Cape Verde, stood away for the South Seas at the instigation of one Richard Morton who had been with Captain Sharp in the South Seas. In his way he met with Captain Eaton and they two consorted a day or two: at last Morton went 船内に Captain Eaton and 説得するd him to lose Captain 社債 in the night, which Captain Eaton did, Morton continuing 船内に of Captain Eaton, as finding his the better ship. Captain 社債 thus losing both his consort Eaton, and Morton his 操縦する, and his ship 存在 but an ordinary sailer, he despaired of getting into the South Seas; and had played such tricks の中で the Caribbean 小島s, as I have been told, that he did not dare to appear at any of the English islands. Therefore he 説得するd his men to go to the Spaniards and they 同意d to anything that he should 提案する: so he presently steered away into the West Indies and the first place where we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 was at Portobello. He presently 宣言するd to the 知事 that there were English ships coming into the South Seas, and that if they questioned it, he 申し込む／申し出d to be kept a 囚人 till time should discover the truth of what he said; but they believed him and sent him away to パナマ where he was in 広大な／多数の／重要な esteem. This several 囚人s told us.

THE IGNORANCE OF THE SPANIARDS OF THESE PARTS IN SEA-AFFAIRS.

The Spaniards of パナマ could not have fitted out their 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship without this Captain 社債's 援助; for it is strange to say how grossly ignorant the Spaniards in the West Indies, but 特に in the South Seas, are of sea-事件／事情／状勢s. They build indeed good ships, but this is a small 事柄: for any ship of a good 底（に届く） will serve for these seas on the south coast. They 装備する their ships but untowardly, have no guns but in 3 or 4 of the king's ships, and are meanly furnished with warlike 準備／条項s, and much at a loss for the making any 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ships or other いっそう少なく useful machines. Nay, they have not the sense to have their guns run within the 味方するs upon their 発射する／解雇する, but have 壇・綱領・公約s without for the men to stand on to 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金 them; so that when we come 近づく we can fetch them 負かす／撃墜する with small 発射 out of our boats. A main 推論する／理由 of this is that the native Spaniards are too proud to be seamen, but use the Indians for all those offices: one Spaniard, it may be, going in the ship to 命令（する） it, and himself of little more knowledge than those poor ignorant creatures: nor can they 伸び（る） much experience, seldom going far off to sea, but coasting along the shores.

A PARTY OF FRENCH PRIVATEERS ARRIVE FROM OVERLAND.

But to proceed: in the morning when it was light we （機の）カム again to 錨，総合司会者 の近くに by our ブイ，浮標s and strove to get our 錨，総合司会者s again; but our ブイ，浮標-ropes, 存在 rotten, broke. While we were puzzling about our 錨，総合司会者s we saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な many canoes 十分な of men pass between Tabago and the other island. This put us into a new びっくり仰天: we lay still some time till we saw that they （機の）カム 直接／まっすぐに に向かって us, then we 重さを計るd and stood に向かって them: and when we （機の）カム within あられ／賞賛する we 設立する that they were English and French privateers come out of the North Seas through the Isthmus of Darien. They were 280 men in 28 canoes; 200 of them French, the 残り／休憩（する） English. They were 命令（する）d by Captain Gronet and Captain Lequie. We presently （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 again and all the canoes （機の）カム 船内に. These men told us that there were 180 English men more, under the 命令（する） of Captain Townley, in the country of Darien, making canoes (as these men had been) to bring them into these seas. All the Englishmen that （機の）カム over in this party were すぐに entertained by Captain Davis and Captain Swan in their own ships, and the French men were ordered to have our flour-prize to carry them, and Captain Gronet 存在 the eldest 指揮官 was to 命令（する） them there; and thus they were all 性質の／したい気がして of to their hearts' content. Captain Gronet, to 報復する this 親切, 申し込む／申し出d Captain Davis and Captain Swan each of them a new （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限 from the 知事 of Petit Guavres.

OF THE COMMISSIONS THAT ARE GIVEN OUT BY THE FRENCH GOVERNOUR OF PETIT GUAVRES.

It has been usual for many years past for the 知事 of Petit Guavres to send blank （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s to sea by many of his captains with orders to 配置する／処分する／したい気持ちにさせる of them to whom they saw convenient. Those of Petit Guavres by this means making themselves the 聖域 and 亡命 of all people of desperate fortunes; and 増加するing their own wealth and the strength and 評判 of their party その為に. Captain Davis 受託するd of one, having before only an old （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限, which fell to him by 相続物件 at the decease of Captain Cook; who took it from Captain Tristian, together with his bark, as is before について言及するd. But Captain Swan 辞退するd it, 説 he had an order from the Duke of York neither to give offence to the Spaniards nor to receive any affront from them; and that he had been 負傷させるd by them at Valdivia, where they had killed some of his men and 負傷させるd several more; so that he thought he had a lawful （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限 of his own to 権利 himself. I never read any of these French （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s while I was in these seas, nor did I then know the 輸入する of them; but I have learnt since that the tenor of them is to give a liberty to fish, fowl, and 追跡（する）. The occasion of this is that the island Hispaniola, where the 守備隊 of Petit Guavres is, belongs partly to the French and partly to the Spaniards; and in time of peace these （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限s are given as a 令状 to those of each 味方する to 保護する them from the 逆の party: but in 影響 the French do not 抑制する them to Hispaniola, but make them a pretence for a general 荒廃させる in any part of America, by sea or land.

OF THE GULF OF ST. MICHAEL, AND THE RIVERS OF CONGOS, SAMBO, AND SANTA MARIA: AND AN ERROR OF THE COMMON MAPS, IN THE PLACING POINT GARACHINA AND CAPE SAN LORENZO, CORRECTED.

Having thus 性質の／したい気がして of our associates we ーするつもりであるd to sail toward the 湾 of St. Michael to 捜し出す Captain Townley; who by this time we thought might be entering into these seas. Accordingly the second day of March 1685 we sailed from hence に向かって the 湾 of St. Michael. This 湾 lies 近づく 30 leagues from パナマ に向かって the south-east. The way thither from パナマ is to pass between the King's Islands and the Main. It is a place where many 広大な／多数の／重要な rivers having finished their courses are swallowed up in the sea. It is bounded on the south with Point Garachina, which lies in north latitude 6 degrees 40 minutes, and on the north 味方する with Cape San Lorenzo. Where, by the way, I must 訂正する a 甚だしい／１２ダース error in our ありふれた 地図／計画するs; which, giving no 指名する at all to the south cape which yet is the most かなりの, and is the true Point Garachina, do give that 指名する to the north cape, which is of small 発言／述べる only for those whose 商売／仕事 is into the 湾; and the 指名する San Lorenzo, which is the true 指名する of this northern point, is by them wholly omitted; the 指名する of the other point 存在 代用品，人d into its place. The 長，指導者 rivers which run into this 湾 of St. Michael are Santa Maria, Sambo, and Congos. The river Congos (which is the river I would have 説得するd our men to have gone up as their nearest way in our 旅行 陸路の, について言及するd 一時期／支部 1) comes 直接／まっすぐに out of the country, and swallows up many small streams that 落ちる into it from both 味方するs; and at last loses itself on the north 味方する of the 湾, a league within Cape San Lorenzo. It is not very wide, but 深い, and navigable some leagues within land. There are sands without it; but a channel for ships. It is not made use of by the Spaniards because of the neighbourhood of Santa Maria River; where they have most 商売／仕事 on account of the 地雷s.

The River of Sambo seems to be a 広大な／多数の／重要な River for there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な tide at its mouth; but I can say nothing more of it, having never been in it.

This river 落ちるs into the sea on the south 味方する of the 湾 近づく Point Garachina. Between the mouths of these two rivers on either 味方する the 湾 runs in に向かって the land somewhat narrower; and makes five or six small islands which are 着せる／賦与するd with 広大な／多数の／重要な trees, green and 繁栄するing all the year, and good channels between the islands. Beyond which, その上の in still, the shore on each 味方する の近くにs so 近づく with two points of low mangrove land as to make a 狭くする or 海峡, 不十分な half a mile wide. This serves as a mouth or 入り口 to the inner part of the 湾, which is a 深い bay two or three leagues over every way, and about the east end thereof are the mouths of several rivers, the 長，指導者 of which is that of Santa Maria. There are many 出口s or creeks besides this 狭くする place I have 述べるd, but 非，不，無 navigable besides that. For this 推論する／理由 the Spanish guard-ship について言及するd in 一時期／支部 1 chose to 嘘（をつく） between these two points as the only passage they could imagine we should 試みる／企てる; since this is the way that the privateers have 一般に taken as the nearest between the North and South Seas. The river of Santa Maria is the largest of all the rivers of this 湾. It is navigable eight or nine leagues up; for so high the tide flows. Beyond that place the river is divided into many 支店s which are only fit for canoes. The tide rises and 落ちるs in this river about 18 foot.

OF THE TOWN AND GOLD-MINES OF SANTA MARIA; AND THE TOWN OF SCUCHADERO.

About six leagues from the river's mouth, on the south 味方する of it, the Spaniards about 20 years ago, upon their first 発見 of the gold-地雷s here, built the town Santa Maria, of the same 指名する with the river. This town was taken by Captain Coxon, Captain Harris and Captain Sharp, at their 入り口 into these seas; it 存在 then but newly built. Since that time it is grown かなりの; for when Captain Harris, the 甥 of the former, took it (as is said in 一時期／支部 6) he 設立する in it all sorts of tradesmen, with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of flour, and ワイン, and 豊富 of アイロンをかける crows and pickaxes. These were 器具s for the slaves to work in the gold-地雷s; for besides what gold and sand they take up together, they often find 広大な／多数の／重要な lumps wedged between the 激しく揺するs, as if it 自然に grew there. I have seen a lump as big as a 女／おっせかい屋's egg, brought by Captain Harris from thence (who took 120 続けざまに猛撃する there) and he told me that there were lumps a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 bigger: but these they were 軍隊d to （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 in pieces that they might divide them. These lumps are not so solid, but that they have crevices and pores 十分な of earth and dust. This town is not far from the 地雷s, where the Spaniards keep a 広大な／多数の／重要な many slaves to work in the 乾燥した，日照りの time of the year: but in the 雨の season when the rivers do 洪水 they cannot work so 井戸／弁護士席. Yet the 地雷s are so nigh the mountains that, as the rivers soon rise, so they are soon 負かす／撃墜する again; and presently after the rain is the best searching for gold in the sands. for the violent rains do wash 負かす／撃墜する the gold into the rivers, where much of it settles to the 底（に届く） and remains. Then the native Indians who live hereabouts get most; and of them the Spaniards buy more gold than their slaves get by working. I have been 倍の that they get the value of five shillings a day, one with another. The Spaniards 身を引く most of them with their slaves during the wet season to パナマ. At this town of St. Maria Captain Townley was lying with his party, making canoes, when Captain Gronet （機の）カム into these seas; for it was then abandoned by the Spaniards.

There is another small new town at the mouth of the river called the Scuchadero: it stands on the north 味方する of the open place, at the mouth of the river of Santa Maria, where there is more 空気／公表する than at the 地雷s, or at Santa Maria Town, where they are in a manner stifled with heat for want of 空気／公表する.

All about these rivers, 特に 近づく the sea, the land is low, it is 深い 黒人／ボイコット earth, and the trees it produces are 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の large and high. Thus much 関心ing the 湾 of St. Michael, whither we were bound.

The second day of March, as is said before, we 重さを計るd from Perico, and the same night we 錨，総合司会者d again at Pacheca. The third day we sailed from thence steering に向かって the 湾. Captain Swan undertook to fetch off Captain Townley and his men: therefore he kept 近づく the Main; but the 残り／休憩（する） of the ships stood nearer the King's Islands. Captain Swan 願望（する）d this office because he ーするつもりであるd to send letters 陸路の by the Indians to Jamaica, which he did; ordering the Indians to 配達する his letters to any English 大型船 in the other seas. At two o'clock we were again 近づく the place where we cleaned our ships. There we saw two ships coming out who 証明するd to be Captain Townley and his men. They were coming out of the river in the night and took 2 barks bound for パナマ: the one was laden with flour, the other with ワイン, brandy, sugar, and oil. The 囚人s that he took 宣言するd that the Lima (n)艦隊／(a)素早い was ready to sail.

CAPTAIN TOWNLEY'S ARRIVAL WITH SOME MORE ENGLISH PRIVATEERS OVERLAND.

We went and 錨，総合司会者d の中で the King's Islands, and the next day Captain Swan returned out of the river of Santa Maria, 存在 知らせるd by the Indians that Captain Townley was come over to the King's Islands. At this place Captain Townley put out a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of his goods to make room for his men.

JARS OF PISCO-WINE.

He 分配するd his ワイン and brandy some to every ship that it might be drank out, because he 手配中の，お尋ね者 the jars to carry water in. The Spaniards in these seas carry all their ワイン, brandy, and oil in jars that 持つ／拘留する 7 or 8 gallons. When they lade at Pisco (a place about 40 leagues to the southward of Lima, and famous for ワイン) they bring nothing else but jars of ワイン, and they stow one tier at the 最高の，を越す of another so artificially that we could hardly do the like without breaking them: yet they often carry in this manner 1500 or 2000 or more in a ship, and seldom break one. The 10th day we took a small bark that （機の）カム from Guayaquil: she had nothing in her but ballast. The 12th day there （機の）カム an Indian canoe out of the river of Santa Maria and told us that there were 300 English and Frenchmen more coming 陸路の from the North Seas.

A BARK OF CAPTAIN KNIGHT'S JOINS THEM.

The 15th day we met a bark with five or six Englishmen in her that belonged to Captain Knight, who had been in the South Seas five or six months, and was now on the Mexican coast. There he had 遠くに見つけるd this bark; but, not 存在 able to come up with her in his ship, he detached these five or six men in a canoe, who took her, but, when they had done, could not 回復する their own ship again, losing company with her in the night, therefore they （機の）カム into the Bay of パナマ ーするつもりであるing to go 陸路の 支援する into the North Seas, but that they luckily met with us: for the Isthmus of Darien was now become a ありふれた road for privateers to pass between the North and South Seas at their 楽しみ. This bark of Captain Knight's had in her 40 or 50 jars of brandy: she was now 命令（する）d by Mr. Henry More; but Captain Swan, ーするつもりであるing to 促進する Captain Harris, 原因（となる）d Mr. More to be turned out, 主張するing that it was very likely these men were run away from their 指揮官. Mr. More willingly 辞職するd her, and went 船内に of Captain Swan and became one of his men.

It was now the latter end of the 乾燥した，日照りの season here; and the water at the King's, or Pearl Islands, of which there was plenty when we first （機の）カム hither, was now 乾燥した，日照りのd away. Therefore we were 軍隊d to go to Point Garachina, thinking to water our ships there.

POINT GARACHINA AGAIN.

Captain Harris, 存在 now 指揮官 of the new bark, was sent into the river of Santa Maria to see for those men that the Indians told us of, whilst the 残り／休憩（する） of the ships sailed に向かって Point Garachina; where we arrived the 21st day, and 錨，総合司会者d two mile from the point, and 設立する a strong tide running out of the river Sambo. The next day we ran within the point and 錨，総合司会者d in four fathom at low water. The tide rises here eight or nine foot: the flood 始める，決めるs north-north-east, the ebb south-south-west. The Indians that 住む in the river Sambo （機の）カム to us in canoes and brought plantains and 気が狂って. They could not speak nor understand Spanish; therefore I believe they have no 商業 with the Spaniards. We 設立する no fresh water here neither; so we went from hence to Port Pinas, which is seven leagues south by west from hence.

PORTO DE PINAS.

Porto Pinas lies in latitude 7 degrees north. It is so called because there are many pine-trees growing there. The land is pretty high, rising gently as it runs into the country. This country 近づく the sea is all covered with pretty high 支持を得ようと努めるd: the land that bounds the harbour is low in the middle, but high and rocky on both 味方するs. At the mouth of the harbour there are two small high islands, or rather barren 激しく揺するs. The Spaniards in their 操縦する-調書をとる／予約するs commend this for a good harbour; but it lies all open to the south-west 勝利，勝つd, which frequently blow here in the wet season: beside, the harbour within the islands is a place of but small extent, and has a very 狭くする going in; what depth of water there is in the harbour I know not.

The 25th day we arrived at this Harbour of Pines but did not go in with our ship, finding it but an ordinary place to 嘘（をつく） at. We sent in our boats to search it, and they 設立する a stream of good water running into the sea; but there were such 広大な／多数の／重要な swelling 殺到するs （機の）カム into the harbour that we could not conveniently fill our water there. The 26th day we returned to Point Garachina again. In our way we took a small 大型船 laden with cocoa: she （機の）カム from Guayaquil. The 29th day we arrived at Point Garachina: there we 設立する Captain Harris, who had been in the river of Santa Maria; but he did not 会合，会う the men that he went for: yet he was 知らせるd again by the Indians that they were making canoes in one of the 支店s of the river of Santa Maria. Here we 株d our cocoa lately taken.

Because we could not fill our water here we designed to go to Tabago again, where we were sure to be 供給（する）d. Accordingly on the 30th day we 始める，決める sail, 存在 now nine ships in company; and had a small 勝利，勝つd at south-south-east. The first day of April, 存在 in the channel between the King's Islands and the Main, we had much 雷鳴, 雷, and some rain: this evening we 錨，総合司会者d at the island Pacheca, and すぐに sent four canoes before us to the island Tabago to take some 囚人s for （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状）, and we followed the next day. The 3rd day in the evening we 錨，総合司会者d by Perica, and the next morning went to Tabago where we 設立する our four canoes. They arrived there in the night, and took a canoe that （機の）カム (as is usual) from パナマ for plantains. There were in the canoe four Indians and a Mulatto. The Mulatto, because he said he was in the 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship that （機の）カム to 燃やす us in the night, was すぐに hanged. These 囚人s 確認するd that one Captain 社債, an Englishman, did 命令（する） her.

Here we filled our water and 削減（する） firewood; and from hence we sent four canoes over to the Main with one of the Indians lately taken to guide them to a sugar-work: for now we had cocoa we 手配中の，お尋ね者 sugar to make chocolate. But the chiefest of their 商売／仕事 was to get 巡査s, for, each ship having now so many men, our マリファナs would not boil victuals 急速な／放蕩な enough though we kept them boiling all the day. About two or three days after they returned 船内に with three 巡査s.

ISLE OF OTOQUE.

While we lay here Captain Davis's bark went to the island Otoque. This is another 住むd island in the Bay of パナマ; not so big as Tabago, yet there are good plantain-walks on it, and some Negroes to look after them. These Negroes 後部 fowls and hogs for their masters, who live at パナマ; as at the King's Islands.

THE PACKET FROM LIMA TAKEN.OTHER ENGLISH AND FRENCH PRIVATEERS ARRIVE.

It was for some fowls or hogs that our men went thither; but by 事故 they met also with an 表明する that was sent to パナマ with an account that the Lima (n)艦隊／(a)素早い was at sea. Most of the letters were thrown overboard and lost; yet we 設立する some that said 前向きに／確かに that the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い was coming with all the strength that they could make in the kingdom of Peru; yet were ordered not to fight us except they were 軍隊d to it: (though afterwards they chose to fight us, having first landed their treasure at Lavelia) and that the 操縦するs of Lima had been in 協議 what course to steer to 行方不明になる us.

For the satisfaction of those who may be curious to know I have here 挿入するd the 決意／決議s taken by the 委員会 of 操縦するs, as one of our company translated them out of the Spanish of two of the letters we took. The first letter as follows:

Sir,

Having been with his Excellency, and heard the letter of Captain Michael Sanches de Tena read; wherein he says there should be a 会合 of the 操縦するs of パナマ in the said city, they say it is not time, putting for 反対 the Galapagos: to which I answered that it was 恐れる of the enemy, and that they might 井戸／弁護士席 go that way, I told this to his Excellency, who was pleased to 命令（する） me to 令状 this course, which is as follows.

The day for sailing 存在 come, go 前へ／外へ to the west-south-west; from that to the west till you are forty leagues off at sea; then keep at the same distance to the north-west till you come under the Line: from whence the 操縦する must 形態／調整 his course for Moro de Porco, and for the coast of Lavelia and Natta: where you may speak with the people, and によれば the （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） they give, you may keep the same course for Otoque, from thence to Tabago, and so to パナマ: this is what 申し込む／申し出s as to the course.

The letter is obscure: but the reader must make what he can of it. The directions in the other letter were to this 影響:

The surest course to be 観察するd going 前へ／外へ from Malabrigo is thus: you must sail west by south that you may 避ける the sight of the islands of Lobos; and if you should chance to see them, by 推論する／理由 of the 微風s, and should 落ちる to leeward of the latitude of Malabrigo, keep on a 勝利，勝つd as 近づく as you can and, if necessary, go about and stand in for the shore; then tack and stand off, and be sure keep your latitude; and when you are 40 leagues to the 西方の of the island Lobos keep that distance till you come under the Line; and then, if the general 勝利，勝つd follow you さらに先に, you must sail north-north-east till you come into 3 degrees north. And if in this latitude you should find the 微風s, make it your 商売／仕事 to keep the coast, and so sail for パナマ. If in your course you should come in sight of the land before you are abreast of Cape San Francisco, be sure to stretch off again out of sight of land, that you may not be discovered by the enemy.

The last letter supposes the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い's setting out from Malabrigo in about 8 degrees South latitude (as the other does its going すぐに from Lima, 4 degrees その上の south) and from hence is that 警告を与える given of 避けるing Lobos, as 近づく Malabrigo, in their usual way to パナマ, and hardly to be kept out of sight, as the 勝利，勝つd are thereabouts; yet to be 避けるd by the Spanish (n)艦隊／(a)素早い at this time, because, as they had twice before heard of the privateers lying at Lobos de la 損なう, they knew not but at that time we might be there in 期待 of them.

The 10th day we sailed from Tabago に向かって the King's Islands again because our 操縦するs told us that the king's ships did always come this way. The 11th day we 錨，総合司会者d at the place where we careened. Here we 設立する Captain Harris, who had gone a second time into the river of Santa Maria, and fetched the 団体／死体 of men that last （機の）カム 陸路の, as the Indians had 知らせるd us: but they fell short of the number they told us of. The 29th day we sent 250 men in 15 canoes to the river Cheapo to take the town of Cheapo. The 21st day all our ships but Captain Harris, who stayed to clean his ships, followed after.

CHEPELIO, ONE OF THE SWEETEST ISLANDS IN THE WORLD.

The 22nd day we arrived at the island Chepelio.

Chepelio is the pleasantest island in the Bay of パナマ: it is but seven leagues from the city of パナマ and a league from the Main. This island is about a mile long and almost so 幅の広い; it is low on the north 味方する, and rises by a small ascent に向かって the south 味方する. The 国／地域 is yellow, a 肉親，親類d of clay. The high 味方する is stony; the low land is 工場／植物d with all sorts of delicate fruits, すなわち, sapadillos, avocado-pears, mammees, mammee-sapotas, 星／主役にする-apples, etc. The 中央 of the island is 工場／植物d with plantain-trees, which are not very large, but the fruit 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 甘い.

THE SAPADILLO, AVOCADO-PEAR, MAMMEE-SAPOTA.

The sapadillo-tree is as big as a large pear-tree, the fruit much like a bergamot-pear both in colour, 形態／調整 and size; but on some trees the fruit is a little longer. When it is green or first gathered, the juice is white and clammy, and it will stick like glue; then the fruit is hard, but after it has been gathered two or three days, it grows soft and juicy, and then the juice is （疑いを）晴らす as spring-water and very 甘い; in the 中央 of the fruit are two or three 黒人／ボイコット 石／投石するs or seeds, about the bigness of a pumpkin-seed: this is an excellent fruit.

The avocado-pear-tree is as big as most pear-trees, and is 一般的に pretty high; the 肌 or bark 黒人／ボイコット, and pretty smooth; the leaves large, of an oval 形態／調整, and the fruit as big as a large lemon. It is of a green colour till it is 熟した, and then it is a little yellowish. They are seldom fit to eat till they have been gathered two or three days; then they become soft and the 肌 or rind will peel off. The 実体 in the inside is green, or a little yellowish, and as soft as butter. Within the 実体 there is a 石／投石する as big as a horse-plum. This fruit has no taste of itself, and therefore it is usually mixed with sugar and lime-juice and beaten together in a plate; and this is an excellent dish. The ordinary way is to eat it with a little salt and a roasted plantain; and thus a man that's hungry may make a good meal of it. It is very wholesome eaten any way. It is 報告（する）／憶測d that this fruit 刺激するs to lust, and therefore is said to be much esteemed by the Spaniards: and I do believe they are much esteemed by them, for I have met with plenty of them in many places in the North Seas where the Spaniards are settled, as in the Bay of Campeachy, on the coast of Cartagena, and the coast of Caracas; and there are some in Jamaica, which were 工場／植物d by the Spaniards when they 所有するd that island.

WILD MAMMEE AND STAR-APPLE.

The mammee-sapota-tree is different from the mammee 述べるd at the island Tabago in this 一時期／支部. It is not so big or so tall, neither is the fruit so big or so 一連の会議、交渉／完成する. The rind of the fruit is thin and brittle; the inside is a 深い red, and it has a rough flat long 石／投石する. This is accounted the 主要な／長／主犯 fruit of the West Indies. It is very pleasant and wholesome. I have not seen any of these on Jamaica but in many places in the West Indies の中で the Spaniards. There is another sort of mammee-tree which is called the wild mammee: this 耐えるs a fruit which is of no value, but the tree is straight, tall, and very 堅い, and therefore principally used for making masts.

The 星／主役にする-apple-tree grows much like the quince-tree, but much bigger. It is 十分な of leaves, and the leaf is 幅の広い of an oval 形態／調整, and of a very dark green colour. The fruit is as big as a large apple, which is 一般的に so covered with leaves that a man can hardly see it. They say this is a good fruit; I did never taste any but have seen both of the trees and fruit in many places on the Main, on the north 味方する of the continent, and in Jamaica. When the Spaniards 所有するd that island they 工場／植物d this and other sorts of fruit, as the sapadillo, avocado-pear, and the like; and of these fruits there are still in Jamaica in those 農園s that were first settled by the Spaniards, as at the Angels, at 7-mile Walk, and 16-mile Walk. There I have seen these trees which were 工場／植物d by the Spaniards, but I did never see any 改良 made by the English, who seem in that little curious. The road for ships is on the north 味方する, where there is good 錨，総合司会者ing half a mile from the shore. There is a 井戸／弁護士席 の近くに by the sea on the north 味方する, and 以前は there were three or four houses の近くに by it, but now they are destroyed. This island stands 権利 against the mouth of the river Cheapo.

CHEAPO RIVER AND TOWN.

The river Cheapo springs out of the mountains 近づく the north 味方する of the country and, it 存在 penned up on the south 味方する by other mountains, bends its course to the 西方の between both till, finding a passage on the south-west, it makes a 肉親，親類d of a half circle; and, 存在 swelled to a かなりの bigness, it runs with a slow 動議 into the sea seven leagues from パナマ. This river is very 深い, and about a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile 幅の広い: but the mouth of it is choked up with sands, so that no ships can enter, but barks may. There is a small Spanish town of the same 指名する within six leagues of the sea: it stands on the left 手渡す going from the sea. This is it which I said Captain La Sound 試みる／企てるd. The land about it is 支持する／優勝者, with many small hills 着せる／賦与するd with 支持を得ようと努めるd; but the biggest part of the country is savannah. On the south 味方する of the river it is all woodland for many leagues together. It was to this town that our 250 men were sent. The 24th day they returned out of the river, having taken the town without any 対立: but they 設立する nothing in it. By the way going thither they took a canoe, but most of the men escaped 岸に upon one of the King's Islands: she was sent out 井戸／弁護士席 任命するd with 武装した men to watch our 動議. The 25th day Captain Harris （機の）カム to us, having cleaned his ship. The 26th day we went again toward Tabago; our (n)艦隊／(a)素早い now, upon Captain Harris joining us again, consisted of ten sail. We arrived at Tabago the 28th day: there our 囚人s were 診察するd 関心ing the strength of パナマ; for now we thought ourselves strong enough for such an 企業, 存在 近づく 1000 men. Out of these, on occasion, we could have landed 900: but our 囚人s gave us small 激励 to it, for they 保証するd us that all the strength of the country was there, and that many men were come from Portobello, besides its own inhabitants, who of themselves were more in number than we. These 推論する／理由s, together with the strength of the place (which has a high 塀で囲む) deterred us from 試みる／企てるing it. While we lay there at Tabago some of our men burnt the town on the island.

SOME TRAVERSINGS IN THE BAY OF PANAMA; AND AN ACCOUNT OF THE STRENGTH OF THE SPANISH FLEET, AND OF THE PRIVATEERS, AND THE ENGAGEMENT BETWEEN THEM.

The 4th of May we sailed hence again bound for the King's Islands; and there we continued 巡航するing from one end of these islands to the other: till on the 22nd day, Captain Davis and Captain Gronet went to Pacheca, leaving the 残り／休憩（する） of the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い at 錨，総合司会者 at St. Paul's Island. From Pacheca we sent two canoes to the island Chepelio, in hopes to get a 囚人 there. The 25th day our canoes returned from Chepelio with three 囚人s which they took there: they were seamen belonging to パナマ, who said that 準備／条項 was so 不十分な and dear there that the poor were almost 餓死するd, 存在 妨げるd by us from those ありふれた and daily 供給（する）s of plantains, which they did 以前は enjoy from the islands; 特に from those two of Chepelio and Tabago that the 大統領，／社長 of パナマ had 厳密に ordered, that 非，不，無 should adventure to any of the islands for plantains: but necessity had 強いるd them to trespass against the 大統領，／社長's order. They さらに先に 報告（する）／憶測d that the (n)艦隊／(a)素早い from Lima was 推定する／予想するd every day; for it was 一般に talked that they were come from Lima: and that the 報告（する）／憶測 at パナマ was that King Charles II of England was dead, and that the Duke of York was 栄冠を与えるd King. The 27th day Captain Swan and Captain Townley also （機の）カム to Pacheca, where we lay, but Captain Swan's bark was gone in の中で the King's Islands for plantains. The island Pacheca, as I have before 関係のある, is the northermost of the King's Islands. It is a small low island about a league 一連の会議、交渉／完成する. On the south 味方する of it there are two or three small islands, neither of them half a mile 一連の会議、交渉／完成する. Between Pacheca and these islands is a small channel not above six or seven paces wide. and about a mile long. Through this Captain Townley made a bold run, 存在 圧力（をかける）d hard by the Spaniards in the fight I am going to speak of, though he was ignorant whether there was a 十分な depth of water or not. On the east 味方する of this channel all our (n)艦隊／(a)素早い lay waiting for the Lima (n)艦隊／(a)素早い, which we were in hopes would come this way.

The 28th day we had a very wet morning, for the rains were come in, as they do usually in May, or June, sooner or later; so that May is here a very uncertain month. Hitherto, till within a few days, we had good 好天 and the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-east, but now the 天候 was altered and the 勝利，勝つd at south-south-west.

However about eleven o'clock it （疑いを）晴らすd up, and we saw the Spanish (n)艦隊／(a)素早い about three leagues west-north-west from the island Pacheca, standing の近くに on a 勝利，勝つd to the eastward; but they could not fetch the island by a league. We were riding a league south-east from the island between it and the Main; only Captain Gronet was about a mile to the northward of us 近づく the island: he 重さを計るd so soon as they （機の）カム in sight and stood over for the Main; and we lay still, 推定する／予想するing when he would tack and come to us: but he took care to keep himself out of 害（を与える）'s way.

Captain Swan and Townley （機の）カム 船内に of Captain Davis to order how to engage the enemy, who we saw （機の）カム purposely to fight us, they 存在 in all 14 sail, besides periagos 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing with 12 and 14 oars apiece. Six sail of them were ships of good 軍隊: first the 海軍大将 48 guns, 450 men; the 副／悪徳行為-海軍大将 40 guns, 400 men; the 後部-海軍大将 36 guns, 360 men; a ship of 24 guns, 300 men; one of 18 guns, 250 men; and one of eight guns, 200 men; two 広大な／多数の／重要な 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ships, six ships only with small 武器 having 800 men on board them all; besides 2 or 3 hundred men in periagos. This account of their strength we had afterwards from Captain Knight who, 存在 to the windward on the coast of Peru, took 囚人s, of whom he had this （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状）, 存在 what they brought from Lima. Besides these men they had also some hundreds of Old Spain men that （機の）カム from Portobello, and met them at Lavelia, from whence they now （機の）カム: and their strength of men from Lima was 3000 men, 存在 all the strength they could make in that kingdom; and for greater 安全 they had first landed their treasure at Lavelia.

Our (n)艦隊／(a)素早い consisted of ten sail: first Captain Davis 36 guns, 156 men, most English; Captain Swan 16 guns, 140 men, all English: these were the only ships of 軍隊 that we had; the 残り／休憩（する） having 非，不，無 but small 武器. Captain Townley had 110 men, all English. Captain Gronet 308 men, all French. Captain Harris 100 men, most English. Captain Branly 36 men, some English, some French; Davis's tender eight men; Swan's tender eight men; Townley's bark 80 men; and a small bark of 30 tuns made a 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship, with a canoe's 乗組員 in her. We had in all 960 men. But Captain Gronet （機の）カム not to us till all was over, yet we were not discouraged at it, but 解決するd to fight them, for, 存在 to windward of the enemy, we had it at our choice whether we would fight or not. It was three o'clock in the afternoon when we 重さを計るd, and 存在 all under sail we bore 負かす／撃墜する 権利 afore the 勝利，勝つd on our enemies, who kept の近くに on a 勝利，勝つd to come to us; but night （機の）カム on without anything beside the 交流ing of a few 発射 on each 味方する. When it grew dark the Spanish 海軍大将 put out a light as a signal for his (n)艦隊／(a)素早い to come to an 錨，総合司会者. We saw the light in the 海軍大将's 最高の，を越す, which continued about half an hour, and then it was taken 負かす／撃墜する. In a short time after we saw the light again and, 存在 to windward, we kept under sail, supposing the light had been in the 海軍大将's 最高の，を越す; but as it 証明するd this was only a stratagem of theirs; for this light was put out the second time at one of their bark's topmast-長，率いる, and then she was sent to leeward; which deceived us: for we thought still the light was in the 海軍大将's 最高の，を越す, and by that means thought ourselves to windward of them.

In the morning therefore, contrary to our 期待, we 設立する they had got the 天候-gage of us, and were coming upon us with 十分な sail; so we ran for it and, after a running fight all day, and having taken a turn almost 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the Bay of パナマ, we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 again at the 小島 of Pacheca, in the very same place from whence we 始める，決める out in the morning.

Thus ended this day's work, and with it all that we had been 事業／計画（する）ing for five or six months; when, instead of making ourselves masters of the Spanish (n)艦隊／(a)素早い and treasure, we were glad to escape them; and 借りがあるd that too, in a 広大な／多数の／重要な 手段, to their want of courage to 追求する their advantage.

The 30th day in the morning when we looked out we saw the Spanish (n)艦隊／(a)素早い all together three leagues to leeward of us at an 錨，総合司会者. It was but little 勝利，勝つd till 10 o'clock, and then sprung up a small 微風 at south, and the Spanish (n)艦隊／(a)素早い went away to パナマ. What loss they had I know not; we lost but one man: and, having held a 協議する, we 解決するd to go to the 重要なs of Quibo or Cobaya, to 捜し出す Captain Harris, who was 軍隊d away from us in the fight; that 存在 the place 任命するd for our rendezvous upon any such 事故. As for Gronet, he said his men would not 苦しむ him to join us in the fight: but we were not 満足させるd with that excuse; so we 苦しむd him to go with us to the 小島s of Quibo, and there cashiered our 臆病な／卑劣な companion. Some were for taking from him the ship which we had given him: but at length he was 苦しむd to keep it with his men, and we sent them away in it to some other place.

CHAPTER 8.

THEY SET OUT FROM TABAGO.

によれば the 決意／決議s we had taken we 始める，決める out June the 1st 1685, passing between Point Garachina and the King's Islands. The 勝利，勝つd was at south-south-west 雨の 天候, with トルネード，竜巻s of 雷鳴 and 雷.

ISLE OF CHUCHE.

The 3rd day we passed by the island Chuche, the last 残りの人，物 of the 小島s in the Bay of パナマ. This is a small, low, 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, woody island, uninhabited; lying four leagues south-south-west from Pacheca.

In our passage to Quibo Captain Branly lost his main-mast; therefore he and all his men left his bark, and （機の）カム 船内に Captain Davis's ship. Captain Swan also sprung his main-最高の，を越す-mast, and got up another; but while he was doing it and we were making the best of our way we lost sight of him, and were now on the north 味方する of the bay; for this way all ships must pass from パナマ whether bound に向かって the coast of Mexico or Peru.

THE MOUNTAIN CALLED MORO DE PORCOS.

The 10th day we passed by Moro de Porcos, or the mountain of hogs. Why so called I know not: it is a high 一連の会議、交渉／完成する hill on the coast of Lavelia.

THE COAST TO THE WESTWARD OF THE BAY OF PANAMA.

This 味方する of the Bay of パナマ runs out westerly to the islands of Quibo: there are on this coast many rivers and creeks but 非，不，無 so large as those on the south 味方する of the bay. It is a coast that is partly 山地の, partly low land, and very 厚い of 支持を得ようと努めるd 国境ing on the sea; but a few leagues within land it consists mostly of savannahs which are 在庫／株d with bulls and cows. The rivers on this 味方する are not wholly destitute of gold though not so rich as the rivers on the other 味方する of the bay. The coast is but thinly 住むd, for except the rivers that lead up to the towns of Nata and Lavelia I know of no other 解決／入植地 between パナマ and Puebla Nova. The Spaniards may travel by land from パナマ through all the kingdom of Mexico, as 存在 十分な of savannahs; but に向かって the coast of Peru they cannot pass その上の than the river Cheapo; the land there 存在 so 十分な of 厚い 支持を得ようと努めるd and watered with so many 広大な／多数の／重要な rivers, besides いっそう少なく rivers and creeks, that the Indians themselves who 住む there cannot travel far without much trouble.

ISLES OF QUIBO, QUICARO, RANCHERIA.

We met with very wet 天候 in our voyage to Quibo; and with south-south-west and いつかs south-west 勝利，勝つd which retarded our course. It was the 15th day of June when we arrived at Quibo and 設立する there Captain Harris, whom we sought. The island Quibo or Cabaya is in latitude 7 degrees 14 minutes north of the 赤道. It is about six or seven leagues long and three or four 幅の広い. The land is low except only 近づく the north-east end. It is all over plentifully 蓄える／店d with 広大な／多数の／重要な tall 繁栄するing trees of many sorts; and there is good water on the east and north-east 味方するs of the island. Here are some deer and plenty of pretty large 黒人／ボイコット monkeys whose flesh is 甘い and wholesome: besides a few iguanas, and some snakes. I know no other sort of land-animal on the island. There is a shoal runs out from the south-east point of the island, half a mile into the sea; and a league to the north of this shoal point, on the east 味方する, there is a 激しく揺する about a mile from the shore, which at the last ４半期/4分の1 ebb appears above water. Besides these two places there is no danger on this 味方する, but ships may run within a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile of the shore and 錨，総合司会者 in 6, 8, 10, or 12 fathom, good clean sand and oaze.

There are many other islands lying some on the south-west 味方する, others on the north and north-east 味方するs of this island; as the island Quicaro, which is a pretty large island south-west of Quibo, and on the north of it is a small island called the Rancheria; on which island are plenty of palma-maria-trees.

THE PALMA-MARIA-TREE.

The palma-maria is a tall straight-団体／死体d tree, with a small 長，率いる, but very unlike the palm-tree, notwithstanding the 指名する. It is 大いに esteemed for making masts, 存在 very 堅い, 同様に as of a good length; for the 穀物 of the 支持を得ようと努めるd runs not straight along it, but 新たな展開ing 徐々に about it. These trees grow in many places of the West Indies, and are frequently used both by the English and Spaniards there for that use.

THE ISLES CANALES AND CANTARRAS.

The islands Canales and Cantarras are small islands lying on the north-east of Rancheria. These have all channels to pass between, and good 錨，総合司会者ing about them; and they are 同様に 蓄える／店d with trees and water as Quibo. Sailing without them all, they appear to be part of the Main. The island Quibo is the largest and most 公式文書，認めるd; for although the 残り／休憩（する） have 指名するs yet they are seldom used only for distinction sake: these, and the 残り／休憩（する） of this knot, passing all under the ありふれた 指名する of the 重要なs of Quibo. Captain Swan gave to several of these islands the 指名するs of those English merchants and gentlemen who were owners of his ship.

June 16th Captain Swan （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 by us: and then our captains 協議するd about new methods to 前進する their fortunes: and because they were now out of hopes to get anything at sea they 解決するd to try what the land would afford. They 需要・要求するd of our 操縦するs what towns on the coast of Mexico they could carry us to. The city of Leon 存在 the chiefest in the country (anything 近づく us) though a pretty way within land, was pitched on.

THEY BUILD CANOES FOR A NEW EXPEDITION; AND TAKE PUEBLA NOVA.

But now we 手配中の，お尋ね者 canoes to land our men, and we had no other way but to 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する trees and make as many as we had occasion for, these islands affording plenty of large trees fit for our 目的. While this was doing we sent 150 men to take Puebla Nova (a town upon the Main 近づく the innermost of these islands) to get 準備／条項: it was in going to take this town that Captain Sawkins was killed in the year 1680, who was 後継するd by Sharp. Our men took the town with much 緩和する, although there was more strength of men than when Captain Sawkins was killed. They returned again the 24th day, but got no 準備／条項 there. They took an empty bark in their way, and brought her to us.

CAPTAIN KNIGHT JOINS THEM.

The 5th day of July Captain Knight, について言及するd in my last 一時期／支部, （機の）カム to us. He had been 巡航するing a 広大な／多数の／重要な way to the 西方の but got nothing beside a good ship. At last he went to the southward, as high as the Bay of Guayaquil, where he took a bark-スピードを出す／記録につける, or pair of bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs as we call it, laden 主として with flour. She had other goods, as ワイン, oil, brandy, sugar, soap, and leather of goats' 肌s: and he took out as much of each as he had occasion for, and then turned her away again. The master of the float told him that the king's ships were gone from Lima に向かって パナマ: that they carried but half the king's treasure with them for 恐れる of us, although they had all the strength that the kingdom could afford: that all the merchant-ships which should have gone with them were laden and lying at Payta, where they were to wait for その上の orders. Captain Knight, having but few men, did not dare to go to Payta, where, if he had been better 供給するd, he might have taken them all; but he made the best of his way into the Bay of パナマ, in hopes to find us there 濃厚にするd with the spoils of the Lima (n)艦隊／(a)素早い; but, coming to the King's Islands, he had advice by a 囚人 that we had engaged with their (n)艦隊／(a)素早い, but were worsted, and since that made our way to the 西方の; and therefore he （機の）カム hither to 捜し出す us. He presently consorted with us, and 始める，決める his men to work to make canoes. Every ship's company made for themselves, but we all helped each other to 開始する，打ち上げる them, for some were made a mile from the sea.

CANOES HOW MADE.

The manner of making a canoe is, after cutting 負かす／撃墜する a large long tree, and squaring the uppermost 味方する, and then turning it upon the flat 味方する, to 形態／調整 the opposite 味方する for the 底（に届く）. Then again they turn her, and dig the inside; boring also three 穴を開けるs in the 底（に届く）, one before, one in the middle, and one abaft, その為に to 計器 the thickness of the 底（に届く）; for さもなければ we might 削減（する） the 底（に届く） thinner than is convenient. We left the 底（に届く）s 一般的に about three インチs 厚い, and the 味方するs two インチs 厚い below and one and a half at the 最高の，を越す. One or both of the ends we sharpen to a point.

Captain Davis made two very large canoes; one was 36 foot long and five or six feet wide; the other 32 foot long and 近づく as wide as the other. In a month's time we finished our 商売／仕事 and were ready to sail. Here Captain Harris went to lay his ship 座礁して to clean her, but she 存在 old and rotten fell in pieces: and therefore he and all his men went 船内に of Captain Davis and Captain Swan. While we lay here we struck 海がめ every day, for they were now very plentiful: but from August to March here are not many. The 18th day of July John Rose, a Frenchman, and 14 men more belonging to Captain Gronet, having made a new canoe, （機の）カム in her to Captain Davis, and 願望（する）d to serve under him; and Captain Davis 受託するd of them because they had a canoe of their own.

THE COAST AND WINDS BETWEEN QUIBO AND NICOYA.

The 20th day of July we sailed from Quibo, bending our course for Realejo, which is the port for Leon, the city that we now designed to 試みる／企てる. We were now 640 men in eight sail of ships, 命令（する）d by Captain Davis, Captain Swan, Captain Townley, and Captain Knight, with a 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship and three tenders, which last had not a constant 乗組員. We passed out between the river Quibo and the Rancheria, leaving Quibo and Quicaro on our larboard 味方する, and the Rancheria, with the 残り／休憩（する） of the islands and the Main on our starboard 味方する. The 勝利，勝つd at first was at south-south-west: we coasted along shore, passing by the 湾 of Nicoya, the 湾 of Dulce, and by the island Caneo. All this coast is low land overgrown with 厚い 支持を得ようと努めるd, and there are but few inhabitants 近づく the shore. As we sailed to the 西方の we had variable 勝利，勝つd, いつかs south-west and at west-south-west, and いつかs at east-north-east, but we had them most 一般的に at south-west. We had a トルネード，竜巻 or two every day, and in the evening or in the night we had land-勝利，勝つd at north-north-east.

VOLCAN VIEJO AGAIN.

The 8th day of August, 存在 in the latitude of 11 degrees 20 minutes by 観察, we saw a high hill in the country, 非常に高い up like a sugar-loaf, which bore north-east by north. We supposed it to be Volcan Viejo by the smoke which 上がるd from its 最高の，を越す; therefore we steered in north and made it plainer, and then knew it to be that 火山, which is the sea-示す for the harbour for Realejo; for, as I said before in 一時期／支部 5, it is a very remarkable mountain. When we had brought this mountain to 耐える north-east we got out all our canoes and 供給するd to 乗る，着手する into them the next day.

The 9th day in the morning, 存在 about eight leagues from the shore, we left our ships under the 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金 of a few men, and 520 of us went away in 31 canoes, 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing に向かって the harbour of Realejo.

TORNADOES, AND THE SEA ROUGH. REALEJO HARBOUR.

We had 好天 and little 勝利，勝つd till two o'clock in the afternoon, then we had a トルネード，竜巻 from the shore, with much 雷鳴, 雷 and rain, and such a gust of 勝利，勝つd that we were all like to be 創立者d. In this extremity we put 権利 afore the 勝利，勝つd, every canoe's 乗組員 making what 転換 they could to 避ける the 脅すing danger. The small canoes, 存在 most light and buoyant, 機動力のある nimbly over the 殺到するs, but the 広大な／多数の／重要な 激しい canoes lay like スピードを出す／記録につけるs in the sea, ready to be swallowed by every 泡，激怒することing 大波. Some of our canoes were half 十分な of water yet kept two men 絶えず heaving it out. The fierceness of the 勝利，勝つd continued about half an hour and abated by degrees; and as the 勝利，勝つd died away so the fury of the sea abated: for in all hot countries, as I have 観察するd, the sea is soon raised by the 勝利，勝つd, and as soon 負かす／撃墜する again when the 勝利，勝つd is gone, and therefore it is a proverb の中で the seamen: Up 勝利，勝つd, up sea, 負かす／撃墜する 勝利，勝つd, 負かす／撃墜する sea. At seven o'clock in the evening it was やめる 静める, and the sea as smooth as a mill-pond. Then we tugged to get in to the shore, but, finding we could not do it before day, we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d off again to keep ourselves out of sight. By that time it was day we were five leagues from the land, which we thought was far enough off shore. Here we ーするつもりであるd to 嘘（をつく） till the evening, but at three o'clock in the afternoon we had another トルネード，竜巻, more 猛烈な／残忍な than that which we had the day before. This put us in greater 危険，危なくする of our lives, but did not last so long. As soon as the 暴力／激しさ of the トルネード，竜巻 was over we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d in for the shore and entered the harbour in the night: the creek which leads に向かって Leon lies on the south-east 味方する of the harbour. Our 操縦する, 存在 very 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd here, carried us into the mouth of it, but could carry us no さらに先に till day because it is but a small creek, and there are other creeks like it. The next morning as soon as it was light we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d into the creek, which is very 狭くする; the land on both 味方するs lying so low that every tide it is overflown with the sea. This sort of land produces red mangrove-trees, which are here so plentiful and 厚い that there is no passing through them. Beyond these mangroves, on the 会社／堅い land の近くに by the 味方する of the river, the Spaniards have built a breast-work, purposely to 妨げる an enemy from the 上陸. When we （機の）カム in sight of the breast-work we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d as 急速な／放蕩な as we could to get 岸に: the noise of our oars alarmed the Indians who were 始める，決める to watch, and presently they ran away に向かって the city of Leon to give notice of our approach. We landed as soon as we could and marched after them: 470 men were drawn out to march to the town, and I was left with 59 men more to stay and guard the canoes till their return.

THE CITY OF LEON TAKEN AND BURNT.

The city of Leon is 20 mile up in the country: the way to it plain and even through a 支持する／優勝者 country of long grassy savannahs and 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs of high 支持を得ようと努めるd. About five mile from the 上陸-place there is a sugar-work, three mile さらに先に there is another, and two mile beyond that there is a 罰金 river to ford, which is not very 深い, besides which there is no water in all the way till you come to an Indian town which is two miles before you come to the city, and from thence it is a pleasant straight sandy way to Leon. This city stands in a plain not far from a high 頂点（に達する）d mountain which oftentimes casts 前へ／外へ 解雇する／砲火／射撃 and smoke from its 最高の，を越す. It may be seen at sea and it is called the 火山 of Leon. The houses of Leon are not high built but strong and large, with gardens about them. The 塀で囲むs are 石／投石する and the covering of pan-tile: there are three churches and a cathedral which is the 長，率いる church in these parts. Our 同国人 Mr. Gage, who travelled in these parts, recommends it to the world as the pleasantest place in all America, and calls it the 楽園 of the Indies. Indeed if we consider the advantage of its 状況／情勢 we may find it より勝るing most places for health and 楽しみ in America, for the country about it is of a sandy 国／地域 which soon drinks up all the rain that 落ちるs, to which these parts are much 支配する. It is encompassed with savannahs; so that they have the 利益 of the 微風s coming from any ４半期/4分の1; all which makes it a very healthy place. It is a place of no 広大な／多数の／重要な 貿易（する） and therefore not rich in money. Their wealth lies in their pastures, and cattle, and 農園s of sugar. It is said that they make cordage here of hemp, but if they have any such manufactory it is at some distance from the town, for here is no 調印する of any such thing.

Thither our men were now marching; they went from the canoes about eight o'clock. Captain Townley, with 80 of the briskest men, marched before, Captain Swan with 100 men marched next, and Captain Davis with 170 men marched next, and Captain Knight brought up the 後部. Captain Townley, who was 近づく two mile ahead of the 残り／休憩（する）, met about 70 horsemen four miles before he （機の）カム to the city, but they never stood him. About three o'clock Captain Townley, only with his 80 men, entered the town, and was briskly 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金d in a 幅の広い street with 170 or 200 Spanish horsemen, but, two or three of their leaders 存在 knocked 負かす／撃墜する, the 残り／休憩（する） fled. Their foot consisted of about 500 men, which were drawn up in the parade; for the Spaniards in these parts make a large square in every town, though the town itself be small. The square is called the parade: 一般的に the church makes one 味方する of it, and the gentlemen's houses, with their galleries about them, the other. But the foot also seeing their horse retire left an empty city to Captain Townley; beginning to save themselves by flight. Captain Swan （機の）カム in about four o'clock, Captain Davis with his men about five, and Captain Knight with as many men as he could encourage to march （機の）カム in about six, but he left many men tired on the road; these, as is usual, （機の）カム dropping in one or two at a time, as they were able. The next morning the Spaniards killed one of our tired men; he was a stout old grey-長，率いるd man, 老年の about 84, who had served under Oliver in the time of the Irish 反乱; after which he was at Jamaica, and had followed privateering ever since. He would not 受託する of the 申し込む／申し出 our men made him to tarry 岸に but said he would 投機・賭ける as far as the best of them: and when surrounded by the Spaniards he 辞退するd to take ４半期/4分の1, but 発射する／解雇するd his gun amongst them, keeping a ピストル still 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金d, so they 発射 him dead at a distance. His 指名する was Swan; he was a very merry hearty old man and always used to 宣言する he would never take ４半期/4分の1: but they took Mr. Smith who was tired also; he was a merchant belonging to Captain Swan and, 存在 carried before the 知事 of Leon, was known by a Mulatta woman that waited on him. Mr. Smith had lived many years in the Canaries and could speak and 令状 very good Spanish, and it was there this Mulatta woman remembered him. He 存在 診察するd how many men we were said 1000 at the city, and 500 at the canoes, which made 井戸／弁護士席 for us at the canoes, who straggling about every day might easily have been destroyed. But this so daunted the 知事 that he did never 申し込む／申し出 to （性的に）いたずらする our men, although he had with him above 1000 men, as Mr. Smith guessed. He sent in a 旗 of 一時休戦 about noon, pretending to 身代金 the town rather than let it be burnt, but our captains 需要・要求するd 300,000 pieces-of-eight for its 身代金, and as much 準備／条項 as would victual 1000 men four months, and Mr. Smith to be 身代金d for some of their 囚人s; but the Spaniards did not ーするつもりである to 身代金 the town, but only capitulated day after day to 長引かせる time, till they had got more men. Our captains therefore, considering the distance that they were from the canoes, 解決するd to be marching 負かす／撃墜する. The 14th day in the morning they ordered the city to be 始める，決める on 解雇する／砲火／射撃, which was presently done, and then they （機の）カム away: but they took more time in coming 負かす／撃墜する than in going up. The 15th day in the morning the Spaniards sent in Mr. Smith and had a gentlewoman in 交流.

REALEJO CREEK; THE TOWN AND COMMODITIES; THE GUAVA-FRUIT, AND PRICKLY-PEAR.

Then our captains sent a letter to the 知事 to 熟知させる him that they ーするつもりであるd next to visit Realejo, and 願望（する）d to 会合，会う him there: they also 解放（する）d a gentleman on his 約束 of 支払う／賃金ing 150 beefs for his 身代金, and to 配達する them to us at Realejo; and the same day our men （機の）カム to their canoes: where, having stayed all night, the next morning we all entered our canoes and （機の）カム to the harbour of Realejo, and in the afternoon our ships （機の）カム thither to an 錨，総合司会者.

The creek that leads to Realejo lies from the north-west part of the harbour and it runs in northerly. It is about two leagues from the island in the harbour's mouth to the town; two thirds of the way it is 幅の広い, then you enter a 狭くする 深い creek, 国境d on both 味方するs with red mangrove trees whose 四肢s reach almost from one 味方する to the other. A mile from the mouth of the creek it turns away west. There the Spaniards have made a very strong breast-work 前線ing に向かって the mouth of the creek, in which were placed 100 兵士s to 妨げる us from 上陸: and 20 yards below that breast-work there was a chain of 広大な／多数の／重要な trees placed cross the creek so that 10 men could have kept off 500 or 1000.

When we （機の）カム in sight of the breast-work we 解雇する／砲火／射撃d but two guns and they all ran away: and we were afterwards 近づく half an hour cutting the にわか景気 or chain. Here we landed and marched to the town of Realejo, or Rea Lejo, which is about a mile from hence. This town stands on a plain by a small river. It is a pretty large town with three churches and a hospital that has a 罰金 garden belonging to it: besides many large fair houses, they all stand at a good distance one from another, with yards about them. This is a very sickly place and I believe has need enough of a hospital; for it is seated so nigh the creeks and 押し寄せる／沼地s that it is never 解放する／自由な from a noisome smell. The land about it is a strong yellow clay: yet where the town stands it seems to be sand. Here are several sorts of fruits, as guavas, pineapples, melons, and prickly-pears. The pineapple and melon are 井戸／弁護士席 known.

The guava fruit grows on a hard scrubbed shrub whose bark is smooth and whitish, the 支店s pretty long and small, the leaf somewhat like the leaf of a hazel, the fruit much like a pear, with a thin rind; it is 十分な of small hard seeds, and it may be eaten while it is green, which is a thing very rare in the Indies: for most fruit, both in the East or West Indies, is 十分な of clammy, white, unsavoury juice before it is 熟した, though pleasant enough afterwards. When this fruit is 熟した it is yellow, soft, and very pleasant. It bakes 同様に as a pear, and it may be coddled, and it makes good pies. There are of divers sorts, different in 形態／調整, taste, and colour. The inside of some is yellow, of others red. When this fruit is eaten green, it is binding, when 熟した, it is 緩和するing.

The prickly-pear, bush, or shrub, of about four or five foot high, grows in many places of the West Indies, as at Jamaica and most other islands there; and on the Main in several places. This prickly shrub delights most in barren sandy grounds; and they 栄える best in places that are 近づく the sea: 特に where the sand is saltish. The tree or shrub is three or four foot high, spreading 前へ／外へ several 支店s; and on each 支店 two or three leaves. These leaves (if I may call them so) are 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, as 幅の広い every way as the palm of a man's 手渡す, and as 厚い; their 実体 like house-leek: these leaves are 盗品故買者d 一連の会議、交渉／完成する with strong prickles above an インチ long. The fruit grows at the さらに先に 辛勝する／優位 of the leaf. it is as big as a large plum, growing small 近づく the leaf, and big に向かって the 最高の，を越す, where it opens like a medlar. This fruit at first is green like the leaf, from whence it springs with small prickles about it; but when 熟した it is of a 深い red colour. The inside is 十分な of small 黒人／ボイコット seeds mixed with a 確かな red 低俗雑誌, like 厚い syrup. It is very pleasant in taste, 冷静な／正味のing, and refreshing; but if a man eats 15 or 20 of them they will colour his water, making it look like 血. This I have often experienced, yet 設立する no 害（を与える） by it.

A RANSOM PAID HONOURABLY UPON PAROLE: THE TOWN BURNT.

There are many sugar-作品 in the country, and estancias or beef farms: there is also a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of pitch, tar and cordage, made in the country, which is the 長，指導者 of their 貿易（する）. This town we approached without any 対立, and 設立する nothing but empty houses; besides such things as they could not, or would not carry away, which were 主として about 500 packs of flour, brought hither in the 広大な／多数の／重要な ship that we left at Amapalla, and some pitch, tar and cordage. These things we 手配中の，お尋ね者 and therefore we sent them all 船内に. Here we received 150 beefs, 約束d by the gentleman that was 解放（する）d coming from Leon; besides, we visited the beef-farms every day, and the sugar-作品, going in small companies of 20 or 30 men, and brought away every man his 負担; for we 設立する no horses, which if we had, yet the ways were so wet and dirty that they would not have been serviceable to us. We stayed here from the 17th till the 24th day, and then some of our destructive 乗組員 始める，決める 解雇する／砲火／射撃 to the houses: I know not by whose order, but we marched away and left them 燃やすing; at the breast-work we 乗る，着手するd into our canoes and returned 船内に our ships.

CAPTAIN DAVIS AND OTHERS GO OFF FOR THE SOUTH COAST.

The 25th day Captain Davis and Captain Swan broke off consortship; for Captain Davis was minded to return again on the coast of Peru but Captain Swan 願望（する）d to go さらに先に to the 西方の. I had till this time been with Captain Davis, but now left him, and went 船内に of Captain Swan. It was not from any dislike to my old Captain, but to get some knowledge of the northern parts of this continent of Mexico: and I knew that Captain Swan 決定するd to coast it as far north as he thought convenient, and then pass over for the East Indies; which was a way very agreeable to my inclination. Captain Townley, with his two barks, was 解決するd to keep us company; but Captain Knight and Captain Harris followed Captain Davis. The 27th day in the morning Captain Davis with his ships went out of the harbour, having a fresh land 勝利，勝つd. They were in company, Captain Davis's ship with Captain Harris in her; Captain Davis's bark and 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship, and Captain Knight in his own ship, in all four sail. Captain Swan took his last 別れの（言葉，会） of him by 解雇する／砲火／射撃ing fifteen guns, and he 解雇する／砲火／射撃d eleven in return of the civility.

A CONTAGIOUS SICKNESS AT REALEJO.

We stayed here some time afterwards to fill our water and 削減（する） firewood; but our men, who had been very healthy till now, began to 落ちる 負かす／撃墜する apace in fevers. Whether it was the badness of the water or the unhealthiness of the town was the 原因（となる） of it we did not know; but of the two I rather believe it was a distemper we got at Realejo; for it was 報告（する）／憶測d that they had been visited with a malignant fever in that town, which had occasioned many people to abandon it; and although this visitation was over with them, yet their houses and goods might still 保持する somewhat of the 感染 and communicate the same to us.

I the rather believe this because it afterwards 激怒（する）d very much, not only の中で us, but also の中で Captain Davis and his men, as he told me himself since when I met him in England: himself had like to have died, as did several of his and our men. The 3rd day of September we turned 岸に all our 囚人s and 操縦するs, they 存在 unacquainted その上の to the west, which was the coast that we designed to visit: for the Spaniards have a very little 貿易（する） by sea beyond the river Lempa, a little to the north-west of this place.

About 10 o'clock in the morning the same day we went from hence, steering 西方の, 存在 in company four sail, 同様に as they who left us, すなわち, Captain Swan and his bark, and Captain Townley and his bark, and about 340 men.

TERRIBLE TORNADOES.

We met with very bad 天候 as we sailed along this coast: seldom a day passed but we had one or two violent トルネード，竜巻s and with them very frightful flashes of 雷 and claps of 雷鳴; I did never 会合，会う with the like before nor since. These トルネード，竜巻s 一般的に （機の）カム out of the north-east. The 勝利，勝つd did not last long but blew very 猛烈な／残忍な for the time. When the トルネード，竜巻s were over we had the 勝利，勝つd at west, いつかs at west-south-west and south-west, and いつかs to the north of the west, as far as the north-west.

THE VOLCANO OF GUATEMALA; THE RICH COMMODITIES OF THAT COUNTRY, INDIGO, OTTA OR ANATTA, COCHINEEL, SILVESTER. DRIFTWOOD, AND PUMICE-STONES.

We kept at a good distance off shore and saw no land till the 14th day; but then 存在 in latitude 12 degrees 50 minutes the 火山 of Guatemala appeared in sight. This is a very high mountain with two 頂点（に達する）s or 長，率いるs appearing like two sugar-loaves. It often belches 前へ／外へ 炎上s of 解雇する／砲火／射撃 and smoke from between the two 長，率いるs; and this, as the Spaniards do 報告（する）／憶測, happens 主として in tempestuous 天候. It is called so from the city Guatemala, which stands 近づく the foot of it about eight leagues from the South Sea, and by 報告（する）／憶測 40 or 50 leagues from the 湾 of Matique in the Bay of Honduras, in the North Seas. This city is famous for many rich 商品／必需品s that are produced thereabouts (some almost peculiar to this country) and 年一回の sent into Europe, 特に four rich dyes, indigo, otta or anatta, silvester, and cochineel.

Indigo is made of an herb which grows a foot and a half or two foot high, 十分な of small 支店s; and the 支店s 十分な of leaves, 似ているing the leaves which grow on flax, but more 厚い and 相当な. They 削減（する） this herb or shrub and cast it into a large cistern made in the ground for that 目的, which is half 十分な of water. The indigo stalk or herb remains in the water till all the leaves and, I think, the 肌, rind, or bark rot off, and in a manner 解散させる: but, if any of the leaves should stick 急速な／放蕩な, they 軍隊 them off by much 労働, 投げ上げる／ボディチェックするing and 宙返り／暴落するing the 集まり in the water till all the pulpy 実体 is 解散させるd. Then the shrub, or woody part, is taken out, and the water, which is like 署名／調印する, 存在 乱すd no more, settles, and the indigo 落ちるs to the 底（に届く） of the cistern like mud. When it is thus settled they draw off the water and take the mud and lay it in the sun to 乾燥した，日照りの: which there becomes hard, as you see it brought home.

Otta, or anatta, is a red sort of dye. It is made of a red flower that grows on shrubs 7 or 8 foot high. It is thrown into a cistern of water as the indigo is, but with this difference that there is no stalk, nor so much as the 長，率いる of the flower, but only the flower itself pulled off from the 長，率いる, as you peel rose-leaves from the bud. This remains in the water till it rots, and by much jumbling it 解散させるs to a liquid 実体 like the indigo; and, 存在 settled and the water drawn off, the red mud is made up into rolls or cakes, and laid in the sun to 乾燥した，日照りの. I did never see any made but at a place called the Angels in Jamaica, at Sir Thomas Muddiford's 農園s, about 20 years since; but was grubbed up while I was there, and the ground さもなければ 雇うd. I do believe there is 非，不，無 anywhere else on Jamaica: and even this probably was 借りがあるing to the Spaniards when they had that island. Indigo is ありふれた enough in Jamaica. I 観察するd they 工場／植物d it most in sandy ground: they （種を）蒔く 広大な／多数の／重要な fields of it and I think they （種を）蒔く it every year; but I did never see the seeds it 耐えるs. Indigo is produced all over the West Indies, on most of the Caribbean Islands 同様に as the Main; yet no part of the Main 産する／生じるs such 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s both of indigo and otta as this country about Guatemala. I believe that otta is made now only by the Spaniards; for since the destroying that at the Angels 農園 in Jamaica I have not heard of any 改良 made of this 商品／必需品 by our countrymen anywhere; and as to Jamaica, I have since been 知らせるd that it is wholly left off there. I know not what 量s either of indigo or otta are made at Cuba or Hispaniola: but the place most used by our Jamaica sloops for these things is the island Porto Rico, where our Jamaica 仲買人s did use to buy indigo for three rials, and otta for four rials the 続けざまに猛撃する, which is but 2 shillings and 3 pence of our money: and yet at the same time otta was 価値（がある） in Jamaica 5 shillings the 続けざまに猛撃する, and indigo 3 shillings and 6 pence the 続けざまに猛撃する; and even this also paid in goods; by which means alone they got 50 or 60 per cent. Our 仲買人s had not then 設立する the way of 貿易（する）ing with the Spaniards in the Bay of Honduras; but Captain Coxon went thither (as I take it) at the beginning of the year 1679, under pretence to 削減（する） スピードを出す／記録につける-支持を得ようと努めるd, and went into the 湾 of Matique which is in the 底（に届く） of that bay. There he landed with his canoes and took a whole 蓄える／店-house 十分な of indigo and otta in chests, piled up in several 小包s and 示すd with different 示すs ready to be shipped 船内に two ships that then lay in the road purposely to take it in; but these ships could not come at him, it 存在 shoal-water. He opened some of the chests of indigo and, supposing the other chests to be all of the same 種類, ordered his men to carry them away. They すぐに 始める，決める to work, and took the nearest at 手渡す; and having carried out one heap of chests, they 掴むd on another 広大な／多数の／重要な pile of a different 示す from the 残り／休憩（する）, ーするつもりであるing to carry them away next. But a Spanish gentleman, their 囚人, knowing that there was a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 more than they could carry away, 願望（する）d them to take only such as belonged to the merchants (whose 示すs he undertook to show them) and to spare such as had the same 示す with those in that 広大な／多数の／重要な pile they were then entering upon; because, he said, those chests belonged to the ship-captains who, に引き続いて the seas as themselves did, he hoped they would, for that 推論する／理由, rather spare their goods than the merchants. They 同意d to his request; but upon their 開始 their chests (which was not before they （機の）カム to Jamaica, where by 黙認 they were permitted to sell them) they 設立する that the Don had been too sharp for them; the few chests which they had taken of the same 示す with the 広大な／多数の／重要な pile 証明するing to be otta, of greater value by far than the other; 反して they might 同様に have 負担d the whole ship with otta, as with indigo.

The cochineel is an insect bred in a sort of fruit much like the prickly-pear. The tree or shrub that 耐えるs it is like the prickly-pear-tree, about five foot high, and so prickly; only the leaves are not やめる so big, but the fruit is bigger. On the 最高の，を越す of the fruit there grows a red flower: this flower, when the fruit is 熟した, 落ちるs 負かす／撃墜する on the 最高の，を越す of the fruit, which then begins to open, and covers it so that no rain nor dew can wet the inside. The next day, or two days after its 落ちるing 負かす／撃墜する, the flower 存在 then scorched away by the heat of the sun, the fruit opens as 幅の広い as the mouth of a pint-マリファナ, and the inside of the fruit is by this time 十分な of small red insects with curious thin wings. As they were bred here, so here they would die for want of food, and rot in their husks (having by this time eaten up their mother-fruit) did not the Indians, who 工場／植物 large fields of these trees, when once they perceive the fruit open, take care to 運動 them out: for they spread under the 支店s of the tree a large linen cloth, and then with sticks they shake the 支店s and so 乱す the poor insects that they take wing to be gone, yet hovering still over the 長，率いる of their native tree, but the heat of the sun so disorders them that they presently 落ちる 負かす／撃墜する dead on the cloth spread for that 目的, where the Indians let them remain two or three days longer till they are 完全に 乾燥した，日照りの. When they 飛行機で行く up they are red, when they 落ちる 負かす／撃墜する they are 黒人／ボイコット; and when first they are やめる 乾燥した，日照りの they are white as the sheet wherein they 嘘（をつく）, though the colour change a little after. These 産する／生じる the much esteemed scarlet. The cochineel-trees are called by the Spaniard toonas: they are 工場／植物d in the country about Guatemala, and about Cheapo and Guaxaca, all three in the kingdom of Mexico. The silvester is a red 穀物 growing in a fruit much 似ているing the cochineel-fruit; as does also the tree that 耐えるs it. There first shoots 前へ／外へ a yellow flower, then comes the fruit, which is longer than the cochineel-fruit. The fruit 存在 熟した opens also very wide. The inside 存在 十分な of these small seeds or 穀物s they 落ちる out with the least touch or shake. The Indians that gather them 持つ／拘留する a dish under to receive the seed and then shake it 負かす／撃墜する. These trees grow wild; and eight or ten of these fruits will 産する／生じる an ounce of seed: but of the cochineel fruits three or four will 産する／生じる an ounce of insects. The silvester gives a colour almost as fair as the cochineel and so like it as to be often mistaken for it, but it is not 近づく so 価値のある. I often made enquiry how the silvester grows, and of the cochineel; but was never fully 満足させるd till I met a Spanish gentleman that had lived 30 years in the West Indies, and some years where these grow; and from him I had these relations. He was a very intelligent person and pretended to be 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd in the Bay of Campeachy; therefore I 診察するd him in many particulars 関心ing that bay, where I was 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd myself, living there three years. He gave very true and pertinent answers to all my 需要・要求するs, so that I could have no 不信 of what he 関係のある.

When we first saw the mountain of Guatemala we were by judgment 25 leagues distance from it. As we （機の）カム nearer the land it appeared higher and plainer, yet we saw no 解雇する／砲火／射撃 but a little smoke 訴訟／進行 from it. The land by the sea was of a good 高さ yet but low in comparison with that in the country. The sea for about eight or ten leagues from the shore was 十分な of floating trees, or driftwood, as it is called (of which I have seen a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 but nowhere so much as here) and pumice-石／投石するs floating, which probably are thrown out of the 燃やすing mountains and washed 負かす／撃墜する to the shore by the rains, which are very violent and たびたび（訪れる） in this country; and on the 味方する of Honduras it is 過度に wet.

THE COAST FURTHER ON THE NORTH-WEST. CAPTAIN TOWNLEY'S FRUITLESS EXPEDITION TOWARDS TECOANTEPEQUE.

The 24th day we were in latitude 14 degrees 30 minutes north, and the 天候 more settled. Then Captain Townley took with him 106 men in nine canoes and went away to the 西方の where he ーするつもりであるd to land and rummage in the country for some refreshment for our sick men, we having at this time 近づく half our men sick, and many were dead since we left Realejo. We in the ships lay still with our topsails furled and our corses or lower sails 運ぶ／漁獲高d up this day and the next that Captain Townley might get the start of us.

The 26th day we made sail again, coasting to the 西方の, having the 勝利，勝つd at north and 好天. We ran along by a tract of very high land which （機の）カム from the eastward, more within land than we could see; after we fell in with it it bore us company for about 10 leagues, and ended with a pretty gentle 降下／家系 に向かって the west.

There we had a perfect 見解（をとる） of a pleasant low country which seemed to be rich in pasturage for cattle. It was plentifully furnished with groves of green trees mixed の中で the grassy savannahs: here the land was 盗品故買者d from the sea with high sandy hills, for the waves all along this coast run high, and （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 against the shore very boisterously, making the land wholly unapproachable in boats or canoes: so we coasted still along by this low land, eight or nine leagues さらに先に, keeping の近くに to the shore for 恐れる of 行方不明の Captain Townley. We lay by in the night and in the day made an 平易な sail.

The 2nd day of October Captain Townley （機の）カム 船内に; he had coasted along shore in his canoes, 捜し出すing for an 入り口, but 設立する 非，不，無. At last, 存在 out of hopes to find any bay, creek, or river, into which he might 安全に enter, he put 岸に on a sandy bay, but overset all his canoes: he had one man 溺死するd, and several lost their 武器, and some of them that had not waxed up their cartage or cartouche boxes wet all their 砕く. Captain Townley with much ado got 岸に and dragged the canoes up 乾燥した，日照りの on the bay; then every man searched his cartouche box and drew the wet 砕く out of his gun, and 供給するd to march into the country but, finding it 十分な of 広大な／多数の／重要な creeks which they could not ford, they were 軍隊d to return again to their canoes. In the night they made good 解雇する／砲火／射撃s to keep themselves warm; the next morning 200 Spaniards and Indians fell on them but were すぐに 撃退するd, and made greater 速度(を上げる） 支援する than they had done 今後. Captain Townley followed them, but not far for 恐れる of his canoes. These men （機の）カム from Tehuantapec, a town that Captain Townley went 主として to 捜し出す because the Spanish 調書をとる／予約するs make について言及する of a large river there; but whether it was run away at this time, or rather Captain Townley and his men were short-sighted, I know not; but they could not find it.

Upon his return we presently made sail, coasting still 西方の, having the 勝利，勝つd at east-north-east 好天 and a fresh 強風. We kept within two mile of the shore, sounding all the way; and 設立する at six miles distance from land 19 fathom; at eight miles distance 21 fathom, 甚だしい／１２ダース sand.

THE ISLAND TANGOLA, AND NEIGHBOURING CONTINENT.

We saw no 開始 nor 調印する of any place to land at, so we sailed about 20 leagues さらに先に and （機の）カム to a small high island called Tangola, where there is good 錨，総合司会者ing. The island is indifferently 井戸／弁護士席 furnished with 支持を得ようと努めるd and water, and lies about a league from the shore. The Main against the island is pretty high 支持する／優勝者 savannah land by the sea; but two or three leagues within land it is higher and very woody.

GUATULCO PORT. THE BUFFADORE, OR WATER-SPOUT.

We coasted a league さらに先に and （機の）カム to Guatulco. This port is in latitude 15 degrees 30 minutes. It is one of the best in all this kingdom of Mexico. 近づく a mile from the mouth of the harbour on the east 味方する there is a little island の近くに by the shore; and on the west 味方する of the mouth of the harbour there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な hollow 激しく揺する, which by the continual working of the sea in and out makes a 広大な／多数の／重要な noise, which may be heard a 広大な／多数の／重要な way. Every 殺到する that comes in 軍隊s the water out of a little 穴を開ける on its 最高の，を越す, as out of a 麻薬を吸う, from whence it 飛行機で行くs out just like the blowing of a 鯨; to which the Spaniards also に例える it. They call this 激しく揺する and spout the Buffadore: upon what account I know not. Even in the calmest seasons the sea （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域s in there, making the water spout at the 穴を開ける: so that this is always a good 示す to find the harbour by. The harbour is about three mile 深い and one mile 幅の広い; it runs in north-west. But the west 味方する of the harbour is best to ride in for small ships; for there you may ride land-locked: 反して anywhere else you are open to the south-west 勝利，勝つd which often blow here. There is good clean ground anywhere, and good 漸進的な soundings from 16 to 6 fathom; it is bounded with a smooth sandy shore, very good to land at; and at the 底（に届く） of the harbour there is a 罰金 brook of fresh water running into the sea.

RUINS OF GUATULCO VILLAGE. THE COAST ADJOINING.

Here 以前は stood a small Spanish town or village which was taken by Sir Francis Drake: but now there is nothing remaining of it beside a little chapel standing の中で the trees about 200 paces from the sea. The land appears in small short 山の尾根s 平行の to the shore and to each other, the innermost still 徐々に higher than that nearer the shore; and they are all 着せる／賦与するd with very high 繁栄するing trees, that it is 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の pleasant and delightful to behold at a distance: I have nowhere seen anything like it.

CAPTAIN TOWNLEY MARCHES TO THE RIVER CAPALITA.

At this place Captain Swan, who had been very sick, （機の）カム 岸に, and all the sick men with him, and the 外科医 to tend them. Captain Townley again took a company of men with him and went into the country to 捜し出す for houses or inhabitants. He marched away to the eastward and （機の）カム to the river Capalita: which is a swift river, yet 深い 近づく the mouth, and is about a league from Guatulco. There two of his men swam over the river and took three Indians that were placed there as sentinels to watch for our coming. These could 非，不，無 of them speak Spanish; yet our men by 調印するs made them understand that they 願望（する）d to know if there was any town or village 近づく; who by the 調印するs which they made gave our men to understand that they could guide them to a 解決／入植地: but there was no understanding by them whether it was a Spanish or Indian 解決／入植地, nor how far it was thither. They brought these Indians 船内に with them, and the next day, which was the 6th day of October, Captain Townley with 140 men (of whom I was one) went 岸に again, taking one of these Indians with us for a guide to 行為／行う us to this 解決／入植地.

TURTLE AT GUATULCO. AN INDIAN SETTLEMENT.

Our men that stayed 船内に filled our water, and 削減（する） 支持を得ようと努めるd, and mended our sails: and our Moskito men struck three or four 海がめ every day. They were a small sort of 海がめ, and not very 甘い, yet very 井戸／弁護士席 esteemed by us all because we had eaten no flesh a 広大な／多数の／重要な while. The 8th day we returned out of the country, having been about 14 miles 直接／まっすぐに within land before we （機の）カム to any 解決／入植地. There we 設立する a small Indian village, and in it a 広大な／多数の／重要な 量 of vinelloes 乾燥した，日照りのing in the sun.

THE VINELLO-PLANT AND FRUIT.

The vinello is a little cod 十分な of small 黒人／ボイコット seeds; it is four or five インチs long, about the bigness of the 茎・取り除く of a タバコ leaf, and when 乾燥した，日照りのd much 似ているing it: so that our privateers at first have often thrown them away when they took any, wondering why the Spaniards should lay up タバコ 茎・取り除くs. This cod grows on a small vine which climbs about and supports itself by the 隣人ing trees: it first 耐えるs a yellow flower from whence the cod afterwards proceeds. It is first green, but when 熟した it turns yellow; then the Indians (whose 製造（する） it is, and who sell it cheap to the Spaniards) gather it, and lay it in the sun, which makes it soft; then it changes to a chestnut-colour. Then they frequently 圧力（をかける） it between their fingers, which makes it flat. If the Indians do anything to them beside I know not; but I have seen the Spaniards sleek them with oil.

These vines grow plentifully at Boca Toro, where I have gathered and tried to cure them, but could not: which makes me think that the Indians have some secret that I know not of to cure them. I have often asked the Spaniards how they were cured, but I never could 会合，会う with any could tell me. One Mr. Cree also, a very curious person who spoke Spanish 井戸／弁護士席 and had been a privateer all his life, and seven years a 囚人 の中で the Spaniards at Portobello and Cartagena, yet upon all his enquiry could not find any of them that understood it. Could we have learnt the art of it several of us would have gone to Boca Toro 年一回の at the 乾燥した，日照りの season and cured them, and freighted our 大型船. We there might have had 海がめ enough for food, and 蓄える／店 of vinelloes. Mr. Cree first showed me those at Boca Toro. At or 近づく a town also, called Caihooca in the Bay of Campeachy, these cods are 設立する. They are 一般的に sold for three pence a cod の中で the Spaniards in the West Indies, and are sold by the druggist, for they are much used の中で chocolate to perfume it. Some will use them の中で タバコ for it gives a delicate scent. I never heard of any vinelloes but here in this country, about Caihooca, and at Boca Toro.

The Indians of this village could speak but little Spanish. They seemed to be a poor innocent people: and by them we understood that there are very few Spaniards in these parts; yet all the Indians hereabout are under them. The land from the sea to their houses is 黒人／ボイコット earth mixed with some 石／投石するs and 激しく揺するs; all the way 十分な of very high trees.

The 10th day we sent four canoes to the 西方の who were ordered to 嘘（をつく） for us at Port Angels; where we were in hopes that by some means or other they might get 囚人s that might give us a better account of the country than at 現在の we could have; and we followed them with our ships, all our men 存在 now pretty 井戸／弁護士席 回復するd of the fever which had 激怒（する）d amongst as ever since we 出発／死d from Realejo.

CHAPTER 9.

THEY SET OUT FROM GUATULCO.

It was the 12th of October 1685 when we 始める，決める out of the harbour of Guatulco with our ships. The land here lies along west and a little southerly for about 20 or 30 leagues, and the sea-勝利，勝つd are 一般的に at west-south-west, いつかs at south-west, the land-勝利，勝つd at north. We had now 好天 and but little 勝利，勝つd.

THE ISLE SACRIFICIO.

We coasted along to the 西方の, keeping as 近づく the shore as we could for the 利益 of the land-勝利，勝つd, for the sea-勝利，勝つd were 権利 against us; and we 設立する a 現在の setting to the eastward which kept us 支援する and 強いるd us to 錨，総合司会者 at the island Sacrificio, which is a small green island about half a mile long. It lies about a league to the west of Guatulco and about half a mile from the Main. There seems to be a 罰金 bay to the west of the island; but it is 十分な of 激しく揺するs. The best riding is between the island and the Main: there you will have five or six fathom water. Here runs a pretty strong tide; the sea rises and 落ちるs five or six foot up and 負かす／撃墜する.

The 18th day we sailed from hence, coasting to the 西方の after our canoes. We kept 近づく the shore, which was all sandy bays, the country pretty high and woody, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な sea 宙返り／暴落するing in upon the shore. The 22nd day two of our canoes （機の）カム 船内に and told us they had been a 広大な／多数の／重要な way to the 西方の, but could not find Port Angels. They had 試みる／企てるd to land the day before at a place where they saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な many bulls and cows feeding, in hopes to get some of them; but the sea ran so high that they overset both canoes, and wet all their 武器, and lost four guns, and had one man 溺死するd, and with much ado got off again. They could give no account of the other two canoes for they lost company the first night that they went from Guatulco and had not seen them since.

PORT ANGELS.

We were now abreast of Port Angels, though our men in the canoes did not know it; therefore we went in and 錨，総合司会者d there. This is a 幅の広い open bay with two or three 激しく揺するs at the west 味方する. Here is good 錨，総合司会者ing all over the bay in 30 or 20 or 12 fathom water; but you must ride open to all 勝利，勝つd except the land-勝利，勝つd till you come into 12 or 13 fathom water; then you are 避難所d from the west-south-west which are the ありふれた 貿易（する） 勝利，勝つd. The tide rises here about five foot; the flood 始める，決めるs to the north-east and the ebb to the south-west. The 上陸 in this bay is bad; the place of 上陸 is の近くに by the west 味方する behind a few 激しく揺するs; here always goes a 広大な／多数の／重要な swell. The Spaniards compare this harbour for goodness to Guatulco, but there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な difference between them. For Guatulco is almost landlocked and this an open road, and no one would easily know it by their character of it, but by its 示すs and its latitude, which is 15 degrees north. For this 推論する／理由 our canoes, which were sent from Guatulco and ordered to tarry here for us, did not know it (not thinking this to be that 罰金 harbour) and therefore went さらに先に; two of them, as I said before, returned again, but the other two were not yet come to us. The land that bounds this harbour is pretty high, the earth sandy and yellow, in some places red; it is partly woodland, partly savannahs. The trees in the 支持を得ようと努めるd are large and tall and the savannahs are plentifully 蓄える／店d with very kindly grass. Two leagues to the east of this place is a beef farm belonging to Don Diego de la Rosa.

The 23rd day we landed about 100 men and marched thither where we 設立する plenty of fat bulls and cows feeding in the savannahs, and in the house good 蓄える／店 of salt and maize; and some hogs, and cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s: but the owners or overseers were gone. We lay here two or three days feasting on fresh 準備／条項, but could not contrive to carry any 量 船内に because the way was so long and our men but weak, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な wide river to ford. Therefore we returned again from thence the 26th day and brought everyone a little beef or pork for the men that stayed 船内に.

JACKALS.

The two nights that we stayed 岸に at this place we heard 広大な／多数の／重要な droves of jackals, as we supposed them to be, barking all night long not far from us. 非，不，無 of us saw these; but I do verily believe they were jackals; though I did never see these creatures in America, nor hear any but at this time. We could not think that there were いっそう少なく than 30 or 40 in a company. We got 船内に in the evening; but did not yet hear any news of our two canoes.

The 27th day in the morning we sailed from hence with the land-勝利，勝つd at north by west. The sea-勝利，勝つd （機の）カム about noon at west-south-west, and in the evening we 錨，総合司会者d in 16 fathom water by a small rocky island which lies about half a mile from the Main and six leagues 西方の from Port Angels. The Spaniards give no account of this island in their 操縦する-調書をとる／予約する. The 28th day we sailed again with the land-勝利，勝つd: in the afternoon the sea-微風 blew hard and we sprung our main-最高の，を越す-mast. This coast is 十分な of small hills and valleys, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な sea 落ちるs in upon the shore. In the night we met with the other two of our canoes that went from us at Guatulco. They had been as far as Acapulco to 捜し出す Port Angels. Coming 支援する from thence they went into a river to get water and were 遭遇（する）d by 150 Spaniards, yet they filled their water in spite of them, but had one man 発射 through the thigh. Afterward they went into a lagoon, or lake of salt water, where they 設立する much 乾燥した，日照りのd fish and brought some 船内に. We 存在 now abreast of that place sent in a canoe 乗組員を乗せた with twelve men for more fish. The mouth of this lagoon is not ピストル-発射 wide, and on both 味方するs are pretty high 激しく揺するs, so conveniently placed by nature that many men may abscond behind; and within the 激しく揺するs and lagoon opens wide on both 味方するs.

A NARROW ESCAPE.

The Spaniards, 存在 alarmed by our two canoes that had been there two or three days before, （機の）カム 武装した to this place to 安全な・保証する their fish; and seeing our canoe coming, they lay snug behind the 激しく揺するs, and 苦しむd the canoe to pass in, then they 解雇する／砲火／射撃d their ボレー and 負傷させるd five of our men. Our people were a little surprised at this sudden adventure, yet 解雇する／砲火／射撃d their guns and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d さらに先に into the lagoon, for they durst not adventure to come out again through the 狭くする 入り口 which was 近づく a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile in length. Therefore they 列／漕ぐ／騒動d into the middle of the lagoon where they lay out of gun-発射 and looked about to see if there was not another passage to get out at, broader than that by which they entered, but could see 非，不，無. So they lay still two days and three nights, in hopes that we should come to 捜し出す them; but we lay off at sea about three leagues distant, waiting for their return, supposing by their long absence that they had made some greater 発見 and were gone さらに先に than the fish-範囲; because it is usual with privateers when they enter upon such designs to search さらに先に than they 提案するd if they 会合，会う any 激励. But Captain Townley and his bark 存在 nearer the shore heard some guns 解雇する／砲火／射撃d in the lagoon. So he 乗組員を乗せた his canoe and went に向かって the shore, and, （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域ing the Spaniards away from the 激しく揺するs, made a 解放する／自由な passage for our men to come out of their 続けざまに猛撃する, where else they must have been 餓死するd or knocked on the 長，率いる by the Spaniards. They （機の）カム 船内に their ships again the 31st of October. This lagoon is about the latitude of 16 degrees 40 minutes north.

THE ROCK ALGATROSS, AND THE NEIGHBOURING COAST.

From hence we made sail again, coasting to the 西方の, having 好天 and a 現在の setting to the west. The second day of November we passed by a 激しく揺する called by the Spaniards the Algatross. The land hereabout is of an indifferent 高さ and woody, and more within the country 山地の. Here are seven or eight white cliffs by the sea, which are very remarkable because there are 非，不，無 so white and so 厚い together on all the coast. They are five or six mile to the west of the Algatross 激しく揺する. There is a dangerous shoal lies south by west from these cliffs, four or five mile off at sea. Two leagues to the west of these cliffs there is a pretty large river which forms a small island at its mouth. The channel on the east 味方する is but shoal and sandy, but the west channel is 深い enough for canoes to enter. On the banks of this channel the Spaniards have made a breast-work to 妨げる an enemy from 上陸 or filling water.

The 3rd day we 錨，総合司会者d abreast of this river in 14 fathom water about a mile and a half off shore. The next morning we 乗組員を乗せた our canoes and went 岸に to the breast-work with little 抵抗, although there were about 200 men to keep us off. They 解雇する／砲火／射撃d about twenty or thirty guns at us but seeing we were 解決するd to land they quitted the place; one 長，指導者 推論する／理由 why the Spaniards are so frequently 大勝するd by us, although many times much our superiors in numbers, and in many places 防備を堅める／強化するd with breast-作品, is their want of small 小火器, for they have but few on all the sea coasts unless 近づく their larger 守備隊s. Here we 設立する a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of salt, brought hither, as I 裁判官, for to salt fish, which they take in the lagoons.

SNOOK, A SORT OF FISH.

The fish I 観察するd here mostly were what we call snook, neither a sea-fish nor fresh water-fish, but very 非常に／多数の in these salt lakes. This fish is about a foot long, and 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, and as 厚い as the small of a man's 脚, with a pretty long 長，率いる: it has 規模s of a whitish colour and is good meat. How the Spaniards take them I know not, for we never 設立する any 逮捕するs, hooks or lines; neither yet any bark, boat, or canoe の中で them on all this coast, except the ship I shall について言及する at Acapulco.

THE TOWN OF ACAPULCO.

We marched two or three leagues into the country and met with but one house, where we took a Mulatto 囚人 who 知らせるd us of a ship that was lately arrived at Acapulco; she （機の）カム from Lima. Captain Townley, wanting a good ship, thought now he had an 適切な時期 of getting one if he could 説得する his men to 投機・賭ける with him into the harbour of Acapulco and fetch this Lima ship out. Therefore he すぐに 提案するd it and 設立する not only all his own men willing to 補助装置 him but many of Captain Swan's men also. Captain Swan …に反対するd it because, 準備／条項 存在 不十分な with us, he thought our time might be much better 雇うd in first 供給するing ourselves with food, and here was plenty of maize in the river where we now were, as we were 知らせるd by the same 囚人 who 申し込む／申し出d to 行為／行う us to the place where it was.

OF THE TRADE IT DRIVES WITH THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.

But neither the 現在の necessity nor Captain Swan's 説得／派閥 availed anything, no nor yet their own 利益／興味; for the 広大な／多数の／重要な design we had then in 手渡す was to 嘘（をつく） and wait for a rich ship which comes to Acapulco every year richly laden from the Philippine Islands. But it was necessary we should be 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with 準備／条項s to enable us to 巡航する about and wait the time of her coming. However, Townley's party 勝つ／広く一帯に広がるing, we only filled our water here and made ready to be gone. So the 5th day in the afternoon we sailed again, coasting to the 西方の に向かって Acapulco.

THE HAVEN OF ACAPULCO.

The 7th day in the afternoon, 存在 about twelve leagues from the shore, we saw the high land of Acapulco, which is very remarkable: for there is a 一連の会議、交渉／完成する hill standing between two other hills; the westermost of which is the biggest and highest, and has two hillocks like two paps on its 最高の，を越す: the eastermost hill is higher and 詐欺師 than the middlemost. From the middle hill the land 拒絶する／低下するs toward the sea, ending in a high 一連の会議、交渉／完成する point. There is no land 形態／調整d like this on all the coast. In the evening Captain Townley went away from the ships with 140 men in twelve canoes to try to get the Lima ship out of Acapulco Harbour.

Acapulco is a pretty large town, 17 degrees north of the 赤道. It is the sea-port for the city of Mexico on the west 味方する of the continent; as La Vera Cruz, or St. John d'Ulloa in the Bay of Nova Hispania is on the north 味方する. This town is the only place of 貿易（する） on all this coast; for there is little or no traffic by sea on all the north-west part of this 広大な kingdom, here 存在, as I have said, neither boats, barks, nor ships (that I could ever see) unless only what come hither from other parts, and some boats 近づく the south-east end of California; as I guess, by the intercourse between that and the Main, for pearl-fishing.

The ships that 貿易（する） hither are only three, two that 絶えず go once a year between this and Manila in Luconia, one of the Philippine Islands, and one ship more every year to and from Lima. This from Lima 一般的に arrives a little before Christmas; she brings them quicksilver, cocoa, and pieces-of-eight. Here she stays till the Manila ships arrive, and then takes in a 貨物 of spices, silks, calicoes, and muslins, and other East India 商品／必需品s, for the use of Peru, and then returns to Lima. This is but a small 大型船 of twenty guns, but the two Manila ships are each said to be above 1000 tun. These make their voyages alternately so that one or other of them is always at the Manilas. When either of them 始める，決めるs out from Acapulco it is at the latter end of March or the beginning of April; she always touches to refresh at Guam, one of the Ladrone Islands, in about sixty days space after she 始める，決めるs out. There she stays but two or three days and then 起訴するs her voyage to Manila where she 一般的に arrives some time in June. By that time the other is ready to sail from thence laden with East India 商品／必需品s. She stretches away to the north as far as 36, or いつかs into 40 degrees of north latitude before she gets a 勝利，勝つd to stand over to the American shore. She 落ちるs in first with the coast of California, and then coasts along the shore to the south again, and never 行方不明になるs a 勝利，勝つd to bring her away from thence やめる to Acapulco. When she gets the length of Cape San Lucas, which is the southermost point of California, she stretches over to Cape Corrientes, which is in about the 20th degree of north latitude. From thence she coasts along till she comes to Sallagua, and there she 始める，決めるs 岸に 乗客s that are bound to the city of Mexico: from thence she makes her best way, coasting still along shore, till she arrives at Acapulco, which is 一般的に about Christmas, never more than eight or ten days before or after. Upon the return of this ship to the Manila the other which stays there till her arrival takes her turn 支援する to Acapulco. Sir John Narborough therefore was 課すd on by the Spaniards who told him that there were eight sail, or more, that used this 貿易（する）.

The Port of Acapulco is very commodious for the 歓迎会 of ships, and so large that some hundreds may 安全に ride there without damnifying each other. There is a small low island crossing the mouth of the harbour; it is about a mile and a half long and half a mile 幅の広い, stretching east and west. It leaves a good wide 深い channel at each end where ships may 安全に go in or come out, taking the advantage of the 勝利，勝つd; they must enter with the sea-勝利，勝つd, and go out with the land-勝利，勝つd, for these 勝利，勝つd seldom or never fail to 後継する each other alternately in their proper season of the day or night. The westermost channel is the narrowest, but so 深い there is no 錨，総合司会者ing, and the Manila ships pass in that way, but the ships from Lima enter on the south-west channel. This harbour runs in north about three miles then, growing very 狭くする, it turns short about to the west and runs about a mile さらに先に, where it ends. The town stands on the north-west 味方する at the mouth of this 狭くする passage, の近くに by the sea, and at the end of the town there is a 壇・綱領・公約 with a 広大な／多数の／重要な many guns. Opposite to the town, on the east 味方する, stands a high strong 城, said to have forty guns of a very 広大な／多数の／重要な bore. Ships 一般的に ride 近づく the 底（に届く） of the harbour, under the 命令（する） both of the 城 and the 壇・綱領・公約.

A TORNADO.

Captain Townley, who, as I said before, with 140 men, left our ships on a design to fetch the Lima ship out of the harbour, had not 列／漕ぐ／騒動d above three or four leagues before the voyage was like to end with all their lives; for on a sudden they were 遭遇（する）d with a violent トルネード，竜巻 from the shore, which had like to have 創立者d all the canoes: but they escaped that danger and the second night got 安全な into Port Marquis.

PORT MARQUIS. CAPTAIN TOWNLEY MAKES A FRUITLESS ATTEMPT.

Port Marquis is a very good harbour a league to the east of Acapulco Harbour. Here they stayed all the next day to 乾燥した，日照りの themselves, their 着せる／賦与するs, their 武器 and 弾薬／武器, and the next night they 列／漕ぐ／騒動d softly into Acapulco Harbour; and because they would not be heard they 運ぶ／漁獲高d in their oars, and paddled as softly as if they had been 捜し出すing manatee. They paddled の近くに to the 城; then struck over to the town, and 設立する the ship riding between the breast-work and the fort, within about a hundred yards of each. When they had 井戸／弁護士席 見解（をとる）d her and considered the danger of the design they thought it not possible to 遂行する it; therefore they paddled softly 支援する again till they were out of 命令（する） of the forts, and then they went to land, and fell in の中で a company of Spanish 兵士s (for the Spaniards, having seen them the day before, had 始める，決める guards along the coast) who すぐに 解雇する／砲火／射撃d at them but did them no 損失, only made them retire さらに先に from the shore. They lay afterwards at the mouth of the harbour till it was day to take a 見解（をとる） of the town and 城, and then returned 船内に again, 存在 tired, hungry, and sorry for their 失望.

A LONG SANDY BAY, BUT VERY ROUGH SEAS.

The 11th day we made sail again その上の on to the 西方の with the land-勝利，勝つd, which is 一般的に at north-east, but the sea-勝利，勝つd are at south-west. We passed by a long sandy bay of above twenty leagues. All the way along it the sea 落ちるs with such 軍隊 on the shore that it is impossible to come 近づく it with boat or canoe; yet it is good clean ground, and good 錨，総合司会者ing a mile or two from the shore. The land by the sea is low and indifferent fertile, producing many sorts of trees, 特に the spreading palm, which grows in 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs from one end of the bay to the other.

THE PALM-TREE, GREAT AND SMALL.

The palm-tree is as big as an ordinary ash, growing about twenty or thirty foot high. The 団体／死体 is （疑いを）晴らす from boughs or 支店s till just at the 長，率いる; there it spreads 前へ／外へ many large green 支店s, not much unlike the cabbage-tree before 述べるd. These 支店s also grow in many places (as in Jamaica, Darien, the Bay of Campeachy, etc.) from a stump not above a foot or two high; which is not the remains of a tree 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する; for 非，不，無 of these sort of trees will ever grow again when they have once lost their 長，率いる; but these are a sort of dwarf-palm, and the 支店s which grow from the stump are not so large as those that grow on the 広大な／多数の／重要な tree. These smaller 支店s are used both in the East and West Indies for thatching houses: they are very 継続している and serviceable, much より勝るing the palmetto. For this thatch, if 井戸／弁護士席 laid on, will 耐える five or six years; and this is called by the Spaniards the palmetto-王室の. The English at Jamaica give it the same 指名する. Whether this be the same which they in Guinea get the palm-ワイン from I know not; but I know that it is like this.

THE HILL OF PETAPLAN.

The land in the country is 十分な of small 頂点（に達する）d barren hills, making as many little valleys, which appear 繁栄するing and green. At the west end of this bay is the hill of Petaplan, in latitude 17 degrees 30 minutes north. This is a 一連の会議、交渉／完成する point stretching out into the sea: at a distance it seems to be an island. A little to the west of this hill are several 一連の会議、交渉／完成する 激しく揺するs, which we left without us, steering in between them and the 一連の会議、交渉／完成する point, where we had eleven fathom water. We （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 on the north-west 味方する of the hill and went 岸に, about 170 men of us, and marched into the country twelve or fourteen miles.

A POOR INDIAN VILLAGE.

There we （機の）カム to a poor Indian village that did not afford us a meal of victuals. The people all fled, only a Mulatta woman and three or four small children, who were taken and brought 船内に. She told us that a 運送／保菌者 (one who 運動s a caravan of mules) was going to Acapulco, laden with flour and other goods, but stopped in the road for 恐れる of us, a little to the west of this village (for he had heard of our 存在 on this coast) and she thought he still remained there: and therefore it was we kept the woman to be our guide to carry us to that place. At this place where we now lay our Moskito men struck some small 海がめ and many small jewfish.

JEW-FISH.

The jew-fish is a very good fish, and I 裁判官 so called by the English because it has 規模s and fins, therefore a clean fish, によれば the Levitical 法律, and the Jews at Jamaica buy them and eat them very 自由に. It is a very large fish, 形態／調整d much like a cod but a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 bigger; one will 重さを計る three, or four, or five hundredweight. It has a large 長，率いる, with 広大な／多数の／重要な fins and 規模s, as big as an half-栄冠を与える, 責任のある to the bigness of his 団体／死体. It is very 甘い meat, and 一般的に fat. This fish lives の中で the 激しく揺するs; there are plenty of them in the West Indies, about Jamaica and the coast of Caracas; but 主として in these seas, 特に more 西方の.

CHEQUETAN, A GOOD HARBOUR.

We went from hence with our ships the 18th [sic] day, and steered west about two leagues さらに先に to a place called Chequetan. A mile and a half from the shore there is a small 重要な, and within it is a very good harbour where ships may careen; there is also a small river of fresh water, and 支持を得ようと努めるd enough.

ESTAPA; MUSSELS THERE.

The 14th day in the morning we went with 95 men in six canoes to 捜し出す for the 運送／保菌者, taking the Mulatto woman for our guide; but Captain Townley would not go with us. Before day we landed at a place called Estapa, a league to the west of Chequetan. The woman was 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd here, having been often at this place for mussels as she told us; for here are 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of them. They seem in all 尊敬（する）・点s like our English mussels.

A CARAVAN OF MULES TAKEN.

She carried us through the pathless 支持を得ようと努めるd by the 味方する of a river for about a league: then we （機の）カム into a savannah 十分な of bulls and cows; and here the 運送／保菌者 before について言及するd was lying at the estancia-house with his mules, not having dared to 前進する all this while, as not knowing where we lay; so his own 恐れる made him, his mules, and all his goods, become a prey to us. He had 40 packs of flour, some chocolate, a 広大な／多数の／重要な many small cheeses, and 豊富 of earthenware. The eatables we brought away, but the earthen 大型船s we had no occasion for and therefore left them. The mules were about 60: we brought our prize with them to the shore, and so turned them away. Here we also killed some cows and brought with us to our canoes. In the afternoon our ships （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 half a mile from the place where we landed; and then we went 船内に. Captain Townley, seeing our good success, went 岸に with his men to kill some cows; for here were no inhabitants 近づく to …に反対する us. The land is very woody, of a good fertile 国／地域 watered with many small rivers; yet it has but few inhabitants 近づく the sea. Captain Townley killed 18 beefs, and after he （機の）カム 船内に our men, contrary to Captain Swan's inclination, gave Captain Townley part of the flour which we took 岸に. Afterwards we gave the woman some 着せる／賦与するs for her and her children, and put her and two of them 岸に; but one of them, a very pretty boy about seven or eight years old, Captain Swan kept. The woman cried and begged hard to have him; but Captain Swan would not, but 約束d to make much of him and was as good as his word. He 証明するd afterwards a very 罰金 boy for wit, courage, and dexterity; I have often wondered at his 表現s and 活動／戦闘s.

The 21st day in the evening we sailed hence with the land-勝利，勝つd. The land-勝利，勝つd on this part of the coast are at north and the sea-勝利，勝つd at west-south-west. We had 好天 and coasted along to the 西方の. The land is high and 十分な of ragged hills; and west from these ragged hills the land makes many pleasant and 実りの多い／有益な valleys の中で the mountains. The 25th day we were abreast of a very remarkable hill which, 非常に高い above the 残り／休憩（する） of his fellows, is divided in the 最高の，を越す and makes two small parts. It is in latitude 18 degrees 8 minutes north.

A HILL NEAR THELUPAN.

The Spaniards make について言及する of a town called Thelupan 近づく this hill, which we would have visited if we could have 設立する the way to it. The 26th day Captain Swan and Captain Townley with 200 men, of whom I was one, went in our canoes to 捜し出す for the city of Colima, a rich place by 報告（する）／憶測, but how far within land I could never learn: for, as I said before, here is no 貿易（する） by sea, and therefore we could never get guides to 知らせる us or 行為／行う us to any town but one or two on this coast: and there is never a town that lies open to the sea but Acapulco; and therefore our search was 一般的に fruitless, as now; for we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d above 20 leagues along shore and 設立する it a very bad coast to land. We saw no house nor 調印する of inhabitants, although we passed by a 罰金 valley called the valley of Maguella; only at two places, the one at our first setting out on this 探検隊／遠征隊, and the other at the end of it, we saw a horseman 始める，決める, as we supposed, as a sentinel to watch us. At both places we landed with difficulty, and at each place we followed the 跡をつける of the horse on the sandy bay; but where they entered the 支持を得ようと努めるd we lost the 跡をつける and, although we diligently searched for it, yet we could find it no more; so we were perfectly at a loss to find out the houses or town they （機の）カム from.

THE COAST HEREABOUTS.

The 28th day, 存在 tired and hopeless to find any town, we went 船内に our ships, that were now come abreast of the place where we were: for always when we leave our ships we either order a 確かな place of 会合, or else leave them a 調印する to know where we are by making one or more 広大な／多数の／重要な smokes; yet we had all like to have been 廃虚d by such a signal as this in a former voyage under Captain Sharp, when we made that unfortunate 試みる／企てる upon Arica, which is について言及するd in the History of the Buccaneers. For upon the 大勝するing our men, and taking several of them, some of those so taken told the Spaniards that it was agreed between them and their companions on board to make two 広大な／多数の／重要な smokes at a distance from each other as soon as the town should be taken, as a signal to the ship that it might 安全に enter the harbour. The Spaniards made these smokes presently: I was then の中で those who stayed on board; and whether the signal was not so 正確に／まさに made or some other discouragement happened I remember not, but we forbore going in till we saw our scattered 乗組員 coming off in their canoes. Had we entered the port upon the 誤った signal we must have been taken or sunk; for we must have passed の近くに by the fort and could have had no 勝利，勝つd to bring us out till the land-勝利，勝つd should rise in the night.

THE VOLCANO, TOWN, VALLEY, AND BAY OF COLIMA.

But to our 現在の voyage: after we （機の）カム 船内に we saw the 火山 of Colima. This is a very high mountain in about 18 degrees 36 minutes north, standing five or six leagues from the sea in the 中央 of a pleasant valley. It appears with two sharp 頂点（に達する）s, from each of which there do always 問題／発行する 炎上s of 解雇する／砲火／射撃 or smoke. The valley in which this 火山 stands is called the valley of Colima from the town itself which stands there not far from the 火山. The town is said to be 広大な／多数の／重要な and rich, the 長，指導者 of all its neighbourhood: and the valley in which it is seated, by the relation which the Spaniards give of it, is the most pleasant and 実りの多い／有益な valley in all the kingdom of Mexico. This valley is about ten or twelve leagues wide by the sea, where it makes a small bay: but how far the vale runs into the country I know not. It is said to be 十分な of cocoa-gardens, fields of corn, wheat, and plantain-walks. The 隣人ing sea is bounded with a sandy shore; but there is no going 岸に for the 暴力／激しさ of the waves. The land within it is low all along and woody for about two leagues from the east 味方する; at the end of the 支持を得ようと努めるd there is a 深い river runs out into the sea, but it has such a 広大な／多数の／重要な 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業, or sandy shoal, that when we were here no boat or canoe could かもしれない enter, the sea running so high upon the 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業: さもなければ, I 裁判官, we should have made some さらに先に 発見 into this pleasant valley. On the west 味方する of the river the savannah-land begins and runs to the other 味方する of the valley. We had but little 勝利，勝つd when we （機の）カム 船内に, therefore we lay off this bay that afternoon and the night 続いて起こるing.

The 29th day our captains went away from our ships with 200 men, ーするつもりであるing at the first convenient place to land and search about for a path: for the Spanish 調書をとる／予約するs make について言及する of two or three other towns hereabouts, 特に one called Sallagua, to the west of this bay. Our canoes 列／漕ぐ／騒動d along as 近づく the shore as they could, but the sea went so high that they could not land. About 10 or 11 o'clock two horsemen （機の）カム 近づく the shore, and one of them took a 瓶／封じ込める out of his pocket and drank to our men. While he was drinking, one of our men snatched up his gun and let 運動 at him and killed his horse: so his consort すぐに 始める，決める 刺激（する）s to his horse and 棒 away, leaving the other to come after a-foot. But he 存在 booted made but slow haste; therefore two of our men stripped themselves and swam 岸に to take him. But he had a machete, or long knife, wherewith he kept them both from 掴むing him, they having nothing in their 手渡すs wherewith to defend themselves or 感情を害する／違反する him. The 30th day our men （機の）カム all 船内に again, for they could not find any place to land in.

SALLAGUA PORT.

The first day of December we passed by the Port of Sallagua. This port is in latitude 18 degrees 52 minutes. It is only a pretty 深い bay, divided in the middle with a rocky point, which makes, as it were, two harbours. Ships may ride securely in either but the west harbour is the best: there is good 錨，総合司会者ing anywhere in 10 or 12 fathom, and a brook of fresh water runs into the sea. Here we saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な new thatched house, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な many Spaniards both horse and foot, with 派手に宣伝するs （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域ing and colours 飛行機で行くing in 反抗 of us, as we thought. We took no notice of them till the next morning, and then we landed about 200 men to try their courage; but they presently withdrew. The foot never stayed to 交流 one 発射, but the horsemen stayed till two or three were knocked 負かす／撃墜する, and then they drew off, our men 追求するing them. At last two of our men took two horses that had lost their riders and, 開始するing them, 棒 after the Spaniards 十分な 運動 till they （機の）カム の中で them, thinking to have taken a 囚人 for 知能, but had like to have been taken themselves: for four Spaniards surrounded them, after they had 発射する／解雇するd their ピストルs, and unhorsed them; and if some of our best footmen had not come to their 救助（する） they must have 産する／生じるd or have been killed. They were both 削減（する） in two or three places but their 負傷させるs were not mortal. The four Spaniards got away before our men could 傷つける them and, 開始するing their horses, 速度(を上げる）d after their consorts, who were marched away into the country. Our men, finding a 幅の広い road 主要な into the country, followed it about four leagues in a 乾燥した，日照りの stony country, 十分な of short 支持を得ようと努めるd; but finding no 調印する of inhabitants they returned again. In their way 支援する they took two Mulattos who were not able to march as 急速な／放蕩な as their consorts; therefore they had skulked in the 支持を得ようと努めるd and by that means thought to have escaped our men.

ORRHA.

These 囚人s 知らせるd us that this 広大な／多数の／重要な road did lead to a 広大な／多数の／重要な city called Oarrha, from whence many of those horsemen before spoken of （機の）カム: that this city was distant from hence as far as a horse will go in four days; and that there is no place of consequence nearer: that the country is very poor and thinly 住むd.

They said also that these men （機の）カム to 補助装置 the Philippine ship that was every day 推定する／予想するd here to put 岸に 乗客s for Mexico. The Spanish 操縦する-調書をとる／予約するs について言及する a town also called Sallagua hereabouts; but we could not find it, nor hear anything of it by our 囚人s.

We now ーするつもりであるd to 巡航する off Cape Corrientes to wait for the Philippine ship. So the 6th day of December we 始める，決める sail, coasting to the 西方の に向かって Cape Corrientes. We had 好天 and but little 勝利，勝つd; the sea-微風s at north-west and the land-勝利，勝つd at north.

RAGGED HILLS.

The land is of an indifferent 高さ, 十分な of ragged points which at a distance appear like islands: the country is very woody, but the trees are not high, nor very big.

Here I was taken sick of a fever and ague that afterwards turned to a dropsy which I 労働d under a long time after; and many of our men died of this distemper, though our 外科医s used their greatest 技術 to 保存する their lives. The dropsy is a general distemper on this coast, and the natives say that the best 治療（薬） they can find for it is the 石／投石する or cod of an alligator (of which they have four, one 近づく each 脚, within the flesh) pulverized and drunk in water: this recipe we also 設立する について言及するd in an almanac made at Mexico: I would have tried it but we 設立する no alligators here though there are several.

There are many good harbours between Sallagua and Cape Corrientes but we passed by them all. As we drew 近づく the Cape the land by the sea appeared of an indifferent 高さ, 十分な of white cliffs; but in the country the land is high and barren and 十分な of sharp 頂点（に達する）d hills, unpleasant to the sight.

CORONADA, OR THE CROWN LAND.

To the west of this ragged land is a chain of mountains running 平行の with the shore; they end on the west with a gentle 降下／家系; but on the east 味方する they keep their 高さ, ending with a high 法外な mountain which has three small sharp 頂点（に達する）d 最高の，を越すs, somewhat 似ているing a 栄冠を与える and therefore called by the Spaniards Coronada, the 栄冠を与える Land.

CAPE CORRIENTES.

The 11th day we were fair in sight of Cape Corrientes, it bore north by west and the 栄冠を与える Land bore north. The cape is of an indifferent 高さ with 法外な 激しく揺するs to the sea. It is flat and even on the 最高の，を越す, 着せる／賦与するd with 支持を得ようと努めるd: the land in the country is high and 二塁打d. This cape lies in 20 degrees 8 minutes north. I find its longitude from Tenerife to be 230 degrees 56 minutes, but I keep my longitude 西方の, によれば our course; and によれば this reckoning I find it is from the Lizard in England 121 degrees 41 minutes, so that the difference of time is eight hours and almost six minutes.

Here we had 解決するd to 巡航する for the Philippine ship because she always makes this cape in her voyage homeward. We were (as I have said) four ships in company; Captain Swan and his tender; Captain Townley and his tender. It was so ordered that Captain Swan should 嘘（をつく） eight or ten leagues off shore, and the 残り／休憩（する） about a league distant each from other, between him and the cape, that so we might not 行方不明になる the Philippine ship; but we 手配中の，お尋ね者 準備／条項 and therefore we sent Captain Townley's bark with 50 or 60 men to the west of the cape to search about for some town or 農園s where we might get 準備／条項 of any sort. The 残り／休憩（する） of us in the 合間 巡航するing in our 駅／配置するs. The 17th day the bark （機の）カム to us again but had got nothing, for they could not get about the cape because the 勝利，勝つd on this coast is 一般的に between the north-west and the south-west, which makes it very difficult getting to the 西方の; but they left four canoes with 46 men at the cape, who 解決するd to 列／漕ぐ／騒動 to the 西方の. The 18th day we sailed to the 重要なs of Chametly to fill our water.

ISLES OF CHAMETLY. THE CITY PURIFICATION.

The 重要なs or islands of Chametly are about 16 or 18 leagues to the eastward of Cape Corrientes. They are small, low, and woody, environed with 激しく揺するs, there are five of them lying in the form of a half moon, not a mile from the shore, and between them and the Main is very good riding, 安全な・保証する from any 勝利，勝つd. The Spaniards do 報告（する）／憶測 that here live fishermen, to fish for the inhabitants of the city of Purification. This is said to be a large town, the best hereabouts; but is 14 leagues up in the country.

The 20th instant we entered within these islands, passing in on the south-east 味方する, and 錨，総合司会者d between the islands and the Main in five fathom clean sand. Here we 設立する good fresh water and 支持を得ようと努めるd, and caught plenty of 激しく揺する-fish with hook and line, a sort of fish I 述べるd at the 小島 of Juan Fernandez, but we saw no 調印する of inhabitants besides three or four old huts; therefore I do believe that the Spanish or Indian fishermen come hither only at Lent, or some other such season, but that they do not live here 絶えず. The 21st day Captain Townley went away with about 60 men to take an Indian village seven or eight leagues from hence to the 西方の more に向かって the cape, and the next day we went to 巡航する off the cape, where Captain Townley was to 会合，会う us. The 24th day, as we were 巡航するing off the cape, the four canoes before について言及するd, which Captain Townley's bark left at the cape, （機の）カム off to us.

VALDERAS; OR THE VALLEY OF FLAGS.

They, after the bark left them, passed to the west of the cape and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d into the valley Valderas, or perhaps Val d'Iris; for it signifies the valley of 旗s.

This valley lies in the 底（に届く） of a pretty 深い bay that runs in between Cape Corrientes on the south-east and the point of Pontique on the north-west, which two places are about 10 leagues asunder. The valley is about three leagues wide; there is a level sandy bay against the sea and good smooth 上陸. In the 中央 of the bay is a 罰金 river whereinto boats may enter; but it is brackish at the latter end of the 乾燥した，日照りの season, which is in February, March, and part of April. I shall speak more of the seasons in my 一時期／支部 of 勝利，勝つd in the 虫垂. This valley is bounded within land with a small green hill that makes a very gentle 降下／家系 into the valley and affords a very pleasant prospect to seaward. It is 濃厚にするd with 実りの多い／有益な savannahs, mixed with groves of trees fit for any uses, beside fruit-trees in 豊富, as guavas, oranges and limes, which here grow wild in such plenty as if nature had designed it only for a garden. The savannahs are 十分な of fat bulls and cows and some horses, but no house in sight.

THEY MISS THEIR DESIGN ON THIS COAST.

When our canoes （機の）カム to this pleasant valley they landed 37 men and marched into the country 捜し出すing for some houses. They had not gone passed three mile before they were attacked by 150 Spaniards, horse and foot: there was a small thin 支持を得ようと努めるd の近くに by them, into which our men 退却／保養地d to 安全な・保証する themselves from the fury of the horse: yet the Spaniards 棒 in の中で them and attacked them very furiously till the Spanish captain and 17 more 宙返り／暴落するd dead off their horses: then the 残り／休憩（する） 退却／保養地d, 存在 many of them 負傷させるd. We lost four men and had two 猛烈に 負傷させるd. In this 活動／戦闘 the foot, who were 武装した with lances and swords and were the greatest number, never made any attack; the horsemen had each a を締める of ピストルs and some short guns. If the foot had come in they had certainly destroyed all our men. When the 小競り合い was over our men placed the two 負傷させるd men on horses and （機の）カム to their canoes. There they killed one of the horses and dressed it, 存在 afraid to 投機・賭ける into the savannah to kill a bullock, of which there was 蓄える／店. When they had eaten and 満足させるd themselves they returned 船内に. The 25th day, 存在 Christmas, we 巡航するd in pretty 近づく the cape and sent in three canoes with the strikers to get fish, 存在 desirous to have a Christmas dinner. In the afternoon they returned 船内に with three 広大な／多数の／重要な jew-fish which feasted us all; and the next day we sent 岸に our canoes again and got three or four more.

Captain Townley, who went from us at Chametly, （機の）カム 船内に the 28th day and brought about 40 bushels of maize. He had landed to the eastward of Cape Corrientes and marched to an Indian village that is four or five leagues in the country. The Indians, seeing him coming, 始める，決める two houses on 解雇する／砲火／射撃 that were 十分な of maize and ran away; yet he and his men got in other houses as much as they could bring 負かす／撃墜する on their 支援するs, which he brought 船内に.

1686.

We 巡航するd off the cape till the first day of January 1686 and then made に向かって the valley Valderas to 追跡（する） for beef, and before night we 錨，総合司会者d in the 底（に届く） of the bay in 60 fathom water a mile from the shore. Here we stayed 追跡（する）ing till the 7th day, and Captain Swan and Captain Townley went 岸に every morning with about 240 men and marched to a small hill; where they remained with 50 or 60 men to watch the Spaniards, who appeared in 広大な／多数の／重要な companies on other hills not far distant but did never 試みる／企てる anything against our men. Here we killed and salted above two months' meat besides what we spent fresh; and might have killed as much more if we had been better 蓄える／店d with salt. Our hopes of 会合 the Philippine ship were now over; for we did all 結論する that while we were necessitated to 追跡（する） here for 準備／条項s she was passed by to the eastward, as indeed she was, as we did understand afterwards by 囚人s. So this design failed through Captain Townley's 切望 after the Lima ship which he 試みる／企てるd in Acapulco Harbour, as I have 関係のある. For though we took a little flour hard by, yet the same guide which told us of that ship would have 行為／行うd us where we might have had 蓄える／店 of beef and maize: but instead thereof we lost both our time and the 適切な時期 of 供給するing ourselves; and so we were 軍隊d to be victualling when we should have been 巡航するing off Cape Corrientes in 期待 of the Manila ship.

Hitherto we had coasted along here with two different designs; the one was to get the Manila ship, which would have 濃厚にするd us beyond 手段; and this Captain Townley was most for. Sir Thomas Cavendish 以前は took the Manila ship off Cape San Lucas in California (where we also would have waited for her, had we been 早期に enough 蓄える／店d with 準備／条項s, to have met her there) and threw much rich goods overboard. The other design, which Captain Swan and our 乗組員 were most for, was to search along the coast for rich towns and 地雷s 主として of gold and silver, which we were 保証するd were in this country, and we hoped 近づく the shore: not knowing (as we afterwards 設立する) that it was in 影響 an inland country, its wealth remote from the South Sea coast and having little or no 商業 with it, its 貿易（する） 存在 driven eastward with Europe by La Vera Cruz. Yet we had still some 期待 of 地雷s, and so 解決するd to steer on さらに先に northward; but Captain Townley, who had no other design in coming on this coast but to 会合，会う this ship, 解決するd to return again に向かって the coast of Peru.

CAPTAIN TOWNLEY LEAVES THEM WITH THE DARIEN INDIANS.

In all this voyage on the Mexican coast we had with us a captain and two or three of his men of our friendly Indians of the Isthmus of Darien; who, having 行為／行うd over some parties of our privateers, and 表明するing a 願望（する） to go along with us, were received and kindly entertained 船内に our ships; and we were pleased in having, by this means, guides ready 供給するd should we be for returning 陸路の, as several of us thought to do, rather than sail 一連の会議、交渉／完成する about. But at this time, we of Captain Swan's ship designing さらに先に to the north-west and Captain Townley going 支援する, we committed these our Indian friends to his care to carry them home. So here we parted; he to the eastward and we to the 西方の, ーするつもりであるing to search as far to the 西方の as the Spaniards were settled.

It was the 7th day of January in the morning when we sailed from this pleasant valley. The 勝利，勝つd was at north-east and the 天候 fair. At eleven o'clock the sea-勝利，勝つd （機の）カム at north-west. Before night we passed by Point Pontique; this is the west point of the bay of the valley of Valderas and is distant from Cape Corrientes 10 leagues. This point is in latitude 20 degrees 50 minutes north; it is high, 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, rocky, and barren. At a distance it appears like an island.

THE POINT AND ISLES OF PONTIQUE. OTHER ISLES OF CHAMETLY.

A league to the west of this point are two small barren islands, called the islands of Pontique. There are several high, sharp, white 激しく揺するs that 嘘（をつく） scattering about them: we passed between these rocky islands on the left and the Main on the 権利, for there is no danger. The sea-coast beyond this point runs northward for about 18 leagues, making many ragged points with small sandy bays between them. The land by the seaside is low and pretty woody; but in the country 十分な of high, sharp, barren, rugged, unpleasant hills.

The 14th day we had sight of a small white 激しく揺する, which appears very much like a ship under sail. This 激しく揺する is in latitude 21 degrees 15 minutes. It is three leagues from the Main. There is a good channel between it and the Main where you will have 12 or 14 fathom water 近づく the island; but running nearer the Main you will have 漸進的な soundings till you come in with the shore. At night we 錨，総合司会者d in six fathom water 近づく a league from the Main in good oazy ground. We caught a 広大な／多数の／重要な many cat-fish here and at several places on this coast, both before and after this.

From this island the land runs more northerly, making a fair sandy bay; but the sea 落ちるs in with such 暴力／激しさ on the shore that there is no 上陸, but very good 錨，総合司会者ing on all the coast, and 漸進的な soundings. About a league off shore you will have six fathom, and four mile off shore you will have seven fathom water. We （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 every evening; and in the mornings we sailed off with the land-勝利，勝つd, which we 設立する at north-east, and the sea-微風s at north-west.

The 20th day we 錨，総合司会者d about three miles on the east 味方する of the islands Chametly, different from those of that 指名する before について言及するd; for these are six small islands in latitude 23 degrees 11 minutes, a little to the south of the Tropic of 癌, and about 3 leagues from the Main, where a salt lake has its 出口 into the sea. These 小島s are of an indifferent 高さ: some of them have a few shrubby bushes; the 残り／休憩（する） are 明らかにする of any sort of 支持を得ようと努めるd. They are rocky 一連の会議、交渉／完成する by the sea, only one or two of them have sandy bays on the north 味方する. There is a sort of fruit growing on these islands called penguins; and it is all the fruit they have.

THE PENGUIN-FRUIT, THE YELLOW AND THE RED.

The penguin-fruit is of two sorts, the yellow and the red. The yellow penguin grows on a green 茎・取り除く, as big as a man's arm, above a foot high from the ground: the leaves of this stalk are half a foot long and an インチ 幅の広い; the 辛勝する／優位s 十分な of sharp prickles. The fruit grows at the 長，率いる of the stalk in two or three 広大な／多数の／重要な clusters, 16 or 20 in a cluster. The fruit is as big as a pullet's egg, of a 一連の会議、交渉／完成する form, and in colour yellow. It has a 厚い 肌 or rind, and the inside is 十分な of small 黒人／ボイコット seeds mixed の中で the fruit. It is sharp pleasant fruit. The red penguin is of the bigness and colour of a small 乾燥した，日照りの onion, and is in 形態／調整 much like a ninepin; for it grows not on a stalk, or 茎・取り除く, as the other, but one end on the ground, the other standing upright. Sixty or seventy grow thus together as の近くに as they can stand one by another, and all from the same root or cluster of roots. These penguins are encompassed or 盗品故買者d with long leaves about a foot and a half or two foot long, and prickly like the former; and the fruit too is much alike. They are both wholesome and never 感情を害する／違反する the stomach; but those that eat many will find a heat or tickling in their fundament. They grow so plentifully in the Bay of Campeachy that there is no passing for their high prickly leaves.

SEALS HERE.

There are some iguanas on these islands but no other sort of land-animal. The bays about the islands are いつかs visited with 調印（する）; and this was the first place where I had seen any of these animals on the north 味方する of the 赤道 in these seas. For the fish on this sandy coast 嘘（をつく） most in the lagoons or salt lakes, and mouths of rivers; but the 調印（する）s come not so much there, as I 裁判官: for this 存在 no rocky coast where fish 訴える手段／行楽地 most there seems to be but little food for the 調印（する）s, unless they will 投機・賭ける upon cat-fish.

OF THE RIVER OF CULIACAN, AND THE TRADE OF A TOWN THERE WITH CALIFORNIA.

Captain Swan went away from hence with 100 men in our canoes to the northward to 捜し出す for the river Culiacan, かもしれない the same with the river of Pastla, which some 地図／計画するs lay 負かす／撃墜する in the 州 or 地域 of Culiacan. This river lies in about 24 degrees north latitude. We were 知らせるd that there is a fair rich Spanish town seated on the east 味方する of it, with savannahs about it, 十分な of bulls and cows; and that the inhabitants of this town pass over in boats to the island California where they fish for pearl.

I have been told since by a Spaniard that said he had been at the island California, that there are 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of pearl-oysters there, and that the native Indians of California 近づく the pearl-漁業 are mortal enemies to the Spaniards. Our canoes were absent three or four days and said they had been above 30 leagues but 設立する no river; that the land by the sea was low, and all sandy bay; but such a 広大な／多数の／重要な sea that there was no 上陸. They met us in their return in the latitude 23 degrees 30 minutes coasting along shore after them に向かって Culiacan; so we returned again to the eastward. This was the farthest that I was to the north on this coast.

Six or seven leagues north-north-west from the 小島s of Chametly there is a small 狭くする 入り口 into a lake which runs about 12 leagues easterly, 平行の with the shore, making many small low mangrove islands. The mouth of this lake is in latitude about 23 degrees 30 minutes. It is called by the Spaniards Rio de Sal: for it is a salt lake. There is water enough for boats and canoes to enter, and smooth 上陸 after you are in. On the west 味方する of it there is an house and an estancia, or farm of large cattle. Our men went into the lake and landed and, coming to the house, 設立する seven or eight bushels of maize: but the cattle were driven away by the Spaniards, yet there our men took the owner of the estancia and brought him 船内に. He said that the beefs were driven a 広大な／多数の／重要な way in the country for 恐れる we should kill them. While we lay here Captain Swan went into this lake again and landed 150 men on the north-east 味方する and marched into the country: about a mile from the 上陸-place, as they were entering a 乾燥した，日照りの salina, or salt-pond, they 解雇する／砲火／射撃d at two Indians that crossed the way before them; one of them, 存在 負傷させるd in the thigh, fell 負かす／撃墜する and, 存在 診察するd, he told our men that there was an Indian town four or five leagues off, and that the way which they were going would bring them thither. While they were in discourse with the Indian they were attacked by 100 Spanish horsemen who （機の）カム with a design to 脅す them 支援する but 手配中の，お尋ね者 both 武器 and hearts to do it.

Our men passed on from hence and in their way marched through a savannah of long 乾燥した，日照りの grass. This the Spaniards 始める，決める on 解雇する／砲火／射撃, thinking to 燃やす them, but that did not 妨げる our men from marching 今後, though it did trouble them a little. They rambled for want of guides all this day and part of the next before they （機の）カム to the town the Indian spoke of. There they 設立する a company of Spaniards and Indians who made 長，率いる against them, but were driven out of the town after a short 論争. Here our 外科医 and one man more were 負傷させるd with arrows but 非，不，無 of the 残り／休憩（する） were 傷つける.

MASSACLAN.

When they （機の）カム into the town they 設立する two or three Indians 負傷させるd who told them that the 指名する of the town was Massaclan; that there were a few Spaniards living in it, and the 残り／休憩（する） were Indians; that five leagues from this town there were two rich gold-地雷s where the Spaniards of Compostella, which is the chiefest town in these parts, kept many slaves and Indians at work for gold. Here our men lay that night, and the next morning packed up all the maize that they could find and brought it on their 支援するs to the canoes and （機の）カム 船内に.

We lay here till the 2nd of February, and then Captain Swan went away with about 80 men to the river Rosario; where they landed and marched to an Indian town of the same 指名する. They 設立する it about nine mile from the sea; the way to it fair and even.

RIVER AND TOWN OF ROSARIO.

This was a 罰金 little town of about 60 or 70 houses with a fair church; and it was 主として 住むd with Indians, they took 囚人s there, which told them that the river Rosario is rich in gold and that the 地雷s are not above two leagues from the town. Captain Swan did not think it convenient to go to the 地雷s but made haste 船内に with the maize which he took there, to the 量 of about 80 or 90 bushels; and which to us, in the scarcity we were in of 準備／条項s, was at that time more 価値のある than all the gold in the world; and had he gone to the 地雷s the Spaniards would probably have destroyed the corn before his return. The 3rd of February we went with our ships also に向かって the river Rosario and 錨，総合司会者d the next day against the river's mouth, seven fathom, good oazy ground, a league from the shore. This river is in latitude 22 degrees 51 minutes north.

CAPUT CAVALLI, AND ANOTHER HILL.

When you are at an 錨，総合司会者 against this river you will see a 一連の会議、交渉／完成する hill, like a sugarloaf, a little way within land, 権利 over the river, and 耐えるing north-east by north. To the 西方の of that hill there is another pretty long hill, called by the Spaniards Caput Cavalli, or the horse's 長，率いる.

The 7th day Captain Swan （機の）カム 船内に with the maize which he got. This was but a small 量 for so many men as we were, 特に considering the place we were in, 存在 strangers, and having no 操縦するs to direct or guide us into any river; and we 存在 without all sort of 準備／条項, but what we were 軍隊d to get in this manner from the shore.

THE DIFFICULTY OF INTELLIGENCE ON THIS COAST.

And though our 操縦する-調書をとる／予約する directed us 井戸／弁護士席 enough to find the rivers, yet for want of guides to carry us to the 解決／入植地s we were 軍隊d to search two or three days before we could find a place to land: for, as I have said before, besides the seas 存在 too rough for 上陸 in many places they have neither boat, bark, nor canoe that we could ever see or hear of: and therefore as there are no such 上陸-places in these rivers as there are in the North Seas so when we were landed we did not know which way to go to any town except we accidentally met with a path. Indeed the Spaniards and Indians whom we had 船内に knew the 指名するs of several rivers and towns 近づく them, and knew the towns when they saw them; but they knew not the way to go to them from the sea.

THE RIVER OF OLETTA. RIVER OF ST. JAGO. MAXENTELBA ROCK, AND ZELISCO HILL.

The 8th day Captain Swan sent about 40 men to 捜し出す for the river Oletta which is to the eastward of the river Rosario. The next day we followed after with the ships, having the 勝利，勝つd at west-north-west and 好天. In the afternoon our canoes （機の）カム again to us for they could not find the river Oletta; therefore we designed next for the river St. Jago, to the eastward still. The 11th day in the evening we 錨，総合司会者d against the mouth of the river in seven fathom water, good soft oazy ground, and about two mile from the shore. There was a high white 激しく揺する without us called Maxentelba. This 激しく揺する at a distance appears like a ship under sail; it bore from us west-north-west distant about three leagues. The hill Zelisco bore south-east which is a very high hill in the country, with a saddle or bending on the 最高の，を越す. The river St. Jago is in latitude 22 degrees 15 minutes. It is one of the 主要な／長／主犯 rivers on this coast; there is 10 foot water on the 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業 at low-water but how much it flows here I know not. The mouth of this river is 近づく half a mile 幅の広い and very smooth entering. Within the mouth it is broader for there are three or four rivers more 会合，会う there and 問題／発行する all out together, it is brackish a 広大な／多数の／重要な way up; yet there is fresh water to be had by digging or making 井戸／弁護士席s in the sandy bay, two or three foot 深い, just at the mouth of the river.

The 11th day Captain Swan sent 70 men in four canoes into this river to 捜し出す a town; for although we had no 知能 of any yet the country appearing very 約束ing we did not question but they would find inhabitants before they returned. They spent two days in 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing up and 負かす／撃墜する the creeks and rivers; at last they （機の）カム to a large field of maize which was almost 熟した: they すぐに fell to 集会 as 急速な／放蕩な as they could and ーするつもりであるd to lade the canoes; but, seeing an Indian that was 始める，決める to watch the corn, they quitted that troublesome and tedious work, and 掴むd him and brought him 船内に, in hopes by his （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） to have some more 平易な and 促進する way of a 供給（する） by finding corn ready 削減（する） and 乾燥した，日照りのd. He 存在 診察するd said that there was a town called Santa Pecaque four leagues from the place where he was taken; and that if we designed to go thither he would 請け負う to be our guide. Captain Swan すぐに ordered his men to make ready and the same evening went away with eight canoes and 140 men, taking the Indian for their guide.

He 列／漕ぐ／騒動d about five leagues up the river and landed the next morning. The river at this place was not above ピストル-発射 wide, and the banks pretty high on each 味方する and the land plain and even. He left 23 men to guard the canoes and marched with the 残り／休憩（する） to the town. He 始める，決める out from the canoes at six o'clock in the morning and reached the town by 10. The way through which he passed was very plain, part of it woodland, part savannahs. The savannahs were 十分な of horses, bulls, and cows. The Spaniards seeing him coming ran all away; so he entered the town without the least 対立.

SANTA PECAQUE TOWN IN THE RIVER OF ST. JAGO.

This town of Santa Pecaque stands on a plain in a savannah, by the 味方する of a 支持を得ようと努めるd, with many fruit-trees about it. It is but a small town, but very 正規の／正選手, after the Spanish 方式, with a parade in the 中央. The houses 前線ing the parade had all balconies: there were two churches; one against the parade, the other at the end of the town. It is 住むd most with Spaniards. Their chiefest 占領／職業 is husbandry. There are also some 運送／保菌者s who are 雇うd by the merchants of Compostella to 貿易（する） for them to and from the 地雷s.

OF COMPOSTELLA.

Compostella is a rich town about 21 leagues from hence. It is the chiefest in all this part of the kingdom and is 報告（する）／憶測d to have 70 white families; which is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 事柄 in these parts; for it may be that such a town has not いっそう少なく than 500 families of 巡査-coloured people besides the white. The silver 地雷s are about five or six leagues from Santa Pecaque; where, as we were told, the inhabitants of Compostella had some hundreds of slaves at work. The silver here and all over the kingdom of Mexico is said to be finer and richer in 割合 than that of Potosi or Peru, though the 鉱石 be not so abundant; and the 運送／保菌者s of this town of Santa Pecaque carry the 鉱石 to Compostella where it is 精製するd. These 運送／保菌者s, or sutlers, also furnish the slaves at the 地雷s with maize, whereof here was 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty now in the town designed for that use: here was also sugar, salt, and salt-fish.

Captain Swan's only 商売／仕事 at Santa Pecaque was to get 準備／条項; therefore he ordered his men to divide themselves into two parts and by turns carry 負かす／撃墜する the 準備／条項 to the canoes; one half remaining in the town to 安全な・保証する what they had taken while the other half were going and coming. In the afternoon they caught some horses, and the next morning, 存在 the 17th day, 57 men and some horses went laden with maize to the canoes. They 設立する them and the men left to guard them in good order; though the Spaniards had given them a small 転換 and 負傷させるd one man: but our men of the canoes landed and drove them away. These that （機の）カム 負担d to the canoes left seven men more there, so that now they were 30 men to guard the canoes. At night the other returned; and the 18th day in the morning the half which stayed the day before at the town took their turn of going with every man his 重荷（を負わせる）, and 24 horses laden. Before they returned Captain Swan and his other men at the town caught a 囚人 who said that there were 近づく a thousand men of all colours, Spaniards and Indians, Negroes and Mulattos, in 武器, at a place called St. Jago, but three leagues off, the 長，指導者 town on this river; that the Spaniards were 武装した with guns and ピストルs, and the 巡査-coloured with swords and lances. Captain Swan, 恐れるing the ill consequence of separating his small company, was 解決するd the next day to march away with the whole party; and therefore he ordered his men to catch as many horses as they could, that they might carry the more 準備／条項 with them.

MANY OF THEM CUT OFF AT SANTA PECAQUE.

Accordingly, the next day 存在 the 19th day of February 1686, Captain Swan called out his men betimes to be gone; but they 辞退するd to go and said that they would not leave the town till all the 準備／条項 was in the canoes: therefore he was 軍隊d to 産する／生じる to them and 苦しむd half the company to go as before: they had now 54 horses laden, which Captain Swan ordered to be tied one to another, and the men to go in two 団体／死体s, 25 before, and as many behind; but the men would go at their own 率, every man 主要な his horse. The Spaniards, 観察するing their manner of marching, had laid an 待ち伏せ／迎撃する about a mile from the town, which they managed with such success that, 落ちるing on our 団体／死体 of men who were guarding the corn to the canoes, they killed them every one. Captain Swan, 審理，公聴会 the 報告（する）／憶測 of their guns, ordered his men, who were then in the town with him, to march out to their 援助; but some …に反対するd him, despising their enemies, till two of the Spaniards' horses that had lost their riders （機の）カム galloping into the town in a 広大な／多数の／重要な fright, both bridled and saddled, with each a pair of holsters by their 味方するs, and one had a carbine newly 発射する／解雇するd; which was an 明らかな 記念品 that our men had been engaged, and that by men better 武装した than they imagined they should 会合，会う with. Therefore Captain Swan すぐに marched out of the town and his men all followed him; and when he （機の）カム to the place where the 約束／交戦 had been he saw all his men that went out in the morning lying dead. They were stripped and so 削減（する） and mangled that he 不十分な knew one man. Captain Swan had not more men then with him than those were who lay dead before him, yet the Spaniards never （機の）カム to …に反対する him but kept at a 広大な／多数の／重要な distance; for it is probable the Spaniards had not 削減（する） off so many men of ours, but with the loss of a 広大な／多数の／重要な many of their own. So he marched 負かす／撃墜する to the canoes and （機の）カム 船内に the ship with the maize that was already in the canoes. We had about 50 men killed, and の中で the 残り／休憩（する） my ingenious friend Mr. Ringrose was one, who wrote that part of the History of the Buccaneers which relates to Captain Sharp. He was at this time cape-merchant, or supercargo of Captain Swan's ship. He had no mind to this voyage; but was necessitated to engage in it or 餓死する.

This loss discouraged us from 試みる／企てるing anything more hereabouts. Therefore Captain Swan 提案するd to go to Cape San Lucas on California to careen. He had two 推論する／理由s for this: first, that he thought he could 嘘（をつく） there 安全な・保証する from the Spaniards, and next, that if he could get a 商業 with the Indians there he might make a 発見 in the Lake of California, and by their 援助 try for some of the plate of New Mexico.

OF CALIFORNIA; WHETHER AN ISLAND OR NOT: AND OF THE NORTH-WEST AND NORTH-EAST PASSAGE.

This Lake of California (for so the sea, channel or 海峡, between that and the continent, is called) is but little known to the Spaniards, by what I could ever learn; for their charts do not agree about it. Some of them do make California an island, but give no manner of account of the tides flowing in the lake, or what depth of water there is, or of the harbours, rivers, or creeks, that 国境 on it: 反して on the west 味方する of the island に向かって the Asiatic coast their 操縦する-調書をとる／予約する gives an account of the coast from Cape San Lucas to 40 degrees north. Some of their charts newly made do make California to join to the Main. I do believe that the Spaniards do not care to have this lake discovered for 恐れる lest other European nations should get knowledge of it and by that means visit the 地雷s of New Mexico. We heard that not long before our arrival here the Indians in the 州 of New Mexico made an insurrection and destroyed most of the Spaniards there, but that some of them, 飛行機で行くing に向かって the 湾 or Lake of California, made canoes in that lake and got 安全な away; though the Indians of the lake of California seem to be at perfect 敵意 with the Spaniards. We had an old intelligent Spaniard now 船内に who said that he spoke with a friar that made his escape の中で them.

New Mexico, by 報告（する）／憶測 of several English 囚人s there and Spaniards I have met with, lies north-west from Old Mexico between 4 and 500 leagues, and the biggest part of the treasure which is 設立する in this kingdom is in that 州; but without 疑問 there are plenty of 地雷s in other parts 同様に in this part of the kingdom where we now were as in other places; and probably on the Main 国境ing on the lake of California; although not yet discovered by the Spaniards, who have 地雷s enough, and therefore, as yet, have no 推論する／理由 to discover more.

A METHOD PROPOSED FOR DISCOVERY OF THE NORTH-WEST AND NORTH-EAST PASSAGES.

In my opinion here might be very advantageous 発見s made by any that would 試みる／企てる it: for the Spaniards have more than they can 井戸／弁護士席 manage. I know yet they would 嘘（をつく） like the dog in the manger; although not able to eat themselves yet they would endeavour to 妨げる others. But the voyage thither 存在 so far I take that to be one 推論する／理由 that has 妨げるd the 発見s of these parts: yet it is possible that a man may find a nearer way hither than we （機の）カム; I mean by the north-west.

I know there have been divers 試みる／企てるs made about a north-west passage, and all 不成功の: yet I am of opinion that such a passage may be 設立する. All our countrymen that have gone to discover the north-west passage have endeavoured to pass to the 西方の, beginning their search along Davis's or Hudson's Bay. But if I was to go on this 発見 I would go first into the South Seas, bend my course from thence along by California, and that way 捜し出す a passage 支援する into the West Seas. For as others have spent the summer in first searching on this more known 味方する nearer home, and so, before they got through, the time of the year 強いるd them to give over their search, and 供給する for a long course 支援する again for 恐れる of 存在 left in the winter; on the contrary I would search first on the いっそう少なく known coast of the South Sea 味方する, and then as the year passed away I should need no 退却／保養地, for I should come さらに先に into my knowledge if I 後継するd in my 試みる／企てる, and should be without that dread and 恐れる which the others must have in passing from the known to the unknown: who, for aught I know, gave over their search just as they were on the point of 遂行するing their 願望（する）s.

I would take the same method if I was to go to discover the north-east passage. I would winter about Japan, Korea, or the north-east part of 中国; and, taking the spring and summer before me, I would make my first 裁判，公判 on the coast of Tartary, wherein if I 後継するd I should come into some known parts and have a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of time before me to reach Archangel or some other port. Captain 支持を得ようと努めるd indeed says this north-east passage is not to be 設立する for ice: but how often do we see that いつかs designs have been given over as impossible, and at another time, and by other ways, those very things have been 遂行するd; but enough of this.

ISLE OF SANTA MARIA.

The next day after that 致命的な 小競り合い 近づく Santa Pecaque Captain Swan ordered all our water to be filled and to get ready to sail. The 21st day we sailed from hence, directing our course に向かって California: we had the 勝利，勝つd at north-west and west-north-west a small 強風 with a 広大な／多数の／重要な sea out of the west. We passed by three islands called the Marias. After we passed these islands we had much 勝利，勝つd at north-north-west and north-west, and at north with 厚い 雨の 天候. We （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 till the 6th day of February, but it was against a きびきびした 勝利，勝つd and 証明するd 労働 in vain. For we were now within reach of the land 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd, which was opposite to us: but would we go to California upon the 発見 or さもなければ we should 耐える sixty or seventy leagues off from the shore; where we should 避ける the land-勝利，勝つd and have the 利益 of the true easterly 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd.

Finding therefore that we got nothing, but rather lost ground, 存在 then 21 degrees 5 minutes north, we steered away more to the eastward again for the islands Marias, and the 7th day we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 at the east end of the middle island in eight fathom water, good clean sand.

The Marias are three uninhabited islands in latitude 21 degrees 40 minutes. They are distant from Cape San Lucas on California forty leagues 耐えるing east-south-east, and they are distant from Cape Corrientes twenty leagues, 耐えるing upon the same points of the compass with Cape San Lucas. They stretch north-west and south-east about fourteen leagues. There are two or three small high 激しく揺するs 近づく them: the westermost of them is the biggest island of the three; and they are all three of an indifferent 高さ. The 国／地域 is stony and 乾燥した，日照りの; the land in most places is covered with a shrubby sort of 支持を得ようと努めるd, very 厚い and troublesome to pass through. In some places there is plenty of straight large cedars, though, speaking of the places where I have 設立する cedars, 一時期／支部 3, I forgot to について言及する this place. The Spaniards make について言及する of them in other places but I speak of those which I have seen.

A PRICKLY PLANT.

All 一連の会議、交渉／完成する by the seaside it is sandy; and there is produced a green prickly 工場／植物 whose leaves are much like the penguin-leaf, and the root like the root of a sempervive but much larger. This root 存在 baked in an oven is good to eat: and the Indians on California, as I have been 知らせるd, have 広大な／多数の／重要な part of their subsistence from these roots. We made an oven in a sandy bank and baked of these roots and I ate of them: but 非，不，無 of us 大いに cared for them. They taste 正確に／まさに like the roots of our English burdock boiled, of which I have eaten. Here are plenty of iguanas and raccoons (a large sort of ネズミ) and Indian conies, and 豊富 of large pigeons and 海がめ-doves. The sea is also pretty 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with fish, and 海がめ or tortoise, and 調印（する）. This is the second place on this coast where I did see any 調印（する）: and this place helps to 確認する what I have 観察するd, that they are seldom seen but where there is plenty of fish. Captain Swan gave the middle island the 指名する of Prince George's Island.

CAPTAIN SWAN PROPOSES A VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES.

The 8th day we ran 近づく the island and 錨，総合司会者d in five fathom, and moored 長，率いる and 厳しい and unrigged both ship and bark ーするために careen. Here Captain Swan 提案するd to go into the East Indies. Many were 井戸／弁護士席 pleased with the voyage; but some thought, such was their ignorance, that he would carry them out of the world; for about two-thirds of our men did not think there was any such way to be 設立する; but at last he 伸び（る）d their 同意s.

At our first coming hither we did eat nothing but 調印（する）; but after the first two or three days our strikers brought 船内に 海がめ every day; on which we fed all the time that we lay here, and saved our maize for our voyage. Here also we 手段d all our maize, and 設立する we had about eighty bushels. This we divided into three parts; one for the bark and two for the ship; our men were divided also, a hundred men 船内に the ship, and fifty 船内に the bark, besides three or four slaves in each.

I had been a long time sick of a dropsy, a distemper whereof, as I said before, many of our men died; so here I was laid and covered all but my 長，率いる in the hot sand: I 耐えるd it 近づく half an hour, and then was taken out and laid to sweat in a テント. I did sweat exceedingly while I was in the sand, and I do believe it did me much good for I grew 井戸／弁護士席 soon after.

VALLEY OF VALDERAS AGAIN, AND CAPE CORRIENTES.

We stayed here till the 26th day, and then, both 大型船s 存在 clean, we sailed to the valley of Valderas to water, for we could not do it here now. In the wet season indeed here is water enough, for the brooks then run 負かす／撃墜する plentifully; but now, though there was water, yet it was bad filling, it 存在 a 広大な／多数の／重要な way to fetch it from the 穴を開けるs where it 宿泊するd. The 28th day we 錨，総合司会者d in the 底（に届く） of the bay in the valley of Valderas, 権利 against the river, where we watered before; but this river was brackish now in the 乾燥した，日照りの season; and therefore we went two or three leagues nearer Cape Corrientes and 錨，総合司会者d by a small 一連の会議、交渉／完成する island, not half a mile from the shore. The island is about four leagues to the northward of the cape; and the brook where we filled our water is just within the island, upon the Main. Here our strikers struck nine or ten jew-fish; some we did eat, and the 残り／休憩（する） we salted; and the 29th day we filled thirty-two tuns of very good water.

THE REASON OF THEIR ILL SUCCESS ON THE MEXICAN COAST, AND DEPARTURE THENCE FOR THE EAST INDIES.

Having thus 供給するd ourselves we had nothing more to do but to put in 死刑執行 our ーするつもりであるd 探検隊／遠征隊 to the East Indies, in hopes of some better success there than we had met with on this little-たびたび（訪れる）d coast. We （機の）カム on it 十分な of 期待s; for besides the richness of the country and the probability of finding some sea ports 価値（がある） visiting, we 説得するd ourselves that there must needs be shipping and 貿易（する） here, and that Acapulco and La Vera Cruz were to the kingdom of Mexico what パナマ and Portobello are to that of Peru, すなわち, 市場s for carrying on a constant 商業 between the South and North Seas, as indeed they are. But 反して we 推定する／予想するd that this 商業 should be managed by sea we 設立する ourselves mistaken: that of Mexico 存在 almost wholly a land 貿易（する）, and managed more by mules than by ships: so that instead of 利益（をあげる） we met with little on this coast besides 疲労，（軍の）雑役s, hardships and losses, and so were the more easily induced to try what better fortune we might have in the East Indies. But to do 権利 to Captain Swan he had no 意向 to be as a privateer in the East Indies; but, as he has often 保証するd me with his own mouth, he 解決するd to take the first 適切な時期 of returning to England: so that he feigned a 同意／服従 with some of his men who were bent upon going to 巡航する at Manila, that he might have leisure to take some favourable 適切な時期 of quitting the privateer 貿易（する）.

CHAPTER 10.

THEIR DEPARTURE FROM CAPE CORRIENTES FOR THE LADRONE ISLANDS, AND THE EAST INDIES.

I have given an account in the last 一時期／支部 of the 決意／決議s we took of going over to the East Indies. But, having more calmly considered on the length of our voyage from hence to Guam, one of the Ladrone Islands, which is the first place that we could touch at, and there also 存在 not 確かな to find 準備／条項s, most of our men were almost daunted at the thoughts of it; for we had not sixty days' 準備／条項, at a little more than half a pint of maize a day for each man, and no other 準備／条項 except three meals of salted jew-fish; and we had a 広大な／多数の／重要な many ネズミs 船内に, which we could not 妨げる from eating part of our maize. Beside, the 広大な／多数の／重要な distance between Cape Corrientes and Guam: which is variously 始める，決める 負かす／撃墜する. The Spaniards, who have the greatest 推論する／理由 to know best, make it to be between 2300 and 2400 leagues; our 調書をとる／予約するs also reckon it 異なって, between 90 and 100 degrees, which all comes short indeed of 2000 leagues; but even that was a voyage enough to 脅す us, considering our scanty 準備／条項s. Captain Swan, to encourage his men to go with him, 説得するd them that the English 調書をとる／予約するs did give the best account of the distance; his 推論する／理由s were many, although but weak. He 勧めるd の中で the 残り／休憩（する） that Sir Thomas Cavendish and Sir Francis Drake did run it in いっそう少なく than fifty days, and that he did not question but that our ships were better sailers than those which were built in that age, and that he did not 疑問 to get there in little more than forty days: this 存在 the best time in the year for 微風s, which undoubtedly is the 推論する／理由 that the Spaniards 始める，決める out from Acapulco about this time; and that although they are sixty days in their voyage it is because they are 広大な／多数の／重要な ships 深い laden, and very 激しい sailers; besides, they wanting nothing, are in no 広大な／多数の／重要な haste in their way, but sail with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of their usual 警告を与える. And when they come 近づく the island Guam they 嘘（をつく） by in the night for a week before they make land. In prudence we also should have contrived to 嘘（をつく） by in the night when we （機の）カム 近づく land, for さもなければ we might have run 岸に, or have out-sailed the islands and lost sight of them before morning. But our bold adventurers seldom proceed with such wariness when in any 海峡s.

But of all Captain Swan's arguments that which 勝つ／広く一帯に広がるd most with them was his 約束ing them, as I have said, to 巡航する off the Manilas. So he and his men 存在 now agreed, and they encouraged with the hope of 伸び（る）, which 作品 its way through all difficulties, we 始める，決める out from Cape Corrientes March the 31st 1686. We were two ships in company, Captain Swan's ship and a bark 命令（する）d under Captain Swan by Captain Teat, and we were 150 men, 100 船内に of the ship, and 50 船内に the bark, besides slaves, as I said.

THEIR COURSE THITHER, AND ACCIDENTS BY THE WAY: WITH A TABLE OF EACH DAY'S RUN, ETC.

We had a small land-勝利，勝つd at east-north-east which carried us three or four leagues, then the sea-勝利，勝つd （機の）カム at west-north-west a fresh 強風, so we steered away south-west. By six o'clock in the evening we were about nine leagues south-west from the cape, then we met a land-勝利，勝つd which blew fresh all night; and the next morning about 10 o'clock we had the sea-微風 at north-north-east so that at noon we were thirty leagues from the cape. It blew a fresh 強風 of 勝利，勝つd which carried us off into the true 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd (of the difference of which 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd I shall speak in the 一時期／支部 of 勝利，勝つd in the 虫垂) for although the constant sea-微風 近づく the shore is at west-north-west yet the true 貿易（する） off at sea, when you are （疑いを）晴らす of the land-勝利，勝つd, is at east-north-east. At first we had it at north-north-east so it （機の）カム about northerly, and then to the east as we ran off. At 250 leagues distance from the shore we had it at east-north-east and there it stood till we （機の）カム within forty leagues of Guam. When we had eaten up our three meals of salted jew-fish in so many days time we had nothing but our small allowance of maize.

After the 31st day of March we made 広大な／多数の／重要な runs every day, having very fair （疑いを）晴らす 天候 and a fresh 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd, which we made use of with all our sails, and we made many good 観察s of the sun. At our first setting out we steered into the latitude of 13 degrees which is 近づく the latitude of Guam; then we steered west, keeping in that latitude. By that time we had sailed twenty days, our men seeing we had made such 広大な／多数の／重要な runs, and the 勝利，勝つd like to continue, repined because they were kept at such short allowance. Captain Swan endeavoured to 説得する them to have a little patience; yet nothing but an augmentation of their daily allowance would appease them. Captain Swan, though with much 不本意, gave way to a small enlargement of our ありふれたs, for now we had about ten spoonfuls of boiled maize a man, once a day, 反して before we had but eight: I do believe that this short allowance did me a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of good, though others were 弱めるd by it; for I 設立する that my strength 増加するd and my dropsy wore off. Yet I drank three times every twenty-four hours; but many of our men did not drink in nine or ten days' time and some not in twelve days; one of our men did not drink in seventeen days' time, and said he was not adry when he did drink; yet he made water every day more or いっそう少なく. One of our men in the 中央 of these hardships was 設立する 有罪の of 窃盗, and 非難するd for the same to have three blows from each man in the ship, with a two インチ and a half rope on his 明らかにする 支援する. Captain Swan began first, and struck with a good will; whose example was followed by all of us.

It was very strange that in all this voyage we did not see one fish, not so much as a 飛行機で行くing-fish, nor any sort of fowl, but at one time, when we were by my account 4975 miles west from Cape Corrientes, then we saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な number of ばか者s which we supposed （機の）カム from some 激しく揺するs not far from us, which were について言及するd in some of our sea-charts, but we did not see them.

After we had run the 1900 leagues by our reckoning which made the English account to Guam the men began to murmur against Captain Swan for 説得するing them to come this voyage; but he gave them fair words and told them that the Spanish account might probably be the truest and, seeing the 強風 was likely to continue, a short time longer would end our troubles.

As we drew nigh the island we met with some small rain, and the clouds settling in the west were an 明らかな 記念品 that we were not far from land; for in these 気候s, between or 近づく the tropics, where the 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd blows 絶えず, the clouds which 飛行機で行く swift 総計費, yet seem 近づく the 四肢 of the horizon to hang without much 動議 or alteration, where the land is 近づく. I have often taken notice of it, 特に if it is high land, for you shall then have the clouds hang about it without any 明白な 動議.

The 20th day of May, our bark 存在 about three leagues ahead of our ship, sailed over a rocky shoal on which there was but four fathom water and 豊富 of fish swimming about the 激しく揺するs. They imagined by this that the land was not far off; so they clapped on a 勝利，勝つd with the bark's 長，率いる to the north and, 存在 past the shoal, lay by for us. When we （機の）カム up with them Captain Teat （機の）カム 船内に us and 関係のある what he had seen. We were then in latitude 12 degrees 55 minutes steering west. The island Guam is laid 負かす／撃墜する in latitude 13 degrees north by the Spaniards, who are masters of it, keeping it as a baiting-place as they go to the Philippine Islands. Therefore we clapped on a 勝利，勝つd and stood to northward, 存在 somewhat troubled and doubtful whether we were 権利, because there is no shoal laid 負かす／撃墜する in the Spanish charts about the island Guam. At four o'clock, to our 広大な／多数の／重要な joy, we saw the island Guam at about eight leagues distance.

It was 井戸／弁護士席 for Captain Swan that we got sight of it before our 準備／条項 was spent, of which we had but enough for three days more; for, as I was afterwards 知らせるd, the men had contrived first to kill Captain Swan and eat him when the victuals was gone, and after him all of us who were 従犯者 in 促進するing the 請け負うing this voyage. This made Captain Swan say to me after our arrival at Guam, "Ah! Dampier, you would have made them but a poor meal;" for I was as lean as the captain was lusty and fleshy. The 勝利，勝つd was at east-north-east and the land bore at north-north-east. Therefore we stood to the northward till we brought the island to 耐える east, and then we turned to get in to an 錨，総合司会者.

The account I have given hitherto of our course from Cape Corrientes in the kingdom of Mexico (for I have について言及するd another cape of that 指名する in Peru, south of the Bay of パナマ) to Guam, one of the Ladrone Islands, has been in the 甚だしい／１２ダース. But for the satisfaction of those who may think it serviceable to the 直す／買収する，八百長をするing the longitudes of these parts, or to any other use in 地理学 or 航海, I have here subjoined a particular （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する of every day's run, which was as follows:

Now the island Guam bore north-north-east eight leagues distance. This gives 22 minutes to my latitude and takes 9 from my meridian distance. So that the island is in latitude 13:21; and the meridian distance from Corrientes 7302 miles; which, 減ずるd into degrees, makes 125 degrees 11 minutes.

The （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する consists of seven columns. The first is of the days of the month. The 2nd column 含む／封じ込めるs each day's course, or the point of the compass we ran upon. The 3rd gives the distance or length of such course in Italian or geometrical miles (at the 率 of 60 to a degree) or the 進歩 the ship makes every day; and is reckoned always from noon to noon. But because the course is not always made upon the same run in a direct line therefore the 4th and 5th columns show how many miles we ran to the south every day, and how many to the west; which last was our main run in this voyage. By the 17th of April we were got pretty 近づく into the latitude Guam, and, our course then lying along that 平行の, our northing and southing その結果 were but little （許可，名誉などを）与えるing as the ship deviated from its direct course; and such deviation is thenceforward 表明するd by north or south in the 5th column, and the ship's keeping straight on the west-rumb by 0, that is to say, no northing or southing. The 6th column shows the latitude we were in every day where R. signifies the dead reckoning by the running of the スピードを出す／記録につけるs, and Ob. shows the latitude by 観察. The 7th column shows the 勝利，勝つd and 天候.

To these I would have 追加するd an 8th column to show the variation of the needle; but as it was very small in this course so neither did we make any 観察 of it above once, after we were 始める，決める out from the Mexican coast. At our 出発 from Cape Corrientes we 設立する it to be 4 degrees 28 minutes easterly: and the 観察 we made of it afterwards, when we had gone about a third of the voyage, showed it to be so 近づく the same, to be 減少（する）ing: neither did we 観察する it at Guam, for Captain Swan, who had the 器具s in his cabin, did not seem much to regard it: yet I am inclined to think that at Guam the variation might be either 非，不，無 at all or even 増加するing to the 西方の.

To 結論する, May 20th at noon (when we begin to call it 21st) we were in latitude 12 degrees 50 minutes north by R. having run since the noon before 134 miles 直接／まっすぐに west. We continued the same course till two that afternoon, for which I 許す 10 miles more west still, and then, finding the 平行の we ran upon to be too much southerly, we clapped on a 勝利，勝つd and sailed 直接／まっすぐに north till five in the afternoon, having at that time run eight mile, and 増加するd our latitude so many minutes, making it 12 degrees 58 minutes. We then saw the island Guam 耐えるing north-north-east distant from us about eight leagues, which gives the latitude of the island 13 degrees 20 minutes. And （許可，名誉などを）与えるing to the account foregoing its longitude is 125 degrees 11 minutes west from the Cape Corrientes on the coast of Mexico, 許すing 58 or 59 Italian miles to a degree in these latitudes, at the ありふれた 率 of 60 miles to a degree of the 赤道, as before 計算するd.

OF THE DIFFERENT ACCOUNTS OF THE BREADTH OF THESE SEAS.

As a corollary from hence it will follow that, upon a supposal of the truth of the general allowance seamen make of 60 Italian miles to an equinoctial degree, that the South Sea must be of a greater breadth by 25 degrees than it's 一般的に reckoned by hydrographers, who make it only about 100, more or いっそう少なく. For since we 設立する (as I shall have occasion to say) the distance from Guam to the eastern parts of Asia to be much the same with the ありふれた reckoning it follows by way of necessary consequence from hence that the 25 degrees of longitude, or thereabouts, which are under-reckoned in the distance between America and the East Indies 西方の are over-reckoned in the breadth of Asia and Africa, the 大西洋 Sea, or the American continent, or all together; and so that tract of the terraqueous globe must be so much 縮めるd. And for a その上の 確定／確認 of the fact I shall 追加する that, as to the Ethiopic or Indian Sea, its breadth must be かなり いっそう少なく than it is 一般に calculated to be if it be true what I have heard over and over from several able seamen, whom I have conversed with in these parts, that ships sailing from the Cape of Good Hope to New Holland (as many ships bound to Java or thereabouts keep that latitude) find themselves there (and いつかs to their cost) running 座礁して when they have thought themselves to be a 広大な／多数の／重要な way off; and it is from hence かもしれない that the Dutch call that part of this coast the Land of Indraught (as if it magnetically drew ships too 急速な／放蕩な to it) and give 警告を与えるs to 避ける it: but I rather think it is the nearness of the land than any whirlpool or the like that surprises them. As to the breadth of the 大西洋 Sea I am from good 手渡すs 保証するd that it is over-reckoned by six, seven, eight, or ten degrees; for besides the concurrent accounts of several experienced men who have 確認するd the same to me, Mr. Canby 特に, who has sailed as a mate in a 広大な／多数の／重要な many voyages, from Cape Lopez on the coast of Guinea to Barbados, and is much esteemed as a very sensible man, has often told me that he 絶えず 設立する the distance to be between 60 and 62 degrees; 反して it is laid 負かす／撃墜する in 68, 69, 70, and 72 degrees in the ありふれた charts.

As to the supposition itself, which our seamen make, in the 許すing but 60 miles to a degree, I am not ignorant how much this has been canvassed of late years 特に, and that the 勝つ／広く一帯に広がるing opinion has been that about 70 or 上向きs should be 許すd. But till I can see some better grounds for the exactness of those 裁判，公判s that have been made on land by Mr. Norwood and others considering the 不平等 of the Earth's surface 同様に as the obliquity of the way; in their 許すing for which I am somewhat doubtful of their 対策. Upon the whole 事柄 I cannot but 固執する to the general sea-計算／見積り, 確認するd as to the main by daily experience, till some more 確かな 見積（る） shall be made than those hitherto 試みる／企てるd. For we find ourselves, when we sail north or south, to be brought to our ーするつもりであるd place in a time agreeable enough with what we 推定する／予想する upon the usual supposition, making all reasonable allowance, for the little 避けられない deviations east or west: and there seems no 推論する／理由 why the same 見積（る） should not serve us in crossing the meridians which we find so true in sailing under them. As to this course of ours to Guam 特に we should rather 増加する than 縮める our 見積（る） of the length of it, considering that the easterly 勝利，勝つd and 現在の 存在 so strong, and 耐えるing therefore our スピードを出す／記録につける after us, as is usual in such 事例／患者s; should we therefore, in casting up the run of the スピードを出す／記録につける, make allowance for so much space as the スピードを出す／記録につける itself drove after us (which is 一般的に three or four miles in 100 in so きびきびした a 強風 as this was) we must have reckoned more than 125 degrees; but in this voyage we made no such allowance: (though it be usual to do it) so that how much soever this computation of 地雷 越えるs the ありふれた charts, yet it is of the shortest, によれば our 実験 and 計算／見積り.

GUAM, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS.

But to proceed with our voyage: the island Guam or Guabon (as the native Indians pronounce it) is one of the Ladrone Islands, belongs to the Spaniards, who have a small fort with six guns in it, with a 知事 and 20 or 30 兵士s. They keep it for the 救済 and refreshment of their Philippine ships that touch here in their way from Acapulco to Manila, but the 勝利，勝つd will not so easily let them take this way 支援する again. The Spaniards of late have 指名するd Guam the island Maria; it is about 12 leagues long, and four 幅の広い, lying north and south. It is pretty high 支持する／優勝者 land.

The 21st day of May 1686 at 11 o'clock in the evening we 錨，総合司会者d 近づく the middle of the island Guam, on the west 味方する a mile from the shore. At a distance it appears flat and even, but coming 近づく it you will find it stands 棚上げにするing, and the east 味方する, which is much the highest, is 盗品故買者d with 法外な 激しく揺するs that …に反対する the 暴力／激しさ of the sea which continually 激怒（する）s against it, 存在 driven with the constant 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd, and on that 味方する there is no 錨，総合司会者ing. The west 味方する is pretty low, and 十分な of small sandy bays, divided with as many rocky points. The 国／地域 of the island is 赤みを帯びた, 乾燥した，日照りの and indifferent 実りの多い／有益な. The fruits are 主として rice, pineapples, watermelons, musk-melons, oranges and limes, coconuts, and a sort of fruit called by us bread-fruit.

THE COCONUT-TREE, FRUIT, ETC.

The coconut-trees grow by the sea on the western 味方する in 広大な／多数の／重要な groves, three or four miles in length and a mile or two 幅の広い. This tree is in 形態／調整 like the cabbage-tree, and at a distance they are not to be known each from other, only the coconut-tree is fuller of 支店s; but the cabbage-tree 一般に is much higher, though the coconut-trees in some places are very high.

The nut or fruit grows at the 長，率いる of the tree の中で the 支店s and in clusters, 10 or 12 in a cluster. The 支店 to which they grow is about the bigness of a man's arm and as long, running small に向かって the end. It is of a yellow colour, 十分な of knots, and very 堅い. The nut is 一般に bigger than a man's 長，率いる. The outer rind is 近づく two インチs 厚い before you come to the 爆撃する; the 爆撃する itself is 黒人／ボイコット, 厚い, and very hard. The kernel in some nuts is 近づく an インチ 厚い, sticking to the inside of the 爆撃する （疑いを）晴らす 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, leaving a hollow in the middle of it which 含む／封じ込めるs about a pint, more or いっそう少なく, によれば the bigness of the nut, for some are much bigger than others.

This cavity is 十分な of 甘い, delicate, wholesome and refreshing water. While the nut is growing all the inside is 十分な of this water, without any kernel at all; but as the nut grows に向かって its 成熟 the kernel begins to gather and settle 一連の会議、交渉／完成する on the inside of the 爆撃する and is soft like cream; and as the nut ripens it 増加するs in 実体 and becomes hard. The 熟した kernel is 甘い enough but very hard to digest, therefore seldom eaten, unless by strangers, who know not the 影響s of it; but while it is young and soft like pap some men will eat it, 捨てるing it out with a spoon after they have drunk the water that was within it. I like the water best when the nut is almost 熟した for it is then sweetest and briskest.

When these nuts are 熟した and gathered the outside rind becomes of a brown rusty colour so that one would think that they were dead and 乾燥した，日照りの; yet they will sprout out like onions after they have been hanging in the sun three or four months or thrown about in a house or ship, and if 工場／植物d afterward in the earth they will grow up to a tree. Before they thus sprout out there is a small spongy 一連の会議、交渉／完成する knob grows in the inside, which we call an apple. This at first is no bigger than the 最高の，を越す of one's finger, but 増加するs daily, sucking up the water till it is grown so big as to fill up the cavity of the coconut, and then it begins to sprout 前へ／外へ. By this time the nut that was hard begins to grow oily and soft, その為に giving passage to the sprout that springs from the apple, which nature has so contrived that it points to the 穴を開ける in the 爆撃する (of which there are three, till it grows 熟した, just where it's fastened by its stalk to the tree; but one of these 穴を開けるs remains open, even when it is 熟した) through which it creeps and spreads 前へ／外へ its 支店s. You may let these teeming nuts sprout out a foot and a half or two foot high before you 工場／植物 them, for they will grow a 広大な／多数の／重要な while like an onion out of their own 実体.

THE TODDY, OR ARAK THAT DISTILS FROM IT; WITH OTHER USES THAT ARE MADE OF IT.

Beside the アルコール飲料 or water in the fruit there is also a sort of ワイン drawn from the tree called toddy, which looks like whey. It is 甘い and very pleasant, but it is to be drunk within 24 hours after it is drawn, for afterwards it grows sour. Those that have a 広大な／多数の／重要な many trees draw a spirit from the sour ワイン called arak. Arak is distilled also from rice and other things in the East Indies; but 非，不，無 is so much esteemed for making punch as this sort, made of toddy, or the 次第に損なう of the coconut tree, for it makes most delicate punch; but it must have a dash of Brandy to hearten it because this arak is not strong enough to make good punch of itself. This sort of アルコール飲料 is 主として used about Goa; and therefore it has the 指名する of Goa arak. The way of 製図／抽選 the toddy from the tree is by cutting the 最高の，を越す of a 支店 that would 耐える nuts but before it has any fruit; and from thence the アルコール飲料 which was to 料金d its fruit distils into the 穴を開ける of a calabash that is hung upon it.

This 支店 continues running almost as long as the fruit would have been growing, and then it 乾燥した，日照りのs away. The tree has usually three 実りの多い／有益な 支店s which, if they be all tapped thus, then the tree 耐えるs no fruit that year; but if one or two only be tapped the other will 耐える fruit all the while. The アルコール飲料 which is thus drawn is emptied out of the calabash duly morning and evening so long as it continues running, and is sold every morning and evening in most towns in the East Indies, and 広大な／多数の／重要な 伸び（る） is produced from it even this way; but those that distil it and make arak 得る the greatest 利益（をあげる）. There is also 広大な／多数の／重要な 利益（をあげる） made of the fruit, both of the nut and the 爆撃する.

The kernel is much used in making broth. When the nut is 乾燥した，日照りの they take off the husk and, giving two good blows on the middle of the nut, it breaks in two equal parts, letting the water 落ちる on the ground; then with a small アイロンをかける rasp made for the 目的 the kernel or nut is rasped out clean, which, 存在 put into a little fresh water, makes it become white as milk. In this 乳の water they boil a fowl, or any other sort of flesh, and it makes very savoury broth. English seamen put this water into boiled rice, which they eat instead of rice-milk, carrying nuts purposely to sea with them. This they learnt from the natives.

But the greatest use of the kernel is to make oil, both for 燃やすing and for frying. The way to make the oil is to grate or rasp the kernel, and 法外な it in fresh water; then boil it, and scum off the oil at 最高の，を越す as it rises: but the nuts that make the oil せねばならない be a long time gathered so as that the kernel may be turning soft and oily.

The 爆撃する of this nut is used in the East Indies for cups, dishes, ladles, spoons, and in a manner for all eating and drinking 大型船s. 井戸／弁護士席-形態／調整d nuts are often brought home to Europe and much esteemed.

COIR CABLES.

The husk of the 爆撃する is of 広大な／多数の／重要な use to make cables; for the 乾燥した，日照りの husk is 十分な of small strings and threads which, 存在 beaten, become soft, and the other 実体 which was mixed の中で it 落ちるs away like sawdust, leaving only the strings. These are afterwards spun into long yarns, and 新たな展開d up into balls for convenience: and many of these rope-yarns joined together make good cables. This manufactory is 主として used at the Maldive Islands, and the threads sent in balls into all places that 貿易（する） thither purposely for to make cables. I made a cable at Achin with some of it. These are called coir cables; they will last very 井戸／弁護士席. But there is another sort of coir cables (as they are called) that are 黒人／ボイコット, and more strong and 継続している; and are made of strings that grow like horse-hair at the 長，率いるs of 確かな trees almost like the coconut-tree. This sort comes most from the island Timor. In the South Seas the Spaniards do make oakum to caulk their ships with the husk of the coconut, which is more serviceable than that made of hemp, and they say it will never rot. I have been told by Captain Knox, who wrote the relation of Ceylon, that in some places of India they make a sort of coarse cloth of the husk of the coconut which is used for sails. I myself have seen a sort of coarse sail-cloth made of such a 肉親，親類d of 実体 but whether the same or no I know not.

I have been the longer on this 支配する to give the reader a particular account of the use and 利益（をあげる） of a vegetable which is かもしれない of all others the most 一般に serviceable to the conveniences 同様に as the necessities of human life. Yet this tree that is of such 広大な／多数の／重要な use, and esteemed so much in the East Indies, is 不十分な regarded in the West Indies, for want of the knowledge of the 利益 which it may produce. And it is partly for the sake of my countrymen in our American 農園s that I have spoken so 大部分は of it. For the hot 気候s there are a very proper 国／地域 for it: and indeed it is so hardy, both in the raising it and when grown, that it will 栄える 同様に in 乾燥した，日照りの sandy ground as in rich land. I have 設立する them growing very 井戸／弁護士席 in low sandy islands (on the west of Sumatra) that are over-flowed with the sea every spring-tide; and though the nuts there are not very big yet this is no loss for the kernel is 厚い and 甘い; and the milk, or water in the inside, is more pleasant and 甘い than of the nuts that grow in rich ground, which are 一般的に large indeed, but not very 甘い. These at Guam grow in 乾燥した，日照りの ground, are of a middle size, and I think the sweetest that I did ever taste. Thus much for the coconut.

THE LIME, OR CRAB-LEMON.

The lime is a sort of bastard or crab-lemon. The tree or bush that 耐えるs it is prickly like a thorn, growing 十分な of small boughs. In Jamaica and other places they make of the lime-bush 盗品故買者s about gardens, or any other inclosure, by 工場／植物ing the seeds の近くに together, which, growing up 厚い, spread abroad and make a very good hedge. The fruit is like a lemon but smaller; the rind thin, and the enclosed 実体 十分な of juice. The juice is very tart yet of a pleasant taste if sweetened with sugar. It is 主として used for making punch, both in the East and West Indies, 同様に 岸に as at sea, and much of it is for that 目的 年一回の brought home to England from our West India 農園s. It is also used for a particular 肉親，親類d of sauce which is called pepper-sauce and is made of cod-pepper, 一般的に called guinea-pepper, boiled in water and then pickled with salt and mixed with lime-juice to 保存する it. Limes grow plentiful in the East and West Indies within the tropics.

THE BREAD-FRUIT.

The bread-fruit (as we call it) grows on a large tree, as big and high as our largest apple-trees. It has a spreading 長，率いる 十分な of 支店s, and dark leaves. The fruit grows on the boughs like apples: it is as big as a penny loaf when wheat is at five shillings the bushel. It is of a 一連の会議、交渉／完成する 形態／調整 and has a 厚い 堅い rind. When the fruit is 熟した it is yellow and soft; and the taste is 甘い and pleasant. The natives of this island use it for bread: they gather it when 十分な grown while it is green and hard; then they bake it in an oven, which scorches the rind and makes it 黒人／ボイコット: but they 捨てる off the outside 黒人／ボイコット crust and there remains a tender thin crust, and the inside is soft, tender, and white, like the crumb of a penny loaf. There is neither seed nor 石／投石する in the inside, but all is of a pure 実体 like bread: it must be eaten new for if it is kept above 24 hours it becomes 乾燥した，日照りの and eats 厳しい and choky; but it is very pleasant before it is too stale. This fruit lasts in season eight months in the year during which time the natives eat no other sort of food of bread 肉親，親類d. I did never see of this fruit anywhere but here. The natives told us that there is plenty of this fruit growing on the 残り／休憩（する） of the Ladrone Islands; and I did never hear of any of it anywhere else.

They have here some rice also but, the island 存在 of a 乾燥した，日照りの 国／地域 and therefore not very proper for it, they do not （種を）蒔く very much. Fish is 不十分な about this island; yet on the shoal that our bark （機の）カム over there was 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty and the natives 一般的に go thither to fish.

THE NATIVE INDIANS OF GUAM.

The natives of this island are strong-団体／死体d, large-四肢d, and 井戸／弁護士席-形態／調整d. They are 巡査-coloured like other Indians: their hair is 黒人／ボイコット and long, their 注目する，もくろむs meanly 割合d; they have pretty high noses; their lips are pretty 十分な and their teeth indifferent white. They are long-visaged and 厳しい of countenance; yet we 設立する them to be affable and courteous. They are many of them troubled with a 肉親，親類d of leprosy. This distemper is very ありふれた at Mindanao: therefore I shall speak more of it in my next 一時期／支部. They of Guam are さもなければ very healthy, 特に in the 乾燥した，日照りの season: but in the wet season, which comes in in June and 持つ／拘留するs till October, the 空気／公表する is more 厚い and unwholesome; which occasions fevers: but the rains are not violent nor 継続している. For the island lies so far westerly from the Philippine Islands or any other land that the westerly 勝利，勝つd do seldom blow so far; and when they do they do not last long: but the easterly 勝利，勝つd do 絶えず blow here, which are 乾燥した，日照りの and healthy; and this island is 設立する to be very healthful, as we were 知らせるd while we lay by it.

THEIR PROAS, A REMARKABLE SORT OF BOATS: AND OF THOSE USED IN THE EAST INDIES.

The natives are very ingenious beyond any people in making boats, or proas, as they are called in the East Indies, and therein they take 広大な／多数の／重要な delight. These are built sharp at both ends; the 底（に届く） is of one piece, made like the 底（に届く） of a little canoe, very neatly dug, and left of a good 実体. This 底（に届く） part is instead of a keel. It is about 26 or 28 foot long; the under-part of this keel is made 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, but inclining to a wedge, and smooth; and the upper-part is almost flat, having a very gentle hollow, and is about a foot 幅の広い: from hence both 味方するs of the boat are carried up to about five foot high with 狭くする plank, not above four or five インチs 幅の広い, and each end of the boat turns up 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, very prettily. But, what is very singular, one 味方する of the boat is made perpendicular, like a 塀で囲む, while the other 味方する is 一連の会議、交渉／完成するing, made as other 大型船s are, with a pretty 十分な belly. Just in the middle it is about four or five foot 幅の広い aloft, or more, によれば the length of the boat. The mast stands 正確に／まさに in the middle, with a long yard that peeps up and 負かす／撃墜する like a mizzen-yard. One end of it reaches 負かす／撃墜する to the end or 長，率いる of the boat where it is placed in a notch that is made there purposely to receive it and keep it 急速な／放蕩な. The other end hangs over the 厳しい: to this yard the sail is fastened. At the foot of the sail there is another small yard to keep the sail out square and to roll up the sail on when it blows hard; for it serves instead of a 暗礁 to （問題を）取り上げる the sail to what degree they please によれば the strength of the 勝利，勝つd. Along the belly-味方する of the boat, 平行の with it, at about six or seven foot distance, lies another small boat, or canoe, 存在 a スピードを出す／記録につける of very light 支持を得ようと努めるd, almost as long as the 広大な／多数の／重要な boat but not so wide, 存在 not above a foot and a half wide at the upper part, and very sharp like a wedge at each end. And there are two bamboos of about eight or 10 foot long and as big as one's 脚 placed over the 広大な／多数の／重要な boat's 味方する, one 近づく each end of it and reaching about six or seven foot from the 味方する of the boat: by the help of which, the little boat is made 会社／堅い and contiguous to the other. These are 一般に called by the Dutch, and by the English from them, outlayers. The use of them is to keep the 広大な／多数の／重要な boat upright from oversetting; because the 勝利，勝つd here 存在 in a manner 絶えず east (or if it were at west it would be the same thing) and the 範囲 of these islands, where their 商売／仕事 lies to and fro, 存在 mostly north and south, they turn the flat 味方する of the boat against the 勝利，勝つd, upon which they sail, and the belly-味方する, その結果 with its little boat, is upon the 物陰／風下: and the 大型船 having a 長，率いる at each end so as to sail with either of them 真っ先の (indifferently) they need not tack or go about, as all our 大型船s do, but each end of the boat serves either for 長，率いる or 厳しい as they please. When they ply to windward and are minded to go about he that steers 耐えるs away a little from the 勝利，勝つd, by which means the 厳しい comes to the 勝利，勝つd; which is now become the 長，率いる, only by 転換ing the end of the yard. This boat is steered with a 幅の広い paddle instead of a rudder. I have been the more particular in 述べるing these boats because I do believe they sail the best of any boats in the world. I did here for my own satisfaction try the swiftness of one of them; sailing by our スピードを出す／記録につける we had 12 knots on our reel, and she run it all out before the half minute-glass was half out; which, if it had been no more, is after the 率 of 12 mile an hour; but I do believe she would have run 24 mile an hour. It was very pleasant to see the little boat running along so swift by the other's 味方する.

The native Indians are no いっそう少なく dextrous in managing than in building these boats. By 報告（する）／憶測 they will go from hence to another of the Ladrone Islands about 30 leagues off, and there do their 商売／仕事 and return again in いっそう少なく than 12 hours. I was told that one of these boats was sent 表明する to Manila, which is above 400 leagues, and 成し遂げるd the voyage in four days' time. There are of these proas or boats used in many places of the East Indies but with a belly and a little boat on each 味方する. Only at Mindanao I saw one like these with the belly and a little boat only on one 味方する and the other flat, but not so neatly built.

THE STATE OF GUAM: AND THE PROVISIONS WITH WHICH THEY WERE FURNISHED THERE.

The Indians of Guam have neat little houses, very handsomely thatched with palmetto-thatch. They 住む together in villages built by the sea on the west 味方する, and have Spanish priests to 教える them in the Christian 宗教.

The Spaniards have a small fort on the west 味方する 近づく the south end, with six guns in it. There is a 知事, and 20 or 30 Spanish 兵士s. There are no more Spaniards on this island beside two or three priests. Not long before we arrived here the natives rose on the Spaniards to destroy them and did kill many: but the 知事 with his 兵士s at length 勝つ／広く一帯に広がるd and drove them out of the fort: so when they 設立する themselves disappointed of their 意図 they destroyed the 農園s and 在庫／株 and then went away to other islands: there were then three or 400 Indians on this island; but now there are not above 100; for all that were in this 共謀 went away. As for these who yet remain, if they were not 現実に 関心d in that broil yet their hearts also are bent against the Spaniards: for they 申し込む／申し出d to carry us to the fort and 補助装置 us in the conquest of the island; but Captain Swan was not for （性的に）いたずらするing the Spaniards here.

Before we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 here one of the priests （機の）カム 船内に in the night with three Indians. They first あられ／賞賛するd us to know from whence we （機の）カム and what we were: to whom answer was made in Spanish that we were Spaniards and that we （機の）カム from Acapulco. It 存在 dark they could not see the make of our ship nor very 井戸／弁護士席 discern what we were: therefore we （機の）カム 船内に but, perceiving the mistake they were in in taking us for a Spanish ship they endeavoured to get from us again, but we held their boat 急速な／放蕩な and made them come in. Captain Swan received the priest with much civility and, 行為／行うing him into the 広大な／多数の／重要な cabin, 宣言するd that the 推論する／理由 of our coming to this island was want of 準備／条項, and that he （機の）カム not in any 敵意を持った manner but as a friend to 購入（する） with his money what he 手配中の，お尋ね者: and therefore 願望（する）d the priest to 令状 a letter to the 知事 to 知らせる him what we were and on what account we （機の）カム. For, having him now 船内に, the captain was willing to 拘留する him as an 人質 till we had 準備／条項. The padre told Captain Swan that 準備／条項 was now 不十分な on the island but he would engage that the 知事 would do his 最大の to furnish us.

In the morning the Indians in whose boat or proa the friar （機の）カム 船内に were sent to the 知事 with two letters; one from the friar, and another very 強いるing one from Captain Swan, and a 現在の of four yards of scarlet cloth and a piece of 幅の広い silver and gold lace. The 知事 lives 近づく the south end of the island on the west 味方する; which was about five leagues from the place where we were; therefore we did not 推定する／予想する an answer till the evening, not knowing then how nimble they were. Therefore when the Indian canoe was 派遣（する）d away to the 知事 we hoisted out two of our canoes, and sent one a-fishing and the other 岸に for coconuts. Our fishing canoe got nothing; but the men that went 岸に for coconuts （機の）カム off laden.

About 11 o'clock that same morning the 知事 of the island sent a letter to Captain Swan, complimenting him for his 現在の and 約束ing to support us with as much 準備／条項 as he could かもしれない spare; and as a 記念品 of his 感謝 he sent a 現在の of six hogs, of a small sort, most excellent meat, the best I think, that ever I ate: they are fed with coconuts and their flesh is as hard as brisket-beef. They were doubtless of that 産む／飼育する in America which （機の）カム 初めは from Spain. He sent also 12 musk-melons, larger than ours in England, and as many watermelons, both sorts here 存在 a very excellent fruit; and sent an order to the Indians that lived in a village not far from our ship to bake every day as much of the bread-fruit as we did 願望（する）, and to 補助装置 us in getting as many 乾燥した，日照りの coconuts as we would have; which they accordingly did, and brought off the bread-fruit every day hot, as much as we could eat. After this the 知事 sent every day a canoe or two with hogs and fruit and 願望（する）d for the same 砕く, 発射, and 武器; which were sent によれば his request. We had a delicate large English dog which the 知事 did 願望（する） and had it given him very 自由に by the captain, though much against the 穀物 of many of his men, who had a 広大な／多数の／重要な value for that dog. Captain Swan endeavoured to get this 知事's letter of 推薦 to some merchants at Manila, for he had then a design to go to Fort St. George, and from thence ーするつもりであるd to 貿易（する） to Manila: but this his design was 隠すd from the company. While we lay here the Acapulco ship arrived in sight of the island but did not come in the sight of us; for the 知事 sent an Indian proa with advice of our 存在 here. Therefore she stood off to the southward of the island and, coming foul of the same shoal that our bark had run over before, was in 広大な／多数の／重要な danger of 存在 lost there, for she struck off her rudder and with much ado got （疑いを）晴らす; but not till after three days' 労働. For though the shoal be so 近づく the island and the Indians go off and fish there every day yet the master of the Acapulco ship, who should (one would think) know these parts, was utterly ignorant of it. This their striking on the shoal we heard afterward when we were on the coast of Manila; but these Indians of Guam did speak of her 存在 in sight of the island while we lay there, which put our men in a 広大な／多数の／重要な heat to go out after her but Captain Swan 説得するd them out of that humour, for he was now wholly averse to any 敵意を持った 活動／戦闘.

The 30th day of May the 知事 sent his last 現在の which was some hogs, a jar of pickled mangoes, a jar of excellent pickled fish, and a jar of 罰金 rusk, or bread of 罰金 wheat-flour, baked like 薄焼きパン／素焼陶器 but not so hard. He sent besides six or seven packs of rice, 願望（する）ing to be excused from sending any more 準備／条項 to us, 説 he had no more on the island that he could spare. He sent word also that the west 季節風 was at 手渡す, that therefore it behoved us to be jogging from hence unless we were 解決するd to return 支援する to America again. Captain Swan returned him thanks for his 親切 and advice and took his leave; and the same day sent the friar 岸に that was 掴むd on at our first arrival, and gave him a large 厚かましさ／高級将校連 clock, an astrolabe, and a large telescope; for which 現在の the friar sent us 船内に six hogs and a roasting-pig, three or four bushels of potatoes, and 50 続けざまに猛撃する of Manila タバコ. Then we 用意が出来ている to be gone, 存在 pretty 井戸／弁護士席 furnished with 準備／条項 to carry us to Mindanao, where we designed next to touch. We took 船内に us as many coconuts as we could 井戸／弁護士席 stow, and we had a good 在庫／株 of rice and about 50 hogs in salt.

CHAPTER 11.

THEY RESOLVE TO GO TO MINDANAO.

While we lay at Guam we took up a 決意／決議 of going to Mindanao, one of the Philippine Islands, 存在 told by the friar and others that it was exceedingly 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with 準備／条項s; that the natives were Mohammedans, and that they had 以前は a 商業 with the Spaniards, but that now they were at wars with them. This island was therefore thought to be a convenient place for us to go; for besides that it was in our way to the East Indies, which we had 解決するd to visit; and that the westerly 季節風 was at 手渡す, which would 強いる us to 避難所 somewhere in a short time, and that we could not 推定する／予想する good harbours in a better place than in so large an island as Mindanao: besides all this, I say, the inhabitants of Mindanao 存在 then, as we were told (though 誤って) at wars with the Spaniards, our men, who it should seem were very squeamish of plundering without licence, derived hopes from thence of getting a （売買）手数料，委託（する）／委員会／権限 there from the prince of the island to plunder the Spanish ships about Manila, and so to make Mindanao their ありふれた rendezvous. And if Captain Swan was minded to go to an English port yet his men, who thought he ーするつもりであるd to leave them, hoped to get 大型船s and 操縦するs at Mindanao fit for their turn, to 巡航する on the coast of Manila. As for Captain Swan he was willing enough to go thither as best 控訴ing his own design; and therefore this voyage was 結論するd on by general 同意.

THEIR DEPARTURE FROM GUAM.

Accordingly June 2nd 1686 we left Guam bound for Mindanao. We had 好天 and a pretty smart 強風 of 勝利，勝つd at east for 3 or 4 days, and then it 転換d to the south-west 存在 雨の, but it soon （機の）カム about again to the east and blew a gentle 強風; yet it often shuffled about to the south-east. For though in the East Indies the 勝利，勝つd 転換 in April, yet we 設立する this to be the 転換ing season for the 勝利，勝つd here; the other 転換ing season 存在 in October, sooner or later, all over India. As to our course from Guam to the Philippine Islands, we 設立する it (as I intimated before) agreeable enough with the account of our ありふれた charts.

OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.

The 21st day of June we arrived at the island St. John, which is one of the Philippine Islands. The Philippines are a 広大な／多数の／重要な company of large islands, taking up about 13 degrees of latitude in length, reaching 近づく upon from 3 degrees of north latitude to the 19th degree, and in breadth about 6 degrees of longitude. They derive this 指名する from Phillip II, King of Spain; and even now do they most of them belong to that 栄冠を与える.

THE ISLE LUCONIA, AND ITS CHIEF TOWN AND PORT, MANILO, MANILA, OR MANILBO.

The chiefest island in this 範囲 is Luconia, which lies on the north of them all. At this island Magellan died on the voyage that he was making 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the world. For after he had passed those 海峡s between the south end of America and Tierra del Fuego which now 耐える his 指名する, and had 範囲d 負かす／撃墜する in the South Seas on the 支援する of America; from thence stretching over to the East Indies, he fell in with the Ladrone Islands and from thence, steering east still, he fell in with these Philippine Islands and 錨，総合司会者d at Luconia; where he warred with the native Indians to bring them in obedience to his master the king of Spain, and was by them killed with a 毒（薬）d arrow. It is now wholly under the Spaniards who have several towns there. The 長，指導者 is Manila, which is a large sea-port town 近づく the south-east end, opposite to the island Mindoro. It is a place of 広大な／多数の／重要な strength and 貿易（する）: the two 広大な／多数の／重要な Acapulco ships before について言及するd fetching from hence all sorts of East India 商品／必需品s which are brought hither by foreigners, 特に by the Chinese and the Portuguese. いつかs the English merchants of Fort St. George send their ships hither as it were by stealth under the 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金 of Portuguese 操縦するs and 水夫s: for as yet we cannot get the Spaniards there to a 商業 with us or the Dutch, although they have but few ships of their own. This seems to arise from a jealousy or 恐れる of discovering the riches of these islands, for most if not all the Philippine Islands are rich in gold: and the Spaniards have no place of much strength in all these islands that I could ever hear of besides Manila itself. Yet they have villages and towns on several of the islands, and padres or priests to 教える the native Indians from whom they get their gold.

OF THE RICH TRADE WE MIGHT ESTABLISH WITH THESE ISLANDS.

The Spanish inhabitants of the smaller islands 特に would willingly 貿易（する） with us if the 政府 was not so 厳しい against it: for they have no goods but what are brought from Manila at an 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の dear 率. I am of the opinion that if any of our nations will 捜し出す a 貿易（する） with them they would not lose their 労働; for the Spaniards can and will 密輸する (as our seamen call 貿易（する）ing by stealth) 同様に as any nation that I know; and our Jamaicans are to their 利益（をあげる） sensible enough of it. And I have been 知らせるd that Captain Goodlud of London, in a voyage which he made from Mindanao to 中国, touched at some of these islands and was civilly 扱う／治療するd by the Spaniards who bought some of his 商品／必需品s, giving him a very good price for the same.

There are about 12 or 14 more large islands lying to the southward of Luconia; most of which, as I said before, are 住むd by the Spaniards. Besides these there are an infinite number of small islands of no account, and even the 広大な／多数の／重要な islands, many of them, are without 指名するs; or at least so variously 始める，決める 負かす／撃墜する that I find the same islands 指名するd by divers 指名するs.

The island St. John and Mindanao are the southermost of all these islands and are the only islands in all this 範囲 that are not 支配する to the Spaniards.

ST. JOHN'S ISLAND.

St. John's Island is on the east 味方する of the Mindanao and distant from it 3 or 4 leagues. It is in latitude about 7 or 8 north. This island is in length about 38 leagues, stretching north-north-west and south-south-east, and it is in breadth about 24 leagues in the middle of the island. The northermost end is broader, and the southermost is narrower: this island is of a good 高さ and is 十分な of many small hills. The land at the south-east end (where I was 岸に) is of a 黒人／ボイコット fat mould; and the whole island seems to partake of the same fatness by the 広大な number of large trees that it produces; for it looks all over like one 広大な／多数の／重要な grove.

As we were passing by the south-east end we saw a canoe of the natives under the shore; therefore one of our canoes went after to have spoken with her; but she ran away from us, seeing themselves chased, put their canoe 岸に, leaving her, fled into the 支持を得ようと努めるd; nor would be allured to come to us, although we did what we could to entice them; besides these men we saw no more here nor 調印する of any inhabitants at this end.

THEY ARRIVE AT MINDANAO.

When we （機の）カム 船内に our ship again we steered away for the island Mindanao, which was now fair in sight of us: it 存在 about 10 leagues distant from this part of St. John's. The 22nd day we （機の）カム within a league of the east 味方する of the island Mindanao and having the 勝利，勝つd at south-east we steered toward the north end, keeping on the east 味方する till we （機の）カム into the latitude of 7 degrees 40 minutes, and there we 錨，総合司会者d in a small bay, about a mile from the shore in 10 fathom water, rocky foul ground.

THE ISLAND DESCRIBED.

Some of our 調書をとる／予約するs gave us an account that Mindanao City and 小島 lies in 7 degrees 40 minutes. We guessed that the middle of the island might 嘘（をつく） in this latitude but we were at a 広大な／多数の／重要な loss where to find the city, whether on the east or west 味方する. Indeed, had it been a small island lying open in the eastern 勝利，勝つd we might probably have searched first on the west 味方する; for 一般的に the islands within the tropics, or within the bounds of the 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd, have their harbours on the west 味方する, as best 避難所d; but the island Mindanao 存在 guarded on the east 味方する by St. John's Island we might as reasonably 推定する／予想する to find the harbour and city on this 味方する as anywhere else: but, coming into the latitude in which we 裁判官d the city might be, 設立する no canoes or people that might give us any umbrage of a city or place of 貿易（する） 近づく at 手渡す, though we coasted within a league of the shore.

ITS FERTILITY.

The island Mindanao is the biggest of all the Philippine Islands except Luconia. It is about 60 leagues long and 40 or 50 幅の広い. The south end is in about 5 degrees north and the north-west end reaches almost to 8 degrees north. It is a very 山地の island, 十分な of hills and valleys. The mould in general is 深い and 黒人／ボイコット and 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の fat and 実りの多い／有益な. The 味方するs of the hills are stony yet 生産力のある enough of very large tall trees. In the heart of the country there are some mountains that 産する／生じる good gold. The valleys are 井戸／弁護士席 moistened with pleasant brooks and small rivers of delicate water; and have trees of divers sorts 繁栄するing and green all the year. The trees in general are very large, and most of them are of 肉親，親類d unknown to us.

THE LIBBY-TREES, AND THE SAGO MADE OF THEM.

There is one sort which deserves particular notice; called by the natives libby-trees. These grow wild in 広大な／多数の／重要な groves of 5 or 6 miles long by the 味方するs of the rivers. Of these trees sago is made, which the poor country people eat instead of bread 3 or 4 months in the year. This tree for its 団体／死体 and 形態／調整 is much like the palmetto-tree or the cabbage-tree, but not so tall as the latter. The bark and 支持を得ようと努めるd is hard and thin like a 爆撃する, and 十分な of white pith like the pith of an 年上の. This tree they 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する and 分裂（する） it in the middle and 捨てる out all the pith; which they （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 lustily with a 木造の pestle in a 広大な／多数の／重要な 迫撃砲 or 気圧の谷, and then put it into a cloth or strainer held over a 気圧の谷; and, 注ぐing water in の中で the pith, they 動かす it about in the cloth: so the water carries all the 実体 of the pith through the cloth 負かす／撃墜する into the 気圧の谷, leaving nothing in the cloth but a light sort of husk which they throw away; but that which 落ちるs into the 気圧の谷 settles in a short time to the 底（に届く） like mud; and then they draw off the water, and （問題を）取り上げる the muddy 実体, wherewith they make cakes; which 存在 baked 証明するs very good bread.

The Mindanao people live 3 or 4 months of the year on this food for their bread-肉親，親類d. The native Indians of Ternate and Tidore and all the Spice Islands have plenty of these trees, and use them for food in the same manner; as I have been 知らせるd by Mr. Caril Rofy who is now 指揮官 of one of the king's ships. He was one of our company at this time; and, 存在 left with Captain Swan at Mindanao, went afterwards to Ternate and lived there の中で the Dutch a year or two. The sago which is 輸送（する）d into other parts of the East Indies is 乾燥した，日照りのd in small pieces like little seeds or comfits and 一般的に eaten with milk of almonds by those that are troubled with the flux; for it is a 広大な／多数の／重要な binder and very good in that distemper.

In some places of Mindanao there is plenty of rice; but in the hilly land they 工場／植物 yams, potatoes, and pumpkins; all which 栄える very 井戸／弁護士席. The other fruits of this island are watermelons, musk-melons, plantains, 気が狂って, guavas, nutmegs, cloves, betel-nuts, Durians, jacks, or jacas, coconuts, oranges, etc.

THE PLANTAIN-TREE, FRUIT, LIQUOR, AND CLOTH.

The plantain I take to be the king of all fruit, not except the coco itself. The tree that 耐えるs this fruit is about 3 foot or 3 foot and a half 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, and about 10 or 12 foot high. These trees are not raised from seed (for they seem not to have any) but from the roots of other old trees. If these young suckers are taken out of the ground and 工場／植物d in another place it will be 15 months before they 耐える, but if let stand in their own native 国／地域 they will 耐える in 12 months. As soon as the fruit is 熟した the tree decays, but then there are many young ones growing up to 供給（する） its place. When this tree first springs out of the ground it comes up with two leaves; and by that time it is a foot high two more spring up in the inside of them; and in a short time after two more within them; and so on. By that time the tree is a month old you may perceive a small 団体／死体 almost as big as one's arm, and then there are eight or ten leaves, some of them four or five foot high. The first leaves that it shoots 前へ／外へ are not above a foot long and half a foot 幅の広い; and the 茎・取り除く that 耐えるs them no bigger than one's finger; but as the tree grows higher the leaves are larger. As the young leaves spring up in the inside so the old leaves spread off, and their 最高の，を越すs droop downward, 存在 of a greater length and breadth by how much they are nearer the root, and at last decay and rot off, but still there are young leaves spring up out of the 最高の，を越す, which makes the tree look always green and 繁栄するing. When the tree is 十分な grown the leaves are 7 or 8 foot long and a foot and a half 幅の広い; に向かって the end they are smaller and end with a 一連の会議、交渉／完成する point. The 茎・取り除く of the leaf is as big as a man's arm, almost 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, and about a foot in length between the leaf and the 団体／死体 of the tree. That part of the 茎・取り除く which comes from the tree, if it be the outside leaf, seems to enclose half the 団体／死体 as it were with a 厚い hide; and 権利 against it on the other 味方する of the tree is another such answering to it. The next two leaves in the inside of these grow opposite to each other in the same manner, but so that, if the two outward grow north and south, these grow east and west, and those still within them keep the same order. Thus the 団体／死体 of this tree seems to be made up of many 厚い 肌s growing one over another, and when it is 十分な grown there springs out of the 最高の，を越す a strong 茎・取り除く, harder in 実体 than any other part of the 団体／死体. This 茎・取り除く shoots 前へ／外へ at the heart of the tree, is as big as a man's arm, and as long; and the fruit grows in clusters 一連の会議、交渉／完成する it, first blossoming and then 狙撃 前へ／外へ the fruit. It is so excellent that the Spaniards give it the preeminence of all other fruit, as most conducing to life. It grows in a cod about 6 or 7 インチs long and as big as a man's arm. The 爆撃する, rind, or cod, is soft and of a yellow colour when 熟した. It 似ているs in 形態／調整 a hog's-gut pudding. The enclosed fruit is no harder than butter in winter, and is much of the colour of the purest yellow butter. It is of a delicate taste and melts in one's mouth like marmalet. It is all pure 低俗雑誌, without any seed, kernel or 石／投石する. This fruit is so much esteemed by all Europeans that settle in America that when they make a new 農園 they 一般的に begin with a good plantain-walk, as they call it, or a field of plantains; and as their family 増加するs so they augment the plantain-walk, keeping one man purposely to prune the trees and gather the fruit as he sees convenient. For the trees continue 耐えるing, some or other, most part of the year; and this is many times the whole food on which a whole family subsists. They 栄える only in rich fat ground, for poor sandy will not 耐える them. The Spaniards in their towns in America, as at Havana, Cartagena, Portobello, etc., have their markets 十分な of plantains, it 存在 the ありふれた food for poor people: their ありふれた price is half a rial, or 3 pence a dozen. When this fruit is only used for bread it is roasted or boiled when it's just 十分な grown but not yet 熟した, or turned yellow. Poor people, or Negroes, that have neither fish nor flesh to eat with it, make sauce with cod-pepper, salt and lime-juice, which makes it eat very savoury; much better than a crust of bread alone. いつかs for a change they eat a roasted plantain and a 熟した raw plaintain together, which is instead of bread and butter. They eat very pleasant so, and I have made many a good meal in this manner. いつかs our English take 5 or 7 熟した plantains and, mashing them together, make them into a lump, and boil them instead of a 捕らえる、獲得する-pudding; which they call a buff-jacket: and this is a very good way for a change. This fruit makes also very good tarts; and the green plantains sliced thin and 乾燥した，日照りのd in the sun and grated will make a sort of flour which is very good to make puddings. A 熟した plantain sliced and 乾燥した，日照りのd in the sun may be 保存するd a 広大な／多数の／重要な while; and then eat like figs, very 甘い and pleasant. The Darien Indians 保存する them a long time by 乾燥した，日照りのing them gently over the 解雇する／砲火／射撃; mashing them first and moulding them into lumps. The Moskito Indians will take a 熟した plantain and roast it; then take a pint and a half of water in a calabash and squeeze the plantain in pieces with their 手渡すs, mixing it with the water; then they drink it all off together: this they call mishlaw, and it's pleasant and 甘い and nourishing: somewhat like lamb's-wool (as it is called) made with apples and ale: and of this fruit alone many thousand of Indian families in the West Indies have their whole subsistence. When they make drink with them they take 10 or 12 熟した plantains and mash them 井戸／弁護士席 in a 気圧の谷: then they put 2 gallons of water の中で them; and this in 2 hours' time will ferment and froth like wort. In 4 hours it is fit to drink and then they 瓶／封じ込める it and drink it as they have occasion: but this will not keep above 24 or 30 hours. Those therefore that use this drink brew it in this manner every morning. When I went first to Jamaica I could relish no other drink they had there. It drinks きびきびした and 冷静な／正味の and is very pleasant. This drink is 風の強い, and so is the fruit eaten raw; but boiled or roasted it is not so. If this drink is kept above 30 hours it grows sharp: but if then it be put out in the sun it will become very good vinegar. This fruit grows all over the West Indies (in the proper 気候s) at Guinea, and in the East Indies.

As the fruit of this tree is of 広大な／多数の／重要な use for food so is the 団体／死体 no いっそう少なく serviceable to make 着せる／賦与するs; but this I never knew till I （機の）カム to this island. The ordinary people of Mindanao do wear no other cloth. The tree never 耐えるing but once, and so, 存在 felled when the fruit is 熟した, they 削減（する） it 負かす／撃墜する の近くに by the ground if they ーするつもりである to make cloth with it. One blow with a hatchet or long knife will strike it asunder; then they 削減（する） off the 最高の，を越す, leaving the trunk 8 or 10 foot long, stripping off the outer rind, which is thickest に向かって the lower end, having stripped 2 or 3 of these rinds, the trunk becomes in a manner all of one bigness, and of a whitish colour: then they 分裂（する） the trunk in the middle; which 存在 done they 分裂（する） the two halves again as 近づく the middle as they can. This they leave in the sun 2 or 3 days, in which time part of the juicy 実体 of the tree 乾燥した，日照りのs away, and then the ends will appear 十分な of small threads. The women, whose 雇用 it is to make the cloth, take 持つ／拘留する of those threads one by one, which rend away easily from one end of the trunk to the other, in bigness like whited-brown thread; for the threads are 自然に of a determinate bigness, as I 観察するd their cloth to be all of one 実体 and equal fineness; but it is stubborn when new, wears out soon, and when wet feels a little slimy. They make their pieces 7 or 8 yards long, their warp and woof all one thickness and 実体.

A SMALLER PLANTAIN AT MINDANAO.

There is another sort of plantains in that island which are shorter and いっそう少なく than the others, which I never saw anywhere but here. These are 十分な of 黒人／ボイコット seeds mixed やめる through the fruit. They are binding and are much eaten by those that have fluxes. The country people gave them us for that use and with good success.

THE BANANA.

The 白人指導者べったりの東洋人-tree is 正確に／まさに like the plantain for 形態／調整 and bigness, not easily distinguishable from it but by its fruit, which is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 smaller and not above half so long as a plantain, 存在 also more mellow and soft, いっそう少なく luscious yet of a more delicate taste. They use this for the making drink oftener than plantains, and it is best when used for drink, or eaten as fruit; but it is not so good for bread, nor does it eat 井戸／弁護士席 at all when roasted or boiled; so it is only necessity that makes any use it this way. They grow 一般に where plantains do, 存在 始める，決める intermixed with them purposely in their plantain-walks.

OF THE CLOVE-BARK, CLOVES AND NUTMEGS, AND THE METHODS TAKEN BY THE DUTCH TO MONOPOLIZE THE SPICES.

They have plenty of clove-bark, of which I saw a shipload; and as for cloves, Raja Laut, whom I shall have occasion to について言及する, told me that if the English would settle there they could order 事柄s so in a little time as to send a shipload of cloves from thence every year. I have been 知らせるd that they grow on the boughs of a tree about as big as a plum-tree but I never happened to see any of them.

I have not seen the nutmeg-trees anywhere; but the nutmegs this island produces are fair and large, yet they have no 広大な／多数の／重要な 蓄える／店 of them, 存在 unwilling to propagate them or the cloves, for 恐れる that should 招待する the Dutch to visit them and bring them into subjection as they have done the 残り／休憩（する） of the 隣人ing islands where they grow. For the Dutch, 存在 seated の中で the Spice Islands, have monopolised all the 貿易（する） into their own 手渡すs and will not 苦しむ any of the natives to 配置する／処分する／したい気持ちにさせる of it but to themselves alone. Nay, they are so careful to 保存する it in their own 手渡すs that they will not 苦しむ the spice to grow in the uninhabited islands, but send 兵士s to 削減（する） the trees 負かす／撃墜する. Captain Rofy told me that while he lived with the Dutch he was sent with other men to 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する the spice-trees; and that he himself did at several times 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する 7 or 800 trees. Yet although the Dutch take such care to destroy them there are many uninhabited islands that have 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of spice-trees, as I have been 知らせるd by Dutchmen that have been there, 特に by a captain of a Dutch ship that I met with at Achin who told me that 近づく the island Banda there is an island where the cloves, 落ちるing from the trees, do 嘘（をつく） and rot on the ground, and they are at the time when the fruit 落ちるs 3 or 4 インチs 厚い under the trees. He and some others told me that it would not be a hard 事柄 for an English 大型船 to 購入（する） a ship's 貨物 of spice of the natives of some of these Spice Islands.

He was a 解放する／自由な merchant that told me this. For by that 指名する the Dutch and English in the East Indies distinguish those merchants who are not servants to the company. The 解放する／自由な merchants are not 苦しむd to 貿易（する） to the Spice Islands nor to many other places where the Dutch have factories; but on the other 手渡す they are 苦しむd to 貿易（する） to some places where the Dutch Company themselves may not 貿易（する）, as to Achin 特に, for there are some princes in the Indies who will not 貿易（する） with the Company for 恐れる of them. The seamen that go to the Spice Islands are 強いるd to bring no spice from thence for themselves except a small 事柄 for their own use, about a 続けざまに猛撃する or two. Yet the masters of those ships do 一般的に so order their 商売／仕事 that they often 安全な・保証する a good 量 and send it 岸に to some place 近づく Batavia before they come into that harbour (for it is always brought thither first before it's sent to Europe) and if they 会合，会う any 大型船 at sea that will buy their cloves they will sell 10 or 15 tuns out of 100, and yet seemingly carry their complement to Batavia; for they will 注ぐ water の中で the remaining part of their 貨物, which will swell them to that degree that the ship's 持つ／拘留する will be as 十分な again as it was before any were sold. This trick they use whenever they 配置する／処分する／したい気持ちにさせる of any clandestinely; for the cloves when they first take them in are 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 乾燥した，日照りの, and so will imbibe a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of moisture. This is but one instance of many hundreds of little deceitful arts the Dutch seamen have in these parts の中で them, of which I have both seen and heard several. I believe there are nowhere greater thieves; and nothing will 説得する them to discover one another; for should any do it the 残り／休憩（する） would certainly knock him on the 長，率いる. But to return to the 製品s of Mindanao.

THE BETEL-NUT, AND AREK-TREE.

The betel-nut is much esteemed here, as it is in most places of the East Indies. The betel-tree grows like the cabbage-tree, but it is not so big nor so high. The 団体／死体 grows straight, about 12 or 14 foot high without leaf or 支店 except at the 長，率いる. There it spreads 前へ／外へ long 支店s like other trees of the like nature, as the cabbage-tree, the coconut-tree, and the palm. These 支店s are about 10 or 12 foot long, and their 茎・取り除くs 近づく the 長，率いる of the tree as big as a man's arm. On the 最高の，を越す of the tree の中で the 支店s the betel-nut grows on a 堅い 茎・取り除く as big as a man's finger, in clusters much as the coconuts do, and they grow 40 or 50 in a cluster. This fruit is bigger than a nutmeg and is much like it but rounder. It is much used all over the East Indies. Their way is to 削減（する） it in four pieces, and 包む one of them up in an arek-leaf which they spread with a soft paste made of lime or plaster, and then chew it altogether. Every man in these parts carries his lime-box by his 味方する and, dipping his finger into it, spreads his betel and arek-leaf with it. The arek is a small tree or shrub, of a green bark, and the leaf is long and broader than a willow. They are packed up to sell into parts that have them not, to chew with the betel. The betel-nut is most esteemed when it is young and before it grows hard, and then they 削減（する） it only in two pieces with the green husk or 爆撃する on it. It is then 越えるing juicy and therefore makes them spit much. It tastes rough in the mouth and dyes the lips red, and makes the teeth 黒人／ボイコット, but it 保存するs them, and 洗浄するs the gums. It is also accounted very wholesome for the stomach; but いつかs it will 原因（となる） 広大な／多数の／重要な giddiness in the 長，率いる of those that are not used to chew it. But this is the 影響 only of the old nut for the young nuts will not do it. I speak of my own experience.

THE DURIAN, AND THE JACA-TREE AND FRUIT.

This island produces also durians and jacks. The trees that 耐える the durians are as big as apple-trees, 十分な of boughs. The rind is 厚い and rough; the fruit is so large that they grow only about the 団体／死体s or on the 四肢s 近づく the 団体／死体, like the cocoa. The fruit is about the bigness of a large pumpkin, covered with a 厚い green rough rind. When it is 熟した the rind begins to turn yellow but it is not fit to eat till it opens at the 最高の，を越す. Then the fruit in the inside is 熟した and sends 前へ／外へ an excellent scent. When the rind is opened the fruit may be 分裂（する） into four ４半期/4分の1s; each ４半期/4分の1 has several small 独房s that enclose a 確かな 量 of the fruit によれば the bigness of the 独房, for some are larger than others. The largest of the fruit may be as big as a pullet's egg. It is as white as milk and as soft as cream, and the taste very delicious as those that are accustomed to them; but those who have not been used to eat them will dislike them at first because they smell like roasted onions. This fruit must be eaten in its prime (for there is no eating of it before it is 熟した) and even then it will not keep above a day or two before it putrefies and turns 黒人／ボイコット, or of a dark colour, and then it is not good. Within the fruit there is a 石／投石する as big as a small bean, which has a thin 爆撃する over it. Those that are minded to eat the 石／投石するs or nuts roast them, and then a thin 爆撃する comes off, which encloses the nut; and it eats like a chestnut.

The jack or jaca is much like the durian both in bigness and 形態／調整. The trees that 耐える them also are much alike, and so is their manner of the fruits growing. But the inside is different; for the fruit of the durian is white, that of the jack is yellow, and fuller of 石／投石するs. The durian is most esteemed; yet the jack is a very pleasant fruit and the 石／投石するs or kernels are good roasted.

There are many other sorts of 穀物, roots, and fruits in this island, which to give a particular description of would fill up a large 容積／容量.

THE BEASTS OF MINDANAO.

In this island are also many sorts of beasts, both wild and tame; as horses, bulls, and cows, buffaloes, goats, wild hogs, deer, monkeys, iguanas, lizards, snakes, etc. I never saw or heard of any beasts of prey here, as in many other places. The hogs are ugly creatures; they have all 広大な／多数の／重要な knobs growing over their 注目する，もくろむs, and there are multitudes of them in the 支持を得ようと努めるd. They are 一般的に very poor, yet 甘い. Deer are here very plentiful in some places where they are not 乱すd.

CENTIPEDES OR FORTY-LEGS, A VENOMOUS INSECT, AND OTHERS.

Of the venomous 肉親，親類d of creatures here are scorpions, whose sting is in their tail; and centipedes, called by the English 40-脚s, both which are also ありふれた in the West Indies, in Jamaica, and どこかよそで. These centipedes are 4 or 5 インチs long, as big as a goose-quill but flattish; of a dun or 赤みを帯びた colour on the 支援する, but belly whitish, and 十分な of 脚s on each 味方する the belly. Their sting or bite is more 激怒（する）ing than the scorpion. They 嘘（をつく） in old houses and 乾燥した，日照りの 木材／素質. There are several sorts of snakes, some very poisonous. There is another sort of creature like an iguana both in colour and 形態／調整 but four times as big, whose tongue is like a small harpoon, having two 耐えるd like the 耐えるd of a fish-hook. They are said to be very venomous, but I know not their 指名するs. I have seen them in other places also, as at Pulo Condore, or the island Condore, and at Achin, and have been told that they are in the Bay of Bengal.

THEIR FOWLS, FISH, ETC.

The fowls of this country are ducks and 女／おっせかい屋s: other tame fowl I have not seen nor heard of any. The wild fowl are pigeons, parrots, parakeets, 海がめ-doves, and 豊富 of small fowls. There are bats as big as a 道具.

There are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many harbours, creeks, and good bays for ships to ride in; and rivers navigable for canoes, proas or barks, which are all plentifully 蓄える／店d with fish of divers sorts, so is also the 隣接する sea. The chiefest fish are boneta, snook, cavally, bream, mullet, 10-pounder, etc. Here are also plenty of sea-海がめ, and small manatee which are not 近づく so big as those in the West Indies. The biggest that I saw would not 重さを計る above 600 続けざまに猛撃する; but the flesh both of the 海がめ and manatee are very 甘い.

THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CLIMATE, WITH THE COURSE OF THE WINDS, TORNADOES, RAIN, AND TEMPER OF THE AIR THROUGHOUT THE YEAR.

The 天候 at Mindanao is temperate enough as to heat for all it lies so 近づく the 赤道; and 特に on the 国境s 近づく the sea. There they 一般的に enjoy the 微風s by day and 冷静な／正味のing land-勝利，勝つd at night. The 勝利，勝つd are easterly one part of the year and westerly the other. The easterly 勝利，勝つd begin to blow in October and it is the middle of November before they are settled. These 勝利，勝つd bring 好天. The westerly 勝利，勝つd begin to blow in May but are not settled till a month afterwards. The west 勝利，勝つd always bring rain, トルネード，竜巻s, and very tempestuous 天候. At the first coming in of these 勝利，勝つd they blow but faintly; but then the トルネード，竜巻s rise one in a day, いつかs two. These are 雷鳴-にわか雨s which 一般的に come against the 勝利，勝つd, bringing with them a contrary 勝利，勝つd to what did blow before. After the トルネード，竜巻s are over the 勝利，勝つd 転換s about again and the sky becomes （疑いを）晴らす, yet then in the valleys and the 味方するs of the mountains there rises 厚い 霧 which covers the land. The トルネード，竜巻s continue thus for a week or more; then they come 厚い, two or three in a day, bringing violent gusts of 勝利，勝つd and terrible claps of 雷鳴. At last they come so 急速な／放蕩な that the 勝利，勝つd remains in the ４半期/4分の1 from whence these トルネード，竜巻s do rise, which is out of the west, and there it settles till October or November. When these 西方の 勝利，勝つd are thus settled the sky is all in 嘆く／悼むing, 存在 covered with 黒人／ボイコット clouds, 注ぐing 負かす／撃墜する 過度の rains いつかs mixed with 雷鳴 and 雷, that nothing can be more dismal. The 勝利，勝つd 激怒（する）ing to that degree that the biggest trees are torn up by the roots and the rivers swell and 洪水 their banks and 溺死する the low land, carrying 広大な／多数の／重要な trees into the sea. Thus it continues いつかs a week together before the sun or 星／主役にするs appear. The fiercest of this 天候 is in the latter end of July and in August, for then the towns seem to stand in a 広大な／多数の／重要な pond, and they go from one house to another in canoes. At this time the water carries away all the filth and nastiness from under their houses. Whilst this tempestuous season lasts the 天候 is 冷淡な and chilly. In September the 天候 is more 穏健な, and the 勝利，勝つd are not so 猛烈な／残忍な, nor the rain so violent. The 空気／公表する thenceforward begins to be more （疑いを）晴らす and delightsome; but then in the morning there are 厚い 霧s continuing till 10 or 11 o'clock before the sun 向こうずねs out, 特に when it has rained in the night. In October the easterly 勝利，勝つd begin to blow again and bring 好天 till April. Thus much 関心ing the natural 明言する／公表する of Mindanao.

CHAPTER 12.

OF THE INHABITANTS, AND CIVIL STATE OF THE ISLE OF MINDANAO.

This island is not 支配する to one prince, neither is the language one and the same; but the people are much alike in colour, strength, and stature. They are all or most of them of one 宗教, which is Mohammedanism, and their customs and manner of living are alike. The Mindanao people, more 特に so called, are the greatest nation in the island and, 貿易（する）ing by sea with other nations, they are therefore the more civil. I shall say but little of the 残り／休憩（する）, 存在 いっそう少なく known to me but, so much as has come to my knowledge, take as follows.

THE MINDANAYANS, HILLANOONES, SOLOGUES, AND ALFOORES.

There are besides the Mindanayans, the Hilanoones (as they call them) or the Mountaineers, the Sologues and Alfoores.

The Hilanoones live in the heart of the country: they have little or no 商業 by sea, yet they have proas that 列／漕ぐ／騒動 with 12 or 14 oars apiece. They enjoy the 利益 of the gold-地雷s and with their gold buy foreign 商品／必需品s of the Mindanao people. They have also plenty of beeswax which they 交流 for other 商品／必需品s.

The Sologues 住む the north-west end of the island. They are the least nation of all; they 貿易（する） to Manila in proas and to some of the 隣人ing islands but have no 商業 with the Mindanao people.

The Alfoores are the same with the Mindanayans and were 以前は under the subjection of the 暴君 of Mindanao, but were divided between the 暴君's children, and have of late had a 暴君 of their own; but having by marriage 契約d an 同盟 with the 暴君 of Mindanao this has occasioned that prince to （人命などを）奪う，主張する them again as his 支配するs; and he made war with them a little after we went away, as I afterwards understood.

OF THE MINDANAYANS, PROPERLY SO CALLED; THEIR MANNERS AND HABITS.

The Mindanayans 適切に いわゆる are men of mean statures; small 四肢s, straight 団体／死体s, and little 長，率いるs. Their 直面するs are oval, their foreheads flat, with 黒人／ボイコット small 注目する，もくろむs, short low noses, pretty large mouths; their lips thin and red, their teeth 黒人／ボイコット, yet very sound, their hair 黒人／ボイコット and straight, the colour of their 肌 tawny but inclining to a brighter yellow than some other Indians, 特に the women. They have a custom to wear their thumb-nails very long, 特に that on their left thumb, for they do never 削減（する） it but 捨てる it often. They are endued with good natural wits, are ingenious, nimble, and active, when they are minded but 一般に very lazy and thievish, and will not work except 軍隊d by hunger. This laziness is natural to most Indians; but these people's laziness seems rather to proceed and so much from their natural inclinations, as from the severity of their prince of whom they stand in awe: for he, 取引，協定ing with them very arbitrarily, and taking from them what they get, this damps their 産業, so they never 努力する／競う to have anything but from 手渡す to mouth. They are 一般に proud and walk very stately. They are civil enough to strangers and will easily be 熟知させるd with them and entertain them with 広大な／多数の／重要な freedom; but they are implacable to their enemies and very revengeful if they are 負傷させるd, frequently 毒（薬）ing 内密に those that have affronted them.

They wear but few 着せる／賦与するs; their 長，率いるs are circled with a short turban, fringed or laced at both ends; it goes once about the 長，率いる, and is tied in a knot, the laced ends hanging 負かす／撃墜する. They wear frocks and breeches, but no stockings nor shoes.

THE HABITS AND MANNERS OF THEIR WOMEN.

The women are fairer than the men; and their hair is 黒人／ボイコット and long; which they tie in a knot that hangs 支援する in their 政治家s. They are more 一連の会議、交渉／完成する-visaged than the men and 一般に 井戸／弁護士席-featured; only their noses are very small and so low between their 注目する，もくろむs that in some of the 女性（の） children the rising that should be between the 注目する，もくろむs is 不十分な discernible; neither is there any sensible rising in their foreheads. At a distance they appear very 井戸／弁護士席; but 存在 nigh these 妨害s are very obvious. They have very small 四肢s. They wear but two 衣料品s; a frock and a sort of petticoat; the petticoat is only a piece of cloth, （種を）蒔くd both ends together: but it is made two foot too big for their waists, so that they may wear either end uppermost: that part that comes up to their waist, because it is so much too big, they gather it in their 手渡すs and 新たな展開 it till it fits の近くに to their waists, tucking in the 新たな展開d part between their waist and the 辛勝する／優位 of the petticoat, which keeps it の近くに. The frock fits loose about them and reaches 負かす／撃墜する a little below the waist. The sleeves are a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 longer than their 武器 and so small at the end that their 手渡すs will 不十分な go through. 存在 on, the sleeve fits in 倍のs about the wrist, wherein they take 広大な／多数の／重要な pride.

The better sort of people have their 衣料品s made of long cloth; but the ordinary sort wear cloth made of plantain-tree which they call saggen, by which 指名する they call the plantain. They have neither 在庫／株ing or shoe, and the women have very small feet.

The women are very desirous of the company of strangers, 特に of white men; and doubtless would be very familiar if the custom of the country did not debar them from that freedom, which seems coveted by them. Yet from the highest to the lowest they are 許すd liberty to converse with or 扱う／治療する strangers in the sight of their husbands.

A COMICAL CUSTOM AT MINDANAO.

There is a 肉親，親類d of begging custom at Mindanao that I have not met どこかよそで with in all my travels; and which I believe is 借りがあるing to the little 貿易（する） they have; which is thus: when strangers arrive here the Mindanao men will come 船内に and 招待する them to their houses and 問い合わせ who has a comrade (which word I believe they have from the Spaniards) or a pagally, and who has not. A comrade is a familiar male friend; a pagally is an innocent platonic friend of the other sex. All strangers are in a manner 強いるd to 受託する of this 知識 and familiarity, which must be first 購入（する）d with a small 現在の and afterwards 確認するd with some gift or other to continue the 知識: and as often as the stranger goes 岸に he is welcome to his comrade or pagally's house, where he may be entertained for his money, to eat, drink, or sleep; and complimented as often as he comes 岸に with タバコ and betel-nut, which is all the entertainment he must 推定する／予想する gratis. The richest men's wives are 許すd the freedom to converse with her pagally in public, and may give or receive 現在のs from him. Even the 暴君s and the generals wives, who are always 閉じ込める／刑務所d up, will yet look out of their cages when a stranger passes by and 需要・要求する of him if he wants a pagally: and, to 招待する him to their friendship, will send a 現在の of タバコ and betel-nut to him by their servants.

THEIR HOUSES, THEIR DIET, AND WASHINGS.

The chiefest city on this island is called by the same 指名する of Mindanao. It is seated on the south 味方する of the island, in latitude 7 degrees 20 minutes north on the banks of a small river, about two mile from the sea. The manner of building is somewhat strange yet 一般に used in this part of the East Indies. Their houses are all built on 地位，任命するs about 14, 16, 18, or 20 foot high. These 地位，任命するs are bigger or いっそう少なく によれば the ーするつもりであるd magnificence of the superstructure. They have but one 床に打ち倒す but many partitions or rooms, and a ladder or stairs to go up out of the streets. The roof is large and covered with palmetto or palm-leaves. So there is a （疑いを）晴らす passage like a piazza (but a filthy one) under the house. Some of the poorer people that keep ducks or 女／おっせかい屋s have a 盗品故買者 made 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the 地位，任命するs of their houses with a door to go in and out; and this under-room serves for no other use. Some use this place for the ありふれた draught of their houses but, building mostly の近くに by the river in all parts of the Indies, they make the river receive all the filth of their house; and at the time of the land-floods all is washed very clean.

The 暴君's house is much bigger than any of the 残り／休憩（する）. It stands on about 180 広大な／多数の／重要な 地位，任命するs or trees a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 higher than the ありふれた building, with 広大な／多数の／重要な 幅の広い stairs made to go up. In the first room he has about 20 アイロンをかける guns, all Saker and Minion, placed on field-carriages. The general and other 広大な／多数の／重要な men have some guns also in their houses. About 20 paces from the 暴君's house there is a small low house built purposely for the 歓迎会 of 外交官／大使s or merchant strangers. This also stands on 地位，任命するs but the 床に打ち倒す is not raised above three or four foot above the ground, and is neatly matted purposely for the 暴君 and his 会議 to sit on; for they use no 議長，司会を務めるs but sit cross-legged like tailors on the 床に打ち倒す.

The ありふれた food at Mindanao is rice or sago, and a small fish or two. The better sort eat buffalo or fowls ill dressed, and 豊富 of rice with it. They use no spoons to eat their rice but every man takes a handful out of the platter and, by wetting his 手渡す in water, that it may not stick to his 手渡す, squeezes it into a lump as hard as かもしれない he can make it, and then crams it into his mouth. They all 努力する／競う to make these lumps as big as their mouth can receive them and seem to 争う with each other and glory in taking in the biggest lump; so that いつかs they almost choke themselves. They always wash after meals or if they touch anything that is unclean; for which 推論する／理由 they spend 豊富 of water in their houses. This water, with the washing of their dishes and what other filth they make, they 注ぐ 負かす／撃墜する 近づく their fireplace: for their 議会s are not boarded but 床に打ち倒すd with 分裂（する） bamboos like lath, so that the water presently 落ちるs underneath their dwelling rooms where it 産む／飼育するs maggots and makes a prodigious stink. Besides this filthiness the sick people 事例／患者 themselves and make water in their 議会s, there 存在 a small 穴を開ける made purposely in the 床に打ち倒す to let it 減少（する） through. But healthy sound people 一般的に 緩和する themselves and make water in the river. For that 推論する／理由 you shall always see 豊富 of people of both sexes in the river from morning till night; some 緩和 themselves, others washing their 団体／死体s or 着せる／賦与するs. If they come into the river purposely to wash their 着せる／賦与するs they （土地などの）細長い一片 and stand naked till they have done then put them on and march out again: both men and women take 広大な／多数の／重要な delight in swimming and washing themselves, 存在 bred to it from their 幼少／幼藍期. I do believe it is very wholesome to wash mornings and evenings in these hot countries at least three or four days in the week: for I did use myself to it when I lived afterwards at Bencoolen, and 設立する it very refreshing and comfortable. It is very good for those that have fluxes to wash and stand in the river mornings and evenings. I speak it 実験的に for I was brought very low with that distemper at Achin; but by washing 絶えず mornings and evenings I 設立する 広大な／多数の／重要な 利益 and was quickly cured by it.

THE LANGUAGES SPOKEN THERE, AND TRANSACTIONS WITH THE SPANIARDS.

In the city of Mindanao they speak two languages indifferently; their own Mindanao language and the Malaya: but in other parts of the island they speak only their proper language, having little 商業 abroad. They have schools and 教える their children to read and 令状 and bring them up in the Mohammedan 宗教. Therefore many of the words, 特に their 祈りs, are in Arabic; and many of the words of civility the same as in Turkey; and 特に when they 会合，会う in the morning or take leave of each other they 表明する themselves in that language.

Many of the old people both men and women can speak Spanish for the Spaniards were 以前は settled の中で them and had several forts on this island; and then they sent two friars to the city to 変える the 暴君 of Mindanao and his people. At that time these people began to learn Spanish, and the Spaniards encroached on them and endeavoured to bring them into subjection; and probably before this time had brought them all under their yoke if they themselves had not been drawn off from this island to Manila to resist the Chinese, who 脅すd to 侵略する them there. When the Spaniards were gone the old 暴君 of Mindanao, father to the 現在の, in whose time it was, 破壊するd and 破壊するd their forts, brought away their guns, and sent away the friars; and since that time will not 苦しむ the Spaniards to settle on the islands.

THEIR FEAR OF THE DUTCH, AND SEEMING DESIRE OF THE ENGLISH.

They are now most afraid of the Dutch, 存在 sensible how they have enslaved many of the 隣人ing islands. For that 推論する／理由 they have a long time 願望（する）d the English to settle の中で them and have 申し込む／申し出d them any convenient place to build a fort in, as the general himself told us; giving this 推論する／理由, that they do not find the English so encroaching as the Dutch or Spanish. The Dutch are no いっそう少なく jealous of their admitting the English for they are sensible what detriment it would be to them if the English should settle here.

THEIR HANDICRAFTS, AND PECULIAR SORT OF SMITH'S BELLOWS.

There are but few tradesmen at the city of Mindanao. The chiefest 貿易（する）s are goldsmiths, blacksmiths, and carpenters. There are but two or three goldsmiths; these will work in gold or silver and make anything that you 願望（する）: but they have no shop furnished with ware ready-made for sale. Here are several blacksmiths who work very 井戸／弁護士席, considering the 道具s that they work with. Their bellows are much different from ours. They are made of a 木造の cylinder, the trunk of a tree, about three foot long, bored hollow like a pump and 始める，決める upright on the ground, on which the 解雇する／砲火／射撃 itself is made. 近づく the lower end there is a small 穴を開ける, in the 味方する of the trunk next the 解雇する／砲火／射撃, made to receive a 麻薬を吸う through which the 勝利，勝つd is driven to the 解雇する／砲火／射撃 by a 広大な／多数の／重要な bunch of 罰金 feathers fastened to one end of the stick which, の近くにing up the inside of the cylinder, 運動s the 空気／公表する out of the cylinder through the 麻薬を吸う: two of these trunks or cylinders are placed so nigh together that a man standing between them may work them both at once alternately, one with each 手渡す. They have neither 副／悪徳行為 nor anvil but a 広大な／多数の／重要な hard 石／投石する or a piece of an old gun to 大打撃を与える upon: yet they will 成し遂げる their work, making both ありふれた utensils and アイロンをかける-作品 about ships to 賞賛. They work altogether with charcoal. Every man almost is a carpenter for they can work with the axe and adze. Their axe is but small and so made that they can take it out of the helve, and by turning it make an adze of it. They have no saws but when they make plank they 分裂（する） the tree in two and make a plank of each part, 計画（する）ing it with the axe and adze. This 要求するs much 苦痛s and takes up a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of time; but they work cheap, and the goodness of the plank thus hewed, which has its 穀物 保存するd entire, makes 修正するs for their cost and 苦痛s.

THEIR SHIPPING, COMMODITIES, AND TRADE.

They build good and serviceable ships or barks for the sea, some for 貿易（する）, others for 楽しみ; and some ships of war. Their 貿易（する）ing 大型船s they send 主として to Manila. Thither they 輸送（する） beeswax, which, I think, is the only 商品／必需品 besides gold that they vend there. The inhabitants of the city of Mindanao get a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of beeswax themselves: but the greatest 量 they 購入（する） is of the Mountaineers, from whom they also get the gold which they send to Manila; and with these they buy their calicoes, muslins, and 中国 silk. They send いつかs their barks to Borneo and other islands; but what they 輸送（する） thither, or 輸入する from thence, I know not.

THE MINDANAO AND MANILA TOBACCO.

The Dutch come hither in sloops from Ternate and Tidore and buy rice, beeswax, and タバコ: for here is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of タバコ grows on this island, more than in any island or country in the East Indies that I know of, Manila only excepted. It is an excellent sort of タバコ; but these people have not the art of managing this 貿易（する） to their best advantage as the Spaniards have at Manila. I do believe the seeds were first brought hither from Manila by the Spaniards, and even thither, in all probability, from America: the difference between the Mindanao and Manila タバコ is that the Mindanao タバコ is of a darker colour and the leaf larger and grosser than the Manila タバコ, 存在 propagated or 工場／植物d in a fatter 国／地域. The Manila タバコ is of a 有望な yellow colour, of an indifferent size, not strong, but pleasant to smoke. The Spaniards at Manila are very curious about this タバコ, having a peculiar way of making it up neatly in the leaf. For they take two little sticks, each about a foot long and flat and, placing the stalks of the タバコ leaves in a 列／漕ぐ／騒動, 40 or 50 of them between the two sticks, they 貯蔵所d them hard together so that the leaves hang dangling 負かす／撃墜する. One of these bundles is sold for a rial at Fort St. George: but you may have 10 or 12 続けざまに猛撃する of タバコ at Mindanao for a rial; and the タバコ is as good or rather better than the Manila タバコ, but they have not that vent for it as the Spaniards have.

A SORT OF LEPROSY THERE, AND OTHER DISTEMPERS.

The Mindanao people are much troubled with a sort of leprosy, the same as we 観察するd at Guam. This distemper runs with a 乾燥した，日照りの scurf all over their 団体／死体s and 原因（となる）s 広大な／多数の／重要な itching in those that have it, making them frequently scratch and scrub themselves, which raises the outer 肌 in small whitish flakes like the 規模s of little fish when they are raised on end with a knife. This makes their 肌 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の rough, and in some you shall see 幅の広い white 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs in several parts of their 団体／死体. I 裁判官 such have had it but were cured; for their 肌s were smooth and I did not perceive them to scrub themselves: yet I have learnt from their own mouths that these 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs were from this distemper. Whether they use any means to cure themselves or whether it goes away of itself, I know not: but I did not perceive that they made any 広大な／多数の／重要な 事柄 of it, for they did never 差し控える any company for it; 非，不，無 of our people caught it of them, for we were afraid of it, and kept off. They are いつかs troubled with the smallpox but their ordinary distempers are fevers, agues, fluxes, with 広大な／多数の／重要な 苦痛s and gripings in their guts. The country affords a 広大な／多数の／重要な many 麻薬s and medicinal herbs whose virtues are not unknown to some of them that pretend to cure the sick.

THEIR MARRIAGES.

The Mindanao men have many wives: but what 儀式s are used when they marry I know not. There is 一般的に a 広大な／多数の／重要な feast made by the bridegroom to entertain his friends, and the most part of the night is spent in mirth.

THE SULTAN OF MINDANAO, HIS POVERTY, POWER, FAMILY, ETC.

The 暴君 is 絶対の in his 力／強力にする over all his 支配するs. He is but a poor prince; for, as I について言及するd before, they have but little 貿易（する） and therefore cannot be rich. If the 暴君 understands that any man has money, if it be but 20 dollars, which is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 事柄 の中で them, he will send to borrow so much money, pretending 緊急の occasions for it; and they dare not 否定する him. いつかs he will send to sell one thing or another that he has to 配置する／処分する／したい気持ちにさせる of to such whom he knows to have money, and they must buy it and give him his price; and if afterwards he has occasion for the same thing he must have it if he sends for it. He is but a little man, between 50 or 60 years old, and by relation very good-natured but overruled by those about him. He has a queen and keeps about 29 women, or wives, more, in whose company he spends most of his time. He has one daughter by his sultaness or queen, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な many sons and daughters by the 残り／休憩（する）. These walk about the streets and would be always begging things of us; but it is 報告（する）／憶測d that the young princess is kept in a room and never 動かすs out, and that she did never see any man but her father and Raja Laut her uncle, 存在 then about fourteen years old.

When the 暴君 visits his friends he is carried in a small couch on four men's shoulders, with eight or ten 武装した men to guard him; but he never goes far this way for the country is very woody and they have but little paths, which （判決などを）下すs it the いっそう少なく commodious.

THE PROAS OR BOATS HERE.

When he takes his 楽しみ by water he carries some of his wives along with him. The proas that are built for this 目的 are large enough to entertain 50 or 60 persons or more. The 船体 is neatly built, with a 一連の会議、交渉／完成する 長，率いる and 厳しい, and over the 船体 there is a small slight house built with bamboos; the 味方するs are made up with 分裂（する） bamboos about four foot high, with little windows in them of the same to open and shut at their 楽しみ. The roof is almost flat, neatly thatched with palmetto-leaves. This house is divided into two or three small partitions or 議会s, one 特に for himself. This is neatly matted underneath and 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the 味方するs; and there is a carpet and pillows for him to sleep on. The second room is for his women, much like the former. The third is for the servants, who tend them with タバコ and betel-nut; for they are always chewing or smoking. The fore and after-parts of the 大型船 are for the 水夫s to sit and 列／漕ぐ／騒動. Besides this they have outlayers, such as those I 述べるd at Guam; only the boats and outlayers here are larger. These boats are more 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, like a half moon almost; and the bamboos or outlayers that reach from the boat are also crooked. Besides, the boat is not flat on one 味方する here, as at Guam; but has a belly and outlayers on each 味方する: and 反して at Guam there is a little boat fastened to the outlayers that lies in the water; the beams or bamboos here are fastened 横断する-wise to the outlayers on each 味方する, and touch not the water like boats, but 1, 3 or 4 foot above the water, and serve for the 船-men to sit and 列／漕ぐ／騒動 and paddle on; the inside of the 大型船, except only just afore and abaft, 存在 taken up with the apartments for the 乗客s. There run across the outlayers two tier of beams for the paddlers to sit on, on each 味方する the 大型船. The lower tier of these beams is not above a foot from the water: so that, upon any the least reeling of the 大型船, the beams are dipped in the water and the men that sit are wet up to their waist, their feet seldom escaping the water. And thus, as all our 大型船s are 列／漕ぐ／騒動d from within, these are paddled from without.

RAJA LAUT THE GENERAL, BROTHER TO THE SULTAN, AND HIS FAMILY.

The 暴君 has a brother called Raja Laut, a 勇敢に立ち向かう man. He is the second man in the kingdom. All strangers that come hither to 貿易（する） must make their 演説（する）／住所 to him, for all sea-事件／事情／状勢s belong to him. He licenses strangers to 輸入する or 輸出（する） any 商品／必需品, and it is by his 許可 that the natives themselves are 苦しむd to 貿易（する）: nay, the very fishermen must take a 許す from him: so that there is no man can come into the river or go out but by his leave. He is two or three years younger than the 暴君, and a little man like him. He has eight women, by some of whom he has 問題／発行する. He has only one son, about twelve or fourteen years old, who was circumcised while we were there. His eldest son died a little before we （機の）カム hither, for whom he was still in 広大な／多数の／重要な heaviness. If he had lived a little longer he should have married the young princess; but whether this second son must have her I know not, for I did never hear any discourse about it. Raja Laut is a very sharp man; he speaks and 令状s Spanish, which he learned in his 青年. He has by often conversing with strangers got a 広大な／多数の／重要な sight into the customs of other nations, and by Spanish 調書をとる／予約するs has some knowledge of Europe. He is general of the Mindanayans, and is accounted an 専門家 兵士, and a very stout man; and the women in their dances sing many songs in his 賞賛する.

THEIR WAY OF FIGHTING.

The 暴君 of Mindanao いつかs makes war with his 隣人s the Mountaineers or Alfoores. Their 武器s are swords, lances, and some 手渡す-cressets. The cresset is a small thing like a baggonet, which they always wear in war or peace, at work or play, from the greatest of them to the poorest, or the meanest persons. They do never 会合，会う each other so as to have a pitched 戦う／戦い but they build small 作品 or forts of 木材／素質 wherein they 工場／植物 little guns and 嘘（をつく） in sight of each other two or three months, 小競り合いing every day in small parties and いつかs surprising a breast-work; and whatever 味方する is like to be worsted, if they have no probability to escape by flight, they sell their lives as dear as they can; for there is seldom any ４半期/4分の1 given, but the 征服者／勝利者 削減（する）s and 切り開く／タクシー／不正アクセスs his enemies to pieces.

THEIR RELIGION.

The 宗教 of these people is Mohammedanism; Friday is their sabbath; but I did never see any difference that they make between this day and any other day; only the 暴君 himself goes then to the イスラム教寺院 twice.

RAJA LAUT'S DEVOTION.

Raja Laut never goes to the イスラム教寺院 but prays at 確かな hours, eight or ten times in a day, wherever he is, he is very punctual to his canonical hours, and if he be 船内に will go 岸に on 目的 to pray. For no 商売／仕事 nor company 妨げるs him from this 義務. Whether he is at home or abroad, in a house or in the field, he leaves all his company and goes about 100 yards off, and there ひさまづくs 負かす／撃墜する to his devotion. He first kisses the ground then prays aloud, and divers time in his 祈りs he kisses the ground and does the same when he leaves off. His servants and his wives and children talk and sing, or play how they please all the time, but himself is very serious. The meaner sort of people have little devotion: I did never see any of them at their 祈りs or go into a イスラム教寺院.

A CLOCK OR DRUM IN THEIR MOSQUES.

In the 暴君's イスラム教寺院 there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 派手に宣伝する with but one 長，率いる called a gong; which is instead of o'clock. This gong is beaten at 12 o'clock, at 3, 6, and 9; a man 存在 任命するd for that service. He has a stick as big as a man's arm, with a 広大な／多数の／重要な knob at the end, bigger than a man's 握りこぶし, made with cotton bound 急速な／放蕩な with small cords: with this he strikes the gong as hard as he can, about twenty 一打／打撃s; beginning to strike leisurely the first five or six 一打／打撃s; then he strikes faster, and at last strikes as 急速な／放蕩な as he can; and then he strikes again slower and slower so many more 一打／打撃s: thus he rises and 落ちるs three times, and then leaves off till three hours after. This is done night and day.

OF THEIR CIRCUMCISION, AND THE SOLEMNITY THEN USED.

They circumcise the males at 11 or 12 years of age, or older; and many are circumcised at once. This 儀式 is 成し遂げるd with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of solemnity. There had been no circumcision for some years before our 存在 here; and then there was one for Raja Laut's son. They choose to have a general circumcision when the 暴君 or general or some other 広大な／多数の／重要な person has a son fit to be circumcised; for with him a 広大な／多数の／重要な many more are circumcised. There is notice given about eight or ten days before for all men to appear in 武器. And 広大な／多数の／重要な 準備 is made against the solemn day. In the morning before the boys are circumcised 現在のs are sent to the father of the child that keeps the feast; which, as I said before, is either the 暴君 or some 広大な／多数の／重要な person: and about 10 or 11 o'clock the Mohammedan priest does his office. He takes 持つ／拘留する of the foreskin with two sticks and with a pair of scissors snips it off.

OF THEIR OTHER RELIGIOUS OBSERVATIONS AND SUPERSTITIONS.

After this most of the men, both in city and country 存在 in 武器 before the house, begin to 行為／法令／行動する as if they were engaged with an enemy, having such 武器 as I 述べるd. Only one 行為／法令／行動するs at a time, the 残り／休憩（する） make a 広大な／多数の／重要な （犯罪の）一味 of 2 or 300 yards 一連の会議、交渉／完成する about him. He that is to 演習 comes into the （犯罪の）一味 with a 広大な／多数の／重要な shriek or two and a horrid look; then he fetches two or three large stately strides and 落ちるs to work. He 持つ／拘留するs his broadsword in one 手渡す, and his lance in the other, and 横断するs his ground, leaping from one 味方する of the （犯罪の）一味 to the other; and, in a 脅迫的な posture and look, 企て，努力，提案s 反抗 to the enemy whom his fancy でっちあげる，人を罪に陥れるs to him; for there is nothing but 空気／公表する to …に反対する him. Then he stamps and shakes his 長，率いる and, grinning with his teeth, makes many rueful 直面するs. Then he throws his lance and nimbly snatches out his cresset, with which he 切り開く／タクシー／不正アクセスs and hews the 空気／公表する like a madman, often shrieking. At last, 存在 almost tired with 動議, he 飛行機で行くs to the middle of the （犯罪の）一味, where he seems to have his enemy at his mercy, and with two or three blows 削減（する）s on the ground as if he was cutting off his enemy's 長，率いる. By this time he is all of a sweat, and 身を引くs triumphantly out of the （犯罪の）一味, and presently another enters with the like shrieks and gestures. Thus they continue 戦闘ing their imaginary enemy all the 残り／休憩（する） of the day; に向かって the 結論 of which the richest men 行為／法令／行動する, and at last the general, and then the 暴君 結論するs this 儀式: he and the general, with some other 広大な／多数の／重要な men, are in armour, but the 残り／休憩（する） have 非，不，無. After this the 暴君 returns home, …を伴ってd with 豊富 of people, who wait on him there till they are 解任するd. But at the time when we were there there was an after-game to be played; for, the general's son 存在 then circumcised, the 暴君 ーするつもりであるd to give him a second visit in the night, so they all waited to …に出席する him thither. The general also 供給するd to 会合，会う him in the best manner, and therefore 願望（する）d Captain Swan with his men to …に出席する him. Accordingly Captain Swan ordered us to get our guns and wait at the general's house till その上の orders. So about 40 of us waited till eight o'clock in the evening when the general with Captain Swan and about 1000 men went to 会合，会う the 暴君, with 豊富 of たいまつs that made it as light as day. The manner of the march was thus: first of all there was a 野外劇／豪華な行列, and upon it two dancing women gorgeously apparelled, with coronets on their 長，率いるs, 十分な of glittering spangles, and pendants of the same hanging 負かす／撃墜する over their breast and shoulders. These are women bred up purposely for dancing: their feet and 脚s are but little 雇うd except いつかs to turn 一連の会議、交渉／完成する very gently; but their 手渡すs, 武器, 長，率いる, and 団体／死体 are in continual 動議, 特に their 武器, which they turn and 新たな展開 so strangely that you would think them to be made without bones. Besides the two dancing women there were two old women in the 野外劇／豪華な行列 持つ／拘留するing each a lighted たいまつ in their 手渡すs, の近くに by the two dancing women, by which light the glittering spangles appeared very gloriously. This 野外劇／豪華な行列 was carried by six lusty men: then （機の）カム six or seven たいまつs lighting the general and Captain Swan who marched 味方する by 味方する next, and we that …に出席するd Captain Swan followed の近くに after, marching in order six and six abreast, with each man his gun on his shoulder, and たいまつs on each 味方する. After us （機の）カム twelve of the general's men with old Spanish matchlocks, marching four in a 列／漕ぐ／騒動. After them about forty lances, and behind them as many with 広大な／多数の／重要な swords, marching all in order. After them （機の）カム 豊富 only with cressets by their 味方するs, who marched up の近くに without any order. When we （機の）カム 近づく the 暴君's house the 暴君 and his men met us, and we wheeled off to let them pass. The 暴君 had three 野外劇／豪華な行列s went before him: in the first 野外劇／豪華な行列 were four of his sons, who were about ten or eleven years old. They had gotten 豊富 of small 石／投石するs which they roguishly threw about on the people's 長，率いるs. In the next were four young maidens, nieces to the 暴君, 存在 his sister's daughters; and in the third, there was three of the 暴君's children, not above six years old. The 暴君 himself followed next, 存在 carried in his couch, which was not like your Indians' palanquins but open and very little and ordinary. A multitude of people （機の）カム after without any order: but as soon as he was passed by the general and Captain Swan and all our men の近くにd in just behind the 暴君, and so all marched together to the general's house. We （機の）カム thither between 10 and 11 o'clock, where the biggest part of the company were すぐに 解任するd; but the 暴君 and his children and his nieces and some other persons of 質 entered the general's house. They were met at the 長，率いる of the stairs by the general's women, who with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of 尊敬（する）・点 行為／行うd them into the house. Captain Swan and we that were with him followed after. It was not long before the general 原因（となる）d his dancing women to enter the room and コースを変える the company with that pastime. I had forgot to tell you that they have 非，不，無 but 声の music here, by what I could learn, except only a 列／漕ぐ／騒動 of a 肉親，親類d of bells without clappers, 16 in number, and their 負わせる 増加するing 徐々に from about three to ten 続けざまに猛撃する 負わせる. These are 始める，決める in a 列／漕ぐ／騒動 on a （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する in the general's house, where for seven or eight days together before the circumcision day they were struck each with a little stick, for the biggest part of the day making a 広大な／多数の／重要な noise, and they 中止するd that morning. So these dancing women sung themselves and danced to their own music. After this the general's women and the 暴君's sons and his nieces danced. Two of the 暴君's nieces were about 18 or 19 years old, the other two were three or four years younger. These young ladies were very richly dressed with loose 衣料品s of silk, and small coronets on their 長，率いるs. They were much fairer than any women I did ever see there, and very 井戸／弁護士席 featured; and their noses though but small yet higher than the other women's, and very 井戸／弁護士席 割合d. When the ladies had very 井戸／弁護士席 コースを変えるd themselves and the company with dancing the general 原因（となる）d us to 解雇する／砲火／射撃 some sky-ロケット／急騰するs that were made by his and Captain Swan's order, purposely for this night's solemnity; and after that the 暴君 and his retinue went away with a few attendants and we all broke up, and thus ended this day's solemnity: but the boys 存在 sore with their amputation went またがるing for a fortnight after.

They are not, as I said before, very curious, or strict in 観察するing any days or times of particular devotions except it be Ramdam time, as we call it. The Ramdam time was then in August, as I take it, for it was すぐに after our arrival here. In this time they 急速な／放蕩な all day, and about seven o'clock in the evening they spend 近づく an hour in 祈り. に向かって the latter end of their 祈り they loudly invoke their prophet for about a ４半期/4分の1 of an hour, both old and young bawling out very strangely, as if they ーするつもりであるd to fright him out of his sleepiness or neglect of them. After their 祈り is ended, they spend some time in feasting before they take their repose. Thus they do every day for a whole month at least; for いつかs it is two or three days longer before the Ramdam ends: for it begins at the New Moon and lasts till they see the next New Moon, which いつかs in 厚い 煙霧のかかった 天候 is not till three or four days after the change, as it happened while I was at Achin, where they continued the Ramdam till the New Moon's 外見. The next day after they have seen the New Moon the guns are all 発射する／解雇するd about noon, and then the time ends.

THEIR ABHORRENCE OF SWINES' FLESH, ETC.

A main part of their 宗教 consists in washing often to keep themselves from 存在 defiled; or after they are defiled to 洗浄する themselves again. They also take 広大な／多数の／重要な care to keep themselves from 存在 汚染するd by tasting or touching anything that is accounted unclean; therefore swine's flesh is very abominable to them; nay, anyone that has either tasted of swine's flesh or touched those creatures is not permitted to come into their houses in many days after, and there is nothing will 脅す them more than a swine. Yet there are wild hogs in the islands, and those so plentiful that they will come in 軍隊／機動隊s out of the 支持を得ようと努めるd in the night into the very city, and come under their houses to rummage up and 負かす／撃墜する the filth that they find there. The natives therefore would even 願望（する） us to 嘘（をつく） in wait for the hogs to destroy them, which we did frequently, by 狙撃 them and carrying them presently on board, but were 禁じるd their houses afterwards.

And now I am on this 支配する I cannot omit a story 関心ing the general. He once 願望（する）d to have a pair of shoes made after the English fashion, though he did very seldom wear any: so one of our men made him a pair, which the general liked very 井戸／弁護士席. Afterwards somebody told him that the thread wherewith the shoes were （種を）蒔くd were pointed with hogs' bristles. This put him into a 広大な／多数の／重要な passion; so he sent the shoes to the man that made them, and sent him withal more leather to make another pair with threads pointed with some other hair, which was すぐに done, and then he was 井戸／弁護士席 pleased.

CHAPTER 13.

THEIR COASTING ALONG THE ISLE OF MINDANAO, FROM A BAY ON THE EAST SIDE TO ANOTHER AT THE SOUTH-EAST END.

Having in the two last 一時期／支部s given some account of the natural, civil, and 宗教的な 明言する／公表する of Mindanao, I shall now go on with the 起訴 of our 事件／事情／状勢s during our stay here.

It was in a bay on the north-east 味方する of the island that we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者, as has been said. We lay in this bay but one night and part of the next day. Yet there we got speech with some of the natives, who by 調印するs made us to understand that the City Mindanao was on the west 味方する of the island. We endeavoured to 説得する one of them to go with us to be our 操縦する but he would not: therefore in the afternoon we loosed from hence, steering again to the south-east, having the 勝利，勝つd at south-west. When we （機の）カム to the south-east end of the island Mindanao we saw two small islands about three leagues distant from it. We might have passed between them and the main island, as we learnt since; but not knowing them, nor what dangers we might 遭遇（する） there, we chose rather to sail to the eastward of them. But 会合 very strong westerly 勝利，勝つd we got nothing 今後 in many days. In this time we first saw the islands Meangis, which are about sixteen leagues distant from the Mindanao, 耐えるing south-east. I shall have occasion to speak more of them hereafter.

TORNADOES AND BOISTEROUS WEATHER.

The 4th day of July we got into a 深い bay four leagues north-west from the two small islands before について言及するd. But the night before, in a violent トルネード，竜巻, our bark 存在 unable to 耐える any longer, bore away, which put us in some 苦痛 for 恐れる she was overset, as we had like to have been ourselves. We 錨，総合司会者d on the south-west 味方する of the bay in fifteen fathom water, about a cable's length from the shore. Here we were 軍隊d to 避難所 ourselves from the 暴力／激しさ of the 天候, which was so boisterous with rains and トルネード，竜巻s and a strong westerly 勝利，勝つd that we were very glad to find this place to 錨，総合司会者 in, 存在 the only 避難所 on this 味方する from the west 勝利，勝つd.

THE SOUTH-EAST COAST, AND ITS SAVANNAH AND PLENTY OF DEER.

This bay is not above two miles wide at the mouth, but さらに先に in it is three leagues wide and seven fathom 深い; running in north-north-west. There is a good depth of water about four or five leagues in, but rocky foul ground for about two leagues in from the mouth on both 味方するs of the bay, except only in that place where we lay. About three leagues in from the mouth, on the eastern 味方する, there are fair sandy bays and very good 錨，総合司会者ing in four, five, and six fathom. The land on the east 味方する is high, 山地の and woody, yet very 井戸／弁護士席 watered with small brooks, and there is one river large enough for canoes to enter. On the west 味方する of the bay the land is of a mean 高さ with a large savannah 国境ing on the sea, and stretching from the mouth of the bay a 広大な／多数の／重要な way to the 西方の.

This savannah abounds with long grass and it is plentifully 在庫／株d with deer. The 隣接する 支持を得ようと努めるd are a covert for them in the heat of the day; but mornings and evenings they 料金d in the open plains, as 厚い as in our parks in England. I never saw anywhere such plenty of wild deer, though I have met with them in several parts of America, both in the North and South Seas.

The deer live here pretty peaceably and unmolested; for there are no inhabitants on that 味方する of the bay. We visited this savannah every morning and killed as many deer as we pleased, いつかs 16 or 18 in a day; and we did eat nothing but venison all the time we stayed here.

We saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な many 農園s by the 味方するs of the mountains on the east 味方する of the bay, and we went to one of them in hopes to learn of the inhabitants どの辺に the city was, that we might not over-sail it in the night, but they fled from us.

THEY COAST ALONG THE SOUTH SIDE TO THE RIVER OF MINDANAO CITY, AND ANCHOR THERE.

We lay here till the 12th day before the 勝利，勝つd abated of their fury, and then we sailed from hence, directing our course to the 西方の. In the morning we had a land-勝利，勝つd at north. At 11 o'clock the sea-微風 （機の）カム at west, just in our teeth, but it 存在 好天 we kept on our way, turning and taking the advantage of the land-微風s by night and the sea-微風s by day.

存在 now past the south-east part of the island we coasted 負かす／撃墜する on the south 味方する and we saw 豊富 of canoes a-fishing, and now and then a small village. Neither were these inhabitants afraid of us (as the former) but （機の）カム 船内に; yet we could not understand them, nor they us, but by 調印するs: and when we について言及するd the word Mindanao they would point に向かって it.

The 18th day of July we arrived before the river of Mindanao, the mouth of which lies in latitude 6 degrees 22 minutes north and is laid in 231 degrees 12 minutes longitude west, from the Lizard in England. We 錨，総合司会者d 権利 against the river in 15 fathom water, （疑いを）晴らす hard sand, about two miles from the shore and three or four miles from a small island that lay without us to the southward. We 解雇する／砲火／射撃d seven or nine guns, I remember not 井戸／弁護士席 which, and were answered again with three from the shore; for which we gave one again.

THE SULTAN'S BROTHER AND SON COME ABOARD THEM, AND INVITE THEM TO SETTLE THERE.

すぐに after our coming to an 錨，総合司会者 Raja Laut and one of the 暴君's sons （機の）カム off in a canoe, 存在 列／漕ぐ／騒動d with ten oars, and 需要・要求するd in Spanish what we were? and from whence we （機の）カム? Mr. Smith (he who was taken 囚人 at Leon in Mexico) answered in the same language that we were English, and that we had been a 広大な／多数の／重要な while out of England. They told us that we were welcome and asked us a 広大な／多数の／重要な many questions about England; 特に 関心ing our East India merchants; and whether we were sent by them to settle a factory here? Mr. Smith told them that we （機の）カム hither only to buy 準備／条項. They seemed a little discontented when they understood that we were not come to settle の中で them: for they had heard of our arrival on the east 味方する of the island a 広大な／多数の／重要な while before, and entertained hopes that we were sent purposely out of England hither to settle a 貿易（する） with them; which it should seem they are very desirous of. For Captain Goodlud had been here not long before to 扱う／治療する with them about it; and when he went away told them (as they said) that in a short time they might 推定する／予想する an 外交官／大使 from England to make a 十分な 取引 with them.

OF THE FEASIBLENESS AND PROBABLE ADVANTAGE OF SUCH A SETTLEMENT FROM THE NEIGHBOURING GOLD AND SPICE ISLANDS.

Indeed upon 円熟した thoughts I should think we could not have done better than to have 従うd with the 願望（する） they seemed to have of our settling here; and to have taken up our ４半期/4分の1s の中で them. For as その為に we might better have 協議するd our own 利益（をあげる） and satisfaction than by the other loose roving way of life; so it might probably have 証明するd of public 利益 to our nation and been a means of introducing an English 解決／入植地 and 貿易（する）, not only here, but through several of the Spice Islands which 嘘（をつく） in its neighbourhood.

For the islands Meangis, which I について言及するd in the beginning of this 一時期／支部, 嘘（をつく） within twenty leagues of Mindanao. These are three small islands that abound with gold and cloves, if I may credit my author Prince Jeoly, who was born on one of them and was at that time a slave in the city of Mindanao. He might have been 購入（する）d by us of his master for a small 事柄, as he was afterwards by Mr. Moody (who （機の）カム hither to 貿易（する） and laded a ship with clove-bark) and by 輸送（する）ing him home to his own country we might have gotten a 貿易（する） there. But of Prince Jeoly I shall speak more hereafter. These islands are as yet probably unknown to the Dutch who, as I said before, endeavour to engross all the spice into their own 手渡すs.

There was another 適切な時期 申し込む／申し出d us here of settling on another Spice Island that was very 井戸／弁護士席 住むd: for the inhabitants 恐れるing the Dutch and understanding that the English were settling at Mindanao, their 暴君 sent his 甥 to Mindanao while we were there to 招待する us thither: Captain Swan conferred with him about it divers times, and I do believe he had some inclination to 受託する the 申し込む／申し出; and I am sure most of the men were for it: but this never （機の）カム to a 長，率いる for want of a true understanding between Captain Swan and his men, as may be 宣言するd hereafter.

Beside the 利益 which might accrue from this 貿易（する） with Meangis and other the Spice Islands the Philippine Islands themselves, by a little care and 産業, might have afforded us a very 有益な 貿易（する）, and all these 貿易（する）s might have been managed from Mindanao by settling there first. For that island lies very convenient for 貿易（する）ing either to the Spice Islands or to the 残り／休憩（する） of the Philippine Islands: since, as its 国／地域 is much of the same nature with either of them, so it lies as it were in the centre of the gold and spice-貿易（する） in these parts, the islands north of Mindanao abounding most in gold, and those south of Meangis in spice.

OF THE BEST WAY TO MINDANAO BY THE SOUTH SEA AND TERRA AUSTRALIS; AND OF AN ACCIDENTAL DISCOVERY THERE BY CAPTAIN DAVIS, AND A PROBABILITY OF A GREATER.

As the island Mindanao lies very convenient for 貿易（する）, so, considering its distance, the way thither may not be over-long and tiresome. The course that I would choose should be to 始める，決める out of England about the latter end of August, and to pass 一連の会議、交渉／完成する Tierra del Fuego, and so, stretching over に向かって New Holland, coast it along that shore till I （機の）カム 近づく to Mindanao; or first I would coast 負かす／撃墜する 近づく the American shore as far as I 設立する convenient and then direct my course accordingly for the island. By this I should 避ける coming 近づく any of the Dutch 解決／入植地s and be sure to 会合，会う always with a constant きびきびした easterly 貿易（する）-勝利，勝つd after I was once past Tierra del Fuego. 反して in passing about the Cape of Good Hope, after you are 発射 over the East Indian Ocean and are come to the islands, you must pass through the 海峡s of Malacca or Sunda, or else some other 海峡s east from Java, where you will be sure to 会合，会う with country-勝利，勝つd, go on which 味方する of the 赤道 you please; and this would 要求する ordinarily seven or eight months for the voyage, but the other I should hope to 成し遂げる in six or seven at most. In your return from thence also you must 観察する the same 支配する as the Spaniards do in going from Manila to Acapulco; only as they run に向かって the North 政治家 for variable 勝利，勝つd, so you must run to the southward till you 会合，会う with a 勝利，勝つd that will carry you over to Tierra del Fuego. There are places enough to touch at for refreshment, either going or coming. You may touch going thither on either 味方する of Terra Patagonia, or, if you please, at the Galapagos Islands, where there is refreshment enough; and returning you may probably touch somewhere on New Holland, and so make some profitable 発見 in these places without going out of your way. And to speak my thoughts 自由に, I believe it is 借りがあるing to the neglect of this 平易な way that all that 広大な tract of Terra Australis which bounds the South Sea is yet undiscovered: those that cross that sea seeming to design some 商売／仕事 on the Peruvian or Mexican coast, and so leaving that at a distance. To 確認する which I shall 追加する what Captain Davis told me lately that, after his 出発 from us at the 港／避難所 of Realejo (as is について言及するd in the 8th 一時期／支部) he went, after several 横断するs, to the Galapagos, and that, standing thence southward for 勝利，勝つd to bring him about Tierra del Fuego in the latitude of 27 south, about 500 leagues from Copayapo on the coast of Chile, he saw a small sandy island just by him; and that they saw to the 西方の of it a long tract of pretty high land tending away toward the north-west out of sight. This might probably be the coast of Terra Australis Incognita.

THE CAPACITY THEY WERE IN TO SETTLE HERE.

But to return to Mindanao; as to the capacity we were then in, of settling ourselves at Mindanao, although we were not sent out of any such design of settling, yet we were 同様に 供給するd, or better, considering all circumstances, than if we had. For there was 不十分な any useful 貿易（する） but some or other of us understood it. We had sawyers, carpenters, joiners, brick-製造者s, bricklayers, shoemakers, tailors, etc. We only 手配中の，お尋ね者 a good smith for 広大な／多数の／重要な work; which we might have had at Mindanao. We were very 井戸／弁護士席 供給するd with アイロンをかける, lead, and all sorts of 道具s, as saws, axes, 大打撃を与えるs, etc. We had 砕く and 発射 enough, and very good small 武器. If we had designed to build a fort we could have spared 8 or 10 guns out of our ship and men enough to have managed it, and any 事件／事情／状勢 of 貿易（する） beside. We had also a 広大な／多数の／重要な advantage above raw men that are sent out of England into these places, who proceed usually too 慎重に, coldly, and 正式に to compass any かなりの design, which experience better teaches than any 支配するs どれでも; besides the danger of their lives in so 広大な／多数の／重要な and sudden a change of 空気／公表する: 反して we were all 慣れさせるd to hot 気候s, 常習的な by many 疲労，（軍の）雑役s, and in general, daring men, and such as would not be easily baffled. To 追加する one thing more, our men were almost tired and began to 願望（する） a quietus est; and therefore they would 喜んで have seated themselves anywhere. We had a good ship too, and enough of us (beside what might have been spared to manage our new 解決／入植地) to bring the news with the 影響s to the owners in England: for Captain Swan had already five thousand 続けざまに猛撃する in gold, which he and his merchants received for goods sold mostly to Captain Harris and his men: which if he had laid but part of it out in spice, as probably he might have done, would have 満足させるd the merchants to their hearts' content. So much by way of digression.

To proceed therefore with our first 歓迎会 at Mindanao, Raja Laut and his 甥 sat still in their canoe, and would not come 船内に us; because, as they said, they had no orders for it from the 暴君. After about half an hour's discourse they took their leaves; first 招待するing Captain Swan 岸に and 約束ing to 補助装置 him in getting 準備／条項; which they said at 現在の was 不十分な, but in three or four month's time the rice would be gathered in and then he might have as much as he pleased: and that in the 合間 he might 安全な・保証する his ship in some convenient place for 恐れる of the westerly 勝利，勝つd which they said would be very violent at the latter end of this month and all the next, as we 設立する them.

THE MINDANAYANS MEASURE THEIR SHIP.

We did not know the 質 of these two persons till after they were gone; else we should have 解雇する／砲火／射撃d some guns at their 出発: when they were gone a 確かな officer under the 暴君 （機の）カム 船内に and 手段d our ship. A custom derived from the Chinese, who always 手段 the length and breadth, and the depth of the 持つ／拘留する of all ships that come to 負担 there: by which means they know how much each ship will carry. But what 推論する／理由 this custom is used either by the Chinese or Mindanao men I could never learn: unless the Mindanayans design by this means to 改善する their 技術 in shipping, against they have a 貿易（する）.

CAPTAIN SWAN'S PRESENT TO THE SULTAN: HIS RECEPTION OF IT, AND AUDIENCE GIVEN TO CAPTAIN SWAN, WITH RAJA LAUT, THE SULTAN'S BROTHER'S ENTERTAINMENT OF HIM.

Captain Swan, considering that the season of the year would 強いる us to spend some time at this island, thought it convenient to make what 利益／興味 he could with the 暴君; who might afterwards either 妨害する or 前進する his designs. He therefore すぐに 供給するd a 現在の to send 岸に to the 暴君, すなわち, three yards of scarlet cloth, three yards of 幅の広い gold lace, a Turkish scimitar and a pair of ピストルs: and to Raja Laut he sent three yards of scarlet cloth and three yards of silver lace. This 現在の was carried by Mr. Henry More in the evening. He was first 行為／行うd to Raja Laut's house; where he remained till 報告（する）／憶測 thereof was made to the 暴君, who すぐに gave order for all things to be made ready to receive him.

About nine o'clock at night a messenger （機の）カム from the 暴君 to bring the 現在の away. Then Mr. More was 行為／行うd all the way with たいまつs and 武装した men till he （機の）カム to the house where the 暴君 was. The 暴君 with eight or ten men of his 会議 were seated on carpets, waiting his coming. The 現在の that Mr. More brought was laid 負かす／撃墜する before them, and was very kindly 受託するd by the 暴君, who 原因（となる）d Mr. More to sit 負かす／撃墜する by them and asked a 広大な／多数の／重要な many questions of him. The discourse was in Spanish by an interpreter. This 会議／協議会 lasted about an hour and then he was 解任するd and returned again to Raja Laut's house. There was a supper 供給するd for him, and the boat's 乗組員; after which he returned 船内に.

The next day the 暴君 sent for Captain Swan: he すぐに went 岸に with a 旗 飛行機で行くing in the boat's 長，率いる and two trumpets sounding all the way. When he （機の）カム 岸に he was met at his 上陸 by two 主要な／長／主犯 officers, guarded along with 兵士s and 豊富 of people gazing to see him. The 暴君 waited for him in his 議会 of audience, where Captain Swan was 扱う／治療するd with タバコ and betel, which was all his entertainment.

THE CONTENTS OF TWO ENGLISH LETTERS SHOWN THEM BY THE SULTAN OF MINDANAO.

The 暴君 sent for two English letters for Captain Swan to read, purposely to let him know that our East India merchants did design to settle here, and that they had already sent a ship hither. One of these letters was sent to the 暴君 from England by the East India merchants. The chiefest things 含む／封じ込めるd in it, as I remember, for I saw it afterwards in the 長官's 手渡す, who was very proud to show it to us, was to 願望（する） some 特権s ーするために the building of a fort there. This letter was written in a very fair 手渡す; and between each line there was a gold line drawn. The other letter was left by Captain Goodlud, directed to any English-men who should happen to come thither. This 関係のある wholly to 貿易（する）, giving an account at what 率 he had agreed with them for goods of the island, and how European goods should be sold to them with an account of their 負わせるs and 対策, and their difference from ours.

OF THE COMMODITIES AND THE PUNISHMENTS THERE.

The 率 agreed on for Mindanao gold was 14 Spanish dollars (which is a 現在の coin all over India) the English ounce, and 18 dollars the Mindanao ounce. But for beeswax and clove-bark I do not remember the 率s, neither do I 井戸／弁護士席 remember the 率s of Europe 商品／必需品s; but I think the 率 of アイロンをかける was not above 4 dollars a hundred. Captain Goodlud's letter 結論するs thus. "信用 非，不，無 of them, for they are all thieves, but tace is Latin for a candle." We understood afterwards that Captain Goodlud was robbed of some goods by one of the general's men, and that he that robbed him was fled into the mountains and could not be 設立する while Captain Goodlud was here. But, the fellow returning 支援する to the city some time after our arrival here, Raja Laut brought him bound to Captain Swan and told him what he had done, 願望（する）ing him to punish him for it as he pleased; but Captain Swan excused himself and said it did not belong to him, therefore he would have nothing to do with it. However the General Raja Laut would not 容赦 him, but punished him によれば their own custom, which I did never see but at this time.

He was stripped stark naked in the morning at sun-rising, and bound to a 地位，任命する, so that he could not 動かす 手渡す nor foot but as he was moved; and was placed with his 直面する eastward against the sun. In the afternoon they turned his 直面する に向かって the west that the sun might still be in his 直面する; and thus he stood all day, parched in the sun (which 向こうずねs here 過度に hot) and tormented with the mosquitoes or gnats: after this the general would have killed him if Captain Swan had 同意d to it. I did never see any put to death; but I believe they are barbarous enough in it. The general told us himself that he put two men to death in a town where some of us were with him; but I heard not the manner of it. Their ありふれた way of punishing is to （土地などの）細長い一片 them in this manner and place them in the sun; but いつかs they lay them flat on their 支援するs on the sand, which is very hot; where they remain a whole day in the scorching sun with the mosquitoes biting them all the time.

This 活動／戦闘 of the general in 申し込む／申し出ing Captain Swan the 罰 of the どろぼう 原因（となる）d Captain Swan afterwards to make him the same 申し込む／申し出 of his men when any had 感情を害する／違反するd the Mindanao men: but the general left such 違反者／犯罪者s to be punished by Captain Swan as he thought convenient. So that for the least offence Captain Swan punished his men, and that in the sight of the Mindanayans; and I think いつかs only for 復讐; as he did once punish his 長，指導者 mate Mr. Teat, he that （機の）カム captain of the bark to Mindanao. Indeed at that time Captain Swan had his men as much under 命令（する） as if he had been in a king's ship: and had he known how to use his 当局 he might have led them to any 解決／入植地, and have brought them to 補助装置 him in any design he had pleased.

THE GENERAL'S CAUTION HOW TO DEMEAN THEMSELVES; AT HIS PERSUASION THEY LAY UP THEIR SHIPS IN THE RIVER.

Captain Swan 存在 解任するd from the 暴君, with 豊富 of civility, after about two hours' discourse with him, went thence to Raja Laut's house. Raja Laut had then some difference with the 暴君, and therefore he was not 現在の at the 暴君's 歓迎会 of our captain but waited his return and 扱う／治療するd him and all his men with boiled rice and fowls. He then told Captain Swan again, and 勧めるd it to him, that it would be best to get his ship into the river as soon as he could because of the usual tempestuous 天候 at this time of the year; and that he should want no 援助 to その上の him in anything. He told him also that, as we must of necessity stay here some time, so our men would often come 岸に; and he therefore 願望（する）d him to 警告する his men to be careful to give no affront to the natives; who, he said, were very revengeful. That their customs 存在 different from ours, he 恐れるd that Captain Swan's men might some time or other 感情を害する／違反する them, though ignorantly; that therefore he gave him this friendly 警告 to 妨げる it: that his house should always be open to receive him or any of his men, and that he, knowing our customs, would never be 感情を害する／違反するd at anything. After a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of such discourse he 解任するd the Captain and his company, who took their leave and （機の）カム 船内に.

Captain Swan, having seen the two letters, did not 疑問 but that the English did design to settle a factory here: therefore he did not much scruple the honesty of these people, but すぐに ordered us to get the ship into the river. The river upon which the city of Mindanao stands is but small and has not above 10 or 11 foot water on the 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業 at a spring-tide: therefore we lightened our ship and, the spring coming on, we with much ado got her into the river, 存在 補助装置d by 50 or 60 Mindanayan fishermen who lived at the mouth of the river; Raja Laut himself 存在 船内に our ship to direct them. We carried her about a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile up, within the mouth of the river, and there moored her 長，率いる and 厳しい in a 穴を開ける where we always 棒 afloat.

THE MINDANAYANS' CARESSES.

After this the 国民s of Mindanao （機の）カム frequently 船内に to 招待する our men to their houses, and to 申し込む／申し出 us pagallies. It was a long time since any of us had received such friendship, and therefore we were the more easily drawn to 受託する of their 親切s; and in a very short time most of our men got a comrade or two, and as many pagallies; 特に such of us as had good 着せる／賦与するs and 蓄える／店 of gold, as many had who were of the number of those that …を伴ってd Captain Harris over the Isthmus of Darien, the 残り／休憩（する） of us 存在 poor enough. Nay, the very poorest and meanest of us could hardly pass the streets but we were even 運ぶ／漁獲高d by 軍隊 into their houses to be 扱う／治療するd by them: although their 扱う／治療するs were but mean, すなわち, タバコ, or betel-nut, or a little 甘い spiced water; yet their seeming 誠実, 簡単, and the manner of bestowing these gifts made them very 許容できる. When we （機の）カム to their houses they would always be 賞賛するing the English, as 宣言するing that the English and Mindanayans were all one. This they 表明するd by putting their two forefingers の近くに together and 説 that the English and Mindanayans were "samo, samo," that is, all one. Then they would draw their forefingers half a foot asunder and say the Dutch and they were "bugeto," which signifies so, that they were at such distance in point of friendship: and for the Spaniards they would make a greater 代表 of distance than for the Dutch: 恐れるing these, but having felt and smarted from the Spaniards who had once almost brought them under.

Captain Swan did seldom go into any house at first but into Raja Laut's. There he dined 一般的に every day; and as many of his men as were 岸に and had no money to entertain themselves 訴える手段／行楽地d thither about 12 o'clock, where they had rice enough boiled and 井戸／弁護士席 dressed, and some 捨てるs of fowls, or bits of buffalo, dressed very nastily. Captain Swan was served a little better, and his two trumpeters sounded all the time that he was at dinner. After dinner Raja Laut would sit and discourse with him most part of the afternoon. It was now the Ramdam time, therefore the general excused himself that he could not entertain our captain with dances and other pastimes, as he ーするつもりであるd to do when this solemn time was past; besides, it was the very 高さ of the wet season, and therefore not so proper for pastimes.

THE GREAT RAINS AND FLOODS OF THE CITY.

We had now very tempestuous 天候 and 過度の rains which so swelled the river that it 洪水d its banks; so that we had much ado to keep our ship 安全な: for every now and then we should have a 広大な／多数の／重要な tree come floating 負かす／撃墜する the river and いつかs 宿泊する against our 屈服するs, to the 危うくするing the breaking our cables, and either the 運動ing us in over the banks or carrying us out to sea; both which would have been very dangerous to us, 特に 存在 without ballast.

The city is about a mile long (of no 広大な／多数の／重要な breadth) winding with the banks of the river on the 権利 手渡す going up, though it has many houses on the other 味方する too. But at this time it seemed to stand as in a pond, and there was no passing from one house to another but in canoes. This tempestuous 雨の 天候 happened the latter end of July, and lasted most part of August.

When the bad 天候 was a little assuaged Captain Swan 雇うd a house to put our sails and goods in while we careened our ship. We had a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of アイロンをかける and lead, which was brought 岸に into this house. Of these 商品／必需品s Captain Swan sold to the 暴君 or general 8 or 10 tuns at the 率s agreed on by Captain Goodlud, to be paid in rice.

THE MINDANAYANS HAVE CHINESE ACCOUNTANTS.

The Mindanayans are no good accountants; therefore the Chinese that live here do cast up their accounts for them. After this Captain Swan bought 木材／素質-trees of the general, and 始める，決める some of our men to saw them into planks to sheath the ship's 底（に届く）. He had two whip-saws on board which he brought out of England, and four or five men that knew the use of them, for they had been sawyers in Jamaica.

HOW THEIR WOMEN DANCE.

When the Ramdam time was over, and the 乾燥した，日照りの time 始める，決める in a little, the general, to 強いる Captain Swan, entertained him every night with dances. The dancing women that are purposely bred up to it and make it their 貿易（する） I have already 述べるd. But beside them all the women in general are much （麻薬）常用者d to dancing. They dance 40 or 50 at once; and that standing all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する in a （犯罪の）一味, joined 手渡す in 手渡す and singing and keeping time. But they never budge out of their places nor make any 動議 till the chorus is sung; then all at once they throw out one 脚 and bawl out aloud; and いつかs they only clap their 手渡すs when the chorus is sung. Captain Swan, to 報復する the general's favours, sent for his violins and some that could dance English dances; wherewith the general was very 井戸／弁護士席 pleased. They 一般的に spent the biggest part of the night in these sort of pastimes.

A STORY OF ONE JOHN THACKER.

の中で the 残り／休憩（する） of our men that did use to dance thus before the general there was one John Thacker who was a 船員 bred, and could neither 令状 nor read but had 以前は learnt to dance in the music houses about Wapping: this man （機の）カム into the South Seas with Captain Harris and, getting with him a good 量 of gold, and 存在 a pretty good husband of his 株, had still some left besides what he laid out in a very good 控訴 of 着せる／賦与するs. The general supposed by his garb and his dancing that he had been of noble extraction; and to be 満足させるd of his 質 asked of one of our men if he did not guess aright of him? The man of whom the general asked this question told him he was much in the 権利; and that most of our ship's company were of the like extraction; 特に all those that had 罰金 着せる／賦与するs; and that they （機の）カム 船内に only to see the world, having money enough to 耐える their expenses wherever they （機の）カム; but that for the 残り／休憩（する）, those that had but mean 着せる／賦与するs, they were only ありふれた seamen. After this the general showed a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of 尊敬（する）・点 to all that had good 着せる／賦与するs, but 特に to John Thacker, till Captain Swan （機の）カム to know the 商売／仕事, and marred all; undeceiving the general and drubbing the nobleman: for he was so much incensed against John Thacker that he could never 耐える him afterwards; though the poor fellow knew nothing of the 事柄.

THEIR BARK EATEN UP, AND THEIR SHIP ENDANGERED BY THE WORM.

About the middle of November we began to work on our ship's 底（に届く）, which we 設立する very much eaten with the worm: for this is a horrid place for worms. We did not know this till after we had been in the river a month, and then we 設立する our canoes' 底（に届く）s eaten like honeycombs; our bark, which was a 選び出す／独身 底（に届く）, was eaten through; so that she could not swim. But our ship was sheathed, and the worm （機の）カム no その上の than the hair between the sheathing plank and the main plank.

RAJA LAUT, THE GENERAL'S DECEITFULNESS.

We did not 不信 the general's knavery till now: for when he （機の）カム 負かす／撃墜する to our ship, and 設立する us ripping off the sheathing plank, and saw the 会社／堅い 底（に届く） underneath, he shook his 長，率いる, and seemed to be discontented; 説 he did never see a ship with two 底（に届く）s before. We were told that in this place where we now lay a Dutch ship was eaten up in 2 months' time, and the general had all her guns; and it is probable he did 推定する／予想する to have had ours: which I do believe was the main 推論する／理由 that made him so 今後 in 補助装置ing us to get our ship into the river, for when we （機の）カム out again we had no 援助 from him.

OF THE WORMS HERE AND ELSEWHERE.

We had no worms till we （機の）カム to this place: for when we careened at the Marias the worm had not touched us; nor at Guam, for there we scrubbed; nor after we （機の）カム to the island Mindanao; for at the south-east end of the island we heeled and scrubbed also. The Mindanayans are so sensible of these destructive insects that whenever they come from sea they すぐに 運ぶ／漁獲高 their ship into a 乾燥した，日照りの ドッキングする／減らす／ドックに入れる, and 燃やす her 底（に届く）, and there let her 嘘（をつく） 乾燥した，日照りの till they are ready to go to sea again. The canoes or proas they 運ぶ／漁獲高 up 乾燥した，日照りの and never 苦しむ them to be long in the water. It is 報告（する）／憶測d that those worms which get into a ship's 底（に届く） in the salt water will die in the fresh water; and that the fresh-water worms will die in salt water; but in the brackish water both sorts will 増加する prodigiously. Now this place where we lay was いつかs brackish water, yet 一般的に fresh; but what sort of worm this was I know not. Some men are of opinion that these worms 産む／飼育する in the plank; but I am 説得するd they 産む／飼育する in the sea: for I have seen millions of them swimming in the water, 特に in the Bay of パナマ; for there Captain Davis, Captain Swan, and myself and most of our men did take notice of them divers times, which was the 推論する／理由 of our きれいにする so often while we were there: and these were the largest worms that I did ever see. I have also seen them in Virginia and in the Bay of Campeachy; in the latter of which places the worms eat prodigiously. They are always in bays, creeks, mouths of rivers, and such places as are 近づく the shore; 存在 never 設立する far out at sea that I could ever learn: yet a ship will bring them 宿泊するd in its plank for a 広大な／多数の／重要な way.

OF CAPTAIN SWAN.

Having thus ripped off all our worm-eaten plank and clapped on new, by the beginning of December 1686, our ship's 底（に届く） was sheathed and tallowed, and the 10th day we went over the 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業 and took 船内に the アイロンをかける and lead that we could not sell, and began to fill our water and fetch 船内に rice for our voyage: but Captain Swan remained 岸に still and was not yet 決定するd when to sail or whither. But I am 井戸／弁護士席 保証するd that he did never ーするつもりである to 巡航する about Manila, as his 乗組員 designed; for I did once ask him, and he told me that what he had already done of that 肉親，親類d he was 軍隊d to; but now 存在 at liberty he would never more engage in any such design: for, said he, there is no prince on Earth is able to wipe off the stain of such 活動／戦闘s. What other designs he had I know not, for he was 一般的に very cross; yet he did never 提案する doing anything else, but only ordered the 準備／条項 to be got 船内に ーするために sail; and I am 確信して if he had made a 動議 to go to any English factory most of his men would have 同意d to it, though probably some would have still …に反対するd it. However his 当局 might soon have over-swayed those that were refractory; for it was very strange to see the awe that these men were in of him, for he punished the most stubborn and daring of his men. Yet when we had brought the ship out into the road they were not altogether so submissive as while it lay in the river, though even then it was that he punished Captain Teat.

HUNTING WILD KINE.

I was at that time a-追跡（する）ing with the general for beef, which he had a long time 約束d us. But now I saw that there was no credit to be given to his word; for I was a week out with him and saw but four cows which were so wild that we did not get one. There were five or six more of our company with me; these who were young men and had Delilahs there, which made them fond of the place, all agreed with the general to tell Captain Swan that there were beeves enough, only they were wild. But I told him the truth, and advised him not to be too credulous of the general's 約束s. He seemed to be very angry, and 嵐／襲撃するd behind the general's 支援する, but in his presence was very mute, 存在 a man of small courage.

It was about the 20th day of December when we returned from 追跡（する）ing, and the general designed to go again to another place to 追跡（する） for beef; but he stayed till after Christmas Day because some of us designed to go with him; and Captain Swan had 願望（する）d all his men to be 船内に that day that we might keep it solemnly together: and accordingly he sent 船内に a buffalo the day before that we might have a good dinner. So the 25th day about 10 o'clock Captain Swan （機の）カム 船内に and all his men who were 岸に: for you must understand that 近づく a third of our men lived 絶えず 岸に with their comrades and pagallies, and some with women-servants whom they 雇うd of their masters for concubines.

THE PRODIGALITY OF SOME OF THE ENGLISH.

Some of our men also had houses which they 雇うd or bought, for houses are very cheap, for 5 or 6 dollars. For many of them, having more money than they knew what to do with, 緩和するd themselves here of the trouble of telling it, spending it very lavishly, their prodigality making the people 課す upon them, to the making the 残り／休憩（する） of us 支払う／賃金 the dearer for what we bought, and to 危うくするing the like 課税s upon such Englishmen as may come here hereafter. For the Mindanayans knew how to get our squires gold from them (for we had no silver) and when our men 手配中の，お尋ね者 silver they would change now and then an ounce of gold and could get for it no more than ten or eleven dollars for a Mindanao ounce, which they would not part with again under eighteen dollars. Yet this and the 広大な／多数の／重要な prices the Mindanayans 始める，決める on their goods were not the only way to 少なくなる their 在庫／株s; for their pagallies and comrades would often be begging somewhat of them, and our men were generous enough and would bestow half an ounce of gold at a time, in a （犯罪の）一味 for their pagallies, or in a silver wrist-禁止（する）d, or hoop to come about their 武器, in hopes to get a night's 宿泊するing with them.

When we are all 船内に on Christmas Day, Captain Swan and his two merchants; I did 推定する／予想する that Captain Swan would have made some 提案s or have told us his designs; but he only dined and went 岸に again without speaking anything of his mind.

CAPTAIN SWAN TREATS WITH A YOUNG INDIAN OF A SPICE ISLAND.

Yet even then I do think that he was 運動ing on a design of going to one of the Spice Islands to 負担 with Spice; for the young man before について言及するd, who I said was sent by his uncle, the 暴君 of a Spice Island 近づく Ternate, to 招待する the English to their island, （機の）カム 船内に at this time, and after some 私的な discourse with Captain Swan they both went 岸に together. This young man did not care that the Mindanayans should be privy to what he said. I have heard Captain Swan say that he 申し込む／申し出d to 負担 his ship with spice 供給するd he would build a small fort and leave some men to 安全な・保証する the island from the Dutch; but I am since 知らせるd that the Dutch have now got 所有／入手 of the island.

A HUNTING-VOYAGE WITH THE GENERAL.

The next day after Christmas, the general went away again, and 5 or 6 Englishmen with him, of whom I was one, under pretence of going a-追跡（する）ing; and we all went together by water in his proa, together with his women and servants, to the 追跡（する）ing-place. The general always carried his wives and children, his servants, his money and goods with him: so we all 乗る，着手するd in the morning and arrived there before night. I have already 述べるd the fashion of their proas and the rooms made in them. We were entertained in the general's room or cabin. Our voyage was not so far but that we reached our fort before night.

HIS PUNISHING A SERVANT OF HIS.

At this time one of the general's servants had 感情を害する／違反するd, and was punished in this manner: he was bound 急速な／放蕩な flat on his belly on a bamboo belonging to the prow, which was so 近づく the water that by the 大型船's 動議 it frequently delved under water, and the man along with it; and いつかs when hoisted up he had 不十分な time to blow before he would be carried under water again.

When we had 列／漕ぐ／騒動d about two leagues we entered a pretty large 深い river and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d up a league その上の, the water salt all the way. There was a pretty large village, the houses built after the country fashion. We landed at this place, where there was a house made ready すぐに for us. The general and his women lay at one end of the house and we at the other end, and in the evening all the women in the village danced before the general.

OF HIS WIVES AND WOMEN.

While we stayed here the general with his men went out every morning betimes and did not return till four or five o'clock in the afternoon, and he would often compliment us by telling us what good 信用 and 信用／信任 he had in us, 説 that he left his women and goods under our 保護 and that he thought them as 安全な・保証する with us six (for we had all our 武器 with us) as if he had left 109 of his own men to guard them. Yet for all this 広大な／多数の／重要な 信用／信任 he always left one of his 主要な／長／主犯 men for 恐れる some of us should be too familiar with his women.

They did never 動かす out of their own room when the general was at home, but as soon as he was gone out they would presently come into our room and sit with us all day, and ask a thousand questions of us 関心ing our Englishwomen and our customs. You may imagine that before this time some of us had 達成するd so much of their language as to understand them and give them answers to their 需要・要求するs. I remember that one day they asked how many wives the King of England had? We told them but one, and that our English 法律s did not 許す of any more. They said it was a strange custom that a man should be 限定するd to one woman; some of them said it was a very bad 法律, but others again said it was a good 法律; so there was a 広大な／多数の／重要な 論争 の中で them about it. But one of the general's women said 前向きに／確かに that our 法律 was better than theirs, and made them all silent by the 推論する／理由 which she gave for it. This was the War Queen, as we called her, for she did always …を伴って the general whenever he was called out to engage his enemies, but the 残り／休憩（する） did not. By this familiarity の中で the women, and by often discoursing them, we （機の）カム to be 熟知させるd with their customs and 特権s. The general lies with his wives by turns; but she by whom he had the first son has a 二塁打 部分 of his company: for when it comes to her turn she has him two nights, 反して the 残り／休憩（する） have him but one. She with whom he is to 嘘（をつく） at night seems to have a particular 尊敬（する）・点 shown her by the 残り／休憩（する） all the precedent day; and for a 示す of distinction wears a （土地などの）細長い一片d silk handkerchief about her neck, by which we knew who was queen that day.

We lay here about 5 or 6 days but did never in all that time see the least 調印する of any beef, which was the 商売／仕事 we （機の）カム about, neither were we 苦しむd to go out with the general to see the wild 肉親，親類, but we 手配中の，お尋ね者 for nothing else: however this did not please us, and we often importuned him to let us go out の中で the cattle. At last he told us that he had 供給するd a jar of rice-drink to be merry with us, and after that we should go with him.

A SORT OF STRONG RICE-DRINK.

This rice-drink is made of rice boiled and put into a jar, where it remains a long time 法外なing in water. I know not the manner of making it but it is very strong pleasant drink. The evening when the general designed to be merry he 原因（となる）d a jar of this drink to be brought into our room, and he began to drink first himself, then afterwards his men; so they took turns till they were all as drunk as swine before they 苦しむd us to drink. After they had enough then we drank, and they drank no more, for they will not drink after us. The general leapt about our room a little while; but having his 負担 soon went to sleep.

The next day we went out with the general into the savannah where he had 近づく 100 men making of a large pen to 運動 the cattle into. For that is the manner of their 追跡（する）ing, having no dogs, But I saw not above eight or ten cows; and those as wild as deer, so that we got 非，不，無 this day: yet the next day some of his men brought in three heifers which they killed in the savannah. With these we returned 船内に, they 存在 all that we got there.

1687.

THE GENERAL'S FOUL DEALING AND EXACTIONS.

Captain Swan was much 悩ますd at the general's 活動／戦闘s for he 約束d to 供給（する） us with as much beef as we should want, but now either could not or would not make good his 約束. Besides, he failed to 成し遂げる his 約束 in a 取引 of rice that we were to have for the アイロンをかける which we sold him, but he put us off still from time to time and would not come to any account. Neither were these all his tricks; for a little before his son was circumcised (of which I spoke in the foregoing 一時期／支部) he pretended a 広大な／多数の／重要な 海峡 for money to defray the 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金s of that day; and therefore 願望（する）d Captain Swan to lend him about twenty ounces of gold; for he knew that Captain Swan had a かなりの 量 of gold in his 所有／入手, which the general thought was his own, but indeed he had 非，不，無 but what belonged to the merchants. However he lent it the general; but when he （機の）カム to an account with Captain Swan he told him that it was usual at such solemn times to make 現在のs, and that he received it as a gift. He also 需要・要求するd 支払い（額） for the victuals that our captain and his men did eat at his house.

CAPTAIN SWAN'S UNEASINESS AND INDISCREET MANAGEMENT.

These things startled Captain Swan, yet how to help himself he knew not. But all this, with other inward troubles, lay hard on our captain's spirits and put him very much out of humour; for his own company were 圧力（をかける）ing him every day to be gone, because now was the 高さ of the easterly 季節風, the only 勝利，勝つd to carry us さらに先に into the Indies.

About this time some of our men, who were 疲れた／うんざりした and tired with wandering, ran away into the country and absconded, they 存在 補助装置d, as was 一般に believed by Raja Laut. There were others also who, 恐れるing we should not go to an English port, bought a canoe and designed to go in her to Borneo: for not long before the Mindanao 大型船 （機の）カム from thence and brought a letter directed to the 長，指導者 of the English factory at Mindanao. This letter the general would have Captain Swan have opened, but he thought it might come from some of the East India merchants whose 事件／事情／状勢s he would not intermeddle with, and therefore did not open it. I since met with Captain Bowry at Achin and, telling him this story, he said that he sent that letter, supposing that the English were settled there at Mindanao; and by this letter we also thought that there was an English factory at Borneo: so here was a mistake on both 味方するs. But this canoe, wherewith some of them thought to go to Borneo, Captain Swan took from them, and 脅すd the undertakers very hardly. However this did not so far discourage them, for they 内密に bought another; but their designs taking 空気／公表する they were again 失望させるd by Captain Swan.

The whole 乗組員 were at this time under a general disaffection and 十分な of very different 事業／計画（する）s; and all for want of 活動／戦闘. The main 分割 was between those that had money and those that had 非，不，無. There was a 広大な／多数の／重要な difference in the humours of these; for they that had money lived 岸に and did not care for leaving Mindanao; whilst those that were poor lived 船内に and 勧めるd Captain Swan to go to sea. These began to be unruly 同様に as 不満な, and sent 岸に the merchants' アイロンをかける to sell for rack and honey to make punch, wherewith they grew drunk and quarrelsome: which disorderly 活動／戦闘s deterred me from going 船内に; for I did ever abhor drunkenness, which now our men that were 船内に abandoned themselves wholly to.

Yet these disorders might have been 鎮圧するd if Captain Swan had used his 当局 to 抑える them: but he with his merchants living always 岸に there was no 命令（する）; and therefore every man did what he pleased and encouraged each other in his villainies. Now Mr. Harthop, who was one of Captain Swan's merchants, did very much importune him to settle his 決意／決議s and 宣言する his mind to his men; which at last he 同意d to do. Therefore he gave 警告 to all his men to come 船内に the 13th day of January 1687.

We did all 真面目に 推定する／予想する to hear what Captain Swan would 提案する and therefore were very willing to go 船内に. But, unluckily for him, two days before this 会合 was to be Captain Swan sent 船内に his gunner to fetch something 岸に out of his cabin. The gunner, rummaging to find what he was sent for, の中で other things took out the captain's 定期刊行物 from America to the island Guam, and laid 負かす／撃墜する by him. This 定期刊行物 was taken up by one John Read, a Bristol man whom I have について言及するd in my 4th 一時期／支部. He was a pretty ingenious young man, and of a very civil carriage and behaviour. He was also accounted a good artist, and kept a 定期刊行物, and was now 誘発するd by his curiosity to peep into Captain Swan's 定期刊行物 to see how it agreed with his own, a thing very usual の中で the seamen that keep 定期刊行物s, when they have an 適切な時期, and 特に young men who have no 広大な／多数の／重要な experience. At the first 開始 of the 調書をとる／予約する he lit on a place in which Captain Swan had inveighed 激しく against most of his men, 特に against another John Reed a Jamaica man. This was such stuff as he did not 捜し出す after: but, hitting so pat on this 支配する, his curiosity led him to 調査する その上の; and therefore, while the gunner was busy, he 伝えるd the 調書をとる／予約する away to look over it at his leisure. The gunner, having 派遣（する）d his 商売／仕事, locked up the cabin-door, not 行方不明の the 調書をとる／予約する, and went 岸に. Then John Reed showed it to his namesake and to the 残り／休憩（する） that were 船内に, who were by this time the biggest part of them 熟した for mischief; only wanting some fair pretence to 始める，決める themselves to work about it.

HIS MEN MUTINY.

Therefore looking on what was written in this 定期刊行物 to be 事柄 十分な for them to 遂行する their ends Captain Teat who, as I said before, had been 乱用d by Captain Swan, laid 持つ／拘留する on this 適切な時期 to be 復讐d for his 傷害s and 悪化させるd the 事柄 to the 高さ; 説得するing the men to turn out Captain Swan from 存在 指揮官 in hopes to have 命令（する）d the ship himself. As for the seamen they were easily 説得するd to anything; for they were やめる tired with this long and tedious voyage, and most of them despaired of ever getting home and therefore did not care what they did or whither they went. It was only want of 存在 busied in some 活動／戦闘 that made them so uneasy; therefore they 同意d to what Teat 提案するd, and すぐに all that were 船内に bound themselves by 誓い to turn Captain Swan out and to 隠す this design from those that were 岸に until the ship was under sail; which would have been presently if the 外科医 or his mate had been 船内に; but they were both 岸に, and they thought it no prudence to go to sea without a 外科医: therefore the next morning they sent 岸に one John Cookworthy to 急いで off either the 外科医 or his mate by pretending that one of the men in the night broke his 脚 by 落ちるing into the 持つ／拘留する. The 外科医 told him that he ーするつもりであるd to come 船内に the next day with the captain and would not come before; but sent his mate, Herman Coppinger.

OF A SNAKE TWISTING ABOUT ONE OF THEIR NECKS.

This man some time before this was sleeping at his pagallies and a snake 新たな展開d himself about his neck; but afterwards went away without 傷つけるing him. In this country it is usual to have the snakes come into the houses and into the ships too; for we had several （機の）カム 船内に our ship when we lay in the river. But to proceed, Herman Coppinger 供給するd to go 船内に; and the next day, 存在 the time 任命するd for Captain Swan and all his men to 会合，会う 船内に, I went 船内に with him, neither of us 不信d what was designing by those 船内に till we （機の）カム thither. Then we 設立する it was only a trick to get the 外科医 off; for now, having 得るd their 願望（する）s, the canoe was sent 岸に again すぐに to 願望（する） as many as they could 会合，会う to come 船内に; but not to tell the 推論する／理由 lest Captain Swan should come to hear of it.

The 13th day in the morning they 重さを計るd and 解雇する／砲火／射撃d a gun: Captain Swan すぐに sent 船内に Mr. Nelly, who was now his 長，指導者 mate, to see what the 事柄 was: to him they told all their grievances and showed him the 定期刊行物. He 説得するd them to stay till the next day for an answer from Captain Swan and the merchants. So they （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 again and the next morning Mr. Harthop （機の）カム 船内に: he 説得するd them to be reconciled again, or at least to stay and get more rice: but they were deaf to it and 重さを計るd again while he was 船内に. Yet at Mr. Harthop's 説得／派閥 they 約束d to stay till two o'clock in the afternoon for Captain Swan and the 残り／休憩（する） of the men, if they would come 船内に; but they 苦しむd no man to go 岸に except one William Williams that had a 木造の 脚 and another that was a sawyer.

THE MAIN PART OF THE CREW GO AWAY WITH THE SHIP, LEAVING CAPTAIN SWAN AND SOME OF HIS MEN: SEVERAL OTHERS POISONED THERE.

If Captain Swan had yet come 船内に he might have dashed all their designs; but he neither （機の）カム himself, as a captain of any prudence and courage would have done, nor sent till the time was 満了する／死ぬd. So we left Captain Swan and about 36 men 岸に in the city, and six or eight that ran away; and about 16 we had buried there, the most of which died by 毒（薬）. The natives are very 専門家 at 毒（薬）ing and do it upon small occasions: nor did our men want for giving offence through their general rogueries, and いつかs by dallying too familiarly with their women, even before their 直面するs. Some of their 毒（薬）s are slow and ぐずぐず残る; for we had some now 船内に who were 毒（薬）d there but died not till some months after.

CHAPTER 14.

THEY DEPART FROM THE RIVER OF MINDANAO.

The 14th day of January 1687 at three of the clock in the afternoon we sailed from the river of Mindanao, designing to 巡航する before Manila.

OF THE TIME LOST OR GAINED IN SAILING ROUND THE WORLD: WITH A CAUTION TO SEAMEN, ABOUT THE ALLOWANCE THEY ARE TO TAKE FOR THE DIFFERENCE OF THE SUN'S DECLINATION.

It was during our stay at Mindanao that we were first made sensible of the change of time in the course of our voyage. For, having travelled so far 西方の, keeping the same course with the sun, we must その結果 have 伸び（る）d something insensibly in the length of the particular days, but have lost in the tale the 本体，大部分／ばら積みの, or number of the days or hours. によれば the different longitudes of England and Mindanao this 小島, 存在 west from the Lizard, by ありふれた computation, about 210 degrees, the difference of time at our arrival at Mindanao せねばならない be about 14 hours: and so much we should have 心配するd our reckoning, having 伸び（る）d it by 耐えるing the sun company. Now the natural day in every particular place must be consonant to itself: but this going about with or against the sun's course will of necessity make a difference in the 計算／見積り of the civil day between any two places. Accordingly at Mindanao and all other places in the East Indies we 設立する them reckoning a day before us, both natives and Europeans; for the Europeans, coming eastward by the Cape of Good Hope in a course contrary to the sun and us, wherever we met they were a 十分な day before us in their accounts. So の中で the Indian Mohammedans here their Friday, the day of their 暴君's going to their イスラム教寺院s, was Thursday with us; though it were Friday also with those who （機の）カム eastward from Europe. Yet at the Ladrone Islands we 設立する the Spaniards of Guam keeping the same computation with ourselves; the 推論する／理由 of which I take to be that they settled that 植民地 by a course 西方の from Spain; the Spaniards going first to America and thence to the Ladrones and Philippines. But how the reckoning was at Manila and the 残り／休憩（する） of the Spanish 植民地s in the Philippine Islands I know not; whether they keep it as they brought it or 訂正するd it by the accounts of the natives and of the Portuguese, Dutch, and English, coming the contrary way from Europe.

One 広大な／多数の／重要な 推論する／理由 why seamen せねばならない keep the difference of time as exact as they can is that they may be the more exact in their latitudes. For our （米）棚上げする／（英）提議するs of the sun's declination, 存在 calculated for the meridians of the places in which they were made, 異なる about 12 minutes from those parts of the world that 嘘（をつく） on their opposite meridians in the months of March and September; and in 割合 to the sun's declination at other times of the year also. And should they run さらに先に as we did the difference would still 増加する upon them, and be an occasion of 広大な／多数の／重要な errors. Yet even able seamen in these voyages are hardly made sensible of this, though so necessary to be 観察するd, for want of duly …に出席するing to the 推論する／理由 of it, as it happened の中で those of our 乗組員; who after we had passed 180 degrees began to 減少（する） the difference of declination, 反して they ought still to have 増加するd it, for it all the way 増加するd upon us.

THE SOUTH COAST OF MINDANAO.

We had the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-east, fair （疑いを）晴らす 天候 and a きびきびした 強風. We coasted to the 西方の, on the south 味方する of the island of Mindanao, keeping within four or five leagues of the shore. The land from hence 傾向s away west by south. It is off a good 高さ by the sea and very woody, and in the country we saw high hills.

CHAMBONGO TOWN AND HARBOUR, WITH ITS NEIGHBOURING KEYS.

The next day we were abreast of Chambongo, a town in this island and 30 leagues from the river of Mindanao. Here is said to be a good harbour and a 広大な／多数の／重要な 解決／入植地 with plenty of beef and buffalo. It is 報告（する）／憶測d that the Spaniards were 以前は 防備を堅める／強化するd here also: there are two shoals 嘘（をつく） off this place, two or three leagues from the shore. From hence the land is more low and even; yet there are some hills in the country.

About six leagues before we （機の）カム to the west end of the island Mindanao we fell in with a 広大な／多数の／重要な many small low islands or 重要なs, and about two or three leagues to the southward of these 重要なs there is a long island stretching north-east and south-west about 12 leagues. This island is low by the sea on the north 味方する and has a 山の尾根 of hills in the middle, running from one end to the other. Between this 小島 and the small 重要なs there is a good large channel: の中で the 重要なs also there is a good depth of water and a violent tide; but on what point of the compass it flows I know not, nor how much it rises and 落ちるs.

GREEN TURTLE.

The 17th day we 錨，総合司会者d on the east 味方する of all these 重要なs in eight fathom water, clean sand. Here are plenty of green 海がめ, whose flesh is as 甘い as any in the West Indies: but they are very shy.

RUINS OF A SPANISH FORT.

A little to the 西方の of these 重要なs, on the island Mindanao, we saw 豊富 of coconut-trees: therefore we sent our canoe 岸に, thinking to find inhabitants, but 設立する 非，不，無 nor 調印する of any; but 広大な／多数の／重要な tracts of hogs and 広大な／多数の／重要な cattle; and の近くに by the sea there were 廃虚s of an old fort; the 塀で囲むs thereof were of a good 高さ, built with 石／投石する and lime, and by the workmanship seemed to be Spanish. From this place the land 傾向s west-north-west and it is of an indifferent 高さ by the sea. It runs on this point of the compass four or five leagues, and then the land 傾向s away north-north-west five or six leagues さらに先に, making with many bluff points.

THE WESTERMOST POINT OF MINDANAO.

We 重さを計るd again the 14th day and went through between the 重要なs; but met such uncertain tides that we were 軍隊d to 錨，総合司会者 again. The 22nd day we got about the westermost point of all Mindanao and stood to the northward, plying under the shore and having the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-east a fresh 強風. As we sailed along その上の we 設立する the land to 傾向 north-north-east. On this part of the island the land is high by the sea with 十分な bluff points and very woody. There are some small sandy bays which afford streams of fresh water.

TWO PROAS OF THE SOLOGUES LADEN FROM MANILA.

Here we met with two proas belonging to the Sologues, one of the Mindanayan nations before について言及するd. They （機の）カム from Manila laden with silks and calicoes. We kept on this western part of the island steering northerly till we （機の）カム abreast of some other of the Philippine Islands that lay to the northward of us, then steered away に向かって them; but still keeping on the west 味方する of them, and we had the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-east.

AN ISLE TO THE WEST OF SEBO.

The 3rd of February we 錨，総合司会者d in a good bay on the west 味方する of the island in latitude 9 degrees 55 minutes, where we had 13 fathom water, good soft oaze. This island has no 指名する that we could find in any 調書をとる／予約する but lies on the west 味方する of the island Sebo. It is about eight or ten leagues long, 山地の and woody. At this place Captain Read, who was the same Captain Swan had so much railed against in his 定期刊行物 and was now made captain in his room (as Captain Teat was made master, and Mr. Henry More quartermaster) ordered the carpenters to 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する our ４半期/4分の1-deck to make the ship snug and the fitter for sailing. When that was done we heeled her, scrubbed her 底（に届く）, and tallowed it. Then we filled all our water, for here is a delicate small run of water.

WALKING-CANES.

The land was pretty low in this bay, the mould 黒人／ボイコット and fat, and the trees of several 肉親，親類d, very 厚い and tall. In some places we 設立する plenty of 茎s, such as we use in England for walking-茎s. These were short-共同のd, not above two foot and a half, or two foot 10 インチs the longest, and most of them not above two foot. They run along on the ground like a vine; or, taking 持つ／拘留する of their trees, they climb up to their very 最高の，を越すs. They are 15 or 20 fathom long, and much of a bigness from the root till within five or six fathom of the end. They are of a pale green colour, 着せる／賦与するd over with a coat of short 厚い hairy 実体 of a dun colour; but it comes off by only 製図／抽選 the 茎 through your 手渡す. We did 削減（する） many of them and they 証明するd very 堅い 激しい 茎s.

We saw no houses nor 調印する of inhabitants; but while we lay here there was a canoe with six men （機の）カム into this bay; but whither they were bound or from whence they （機の）カム I know not. They were Indians, and we could not understand them.

ISLE OF BATS, VERY LARGE; AND NUMEROUS TURTLE AND MANATEE.

In the middle of this bay about a mile from the shore there is a small low woody island, not above a mile in circumference; our ship 棒 about a mile from it. This island was the habitation of an incredible number of 広大な／多数の／重要な bats, with 団体／死体s as big as ducks, or large fowl, and with 広大な wings: for I saw at Mindanao one of this sort, and I 裁判官 that the wings, stretched out in length, could not be いっそう少なく asunder than 7 or 8 foot from tip to tip; for it was much more than any of us could fathom with our 武器 延長するd to the 最大の. The wings are for 実体 like those of other bats, of a dun or mouse colour. The 肌 or leather of them has ribs running along it and draws up in 3 or 4 倍のs; and at the 共同のs of those ribs and the extremities of the wings there are sharp and crooked claws by which they may hang on anything. In the evening as soon as the sun was 始める，決める, these creatures would begin to take their flight from this island in 群れているs like bees, directing their flight over to the main island; and whither afterwards I know not. Thus we should see them rising up from the island till night 妨げるd our sight; and in the morning as soon as it was light we should see them returning again like a cloud to the small island till sun rising. This course they kept 絶えず while we lay here, affording us every morning and evening an hour's 転換 in gazing at them and talking about them; but our curiosity did not 勝つ／広く一帯に広がる with us to go 岸に to them, ourselves and canoes 存在 all the daytime taken up in 商売／仕事 about our ship. At this 小島 also we 設立する plenty of 海がめ and manatee but no fish.

A DANGEROUS SHOAL.

We stayed here till the 10th of February 1687, and then, having 完全にするd our 商売／仕事, we sailed hence with the 勝利，勝つd at north. But going out we struck on a 激しく揺する, where we lay two hours: it was very smooth water and the tide of flood, or else we should there have lost our ship. We struck off a 広大な／多数の／重要な piece of our rudder, which was all the 損失 that we received, but we more 辛うじて 行方不明になるd losing our ships this time than in any other in the whole voyage. This is a very dangerous shoal because it does not break, unless probably it may appear in foul 天候. It lies about two miles to the 西方の, without the small Bat Island. Here we 設立する the tide of flood setting to the southward, and the ebb to the northward.

THEY SAIL BY PANAY BELONGING TO THE SPANIARDS, AND OTHERS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.

After we were past this shoal we coasted along by the 残り／休憩（する） of the Philippine Islands, keeping on the west 味方する of them. Some of them appeared to be very 山地の 乾燥した，日照りの land. We saw many 解雇する／砲火／射撃s in the night as we passed by Panay, a 広大な／多数の／重要な island settled by Spaniards, and by the 解雇する／砲火／射撃s up and 負かす／撃墜する it seems to be 井戸／弁護士席 settled by them; for this is a Spanish custom whereby they give notice of any danger or the like from sea; and it is probable they had seen our ship the day before. This is an unfrequented coast and it is rare to have any ship seen there. We touched not at Panay nor anywhere else though we saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な many small islands to the 西方の of us and some shoals, but 非，不，無 of them laid 負かす／撃墜する in our charts.

ISLE OF MINDORO.

The 18th day of February we 錨，総合司会者d at the north-west end of the island Mindoro, in 10 fathom water, about three ４半期/4分の1s of a mile from the shore. Mindoro is a large island; the middle of it lying in latitude 13, about 40 leagues long, stretching north-west and south-east. It is high and 山地の and not very woody. At this place where we 錨，総合司会者d the land was neither very high nor low. There was a small brook of water, and the land by the sea was very woody, and the trees high and tall, but a league or two さらに先に in the 支持を得ようと努めるd are very thin and small. Here we saw 広大な／多数の／重要な 跡をつけるs of hog and beef, and we saw some of each and 追跡（する）d them; but they were wild and we could kill 非，不，無.

While we were here there was a canoe with four Indians （機の）カム from Manila. They were very shy of us a while but at last, 審理，公聴会 us speak Spanish, they （機の）カム to us and told us that they were going to a friar that lived at an Indian village に向かって the south-east end of the island. They told us also that the harbour of Manila is seldom or never without 20 or 30 sail of 大型船s, most Chinese, some Portuguese, and some few the Spaniards have of their own. They said that when they had done their 商売／仕事 with the friar they would return to Manila, and hope to be 支援する again at this place in four days' time. We told them that we （機の）カム for a 貿易（する） with the Spaniards at Manila, and should be glad if they would carry a letter to some merchant there, which they 約束d to do. But this was only a pretence of ours to get out of them what 知能 we could as to their shipping, strength, and the like, under colour of 捜し出すing a 貿易（する）; for our 商売／仕事 was to 略奪する. Now if we had really designed to have 貿易（する）d there this was as fair an 適切な時期 as men could have 願望（する）d: for these men could have brought us to the friar that they were going to, and a small 現在の to him would have engaged him to do any 親切 for us in the way of 貿易（する）: for the Spanish 知事s do not 許す of it and we must 貿易（する） by stealth.

The 21st day we went from hence with the 勝利，勝つd at east-north-east a small 強風. The 23rd day in the morning we were fair by the south-east end of the island Luconia, the place that had been so long 願望（する）d by us.

TWO BARKS TAKEN.

We presently saw a sail coming from the northward and making after her we took her in two hours' time. She was a Spanish bark that （機の）カム from a place called Pangasanam, a small town on the north end of Luconia, as they told us; probably the same with Pongassiny, which lies on a bay at the north-west 味方する of the island. She was bound to Manila but had no goods 船内に; and therefore we turned her away.

The 23rd we took another Spanish 大型船 that （機の）カム from the same place as the other. She was laden with rice and cotton-cloth and bound for Manila also. These goods were purposely for the Acapulco ship: the rice was for the men to live on while they lay there and in their return: and the cotton-cloth was to make sail. The master of this prize was boatswain of the Acapulco ship which escaped us at Guam and was now at Manila. It was this man that gave us the relation of what strength it had, how they were afraid of us there, and of the 事故 that happened to them, as is before について言及するd in the 10th 一時期／支部. We took these two 大型船s within seven or eight leagues of Manila.

A FURTHER ACCOUNT OF THE ISLE LUCONIA, AND THE CITY AND HARBOUR OF MANILA.

Luconia I have spoken of already but I shall now 追加する this その上の account of it. It is a 広大な／多数の／重要な island, taking up between 6 and 7 degrees of latitude in length, and its breadth 近づく the middle is about 60 leagues, but the ends are 狭くする. The north end lies in about 19 degrees north latitude and the south end is about 12 degrees 30 minutes. This 広大な／多数の／重要な island has 豊富 of small 重要なs or islands lying about it; 特に at the north end. The south 味方する 前線s に向かって the 残り／休憩（する） of the Philippine Islands: of these that are its nearest 隣人s Mindoro lately について言及するd is the 長，指導者, and gives 指名する to the sea or 海峡 that parts it and the other islands from Luconia: 存在 called the 海峡s of Mindoro.

The 団体／死体 of the island Luconia is composed of many spacious plain savannahs and large mountains. The north end seems to be more plain and even, I mean freer from hills, than the south end: but the land is all along of a good 高さ. It does not appear so 繁栄するing and green as some of the other islands in this 範囲; 特に that of St. John, Mindanao, Bat Island, etc., yet in some places it is very woody. Some of the mountains of this island afford gold, and the savannahs are 井戸／弁護士席 在庫／株d with herds of cattle, 特に Buffaloes. These cattle are in 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty all over the East Indies; and therefore it is very probable that there were many of these here even before the Spaniards （機の）カム hither. But now there are also plenty of other cattle, as I have been told, as bullocks, horses, sheep, goats, hogs, etc., brought hither by the Spaniards.

It is pretty 井戸／弁護士席 住むd with Indians, most of them if not all under the Spaniards, who now are masters of it. The native Indians do live together in towns; and they have priests の中で them to 教える them in the Spanish 宗教.

Manila, the 長，指導者 or perhaps the only city, lies at the foot of a 山の尾根 of high hills, 直面するing upon a spacious harbour 近づく the south-west point of the island, in about the latitude of 14 degrees north. It is environed with a high strong 塀で囲む and very 井戸／弁護士席 防備を堅める／強化するd with forts and breast-作品. The houses are large, 堅固に built, and covered with pan-tile. The streets are large and pretty 正規の／正選手; with a parade in the 中央, after the Spanish fashion. There are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many fair buildings besides churches and other 宗教的な houses; of which there are not a few.

The harbour is so large that some hundreds of ships may ride here; and is never without many, both of their own and strangers. I have already given you an account of the two ships going and coming between this place and Acapulco. Besides them they have some small 大型船s of their own; and they do 許す the Portuguese to 貿易（する） here, but the Chinese are the chiefest merchants and they 運動 the greatest 貿易（する）; for they have 一般的に twenty, thirty, or forty junks in the harbour at a time, and a 広大な／多数の／重要な many merchants 絶えず residing in the city besides shopkeepers, and handicrafts-men in 豊富. Small 大型船s run up 近づく the town, but the Acapulco ships and others of greater 重荷（を負わせる） 嘘（をつく） a league short of it, where there is a strong fort also, and storehouses to put goods in.

I had the major part of this relation two or three years after this time from Mr. Coppinger our 外科医; for he made a voyage hither from Porto Nova, a town on the coast of Coromandel; in a Portuguese ship, as I think. Here he 設立する ten or twelve of Captain Swan's men; some of those that we left at Mindanao. For after we （機の）カム from thence they bought a proa there, by the instigation of an Irishman who went by the 指名する of John Fitz-Gerald, a person that spoke Spanish very 井戸／弁護士席; and so in this their proa they （機の）カム hither. They had been here but eighteen months when Mr. Coppinger arrived here, and Mr. Fitz-Gerald had in this time gotten a Spanish Mestiza woman to wife, and a good dowry with her. He then professed physic and 外科, and was 高度に esteemed の中で the Spaniards for his supposed knowledge in those arts; for, 存在 always troubled with sore 向こうずねs while he was with us, he kept some plasters and salves by him; and with these he 始める，決める up upon his 明らかにする natural 在庫／株 of knowledge and his experience in kibes. But then he had a very 広大な／多数の／重要な 在庫／株 of 信用／信任 withal to help out the other and, 存在 an Irish Roman カトリック教徒, and having the Spanish language, he had a 広大な／多数の／重要な advantage of all his consorts; and he alone lived 井戸／弁護士席 there of them all. We were not within sight of this town but I was shown the hills that overlooked it, and drew a 草案 of them as we lay off at sea; which I have 原因（となる）d to be engraven の中で a few others that I took myself. See the （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する.

THEY GO OFF PULO CONDORE TO LIE THERE.

The time of the year 存在 now too far spent to do anything here it was 結論するd to sail from hence to Pulo Condore, a little 小包 of islands on the coast of Cambodia, and carry this prize with us and there careen if we could find any convenient place for it, designing to return hither again by the latter end of May and wait for the Acapulco ship that comes about that time. By our charts (which we were guided by, 存在 strangers to these parts) this seemed to us then to be a place out of the way where we might 嘘（をつく） snug for a while, and wait the time of returning for our prey. For we 避けるd as much as we could the going to 嘘（をつく） by at any 広大な／多数の／重要な place of 商業 lest we should become too much exposed, and perhaps be 強襲，強姦d by a 軍隊 greater than our own.

So, having 始める，決める our 囚人s 岸に, we sailed from Luconia the 26th day of February, with the 勝利，勝つd east-north-east and fair 天候, and a きびきびした 強風. We were in latitude 14 degrees north when we began to steer away for Pulo Condore, and we steered south by west.

THE SHOALS OF PRACEL, ETC.

In our way thither we went pretty 近づく the shoals of Pracel and other shoals which are very dangerous. We were very much afraid of them but escaped them without so much as seeing them, only at the very south end of the Pracel shoals we saw three little sandy islands or 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs of sand standing just above water within a mile of us.

PULO CONDORE.

It was the 13th day of March before we （機の）カム in sight of Pulo Condore, or the island Condore, as Pulo signifies. The 14th day about noon we 錨，総合司会者d on the north 味方する of the island against a sandy bay two mile from the shore, in ten fathom clean hard sand, with both ship and prize. Pulo Condore is the 主要な／長／主犯 of a heap of islands and the only 住むd one of them. They 嘘（をつく） in latitude 8 degrees 40 minutes north, and about twenty leagues south and by east from the mouth of the river of Cambodia. These islands 嘘（をつく） so 近づく together that at a distance they appear to be but one island.

Two of these islands are pretty large and of a good 高さ, they may be seen fourteen or fifteen leagues at sea; the 残り／休憩（する） are but little 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs. The biggest of the two (which is the 住むd one) is about four or five leagues long and lies east and west. It is not above three mile 幅の広い at the broadest place, in most places not above a mile wide. The other large island is about three mile long and half a mile wide. This island stretches north and south. It is so conveniently placed at the west end of the biggest island that between both there is formed a very commodious harbour. The 入り口 of this harbour is on the north 味方する where the two islands are 近づく a mile asunder. There are three or four small 重要なs and a good 深い channel between them and the biggest island. に向かって the south end of the harbour the two islands do in a manner の近くに up, leaving only a small passage for boats and canoes. There are no more islands on the north 味方する but five or six on the south 味方する of the 広大な／多数の／重要な island. See the （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する.

The mould of these islands for the biggest part is blackish and pretty 深い, only the hills are somewhat stony. The eastern part of the biggest island is sandy yet all 着せる／賦与するd with trees of divers sorts. The trees do not grow so 厚い as I have seen them in some places, but they are 一般に large and tall and fit for any use.

THE TAR-TREE.

There is one sort of tree much larger than any other on this island and which I have not seen anywhere else. It is about three or four foot 直径 in the 団体／死体, from whence is drawn a sort of clammy juice, which 存在 boiled a little becomes perfect tar; and if you boil it much it will become hard as pitch. It may be put to either use; we used it both ways, and 設立する it to be very serviceable. The way that they get this juice is by cutting a 広大な／多数の／重要な gap horizontally in the 団体／死体 of the tree half through, and about a foot from the ground; and then cutting the upper part of the 団体／死体 aslope inwardly downward, till in the middle of the tree it 会合，会うs with the 横断する cutting or plain. In this plain 水平の semicircular stump they make a hollow like a 水盤／入り江, that may 含む／封じ込める a quart or two. Into this 穴を開ける the juice which drains from the 負傷させるd upper part of the tree 落ちるs; from whence you must empty it every day. It will run thus for some months and then 乾燥した，日照りの away, and the tree will 回復する again.

The fruit-trees that nature has bestowed on these 小島s are mangoes; and trees 耐えるing a sort of grape, and other trees 耐えるing a 肉親，親類d of wild or bastard nutmegs. These all grow wild in the 支持を得ようと努めるd and in very 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty.

THE MANGO.

The mangoes here grow on trees as big as apple-trees: those at Fort St. George are not so large. The fruit of these is as big as a small peach but long and smaller に向かって the 最高の，を越す: it is of a yellowish colour when 熟した; it is very juicy, and of a pleasant smell and delicate taste. When the mango is young they 削減（する） them in two pieces and pickle them with salt and vinegar in which they put some cloves of garlic. This is an excellent sauce and much esteemed; it is called mango-achar. Achar I 推定する signifies sauce. They make in the East Indies, 特に at Siam and Pegu, several sorts of achar, as of the young 最高の，を越すs of bamboos, etc., bamboo-achar and mango-achar are most used. The mangoes were 熟した when we were there (as were also the 残り／休憩（する） of these fruits) and they have then so delicate a fragrancy that we could smell them out in the 厚い 支持を得ようと努めるd, if we had but the 勝利，勝つd of them, while we were a good way from them and could not see them; and we 一般に 設立する them out this way. Mangoes are ありふれた in many places of the East Indies; but I did never know any grow wild only at this place. These, though not so big as those I have seen at Achin and at マドラス or Fort St. George are yet every whit as pleasant as the best sort of their garden mangoes.

GRAPE-TREE.

The grape-tree grows with a straight 団体／死体 of a 直径 about a foot or more, and has but few 四肢s or boughs. The fruit grows in clusters all about the 団体／死体 of the tree, like the jack, durian, and cocoa fruits. There are of them both red and white. They are much like such grapes as grow on our vines both in 形態／調整 and colour; and they are of a very pleasant winy taste. I never saw these but on the two biggest of these islands; the 残り／休憩（する） had no tar-trees, mangoes, grape-trees, nor wild nutmegs.

THE WILD OR BASTARD-NUTMEG.

The wild nutmeg-tree is as big as a walnut-tree; but it does not spread so much. The boughs are 甚だしい／１２ダース and the fruit grows の中で the boughs as the walnut and other fruits. This nutmeg is much smaller than the true nutmeg and longer also. It is enclosed with a thin 爆撃する, and a sort of mace, encircling the nut within the 爆撃する. This bastard nutmeg is so much like the true nutmeg in 形態／調整 that at our first arrival here we thought it to be the true one; but it has no manner of smell nor taste.

THEIR ANIMALS.

The animals of these islands are some hogs, lizards and iguanas; and some of those creatures について言及するd in 一時期／支部 11 which are like but much bigger than the iguanas.

Here are many sorts of birds, as parrots, parakeets, doves and pigeons. Here are also a sort of wild cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s: they are much like our tame fowl of that 肉親，親類d; but a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 いっそう少なく, for they are about the bigness of a crow. The cocks do crow like ours but much more small and shrill; and by their crowing we do first find them out in the 支持を得ようと努めるd where we shoot them. Their flesh is very white and 甘い.

There are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many limpets and mussels, and plenty of green 海がめ.

OF THE MIGRATION OF THE TURTLE FROM PLACE TO PLACE.

And upon this について言及する of 海がめ again I think it not amiss to 追加する some 推論する／理由s to 強化する the opinion that I have given 関心ing these creatures 除去するing from place to place. I have said in 一時期／支部 5 that they leave their ありふれた feeding-places and go to places a 広大な／多数の／重要な way from thence to lay, as 特に to the island Ascension. Now I have discoursed with some since that 支配する was printed who are of opinion that when the laying-time is over they never go from thence, but 嘘（をつく） somewhere in the sea about the island, which I think is very improbable: for there can be no food for them there, as I could soon make appear; as 特に from hence, that the sea about the 小島 of Ascension is so 深い as to 収容する／認める of no 錨，総合司会者ing but at one place, where there is no 調印する of grass: and we never bring up with our sounding-lead any grass or 少しのd out of very 深い seas, but sand or the like only. But if this be 認めるd, that there is food for them, yet I have a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of 推論する／理由 to believe that the 海がめ go from hence; for after the laying-time you shall never see them, and wherever 海がめ are you will see them rise and 持つ／拘留する their 長，率いる above water to breathe once in seven or eight minutes, or at longest in ten or twelve. And if any man does but consider how fish take their 確かな seasons of the year to go from one sea to another this should not seem strange; even fowls also having their seasons to 除去する from one place to another.

These islands are pretty 井戸／弁護士席 watered with small brooks of fresh water that run 紅潮／摘発する into the sea for ten months in the year. The latter end of March they begin to 乾燥した，日照りの away, and in April you shall have 非，不，無 in the brooks but what is 宿泊するd in 深い 穴を開けるs; but you may dig 井戸／弁護士席s in some places. In May when the rain comes the land is again 補充するd with water and the brooks run out into the sea.

OF THE COMMODIOUS SITUATION OF PULO CONDORE; ITS WATER, AND ITS COCHIN-CHINESE INHABITANTS.

These islands 嘘（をつく） very commodiously in the way to and from Japan, 中国, Manila, Tonquin, Cochin-磁器, and in general all this most easterly coast of the Indian continent; whether you go through the 海峡s of Malacca, or the 海峡s of Sunda between Sumatra and Java: and one of them you must pass in the ありふれた way from Europe or other parts of the East Indies unless you mean to fetch a 広大な／多数の／重要な compass 一連の会議、交渉／完成する most of the East India Islands, as we did. Any ship in 苦しめる may be refreshed and 新採用するd here very conveniently; and besides ordinary accommodations be furnished with masts, yards, pitch and tar. It might also be a convenient place to 勧める in a 商業 with the 隣人ing country of Cochin-磁器, and forts might be built to 安全な・保証する a factory; 特に at the harbour, which is 有能な of 存在 井戸／弁護士席 防備を堅める／強化するd. This place therefore 存在 upon all these accounts so 価値のある, and withal so little known, I have here 挿入するd a 草案 of it, which I took during our stay there.

OF THE MALAYAN TONGUE.

The inhabitants of this island are by nation Cochin-chinese, as they told us, for one of them spoke good Malayan: which language we learnt a smattering of, and some of us so as to speak it pretty 井戸／弁護士席, while we lay at Mindanao; and this is the ありふれた tongue of 貿易（する） and 商業 (though it be not in several of them the native language) in most of the East India Islands, 存在 the Lingua Franca, as it were, of these parts. I believe it is the vulgar tongue at Malacca, Sumatra, Java, and Borneo; but at Celebes, the Philippine Islands, and the Spice Islands it seems borrowed for the carrying on of 貿易（する）.

The inhabitants of Pulo Condore are but a small people in stature, 井戸／弁護士席 enough 形態／調整d, and of a darker colour than the Mindanayans. They are pretty long-visaged; their hair is 黒人／ボイコット and straight, their 注目する，もくろむs are but small and 黒人／ボイコット, their noses of a mean bigness, and pretty high, their lips thin, their teeth white, and little mouths. They are very civil people but 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の poor. Their chiefest 雇用 is to draw the juice of those trees that I have 述べるd to make tar. They 保存する it in 木造の 気圧の谷s; and when they have their 貨物 they 輸送（する） it to Cochin-磁器, their mother country. Some others of them 雇う themselves to catch 海がめ, and boil up their fat to oil, which they also 輸送（する） home. These people have 広大な／多数の／重要な large 逮捕するs with wide meshes to catch the 海がめ. The Jamaica turtlers have such; and I did never see the like 逮捕するs but at Jamaica and here.

THE CUSTOM OF PROSTITUTING THEIR WOMEN IN THESE COUNTRIES, AND IN GUINEA.

They are so 解放する／自由な of their women that they would bring them 船内に and 申し込む／申し出 them to us; and many of our men 雇うd them for a small 事柄. This is a custom used by several nations in the East Indies, as at Pegu, Siam, Cochin-磁器, and Cambodia, as I have been told. It is used at Tonquin also to my knowledge; for I did afterwards make a voyage thither, and most of our men had women 船内に all the time of our abode there. In Africa also, on the coast of Guinea, our merchants, factors, and seamen that reside there have their 黒人／ボイコット 行方不明になるs. It is accounted a piece of 政策 to do it; for the 長，指導者 factors and captains of ships have the 広大な／多数の／重要な men's daughters 申し込む／申し出d them, the 蜜柑s' or noblemen's at Tonquin, and even the king's wives in Guinea; and by this sort of 同盟 the country people are engaged to a greater friendship: and if there should arise any difference about 貿易（する） or anything else which might 刺激する the natives to 捜し出す some 背信の 復讐 (to which all these heathen nations are very 傾向がある) then these Delilahs would certainly 宣言する it to their white friends, and so 妨げる their countrymen's design.

THE IDOLATRY HERE, AT TONQUIN, AND AMONG THE CHINESE SEAMEN, AND OF A PROCESSION AT FORT ST. GEORGE.

These people are idolaters: but their manner of worship I know not. There are a few scattering houses and 農園s on the 広大な／多数の／重要な island, and a small village on the south 味方する of it where there is a little idol-寺, and an image of an elephant, about five foot high and in bigness proportionable, placed on one 味方する of the 寺; and a horse not so big, placed on the other 味方する of it; both standing with their 長，率いるs に向かって the south. The 寺 itself was low and ordinary, built of 支持を得ようと努めるd and thatched like one of their houses; which are but very meanly.

The images of the horse and the elephant were the most general idols that I 観察するd in the 寺s of Tonquin when I travelled there. There were other images also, of beasts, birds and fish. I do not remember I saw any human 形態／調整 there; nor any such monstrous 代表s as I have seen の中で the Chinese. Wherever the Chinese seamen or merchants come (and they are very 非常に／多数の all over these seas) they have always hideous idols on board their junks or ships, with altars, and lamps 燃やすing before them. These idols they bring 岸に with them: and beside those they have in ありふれた every man has one in his own house. Upon some particular solemn days I have seen their bonzies, or priests, bring whole armfuls of painted papers and 燃やす them with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of 儀式, 存在 very careful to let no piece escape them. The same day they killed a goat which had been purposely fatting a month before; this they 申し込む／申し出 or 現在の before their idol, and then dress it and feast themselves with it. I have seen them do this in Tonquin, where I have at the same time been 招待するd to their feasts; and at Bencoolen in the 小島 of Sumatra they sent a shoulder of the sacrificed goat to the English, who ate of it, and asked me to do so too; but I 辞退するd.

When I was at マドラス, or Fort St. George, I took notice of a 広大な／多数の／重要な 儀式 used for several nights successively by the idolaters 住むing the 郊外s: both men and women (these very 井戸／弁護士席 覆う？) in a 広大な／多数の／重要な multitude went in solemn 行列 with lighted たいまつs, carrying their idols about with them. I knew not the meaning of it. I 観察するd some went purposely carrying oil to ぱらぱら雨 into the lamps to make them 燃やす the brighter. They began their 一連の会議、交渉／完成する about 11 o'clock at night and, having paced it 厳粛に about the streets till two or three o'clock in the morning, their idols were carried with much 儀式 into the 寺 by the 長，指導者 of the 行列, and some of the women I saw enter the 寺, 特に. Their idols were different from those of Tonquin, Cambodia, etc., 存在 in human 形態／調整.

THEY REFIT THEIR SHIP.

I have said already that we arrived at these islands the 14th day of March 1687. The next day we searched about for a place to careen in; and the 16th day we entered the harbour and すぐに 供給するd to careen. Some men were 始める，決める to fell 広大な／多数の／重要な trees to saw into planks; others went to unrigging the ship; some made a house to put our goods in and for the sail-製造者 to work in. The country people 訴える手段／行楽地d to us and brought us of the fruits of the island, with hogs, and いつかs 海がめ; for which they received rice in 交流, which we had a shipload of, taken at Manila. We bought of them also a good 量 of their pitchy アルコール飲料, which we boiled, and used about our ship's 底（に届く）. We mixed it first with lime which we made here, and it made an excellent coat and stuck on very 井戸／弁護士席.

We stayed in this harbour from the 16th day of March till the 16th of April; in which time we made a new 控訴 of sails of the cloth that was taken in the prize. We 削減（する） a spare main-最高の，を越す-mast and sawed plank to sheath the ship's 底（に届く）; for she was not sheathed all over at Mindanao, and that old plank that was left on then we now ripped off and clapped on new.

TWO OF THEM DIE OF POISON THEY TOOK AT MINDANAO.

While we lay here two of our men died, who were 毒（薬）d at Mindanao, they told us of it when they 設立する themselves 毒（薬）d and had ぐずぐず残るd ever since. They were opened by our doctor, によれば their own request before they died, and their 肝臓s were 黒人／ボイコット, light and 乾燥した，日照りの, like pieces of cork.

THEY TAKE IN WATER, AND A PILOT FOR THE BAY OF SIAM.

Our 商売／仕事 存在 finished here we left the Spanish prize taken at Manila, and most of the rice, taking out enough for ourselves, and on the 17th day we went from hence to the place where we first 錨，総合司会者d, on the north 味方する of the 広大な／多数の／重要な island, purposely to water; for there was a 広大な／多数の／重要な stream when we first （機の）カム to the island, and we thought it was so now. But we 設立する it 乾燥した，日照りのd up, only it stood in 穴を開けるs, two or three hogsheads or a tun in a 穴を開ける: therefore we did すぐに 削減（する） bamboos and made spouts through which we 伝えるd the water 負かす／撃墜する to the seaside by taking it up in bowls, and 注ぐing it into these spouts or 気圧の谷s. We 伝えるd some of it thus 近づく half a mile. While we were filling our water Captain Read engaged an old man, one of the inhabitants of this island, the same who I said could speak the Malayan language, to be his 操縦する to the Bay of Siam; for he had often been telling us that he was 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd there, and that he knew some islands there where there were fishermen lived who he thought could 供給（する） us with salt-fish to eat at sea; for we had nothing but rice to eat. The easterly 季節風 was not yet done; therefore it was 結論するd to spend some time there and then take the advantage of the beginning of the western 季節風 to return to Manila again.

The 21st day of April 1687 we sailed from Pulo Condore, directing our course west by south for the Bay of Siam. We had 好天 and a 罰金 穏健な 強風 of 勝利，勝つd at east-north-east.

PULO UBI; AND POINT OF CAMBODIA.

The 23rd day we arrived at Pulo Ubi, or the island Ubi. This island is about 40 leagues to the 西方の of Pulo Condore; it lies just at the 入り口 of the Bay of Siam, at the south-west point of land that makes the bay; すなわち, the Point of Cambodia. This island is about seven or eight leagues 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, and it is higher land than any of Pulo Condore 小島s. Against the south-east part of it there is a small 重要な, about a cable's length from the main island. This Pulo Ubi is very woody and it has good water on the north 味方する, where you may 錨，総合司会者; but the best 錨，総合司会者ing is on the east 味方する against a small bay; then you will have the little island to the southward of you.

TWO CAMBODIAN VESSELS.

At Pulo Ubi we 設立する two small barks laden with rice. They belonged to Cambodia, from whence they （機の）カム not above two or three days before, and they touched here to fill water. Rice is the general food of all these countries, therefore it is 輸送（する）d by sea from one country to another, as corn in these parts of the world. For in some countries they produce more than enough for themselves and send what they can spare to those places where there is but little.

The 24th day we went into the Bay of Siam: this is a large 深い bay, of which, and of this kingdom, I shall at 現在の speak but little, because I design a more particular account of all this coast, to wit, of Tonquin, Cochin-磁器, Siam, Champa, Cambodia, and Malacca, making all the most easterly part of the continent of Asia, lying south of 中国: but to do it in the course of this voyage would too much swell this 容積／容量; and I shall choose therefore to give a separate relation of what I know or have learnt of them, together with the 隣人ing parts of Sumatra, Java, etc., where I have spent some time.

ISLES IN THE BAY OF SIAM.

We ran 負かす／撃墜する into the Bay of Siam till we （機の）カム to the islands that our Pulo Condore 操縦する told us of, which 嘘（をつく） about the middle of the bay: but, as good a 操縦する as he was, he run us a-ground; yet we had no 損失. Captain Read went 岸に at these islands, where he 設立する a small town of fishermen; but they had no fish to sell and so we returned empty.

THE TIGHT VESSELS AND SEAMEN OF THE KINGDOM OF CHAMPA.

We had yet 好天 and very little 勝利，勝つd; so that, 存在 often becalmed, we were till the 13th day of May before we got to Pulo Ubi again. There we 設立する two small 大型船s at an 錨，総合司会者 on the east 味方する: they were laden with rice and lacquer, which is used in japanning of 閣僚s. One of these （機の）カム from Champa, bound to the town of Malacca, which belongs to the Dutch who took it from the Portuguese; and this shows that they have a 貿易（する） with Champa. This was a very pretty neat 大型船, her 底（に届く） very clean and curiously coated, she had about forty men all 武装した with cortans, or broadswords, lances, and some guns, that went with a swivel upon their gunwale. They were of the idolaters, natives of Champa, and some of the briskest, most sociable, without fearfulness or shyness, and the most neat and dextrous about their shipping, of any such I have met with in all my travels. The other 大型船 （機の）カム from the river of Cambodia and was bound に向かって the 海峡s of Malacca. Both of them stopped here, for the westerly-勝利，勝つd now began to blow, which were against them, 存在 somewhat bleated.

STORMS.

We 錨，総合司会者d also on the east 味方する, ーするつもりであるing to fill water. While we lay here we had very violent 勝利，勝つd at south-west and a strong 現在の setting 権利 to windward. The fiercer the 勝利，勝つd blew, the more strong the 現在の 始める，決める against it. This 嵐／襲撃する lasted till the 20th day, and then it began to abate.

The 21st day of May we went 支援する from hence に向かって Pulo Condore.

A CHINESE JUNK FROM PALIMBAM IN SUMATRA. THEY COME AGAIN TO PULO CONDORE.

In our way we overtook a 広大な／多数の／重要な junk that （機の）カム from Palimbam, a town on the island Sumatra: she was 十分な laden with pepper which they bought there and was bound to Siam: but, it blowing so hard, she was afraid to 投機・賭ける into that bay, and therefore （機の）カム to Pulo Condore with us, where we both 錨，総合司会者d May the 24th. This 大型船 was of the Chinese make, 十分な of little rooms or partitions, like our 井戸／弁護士席-boats. I shall 述べる them in the next 一時期／支部. The men of this junk told us that the English were settled on the island Sumatra, at a place called Sillabar; and the first knowledge we had that the English had any 解決／入植地 on Sumatra was from these.

A BLOODY FRAY WITH A MALAYAN VESSEL.

When we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 we saw a small bark at an 錨，総合司会者 近づく the shore; therefore Captain Read sent a canoe 船内に her to know from whence they （機の）カム; and, supposing that it was a Malayan 大型船, he ordered the men not to go 船内に for they are accounted desperate fellows and their 大型船s are 一般的に 十分な of men who all wear cressets, or little daggers, by their 味方するs. The canoe's 乗組員, not minding the captain's orders, went 船内に, all but one man that stayed in the canoe. The Malayans, who were about 20 of them, seeing our men all 武装した, thought that they （機の）カム to take their 大型船; therefore at once, on a signal given, they drew out their cressets and stabbed five or six of our men before they knew what the 事柄 was. The 残り／休憩（する） of our men leapt overboard, some into the canoe and some into the sea, and so got away. の中で the 残り／休憩（する） one Daniel Wallis leapt into the sea who could never swim before nor since; yet now he swam very 井戸／弁護士席 a good while before he was taken up. When the canoes （機の）カム 船内に Captain Read 乗組員を乗せた two canoes and went to be 復讐d on the Malayans; but they seeing him coming did 削減（する） a 穴を開ける in the 大型船's 底（に届く） and went 岸に in their boat. Captain Read followed them but they ran into the 支持を得ようと努めるd and hid themselves. Here we stayed ten or eleven days for it blew very hard all the time.

THE SURGEON'S AND THE AUTHOR'S DESIRES OF LEAVING THEIR CREW.

While we stayed here Herman Coppinger our 外科医 went 岸に, ーするつもりであるing to live here; but Captain Read sent some men to fetch him again. I had the same thoughts, and would have gone 岸に too but waited for a more convenient place. For neither he nor I, when we were last on board at Mindanao, had any knowledge of the 陰謀（を企てる） that was laid to leave Captain Swan and run away with the ship; and, 存在 十分に 疲れた／うんざりした of this mad 乗組員, we were willing to give them the slip at any place from whence we might hope to get a passage to an English factory. There was nothing else of moment happened while we stayed here.

CHAPTER 15.

THEY LEAVE PULO CONDORE, DESIGNING FOR MANILA, BUT ARE DRIVEN OFF FROM THENCE, AND FROM THE ISLE OF PRATAS, BY THE WINDS, AND BROUGHT UPON THE COAST OF CHINA.

Having filled our water, 削減（する） our 支持を得ようと努めるd, and got our ship in a sailing posture while the blustering hard 勝利，勝つd lasted, we took the first 適切な時期 of a settled 強風 to sail に向かって Manila. Accordingly June the 4th 1687 we loosed from Pulo Condore with the 勝利，勝つd at south-west 好天 at a きびきびした 強風. The pepper-junk bound to Siam remained there, waiting for an easterly 勝利，勝つd; but one of his men, a 肉親，親類d of a bastard Portuguese, （機の）カム 船内に our ship and was entertained for the sake of his knowledge in the several languages of these countries. The 勝利，勝つd continued in the south-west but 24 hours or a little more, and then （機の）カム about to the north, and then to the north-east; and the sky became 越えるing （疑いを）晴らす. Then the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム at east and lasted betwixt east and south-east for eight or ten days. Yet we continued plying to windward, 推定する／予想するing every day a 転換 of 勝利，勝つd because these 勝利，勝つd were not によれば the season of the year.

We were now afraid lest the 現在のs might deceive us and carry us on the shoals of Pracel, which were 近づく us a little to the north-west, but we passed on to the eastward without seeing any 調印する of them; yet we were kept much to the northward of our ーするつもりであるd course. And, the easterly 勝利，勝つd still continuing, we despaired of getting to Manila; and therefore began to 事業／計画（する） some new design; and the result was to visit the island Pratas about the latitude of 20 degrees 40 minutes north; and not far from us at this time.

It is a small low island, environed with 激しく揺するs （疑いを）晴らす 一連の会議、交渉／完成する it, by 報告（する）／憶測. It lies so in the way between Manila and Canton, the 長，率いる of a 州, and a town of 広大な／多数の／重要な 貿易（する） in 中国, that the Chinese do dread the 激しく揺するs about it more than the Spaniards did 以前は dread Bermuda; for many of their junks coming from Manila have been lost there, and with 豊富 of treasure in them; as we were 知らせるd by all the Spaniards that ever we conversed with in these parts. They told us also that in these 難破させるs most of the men were 溺死するd, and that the Chinese did never go thither to （問題を）取り上げる any of the treasure that was lost there for 恐れる of 存在 lost themselves. But the danger of the place did not daunt us; for we were 解決するd to try our fortunes there if the 勝利，勝つd would 許す; and we did （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 for it five or six days; but at last were 軍隊d to leave that design also for want of 勝利，勝つd; for the south-east 勝利，勝つd continuing 軍隊d us on the coast of 中国.

ISLE OF ST. JOHN, ON THE COAST OF THE PROVINCE OF CANTON; ITS SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS, CHINA HOGS, ETC.

It was the 25th day of June when we made the land; and running in に向かって the shore we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 the same day on the north-east end of St. John's island.

This island is in latitude about 22 degrees 30 minutes north, lying on the south coast of the 州 of Quantung or Canton in 中国. It is of an indifferent 高さ and pretty plain, and the 国／地域 fertile enough. It is partly woody, partly savannahs or pasturage for cattle; and there is some moist arable land for rice. The skirts or outer part of the island, 特に that part of it which 国境s on the main sea, is woody: the middle part of it is good 厚い grassy pasture, with some groves of trees; and that which is cultivated land is low wet land, 産する／生じるing plentiful 刈るs of rice; the only 穀物 that I did see here. The tame cattle which this island affords are 磁器-hogs, goats, buffaloes, and some bullocks. The hogs of this island are all 黒人／ボイコット; they have but small 長，率いるs, very short necks, 広大な／多数の／重要な bellies, 一般的に touching the ground, and short 脚s. They eat but little food yet they are most of them very fat; probably because they sleep much. The tame fowls are ducks and cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s. I saw no wild fowl but a few small birds.

THE INHABITANTS; AND OF THE TARTARS FORCING THE CHINESE TO CUT OFF THEIR HAIR.

The natives of this island are Chinese. They are 支配する to the 栄冠を与える of 中国, and その結果 at this time to the tartars. The Chinese in general are tall, straight-団体／死体d, raw-boned men. They are long-visaged, and their foreheads are high; but they have little 注目する，もくろむs. Their noses are pretty large with a rising in the middle. Their mouths are of a mean size, pretty thin lips. They are of an ashy complexion; their hair is 黒人／ボイコット, and their 耐えるd thin and long, for they pluck the hair out by the roots, 苦しむing only some few very long straggling hairs to grow about their chin, in which they take 広大な／多数の／重要な pride, often 徹底的に捜すing them and いつかs tying them up in a knot, and they have such hairs too growing 負かす／撃墜する from each 味方する of their upper lip like whiskers. The 古代の Chinese were very proud of the hair of their 長，率いるs, letting it grow very long and 一打／打撃ing it 支援する with their 手渡すs curiously, and then winding the plaits all together 一連の会議、交渉／完成する a bodkin thrust through it at the 妨げる part of the 長，率いる; and both men and women did thus. But when the Tartars 征服する／打ち勝つd them they broke them of this custom they were so fond of by main 軍隊; insomuch that they resented this 課税 worse than their subjection and rebelled upon it but, 存在 still worsted, were 軍隊d to acquiesce; and to this day they follow the fashion of their masters the tartars, and shave all their 長，率いるs, only reserving one lock, which some tie up, others let it hang 負かす／撃墜する a 広大な／多数の／重要な or small length as they please. The Chinese in other countries still keep their old custom, but if any of the Chinese is 設立する wearing long hair in 中国 he 没収されるs his 長，率いる; and many of them have abandoned their country to 保存する their liberty of wearing their hair, as I have been told by themselves.

The Chinese have no hats, caps, or turbans; but when they walk abroad they carry a small umbrella in their 手渡すs wherewith they 盗品故買者 their 長，率いる from the sun or the rain by 持つ／拘留するing it over their 長，率いるs. If they walk but a little way they carry only a large fan made of paper, or silk, of the same fashion as those our ladies have, and many of them are brought over hither; one of these every man carried in his 手渡す if he do but cross the street, 審査 his 長，率いる with it if he has not an umbrella with him.

THEIR HABITS, AND THE LITTLE FEET OF THEIR WOMEN, CHINA-WARE, CHINA-ROOTS, TEA, ETC.

The ありふれた apparel of the men is a loose frock and breeches. They seldom wear stockings but they have shoes, or a sort of slippers rather. The men's shoes are made diversely. The women have very small feet and その結果 but little shoes; for from their 幼少／幼藍期 their feet are kept 列d up with 禁止（する）d as hard as they can かもしれない 耐える them; and from the time they can go till they have done growing they 貯蔵所d them up every night. This they do purposely to 妨げる them from growing, esteeming little feet to be a 広大な／多数の／重要な beauty. But by this 不当な custom they do in a manner lose the use of their feet, and instead of going they only つまずく about their houses, and presently squat 負かす／撃墜する on their breeches again, 存在 as it were 限定するd to sitting all days of their lives. They seldom 動かす abroad and one would be apt to think that, as some have conjectured, their keeping up their fondness for this fashion were a stratagem of the men to keep them from gadding and gossiping about and 限定する them at home. They are kept 絶えず to their work, 存在 罰金 needlewomen, and making many curious embroideries, and they make their own shoes; but if any stranger be desirous to bring away any for novelty's sake he must be a 広大な／多数の／重要な favourite to get a pair of shoes of them, though he give twice their value. The poorer sort of women trudge about streets and to the market without shoes or stockings; and these cannot afford to have little feet, 存在 to get their living with them.

The Chinese both men and women are very ingenious; as may appear by the many curious things that are brought from thence, 特に the porcelain or 中国 earthenware. The Spaniards of Manila that we took on the coast of Luconia told me that this 商品／必需品 is made of conch-爆撃するs, the inside of which looks like mother-of-pearl. But the Portuguese lately について言及するd, who had lived in 中国 and spoke that and the 隣人ing languages very 井戸／弁護士席, said that it was made of a 罰金 sort of clay that was dug in the 州 of Canton. I have often made enquiry about it but could never be 井戸／弁護士席 満足させるd in it: but while I was on the coast of Canton I forgot to enquire about it. They make very 罰金 lacquer-ware also, and good silks; and they are curious at 絵 and carving.

中国 affords 麻薬s in 広大な／多数の／重要な 豊富, 特に 中国-root; but this is not peculiar to that country alone; for there is much of this root growing at Jamaica, 特に at 16-mile walk, and in the Bay of Honduras it is very plentiful. There is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 蓄える／店 of sugar made in this country; and tea in 豊富 is brought from thence; 存在 much used there, and in Tonquin and Cochin-磁器 as ありふれた drinking; women sitting in the streets and selling dishes of tea hot and ready made; they call it chau and even the poorest people sip it. But the tea at Tonquin of Cochin-磁器 seems not so good, or of so pleasant a bitter, or of so 罰金 a colour, or such virtue as this in 中国; for I have drunk of it in these countries; unless the fault be in the way of making it, for I made 非，不，無 there myself; and by the high red colour it looks as if they made a decoction of it or kept it stale. Yet at Japan I was told there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of pure tea, very good.

The Chinese are very 広大な／多数の／重要な gamesters and they will never be tired with it, playing night and day till they have lost all their 広い地所s; then it is usual with them to hang themselves. This was frequently done by the Chinese factors at Manila, as I was told by Spaniards that lived there. The Spaniards themselves are much （麻薬）常用者d to gaming and are very 専門家 at it; but the Chinese are too subtle for them, 存在 in general a very cunning people.

A VILLAGE AT ST. JOHN'S ISLAND, AND OF THEIR HUSBANDRY OF THEIR RICE.

But a particular account of them and their country would fill a 容積／容量; nor doth my short experience of them qualify me to say much of them. Wherefore I 限定する myself 主として to what I 観察するd at St. John's Island, where we lay some time and visited the shore every day to buy 準備／条項, as hogs, fowls, and buffalo. Here was a small town standing in a wet swampy ground, with many filthy ponds amongst the houses, which were built on the ground as ours are, not on 地位，任命するs as at Mindanao. In these ponds were plenty of ducks; the houses were small and low and covered with thatch, and the insides were but ill furnished, and kept nastily: and I have been told by one who was there that most of the houses in the city of Canton itself are but poor and 不規律な.

The inhabitants of this village seem to be most husbandmen: they were at this time very busy in （種を）蒔くing their rice, which is their chiefest 商品／必需品. The land in which they choose to （種を）蒔く the rice is low and wet, and when ploughed the earth was like a 集まり of mud. They plough their land with a small plough, drawn by one buffalo, and one man both 持つ／拘留するs the plough and 運動s the beast. When the rice is 熟した and gathered in they tread it out of the ear with buffaloes in a large 一連の会議、交渉／完成する place made with a hard 床に打ち倒す fit for that 目的, where they chain three or four of these beasts, one at the tail of the other, and, 運動ing them 一連の会議、交渉／完成する in a （犯罪の）一味 as in a horse-mill, they so order it that the buffaloes may tread upon it all.

A STORY OF A CHINESE PAGODA, OR IDOL-TEMPLE, AND IMAGE.

I was once at this island with seven or eight Englishmen more and, having occasion to stay some time, we killed a 発射, or young porker, and roasted it for our dinners. While we were busy dressing of our pork one of the natives （機の）カム and sat 負かす／撃墜する by us; and when the dinner was ready we 削減（する） a good piece and gave it him, which he willingly received. But by 調印するs he begged more, and withal pointed into the 支持を得ようと努めるd; yet we did not understand his meaning nor much mind him till our hunger was pretty 井戸／弁護士席 assuaged; although he did still make 調印するs and, walking a little way from us, he beckoned to us to come to him; which at last I did, and two or three more. He going before led the way in a small blind path through a thicket into a small grove of trees, in which there was an old idol-寺 about ten foot square: the 塀で囲むs of it were about six foot high and two foot 厚い, made of bricks. The 床に打ち倒す was 覆うd with 幅の広い bricks, and in the middle of the 床に打ち倒す stood an old rusty アイロンをかける bell on its brims. This bell was about two foot high, standing flat on the ground; the brims on which it stood were about sixteen インチs 直径. From the brims it did 次第に減少する away a little に向かって the 長，率いる, much like our bells but that the brims did not turn out so much as ours do. On the 長，率いる of the bell there were three アイロンをかける 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業s as big as a man's arm and about ten インチs long from the 最高の，を越す of the bell, where the ends joined as in a centre and seemed of one 集まり with the bell, as if cast together. These 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業s stood all 平行の to the ground, and their さらに先に ends, which stood triangularly and 開始 from each other at equal distances, like the fliers of our kitchen-jacks, were made 正確に／まさに in the 形態／調整 of the paw of some monstrous beast, having sharp claws on it. This it seems was their god; for as soon as our 熱心な guide （機の）カム before the bell he fell flat on his 直面する and beckoned to us, seeming very desirous to have us do the like. At the inner 味方する of the 寺 against the 塀で囲むs there was an altar of white hewn 石／投石する. The （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する of the altar was about three foot long, sixteen インチs 幅の広い, and three インチs 厚い. It was raised about two foot from the ground and supported by three small 中心存在s of the same white 石／投石する. On this altar there were several small earthen 大型船s; one of them was 十分な of small sticks that had been 燃やすd at one end. Our guide made a 広大な／多数の／重要な many 調印するs for us to fetch and to leave some of our meat there, and seemed very importunate but we 辞退するd. We left him there and went 船内に; I did see no other 寺 nor idol here.

OF THE CHINA-JUNKS, AND THEIR RIGGING.

While we lay at this place we saw several small 中国 junks sailing in the lagoon between the islands and the main, one （機の）カム and 錨，総合司会者d by us. I and some more of our men went 船内に to 見解（をとる） her: she was built with a square flat 長，率いる 同様に as 厳しい, only the 長，率いる or fore part was not so 幅の広い as the 厳しい. On her deck she had little thatched houses like hovels, covered with palmetto-leaves and raised about three foot high, for the seamen to creep into. She had a pretty large cabin wherein there was an altar and a lamp 燃やすing. I did but just look in and saw not the idol. The 持つ／拘留する was divided into many small partitions, all of them made so tight that if a 漏れる should spring up in any one of them it could go no さらに先に, and so could do but little 損失 but only to the goods in the 底（に届く） of that room where the 漏れる springs up. Each of these rooms belong to one or two merchants, or more; and every man freights his goods in his own room; and probably 宿泊するs there if he be on board himself. These junks have only two masts, a main-mast and a fore-mast. The fore-mast has a square yard and a square sail, but the main-mast has a sail 狭くする aloft like a sloop's sail, and in 好天 they use a topsail which is to 運ぶ／漁獲高 負かす／撃墜する on the deck in foul 天候, yard and all; for they did not go up to furl it. The main-mast in their biggest junks seem to me as big as any third-率 man-of-war's mast in England, and yet not pieced as ours but made of one grown tree; and in an all my travels I never saw any 選び出す／独身-tree-masts so big in the 団体／死体, and so long and yet so 井戸／弁護士席 次第に減少するd, as I have seen in the Chinese junks.

Some of our men went over to a pretty large town on the continent of 中国 where we might have furnished ourselves with 準備／条項, which was a thing we were always in want of and was our 長，指導者 商売／仕事 here; but we were afraid to 嘘（をつく） in this place any longer for we had some 調印するs of an approaching 嵐／襲撃する; this 存在 the time of the year in which 嵐／襲撃するs are 推定する／予想するd on this coast; and here was no 安全な riding. It was now the time of the year for the south-west 季節風 but the 勝利，勝つd had been whiffing about from one part of the compass to another for two or three days, and いつかs it would be やめる 静める. This 原因（となる）d us to put to sea, that we might have sea-room at least; for such flattering 天候 is 一般的に the forerunner of a tempest.

THEY LEAVE ST. JOHN'S AND THE COAST OF CHINA. A MOST OUTRAGEOUS STORM.

Accordingly we 重さを計るd 錨，総合司会者 and 始める，決める out; yet we had very little 勝利，勝つd all the next night. But the day 続いて起こるing, which was the 4th day of July, about four o'clock in the afternoon, the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム to the north-east and freshened upon us, and the sky looked very 黒人／ボイコット in that ４半期/4分の1, and the 黒人／ボイコット clouds began to rise apace and moved に向かって us; having hung all the morning in the horizon. This made us take in our topsails and, the 勝利，勝つd still 増加するing, about nine o'clock we 暗礁d our mainsail and foresail; at ten we furled our foresail, keeping under a mainsail and mizzen. At eleven o'clock we furled our mainsail and ballasted our mizzen; at which time it began to rain, and by twelve o'clock at night it blew 越えるing hard and the rain 注ぐd 負かす／撃墜する as through a sieve. It 雷鳴d and lightened prodigiously, and the sea seemed all of a 解雇する／砲火／射撃 about us; for every sea that broke sparkled like 雷. The violent 勝利，勝つd raised the sea presently to a 広大な／多数の／重要な 高さ, and it ran very short and began to break in on our deck. One sea struck away the rails of our 長，率いる, and our sheet-錨，総合司会者, which was stowed with one flook or bending of the アイロンをかける over the ship's gunwale, and 攻撃するd very 井戸／弁護士席 負かす／撃墜する to the 味方する, was violently washed off, and had like to have struck a 穴を開ける in our 屈服する as it lay （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域ing against it. Then we were 軍隊d to put 権利 before the 勝利，勝つd to stow our 錨，総合司会者 again; which we did with much ado; but afterwards we durst not adventure to bring our ship to the 勝利，勝つd again for 恐れる of 創立者ing, for the turning the ship either to or fro from the 勝利，勝つd is dangerous in such violent 嵐／襲撃するs. The fierceness of the 天候 continued till four o'clock that morning; in which time we did 削減（する） away two canoes that were 牽引するing astern.

CORPUS SANT, A LIGHT, OR METEOR APPEARING IN STORMS.

After four o'clock the 雷鳴 and the rain abated and then we saw a corpus sant at our main-最高の，を越す-mast 長，率いる, on the very 最高の，を越す of the トラックで運ぶ of the spindle. This sight rejoiced our men exceedingly; for the 高さ of the 嵐／襲撃する is 一般的に over when the corpus sant is seen aloft; but when they are seen lying on the deck it is 一般に accounted a bad 調印する.

A corpus sant is a 確かな small glittering light; when it appears as this did on the very 最高の，を越す of the main-mast or at a yard-arm it is like a 星／主役にする; but when it appears on the deck it 似ているs a 広大な／多数の／重要な glow-worm. The Spaniards have another 指名する for it (though I take even this to be a Spanish or Portuguese 指名する, and a 汚職 only of corpus sanctum) and I have been told that when they see them they presently go to 祈りs and bless themselves for the happy sight. I have heard some ignorant seamen discoursing how they have seen them creep, or, as they say, travel about in the scuppers, telling many dismal stories that happened at such times: but I did never see anyone 動かす out of the place where it was first 直す／買収する，八百長をするd, except upon deck, where every sea washes it about: neither did I ever see any but when we have had hard rain 同様に as 勝利，勝つd; and therefore do believe it is some jelly: but enough of this.

We continued scudding 権利 before 勝利，勝つd and sea from two till seven o'clock in the morning, and then the 勝利，勝つd 存在 much abated we 始める，決める our mizzen again, and brought our ship to the 勝利，勝つd, and lay under a mizzen till eleven. Then it fell flat 静める, and it continued so for about two hours: but the sky looked very 黒人／ボイコット and rueful, 特に in the south-west, and the sea 投げ上げる／ボディチェックするd us about like an eggshell for want of 勝利，勝つd. About one o'clock in the afternoon the 勝利，勝つd sprung up at south-west out of the ４半期/4分の1 from whence we did 推定する／予想する it: therefore we presently brailed up our mizzen and wore our ship: but we had no sooner put our ship before the 勝利，勝つd but it blew a 嵐／襲撃する again and rained very hard, though not so violently as the night before: but the 勝利，勝つd was altogether as boisterous and so continued till ten or eleven o'clock at night. All which time we scudded and run before the 勝利，勝つd very swift, though only with our 明らかにする 政治家s, that is, without any sail abroad. Afterwards the 勝利，勝つd died away by degrees, and before day we had but little 勝利，勝つd and 罰金 （疑いを）晴らす 天候.

I was never in such a violent 嵐／襲撃する in all my life; so said all the company. This was 近づく the change of the moon: it was two or three days before the change. The 6th day in the morning, having 罰金 handsome 天候, we got up our yards again and began to 乾燥した，日照りの ourselves and our 着せる／賦与するs for we were all 井戸／弁護士席 sopped. This 嵐／襲撃する had deadened the hearts of our men so much that, instead of going to buy more 準備／条項 at the same place from whence we （機の）カム before the 嵐／襲撃する, or of 捜し出すing any more for the island Prata, they thought of going somewhere to 避難所 before the 十分な moon, for 恐れる of another 嵐／襲撃する at that time: for 一般的に, if there is any very bad 天候 in the month, it is about two or three days before or after the 十分な or change of the moon.

THE PISCADORES, OR FISHERS ISLANDS NEAR FORMOSA.

These thoughts, I say, put our men on thinking where to go, and, the charts or sea-plats 存在 first 協議するd, it was 結論するd to go to 確かな islands lying in latitude 23 degrees north called Piscadores. For there was not a man 船内に that was anything 熟知させるd on these coasts; and therefore all our dependence was on the charts, which only pointed out to us where such and such places or islands were without giving us any account what harbour, roads or bays there were, or the produce, strength, or 貿易（する） of them; these we were 軍隊d to 捜し出す after ourselves.

The Piscadores are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many 住むd islands lying 近づく the island Formosa, between it and 中国, in or 近づく the latitude of 23 degrees north latitude, almost as high as the Tropic of 癌. These Piscadore islands are moderately high and appear much like our Dorsetshire and Wiltshire 負かす／撃墜するs in England. They produce 厚い short grass and a few trees. They are pretty 井戸／弁護士席 watered and they 料金d 豊富 of goats and some 広大な／多数の／重要な cattle. There are 豊富 of 開始するs and old 要塞s on them: but of no use now, whatever they have been.

A TARTARIAN GARRISON, AND CHINESE TOWN ON ONE OF THESE ISLANDS.

Between the two easternmost islands there is a very good harbour which is never without junks riding in it: and on the west 味方する of the easternmost island there is a large town and fort 命令（する）ing the harbour. The houses are but low, yet 井戸／弁護士席 built, and the town makes a 罰金 prospect. This is a 守備隊 of the Tartars, wherein are also three or four hundred 兵士s who live here three years and then they are moved to some other place.

On the island, on the west 味方する of the harbour の近くに by the sea, there is a small town of Chinese; and most of the other islands have some Chinese living on them more or いっそう少なく.

THEY ANCHOR IN THE HARBOUR NEAR THE TARTARS' GARRISON, AND TREAT WITH THE GOVERNOR. OF AMOY IN THE PROVINCE OF FOKIEN, AND MACAO, A CHINESE AND PORTUGUESE TOWN NEAR CANTON IN CHINA.

Having, as I said before, 結論するd to go to these islands, we steered away for them, having the 勝利，勝つd at west-south-west a small 強風. The 20th day of July we had first sight of them and steered in の中で them; finding no place to 錨，総合司会者 in till we （機の）カム into the harbour before について言及するd. We 失敗ing in, knowing little of our way, and we admired to see so many junks going and coming, and some at an 錨，総合司会者, and so 広大な／多数の／重要な a town as the 隣人ing easternmost town, the Tartarian 守備隊; for we did not 推定する／予想する nor 願望（する） to have seen any people, 存在 in care to 嘘（をつく） 隠すd in these seas; however seeing we were here, we boldly ran into the harbour and presently sent 岸に our canoe to the town.

Our people were met by an officer at their 上陸; and our quartermaster, who was the chiefest man in the boat, was 行為／行うd before the 知事 and 診察するd of what nation we were, and what was our 商売／仕事 here. He answered that we were English and were bound to Amoy or Anhay, which is a city standing on a navigable river in the 州 of Fokien in 中国, and is a place of 広大な 貿易（する）, there 存在 a 抱擁する multitude of ships there, and in general on all these coasts, as I have heard of several that have been there. He said also that, having received some 損失 by a 嵐／襲撃する, we therefore put in here to refit before we could adventure to go さらに先に; and that we did ーするつもりである to 嘘（をつく） here till after the 十分な moon, for 恐れる of another 嵐／襲撃する. The 知事 told him that we might better refit our ship at Amoy than here, and that he heard that two English 大型船s were arrived there already; and that he should be very ready to 補助装置 us in anything; but we must not 推定する／予想する to 貿易（する） there but must go to the places 許すd to entertain merchant-strangers, which were Amoy and Macao. Macao is a town of 広大な／多数の／重要な 貿易（する） also, lying in an island at the very mouth of the river of Canton. It is 防備を堅める／強化するd and 守備隊d by a large Portuguese 植民地, but yet under the Chinese 政府, whose people 住む one moiety of the town and lay on the Portuguese what 税金 they please; for they dare not disoblige the Chinese for 恐れる of losing their 貿易（する）. However the 知事 very kindly told our quartermaster that どれでも we 手配中の，お尋ね者, if that place could furnish us, we should have it. Yet that we must not come 岸に on that island, but he would send 船内に some of his men to know what we 手配中の，お尋ね者, and they should also bring it off to us. That にもかかわらず we might go on shore on other islands to buy refreshments of the Chinese. After the discourse was ended the 知事 解任するd him with a small jar of flour, and three or four large cakes of very 罰金 bread, and about a dozen pineapples and watermelons (all very good in their 肉親，親類d) as a 現在の to the captain.

THE HABITS OF A TARTARIAN OFFICER AND HIS RETINUE.

The next day an 著名な officer （機の）カム 船内に with a 広大な／多数の／重要な many attendants. He wore a 黒人／ボイコット silk cap of a particular make, with a plume of 黒人／ボイコット and white feathers standing up almost 一連の会議、交渉／完成する his 長，率いる behind, and all his outside 着せる／賦与するs were 黒人／ボイコット silk: he had a loose 黒人／ボイコット coat which reached to his 膝s, and his breeches were of the same; and underneath his coat he had two 衣料品s more, of other coloured silk. His 脚s were covered with small 黒人／ボイコット limber boots. All his attendants were in a very handsome garb of 黒人／ボイコット silk, all wearing those small 黒人／ボイコット boots and caps. These caps were like the 栄冠を与える of a hat made of palmetto-leaves, like our straw hats; but without brims, and coming 負かす／撃墜する but to their ears. These had no feathers, but had an oblong button on the 最高の，を越す, and from between the button and the cap there fell 負かす／撃墜する all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する their 長，率いる as low as the cap reached, a sort of coarse hair like horse-hair, dyed (as I suppose) of a light red colour.

THEIR PRESENTS, EXCELLENT BEEF. SAM SHU, A SORT OF CHINESE ARAK, AND HOC SHU, A KIND OF CHINESE MUM, AND THE JARS IT IS BOTTLED IN.

The officer brought 船内に as a 現在の from the 知事 a young heifer, the fattest and kindliest beef that I did ever taste in any foreign country; it was small yet 十分な-grown; two large hogs, four goats, two baskets of 罰金 flour, 20 広大な／多数の／重要な flat cakes of 罰金 井戸／弁護士席-tasted bread, two 広大な／多数の／重要な jars of arak (made of rice as I 裁判官d) called by the Chinese sam shu; and 55 jars of hoc shu, as they call it, and our Europeans from them. This is a strong アルコール飲料, made of wheat, as I have been told. It looks like mum and tastes much like it, and is very pleasant and hearty. Our seamen love it mightily and will lick their lips with it: for 不十分な a ship goes to 中国 but the men come home fat with soaking this アルコール飲料, and bring 蓄える／店 of jars of it home with them. It is put into small white 厚い jars that 持つ／拘留する 近づく a quart: the 二塁打 jars 持つ／拘留する about two quarts. These jars are small below and thence rise up with a pretty 十分な belly, の近くにing in pretty short at 最高の，を越す with a small 厚い mouth. Over the mouth of the jar they put a thin 半導体素子 削減（する） 一連の会議、交渉／完成する just so as to cover the mouth, over that a piece of paper, and over that they put a 広大な／多数の／重要な lump of clay, almost as big as the 瓶／封じ込める or jar itself, with a hollow in it, to 収容する／認める the neck of the 瓶／封じ込める, made 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and about four インチs long; this is to 保存する the アルコール飲料. If the アルコール飲料 take any vent it will be sour presently, so that when we buy any of it of the ships from 中国 returning to マドラス, or Fort St. George, where it is then sold, or of the Chinese themselves, of whom I have bought it at Achin and Bencoolen in Sumatra, if the clay be 割れ目d, or the アルコール飲料 motherly, we make them take it again. A quart jar there is 価値（がある） sixpence. Besides this 現在の from the 知事 there was a captain of a junk sent two jars of arak, and 豊富 of pineapples and watermelons. Captain Read sent 岸に as a 現在の to the 知事 a curious Spanish silver-hilted rapier, an English carbine, and a gold chain, and when the officer went 岸に three guns were 解雇する／砲火／射撃d. In the afternoon the 知事 sent off the same officer again to compliment the captain for his civility, and 約束d to 報復する his 親切 before we 出発／死d; but we had such blustering 天候 afterward that no boat could come 船内に.

We stayed here till the 29th day and then sailed from hence with the 勝利，勝つd at south-west and pretty 好天. We now directed our course for some islands we had chosen to go to that 嘘（をつく） between Formosa and Luconia. They are laid 負かす／撃墜する in our 陰謀（を企てる）s without any 指名する, only with a 人物／姿／数字 of 5, denoting the number of them. It was supposed by us that these islands had no inhabitants, because they had not any 指名する by our hydrographers. Therefore we thought to 嘘（をつく） there 安全な・保証する, and be pretty 近づく the island Luconia, which we did still ーするつもりである to visit.

OF THE ISLE OF FORMOSA, AND THE FIVE ISLANDS; TO WHICH THEY GAVE THE NAMES OF ORANGE, MONMOUTH, GRAFTON, BASHEE, AND GOAT ISLANDS, IN GENERAL, THE BASHEE ISLANDS.

In going to them we sailed by the south-west end of Formosa, leaving it on our larboard 味方する. This is a large island; the south end is in latitude 21 degrees 20 minutes and the north end in the 25 degrees 10 minutes north latitude. The longitude of this 小島 is laid 負かす／撃墜する from 142 degrees 5 minutes to 143 degrees 16 minutes reckoning east from the Pike of Tenerife, so that it is but 狭くする; and the Tropic of 癌 crosses it. It is a high and woody island, and was 以前は 井戸／弁護士席 住むd by the Chinese, and was then frequently visited by English merchants, there 存在 a very good harbour to 安全な・保証する their ships. But since the tartars have 征服する／打ち勝つd 中国 they have spoiled the harbour (as I have been 知らせるd) to 妨げる the Chinese that were then in 反乱 from 防備を堅める／強化するing themselves there; and ordered the foreign merchants to come and 貿易（する） on the main.

The sixth day of August we arrived at the five islands that we were bound to and 錨，総合司会者d on the east 味方する of the 最北の island in 15 fathom, a cable's length from the shore. Here, contrary to our 期待, we 設立する 豊富 of inhabitants in sight; for there were three large towns all within a league of the sea; and another larger town than any of the three, on the 支援する 味方する of a small hill の近くに by also, as we 設立する afterwards. These islands 嘘（をつく） in latitude 20 degrees 20 minutes north latitude by my 観察, for I took it there, and I find their longitude によれば our charts to be 141 degrees 50 minutes. These islands having no particular 指名するs in the charts some or other of us made use of the seamen's 特権 to give them what 指名するs we please. Three of the islands were pretty large; the westernmost is the biggest. This the Dutchmen who were の中で us called the Prince of Orange's Island, in honour of his 現在の Majesty. It is about seven or eight leagues long and about two leagues wide; and it lies almost north and south. The other two 広大な／多数の／重要な islands are about four or five leagues to the eastward of this. The 最北の of them, where we first 錨，総合司会者d, I called the Duke of Grafton's 小島 as soon as we landed on it; having married my wife out of his duchess's family, and leaving her at Arlington House at my going abroad. This 小島 is about 4 leagues long and one league and a half wide, stretching north and south. The other 広大な／多数の／重要な island our seamen called the Duke of Monmouth's Island. This is about a league to the southward of Grafton 小島. It is about three leagues long and a league wide, lying as the other. Between Monmouth and the south end of Orange Island there are two small islands of a roundish form, lying east and west. The easternmost island of the two our men 全員一致で called Bashee Island, from a アルコール飲料 which we drank there plentifully every day after we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 at it. The other, which is the smallest of all, we called Goat Island, from the 広大な／多数の／重要な number of goats there; and to the northward of them all are two high 激しく揺するs.

Orange Island, which is the biggest of them all, is not 住むd. It is high land, flat and even on the 最高の，を越す with 法外な cliffs against the sea; for which 推論する／理由 we could not go 岸に there as we did on all the 残り／休憩（する）.

A DIGRESSION CONCERNING THE DIFFERENT DEPTHS OF THE SEA NEAR HIGH OR LOW LANDS, SOIL, ETC., AS BEFORE.

I have made it my general 観察 that where the land is 盗品故買者d with 法外な 激しく揺するs and cliffs against the sea there the sea is very 深い, and seldom affords 錨，総合司会者-ground; and on the other 味方する where the land 落ちるs away with a declivity into the sea (although the land be 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の high within) yet there are 一般的に good soundings, and その結果 錨，総合司会者ing; and as the 明白な declivity of the land appears 近づく, or at the 辛勝する／優位 of the water, whether pretty 法外な or more sloping, so we 一般的に find our 錨，総合司会者-ground to be more or いっそう少なく 深い or 法外な; therefore we come nearer the shore or 錨，総合司会者 さらに先に off as we see convenient; for there is no coast in the world that I know or have heard of where the land is of a continual 高さ without some small valleys or declivities which 嘘（をつく） intermixed with the high land. They are the subsidings of valleys or low lands that make dents in the shore and creeks, small bays, and harbours, or little coves, etc., which afford good 錨，総合司会者ing, the surface of the earth 存在 there 宿泊するd 深い under water. Thus we find many good harbours on such coasts where the land bounds the sea with 法外な cliffs, by 推論する／理由 of the declivities or 沈下するing of the land between these cliffs: but where the declension from the hills or cliffs is not within land, between hill and hill, but, as on the coast of Chile and Peru, the declivity is toward the main sea, or into it, the coast 存在 perpendicular, or very 法外な from the 隣人ing hills, as in those countries from the Andes that run along the shore, there is a 深い sea, and few or no harbours or creeks. All that coast is too 法外な for 錨，総合司会者ing, and has the fewest roads fit for ships of any coast I know. The coasts of Galicia, Portugal, Norway, and Newfoundland, etc., are coasts like the Peruvian and the high islands of the 群島; but yet not so scanty of good harbours; for where there are short 山の尾根s of land there are good bays at the extremities of those 山の尾根s, where they 急落（する），激減（する） into the sea; as on the coast of Caracas, etc. The island of Juan Fernandez and the island St. Helena, etc., are such high land with 深い shore: and in general the 急落（する），激減（する）ing of any land under water seems to be in 割合 to the rising of its continuous part above water, more or いっそう少なく 法外な; and it must be a 底（に届く） almost level, or very gently 拒絶する／低下するing, that affords good 錨，総合司会者ing, ships 存在 soon driven from their moorings on a 法外な bank: therefore we never 努力する／競う to 錨，総合司会者 where we see the land high and bounding the sea with 法外な cliffs; and for this 推論する／理由, when we （機の）カム in sight of 明言する／公表するs Island 近づく Tierra del Fuego, before we entered into the South Seas, we did not so much as think of 錨，総合司会者ing after we saw what land it was, because of the 法外な cliffs which appeared against the sea: yet there might be little harbours or coves for shallops or the like to 錨，総合司会者 in, which we did not see or search after.

As high 法外な cliffs bounding the sea have this ill consequence that they seldom afford 錨，総合司会者ing; so they have this 利益 that we can see them far off and sail の近くに to them without danger: for which 推論する／理由 we call them bold shores; 反して low land on the contrary is seen but a little way and in many places we dare not come 近づく it for 恐れる of running 座礁して before we see it. Besides there are in many places shoals thrown out by the course of 広大な／多数の／重要な rivers that from the low land 落ちる into the sea.

This which I have said, that there is usually good 錨，総合司会者ing 近づく low lands, may be illustrated by several instances. Thus on the south 味方する of the bay of Campeachy there is mostly low land, and there also is good 錨，総合司会者ing all along shore; and in some places to the eastward of the town of Campeachy we shall have so many fathom as we are leagues off from land that is from nine or ten leagues distance till you come within 4 leagues: and from thence to land it grows but shallower. The bay of Honduras also is low land, and continues mostly so as we passed along from thence to the coasts of Portobello and Cartagena till we （機の）カム as high as Santa Marta; afterwards the land is low again till you come に向かって the coast of Caracas, which is a high coast and bold shore. The land about Surinam on the same coast is low and good 錨，総合司会者ing, and that over on the coast of Guinea is such also. And such too is the Bay of パナマ, where the 操縦する-調書をとる／予約する orders the 操縦する always to sound and not to come within such a depth, be it by night or day. In the same seas, from the high land of Guatemala in Mexico to California, there is mostly low land and good 錨，総合司会者ing. In the main of Asia, the coast of 中国, the Bay of Siam and Bengal, and all the coast of Coromandel, and the coast about Malacca, and against it the island Sumatra, on that 味方する are mostly low 錨，総合司会者ing shores. But on the west 味方する of Sumatra the shore is high and bold; so most of the islands lying to the eastward of Sumatra, as the islands Borneo, Celebes, Gilolo, and 豊富 of islands of いっそう少なく 公式文書，認める, lying scattering up and 負かす／撃墜する those seas, are low land and have good 錨，総合司会者ing about them, with many shoals scattered to and fro の中で them; but the islands lying against the East Indian Ocean, 特に the west 味方するs of them, are high land and 法外な, 特に the west parts, not only of Sumatra but also of Java, Timor, etc. Particulars are endless; but in general it is seldom but high shores and 深い waters; and on the other 味方する low land and shallow seas are 設立する together.

THE SOIL, FRUITS AND ANIMALS OF THESE ISLANDS.

But to return from this digression, to speak of the 残り／休憩（する） of these islands. Monmouth and Grafton 小島s are very hilly, with many of those 法外な 住むd precipices on them that I shall 述べる 特に. The two small islands are flat and even; only the Bashee Island has one 法外な scraggy hill, but Goat Island is all flat and very even.

The mould of these islands in the valley is blackish in some places, but in most red. The hills are very rocky: the valleys are 井戸／弁護士席 watered with brooks of fresh water which run into the sea in many different places. The 国／地域 is indifferent 実りの多い／有益な, 特に in the valleys; producing pretty 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of trees (though not very big) and 厚い grass. The 味方するs of the mountains have also short grass, and some of the mountains have 地雷s within them; for the natives told us that the yellow metal they showed us (as I shall speak more 特に) （機の）カム from these mountains; for when they held it up they would point に向かって them.

The fruit of these islands are a few plantains, 気が狂って, pineapples, pumpkins, sugarcane, etc., and there might be more if the natives would, for the ground seems fertile enough. Here are 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of potatoes, and yams, which is the ありふれた food for the natives for bread 肉親，親類d: for those few plantains they have are only used as fruit. They have some cotton growing here of the small 工場／植物s.

Here are plenty of goats and 豊富 of hogs; but few fowls, either wild or tame. For this I have always 観察するd in my travels, both in the East and West Indies, that in those places where there is plenty of 穀物, that is, of rice in one and maize in the other, there are also 設立する 広大な／多数の／重要な 豊富 of fowls; but on the contrary few fowls in those countries where the inhabitants 料金d on fruits and roots only. The few wild fowls that are here are parakeets and some other small birds. Their tame fowl are only a few cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s.

THE INHABITANTS AND THEIR CLOTHING.

Monmouth and Grafton Islands are very 厚い 住むd; and Bashee Island has one town on it. The natives of these islands are short squat people; they are 一般に 一連の会議、交渉／完成する-visaged, with low foreheads and 厚い eyebrows; their 注目する，もくろむs of a hazel colour and small, yet bigger than the Chinese; short low noses and their lips and mouths middle 割合d; their teeth are white; their hair is 黒人／ボイコット, and 厚い, and lank, which they wear but short; it will just cover their ears, and so it is 削減（する） 一連の会議、交渉／完成する very even. Their 肌s are of a very dark 巡査 colour.

They wear no hat, cap, nor turban, nor anything to keep off the sun. The men for the biggest part have only a small clout to cover their nakedness; some of them have jackets made of plantain leaves which were as rough as any 耐える's 肌: I never saw such rugged things. The women have a short petticoat made of cotton which comes a little below their 膝s. It is a 厚い sort of stubborn cloth which they make themselves of their cotton. RINGS OF A YELLOW METAL LIKE GOLD. Both men and women do wear large earrings made of that yellow metal before について言及するd. Whether it were gold or no I cannot 前向きに／確かに say; I took it to be so, it was 激しい and of the colour of our paler gold. I would fain have brought away some to have 満足させるd my curiosity; but I had nothing where with to buy any. Captain Read bought two of these （犯罪の）一味s with some アイロンをかける, of which the people are very greedy; and he would have bought more, thinking he was come to a very fair market, but that the paleness of the metal made him and his 乗組員 不信 its 存在 権利 gold. For my part I should have 投機・賭けるd on the 購入（する） of some, but having no 所有物／資産／財産 in the アイロンをかける, of which we had 広大な／多数の／重要な 蓄える／店 on board sent from England by the merchants along with Captain Swan, I durst not 物々交換する it away.

These （犯罪の）一味s when first polished look very gloriously, but time makes them fade and turn to a pale yellow. Then they make a soft paste of red earth and, smearing it over their （犯罪の）一味s, they cast them into a quick 解雇する／砲火／射撃 where they remain till they be red hot; then they take them out and 冷静な／正味の them in water and rub off the paste; and they look again of a glorious colour and lustre.

THEIR HOUSES BUILT ON REMARKABLE PRECIPICES.

These people make but small low houses. The 味方するs, which are made of small 地位，任命するs wattled with boughs, are not above 4 foot and a half high: the 山の尾根-政治家 is about 7 or 8 foot high. They have a fireplace at one end of their houses and boards placed on the ground to 嘘（をつく） on. They 住む together in small villages built on the 味方するs and 最高の，を越すs of rocky hills, 3 or 4 列／漕ぐ／騒動s of houses, one above another and on such 法外な precipices that they go up to the first 列／漕ぐ／騒動 with a 木造の ladder, and so with a ladder still from every storey up to that above it, there 存在 no way to 上がる. The plain on the first precipice may be so wide as to have room both for a 列／漕ぐ／騒動 of houses that stand all along on the 辛勝する／優位 or brink of it, and a very 狭くする street running along before their doors, between the 列／漕ぐ／騒動 of houses and the foot of the next precipice; the plain of which is in a manner level to the 最高の，を越すs of the houses below, and so for the 残り／休憩（する）. The ありふれた ladder to each 列／漕ぐ／騒動 or street comes up at a 狭くする passage left purposely about the middle of it; and the street, 存在 bounded with a precipice also at each end, it is but 製図／抽選 up the ladder if they be 強襲，強姦d, and then there is no coming at them from below, but by climbing up against a perpendicular 塀で囲む: and, that they may not be 強襲，強姦d from above, they take care to build on the 味方する of such a hill whose 支援する 味方する hangs over the sea, or is some high, 法外な, perpendicular precipice, altogether inaccessible. These precipices are natural; for the 激しく揺するs seem too hard to work on; nor is there any 調印する that art has been 雇うd about them. On Bashee island there is one such, and built upon, with its 支援する next the sea. Grafton and Monmouth 小島s are very 厚い 始める，決める with these hills and towns; and the natives, whether for 恐れる of 著作権侵害者s, or foreign enemies, or 派閥s の中で their own 一族／派閥s, care not for building but in these fastnesses; which I take to be the 推論する／理由 that Orange 小島, though the largest, and as fertile as any, yet 存在 level and exposed has no inhabitants. I never saw the like precipices and towns.

THEIR BOATS AND EMPLOYMENTS.

These people are pretty ingenious also in building boats. Their small boats are much like our 取引，協定 yawls but not so big; and they are built with very 狭くする plank pinned with 木造の pins and some nails. They have also some pretty large boats which will carry 40 or 50 men. These they 列／漕ぐ／騒動 with 12 or 14 oars of a 味方する. They are built much like the small ones and they 列／漕ぐ／騒動 二塁打d-banked; that is, two men setting on one （法廷の）裁判, but one 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing on one 味方する, the other on the other 味方する of the boat. They understand the use of アイロンをかける and work it themselves. Their bellows are like those at Mindanao. The ありふれた 雇用 for the men is fishing; but I did never see them catch much: whether it is more plenty at other times of the year I know not. The women do manage their 農園s.

THEIR FOOD, OF GOAT-SKINS, ENTRAILS, ETC.

I did never see them kill any of their goats or hogs for themselves, yet they would beg the paunches of the goats that they themselves did sell to us: and if any of our surly seamen did heave them into the sea they would take them up again and the 肌s of the goats also. They would not meddle with hogs' guts if our men threw away any besides what they made chitterlings and sausages of. The goat-肌s these people would carry 岸に, and making a 解雇する／砲火／射撃 they would singe off all the hair, and afterwards let the 肌 嘘（をつく） and parch on the coals till they thought it eatable; and then they would gnaw it and 涙／ほころび it in pieces with their teeth, and at last swallow it. The paunches of the goats would make them an excellent dish; they dressed it in this manner. They would turn out all the chopped grass and crudities 設立する in the maw into their マリファナs, and 始める，決める it over the 解雇する／砲火／射撃 and 動かす it about often: this would smoke and puff, and heave up as it was boiling; 勝利，勝つd breaking out of the ferment and making a very savoury stink. While this was doing, if they had any fish, as 一般的に they had two or three small fish, these they would make very clean (as hating nastiness belike) and 削減（する） the flesh from the bone, and then mince the flesh as small as かもしれない they could, and when that in the マリファナ was 井戸／弁護士席 boiled they would take it up and, まき散らすing a little salt into it, they would eat it, mixed with their raw minced flesh. The dung in the maw would look like so much boiled herbs minced very small; and they took up their mess with their fingers, as the Moors do their pillaw, using no spoons.

PARCHED LOCUSTS.

They had another dish made of a sort of locusts, whose 団体／死体s were about an インチ and a half long and as 厚い as the 最高の，を越す of one's little finger; with large thin wings and long and small 脚s. At this time of the year these creatures （機の）カム in 広大な／多数の／重要な 群れているs to devour their potato leaves and other herbs; and the natives would go out with small 逮捕するs and take a quart at one sweep. When they had enough they would carry them home and parch them over the 解雇する／砲火／射撃 in an earthen pan; and then their wings and 脚s would 落ちる off and their 長，率いるs and 支援するs would turn red like boiled shrimps, 存在 before brownish. Their 団体／死体s 存在 十分な would eat very moist, their 長，率いるs would crackle in one's teeth. I did once eat of this dish and liked it 井戸／弁護士席 enough; but their other dish my stomach would not take.

BASHEE, OR SUGAR-CANE DRINK.

Their ありふれた drink is water; as it is of all other Indians: besides which they make a sort of drink with the juice of the sugar-茎, which they boil, and put some small 黒人／ボイコット sort of berries の中で it. When it is 井戸／弁護士席 boiled they put it into 広大な／多数の／重要な jars and let it stand three or four days and work. Then it settles and becomes （疑いを）晴らす, and is presently fit to drink. This is an excellent アルコール飲料, and very much like English beer, both in colour and taste. It is very strong, and I do believe very wholesome: for our men, who drank briskly of it all day for several weeks, were frequently drunk with it, and never sick after it. The natives brought a 広大な 取引，協定 of it every day to those 船内に and 岸に: for some of our men were 岸に at work on Bashee Island; which island they gave that 指名する to from their drinking this アルコール飲料 there; that 存在 the 指名する which the natives called this アルコール飲料 by: and as they sold it to our men very cheap so they did not spare to drink it as 自由に. And indeed from the plenty of this アルコール飲料 and their plentiful use of it our men called all these islands the Bashee Islands.

OF THEIR LANGUAGE AND ORIGIN.

What language these people do speak I know not: for it had no affinity in sound to the Chinese, which is spoken much through the teeth; nor yet to the Malayan language. They called the metal that their earrings were made of bullawan, which is the Mindanao word for gold; therefore probably they may be 関係のある to the Philippine Indians; for that is the general 指名する for gold の中で all those Indians. I could not learn from whence they have their アイロンをかける; but it is most likely they go in their 広大な／多数の／重要な boats to the north end of Luconia and 貿易（する） with the Indians of that island for it. Neither did I see anything beside アイロンをかける and pieces of buffalo hides, which I could 裁判官 that they bought of strangers: their 着せる／賦与するs were of their own growth and 製造（する）.

LANCES AND BUFFALO COATS.

These men had 木造の lances and a few lances 長，率いるd with アイロンをかける; which are all the 武器s that they have. Their armour is a piece of buffalo hide, 形態／調整d like our carters' frocks, 存在 without sleeves and sewn both 味方するs together with 穴を開けるs for the 長，率いる and the 武器 to come 前へ／外へ. This buff coat reaches 負かす／撃墜する to their 膝s: it is の近くに about their shoulders, but below it is three foot wide and as 厚い as a board.

NO IDOLS, NOR CIVIL FORM OF GOVERNMENT.

I could never perceive them to worship anything, neither had they any idols; neither did they seem to 観察する any one day more than other. I could never perceive that one man was of greater 力／強力にする than another; but they seemed to be all equal; only every man 判決，裁定 in his own house, and the children 尊敬（する）・点ing and honouring their parents.

A YOUNG MAN BURIED ALIVE BY THEM; SUPPOSED TO BE FOR THEFT.

Yet it is probable that they have some 法律 or custom by which they are 治める／統治するd; for while we lay here we saw a young man buried alive in the earth; and it was for 窃盗 as far as we could understand from them. There was a 広大な／多数の／重要な 深い 穴を開ける dug and 豊富 of people （機の）カム to the place to take their last 別れの（言葉，会） of him: の中で the 残り／休憩（する） there was one woman who made 広大な／多数の／重要な lamentation and took off the 非難するd person's earrings. We supposed her to be his mother. After he had taken his leave of her and some others he was put into the 炭坑，オーケストラ席 and covered over with earth. He did not struggle but 産する／生じるd very 静かに to his 罰; and they rammed the earth の近くに upon him and stifled him.

THEIR WIVES AND CHILDREN, AND HUSBANDRY.

They have but one wife, with whom they live and agree very 井戸／弁護士席; and their children live very obediently under them. The boys go out a-fishing with their fathers; and the girls live at home with their mothers: and when the girls are grown pretty strong they send them to their 農園s to dig yams and potatoes, of which they bring home on their 長，率いるs every day enough to serve the whole family; for they have no rice nor maize.

Their 農園s are in the valleys, at a good distance from their houses; where every man has a 確かな 位置／汚点／見つけ出す of land which is 適切に his own. This he manages himself for his own use; and 供給するs enough that he may not be beholding to his 隣人.

THEIR MANNERS, ENTERTAINMENTS, AND TRAFFIC.

Notwithstanding the seeming nastiness of their dish of goats' maw they are in their persons a very neat cleanly people, both men and women: and they are withal the quietest and civilest people that I did ever 会合，会う with. I could never perceive them to be angry with one another. I have admired to see 20 or 30 boats 船内に our ship at a time, and yet no different の中で them; but all civil and 静かな, endeavouring to help each other on occasion: no noise, nor 外見 of distaste and, although いつかs cross 事故s would happen which might have 始める，決める other men together by the ears, yet they were not moved by them. いつかs they will also drink 自由に and warm themselves with their drink; yet neither then could I ever perceive them out of humour. They are not only thus civil の中で themselves but very 強いるing and 肉親，親類d to strangers; nor were their children rude to us, as is usual. Indeed the women, when we （機の）カム to their houses, would modestly beg any rags or small pieces of cloth to swaddle their young ones in, 持つ／拘留するing their children out to us; and begging is usual の中で all these wild nations. Yet neither did they beg so importunately as in other places; nor did the men ever beg anything at all. Neither, except once at the first time that we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 (as I shall relate) did they steal anything; but dealt 正確に，正当に and with 広大な／多数の／重要な 誠実 with us; and make us very welcome to their houses with bashee-drink. If they had 非，不，無 of this アルコール飲料 themselves they would buy a jar of drink of their 隣人s and sit 負かす／撃墜する with us: for we could see them go and give a piece or two of their gold for some jars of bashee. And indeed の中で wild Indians, as these seem to be, I wondered to see buying and selling, which is not so usual; nor to converse so 自由に as to go 船内に strangers' ships with so little 警告を与える: yet their own small 貿易（する）ing may have brought them to this. At these entertainments they and their family, wife and children, drank out of small calabashes: and when by themselves they drink about from one to another; but when any of us （機の）カム の中で them then they would always drink to one of us.

They have no sort of coin; but they have small crumbs of the metal before 述べるd which they 貯蔵所d up very 安全な in plantain leaves or the like. This metal they 交流 for what they want, giving a small 量 of it, about two or three 穀物s, for a jar of drink that would 持つ／拘留する five or six gallons. They have no 規模s but give it by guess. Thus much in general.

OF THE SHIP'S FIRST INTERCOURSE WITH THESE PEOPLE, AND BARTERING WITH THEM.

To proceed therefore with our 事件／事情／状勢s: I have said before that we 錨，総合司会者d here the 6th day of August. While we were furling our sails there （機の）カム 近づく 100 boats of the natives 船内に, with three or four men in each; so that our deck was 十分な of men. We were at first afraid of them, and therefore got up 20 or 30 small 武器 on our poop and kept three or four men as sentinels, with guns in their 手渡すs, ready to 解雇する／砲火／射撃 on them if they had 申し込む／申し出d to （性的に）いたずらする us. But they were pretty 静かな, only they 選ぶd up such old アイロンをかける that they 設立する on our deck, and they also took out our pump bolts and linchpins out of the carriages of our guns before we perceived them. At last one of our men perceived one of them very busy getting out one of our linchpins; and took 持つ／拘留する of the fellow who すぐに bawled out, and all the 残り／休憩（する） presently leapt overboard, some into their boats, others into the sea; and they all made away for the shore. But when we perceived their fright we made much of him that was in 持つ／拘留する, who stood trembling all the while; and at last we gave him a small piece of アイロンをかける, with which he すぐに leapt overboard and swam to his consorts who hovered about our ship to see the 問題／発行する. Then we beckoned to them to come 船内に again, 存在 very loth to lose a 商業 with them. Some of the boats （機の）カム 船内に again, and they were always very honest and civil afterward.

We presently after this sent a canoe 岸に to see their manner of living and what 準備／条項 they had: the canoe's 乗組員 were made very welcome with bashee-drink and saw 豊富 of hogs, some of which they bought and returned 船内に. After this the natives brought 船内に both hogs and goats to us in their own boats; and every day we should have fifteen or twenty hogs and goats in boats 船内に by our 味方する. These we bought for a small 事柄; we could buy a good fat goat for an old アイロンをかける hoop, and a hog of seventy or eighty 続けざまに猛撃するs 負わせる for two or three 続けざまに猛撃する of アイロンをかける. Their drink also they brought off in jars, which we bought for old nails, spikes and leaden 弾丸s. Beside the fore-について言及するd 商品／必需品s they brought 船内に 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s of yams and potatoes; which we 購入（する）d for nails, spikes or 弾丸s. It was one man's work to be all day cutting out 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業s of アイロンをかける into small pieces with a 冷淡な chisel: and these were for the 広大な／多数の／重要な 購入（する）s of hogs and goats, which they would not sell for nails, as their drink and roots. We never let them know what 蓄える／店 we have, that they may value it the more. Every morning as soon as it was light they would thus come 船内に with their 商品／必需品s which we bought as we had occasion. We did 一般的に furnish ourselves with as many goats and roots as served us all the day; and their hogs we bought in large 量s as we thought convenient; for we salted them. Their hogs were very 甘い; but I never saw so many measled ones.

THEIR COURSE AMONG THE ISLANDS; THEIR STAY THERE, AND PROVISION TO DEPART.

We filled all our water at a curious brook の近くに by us in Grafton's 小島 where we first 錨，総合司会者d. We stayed there about three or four days before we went to other islands. We sailed to the southward, passing on the east 味方する of Grafton Island, and then passed through between that and Monmouth Island; but we 設立する no 錨，総合司会者ing till we （機の）カム to the north end of Monmouth Island, and there we stopped during one tide. The tide runs very strong here and いつかs makes a short chopping sea. Its course の中で these islands is south by east and north by west. The flood 始める，決めるs to the north, and ebb to the south, and it rises and 落ちるs eight foot.

When we went from hence we coasted about two leagues to the southward on the west 味方する of Monmouth Island; and, finding no 錨，総合司会者-ground we stood over to the Bashee Island and （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 on the north-east part of it, against a small sandy bay, in seven fathom clean hard sand and about a ４半期/4分の1 of a mile from the shore. Here is a pretty wide channel between these two islands and 錨，総合司会者ing all over it. The depth of water is twelve, fourteen, and sixteen fathom.

We presently built a テント 岸に to mend our sails in, and stayed all the 残り／休憩（する） of our time here, すなわち, from the 13th day of August till the 26th day of September. In which time we mended our sails and scrubbed our ship's 底（に届く） very 井戸／弁護士席; and every day some of us went to their towns and were kindly entertained by them. Their boats also （機の）カム 船内に with their 商品／売買する to sell, and lay 船内に all day; and if we did not take it off their 手渡すs one day they would bring the same again the next.

We had yet the 勝利，勝つd at south-west and south-south-west mostly 好天. In October we did 推定する／予想する the 勝利，勝つd to 転換 to the north-east and therefore we 供給するd to sail (as soon as the eastern 季節風 was settled) to 巡航する off of Manila. Accordingly we 供給するd a 在庫／株 of 準備／条項. We salted seventy or eighty good fat hogs and bought yams and potatoes good 蓄える／店 to eat at sea.

THEY ARE DRIVEN OFF BY A VIOLENT STORM, AND RETURN.

About the 24th day of September the 勝利，勝つd 転換d about to the east, and from thence to the north-east 罰金 好天. The 25th it （機の）カム at north and began to grow fresh, and the sky began to be clouded, and the 勝利，勝つd freshened on us.

At twelve o'clock at night it blew a very 猛烈な／残忍な 嵐／襲撃する. We were then riding with our best bower ahead; and though our yards and 最高の，を越す-mast were 負かす／撃墜する yet we drove. This 強いるd us to let go our sheet-錨，総合司会者, veering out a good 範囲 of cable, which stopped us till ten or eleven o'clock the next day. Then the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム on so 猛烈な／残忍な that she drove again, with both 錨，総合司会者s ahead. The 勝利，勝つd was now at north by west and we kept 運動ing till three or four o'clock in the afternoon: and it was 井戸／弁護士席 for us that there were no islands, 激しく揺するs, or sands in our way, for if there had we must have been driven upon them. We used our 最大の endeavours to stop here, 存在 loth to go to sea because we had six of our men 岸に who could not get off now. At last we were driven out into 深い water, and then it was in vain to wait any longer: therefore we hove in our sheet-cable, and got up our sheet-錨，総合司会者, and 削減（する） away our best bower (for to have heaved her up then would have gone 近づく to have 創立者d us) and so put to sea. We had very violent 天候 the night 続いて起こるing, with very hard rain, and we were 軍隊d to 疾走する with our 明らかにする 政治家s till three o'clock in the morning. Then the 勝利，勝つd slackened and we brought our ship to under a mizzen, and lay with our 長，率いる to the 西方の. The 27th day the 勝利，勝つd abated much, but it rained very hard all day and the night 続いて起こるing. The 28th day the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム about to the north-east and it （疑いを）晴らすd up and blew a hard 強風, but it stood not there, for it 転換d about to the eastward, thence to the south-east, then to the south, and at last settled at south-west, and then we had a 穏健な 強風 and fair 天候.

It was the 29th day when the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム to the south-west. Then we made all the sail we could for the island again. The 30th day we had the 勝利，勝つd at west and saw the islands but could not get in before night. Therefore we stood off to the southward till two o'clock in the morning; then we tacked and stood in all the morning, and about twelve o'clock the 1st day of October we 錨，総合司会者d again at the place from whence we were driven.

THE NATIVES' KINDNESS TO SIX OF THEM LEFT BEHIND.

Then our six men were brought 船内に by the natives, to whom we gave three whole 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業s of アイロンをかける for their 親切 and civility, which was an 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 現在の to them. Mr. Robert Hall was one of the men that was left 岸に. I shall speak more of him hereafter. He and the 残り／休憩（する） of them told me that, after the ship was out of sight, the natives began to be more 肉親，親類d to them than they had been before, and 説得するd them to 削減（する） their hair short, as theirs was, 申し込む／申し出ing to each of them if they would do it a young woman to wife, and a small hatchet and other アイロンをかける utensils fit for a planter, in dowry; and withal showed them a piece of land for them to manage. They were 法廷，裁判所d thus by several of the town where they then were: but they took up their （警察，軍隊などの）本部 at the house of him with whom they first went 岸に. When the ship appeared in sight again then they importuned them for some アイロンをかける, which is the 長，指導者 thing that they covet, even above their earrings. We might have bought all their earrings, or other gold they had, with our アイロンをかける 妨げる／法廷，弁護士業s, had we been 保証するd of its goodness; and yet when it was touched and compared with other gold we could not discern any difference, though it looked so pale in the lump; but the seeing them polish it so often was a new discouragement.

THE CREW DISCOURAGED BY THOSE STORMS, QUIT THEIR DESIGN OF CRUISING OFF MANILA FOR THE ACAPULCO SHIP; AND IT IS RESOLVED TO FETCH A COMPASS TO CAPE COMORIN, AND SO FOR THE RED SEA.

This last 嵐／襲撃する put our men やめる out of heart: for although it was not altogether so 猛烈な／残忍な as that which we were in on the coast of 中国, which was still fresh in memory, yet it wrought more powerfully and 脅すd them from their design of 巡航するing before Manila, 恐れるing another 嵐／襲撃する there. Now every man wished himself at home, as they had done a hundred times before: but Captain Read and Captain Teat the master 説得するd them to go に向かって Cape Comorin, and then they would tell them more of their minds, ーするつもりであるing doubtless to 巡航する in the Red Sea; and they easily 勝つ／広く一帯に広がるd with the 乗組員.

The eastern 季節風 was now at 手渡す, and the best way had been to go through the 海峡s of Malacca: but Captain Teat said it was dangerous by 推論する／理由 of many islands and shoals there with which 非，不，無 of us were 熟知させるd. Therefore he thought it best to go 一連の会議、交渉／完成する on the east 味方する of the Philippine Islands and so, keeping south toward the Spice Islands, to pass out into the East Indian Ocean about the island Timor.

This seemed to be a very tedious way about, and as dangerous altogether for shoals; but not for 会合 with English or Dutch ships, which was their greatest 恐れる. I was 井戸／弁護士席 enough 満足させるd, knowing that the さらに先に we went the more knowledge and experience I should get, which was the main thing that I regarded; and should also have the more variety of places to 試みる／企てる an escape from them, 存在 fully 解決するd to take the first 適切な時期 of giving them the slip.

CHAPTER 16.

THEY DEPART FROM THE BASHEE ISLANDS, AND PASSING BY SOME OTHERS, AND THE NORTH END OF LUCONIA.

The third day of October 1687 we sailed from these islands, standing to the southward, ーするつもりであるing to sail through の中で the Spice Islands. We had 好天 and the 勝利，勝つd at west. We first steered south-south-west and passed の近くに by 確かな small islands that 嘘（をつく） just by the north end of the island Luconia. We left them all on the west of us, and passed on the east 味方する of it and the 残り／休憩（する） of the Philippine islands, coasting to the southward.

The north-east end of the island Luconia appears to be good 支持する／優勝者 land, of an indifferent 高さ, plain and even for many leagues; only it has some pretty high hills standing upright by themselves in these plains; but no 山の尾根s of hills or chains of mountains joining one to another. The land on this 味方する seems to be most savannah, or pasture: the south-east part is more 山地の and woody.

ST. JOHN'S ISLE, AND OTHER OF THE PHILIPPINES.

Leaving the 小島 Luconia, and with it our golden 事業／計画（する）s, we sailed の上に the southward, passing on the east 味方する of the 残り／休憩（する） of the Philippine Islands. These appear to be more 山地の and いっそう少なく woody till we （機の）カム in sight of the island St. John; the first of that 指名する I について言及するd: the other I spoke of on the coast of 中国. This I have already 述べるd to be a very woody island. Here the 勝利，勝つd coming southerly 軍隊d us to keep さらに先に from the islands.

THEY STOP AT THE TWO ISLES NEAR MINDANAO; WHERE THEY REFIT THEIR SHIP, AND MAKE A PUMP AFTER THE SPANISH FASHION.

The 14th day of October we （機の）カム の近くに by a small low woody island that lies east from the south-east end of Mindanao, distant from it about 20 leagues. I do not find it 始める，決める 負かす／撃墜する in any sea-chart.

The 15th day we had the 勝利，勝つd at north-east and we steered west for the island Mindanao, and arrived at the south-east end again on the 16th day. There we went in and 錨，総合司会者d between two small islands which 嘘（をつく） in about 5 degrees 10 minutes north latitude. I について言及するd them when we first （機の）カム on this coast. Here we 設立する a 罰金 small cove on the north-west end of the easternmost island, fit to careen in or 運ぶ／漁獲高 岸に; so we went in there and presently unrigged our ship and 供給するd to 運ぶ／漁獲高 our ship 岸に to clean her 底（に届く）. These islands are about three or four leagues from the island Mindanao; they are about four or five leagues in circumference and of a pretty good 高さ. The mould is 黒人／ボイコット and 深い and there are two small brooks of fresh water.

They are both plentifully 蓄える／店d with 広大な／多数の／重要な high trees; therefore our carpenters were sent 岸に to 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する some of them for our use; for here they made a new boltsprit, which we did 始める，決める here also, our old one 存在 very 欠陥のある. They made a new fore-yard too, and a fore-最高の，を越す-mast: and our pumps 存在 欠陥のある and not serviceable they did 削減（する） a tree to make a pump. They first squared it, then sawed it in the middle, and then hollowed each 味方する 正確に／まさに. The two hollow 味方するs were made big enough to 含む／封じ込める a pump box in the 中央 of them both when they were joined together; and it 要求するd their 最大の 技術 to の近くに them 正確に／まさに to the making a tight cylinder for the pump-box; 存在 unaccustomed to such work. We learnt this way of pump-making from the Spaniards, who make their pumps that they use in their ships in the South Seas after this manner; and I am 確信して that there are no better 手渡す-pumps in the world than they have.

BY THE YOUNG PRINCE OF THE SPICE ISLAND THEY HAVE NEWS OF CAPTAIN SWAN, AND HIS MEN, LEFT AT MINDANAO.

While we lay here the young prince that I について言及するd in the 13th 一時期／支部 （機の）カム 船内に. He understanding that we were bound さらに先に to the southward 願望（する）d us to 輸送（する） him and his men to his own island. He showed it to us in our chart and told us the 指名する of it; which we put 負かす／撃墜する in our chart, for it was not 指名するd there; but I やめる forgot to put it into my 定期刊行物.

This man told us that not above six days before this he saw Captain Swan and several of his men that we left there, and 指名するd the 指名するs of some of them, who he said were all 井戸／弁護士席, and that now they were at the city of Mindanao; but that they had all of them been out with Raja Laut, fighting under him in his wars against his enemies the Alfoores; and that most of them fought with undaunted courage; for which they were 高度に honoured and esteemed, 同様に by the 暴君 as by the general Raja Laut; that now Captain Swan ーするつもりであるd to go with his men to Fort St. George and that, in order thereto, he had proffered forty ounces of gold for a ship; but the owner and he were not yet agreed; and that he 恐れるd that the 暴君 would not let him go away till the wars were ended.

All this the prince told us in the Malayan tongue, which many of us had learnt; and when he went away he 約束d to return to us again in three days' time, and so long Captain Read 約束d to stay for him (for we had now almost finished our 商売／仕事) and he seemed very glad of the 適切な時期 of going with us.

THE AUTHOR PROPOSES TO THE CREW TO RETURN TO HIM; BUT IN VAIN.

After this I endeavoured to 説得する our men to return with the ship to the river of Mindanao and 申し込む／申し出 their service again to Captain Swan. I took an 適切な時期 when they were filling of water, there 存在 then half the ship's company 岸に; and I 設立する all these very willing to do it. I 願望（する）d them to say nothing till I had tried the minds of the other half, which I ーするつもりであるd to do the next day, it 存在 their turn to fill water then; but one of these men, who seemed most 今後 to 招待する 支援する Captain Swan, told Captain Read and Captain Teat of the 事業／計画（する）, and they presently dissuaded the men from any such designs. Yet 恐れるing the worst they made all possible haste to be gone.

THE STORY OF HIS MURDER AT MINDANAO.

I have since been 知らせるd that Captain Swan and his men stayed there a 広大な／多数の／重要な while afterward; and that many of the men got passages from thence in Dutch sloops to Ternate, 特に Mr. Rofy and Mr. Nelly. There they remained a 広大な／多数の／重要な while and at last got to Batavia (where the Dutch took their 定期刊行物s from them) and so to Europe; and that some of Captain Swan's men died at Mindanao; of which number Mr. Harthrop and Mr. Smith, Captain Swan's merchants, were two. At last Captain Swan and his 外科医, going in a small canoe 船内に of a Dutch ship then in the road, ーするために get passage to Europe, were overset by the natives at the mouth of the river; who waited their coming purposely to do it, but unsuspected by them; where they both were killed in the water. This was done by the general's order, as some think, to get his gold, which he did すぐに 掴む on. Others say it was because the general's house was burnt a little before, and Captain Swan was 嫌疑者，容疑者／疑うd to be the author of it; and others say that it was Captain Swan's 脅しs occasioned his own 廃虚; for he would often say passionately that he had been 乱用d by the general, and that he would have satisfaction for it; 説 also that now he was 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd with their rivers, and knew how to come in at any time; that he also knew their manner of fighting and the 証拠不十分 of their country; and therefore he would go away and get a 禁止（する）d of men to 補助装置 him, and returning thither again he would spoil and take all that they had and their country too. When the general had been 知らせるd of these discourses he would say: "What, is Captain Swan made of アイロンをかける and able to resist a whole kingdom? Or does he think that we are afraid of him that he speaks thus?" Yet did he never touch him till now the Mindanayans killed him. It is very probable there might be somewhat of truth in all this; for the captain was 熱烈な, and the general greedy of gold. But, whatever was the occasion, so he was killed, as several have 保証するd me, and his gold 掴むd on, and all his things; and his 定期刊行物 also, from England as far as Cape Corrientes on the coast of Mexico. This 定期刊行物 was afterwards sent away from thence by Mr. Moody (who was there both a little before and a little after the 殺人) and he sent it to England by Mr. Goddard, 長，指導者 mate of the Defence. THE CLOVE ISLANDS. TERNATE. TIDORE, ETC. But to our 目的: seeing I could not 説得する them to go to Captain Swan again I had a 広大な／多数の／重要な 願望（する） to have had the prince's company: but Captain Read was afraid to let his fickle 乗組員 嘘（をつく） long. That very day that the prince had 約束d to return to us, which was November 2 1687, we sailed hence, directing our course south-west and having the 勝利，勝つd at north-west.

THE ISLAND CELEBES, AND DUTCH TOWN OF MACASSAR.

This 勝利，勝つd continued till we （機の）カム in sight of the island Celebes; then it veered about to the west and to the southward of the west. We （機の）カム up with the north-east end of the island Celebes the 9th day, and there we 設立する the 現在の setting to the 西方の so 堅固に that we could hardly get on the east 味方する of that island. The island Celebes is a very large island, 延長するd in length from north to south about 7 degrees of latitude, and in breadth it is about 3 degrees. It lies under the 赤道, the north end 存在 in latitude 1 degree 30 minutes north, and the south end in latitude 5 degrees 30 minutes south, and by ありふれた account the north point in the 本体，大部分／ばら積みの of this island lies nearest north and south, but at the north-east end there runs out a long 狭くする point stretching north-east about thirty leagues; and about thirty leagues to the eastward of this long slip is the island Gilolo, on the west 味方する of which are four small islands の近くに by it, which are very 井戸／弁護士席 蓄える／店d with cloves. The two chiefest are Ternate and Tidore; and as the 小島 of Ceylon is reckoned the only place for cinnamon, and that of Banda for nutmegs, so these are thought by some to be the only clove islands in the world; but this is a 広大な／多数の／重要な error, as I have already shown.

At the south end of the island Celebes there is a sea or 湾 of about seven or eight leagues wide and forty or fifty long, which runs up the country almost 直接／まっすぐに to the north; and this 湾 has several small islands along the middle of it. On the west 味方する of the island, almost at the south end of it, the town of Macassar is seated. A town of 広大な／多数の／重要な strength and 貿易（する）, belonging to the Dutch.

THEY COAST ALONG THE EAST SIDE OF CELEBES, AND BETWEEN IT AND OTHER ISLANDS AND SHOALS, WITH GREAT DIFFICULTY.

There are 広大な／多数の／重要な in lets and lakes on the east 味方する of the island; as also 豊富 of small islands and shoals lying scattered about it. We saw a high 頂点（に達する）d hill at the north end: but the land on the east 味方する is low all along; for we 巡航するd almost the length of it. The mould on this 味方する is 黒人／ボイコット and 深い, and 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の fat and rich and 十分な of trees: and there are many brooks of water run out into the sea. Indeed all this east 味方する of the island seems to be but one large grove of 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 広大な／多数の／重要な high trees.

Having with much ado got on this east 味方する, coasting along to the southward, and yet having but little 勝利，勝つd, and even that little against us at south-south-west and いつかs 静める, we were a long time going about the island.

The 22nd day we were in latitude 1 degree 20 minutes south and, 存在 about three leagues from the island standing to the southward, with a very gentle land-勝利，勝つd, about 2 or 3 o'clock in the morning we heard a 衝突／不一致ing in the water like boats 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing: and 恐れるing some sudden attack we got up all our 武器 and stood ready to defend ourselves. As soon as it was day we saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な proa, built like the Mindanayan proas, with about 60 men in her; and six smaller proas. They lay still about a mile to windward of us to 見解（をとる） us; and probably designed to make a prey of us when they first （機の）カム out; but they were now afraid to 投機・賭ける on us.

At last we showed them Dutch colours, thinking その為に to allure them to come to us: for we could not go to them; but they presently 列／漕ぐ／騒動d in toward the island and went into a large 開始; and we saw them no more; nor did we ever see any other boats or men, but only one fishing canoe while we were about this island; neither did we see any house on all the coast.

About five or six leagues to the south of this place there is a 広大な／多数の／重要な 範囲 of both large and small islands; and many shoals also that are not laid 負かす／撃墜する in our charts; which made it 極端に troublesome for us to get through. But we passed between them all and the island Celebes, and 錨，総合司会者d against a sandy bay in eight fathom sandy ground, about half a mile from the main island; 存在 then in latitude 1 degree 50 minutes south.

SHY TURTLE.

Here we stayed several days and sent out our canoes a-striking of 海がめ every day; for here is 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of them; but they were very shy, as they were 一般に wherever we 設立する them in the East India seas. I know not the 推論する／理由 of it unless the natives go very much a-striking here: for even in the West Indies they are shy in places that are much 乱すd: and yet on New Holland we 設立する them shy, as I shall relate; though the natives there do not （性的に）いたずらする them.

VAST COCKLES.

On the shoal without us we went and gathered 貝類と甲殻類 at low-water. There were a monstrous sort of cockles; the meat of one of them would 十分である seven or eight men. It was very good wholesome meat. We did also （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 about in the 支持を得ようと努めるd on the island but 設立する no game.

A WILD VINE OF GREAT VIRTUE FOR SORES.

One of our men, who was always troubled with sore 脚s, 設立する a 確かな vine that supported itself by 粘着するing about other trees. The leaves reach six or seven foot high, but the strings or 支店s 11 or 12. It had a very green leaf, pretty 幅の広い and roundish, and of a 厚い 実体. These leaves 続けざまに猛撃するd small and boiled with hog's lard make an excellent salve. Our men knowing the virtues of it 在庫／株d themselves here: there were 不十分な a man in the ship but got a 続けざまに猛撃する or two of it; 特に such as were troubled with old ulcers, who 設立する 広大な／多数の／重要な 利益 by it. This man that discovered these leaves here had his first knowledge of them in the Isthmus of Darien, he having had his recipe from one of the Indians there: and he had been 岸に in divers places since purposely to 捜し出す these leaves, but did never find any but here.

GREAT TREES; ONE EXCESSIVELY BIG.

の中で the many 広大な trees hereabouts there was one 越えるd all the 残り／休憩（する）. This Captain Read 原因（となる）d to be 削減（する） 負かす／撃墜する, in order to make a canoe, having lost our boats, all but one small one, in the late 嵐／襲撃するs; so six lusty men who had been スピードを出す／記録につける-支持を得ようと努めるd 切断機，沿岸警備艇s in the Bays of Campeachy and Honduras (as Captain Read himself and many more of us had) and so were very 専門家 at this work, undertook to fell it, taking their turn, three always cutting together; and they were one whole day and half the next before they got it 負かす／撃墜する. This tree, though it grew in a 支持を得ようと努めるd, was yet 18 foot in circumference and 44 foot of clean 団体／死体 without knot or 支店: and even there it had no more than one or two 支店s, and then ran （疑いを）晴らす again 10 foot higher; there it spread itself into many 広大な／多数の／重要な 四肢s and 支店s, like an oak, very green and 繁栄するing: yet it was 死なせる／死ぬd at the heart, which marred it for the service ーするつもりであるd.

BEACONS INSTEAD OF BUOYS ON THE SHOALS.

So leaving it and having no more 商売／仕事 here we 重さを計るd and went from hence the next day, it 存在 the 29th day of November. While we lay here we had some トルネード，竜巻s, one or two every day, and pretty fresh land-勝利，勝つd which were at west. The sea-微風s are small and uncertain, いつかs out of the north-east and so veering about to the east and south-east. We had the 勝利，勝つd at north-east when we 重さを計るd, and we steered off south-south-west. In the afternoon we saw a shoal ahead of us and altered our course to the south-south-east. In the evening at 4 o'clock we were の近くに by another 広大な／多数の／重要な shoal; therefore we tacked and stood in for the island Celebes again, for 恐れる of running on some of the shoals in the night. By day a man might 避ける them 井戸／弁護士席 enough, for they had all beacons on them like huts built on tall 地位，任命するs, above high-water 示す, probably 始める，決める up by the natives of the island Celebes or those of some other 隣人ing islands; and I never saw any such どこかよそで. In the night we had a violent トルネード，竜巻 out of the south-west which lasted about an hour.

A SPOUT: A DESCRIPTION OF THEM, WITH A STORY OF ONE.

The 30th day we had a fresh land-勝利，勝つd and steered away south, passing between the two shoals which we saw the day before. These shoals 嘘（をつく） in latitude 3 degrees south and about ten leagues from the island Celebes. 存在 past them the 勝利，勝つd died away and we lay becalmed till the afternoon: then we had a hard トルネード，竜巻 out of the south-west, and に向かって the evening we saw two or three spouts, the first I had seen since I （機の）カム into the East Indies; in the West Indies I had often met with them. A spout is a small ragged piece or part of a cloud hanging 負かす／撃墜する about a yard, seemingly from the blackest part thereof. 一般的に it hangs 負かす／撃墜する sloping from thence, or いつかs appearing with a small bending, or 肘 in the middle. I never saw any hang perpendicularly 負かす／撃墜する. It is small at the lower end, seeming no bigger than one's arm, but still fuller に向かって the cloud from whence it proceeds.

When the surface of the sea begins to work you shall see the water, for about 100 paces in circumference, 泡，激怒すること and move gently 一連の会議、交渉／完成する till the whirling 動議 増加するs: and then it 飛行機で行くs 上向き in a 中心存在, about 100 paces in compass at the 底（に届く）, but 少なくなるing 徐々に 上向きs to the smallness of the spout itself, there where it reaches the lower end of the spout, through which the rising seawater seems to be 伝えるd into the clouds. This visibly appears by the clouds 増加するing in 本体，大部分／ばら積みの and blackness. Then you shall presently see the cloud 運動 along, although before it seemed to be without any 動議: the spout also keeping the same course with the cloud, and still sucking up the water as it goes along, and they make a 勝利，勝つd as they go. Thus it continues for the space of half an hour, more or いっそう少なく, until the sucking is spent, and then, breaking off, all the water which was below the spout, or pendulous piece of cloud, 落ちるs 負かす／撃墜する again into the sea, making a 広大な／多数の／重要な noise with its 落ちる and 衝突／不一致ing 動議 in the sea.

It is very dangerous for a ship to be under a spout when it breaks, therefore we always endeavour to shun it by keeping at a distance, if かもしれない we can. But, for want of 勝利，勝つd to carry us away, we are often in 広大な／多数の／重要な 恐れる and danger, for it is usually 静める when spouts are at work; except only just where they are. Therefore men at sea, when they see a spout coming and know not how to 避ける it, do いつかs 解雇する／砲火／射撃 発射 out of their 広大な／多数の／重要な guns into it, to give it 空気／公表する or vent, that so it may break; but I did never hear that it 証明するd to be of any 利益.

And now 存在 on this 支配する I think it not amiss to give you an account of an 事故 that happened to a ship once on the coast of Guinea, some time in or about the year 1674. One Captain 記録，記録的な／記録するs of London, bound for the coast of Guinea, in a ship of 300 tuns and 16 guns called the Blessing: when he （機の）カム into the latitude 7 or 8 degrees north he saw several spouts, one of which （機の）カム 直接／まっすぐに に向かって the ship, and he, having no 勝利，勝つd to get out of the way of the spout, made ready to receive it by furling his sails. It （機の）カム on very swift and broke a little before it reached the ship; making a 広大な／多数の／重要な noise and raising the sea 一連の会議、交渉／完成する it, as if a 広大な／多数の／重要な house or some such thing had been cast into the sea. The fury of the 勝利，勝つd still lasted and took the ship on the starboard 屈服する with such 暴力／激しさ that it snapped off the boltsprit and foremast both at once, and blew which ship all along, ready to overset it, but the ship did presently 権利 again, and the 勝利，勝つd whirling 一連の会議、交渉／完成する took the ship a second time with the like fury as before, but on the contrary 味方する, and was again like to overset her the other way. The mizzen-mast felt the fury of this second 爆破 and was snapped short off, as the foremast and boltsprit had been before. The mainmast and main-最高の，を越す-mast received no 損失, for the fury of the 勝利，勝つd (which was presently over) did not reach them. Three men were in the fore-最高の，を越す when the foremast broke and one on the boltsprit, and fell with them into the sea, but all of them were saved. I had this relation from Mr. John Canby, who was then quartermaster and steward of her; one Abraham Wise was 長，指導者 mate, and Leonard Jefferies second mate.

We are usually very much afraid of them: yet this was the only 損失 that ever I heard done by them. They seem terrible enough, the rather because they come upon you while you 嘘（をつく） becalmed, like a スピードを出す／記録につける in the sea, and cannot get out of their way: but though I have seen and been beset by them often, yet the fright was always the greatest of the 害（を与える）.

UNCERTAIN TORNADOES.

December the 1st we had a gentle 強風 at east-south-east. We steered south; and at noon I was by 観察 in latitude 3 degrees 34 minutes south. Then we saw the island Bouton, 耐えるing south-west and about ten leagues distant. We had very uncertain and inconstant 勝利，勝つd: the トルネード，竜巻s （機の）カム out of the south-west, which was against us; and what other 勝利，勝つd we had were so faint that they did us little 親切; but we took the advantage of the smallest 強風 and got a little way every day. The 4th day at noon I was by 観察 in latitude 4 degrees 30 minutes south. TURTLE. The 5th day we got の近くに by the north-west end of the island Bouton, and in the evening, it 存在 好天, we hoisted out our canoe and sent the Moskito men, of whom we had two or three, to strike 海がめ, for here are plenty of them; but they 存在 shy we chose to strike them in the night (which is customary in the West Indies also) for every time they come up to breathe, which is once in 8 or 10 minutes, they blow so hard that one may hear them at 30 or 40 yards distance; by which means the striker knows where they are, and may more easily approach them than in the day; for the 海がめ sees better than he hears; but on the contrary the manatee's 審理，公聴会 is quickest.

In the morning they returned with a very large 海がめ which they took 近づく the shore; and withal an Indian of the island （機の）カム 船内に with them. He spoke the Malayan language; by which we did understand him. He told us that two leagues さらに先に to the southward of us there was a good harbour in which we might 錨，総合司会者: so, having a fair 勝利，勝つd, we got thither by noon.

THE ISLAND BOUTON, AND ITS CHIEF TOWN AND HARBOUR CALLASUSUNG.

This harbour is in latitude 4 degrees 54 minutes south; lying on the east 味方する of the island Bouton. Which island lies 近づく the south-east end of the island Celebes, distant from it about three or four leagues. It is of a long form, stretching south-west and north-east above 25 leagues long and 10 幅の広い. It is pretty high land, and appears pretty even and flat and very woody.

There is a large town within a league of the 錨，総合司会者ing-place called Callasusung, 存在 the 長，指導者, if there were more; which we knew not. It is about a mile from the sea, on the 最高の，を越す of a small hill, in a very fair plain, encompassed with coconut-trees. Without the trees there is a strong 石／投石する 塀で囲む （疑いを）晴らす 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the town. The houses are built like the houses at Mindanao; but more neat: and the whole town was very clean and delightsome.

THE INHABITANTS.

The inhabitants are small and 井戸／弁護士席 形態／調整d. They are much like the Mindanayans in 形態／調整, colour, and habit; but more neat and tight. They speak the Malayan language and are all Mohammedans. They are very obedient to the 暴君, who is a little man about forty or fifty years old, and has a 広大な／多数の／重要な many wives and children.

VISITS GIVEN AND RECEIVED BY THE SULTAN.

About an hour after we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者 the 暴君 sent a messenger 船内に to know what we were and what our 商売／仕事. We gave him an account; and he returned 岸に and in a short time after he （機の）カム 船内に again and told us that the 暴君 was very 井戸／弁護士席 pleased when he heard that we were English; and said that we should have anything that the island afforded; and that he himself would come 船内に in the morning. Therefore the ship was made clean, and everything put in the best order to receive him.

HIS DEVICE IN THE FLAG OF HIS PROA.

The 6th day in the morning betimes a 広大な／多数の／重要な many boats and canoes （機の）カム 船内に with fowls, eggs, plantains, potatoes, etc., but they would 配置する／処分する／したい気持ちにさせる of 非，不，無 till they had orders for it from the 暴君 at his coming. About 10 o'clock the 暴君 （機の）カム 船内に in a very neat proa, built after the Mindanao fashion. There was a large white silk 旗 at the 長，率いる of the mast, 辛勝する／優位d 一連の会議、交渉／完成する with a 深い red for about two or three インチs 幅の広い, and in the middle there was neatly drawn a green griffin trampling on a winged serpent that seemed to struggle to get up and 脅すd his adversary with open mouth and with a long sting that was ready to be darted into his 脚s. Other east Indian princes have their 装置s also.

HIS GUARDS, HABIT AND CHILDREN.

The 暴君 with three or four of his nobles and three of his sons sat in the house of the proa. His guards were ten musketeers, five standing on one 味方する of the proa and five on the other 味方する; and before the door of the proa-house stood one with a 広大な／多数の／重要な broadsword and a 的, and two more such at the after-part of the house; and in the 長，率いる and 厳しい of the proa stood four musketeers more, two at each end.

The 暴君 had a silk turban laced with 狭くする gold lace by the 味方するs and 幅の広い lace at the end: which hung 負かす／撃墜する on one 味方する the 長，率いる, after the Mindanayan fashion. He had a sky-coloured silk pair of breeches, and a piece of red silk thrown across his shoulders and hanging loose about him; the greatest part of his 支援する and waist appearing naked. He had neither 在庫／株ing nor shoe. One of his sons was about 15 or 16 years old, the other two were young things; and they were always in the 武器 of one or other of his attendants.

THEIR COMMERCE.

Captain Read met him at the 味方する and led him into his small cabin and 解雇する／砲火／射撃d five guns for his welcome. As soon as he （機の）カム 船内に he gave leave to his 支配するs to traffic with us; and then our people bought what they had a mind to.

THEIR DIFFERENT ESTEEM (AS THEY PRETEND) OF THE ENGLISH AND DUTCH.

The 暴君 seemed very 井戸／弁護士席 pleased to be visited by the English; and said he had coveted to have a sight of Englishmen, having heard 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の characters of their just and honourable 取引，協定ing: but he exclaimed against the Dutch (as all the Mindanayans and all the Indians we met with do) and wished them at a greater distance.

MARITIME INDIANS SELL OTHERS FOR SLAVES.

For Macassar is not very far from hence, one of the chiefest towns that the Dutch have in those parts. From thence the Dutch come いつかs hither to 購入（する） slaves. The slaves that these people get here and sell to the Dutch are some of the idolatrous natives of the island who, not 存在 under the 暴君, and having no 長，率いる, live straggling in the country, 飛行機で行くing from one place to another to 保存する themselves from the prince and his 支配するs, who 追跡（する） after them to make them slaves. For the civilised Indians of the 海上の places, who 貿易（する） with foreigners, if they cannot 減ずる the inland people to the obedience of their prince, they catch all they can of them and sell them for slaves; accounting them to be but as savages, just as the Spaniards do the poor Americans.

THEIR RECEPTION IN THE TOWN.

After two or three hours' discourse the 暴君 went 岸に again, and five guns were 解雇する／砲火／射撃d at his 出発 also. The next day he sent for Captain Read to come 岸に, and he with seven or eight men went to wait on the 暴君. I could not slip an 適切な時期 of seeing the place and so …を伴ってd them. We were met at the 上陸-place by two of the 長，指導者 men, and guided to a pretty neat house where the 暴君 waited our coming. The house stood at the その上の end of all the town before について言及するd, which we passed through; and 豊富 of people were gazing on us as we passed by. When we （機の）カム 近づく the house there were forty poor naked 兵士s with muskets made a 小道／航路 for us to pass through. This house was not built on 地位，任命するs as the 残り／休憩（する） were, after the Mindanayan way; but the room in which we were entertained was on the ground, covered with mats to sit on. Our entertainment was タバコ and betel-nut and young coconuts; and the house was beset with men and women and children, who thronged to get 近づく the windows to look on us.

We did not tarry above an hour before we took our leaves and 出発／死d. This town stands in a sandy 国／地域; but what the 残り／休憩（する） of the island is I know not, for 非，不，無 of us were 岸に but at this place.

A BOY WITH FOUR ROWS OF TEETH.

The next day the 暴君 （機の）カム 船内に again and 現在のd Captain Read with a little boy, but he was too small to be serviceable on board; and so Captain Read returned thanks and told him he was too little for him. Then the 暴君 sent for a bigger boy, which the captain 受託するd. This boy was a very pretty tractable boy; but what was wonderful in him, he had two 列／漕ぐ／騒動s of teeth, one within another on each jaw. 非，不，無 of the other people were so, nor did I ever see the like. The captain was 現在のd also with two he-goats, and was 約束d some buffalo, but I do believe that they have but few of either on the island. We did not see any buffalo nor many goats, neither have they much rice, but their chiefest food is roots. We bought here about a thousand 続けざまに猛撃する 負わせる of potatoes.

PARAKEETS. COCKATOOS, A SORT OF WHITE PARROTS.

Here our men bought also 豊富 of cockatoos and 罰金 large parakeets, curiously coloured and some of them the finest I ever saw. The cockatoo is as big as a parrot and 形態／調整d much like it with such a 法案; but it is as white as milk, and has a bunch of feathers on his 長，率いる like a 栄冠を与える. At this place we bought a proa also of the Mindanayan make, for our own use, which our carpenters afterwards altered and made a delicate boat fit for any service. She was sharp at both ends, but we sawed off one and made that end flat, fastening a rudder to it and she 列／漕ぐ／騒動d and sailed incomparably.

THEY PASS AMONG OTHER INHABITED ISLANDS.

We stayed here but till the 12th day because it was a bad harbour and foul ground, and a bad time of the year too, for the トルネード，竜巻s began to come in 厚い and strong. When we went to 重さを計る our 錨，総合司会者 it was 麻薬中毒の in a 激しく揺する, and we broke our cable, and could not get our 錨，総合司会者 though we strove hard for it; so we went away and left it there. We had the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-east and we steered に向かって the south-east and fell in with four or five small islands that 嘘（をつく） in 5 degrees 40 minutes south latitude and about five or six leagues from Callasusung harbour. These islands appeared very green with coconut-trees, and we saw two or three towns on them, and heard a 派手に宣伝する all night, for we were got in の中で shoals, and could not get out again till the next day. We knew not whether the 派手に宣伝する were for 恐れる of us or that they were making merry, as it is usual in these parts to do all the night, singing and dancing till morning.

We 設立する a pretty strong tide here, the flood setting to the southward and the ebb to the northward. These shoals and many other that are not laid 負かす／撃墜する in our charts 嘘（をつく） on the south-west 味方する of the islands where we heard the 派手に宣伝する, about a league from them. At last we passed between the islands and tried for a passage on the east 味方する. We met with divers shoals on this 味方する also, but 設立する channels to pass through; so we steered away for the island Timor, ーするつもりであるing to pass out by it. We had the 勝利，勝つd 一般的に at west-south-west and south-west hard 強風s and 雨の 天候.

The 16th day we got （疑いを）晴らす of the shoals and steered south by east with the 勝利，勝つd at west-south-west but veering every half hour, いつかs at south-west and then again at west, and いつかs at north-north-west, bringing much rain with 雷鳴 and 雷.

OMBA, PENTARE, TIMOR, ETC.

The 20th day we passed by the island Omba which is a pretty high island lying in latitude 8 degrees 20 minutes and not above five or six leagues from the north-east part of the island Timor. It is about 13 or 14 leagues long and five or six leagues wide.

About seven or eight leagues to the west of Omba is another pretty large island, but it had no 指名する in our charts; yet by the 状況／情勢 it should be that which in some 地図／計画するs is called Pentare. We saw on it 豊富 of smokes by day and 解雇する／砲火／射撃s by night, and a large town on the north 味方する of it, not far from the sea; but it was such bad 天候 that we did not go 岸に.

SHOALS.

Between Omba and Pentare and in the 中央の-channel there is a small low sandy island with 広大な／多数の／重要な shoals on either 味方する; but there is a very good channel の近くに by Pentare, between that and the shoals about the small 小島. We were three days （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域ing off and on, not having a 勝利，勝つd, for it was at south-south-west.

The 23rd day in the evening, having a small 強風 at north, we got through, keeping の近くに by Pentare. The tide of ebb here 始める，決める out to the southward, by which we were helped through, for we had but little 勝利，勝つd. But this tide, which did us a 親切 in setting us through, had like to have 廃虚d us afterwards; for there are two small islands lying at the south end of the channel we （機の）カム through, and に向かって these islands the tide hurried us so 速く that we very 辛うじて escaped 存在 driven 岸に; for, the little 勝利，勝つd we had before at north dying away, we had not one breath of 勝利，勝つd when we （機の）カム there, neither was there any 錨，総合司会者-ground. But we got out our oars and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d, yet all in vain; for the tide 始める，決める wholly on one of these small islands that we were 軍隊d with might and main strength to 耐える off the ship by thrusting with our oars against the shore, which was a 法外な bank, and by this means we presently drove away （疑いを）晴らす of danger; and, having a little 勝利，勝つd in the night at north, we steered away south-south-west. In the morning again we had the 勝利，勝つd at west-south-west and steered south, and the 勝利，勝つd coming to the west-north-west we steered south-west to get （疑いを）晴らす of the south-west end of the island Timor. The 29th day we saw the north-west point of Timor south-east by east distant about eight leagues.

Timor is a long high 山地の island stretching north-east and south-west. It is about 70 leagues long and 15 or 16 wide, the middle of the island is in latitude about 9 degrees south. I have been 知らせるd that the Portuguese do 貿易（する） to this island; but I know nothing of its produce besides coir for making cables, of which there is について言及する 一時期／支部 10.

The 27th day we saw two small islands which 嘘（をつく） 近づく the south-west end of Timor. They 耐える from us south-east. We had very hard 強風s of 勝利，勝つd and still with a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of rain; the 勝利，勝つd at west and west-south-west.

NEW HOLLAND; LAID DOWN TOO MUCH NORTHWARD.

存在 now （疑いを）晴らす of all the islands we stood off south, ーするつもりであるing to touch at New Holland, a part of Terra Australis Incognita, to see what that country would afford us. Indeed as the 勝利，勝つd were we could not now keep our ーするつもりであるd course (which was first westerly and then northerly) without going to New Holland unless we had gone 支援する again の中で the islands: but this was not a good time of the year to be の中で any islands to the south of the 赤道, unless in a good harbour.

The 31st day we were in latitude 13 degrees 20 minutes, still standing to the southward, the 勝利，勝つd 耐えるing 一般的に very hard at west, we keeping upon it under two courses, and our mizzen, and いつかs a main-topsail 暗礁d. About 10 o'clock at night we tacked and stood to the northward for 恐れる of running on a shoal which is laid 負かす／撃墜する in our charts in latitude 13 degrees 50 minutes or thereabouts: it 耐えるing south by west from the east end of Timor; and so the island bore from us by our judgments and reckoning. At 3 o'clock we tacked again and stood south by west and south-south-west.

In the morning as soon as it was day we saw the shoal 権利 ahead: it lies in 13 degrees 50 minutes by all our reckonings. It is a small spit of sand, just appearing above the water's 辛勝する／優位, with several 激しく揺するs about it, eight or ten foot high above water. It lies in a triangular form; each 味方する 存在 about a league and a half. We stemmed 権利 with the middle of it, and stood within half a mile of the 激しく揺するs and sounded; but 設立する no ground. Then we went about and stood to the north two hours; and then tacked and stood to the southward again, thinking to 天候 it, but could not. So we bore away on the north 味方する till we （機の）カム to the east point, giving the 激しく揺するs a small 寝台／地位: then we trimmed sharp and stood to the southward, passing の近くに by it, and sounded again but 設立する no ground.

This shoal is laid 負かす／撃墜する in our charts not above 16 or 20 leagues from New Holland; but we did run afterwards 60 leagues 予定 south before we fell in with it; and I am very 確信して that no part of New Holland hereabouts lies so far northerly by 40 leagues, as it is laid 負かす／撃墜する in our charts. For if New Holland were laid 負かす／撃墜する true we must of necessity have been driven 近づく 40 leagues to the 西方の of our course; but this is very improbable that the 現在の should 始める，決める so strong to the 西方の, seeing we had such a constant westerly 勝利，勝つd. I 認める that when the 季節風 転換s first the 現在の does not presently 転換, but runs afterwards 近づく a month; but the 季節風 had been 転換d at least two months now. But of the 季節風s and other 勝利，勝つd and of the 現在のs どこかよそで in their proper place. As to these here I do rather believe that the land is not laid 負かす／撃墜する true, than that the 現在の deceived us; for it was more probable we should have been deceived before we met with a shoal than afterwards; for on the coast of New Holland we 設立する the tides keeping their constant course; the flood running north by east and the ebb south by east.

1688. The 4th day of January 1688 we fell in with the land of New Holland in the latitude of 16 degrees 50 minutes, having, as I said before, made our course 予定 south from the shoal that we passed by the 31st day of December. We ran in の近くに by it and, finding no convenient 錨，総合司会者ing because it lies open to the north-west, we ran along shore to the eastward, steering north-east by east for so the land lies. We steered thus about 12 leagues; and then （機の）カム to a point of land from whence the land 傾向s east and southerly for 10 or 12 leagues; but how afterwards I know not. About 3 leagues to the eastward of this point there is a pretty 深い bay with 豊富 of islands in it, and a very good place to 錨，総合司会者 in or to 運ぶ／漁獲高 岸に. About a league to the eastward of that point we 錨，総合司会者d January the 5th 1688, two mile from the shore in 29 fathom, good hard sand and clean ground.

ITS SOIL, AND DRAGON-TREES.

New Holland is a very large tract of land. It is not yet 決定するd whether it is an island or a main continent; but I am 確かな that it joins neither to Asia, Africa, nor America. This part of it that we saw is all low even land, with sandy banks against the sea, only the points are rocky, and so are some of the islands in this bay.

The land is of a 乾燥した，日照りの sandy 国／地域, destitute of water except you make 井戸／弁護士席s; yet producing divers sorts of trees; but the 支持を得ようと努めるd are not 厚い, nor the trees very big. Most of the trees that we saw are dragon-trees as we supposed; and these too are the largest trees of any there. They are about the bigness of our large apple-trees, and about the same 高さ; and the rind is blackish and somewhat rough. The leaves are of a dark colour; the gum distils out of the knots or 割れ目s that are in the 団体／死体s of the trees. We compared it with some gum-dragon or dragon's 血 that was 船内に, and it was of the same colour and taste. The other sort of trees were not known by any of us. There was pretty long grass growing under the trees; but it was very thin. We saw no trees that bore fruit or berries.

We saw no sort of animal nor any 跡をつける of beast but once; and that seemed to be the tread of a beast as big as a 広大な／多数の／重要な mastiff-dog. Here are a few small land-birds but 非，不，無 bigger than a blackbird; and but few sea-fowls. Neither is the sea very plentifully 蓄える／店d with fish unless you reckon the manatee and 海がめ as such. Of these creatures there is plenty but they are 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の shy; though the inhabitants cannot trouble them much having neither boats nor アイロンをかける.

THE POOR WINKING INHABITANTS: THEIR FEATHERS, HABIT, FOOD, ARMS, ETC.

The inhabitants of this country are the miserablest people in the world. The Hodmadods of Monomatapa, though a 汚い people, yet for wealth are gentlemen to these; who have no houses, and 肌 衣料品s, sheep, poultry, and fruits of the earth, ostrich eggs, etc., as the Hodmadods have: and, setting aside their human 形態／調整, they 異なる but little from brutes. They are tall, straight-団体／死体d, and thin, with small long 四肢s. They have 広大な／多数の／重要な 長，率いるs, 一連の会議、交渉／完成する foreheads, and 広大な／多数の／重要な brows. Their eyelids are always half の近くにd to keep the 飛行機で行くs out of their 注目する，もくろむs; they 存在 so troublesome here that no fanning will keep them from coming to one's 直面する; and without the 援助 of both 手渡すs to keep them off they will creep into one's nostrils and mouth too if the lips are not shut very の近くに; so that, from their 幼少／幼藍期 存在 thus annoyed with these insects, they do never open their 注目する，もくろむs as other people: and therefore they cannot see far, unless they 持つ／拘留する up their 長，率いるs as if they were looking at somewhat over them.

They have 広大な／多数の／重要な 瓶／封じ込める-noses, pretty 十分な lips, and wide mouths. The two fore-teeth of their upper jaw are wanting in all of them, men and women, old and young; whether they draw them out I know not: neither have they any 耐えるd. They are long-visaged, and of a very unpleasing 面, having no one graceful feature in their 直面するs. Their hair is 黒人／ボイコット, short, and curled like that of the Negroes; and not long and lank like the ありふれた Indians. The colour of their 肌s, both of their 直面するs and the 残り／休憩（する） of their 団体／死体, is coal-黒人／ボイコット like that of the Negroes of Guinea.

They have no sort of 着せる／賦与するs but a piece of the rind of a tree, tied like a girdle about their waists, and a handful of long grass, or three or four small green boughs 十分な of leaves thrust under their girdle to cover their nakedness.

They have no houses but 嘘（をつく） in the open 空気／公表する without any covering; the earth 存在 their bed, and the heaven their canopy. Whether they cohabit one man to one woman or promiscuously I know not; but they do live in companies, 20 or 30 men, women, and children together. Their only food is a small sort of fish which they get by making weirs of 石／投石する across little coves or 支店s of the sea; every tide bringing in the small fish and there leaving them for a prey to these people who 絶えず …に出席する there to search for them at low water. This small-fry I take to be the 最高の，を越す of their 漁業: they have no 器具s to catch 広大な／多数の／重要な fish should they come; and such seldom stay to be left behind at low water: nor could we catch any fish with our hooks and lines all the while we lay there. In other places at low-water they 捜し出す for cockles, mussels, and periwinkles: of these 貝類と甲殻類 there are より小数の still; so that their chiefest dependence is upon what the sea leaves in their weirs; which, be it much or little, they gather up, and march to the places of their abode. There the old people that are not able to 動かす abroad by 推論する／理由 of their age and the tender 幼児s wait their return; and what providence has bestowed on them they presently broil on the coals and eat it in ありふれた. いつかs they get as many fish as makes them a plentiful 祝宴; and at other times they 不十分な get everyone a taste: but be it little or much that they get, everyone has his part, 同様に the young and tender, the old and feeble, who are not able to go abroad, as the strong and lusty. When they have eaten they 嘘（をつく） 負かす／撃墜する till the next low-water, and then all that are able march out, be it night or day, rain or 向こうずね, it is all one; they must …に出席する the weirs or else they must 急速な／放蕩な: for the earth affords them no food at all. There is neither herb, root, pulse, nor any sort of 穀物 for them to eat that we saw; nor any sort of bird or beast that they can catch, having no 器具s wherewithal to do so.

I did not perceive that they did worship anything. These poor creatures have a sort of 武器 to defend their weir or fight with their enemies if they have any that will 干渉する with their poor 漁業. They did at first endeavour with their 武器s to 脅す us, who lying 岸に deterred them from one of their fishing-places. Some of them had 木造の swords, others had a sort of lances. The sword is a piece of 支持を得ようと努めるd 形態／調整d somewhat like a cutlass. The lance is a long straight 政治家 sharp at one end, and 常習的な afterwards by heat. I saw no アイロンをかける nor any other sort of metal; therefore it is probable they use 石／投石する-hatchets, as some Indians in America do, 述べるd in 一時期／支部 4.

THE WAY OF FETCHING FIRE OUT OF WOOD.

How they get their 解雇する／砲火／射撃 I know not; but probably as Indians do, out of 支持を得ようと努めるd. I have seen the Indians of Bonaire do it and have myself tried the 実験: they take a flat piece of 支持を得ようと努めるd that is pretty soft and make a small dent in one 味方する of it, then they take another hard 一連の会議、交渉／完成する stick about the bigness of one's little finger and, sharpening it at one end like a pencil, they put that sharp end in the 穴を開ける or dent of the flat soft piece, and then rubbing or twirling the hard piece between the palms of their 手渡すs they 演習 the soft piece till it smokes and at last takes 解雇する／砲火／射撃.

THE INHABITANTS ON THE ISLANDS.

These people speak somewhat through the throat; but we could not understand one word that they said. We 錨，総合司会者d, as I said before, January the 5th and, seeing men walking on the shore, we presently sent a canoe to get some 知識 with them: for we were in hopes to get some 準備／条項 の中で them. But the inhabitants, seeing our boat coming, ran away and hid themselves. We searched afterwards three days in hopes to find their houses; but 設立する 非，不，無: yet we saw many places where they had made 解雇する／砲火／射撃s. At last, 存在 out of hopes to find their habitations, we searched no さらに先に; but left a 広大な／多数の／重要な many toys 岸に in such places where we thought that they would come. In all our search we 設立する no water but old 井戸／弁護士席s on the sandy bays.

THEIR HABITATIONS, UNFITNESS FOR LABOUR, ETC.

At last we went over to the islands and there we 設立する a 広大な／多数の／重要な many of the natives: I do believe there were 40 on one island, men, women, and children. The men at our first coming 岸に 脅すd us with their lances and swords; but they were 脅すd by 解雇する／砲火／射撃ing one gun which we 解雇する／砲火／射撃d purposely to 脅す them. The island was so small that they could not hide themselves: but they were much disordered at our 上陸, 特に the women and children: for we went 直接／まっすぐに to their （軍の）野営地，陣営. The lustiest of the women, snatching up their 幼児s, ran away howling, and the little children ran after squeaking and bawling; but the men stood still. Some of the women and such people as could not go from us lay still by a 解雇する／砲火／射撃, making a doleful noise as if we had been coming to devour them: but when they saw we did not ーするつもりである to 害（を与える） them they were pretty 静かな, and the 残り／休憩（する） that fled from us at our first coming returned again. This their place of dwelling was only a 解雇する／砲火／射撃 with a few boughs before it, 始める，決める up on that 味方する the 勝利，勝つd was of.

After we had been here a little while the men began to be familiar and we 着せる／賦与するd some of them, designing to have had some service of them for it: for we 設立する some 井戸／弁護士席s of water here, and ーするつもりであるd to carry 2 or 3 バーレル／樽s of it 船内に. But it 存在 somewhat troublesome to carry to the canoes we thought to have made these men to have carried it for us, and therefore we gave them some old 着せる／賦与するs; to one an old pair of breeches, to another a ragged shirt, to the third a jacket that was 不十分な 価値（がある） owning; which yet would have been very 許容できる at some places where we had been, and so we thought they might have been with these people. We put them on them, thinking that this finery would have brought them to work heartily for us; and, our water 存在 filled in small long バーレル／樽s, about six gallons in each, which were made purposely to carry water in, we brought these our new servants to the 井戸／弁護士席s, and put a バーレル／樽 on each of their shoulders for them to carry to the canoe. But all the 調印するs we could make were to no 目的 for they stood like statues without 動議 but grinned like so many monkeys 星／主役にするing one upon another: for these poor creatures seem not accustomed to carry 重荷（を負わせる）s; and I believe that one of our ship-boys of 10 years old would carry as much as one of them. So we were 軍隊d to carry our water ourselves, and they very 公正に／かなり put the 着せる／賦与するs off again and laid them 負かす／撃墜する, as if 着せる／賦与するs were only to work in. I did not perceive that they had any 広大な／多数の／重要な liking to them at first, neither did they seem to admire anything that we had.

At another time, our canoe 存在 の中で these islands 捜し出すing for game, 遠くに見つけるd a drove of these men swimming from one island to another; for they have no boats, canoes, or bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs. They took up four of them and brought them 船内に; two of them were middle-老年の, the other two were young men about 18 or 20 years old. To these we gave boiled rice and with it 海がめ and manatee boiled. They did greedily devour what we gave them but took no notice of the ship, or anything in it, and when they were 始める，決める on land again they ran away as 急速な／放蕩な as they could. At our first coming, before we were 熟知させるd with them or they with us, a company of them who lived on the main （機の）カム just against our ship, and, standing on a pretty high bank, 脅すd us with their swords and lances by shaking them at us: at last the captain ordered the 派手に宣伝する to be beaten, which was done of a sudden with much vigour, purposely to 脅す the poor creatures. They 審理，公聴会 the noise ran away as 急速な／放蕩な as they could 運動; and when they ran away in haste they would cry "Gurry, gurry," speaking 深い in the throat. Those inhabitants also that live on the main would always run away from us; yet we took several of them. For, as I have already 観察するd, they had such bad 注目する，もくろむs that they could not see us till we （機の）カム の近くに to them. We did always give them victuals and let them go again, but the islanders, after our first time of 存在 の中で them, did not 動かす for us.

THE GREAT TIDES HERE.

When we had been here about a week we 運ぶ／漁獲高d our ship into a small sandy cove at a spring tide as far as she would float; and at low-water she was left 乾燥した，日照りの and the sand 乾燥した，日照りの without us 近づく half a mile; for the sea rises and 落ちるs here about five fathom. The flood runs north by east and the ebb south by west. All the neap tides we lay wholly 座礁して, for the sea did not come 近づく us by about a hundred yards. We had therefore time enough to clean our ship's 底（に届く） which we did very 井戸／弁護士席. Most of our men lay 岸に in a テント where our sails were mending; and our strikers brought home 海がめ and manatee every day, which was our constant food.

THEY DESIGN FOR THE ISLAND COCOS, AND CAPE COMORIN.

While we lay here I did endeavour to 説得する our men to go to some English factory; but was 脅すd to be turned 岸に and left here for it. This made me desist and 根気よく wait for some more convenient place and 適切な時期 to leave them than here: which I did hope I should 遂行する in a short time; because they did ーするつもりである, when they went from hence, to 耐える 負かす／撃墜する に向かって Cape Comorin. In their way thither they designed also to visit the island Cocos which lies in latitude 12 degrees 12 minutes north, by our charts; hoping there to find of that fruit; the island having its 指名する from thence.

CHAPTER 17.

LEAVING NEW HOLLAND THEY PASS BY THE ISLAND COCOS, AND TOUCH AT ANOTHER WOODY ISLAND NEAR IT.

March the 12th 1688 we sailed from New Holland with the 勝利，勝つd at north-north-west and 好天. We directed our course to the northward, ーするつもりであるing, as I said, to touch at the island Cocos: but we met with the 勝利，勝つd at north-west, west-north-west, and north-north-west for several days; which 強いるd us to keep a more easterly course than was convenient to find that island. We had soon after our setting out very bad 天候 with much 雷鳴 and 雷, rain and high blustering 勝利，勝つd.

It was the 26th day of March before we were in the latitude of the island Cocos which is in 12 degrees 12 minutes and then, by judgment, we were 40 or 50 leagues to the east of it; and the 勝利，勝つd was now at south-west. Therefore we did rather choose to 耐える away に向かって some islands on the west 味方する of Sumatra than to （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 against the 勝利，勝つd for the island Cocos. I was very glad of this; 存在 in hopes to make my escape from them to Sumatra or to some other place. We met nothing of 発言／述べる in this voyage beside the catching two 広大な／多数の／重要な sharks till the 28th day. Then we fell in with a small woody island in latitude 10 degrees 20 minutes. Its longitude from New Holland, from whence we （機の）カム, was by my account 12 degrees 6 minutes west. It was 深い water about the island, and therefore no 錨，総合司会者ing; but we sent two canoes 岸に; one of them with the carpenters to 削減（する） a tree to make another pump; the other canoe went to search for fresh water and 設立する a 罰金 small brook 近づく the south-west point of the island; but there the sea fell in on the shore so high that they could not get it off. At noon both our canoes returned 船内に; and the carpenters brought 船内に a good tree which they afterwards made a pump with, such a one as they made at Mindanao. The other canoe brought 船内に as many ばか者s and men-of-war birds as 十分であるd all the ship's company when they were boiled.

A LAND-ANIMAL LIKE LARGE CRAWFISH.

They got also a sort of land animal somewhat 似ているing a large crawfish without its 広大な／多数の／重要な claws. These creatures lived in 穴を開けるs in the 乾燥した，日照りの sandy ground like rabbits. Sir Francis Drake in his Voyage 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the World makes について言及する of such that he 設立する at Ternate, or some other of the Spice Islands, or 近づく them. They were very good 甘い meat and so large that two of them were more than a man could eat; 存在 almost as 厚い as one's 脚. Their 爆撃するs were of a dark brown but red when boiled.

This island is of a good 高さ, with 法外な cliffs against the south and south-west, and a sandy bay on the north 味方する; but very 深い water 法外な to the shore. The mould is blackish, the 国／地域 fat, producing large trees of divers sorts.

About one o'clock in the afternoon we made sail from this island with the 勝利，勝つd at south-west and we steered north-west. Afterwards the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム about at north-west and continued between the west-north-west and the north-north-west several days. I 観察するd that the 勝利，勝つd blew for the most part out of the west or north-west and then we had always 雨の 天候 with トルネード，竜巻s, and much 雷鳴 and 雷; but when the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム any way to the southward it blew but faint and brought fair 天候.

COCONUTS, FLOATING IN THE SEA.

We met nothing of 発言／述べる till the 7th day of April, and then, 存在 in latitude 7 degrees south, we saw the land of Sumatra at a 広大な／多数の／重要な distance, 耐えるing north. The 8th day we saw the east end of the island Sumatra very plainly; we 存在 then in latitude 6 degrees south. The 10th day, 存在 in latitude 5 degrees 11 minutes and about seven or eight leagues from the island Sumatra on the west 味方する of it, we saw 豊富 of coconuts swimming in the sea; and we hoisted out our boat and took up some of them; as also a small hatch, or scuttle rather, belonging to some bark. The nuts were very sound, and the kernel 甘い, and in some the milk or water in them and was yet 甘い and good.

THE ISLAND TRISTE BEARING COCONUTS, YET OVERFLOWN EVERY SPRING-TIDE.

The 12th day we （機の）カム to a small island called Triste in latitude (by 観察) 4 degrees south; it is about 14 or 15 leagues to the west of the island Sumatra. From hence to the northward there are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many small uninhabited islands lying much at the same distance from Sumatra. This island Triste is not a mile 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and so low that the tide flows （疑いを）晴らす over it. It is of a sandy 国／地域 and 十分な of coconut-trees. The nuts are but small; yet 甘い enough, 十分な, and more ponderous than I ever felt any of that bigness; notwithstanding that every spring tide the salt-water goes （疑いを）晴らす over the island.

We sent 岸に our canoes for coconuts and they returned 船内に laden with them three times. Our strikers also went out and struck some fish which was boiled for supper. They also killed two young alligators which we salted for the next day.

I had no 適切な時期 at this place to make any escape as I would have done and gone over hence to Sumatra, could I have kept a boat to me. But there was no compassing this; and so the 15th day we went from hence, steering to the northward on the west 味方する of Sumatra. Our food now was rice and the meat of the coconuts rasped and 法外なd in water; which made a sort of milk into which we did put our rice, making a pleasant mess enough. After we parted from Triste we saw other small islands that were also 十分な of coconut-trees.

THEY ANCHOR AT A SMALL ISLAND NEAR THAT OF NASSAU.

The 19th day, 存在 in latitude 3 degrees 25 minutes south, the south-west point of the island Nassau bore north about five miles distant. This is a pretty large uninhabited island in latitude 3 degrees 20 minutes south and is 十分な of high trees. About a mile from the island Nassau there is a small island 十分な of coconut-trees. There we 錨，総合司会者d the 29th day to 補充する our 在庫／株 of coconuts. A 暗礁 of 激しく揺するs lies almost 一連の会議、交渉／完成する this island so that our boats could not go 岸に nor come 船内に at low-water; yet we got 船内に four boat-負担 of nuts. This island is low like Triste and the 錨，総合司会者ing is on the north 味方する; where you have 14 fathom a mile from shore, clean sand.

The 21st day we went from hence and kept to the northward, coasting still on the west 味方する of the island Sumatra; and having the 勝利，勝つd between the west and south-south-west with unsettled 天候; いつかs rains and トルネード，竜巻s, and いつかs fair 天候.

HOG ISLAND, AND OTHERS.

The 25th day we crossed the 赤道, still coasting to the northward between the island Sumatra and a 範囲 of small islands lying 14 or 15 leagues off it. Amongst all these islands Hog Island is the most かなりの. It lies in latitude 3 degrees 40 minutes north. It is pretty high even land, 着せる／賦与するd with tall 繁栄するing trees; we passed it by the 28th day.

A PROA TAKEN BELONGING TO ACHIN.

The 29th we saw a sail to the north of us which we chased: but it 存在 little 勝利，勝つd we did not come up with her till the 30th day. Then, 存在 within a league of her, Captain Read went into a canoe and took her and brought her 船内に. She was a proa with four men in her, belonging to Achin, whither she was bound. She （機の）カム from one of these coconut islands that we passed by and was laden with coconuts and coconut-oil. Captain Read ordered his men to take 船内に all the nuts and as much of the oil as he thought convenient, and then 削減（する） a 穴を開ける in the 底（に届く） of the proa and turned her loose, keeping the men 囚人s.

It was not for the lucre of the 貨物 that Captain Read took this boat but to 妨げる me and some others from going 岸に; for he knew that we were ready to make our escapes if an 適切な時期 現在のd itself; and he thought that by 乱用ing and robbing the natives we should be afraid to 信用 ourselves の中で them. But yet this 訴訟／進行 of his turned to our 広大な／多数の／重要な advantage, as shall be 宣言するd hereafter.

May the 1st we ran 負かす／撃墜する by the north-west end of the island Sumatra, within seven or eight leagues of the shore. All this west 味方する of Sumatra which we thus coasted along our Englishmen at Fort St. George call the West Coast 簡単に, without 追加するing the 指名する of Sumatra. The 囚人s who were taken the day before showed us the islands that 嘘（をつく） off of Achin Harbour, and the channels through with ships go in; and told us that there was an English factory at Achin. I wished myself there but was 軍隊d to wait with patience till my time was come.

NICOBAR ISLAND, AND THE REST CALLED BY THAT NAME.

We were now directing our course に向かって the Nicobar Islands, ーするつもりであるing there to clean the ship's 底（に届く） ーするために make her sail 井戸／弁護士席.

The 14th day in the evening we had sight of one of the Nicobar Islands. The 最南端の of them lies about 40 leagues north-north-west from the north-west end of the island Sumatra. This most southerly of them is Nicobar itself, but all the cluster of islands lying south of the Andaman Islands are called by our seamen the Nicobar Islands.

AMBERGRIS, GOOD AND BAD.

The inhabitants of these islands have no 確かな converse with any nation; but as ships pass by them they will come 船内に in their proas and 申し込む／申し出 their 商品／必需品s to sale, never enquiring of what nation they are; for all white people are alike to them. Their chiefest 商品／必需品s are ambergris and fruits.

Ambergris is often 設立する by the native Indians of these islands who know it very 井戸／弁護士席; as also know how to cheat ignorant strangers with a 確かな mixture like it. Several of our men bought such of them for a small 購入（する）. Captain Weldon also about this time touched at some of these islands to the north of the island where we lay; and I saw a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of such ambergris that one of his men bought there; but it was not good, having no smell at all. Yet I saw some there very good and fragrant.

THE MANNERS OF THE INHABITANTS OF THESE ISLANDS.

At that island where Captain Weldon was there were two friars sent thither to 変える the Indians. One of them （機の）カム away with Captain Weldon; the other remained there still. He that （機の）カム away with Captain Weldon gave a very good character of the inhabitants of that island, すなわち, that they were very honest, civil, 害のない people; that they were not （麻薬）常用者d to quarrelling, 窃盗, or 殺人; that they did marry or at least live as man and wife, one man with one woman, never changing till death made the 分離; that they were punctual and honest in 成し遂げるing their 取引s; and that they were inclined to receive the Christian 宗教. This relation I had afterwards from the mouth of a priest at Tonquin who told me that he received this （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） by a letter from the friar that Captain Weldon brought away from thence. But to proceed.

THEY ANCHOR AT NICOBAR ISLE.

The 5th day of May we ran 負かす／撃墜する on the west 味方する of the island Nicobar 適切に いわゆる and 錨，総合司会者d at the north-west end of it in a small bay in eight fathom water not half a mile from the shore. The 団体／死体 of this island is in 7 degrees 30 minutes north latitude. It is about 12 leagues long, and 3 or 4 幅の広い.

ITS SITUATION, SOIL, AND PLEASANT MIXTURE OF ITS BAYS, TREES, ETC.

The south end of it is pretty high with 法外な cliffs against the sea; the 残り／休憩（する） of the island is low, flat, and even. The mould of it is 黒人／ボイコット and 深い; and it is very 井戸／弁護士席 watered with small running streams. It produces 豊富 of tall trees fit for any uses; for the whole 本体，大部分／ばら積みの of it seems to be but one entire grove. But that which 追加するs most to its beauty off at sea are the many 位置／汚点／見つけ出すs of coconut-trees which grow 一連の会議、交渉／完成する it in every small bay. The bays are half a mile or a mile long, more or いっそう少なく; and these bays are 迎撃するd or divided from each other with as many little rocky points of woodland.

THE MELORY-TREE AND FRUIT, USED FOR BREAD.

As the coconut-trees do thus grow in groves 前線ing to the sea in the bays, so there is another sort of fruit-trees in the bays 国境ing on the 支援する 味方する of the coconut-trees, さらに先に from the sea. It is called by the natives a melory-tree. This tree is as big as our large apple-trees and as high. It has a blackish rind and a pretty 幅の広い leaf. The fruit is as big as the breadfruit at Guam, 述べるd in 一時期／支部 10, or a large penny loaf. It is 形態／調整d like a pear and has a pretty 堅い smooth rind of a light green colour. The inside of the fruit is in 実体 much like an apple but 十分な of small strings as big as a brown thread. I did never see of these trees anywhere but here.

THE NATIVES OF NICOBAR ISLAND, THEIR FORM, HABIT, LANGUAGE, HABITATIONS; NO FORM OF RELIGION OR GOVERNMENT: THEIR FOOD AND CANOES.

The natives of this island are tall 井戸／弁護士席-四肢d men; pretty long-visaged, with 黒人／ボイコット 注目する，もくろむs; their noses middle 割合d, and the whole symmetry of their 直面するs agreeing very 井戸／弁護士席. Their hair is 黒人／ボイコット and lank, and their 肌s of a dark 巡査 colour. The women have no hair on their eyebrows. I do believe it is plucked up by the roots; for the men had hair growing on their eyebrows as other people.

The men go all naked save only a long 狭くする piece of cloth or sash which, going 一連の会議、交渉／完成する their waists and thence 負かす／撃墜する between their thighs, is brought up behind and tucked in at that part which goes about the waist. The women have a 肉親，親類d of a short petticoat reaching from their waist to their 膝s.

Their language was different from any that I had ever heard before; yet they had some few Malayan words, and some of them had a word or two of Portuguese; which probably they might learn 船内に of their ships, passing by this place: for when these men see a sail they do presently go 船内に of them in their canoes. I did not perceive any form of 宗教 that they had; they had neither 寺 nor idol nor any manner of outward veneration to any deity that I did see.

They 住む all 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the island by the seaside in the bays; there 存在 four or five houses more or いっそう少なく in each bay. Their houses are built on 地位，任命するs as the Mindanayans are. They are small, low, and of a square form. There is but one room in each house, and this room is about eight foot from the ground; and from thence the roof is raised about eight foot higher. But instead of a sharp 山の尾根 the 最高の，を越す is 越えるing neatly arched with small rafters about the bigness of a man's arm, bent 一連の会議、交渉／完成する like a half moon, and very curiously thatched with palmetto-leaves.

They live under no 政府 that I could perceive; for they seem to be equal without any distinction; every man 判決，裁定 in his own house. Their 農園s are only those coconut-trees which grow by the seaside; there 存在 no （疑いを）晴らすd land さらに先に in on the island: for I 観察するd that when past the fruit-trees there were no paths to be seen going into the 支持を得ようと努めるd. The greatest use which they make of their coconut-trees is to draw toddy from them, of which they are very fond.

The melory-trees seem to grow wild; they have 広大な／多数の／重要な earthen マリファナs to boil the melory fruit in which will 持つ／拘留する 12 or 14 gallons. These マリファナs they fill with the fruit; and, putting in a little water, they cover the mouth of the マリファナ with leaves to keep the steam while it boils. When the fruit is soft they peel off the rind and 捨てる the 低俗雑誌 from the strings with a flat stick made like a knife; and then make it up in 広大な／多数の／重要な lumps as big as a Holland cheese; and then it will keep six or seven days. It looks yellow, and tastes 井戸／弁護士席, and is their chiefest food: for they have no yams, potatoes, rice, nor plantains (except a very few) yet they have a few small hogs and a very few cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s like ours. The men 雇う themselves in fishing; but I did not see much fish that they got: every house has at least two or three canoes belonging to it, which they draw up 岸に.

The canoes that they go a-fishing in are sharp at both ends; and both the 味方するs and the 底（に届く） are very thin and smooth. They are 形態／調整d somewhat like the proas at Guam with one 味方する flattish and the other with a pretty big belly; and they have small slight outlayers on one 味方する. 存在 thus thin and light they are better managed with oars than with sails: yet they sail 井戸／弁護士席 enough and steered with a paddle. There 一般的に go 20 or 30 men in one of these canoes; and seldom より小数の than 9 or 10. Their oars are short and they do not paddle but 列／漕ぐ／騒動 with them as we do. The （法廷の）裁判s they sit on when they 列／漕ぐ／騒動 are made of 分裂（する） bamboos, laid across and so neat together that they look like a deck. The bamboos 嘘（をつく） movable so that when any go in to 列／漕ぐ／騒動 they （問題を）取り上げる a bamboo in the place where they would sit and lay it by to make room for their 脚s. The canoes of those of the 残り／休憩（する） of these islands were like those of Nicobar; and probably they were alike in other things; for we saw no different at all in the natives of them who （機の）カム hither while we were here.

THEY CLEAN THE SHIP.

But to proceed with our 事件／事情／状勢s: it was, as I said before, the 5th day of May about 10 in the morning when we 錨，総合司会者d at this island: Captain Read すぐに ordered his men to heel the ship ーするために clean her: which was done this day and the next. All the water 大型船s were filled. They ーするつもりであるd to go to sea at night: for, the 勝利，勝つd 存在 yet at north-north-east, the captain was in hopes to get over to Cape Comorin before the 勝利，勝つd 転換d. さもなければ it would have been somewhat difficult for him to get thither because the westerly 季節風 was not at 手渡す.

THE AUTHOR PROJECTS AND GETS LEAVE TO STAY ASHORE HERE, AND WITH HIM TWO ENGLISHMEN MORE, THE PORTUGUESE, AND FOUR MALAYANS OF ACHIN.

I thought now was my time to make my escape by getting leave if possible to stay here: for it seemed not very feasible to do it by stealth; and I had no 推論する／理由 to despair of getting leave: this 存在 a place where my stay could probably do our 乗組員 no 害（を与える） should I design it. Indeed one 推論する／理由 that put me on the thoughts of staying at this particular place, besides the 現在の 適切な時期 of leaving Captain Read, which I did always ーするつもりである to do as soon as I could, was that I had here also a prospect of 前進するing a profitable 貿易（する） for ambergris with these people, and of 伸び（る）ing a かなりの fortune to myself: for in a short time I might have learned their language and, by accustoming myself to 列／漕ぐ／騒動 with them in the proas or canoes, 特に by 適合するing myself to their customs and manners of living, I should have seen how they got their ambergris, and have known what 量s they get, and the time of the year when most is 設立する. And then afterwards I thought it would be 平易な for me to have 輸送（する）d myself from thence, either in some ship that passed this way, whether English, Dutch, or Portuguese; or else to have gotten one of the young men of the island to have gone with me in one of their canoes to Achin; and there to have furnished myself with such 商品／必需品s as I 設立する most coveted by them; and therewith at my return to have bought their ambergris.

I had till this time made no open show of going 岸に here: but now, the water 存在 filled and the ship in a 準備完了 to sail, I 願望（する）d Captain Read to 始める，決める me 岸に on this island. He, supposing that I could not go 岸に in a place いっそう少なく たびたび（訪れる）d by ships than this, gave me leave: which probably he would have 辞退するd to have done if he thought I should have gotten from hence in any short time; for 恐れる of my giving an account of him to the English or Dutch. I soon got up my chest and bedding and すぐに got some to 列／漕ぐ／騒動 me 岸に; for 恐れる lest his mind should change again.

THEIR FIRST RENCOUNTERS WITH THE NATIVES.

The canoe that brought me 岸に landed me on a small sandy bay where there were two houses but no person in them. For the inhabitants were 除去するd to some other house, probably for 恐れる of us because the ship was の近くに by: and yet both men and women （機の）カム 船内に the ship without any 調印する of 恐れる. When our ship's canoe was going 船内に again they met the owner of the houses coming 岸に in his boat. He made a 広大な／多数の／重要な many 調印するs to them to fetch me off again: but they would not understand him. Then he （機の）カム to me and 申し込む／申し出d his boat to carry me off; but I 辞退するd it. Then he made 調印するs for me to go up into the house and, （許可，名誉などを）与えるing as I did understand him by his 調印するs and a few Malayan words that he used, he intimated that somewhat would come out of the 支持を得ようと努めるd in the night when I was a sleep and kill me, meaning probably some wild beast. Then I carried my chest and 着せる／賦与するs up into the house.

I had not been 岸に an hour before Captain Teat and one John Damarel, with three or four 武装した men more, （機の）カム to fetch me 船内に again. They need not have sent an 武装した posse for me; for had they but sent the cabin-boy 岸に for me I would not have 否定するd going 船内に. For though I could have hid myself in the 支持を得ようと努めるd yet then they would have 乱用d or have killed some of the natives, purposely to incense them against me. I told them therefore that I was ready to go with them and went 船内に with all my things.

When I （機の）カム 船内に I 設立する the ship in an uproar; for there were three men more who, taking courage by my example, 願望（する）d leave also to …を伴って me. One of them was the 外科医 Mr. Coppinger, the other was Mr. Robert Hall, and one 指名するd Ambrose; I have forgot his surname. These men had always harboured the same designs as I had. The two last were not much …に反対するd; but Captain Read and his 乗組員 would not part with the 外科医. At last the 外科医 leapt into the canoe and, taking up my gun, swore he would go 岸に, and that if any man did …に反対する it he would shoot him: but John Oliver, who was then quartermaster, leapt into the canoe, taking 持つ／拘留する of him took away the gun and, with the help of two or three more, they dragged him again into the ship.

Then Mr. Hall and Ambrose and I were again sent 岸に; and one of the men that 列／漕ぐ／騒動d us 岸に stole an axe and gave it to us, knowing it was a good 商品／必需品 with the Indians. It was now dark, therefore we lighted a candle and I, 存在 the oldest stander in our new country, 行為／行うd them into one of the houses, where we did presently hang up our hammocks. We had 不十分な done this before the canoe （機の）カム 岸に again and brought the four Malayan men belonging to Achin (which we took in the proa we took off of Sumatra) and the Portuguese that （機の）カム to our ship out of the Siam junk at Pulo Condore: the 乗組員 having no occasion for these, 存在 leaving the Malayan parts, where the Portuguese 誘発する served as an interpreter; and not 恐れるing now that the Achinese could be serviceable to us in bringing us over to their country, forty leagues off; nor imagining that we durst make such an 試みる／企てる, as indeed it was a bold one. Now we were men enough to defend ourselves against the natives of this island if they should 証明する our enemies: though if 非，不，無 of these men had come 岸に to me I should not have 恐れるd any danger: nay perhaps いっそう少なく because I should have been 用心深い of giving any offence to the natives. And I am of the opinion that there are no people in the world so barbarous as to kill a 選び出す／独身 person that 落ちるs accidentally into their 手渡すs or comes to live の中で them; except they have before been 負傷させるd by some 乱暴／暴力を加える or 暴力／激しさ committed against them. Yet even then, or afterwards if a man could but 保存する his life from their first 激怒（する）, and come to 扱う／治療する with them (which is the hardest thing because their way is usually to abscond and, 急ぐing suddenly upon their enemy, to kill him at unawares) one might by some slight insinuate one's self into their favours again; 特に by showing some toy or knack that they did never see before: which any European that has seen the world might soon contrive to amuse them withal: as might be done 一般に, even with a lit 解雇する／砲火／射撃 struck with a flint and steel.

OF THE COMMON TRADITIONS CONCERNING CANNIBALS, OR MAN-EATERS.

As for the ありふれた opinion of anthropophagi, or man-eaters, I did never 会合，会う any such people: all nations or families in the world, that I have seen or heard of, having some sort of food to live on either fruit, 穀物, pulse, or roots, which grow 自然に, or else 工場／植物d by them; if not fish and land animals besides (yea even the people of New Holland had fish まっただ中に all their penury) and would 不十分な kill a man purposely to eat him. I know not what barbarous customs may 以前は have been in the world; and to sacrifice their enemies to their gods is a thing has been much talked of with relation to the savages of America. I am a stranger to that also if it be or have been customary in any nation there; and yet, if they sacrifice their enemies it is not necessary they should eat them too. After all I will not be peremptory in the 消極的な, but I speak as to the compass of my own knowledge and know some of these cannibal stories to be 誤った, and many of them have been disproved since I first went to the West Indies. At that time how barbarous were the poor Florida Indians accounted which now we find to be civil enough? What strange stories have we heard of the Indians whose islands were called the 小島s of Cannibals? Yet we find that they do 貿易（する） very civilly with the French and Spaniards; and have done so with us. I do own that they have 以前は endeavoured to destroy our 農園s at Barbados, and have since 妨げるd us from settling in the island Santa Loca by destroying two or three 植民地s successively of those that were settled there; and even the island Tobago has been often annoyed and 荒廃させるd by them when settled by the Dutch, and still lies waste (though a delicate 実りの多い／有益な island) as 存在 too 近づく the Caribbees on the continent, who visit it every year. But this was to 保存する their own 権利 by endeavouring to keep out any that would settle themselves on those islands where they had 工場／植物d themselves; yet even these people would not 傷つける a 選び出す／独身 person, as I have been told by some that have been 囚人s の中で them. I could instance also in the Indians of Boca Toro and Boca Drago, and many other places where they do live, as the Spaniards call it, wild and savage: yet there they have been familiar with privateers, but by 乱用s have 孤立した their friendship again. As for these Nicobar people I 設立する them affable enough, and therefore I did not 恐れる them; but I did not much care whether I had gotten any more company or no.

But however I was very 井戸／弁護士席 満足させるd, and the rather because we were now men enough to 列／漕ぐ／騒動 ourselves over to the island Sumatra; and accordingly we presently 協議するd how to 購入（する） a canoe of the natives.

It was a 罰金 （疑いを）晴らす moonlight night in which we were left 岸に. Therefore we walked on the sandy bay to watch when the ship would 重さを計る and be gone, not thinking ourselves 安全な・保証する in our new-gotten liberty till then. About eleven or twelve o'clock we saw her under sail and then we returned to our 議会 and so to sleep. This was the 6th of May.

THEIR ENTERTAINMENT ASHORE.

The next morning be times our landlord with four or five of his friends （機の）カム to see his new guests, and was somewhat surprised to see so many of us for he knew of no more but myself. Yet he seemed to be very 井戸／弁護士席 pleased and entertained us with a large calabash of toddy, which he brought with him.

THEY BUY A CANOE, TO TRANSPORT THEM OVER TO ACHIN; BUT OVERSET HER AT FIRST GOING OUT.

Before he went away again (for wheresoever we （機の）カム they left their houses to us, but whether out of 恐れる or superstition I know not) we bought a canoe of him for an axe, and we did presently put our chests and 着せる／賦与するs in it, designing to go to the south end of the island and 嘘（をつく） there till the 季節風 転換d, which we 推定する／予想するd every day.

When our things were stowed away we with the Achinese entered with joy into our new フリゲート艦 and 開始する，打ち上げるd off from the shore. We were no sooner off but our canoe overset, 底（に届く） 上向きs. We 保存するd our lives 井戸／弁護士席 enough by swimming and dragged also our chests and 着せる／賦与するs 岸に; but all our things were wet. I had nothing of value but my 定期刊行物 and some draughts of land of my own taking which I much prized, and which I had hitherto carefully 保存するd. Mr. Hall had also such another 貨物 of 調書をとる／予約するs and draughts which were now like to 死なせる／死ぬ. But we presently opened our chests and took out our 調書をとる／予約するs which, with much ado, we did afterwards 乾燥した，日照りの; but some of our draughts that lay loose in our chests were spoiled.

We lay here afterwards three days, making 広大な／多数の／重要な 解雇する／砲火／射撃s to 乾燥した，日照りの our 調書をとる／予約するs. The Achinese in the 合間 直す／買収する，八百長をするd our canoe with outlayers on each 味方する; and they also 削減（する） a good mast for her and made a 相当な sail with mats.

HAVING RECRUITED AND IMPROVED HER, THEY SET OUT AGAIN FOR THE EAST SIDE OF THE ISLAND.

The canoe 存在 now very 井戸／弁護士席 直す／買収する，八百長をするd, and our 調書をとる／予約するs and 着せる／賦与するs 乾燥した，日照りの, we 開始する，打ち上げるd out a second time and 列／漕ぐ／騒動d に向かって the east 味方する of the island, leaving many islands to the north of us. The Indians of the island …を伴ってd us with eight or ten canoes against our 願望（する）; for we thought that these men would make 準備／条項 dearer at that 味方する of the island we were going to by giving an account what 率s we gave for it at the place from whence we （機の）カム, which was 借りがあるing to the ship's 存在 there; for the ship's 乗組員 were not so thrifty in 取引ing (as they seldom are) as 選び出す／独身 persons or a few men might be apt to be, who would keep to one 取引. Therefore to 妨げる them from going with us Mr. Hall 脅すd one canoe's 乗組員 by 解雇する／砲火／射撃ing a 発射 over them. They all leapt overboard and cried out but, seeing us 列／漕ぐ／騒動 away, they got into their canoe again and （機の）カム after us.

THEY HAVE A WAR WITH THE ISLANDERS; BUT PEACE BEING REESTABLISHED, THEY LAY IN STORES, AND MAKE PREPARATIONS FOR THEIR VOYAGE.

The 解雇する／砲火／射撃ing of that gun made all the inhabitants of the island to be our enemies. For presently after this we put 岸に at a bay where were four houses and a 広大な／多数の／重要な many canoes: but they all went away and （機の）カム 近づく us no more for several days. We had then a 広大な／多数の／重要な loaf of melory which was our constant food; and if we had a mind to coconuts or toddy our Malayans of Achin would climb the trees and fetch as many nuts as we would have, and a good マリファナ of toddy every morning. Thus we lived till our melory was almost spent; 存在 still in hopes that the natives would come to us and sell it as they had 以前は done. But they （機の）カム not to us; nay they …に反対するd us wherever we （機の）カム and, often shaking their lances at us, made all the show of 憎悪 that they could invent.

At last when we saw that they stood in 対立 to us we 解決するd to use 軍隊 to get some of their food if we could not get it other ways. With this 決意／決議 we went into our canoe to a small bay on the north part of the island because it was smooth water there and good 上陸; but on the other 味方する, the 勝利，勝つd 存在 yet on the ４半期/4分の1, we could not land without jeopardy of oversetting our canoe and wetting our 武器, and then we must have lain at the mercy of our enemies who stood 2 or 300 men in every bay where they saw us coming to keep us off.

When we 始める，決める out we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d 直接／まっすぐに to the north end and presently were followed by seven or eight of their canoes. They keeping at a distance 列／漕ぐ／騒動d away faster than we did and got to the bay before us; and there, with about 20 more canoes 十分な of men, they all landed and stood to 妨げる us from 上陸. But we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d in within a hundred yards of them. Then we lay still and I took my gun and 現在のd at them; at which they all fell 負かす／撃墜する flat on the ground. But I turned myself about and, to show that we did not ーするつもりである to 害（を与える） them, I 解雇する／砲火／射撃d my gun off に向かって the sea; so that they might see the 発射 graze on the water. As soon as my gun was 負担d again we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d gently in; at which some of them withdrew. The 残り／休憩（する） standing up did still 削減（する） and hew the 空気／公表する, making 調印するs of their 憎悪; till I once more 脅すd them with my gun and 発射する／解雇するd it as before. Then more of them こそこそ動くd away, leaving only five or six men on the bay. Then we 列／漕ぐ／騒動d in again and Mr. Hall, taking his sword in his 手渡す, leapt 岸に; and I stood ready with my gun to 解雇する／砲火／射撃 at the Indians if they had 負傷させるd him: but they did not 動かす till he （機の）カム to them and saluted them.

He shook them by the 手渡す, and by such 調印するs of friendship as he made the peace was 結論するd, 批准するd, and 確認するd by all that were 現在の: and others that were gone were again called 支援する, and they all very joyfully 受託するd of a peace. This became 全世界の／万国共通の over all the island to the 広大な／多数の／重要な joy of the inhabitants. There was no （犯罪の）一味ing of bells nor bonfires made, for that it is not the custom here; but gladness appeared in their countenances, for now they could go out and fish again without 恐れる of 存在 taken. This peace was not more welcome to them than to us; for now the inhabitants brought their melory again to us; which we bought for old rags and small （土地などの）細長い一片s of cloth about as 幅の広い as the palm of one's 手渡す. I did not see above five or six 女／おっせかい屋s, for they have but few on the island. At some places we saw some small hogs which we could have bought of them reasonably; but we could not 感情を害する／違反する our Achinese friends who were Mohammedans.

We stayed here two or three days and then 列／漕ぐ／騒動d toward the south end of the island, keeping on the east 味方する, and we were kindly received by the natives wherever we （機の）カム. When we arrived at the south end of the island we fitted ourselves with melory and water. We bought three or four loaves of melory and about twelve large coconut-爆撃するs that had all the kernel taken out, yet were 保存するd whole, except only a small 穴を開ける at one end; and all these held for us about three gallons and a half of water. We bought also two or three bamboos that held about four or five gallons more: this was our sea-蓄える／店.

We now designed to go for Achin, a town on the north-west end of the island Sumatra, distant from hence about 40 leagues, 耐えるing south-south-west. We only waited for the western 季節風, which we had 推定する／予想するd a 広大な／多数の／重要な while, and now it seemed to be at 手渡す; for the clouds began to hang their 長，率いるs to the eastward, and at last moved gently that way; and though the 勝利，勝つd was still at east, yet this was an infallible 調印する that the western 季節風 was nigh.

CHAPTER 18.

THE AUTHOR, WITH SOME OTHERS, PUT TO SEA IN AN OPEN BOAT, DESIGNING FOR ACHIN.

It was the 15th day of May 1688 about four o'clock in the afternoon when we left Nicobar Island, directing our course に向かって Achin, 存在 eight men of us in company, すなわち, three English, four Malayans, who were born at Achin, and the mongrel Portuguese.

THEIR ACCOMMODATIONS FOR THEIR VOYAGE.

Our 大型船, the Nicobar canoe, was not one of the biggest nor of the least size: she was much about the 重荷（を負わせる） of one of our London wherries below 橋（渡しをする）, and built sharp at both ends like the fore part of a wherry. She was deeper than a wherry, but not so 幅の広い, and was so thin and light that when empty four men could 開始する，打ち上げる her or 運ぶ／漁獲高 her 岸に on a sandy bay. We had a good 相当な mast and a mat sail, and good outlayers 攻撃するd very 急速な／放蕩な and 会社／堅い on each 味方する the 大型船, 存在 made of strong 政治家s. So that while these continued 会社／堅い the 大型船 could not overset which she should easily have done without them, and with them too had they not been made very strong; and we were therefore much beholden to our Achinese companions for this contrivance. These men were 非，不，無 of them so sensible of the danger as Mr. Hall and myself, for they all confided so much in us that they did not so much as scruple anything that we did 認可する of. Neither was Mr. Hall so 井戸／弁護士席 供給するd as I was, for before we left the ship I had purposely 協議するd our chart of the East Indies (for we had but one in the ship) and out of that I had written in my pocket-調書をとる／予約する an account of the 耐えるing and distance of all the Malacca coast and that of Sumatra, Pegu, and Siam, and also brought away with me a pocket-compass for my direction in any 企業 that I should 請け負う. The 天候 at our setting out was very fair, （疑いを）晴らす and hot. The 勝利，勝つd was still at south-east, a very small 微風 just fanning the 空気／公表する, and the clouds were moving gently from west to east, which gave us hopes that the 勝利，勝つd were either at west already abroad at sea, or would be so in a very short time. We took this 適切な時期 of 好天, 存在 in hopes to 遂行する our voyage to Achin before the western 季節風 was 始める，決める in strong, knowing that we should have very blustering 天候 after this 好天, 特に at the first coming of the western 季節風.

We 列／漕ぐ／騒動d therefore away to the southward, supposing that when we were （疑いを）晴らす from the island we should have a true 勝利，勝つd, as we call it; for the land 運ぶ／漁獲高s the 勝利，勝つd; and we often find the 勝利，勝つd at sea different from what it is 近づく the shore. We 列／漕ぐ／騒動d with four oars taking our turns: Mr. Hall and I steered also by turns, for 非，不，無 of the 残り／休憩（する） were 有能な of it. We 列／漕ぐ／騒動d the first afternoon and the night 続いて起こるing about twelve leagues by my judgment. Our course was south-south-east; but the 16th day in the morning, when the sun was an hour high, we saw the island from whence we （機の）カム 耐えるing north-west by north. Therefore I 設立する we had gone a point more to the east than I ーするつもりであるd for which 推論する／理由 we steered south by east.

In the afternoon at 4 o'clock we had a gentle 微風 at west-south-west which continued so till nine, all which time we laid 負かす／撃墜する our oars and steered away south-south-east. I was then at the 舵輪／支配 and I 設立する by the rippling of the sea that there was a strong 現在の against us. It made a 広大な／多数の／重要な noise that might be heard 近づく half a mile. At 9 o'clock it fell 静める, and so continued till ten. Then the 勝利，勝つd sprang up again and blew a fresh 微風 all night.

The 17th day in the morning we looked out for the island Sumatra, supposing that we were now within 20 leagues of it; for we had 列／漕ぐ／騒動d and sailed by our reckoning 24 leagues from Nicobar Island; and the distance from Nicobar to Achin is about 40 leagues. But we looked in vain for the island Sumatra; for, turning ourselves about, we saw to our grief Nicobar Island lying west-north-west and not above eight leagues distant. By this it was 明白な that we had met a very strong 現在の against us in the night. But the 勝利，勝つd freshened on us and we made the best use of it while the 天候 continued fair. At noon we had an 観察 of the sun, my latitude was 6 degrees 55 minutes and Mr. Hall's was 7 degrees north.

CHANGE OF WEATHER; A HALO ABOUT THE SUN, AND A VIOLENT STORM.

The 18th day the 勝利，勝つd freshened on us again and the sky began to be clouded. It was indifferent （疑いを）晴らす till noon and we thought to have had an 観察; but we were 妨げるd by the clouds that covered the 直面する of the sun when it （機の）カム on the meridian. This often happens that we are disappointed of making 観察s by the sun's 存在 clouded at noon though it 向こうずねs （疑いを）晴らす both before and after, 特に in places 近づく the sun; and this obscuring of the sun at noon is 一般的に sudden and 予期しない, and for about half an hour or more.

We had then also a very ill presage by a 広大な／多数の／重要な circle about the sun (five or six times the 直径 of it) which seldom appears but 嵐／襲撃するs of 勝利，勝つd or much rain 続いて起こる. Such circles about the moon are more たびたび（訪れる） but of いっそう少なく 輸入する. We do 一般的に take 広大な／多数の／重要な notice of these that are about the sun, 観察するing if there be any 違反 in the circle, and in what ４半期/4分の1 the 違反 is; for from thence we 一般的に find the greatest 強調する／ストレス of the 勝利，勝つd will come. I must 自白する that I was a little anxious at the sight of this circle and wished heartily that we were 近づく some land. Yet I showed no 調印する of it to discourage any consorts, but made a virtue of necessity and put a good countenance on the 事柄.

THEIR GREAT DANGER AND DISTRESS. CUDDA, A TOWN AND HARBOUR ON THE COAST OF MALACCA.

I told Mr. Hall that if the 勝利，勝つd became too strong and violent, as I 恐れるd it would, it 存在 even then very strong, we must of necessity steer away before the 勝利，勝つd and sea till better 天候 現在のd; and that as the 勝利，勝つd were now we should, instead of about twenty leagues to Achin, be driven sixty or seventy leagues to the coast of Cudda or Queda, a kingdom and town and harbour of 貿易（する） on the coast of Malacca. The 勝利，勝つd therefore 耐えるing very hard we rolled up the foot of our sail on a 政治家 fastened to it, and settled our yard within three foot of the canoe 味方するs so that we had now but a small sail; yet it was still too big considering the 勝利，勝つd; for the 勝利，勝つd 存在 on our broadside 圧力（をかける）d her 負かす／撃墜する very much, though supported by her outlayers; insomuch that the 政治家s of the outlayers going from the 味方するs of their 大型船 bent as if they would break; and should they have broken our overturning and 死なせる／死ぬing had been 必然的な. Besides the sea 増加するing would soon have filled the 大型船 this way. Yet thus we made a 転換 to 耐える up with the 味方する of the 大型船 against the 勝利，勝つd for a while: but the 勝利，勝つd still 増加するing about one o'clock in the afternoon we put away 権利 before 勝利，勝つd and sea, continuing to run thus all the afternoon and part of the night 続いて起こるing. The 勝利，勝つd continued 増加するing all the afternoon, and the sea still swelled higher and often broke, but did us no 損失; for the ends of the 大型船 存在 very 狭くする he that steered received and broke the sea on his 支援する, and so kept it from coming in so much as to 危うくする the 大型船: though much water would come in which we were 軍隊d to keep heaving out continually. And by this time we saw it was 井戸／弁護士席 that we had altered our course, every wave would else have filled and sunk us, taking the 味方する of the 大型船: and though our outlayers were 井戸／弁護士席 攻撃するd 負かす／撃墜する to the canoe's 底（に届く） with rattans, yet they must probably have 産する／生じるd to such a sea as this; when even before they were 急落（する），激減（する）d under water and bent like twigs.

The evening of this 18th day was very dismal. The sky looked very 黒人／ボイコット, 存在 covered with dark clouds, the 勝利，勝つd blew hard and the seas ran high. The sea was already roaring in a white 泡，激怒すること about us; a dark night coming on and no land in sight to 避難所 us, and our little ark in danger to be swallowed by every wave; and, what was worst of all, 非，不，無 of us thought ourselves 用意が出来ている for another world. The reader may better guess than I can 表明する the 混乱 that we were all in. I had been in many 切迫した dangers before now, some of which I have already 関係のある, but the worst of them all was but a play-game in comparison with this. I must 自白する that I was in 広大な／多数の／重要な 衝突s of mind at this time. Other dangers （機の）カム not upon me with such a leisurely and dreadful solemnity. A sudden 小競り合い or 約束／交戦 or so was nothing when one's 血 was up and 押し進めるd 今後s with eager 期待s. But here I had a ぐずぐず残る 見解（をとる） of approaching death and little or no hopes of escaping it; and I must 自白する that my courage, which I had hitherto kept up, failed me here; and I made very sad reflections on my former life, and looked 支援する with horror and detestation on 活動／戦闘s which before I disliked but now I trembled at the remembrance of. I had long before this repented me of that roving course of life but never with such 関心 as now. I did also call to mind the many miraculous 行為／法令／行動するs of God's providence に向かって me in the whole course of my life, of which 肉親，親類d I believe few men have met with the like. For all these I returned thanks in a peculiar manner, and this once more 願望（する）d God's 援助, and composed my mind 同様に as I could in the hopes of it, and as the event showed I was not disappointed of my hopes. Submitting ourselves therefore to God's good providence and taking all the care we could to 保存する our lives, Mr. Hall and I took turns to steer and the 残り／休憩（する） took turns to heave out the water, and thus we 供給するd to spend the most doleful night I ever was in. About ten o'clock it began to 雷鳴, 雷, and rain; but the rain was very welcome to us, having drunk up all the water we brought from the island.

The 勝利，勝つd at first blew harder than before, but within half an hour it abated and became more 穏健な; and the sea also assuaged of its fury; and then by a lighted match, of which we kept a piece 燃やすing on 目的, we looked on our compass to see how we steered, and 設立する our course to be still east. We had no occasion to look on the compass before, for we steered 権利 before the 勝利，勝つd, which if it 転換d we had been 強いるd to have altered our course accordingly. But now it 存在 abated we 設立する our 大型船 lively enough with that small sail which was then 船内に to 運ぶ／漁獲高 to our former course south-south-east, which accordingly we did, 存在 now in hopes again to get to the island Sumatra. But about two o'clock in the morning of the 19th day we had another gust of 勝利，勝つd with much 雷鳴, 雷, and rain, which lasted till day, and 強いるd us to put before the 勝利，勝つd again, steering thus for several hours. It was very dark and the hard rain soaked us so 完全に that we had not one 乾燥した，日照りの thread about us. The rain 冷気／寒がらせるd us 極端に; for any fresh water is much colder than that of the sea. For even in the coldest 気候s the sea is warm, and in the hottest 気候s the rain is 冷淡な and unwholesome for man's 団体／死体. In this wet starveling 苦境 we spent the tedious night. Never did poor 水夫s on a 物陰／風下 shore more 真面目に long for the 夜明けing light than we did now. At length the day appeared; but with such dark 黒人／ボイコット clouds 近づく the horizon that the first glimpse of the 夜明け appeared 30 or 40 degrees high; which was dreadful enough; for it is a ありふれた 説 の中で seamen, and true as I have experienced, that a high 夜明け will have high 勝利，勝つd, and a low 夜明け small 勝利，勝つd. PULO WAY. We continued our course still east before 勝利，勝つd and sea till about eight o'clock in the morning of this 19th day; and then one of our Malayan friends cried out "Pulo Way." Mr. Hall and Ambrose and I thought the fellow had said "pull away," an 表現 usual の中で English seamen when they are 列／漕ぐ／騒動ing. And we wondered what he meant by it till we saw him point to his consorts; and then we looking that way saw land appearing like an island, and all our Malayans said it was an island at the north-west end of Sumatra called Way; for Pulo Way is the island Way. We, who were dropping with wet, 冷淡な and hungry, were all overjoyed at the sight of the land and presently 示すd its 耐えるing. It bore south and the 勝利，勝つd was still at west, a strong 強風; but the sea did not run so high as in the night. Therefore we trimmed our small sail no bigger than an apron and steered with it. Now our outlayers did us a 広大な／多数の／重要な 親切 again, for although we had but a small sail yet the 勝利，勝つd was strong and 圧力（をかける）d 負かす／撃墜する our 大型船's 味方する very much: but 存在 supported by the outlayers we could brook it 井戸／弁護士席 enough, which さもなければ we could not have done.

GOLDEN MOUNTAIN ON THE ISLE OF SUMATRA.

About noon we saw more land beneath the supposed Pulo Way; and, steering に向かって it, before night we saw all the coast of Sumatra, and 設立する the errors of our Achinese; for the high land that we first saw, which then appeared like an island, was not Pulo Way but a 広大な／多数の／重要な high mountain on the island Sumatra called by the English the Golden Mountain. Our 勝利，勝つd continued till about seven o'clock at night; then it abated and at ten o'clock it died away: and then we stuck to our oars again, though all of us やめる tired with our former 疲労，（軍の）雑役s and hardships.

RIVER AND TOWN OF PASSANGE JONCA ON SUMATRA, NEAR DIAMOND POINT; WHERE THEY GO ASHORE VERY SICK, AND ARE KINDLY ENTERTAINED BY THE OROMKAY, AND INHABITANTS.

The next morning, 存在 the 20th day, we saw all the low land plain, and 裁判官d ourselves not above eight leagues off. About eight o'clock in the morning we had the 勝利，勝つd again at west, a fresh 強風 and, steering in still for a shore, at five o'clock in the afternoon we ran to the mouth of a river on the island Sumatra called Passange Jonca. It is 34 leagues to the eastward of Achin and six leagues to the west of Diamond Point, which makes with three angles of a rhombus and is low land.

Our Malayans were very 井戸／弁護士席 熟知させるd here and carried us to a small fishing village within a mile of the river's mouth, called also by the 指名する of the river Passange Jonca. The hardships of this voyage, with the scorching heat of the sun at our first setting out, and the 冷淡な rain, and our continuing wet for the last two days, cast us all into fevers, so that now we were not able to help each other, nor so much as to get our canoe up to the village; but our Malayans got some of the townsmen to bring her up.

The news of our arrival 存在 noised abroad, one of the Oramkis, or noblemen, of the island （機の）カム in the night to see us. We were then lying in a small hut at the end of the town and, it 存在 late, this lord only 見解（をとる）d us and, having spoken with our Malayans, went away again; but he returned to us again the next day and 供給するd a large house for us to live in till we should be 回復するd of our sickness, ordering the towns-people to let us want for nothing. The Achinese Malayans that （機の）カム with us told them all the circumstances of our voyage; how they were taken by our ship, and where and how we that （機の）カム with them were 囚人s 船内に the ship and had been 始める，決める 岸に together at Nicobar as they were. It was for this 推論する／理由 probably that the gentlemen of Sumatra were thus 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 肉親，親類d to us, to 供給する everything that we had need of; nay they would 軍隊 us to 受託する of 現在のs from them that we knew not what to do with; as young buffaloes, goats, etc., for these we would turn loose at night after the gentlemen that gave them to us were gone, for we were 誘発するd by our Achinese consorts to 受託する of them for 恐れる of disobliging by our 拒絶. But the coconuts, plantains, fowls, eggs, fish, and rice we kept for our use. The Malayans that …を伴ってd us from Nicobar separated themselves from us now, living at one end of the house by themselves, for they were Mohammedans, as all those of the kingdom of Achin are and, though during our passage by sea together we made them be contented to drink their water out of the same coconut-爆撃する with us; yet 存在 now no longer under that necessity they again took up their accustomed nicety and reservedness. They all lay sick, and as their sickness 増加するd one of them 脅すd us that, if any of them died, the 残り／休憩（する） would kill us for having brought them this voyage; yet I question whether they would have 試みる／企てるd, or the country people have 苦しむd it. We made a 転換 to dress our own food, for 非，不，無 of these people, though they were very 肉親，親類d in giving us anything that we 手配中の，お尋ね者, would yet come 近づく us to 補助装置 us in dressing our victuals: nay they would not touch anything that we used. We had all fevers and therefore took turns to dress victuals （許可，名誉などを）与えるing as we had strength to do it, or stomachs to eat it. I 設立する my fever to 増加する and my 長，率いる so distempered that I could 不十分な stand, therefore I whetted and sharpened my penknife ーするために let myself 血; but I could not for my knife was too blunt.

We stayed here ten or twelve days in hopes to 回復する our health but, finding no 改正, we 願望（する）d to go to Achin. But we were 延期するd by the natives who had a 願望（する） to have kept Mr. Hall and myself to sail in their 大型船s to Malacca, Cudda, or to other places whither they 貿易（する）. But, finding us more desirous to be with our countrymen in our factory at Achin, they 供給するd a large proa to carry us thither, we not 存在 able to manage our own canoe. Besides, before this three of our Malayan comrades were gone very sick into the country, and only one of them and the Portuguese remained with us, …を伴ってing us to Achin and they both as sick as we.

THEY GO THENCE TO ACHIN.

It was the beginning of June 1686 [sic] when we left Passange Jonca. We had four men to 列／漕ぐ／騒動, one to steer, and a gentleman of the country that went purposely to give an （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） to the 政府 of our arrival. We were but three days and nights in our passage, having sea-微風s by day and land-勝利，勝つd by night and very 好天.

THE AUTHOR IS EXAMINED BEFORE THE SHABANDER; AND TAKES PHYSICK OF A MALAYAN DOCTOR. HIS LONG ILLNESS.

When we arrived at Achin I was carried before the shebander, the 長，指導者 治安判事 in the city. One Mr. Dennis Driscal, an Irishman and a 居住（者） there in the factory which our East India Company had there then, was interpreter. I 存在 weak was 苦しむd to stand in the shebander's presence: for it is their custom to make men sit on the 床に打ち倒す as they do, cross-legged like tailors: but I had not strength then to pluck up my heels in that manner. The shebander asked of me several questions, 特に how we durst adventure to come in a canoe from the Nicobar Islands to Sumatra. I told him that I had been accustomed to hardships and hazards therefore I did with much freedom 請け負う it. He enquired also 関心ing our ship, whence she （機の）カム, etc. I told him from the South Seas; that she had 範囲d about the Philippine islands, etc., and was now gone に向かって Arabia and the Red Sea. The Malayans also and Portuguese were afterwards 診察するd and 確認するd what I 宣言するd, and in いっそう少なく than half an hour I was 解任するd with Mr. Driscal, who then lived in the English East India Company's factory. He 供給するd a room for us to 嘘（をつく） in and some victuals. Three days after our arrival here our Portuguese died of a fever. What became of our Malayans I know not: Ambrose lived not long after, Mr. Hall also was so weak that I did not think he would 回復する. I was the best; but still very sick of a fever and little likely to live. Therefore Mr. Driscal and some other Englishmen 説得するd me to take some 粛清するing physic of a Malayan doctor. I took their advice, 存在 willing to get 緩和する: but after three doses, each a large calabash of 汚い stuff, finding no 改正, I thought to desist from more physic; but was 説得するd to take one dose more; which I did, and it wrought so violently that I thought it would have ended my days. I struggled till I had been about twenty or thirty times at stool: but, it working so quick with me with little intermission, and my strength 存在 almost spent, I even threw myself 負かす／撃墜する once for all, and had above sixty stools in all before it left off working. I thought my Malayan doctor, whom they so much commended, would have killed me 完全な. I continued 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の weak for some days after his drenching me thus: but my fever left me for above a week: after which it returned upon me again for a twelvemonth and a flux with it. However when I was a little 回復するd from the 影響s of my drench I made a 転換 to go abroad: and, having been kindly 招待するd to Captain Bowrey's house there, my first visit was to him; who had a ship in the road but lived 岸に. This gentleman was 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の 肉親，親類d to us all, 特に to me, and importuned me to go his boatswain to Persia; whither he was bound, with a design to sell his ship there, as I was told, though not by himself. From thence he ーするつもりであるd to pass with the caravan to Aleppo and so home for England. His 商売／仕事 要求するd him to stay some time longer at Achin; I 裁判官 to sell some 商品／必需品s that he had not yet 性質の／したい気がして of. Yet he chose rather to leave the 処分 of them to some merchant there and make a short trip to the Nicobar Islands in the 合間, and on his return to take in his 影響s, and so proceed に向かって Persia. This was a sudden 決意／決議 of Captain Bowrey's, presently after the arrival of a small フリゲート艦 from Siam with an 外交官／大使 from the king of Siam to the queen of Achin. The 外交官／大使 was a Frenchman by nation. The 大型船 that he （機の）カム in was but small yet very 井戸／弁護士席 乗組員を乗せた, and fitted for a fight. Therefore it was 一般に supposed here that Captain Bowrey was afraid to 嘘（をつく） in Achin Road because the Siamers were now at wars with the English, and he was not able to defend his ship if he should be attacked by them.

HE SETS OUT TOWARDS NICOBAR AGAIN, BUT RETURNS SUDDENLY TO ACHIN ROAD.

But whatever made him think of going to the Nicobar Islands he 供給するd to sail; and took me, Mr. Hall, and Ambrose with him, though all of us so sick and weak that we could do him no service. It was some time about the beginning of June when we sailed out of Achin road: but we met with the 勝利，勝つd at north-west with 騒然とした 天候 which 軍隊d us 支援する again in two days' time. Yet he gave us each 12 mess apiece, a gold coin, each of which is about the value of 15 pence English. So he gave over that design: and, some English ships coming into Achin Road, he was not afraid of the Siamers who lay there.

After this he again 招待するd me to his house at Achin, and 扱う／治療するd me always with ワイン and good 元気づける, and still importuned me to go with him to Persia: but I 存在 very weak, and 恐れるing the westerly 勝利，勝つd would create a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 of trouble, did not give him a 肯定的な answer; 特に because I thought I might get a better voyage in the English ships newly arrived, or some others now 推定する／予想するd here. It was this Captain Bowrey who sent the letter from Borneo directed to the 長，指導者 of the English factory at Mindanao, of which について言及する is made in 一時期／支部 13.

HE MAKES SEVERAL VOYAGES THENCE, TO TONQUIN, TO MALACCA, TO FORT ST. GEORGE, AND TO BENCOOLEN, AN ENGLISH FACTORY ON SUMATRA.

A short time after this Captain Welden arrived here from Fort St. George in a ship called the Curtana bound to Tonquin. This 存在 a more agreeable voyage than to Persia at this time of the year; besides that the ship was better 融通するd, 特に with a 外科医, and I 存在 still sick; I therefore chose rather to serve Captain Welden than Captain Bowrey. But to go on with a particular account of that 探検隊／遠征隊 were to carry my reader 支援する again: whom, having brought thus far に向かって England in my circumnavigation of the globe, I shall not 疲れた／うんざりした him with new rambles, nor so much swell this 容積／容量, as I must 述べる the 小旅行する I made in those remote parts of the East Indies from and to Sumatra. So that my voyage to Tonquin at this time, as also another to Malacca afterwards, with my 観察s in them and the descriptions of those and the 隣人ing countries; 同様に as the description of the island Sumatra itself, and therein the kingdom and city of Achin, Bencoolen, etc., I shall 言及する to another place where I may give a particular relation of them.

1689.

In short it may 十分である that I 始める，決める out to Tonquin with Captain Welden about July 1688 and returned to Achin in the April に引き続いて. I stayed here till the latter end of September 1689, and, making a short voyage to Malacca, （機の）カム thither again about Christmas. Soon after that I went to Fort St. George and, staying there about five months, I returned once more to Sumatra; not to Achin but Bencoolen, an English factory on the west coast; of which I was gunner about five months more.

AN ACCOUNT OF THE SHIP'S CREW 世界保健機構 SET THE AUTHOR ASHORE AT NICOBAR.

So that, having brought my reader to Sumatra without carrying him 支援する, I shall bring him on next way from thence to England: and of all that occurred between my first setting out from this island in 1688 and my final 出発 from it at the beginning of the year 1691, I shall only take notice at 現在の of two passages which I think I ought not to omit.

The first is that, at my return from Malacca a little before Christmas 1689, I 設立する at Achin one Mr. Morgan who was one of our ship's 乗組員 that left me 岸に at Nicobar, now mate of a Danish ship of Trangambar; which is a town on the coast of Coromandel, 近づく Cape Comorin, belonging to the Danes: and, receiving an account of our 乗組員 from him and others, I thought it might not be amiss to gratify the reader's curiosity therewith; who would probably be desirous to know the success of those ramblers in their new-ーするつもりであるd 探検隊／遠征隊 に向かって the Red Sea. And withal I thought it might not be ありそうもない that these papers might 落ちる into the 手渡すs of some of our London merchants who were 関心d in fitting out that ship; which I said 以前は was called the Cygnet of London, sent on a 貿易（する）ing voyage into the South Seas under the 命令（する） of Captain Swan: and that they might be willing to have a particular （警察などへの）密告，告訴（状） of the 運命／宿命 of their ship. And by the way, even before this 会合 with Mr. Morgan while I was at Tonquin, January 1689, I met with an English ship in the river of Tonquin called the Rainbow of London, Captain Poole 指揮官; by whose mate, Mr. Barlow, who was returning in that ship to England, I sent a packet which he undertook to 配達する to the merchants, owners of the Cygnet, some of which he said he knew: wherein I gave a particular account of all the course and 処理／取引s of their ship, from the time of my first 会合 it in the South Seas and going 船内に it there, to its leaving me 岸に at Nicobar. But I never could hear that either that or other letters which I sent at the same time were received.

SOME GO TO TRANGAMBAR, A DANISH FORT ON COROMANDEL; OTHERS TO FORT ST. GEORGE; MANY TO THE MOGUL'S CAMP.

To proceed therefore with Mr. Morgan's relation: he told me that, when they in the Cygnet went away from Nicobar in 追跡 of their ーするつもりであるd voyage to Persia, they directed their course に向かって Ceylon. But, not 存在 able to 天候 it, the westerly 季節風 存在 hard against them, they were 強いるd to 捜し出す refreshment on the coast of Coromandel. Here this mad fickle 乗組員 were upon new 事業／計画（する）s again. Their designs 会合 with such 延期するs and obstructions that many of them grew 疲れた／うんざりした of it and about half of them went 岸に. Of this number Mr. Morgan, who told me this, and Mr. Herman Coppinger the 外科医 went to the Danes at Trangambar, who kindly received them. There they lived very 井戸／弁護士席; and Mr. Morgan was 雇うd as a mate in a ship of theirs at this time to Achin: and Captain Knox tells me that he since 命令（する）d the Curtana; the ship that I went in to Tonquin, which Captain Welden, having sold to the Mogul's 支配するs, they 雇うd Mr. Morgan as captain to 貿易（する） in her for them; and it is a usual thing for the 貿易（する）ing Indians to 雇う Europeans to go officers on board their ships; 特に captains and gunners. About two or three more of these that were 始める，決める 岸に went to Fort St. George; but the main 団体／死体 of them were for going into the Mogul's service. Our seamen are apt to have 広大な／多数の／重要な notions of I know not what 利益（をあげる） and advantages to be had in serving the Mogul; nor do they want for 罰金 stories to encourage one another to it. It was what these men had long been thinking and talking of as a 罰金 thing; but now they went upon it in good earnest. The place where they went 岸に was at a town of the Moors: which 指名する our seamen give to all the 支配するs of the 広大な／多数の／重要な Mogul, but 特に his Mohammedan 支配するs; calling the idolaters gentous or rashbouts. At this Moors town they got a peun to be their guide to the Mogul's nearest （軍の）野営地，陣営; for he has always several armies in his 広大な empire.

OF THE PEUNS; AND HOW JOHN OLIVER MADE HIMSELF A CAPTAIN.

These peuns are some of the gentous or rashbouts who in all places along the coast, 特に in sea-port towns, make it their 商売／仕事 to 雇う themselves to wait upon strangers, be they merchants, seamen, or what they will. To qualify them for such 出席 they learn the European languages, English, Dutch, French, Portuguese, etc., （許可，名誉などを）与えるing as they have any of the factories of these nations in their neighbourhood, or are visited by their ships. No sooner does any such ship come to an 錨，総合司会者 and the men come 岸に but a 広大な／多数の／重要な many of these peuns are ready to proffer their service. It is usual for the strangers to 雇う their 出席 during their stay there, giving them about a 栄冠を与える a month of our money, more or いっそう少なく. The richest sort of men will ordinarily 雇う two or three peuns to wait upon them; and even the ありふれた seamen, if able, will 雇う one apiece to …に出席する them, either for convenience or ostentation; or いつかs one peun between two of them. These peuns serve them in many capacities, as interpreters, 仲買人s, servants to …に出席する at meals and go to market and on errands, etc. Nor do they give any trouble, eating at their own homes and 宿泊するing there; when they have done their masters' 商売／仕事 for them, 推定する／予想するing nothing but their 給料, except that they have a 確かな allowance of about a fanam, or three pence in a dollar, which is an 18th part 利益（をあげる）, by way of 仲買業 for every 取引 they 運動; they 存在 一般に 雇うd in buying and selling. When the strangers go away their peuns 願望（する） them to give them their 指名するs in 令状ing, with a 証明書 of their honest and diligent serving them: and these they show to the next comers to get into 商売／仕事; some 存在 able to produce a large scroll of such 証明書s.

But to proceed: the Moors town where these men landed was not far from Cunnimere, a small English factory on the Coromandel Coast. The 知事 whereof, having 知能 by the Moors of the 上陸 of these men and their ーするつもりであるd march to the Mogul's （軍の）野営地，陣営, sent out a captain with his company to …に反対する it. He （機の）カム up with them and gave them hard words: but they 存在 thirty or forty resolute fellows, not easily daunted, he durst not attack them, but returned to the 知事, and the news of it was soon carried to Fort St. George. During their march John Oliver, who was one of them, 個人として told the peun who guided them that himself was their captain. So when they （機の）カム to the （軍の）野営地，陣営, the peun told this to the general: and when their 駅／配置するs and 支払う／賃金 were 割り当てるd them John Oliver had a greater 尊敬（する）・点 paid him than the 残り／休憩（する）; and 反して their 支払う／賃金 was ten pagodas a month each man (a pagoda is two dollars or 9 shillings English) his 支払う／賃金 was twenty pagodas: which stratagem and usurpation of his occasioned him no small envy and indignation from his comrades.

Soon after this two or three of them went to Agra to be of the Mogul's guard. A while after the 知事 of Fort St. George sent a message to the main 団体／死体 of them and a 容赦 to 身を引く them from thence; which most of them 受託するd and （機の）カム away. John Oliver and the small 残りの人，物 continued in the country; but, leaving the （軍の）野営地，陣営, went up and 負かす／撃墜する, plundering the villages and 逃げるing when they were 追求するd; and this was the last news I heard of them. This account I had partly by Mr. Morgan, from some of those 見捨てる人／脱走兵s he met with at Trangambar; partly from others of them whom I met myself afterwards at Fort St. George. And these were the adventures of those who went up into the country.

CAPTAIN READ, WITH THE REST, HAVING PLUNDERED A RICH PORTUGUESE SHIP NEAR CEYLON, GOES TO MADAGASCAR, AND SHIPS HIMSELF OFF THENCE IN A NEW YORK SHIP.

Captain Read having thus lost the best half of his men sailed away with the 残り／休憩（する） of them after having filled his water and got rice, still ーするつもりであるing for the Red Sea. When they were 近づく Ceylon they met with a Portuguese ship richly laden, out of which they took what they pleased and then turned her away again. From thence they 追求するd their voyage: but, the westerly 勝利，勝つd 耐えるing hard against them, and making it hardly feasible for them to reach the Red Sea, they stood away for Madagascar. There they entered into the service of one of the petty princes of that island to 補助装置 him against his 隣人s with whom he was at wars. During this interval a small 大型船 from New York （機の）カム hither to 購入（する） slaves: which 貿易（する） is driven here, as it is upon the coast of Guinea; one nation or 一族／派閥 selling others that are their enemies. Captain Read, with about five or six more, stole away from their 乗組員 and went 船内に this New York ship, and Captain Teat was made 指揮官 of the residue.

THE TRAVERSES OF THE REST TO JOHANNA, ETC.

Soon after which a brigantine from the West Indies, Captain Knight 指揮官, coming thither with a design to go to the Red Sea also, these of the Cygnet consorted with them and they went together to the island Johanna. Thence, going together に向かって the Red Sea, the Cygnet 証明するing leaky and sailing ひどく, as 存在 much out of 修理, Captain Knight grew 疲れた／うんざりした of her company and, giving her the slip in the night, went away for Achin: for, having heard that there was plenty of gold there, he went thither with a design to 巡航する: and it was from one Mr. Humes, belonging to the Ann of London, Captain Freke 指揮官, who had gone 船内に Captain Knight, and whom I saw afterwards at Achin, that I had this relation. Some of Captain Freke's men, their own ship 存在 lost, had gone 船内に the Cygnet at Johanna: and after Captain Knight had left her she still 追求するd her voyage に向かって the Red Sea: but, the 勝利，勝つd 存在 against them, and the ship in so ill a 条件, they were 軍隊d to 耐える away for Coromandel, where Captain Teat and his own men went 岸に to serve the Mogul.

THEIR SHIP, THE CYGNET OF LONDON, NOW LIES SUNK IN AUGUSTIN BAY AT MADAGASCAR.

But the strangers of Captain Freke's ship, who kept still 船内に the Cygnet, undertook to carry her for England: and the last news I heard of the Cygnet was from Captain Knox who tells me that she now lies sunk in St. Augustin Bay in Madagascar. This digression I have made to give an account of our ship.

1690. OF PRINCE JEOLY THE PAINTED MAN, WHOM THE AUTHOR BROUGHT WITH HIM TO ENGLAND, AND 世界保健機構 DIED AT OXFORD.

The other passage I shall speak of that occurred during this interval of the 小旅行する I made from Achin is with relation to the painted prince whom I brought with me into England and who died at Oxford. For while I was at Fort St. George, about April 1690, there arrived a ship called the Mindanao Merchant, laden with clove-bark from Mindanao. Three of Captain Swan's men that remained there when we went from thence （機の）カム in her: from whence I had the account of Captain Swan's death, as is before 関係のある. There was also one Mr. Moody, who was supercargo of the ship. This gentleman bought at Mindanao the painted prince Jeoly (について言及するd in 一時期／支部 13) and his mother; and brought them to Fort St. George where they were much admired by all that saw them. Some time after this Mr. Moody, who spoke the Malayan language very 井戸／弁護士席 and was a person very 有能な to manage the company's 事件／事情／状勢s, was ordered by the 知事 of Fort St. George to 準備する to go to Indrapore, an English factory on the west coast of Sumatra, ーするために 後継する Mr. Gibbons, who was the 長，指導者 of that place.

By this time I was very intimately 熟知させるd with Mr. Moody and was importuned by him to go with him and to be gunner of the fort there. I always told him I had a 広大な／多数の／重要な 願望（する） to go to the Bay of Bengal, and that I had now an 申し込む／申し出 to go thither with Captain Metcalf, who 手配中の，お尋ね者 a mate and had already spoke to me. Mr. Moody, to encourage me to go with him, told me that if I would go with him to Indrapore he would buy a small 大型船 there and send me to the island Meangis, 指揮官 of her; and that I should carry Prince Jeoly and his mother with me (that 存在 their country) by which means I might 伸び（る） a 商業 with his people for cloves.

This was a design that I liked very 井戸／弁護士席, and therefore I 同意d to go thither. It was some time in July 1690 when we went from Fort St. George in a small ship called the Diamond, Captain Howel 指揮官. We were about fifty or sixty 乗客s in all; some ordered to be left at Indrapore, and some at Bencoolen: five or six of us were officers, the 残り／休憩（する） 兵士s to the company. We met nothing in our voyage that deserves notice till we （機の）カム abreast of Indrapore. And then the 勝利，勝つd （機の）カム at north-west, and blew so hard that we could not get in but were 軍隊d to 耐える away to Bencoolen, another English factory on the same coast, lying fifty or sixty leagues to the southward of Indrapore.

Upon our arrival at Bencoolen we saluted the fort and were welcomed by them. The same day we （機の）カム to an 錨，総合司会者, and Captain Howel and Mr. Moody with the other merchants went 岸に and were all kindly received by the 知事 of the fort. It was two days before I went 岸に and then I was importuned by the 知事 to stay there to be gunner of this fort; because the gunner was lately dead: and this 存在 a place of greater 輸入する than Indrapore I should do the company more service here than there. I told the 知事 if he would augment my salary which, by 協定 with the 知事 of Fort St. George I was to have had at Indrapore, I was willing to serve him 供給するd Mr. Moody would 同意 to it. As to my salary he told me I should have 24 dollars per month which was as much as he gave to the old gunner.

Mr. Moody gave no answer till a week after and then, 存在 ready to be gone to Indrapore, he told me I might use my own liberty either to stay here or go with him to Indrapore. He 追加するd that if I went with him he was not 確かな as yet to 成し遂げる his 約束 in getting a 大型船 for me to go to Meangis with Jeoly and his mother: but he would be so fair to me that, because I left マドラス on his account, he would give me the half 株 of the two painted people, and leave them in my 所有／入手 and at my 処分. I 受託するd of the 申し込む／申し出 and writings were すぐに drawn between us.

OF HIS COUNTRY THE ISLE OF MEANGIS; THE CLOVES THERE, ETC.

Thus it was that I （機の）カム to have this painted prince, whose 指名する was Jeoly, and his mother. They were born on a small island called Meangis, which is once or twice について言及するd in 一時期／支部 13. I saw the island twice, and two more の近くに by it: each of the three seemed to be about four or five leagues 一連の会議、交渉／完成する and of a good 高さ. Jeoly himself told me that they all three abounded with gold, cloves and nutmegs: for I showed him some of each sort several times and he told me in the Malayan language which he spoke indifferent 井戸／弁護士席: "Meangis hadda madochala se bullawan": that is, "There is 豊富 of gold at Meangis." Bullawan I have 観察するd to be the ありふれた word for gold at Mindanao; but whether the proper Malayan word I know not, for I 設立する much difference between the Malayan language as it was spoken at Mindanao and the language on the coast of Malacca and Achin. When I showed him spice he would not only tell me that there was madochala, that is, 豊富; but to make it appear more plain he would also show me the hair of his 長，率いる, a thing たびたび（訪れる） の中で all the Indians that I have met with to show their hair when they would 表明する more than they can number. That there were not above thirty men on the island and about one hundred women: that he himself had five wives and eight children, and that one of his wives painted him.

He was painted all 負かす／撃墜する the breast, between his shoulders behind; on his thighs (mostly) before; and in the form of several 幅の広い （犯罪の）一味s or bracelets 一連の会議、交渉／完成する his 武器 and 脚s. I cannot に例える the 製図／抽選s to any 人物／姿／数字 of animals or the like; but they were very curious, 十分な of 広大な／多数の／重要な variety of lines, 繁栄するs, chequered work, etc., keeping a very graceful 割合 and appearing very 人工的な, even to wonder, 特に that upon and between his shoulder-blades. By the account he gave me of the manner of doing it I understood that the 絵 was done in the same manner as the Jerusalem cross is made in men's 武器, by pricking the 肌 and rubbing in a pigment. But 反して 砕く is used in making the Jerusalem cross, they at Meangis use the gum of a tree beaten to 砕く called by the English dammer, which is used instead of pitch in many parts of India. He told me that most of the men and women on the island were thus painted: and also that they had all earrings made of gold, and gold shackles about their 脚s and 武器: that their ありふれた food of the produce of the land was potatoes and yams: that they had plenty of cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s but no other tame fowl. He said that fish (of which he was a 広大な／多数の／重要な lover, as wild Indians 一般に are) was very plentiful about the island; and that they had canoes and went a-fishing frequently in them; and that they often visited the other two small islands whose inhabitants spoke the same language as they did; which was so unlike the Malayan, which he had learnt while he was a slave at Mindanao, that when his mother and he were talking together in their Meangian tongue I could not understand one word they said. And indeed all the Indians who spoke Malayan, who are the 貿易（する）ing and politer sort, looked on these Meangians as a 肉親，親類d of barbarians; and upon any occasion of dislike would call them bobby, that is hogs; the greatest 表現 of contempt that can be, 特に from the mouth of Malayans who are 一般に Mohammedans; and yet the Malayans everywhere call a woman babby, by a 指名する not much different, and mamma signifies a man; though these two last words 適切に denote male and 女性（の）: and as ejam signifies a fowl, so ejam mamma is a cock, and ejam babbi is a 女／おっせかい屋. But this by the way.

He said also that the customs of those other 小島s and their manner of living was like theirs, and that they were the only people with whom they had any converse: and that one time as he, with his father, mother and brother, with two or three men more, were going to one of these other islands they were driven by a strong 勝利，勝つd on the coast of Mindanao, where they were taken by the fishermen of that island and carried 岸に and sold as slaves; they 存在 first stripped of their gold ornaments. I did not see any of the gold that they wore, but there were 広大な／多数の／重要な 穴を開けるs in their ears, by which it was manifest that they had worn some ornaments in them. Jeoly was sold to one Michael, a Mindanayan that spoke good Spanish, and 一般的に waited on Raja Laut, serving him as our interpreter where the Raja was at a loss in any word, for Michael understood it better. He did often （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 and 乱用 his painted servant to make him work, but all in vain, for neither fair means, 脅しs, nor blows would make him work as he would have him. Yet he was very timorous and could not 耐える to see any sort of 武器s; and he often told me that they had no 武器 at Meangis, they having no enemies to fight with.

I knew this Michael very 井戸／弁護士席 while we were at Mindanao: I suppose that 指名する was given him by the Spaniards who baptised many of them at the time when they had 地盤 at that island: but at the 出発 of the Spaniards they were Mohammedans again as before. Some of our people lay at this Michael's house, whose wife and daughter were pagallies to some of them. I often saw Jeoly at his master Michael's house, and when I （機の）カム to have him so long after he remembered me again. I did never see his father nor brother, nor any of the others that were taken with them; but Jeoly （機の）カム several times 船内に our ship when we lay at Mindanao, and 喜んで 受託するd of such victuals as we gave him; for his master kept him at very short ありふれたs.

Prince Jeoly lived thus a slave at Mindanao four or five years, till at last Mr. Moody bought him and his mother for 60 dollars, and as is before 関係のある, carried him to Fort St. George, and from thence along with me to Bencoolen. Mr. Moody stayed at Bencoolen about three weeks and then went 支援する with Captain Howel to Indrapore, leaving Jeoly and his mother with me. They lived in a house by themselves without the fort. I had no 雇用 for them; but they both 雇うd themselves. She used to make and mend their own 着せる／賦与するs, at which she was not very 専門家, for they wear no 着せる／賦与するs at Meangis but only a cloth about their waists: and he busied himself in making a chest with four boards and a few nails that he begged of me. It was but an ill-形態／調整d 半端物 thing, yet he was as proud of it as if it had been the rarest piece in the world. After some time they were both taken sick and, though I took as much care of them as if they had been my brother and sister, yet she died. I did what I could to 慰安 Jeoly; but he took on 極端に, insomuch that I 恐れるd him also. Therefore I 原因（となる）d a 墓／厳粛／彫る／重大な to be made presently to hide her out of his sight. I had her shrouded decently in a piece of new calico; but Jeoly was not so 満足させるd, for he wrapped all her 着せる／賦与するs about her and two new pieces of chintz that Mr. Moody gave her, 説 that they were his mother's and she must have them. I would not disoblige him for 恐れる of 危うくするing his life; and I used all possible means to 回復する his health; but I 設立する little 改正 while we stayed here.

In the little printed relation that was made of him when he was shown for a sight in England there was a romantic story of a beautiful sister of his, a slave with them at Mindanao; and of the 暴君's 落ちるing in love with her; but these were stories indeed. They 報告（する）／憶測d also that this paint was of such virtue that serpents and venomous creatures would 逃げる from him, for which 推論する／理由 I suppose, they 代表するd so many serpents scampering about in the printed picture that was made of him. But I never knew any paint of such virtue: and as for Jeoly I have seen him as much afraid of snakes, scorpions, or centipedes as myself.

THE AUTHOR IS MADE GUNNER OF BENCOOLEN, BUT IS FORCED TO SLIP AWAY FROM THENCE TO COME FOR ENGLAND.

Having given this account of the ship that left me at Nicobar, and of my painted prince whom I brought with me to Bencoolen, I shall now proceed on with the relation of my voyage thence to England, after I have given this short account of the occasion of it and the manner of my getting away.

To say nothing therefore now of that place, and my 雇用 there as gunner of the fort, the year 1690 drew に向かって an end and, not finding the 知事 keep to his 協定 with me, nor seeing by his carriage に向かって others any 広大な／多数の／重要な 推論する／理由 I had to 推定する／予想する he would, I began to wish myself away again. I saw so much ignorance in him with 尊敬（する）・点 to his 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金, 存在 much fitter to be a bookkeeper than 知事 of a fort; and yet so much insolence and cruelty with 尊敬（する）・点 to those under him, and rashness in his 管理／経営 of the Malayan neighbourhood, that I soon grew 疲れた／うんざりした of him, not thinking myself very 安全な indeed under a man whose humours were so brutish and barbarous. I forbear to について言及する his 指名する after such a character; nor do I care to fill these papers with particular stories of him: but therefore give this intimation because, as it is the 利益／興味 of the nation in general, so is it 特に of the honourable East India Company to be 知らせるd of 乱用s in their factories. And I think the company might receive 広大な／多数の／重要な advantage by 厳密に enquiring into the behaviour of those whom they ゆだねる with any 命令（する）. For beside the odium which 反映するs 支援する upon the superiors from the misdoings of their servants, how undeservedly soever, there are 広大な／多数の／重要な and 継続している mischiefs proceed from the tyranny or ignorant rashness of some petty 知事s. Those under them are discouraged from their service by it and often go away to the Dutch, the Mogul, or the Malayan princes, to the 広大な／多数の／重要な detriment of our 貿易（する）; and even the 貿易（する） and the forts themselves are many times in danger by indiscreet 誘発s given to the 隣人ing nations who are best managed, as all mankind are, by 司法（官） and fair 取引; nor any more implacably revengeful than those Malayans who live in the neighbourhood of Bencoolen, which fort has been more than once in danger of 存在 surprised by them. I speak not this out of disgust to this particular 知事; much いっそう少なく would I seem to 反映する on any others of whom I know nothing amiss: but as it is not to be wondered at if some should not know how to demean themselves in places of 力／強力にする, for which neither their education nor their 商売／仕事 かもしれない have 十分に qualified them, so it will be the more necessary for the honourable Company to have the closer 注目する，もくろむ over them, and as much as may be to 妨げる or 改革（する） any 乱用s they may be 有罪の of; and it is 純粋に out of my zeal for theirs and the nation's 利益／興味 that I have given this 警告を与える, having seen too much occasion for it.

I had other 動機s also for my going away. I began to long after my native country after so tedious a ramble from it: and I 提案するd no small advantage to myself from my painted prince, whom Mr. Moody had left 完全に to my 処分, only reserving to himself his 権利 to one half 株 in him. For beside what might be 伸び（る）d by showing him in England I was in hopes that when I had got some money I might there 得る what I had in vain sought for in the Indies, すなわち, a ship from the merchants wherewith to carry him 支援する to Meangis and 復帰させる him there in his own country, and by his favour and 交渉 to 設立する a traffic for the spices and other 製品s of those islands.

1691. Upon these 事業／計画（する）s I went to the 知事 and 会議 and 願望（する）d that I might have my 発射する／解雇する to go for England with the next ship that （機の）カム. The 会議 thought it reasonable and they 同意d to it; he also gave me his word that I should go. Upon the 2nd of January 1691 there （機の）カム to 錨，総合司会者 in Bencoolen Road the Defence, Captain ヒース／荒れ地 指揮官, bound for England in the service of the Company. They had been at Indrapore where Mr. Moody then was, and he had made over his 株 in Prince Jeoly to Mr. Goddard, 長，指導者 mate of the ship. Upon his coming on shore he showed me Mr. Moody's writings and looked upon Jeoly, who had been sick for three months: in all which time I tended him as carefully as if he had been my brother. I agreed 事柄s with Mr. Goddard and sent Jeoly on board, ーするつもりであるing to follow him as I could, and 願望（する）ing Mr. Goddard's 援助 to fetch me off and 隠す me 船内に the ship if there should be occasion; which he 約束d to do, and the captain 約束d to entertain me. For it 証明するd, as I had foreseen, that upon Captain ヒース／荒れ地's arrival the 知事 repented him of his 約束 and would not 苦しむ me to 出発／死. I importuned him all I could; but in vain: so did Captain ヒース／荒れ地 also but to no 目的. In short, after several essays I slipped away at midnight (understanding the ship was to sail away the next morning and that they had taken leave of the fort) and, creeping through one of the portholes of the fort, I got to the shore where the ship's boat waited for me and carried me on board. I brought with me my 定期刊行物 and most of my written papers; but some papers and 調書をとる／予約するs of value I left in haste and all my furniture; 存在 glad I was myself at liberty, and had hopes of seeing England again.

CHAPTER 19.

THE AUTHOR'S DEPARTURE FROM BENCOOLEN, ON BOARD THE DEFENCE, UNDER CAPTAIN HEATH.

存在 thus got on board the Defence I was 隠すd there till a boat which （機の）カム from the fort laden with pepper was gone off again. And then we 始める，決める sail for the Cape of Good Hope January 25 1691, and made the best of our way as 勝利，勝つd and 天候 would 許す; 推定する／予想するing there to 会合，会う three English ships more bound home from the Indies: for, the war with the French having been 布告するd at Fort St. George a little before Captain ヒース／荒れ地 （機の）カム from thence, he was willing to have company home if he could.

OF A FIGHT BETWEEN SOME FRENCH MEN-OF-WAR FROM PONDICHERRY, AND SOME DUTCH SHIPS FROM PALLACAT, JOINED WITH SOME ENGLISH, IN SIGHT OF FORT ST. GEORGE.

A little before this war was 布告するd there was an 約束／交戦 in the road of Fort St. George between some French men-of-war and some Dutch and English ships at 錨，総合司会者 in the road: which, because there is such a plausible story made of it in Monsieur Duquesne's late voyage to the East Indies, I shall give a short account of, as I had it 特に 関係のある to me by the gunner's mate of Captain ヒース／荒れ地's ship, a very sensible man, and several others of his men who were in the 活動／戦闘. The Dutch have a fort on the coast of Coromandel, called Pallacat, about 20 leagues to the northward of Fort St. George. Upon some occasion or other the Dutch sent some ships thither to fetch away their 影響s and 輸送（する） them to Batavia. 行為／法令／行動するs of 敵意 were already begun between the French and Dutch; and the French had at this time a 騎兵大隊 newly arrived in India and lying at Pondicherry, a French fort on the same coast southward of Fort St. George. The Dutch in returning to Batavia were 強いるd to coast it along by Fort St. George and Pondicherry for the sake of the 勝利，勝つd; but when they （機の）カム 近づく this last they saw the French men-of-war lying at 錨，総合司会者 there; and, should they have proceeded along the shore, or stood out to sea, 推定する／予想するd to be 追求するd by them. They therefore turned 支援する again; for though their ships were of a pretty good 軍隊 yet were they unfit for fight, as having 広大な／多数の／重要な 負担s of goods and many 乗客s, women and children, on board; so they put in at Fort St. George and, 願望（する）ing the 知事's 保護, had leave to 錨，総合司会者 in the road, and to send their goods and useless people 岸に. There were then in the road a few small English ships; and Captain ヒース／荒れ地, whose ship was a very stout merchant-man, and which the French relater calls the English 海軍大将, was just come from 中国; but very 深い laden with goods, and the deck 十分な of canisters of sugar which he was 準備するing to send 岸に. But before he could do it the French appeared; coming into the road with their lower sails and topsails, and had with them a 解雇する／砲火／射撃-ship. With this they thought to have burnt the Dutch commodore, and might probably enough have done it as she lay at 錨，総合司会者 if they had had the courage to have come boldly on; but they 解雇する／砲火／射撃d their ship at a distance and the Dutch sent and 牽引するd her away, where she spent herself without any 死刑執行. Had the French men-of-war also come boldly up and grappled with their enemies they might have done something かなりの, for the fort could not have played on them without 損失ing our ships 同様に as theirs. But instead of this the French dropped 錨，総合司会者 out of reach of the 発射 of the fort, and there lay 交流ing 発射 with their enemies' ships with so little advantage to themselves that after about four hours fighting they 削減（する） their cables and went away in haste and disorder, with all their sails loose, even their 最高の，を越す-gallant sails, which is not usual but when ships are just next to running away. Captain ヒース／荒れ地, notwithstanding his ship was so 激しい and encumbered, behaved himself very bravely in the fight; and, upon the going off of the French, went 船内に the Dutch commodore and told him that if he would 追求する them he would stand out with them to sea though he had very little water 船内に; but the Dutch 指揮官 excused himself, 説 he had orders to defend himself from the French but 非，不，無 to chase them or go out of his way to 捜し出す them. And this was the 偉業／利用する which the French have thought fit to brag of. I hear that the Dutch have taken from them since their fort of Pondicherry.

OF THE BAD WATER TAKEN IN AT BENCOOLEN; AND THE STRANGE SICKNESS AND DEATH OF THE SEAMEN, SUPPOSED TO BE OCCASIONED THEREBY.

But to proceed with our voyage: we had not been at sea long before our men began to droop in a sort of distemper that stole insensibly on them and 証明するd 致命的な to above thirty, who died before we arrived at the Cape. We had いつかs two, and once three men thrown overboard in a morning. This distemper might probably arise from the badness of the water which we took in at Bencoolen: for I did 観察する while I was there that the river-water wherewith our ships were watered was very unwholesome, it 存在 mixed with the water of many small creeks that proceeded from low land, and whose streams were always very 黒人／ボイコット, they 存在 nourished by the water that drained out of the low swampy unwholesome ground.

A SPRING AT BENCOOLEN RECOMMENDED.

I have 観察するd not only there but in other hot countries also, both in the East and West Indies, that the land-floods which 注ぐ into the channels of the rivers about the season of the rains are very unwholesome. For when I lived in the Bay of Campeachy the fish were 設立する dead in heaps on the shores of the rivers and creeks at such a season; and many we took up half dead; of which sudden mortality there appeared no 原因（となる） but only the malignity of the waters draining off the land. This happens 主として as I take it, where the water drains through 厚い 支持を得ようと努めるd and savannahs of long grass and swampy grounds, with which some hot countries abound: and I believe it receives a strong tincture from the roots of several 肉親，親類d of trees, herbs, etc., and 特に where there is any stagnancy of the water it soon corrupts; and かもしれない the serpents and other poisonous vermin and insects may not a little 与える／捧げる to its bad 質s: at such times it will look very 深い-coloured, yellow, red, or 黒人／ボイコット, etc. The season of the rains was over and the land-floods were abating upon the taking up this water in the river of Bencoolen: but would the seamen have given themselves the trouble they might have filled their 大型船s with excellent good water at a spring on the 支援する 味方する of the fort, not above 2 or 300 paces from the 上陸-place; and with which the fort is served. And I について言及する this as a 警告を与える to any ships that shall go to Bencoolen for the 未来; and withal I think it 価値（がある） the care of the owners or 知事s of the factory, and that it would tend much to the 保護 of their seamen's lives to lay 麻薬を吸うs to 伝える the fountain water to the shore, which might easily be done with a small 告発（する），告訴（する）／料金: and had I stayed longer there I would have undertaken it. I had a design also of bringing into the fort, though much higher: for it would be a 広大な／多数の／重要な convenience and 安全 to it in 事例／患者 of a 包囲.

THE GREAT EXIGENCIES ON BOARD.

Besides the badness of the water it was stowed の中で the pepper in the 持つ／拘留する which made it very hot. Every morning when we （機の）カム to take our allowance it was so hot that a man could hardly 苦しむ his 手渡すs in it or 持つ／拘留する a 瓶／封じ込める 十分な of it in his 手渡すs. I never anywhere felt the like nor could have thought it possible that water should heat to that degree in a ship's 持つ／拘留する. It was 越えるing 黒人／ボイコット too, and looked more like 署名／調印する than water. Whether it grew so 黒人／ボイコット with standing or was tinged with the pepper I know not, for this water was not so 黒人／ボイコット when it was first taken up. Our food also was very bad; for the ship had been out of England upon this voyage above three years; and the salt 準備／条項 brought from thence and which we fed on, having been so long in salt was but ordinary food for sickly men to 料金d on.

Captain ヒース／荒れ地, when he saw the 悲惨 of his company, ordered his own tamarinds, of which he had some jars 船内に, to be given some to each mess to eat with their rice. This was a 広大な／多数の／重要な refreshment to the men and I do believe it 与える／捧げるd much to keep us on our 脚s.

This distemper was so 全世界の／万国共通の that I do believe there was 不十分な a man in the ship but languished under it; yet it stole so insensibly on us that we could not say we were sick, feeling little or no 苦痛, only a 証拠不十分 and but little stomach. Nay most of those that died in this voyage would hardly be 説得するd to keep their cabins or hammocks, till they could not 動かす about; and when they were 軍隊d to 嘘（をつく） 負かす／撃墜する they made their wills and piked off in two or three days.

The loss of these men and the weak languishing 条件 that the 残り／休憩（する） of us were in （判決などを）下すd us incapable to 治める／統治する our ship but the 勝利，勝つd blew more than ordinary. This often happened when we drew 近づく the Cape and as oft put us to our trumps to manage the ship. Captain ヒース／荒れ地, to encourage his men to their 労働, kept his watch as 絶えず as any man though sickly himself, and lent a helping 手渡す on all occasions.

A CONSULT HELD AND A PROPOSAL MADE TO GO TO JOHANNA.

But at last, almost despairing of 伸び（る）ing his passage to the Cape by 推論する／理由 of the 勝利，勝つd coming southerly, and we having now been sailing eight or nine weeks, he called all our men to 協議する about our safety and 願望（する）d every man from the highest to the lowest 自由に to give his real opinion and advice what to do in this dangerous juncture; for we were not in a 条件 to keep out long; and could we not get to land quickly must have 死なせる／死ぬd at sea. He 協議するd therefore whether it were best to （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 for the Cape or 耐える away for Johanna, where we might 推定する／予想する 救済, that 存在 a place where our outward-bound East India ships usually touch and whose natives are very familiar: but other places, 特に St. Lawrence, or Madagascar, which was nearer, was unknown to us. We were now so nigh the Cape that with a fair 勝利，勝つd we might 推定する／予想する to be there in four or five days; but as the 勝利，勝つd was now we could not hope to get thither. On the other 味方する this 勝利，勝つd was fair to carry us to Johanna; but then Johanna was a 広大な／多数の／重要な way off, and if the 勝利，勝つd should continue as it was to bring us into a true tradewind, yet we could not get thither under a fortnight; and if we should 会合，会う 静めるs, as we might probably 推定する／予想する, it might be much longer.

A RESOLUTION TAKEN TO PROSECUTE THEIR VOYAGE TO THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE.

Besides, we should lose our passage about the Cape till October or November, this 存在 about the latter end of March, for after the 10th of May it is not usual to （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 about the Cape to come home. All circumstances therefore 存在 重さを計るd and considered, we at last 全員一致で agreed to 起訴する our voyage に向かって the Cape and with patience wait for a 転換 of 勝利，勝つd.

THE WIND FAVOURS THEM. THE CAPTAIN'S CONDUCT.

But Captain ヒース／荒れ地, having thus far sounded the inclination of his weak men, told them that it was not enough that they all 同意d to （警官の）巡回区域，受持ち区域 for the Cape, for our 願望（する）s were not 十分な to bring us thither; but that there would need a more than ordinary 労働 and 管理／経営 from those that were able. And withal for their 激励 he 約束d a month's 支払う／賃金 gratis to every man that would engage to 補助装置 on all occasions and be ready upon call, whether it were his turn to watch or not; and this money he 約束d to 支払う／賃金 at the Cape. This 申し込む／申し出 was first embraced by some of the officers, and then as many of the men as 設立する themselves in a capacity 名簿（に載せる）／表（にあげる）d themselves in a roll to serve their 指揮官. This was wisely contrived of the captain for he could not have compelled them in their weak 条件, neither would fair words alone without some hopes of a reward have engaged them to so much 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の work; for the ship, sail, and 船の索具 were much out of 修理. For my part I was too weak to enter myself into that 名簿（に載せる）／表（にあげる） for else our ありふれた safety, which I plainly saw lay at 火刑／賭ける, would have 誘発するd me to do more than any such reward would do. In a short time after this it pleased God to favour us with a 罰金 勝利，勝つd, which, 存在 改善するd to the best advantage by the incessant 労働 of these new-名簿（に載せる）／表（にあげる）d men, brought us in a short time to the Cape.

THEY ARRIVE AT THE CAPE, AND ARE HELPED INTO HARBOUR BY THE DUTCH.

The night before we entered the harbour, which was about the beginning of April, 存在 近づく the land, we 解雇する／砲火／射撃d a gun every hour to give notice that we were in 苦しめる. The next day a Dutch captain （機の）カム 船内に in his boat, who seeing us so weak as not to be able to 削減する our sails to turn into the harbour; though we did tolerably 井戸／弁護士席 at sea before the 勝利，勝つd, and, 存在 requested by our captain to 補助装置 him, sent 岸に for a hundred lusty men who すぐに （機の）カム 船内に and brought our ship in to an 錨，総合司会者. They also unbent our sails and did everything for us that they were 要求するd to do, for which Captain ヒース／荒れ地 gratified them to the 十分な.

These men had better stomachs than we, and ate 自由に of such food as the ship afforded; and they having the freedom of our ship to go to and fro between decks made prize of what they could lay their 手渡すs on, 特に salt beef, which our men for want of stomachs in the voyage had hung up 6, 8, or 10 pieces in a place. This was 伝えるd away before we knew it or thought of it: besides in the night there was a bale of muslins broke open and a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 伝えるd away: but whether the muslins were stolen by our own men or the Dutch I cannot say; for we had some very dexterous thieves in our ship.

存在 thus got 安全な to an 錨，総合司会者 the sick were presently sen 岸に to ４半期/4分の1s 供給するd for them, and those that were able remained 船内に and had good fat mutton or fresh beef sent 船内に every day. I went 岸に also with my painted prince where I remained with him till the time of sailing again, which was about six weeks. In which time I took the 適切な時期 to 知らせる myself what I could 関心ing this country, which I shall in the next place give you a 簡潔な／要約する account of and so make what haste I can home.

A DESCRIPTION OF THE CAPE, ITS PROSPECT, SOUNDINGS, TABLE MOUNTAIN, HARBOUR, SOIL, ETC., LARGE POMEGRANATES, AND GOOD WINES.

The Cape of Good Hope is the 最大の bounds of the continent of Africa に向かって the south, lying in 34 degrees 30 minutes south latitude in a very temperate 気候. I look upon this latitude to be one of the mildest and sweetest for its 気温 of any どれでも; and I cannot here but take notice of a ありふれた prejudice our European seamen have as to this country, that they look upon it as much colder than places in the same latitude to the north of the Line. I am not of their opinion as to that: and their thinking so I believe may easily be accounted for from hence, that whatever way they come to the Cape, whether going to the East Indies or returning 支援する, they pass through a hot 気候; and, coming to it thus out of an extremity of heat, it is no wonder if it appear the colder to them. Some impute the coldness of the south 勝利，勝つd here to its blowing off from sea. On the contrary I have always 観察するd the sea 勝利，勝つd to be warmer than land-勝利，勝つd, unless it be when a bloom, as we call it, or hot 爆破 blow from thence. Such a one we felt in this very voyage as we went from Cape Verde Islands に向かって the South Seas; which I forgot to について言及する in its proper place, 一時期／支部 4. For one afternoon about the 19th of January 1683 in the latitude of 37 south we felt a きびきびした 強風 coming from off the coast of America, but so violent hot that we thought it （機の）カム from some 燃やすing mountain on the shore, and was like the heat from the mouth of an oven. Just such another gleam I felt one afternoon also, as I lay at 錨，総合司会者 at the Groin in July 1694, it （機の）カム with a southerly 勝利，勝つd, both these were followed by a 雷鳴 にわか雨. These were the only 広大な／多数の／重要な blooms I ever met with in my travels. But setting these aside, which are exceptions, I have made it my general 観察 that the sea-勝利，勝つd are a 広大な／多数の／重要な 取引，協定 warmer than those which blow from land unless where the 勝利，勝つd blows from the 政治家s, which I take to be the true 原因（となる） of the coldness of the south 勝利，勝つd at the Cape, for it is 冷淡な at sea also. And as for the coldness of land-勝利，勝つd, as the south-west parts of Europe are very sensible of it from the northern and eastern 勝利，勝つd; so on the opposite coast of Virginia they are as much pinched with the north-west 勝利，勝つd blowing 過度に 冷淡な from over the continent; though its latitude be not much greater than this of the Cape.

But to proceed: this large promontory consists of high and very remarkable land and off at sea it affords a very pleasant and agreeable prospect. And without 疑問 the prospect of it was very agreeable to those Portuguese who first 設立する out this way by sea to the East Indies; when after coasting along the 広大な continent of Africa に向かって the South 政治家 they had the 慰安 of seeing the land and their course end in this promontory: which therefore they called the Cape de Bon Esperance, or of Good Hope, finding that they might now proceed easterly.

There is good sounding off this Cape 50 are 60 leagues at sea to the southward, and therefore our English seamen, standing over as they usually do, from the coast of Brazil, content themselves with their soundings, 結論するing その為に that they are abreast of the Cape, they often pass by without seeing it, and begin to 形態／調整 their course northward. They have several other 調印するs whereby to know when they are 近づく it, as by the seafowl they 会合，会う at sea, 特に the albatrosses, a very large long-winged bird, and the mangovolucres, a smaller fowl. But the greatest dependence of our English seamen now is upon their 観察するing the variation of the compass, which is very carefully minded when they come 近づく the Cape by taking the sun's amplitude mornings and evenings. This they are so exact in that, by the help of the azimuth compass, an 器具 more peculiar to the seamen of our nation, they know when they are abreast of the Cape or are either to the east or the west of it: and for that 推論する／理由, though they should be to southward of all the soundings or fathomable ground, they can 形態／調整 their course 権利 without 存在 強いるd to make the land. But the Dutch on the contrary, having settled themselves on this promontory, do always touch here in their East India voyages both going and coming.

The most remarkable land at sea is a high mountain, 法外な to the sea, with a flat even 最高の，を越す, which is called the （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する Land. On the west 味方する of the Cape, a little to the northward of it, there is a spacious harbour with a low flat island lying off it, which you may leave on either 手渡す and pass in or out securely at either end. Ships that 錨，総合司会者 here ride 近づく the 本土／大陸, leaving the island at a さらに先に distance without them. The land by the sea against the harbour is low; but 支援する with high mountains a little way in to the southward of it.

The 国／地域 of this country is of a brown colour; not 深い yet indifferently 生産力のある of grass, herbs, and trees. The grass is short, like that which grows on our Wiltshire or Dorsetshire 負かす／撃墜するs. The trees hereabouts are but small and few; the country also さらに先に from the sea does not much abound in trees, as I have been 知らせるd. The mould or 国／地域 also is much like this 近づく the harbour, which, though it cannot be said to be very fat or rich land, yet it is very fit for cultivation, and 産する／生じるs good 刈るs to the industrious husbandman, and the country is pretty 井戸／弁護士席 settled with farms, Dutch families, and French 難民s for twenty or thirty leagues up the country; but there are but few farms 近づく the harbour.

Here grows plenty of wheat, barley, peas, etc. Here are also fruits of many 肉親，親類d, as apples, pears, quinces, and the largest pomegranates that I did ever see.

The 長，指導者 fruits are grapes. These 栄える very 井戸／弁護士席 and the country is of late years so 井戸／弁護士席 在庫／株d with vineyards that they make 豊富 of ワイン, of which they have enough and to spare; and do sell 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s to ships that touch here. This ワイン is like a French high-country white ワイン, but of a pale yellowish colour; it is 甘い, very pleasant and strong.

THE LAND-ANIMALS.

The tame animals of this country are sheep, goats, hogs, cows, horses, etc. The sheep are very large and fat, for they 栄える very 井戸／弁護士席 here: this 存在 a 乾燥した，日照りの country and the short pasturage very agreeable to these creatures, but it is not so proper for 広大な／多数の／重要な cattle; neither is the beef in its 肉親，親類d so 甘い as the mutton. Of wild beasts it is said here are several sorts, but I saw 非，不，無. However it is very likely there are some wild beasts that prey on the sheep because they are 一般的に brought into the houses in the night and penned up.

A VERY BEAUTIFUL KIND OF ONAGER, OR WILD ASS, STRIPED REGULARLY BLACK AND WHITE.

There is a very beautiful sort of wild ass in this country whose 団体／死体 is curiously （土地などの）細長い一片d with equal 名簿（に載せる）／表（にあげる）s of white and 黒人／ボイコット; the （土地などの）細長い一片s coming from the 山の尾根 of his 支援する and ending under the belly, which is white. These （土地などの）細長い一片s are two or three fingers 幅の広い, running 平行の with each other, and curiously intermixed, one white and one 黒人／ボイコット, over from the shoulder to the 残余. I saw two of the 肌s of these beasts 乾燥した，日照りのd and 保存するd to be sent to Holland as a rarity. They seemed big enough to enclose the 団体／死体 of a beast as big as a large colt of a twelvemonth old.

OSTRICHES.

Here are a 広大な／多数の／重要な many ducks, dunghill fowls, etc., and ostriches are plentifully 設立する in the 乾燥した，日照りの mountains and plains. I ate of their eggs here, and those of whom I bought them told me that these creatures lay their eggs in the sand or at least on 乾燥した，日照りの ground, and so leave them to be hatched by the sun. The meat of one of their eggs will 十分である two men very 井戸／弁護士席. The inhabitants do 保存する the eggs that they find to sell to strangers. They were pretty 不十分な when I was here, it 存在 the beginning of their winter; 反して I was told they lay their eggs about Christmas which is their summer.

FISH.

The sea hereabouts affords plenty of fish of divers sorts; 特に a small sort of fish, not so big as a herring; whereof they have such 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty that they pickle 広大な／多数の／重要な 量s 年一回の and send them to Europe.

SEALS.

調印（する）s are also in 広大な／多数の／重要な numbers about the Cape; which, as I have still 観察するd, is a good 調印する of the plentifulness of fish, which is their food.

THE DUTCH FORT AND FACTORY.

The Dutch have a strong fort by the seaside against the harbour, where the 知事 lives. At about two or three hundred paces distance from thence, on the west 味方する of the fort, there is a small Dutch town in which I told about fifty or sixty houses; low, but 井戸／弁護士席 built, with 石／投石する 塀で囲むs; there 存在 plenty of 石／投石する drawn out of a quarry の近くに by.

THEIR FINE GARDEN.

On the 支援する 味方する of the town, as you go に向かって the mountains, the Dutch East India Company have a large house and a stately garden 塀で囲むd in with a high 石／投石する 塀で囲む.

This garden is 十分な of divers sorts of herbs, flowers, roots, and fruits, with curious spacious gravel walks and arbours; and is watered with a brook that descends out of the mountains; which 存在 削減（する） into many channels is 伝えるd into all parts of the garden. The hedges which make the walks are very 厚い, and nine or ten foot high: they are kept 越えるing neat and even by continual pruning. There are lower hedges within these again, which serve to separate the fruit-trees from each other, but without shading them: and they keep each sort of fruit by themselves, as apples, pears, 豊富 of quinces, pomegranates, etc. These all 栄える very 井戸／弁護士席 and 耐える good fruit, 特に the pomegranate. The roots and garden herbs have also their 際立った places, hedged in apart by themselves; and all in such order that it is 越えるing pleasant and beautiful. There are a 広大な／多数の／重要な number of Negro slaves brought from other parts of the world; some of which are continually weeding, pruning, trimming, and looking after it. All strangers are 許すd the liberty to walk there; and by the servants' leave you may be 認める to taste of the fruit: but if you think to do it clandestinely you may be mistaken, as I knew one was when I was in the garden, who took five or six pomegranates and was 遠くに見つけるd by one of the slaves and 脅すd to be carried before the 知事: I believe it cost him some money to make his peace, for I heard no more of it. その上の up from the sea, beyond the garden, に向かって the mountains, there are several other small gardens and vineyards belonging to 私的な men: but the mountains are so nigh that the number of them are but small.

THE TRAFFIC HERE.

The Dutch that live in the town get かなり by the ships that frequently touch here, 主として by entertaining strangers that come 岸に to refresh themselves; for you must give 3 shillings or a dollar a day for your entertainment; the bread and flesh is as cheap here as in England; besides they buy good penny-価値（がある）s of the seamen, both outward and homeward bound, which the 農業者s up the country buy of them again at a dear 率; for they have not an 適切な時期 of buying things at the best 手渡す, but must buy of those that live at the harbour; the nearest 解決／入植地s, as I was 知らせるd, 存在 twenty miles off.

Notwithstanding the 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty of corn and ワイン yet the 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の high 税金s which the Company lays on アルコール飲料s makes it very dear; and you can buy 非，不，無 but at the tavern except it be by stealth. There are but three houses in the town that sell strong アルコール飲料, one of which is this ワイン-house or tavern; there they sell only ワイン; another sells beer and mum; and the third sells brandy and タバコ, all 驚くべき／特命の／臨時の dear. A flask of ワイン which 持つ／拘留するs three quarts will cost eighteen stivers, for so much I paid for it; yet I bought as much for eight stivers in another place, but it was 個人として at an unlicensed house, and the personage sold would have been 廃虚d had it been known. And thus much for the country and the European inhabitants.

CHAPTER 20.

OF THE NATURAL INHABITANTS OF THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE, THE HODMADODS OR HOTTENTOTS.

The natural inhabitants of the Cape are the Hodmadods, as they are 一般的に called, which is a 汚職 of the word Hottentot; for this is the 指名する by which they call to one another, either in their dances or on any occasion; as if every one of them had this for his 指名する. The word probably has some signification or other in their language, whatever it is.

THEIR PERSONAGE, GARB, BESMEARING THEMSELVES; THEIR CLOTHING, HOUSES, FOOD, WAY OF LIVING, AND DANCING AT THE FULL OF THE MOON: COMPARED IN THOSE RESPECTS WITH OTHER NEGROES AND WILD INDIANS.

These Hottentots are people of a middle stature with small 四肢s and thin 団体／死体s, 十分な of activity. Their 直面するs are of a flat oval 人物／姿／数字, of the Negro make, with 広大な／多数の／重要な eyebrows, 黒人／ボイコット 注目する，もくろむs, but neither are their noses so flat, nor their lips so 厚い, as the Negroes of Guinea. Their complexion is darker than the ありふれた Indians; though not so 黒人／ボイコット as the Negroes or New Hollanders; neither is their hair so much frizzled.

They besmear themselves all over with grease 同様に to keep their 共同のs supple as to 盗品故買者 their half-naked 団体／死体s from the 空気／公表する by stopping up their pores. To do this the more effectually they rub すす over the greased parts, 特に their 直面するs, which 追加するs to their natural beauty, as 絵 does in Europe; but withal sends from them a strong smell which though 十分に pleasing to themselves is very unpleasant to others. They are glad of the worst of kitchen-stuff for this 目的 and use it as often as they can get it.

This custom of anointing the 団体／死体 is very ありふれた in other parts of Africa, 特に on the coast of Guinea, where they 一般に use palm-oil, anointing themselves from 長，率いる to foot; but when they want oil they make use of kitchen-stuff, which they buy of the Europeans that 貿易（する） with them. In the East Indies also, 特に on the coast of Cudda and Malacca, and in general on almost all the easterly islands, 同様に on Sumatra, Java, etc., as on the Philippine and Spice Islands, the Indian inhabitants anoint themselves with coconut oil two or three times a day, 特に mornings and evenings. They spend いつかs half an hour in chafing the oil and rubbing it into their hair and 肌, leaving no place unsmeared with oil but their 直面する, which they daub not like these Hottentots. The Americans also in some places do use this custom, but not so frequently, perhaps for want of oil and grease to do it. Yet some American Indians in the North Seas frequently daub themselves with a pigment made with leaves, roots, or herbs, or with a sort of red earth, giving their 肌s a yellow, red, or green colour, （許可，名誉などを）与えるing as the pigment is. And these smell unsavourly enough to people not accustomed to them; though not so 階級 as those who use oil or grease.

The Hottentots do wear no covering on their 長，率いるs but deck their hair with small 爆撃するs. Their 衣料品s are sheep-肌s wrapped about their shoulders like a mantle, with the woolly 味方するs next their 団体／死体s. The men have besides this mantle a piece of 肌 like a small apron hanging before them. The women have another 肌 tucked about their waists, which comes 負かす／撃墜する to their 膝s like a petticoat; and their 脚s are wrapped 一連の会議、交渉／完成する with sheep's guts two or three インチs 厚い, some up as high as to their calves, others even from their feet to their 膝s, which at a small distance seems to be a sort of boots. These are put on when they are green; and so they grow hard and stiff on their 脚s, for they never pull them off again till they have occasion to eat them; which is when they 旅行 from home and have no other food; then these guts which have been worn, it may be six, eight, ten or twelve months, make them a good 祝宴: this I was 知らせるd of by the Dutch. They never pull off their sheep-肌 衣料品s but to louse themselves, for by continual wearing them they are 十分な of vermin, which 強いるs them often to （土地などの）細長い一片 and sit in the sun two or three hours together in the heat of the day to destroy them. Indeed most Indians that live remote from the 赤道 are （性的に）いたずらするd with lice, though their 衣料品s afford いっそう少なく 避難所 for lice than these Hottentots' sheep-肌s do. For all those Indians who live in 冷淡な countries as in the north and south parts of America, have some sort of 肌 or other to cover their 団体／死体s; as deer, カワウソ, beaver, or 調印（する）-肌s, all which they as 絶えず wear without 転換ing themselves as these Hottentots do their sheep-肌s. And hence they are lousy too and strong scented, though they do not daub themselves at all or but very little; or even by 推論する／理由 of their 肌s they smell strong.

The Hottentots' houses are the meanest that I did ever see. They are about nine or ten foot high and ten or twelve from 味方する to 味方する. They are in a manner 一連の会議、交渉／完成する, made with small 政治家s stuck into the ground and brought together at the 最高の，を越す where they are fastened. The 味方するs and 最高の，を越す of the house are filled up with boughs coarsely wattled between the 政治家s, and all is covered over with long grass, 急ぐs, and pieces of hides; and the house at a distance appears just like a haycock. They leave only a small 穴を開ける on one 味方する about three or four foot high for a door to creep in and out at; but when the 勝利，勝つd comes in at this door they stop it up and make another 穴を開ける in the opposite 味方する. They make the 解雇する／砲火／射撃 in the middle of the house and the smoke 上がるs out of the crannies from all parts of the house. They have no beds to 嘘（をつく） on but 宙返り／暴落する 負かす／撃墜する at night 一連の会議、交渉／完成する the 解雇する／砲火／射撃.

Their 世帯 furniture is 一般的に an earthen マリファナ or two to boil victuals, and they live very miserably and hard; it is 報告（する）／憶測d that they will 急速な／放蕩な two or three days together when they travel about the country.

Their ありふれた food is either herbs, flesh, or 貝類と甲殻類, which they get の中で the 激しく揺するs or other places at low water: for they have no boats, bark-スピードを出す／記録につけるs, nor canoes to go a-fishing in; so that their 長，指導者 subsistence is on land-animals, or on such herbs as the land 自然に produces. I was told by my Dutch landlord that they kept sheep and bullocks here before the Dutch settled の中で them; and that the inland Hottentots have still 広大な／多数の／重要な 在庫／株s of cattle and sell them to the Dutch for rolls of タバコ: and that the price for which they sell a cow or sheep was as much 新たな展開d タバコ as would reach from the horns or 長，率いる to the tail; for they are 広大な／多数の／重要な lovers of タバコ and will do anything for it. This their way of トラックで運ぶing was 確認するd to me by many others who yet said that they could not buy their beef this cheap way, for they had not the liberty to を取り引きする the Hottentots, that 存在 a 特権 which the Dutch East India Company reserved to themselves. My landlord having a 広大な／多数の／重要な many lodgers fed us most with mutton, some of which he bought of the butcher, and there is but one in the town; but most of it he killed in the night, the sheep 存在 brought 個人として by the Hottentots who 補助装置d in skinning and dressing, and had the 肌 and guts for their 苦痛s. I 裁判官 these sheep were fetched out of the country a good way off, for he himself would be absent a day or two to procure them, and two or three Hottentots with him. These of the Hottentots that live by the Dutch town have their greatest subsistence from the Dutch, for there is one or more of them belonging to every house. These do all sorts of servile work and there take their food and grease. Three or four more of the nearest relations sit at the doors or 近づく the Dutch house, waiting for the 捨てるs and fragments that come from the （米）棚上げする／（英）提議する; and if between meals the Dutch people have any occasion for them to go on errands or the like they are ready at 命令（する）; 推定する／予想するing little for their 苦痛s; but for a stranger they will not budge under a stiver.

Their 宗教, if they have any, is wholly unknown to me; for they have no 寺 nor idol, nor any place of worship that I did see or hear of. Yet their mirth and nocturnal pastimes at the new and 十分な of the moon looked as if they had some superstition about it. For at the 十分な 特に they sing and dance all night, making a 広大な／多数の／重要な noise: I walked out to their huts twice at these times in the evening when the moon arose above the horizon, and 見解（をとる）d them for an hour or more. They seem all very busy, both men, women and children, dancing very oddly on the green grass by their houses. They traced to and fro promiscuously, often clapping their 手渡すs and singing aloud. Their 直面するs were いつかs to the east, いつかs to the west: neither did I see any 動議 or gesture that they used when their 直面するs were に向かって the moon, more than when their 支援するs were toward it. After I had thus 観察するd them for a while I returned to my 宿泊するing, which was not above 2 or 300 paces from their huts; and I heard them singing in the same manner all night. In the grey of the morning I walked out again and 設立する many of the men and women still singing and dancing; who continued their mirth till the moon went 負かす／撃墜する, and then they left off. Some of them going into their huts to sleep and others to their 出席 in their Dutch houses. Other Negroes are いっそう少なく circumspect in their night dances as to the 正確な time of the 十分な moon, they 存在 more general in these nocturnal pastimes and use them oftener; as do many people also in the East and West Indies: yet there is a difference between colder and warmer countries as to their divertissements. The warmer 気候s 存在 一般に very 生産力のある of delicate fruits, etc., and these uncivilised people caring for little else than what is barely necessary, they spend the greatest part of their time in コースを変えるing themselves after their several fashions; but the Indians of colder 気候s are not so much at leisure, the fruits of the earth 存在 不十分な with them, and they necessitated to be continually fishing, 追跡（する）ing, or fowling for their subsistence; not as with us for recreation.

As for these Hottentots they are a very lazy sort of people, and though they live in a delicate country, very fit to be manured, and where there is land enough for them, yet they choose rather to live as their forefathers, poor and 哀れな, than be at 苦痛s for plenty. And so much for the Hottentots: I shall now return to our own 事件／事情／状勢s.

CAPTAIN HEATH REFRESHES HIS MEN AT THE CAPE, AND GETTING SOME MORE HANDS, DEPARTS IN COMPANY WITH THE JAMES AND MARY, AND THE JOSIAH.

Upon our arrival at the Cape Captain ヒース／荒れ地 took a house to live in ーするために 回復する his health. Such of his men as were able did so too, for the 残り／休憩（する） he 供給するd lodgings and paid their expenses. Three or four of our men who （機の）カム 岸に very sick died, but the 残り／休憩（する）, by the 援助 of the doctors of the fort, a 罰金 空気／公表する, and good kitchen and cellar physic, soon 回復するd their healths. Those that subscribed to be at all calls and 補助装置d to bring in the ship received Captain ヒース／荒れ地's bounty, by which they furnished themselves with アルコール飲料 for their homeward voyage. But we were now so few that we could not sail the ship; therefore Captain ヒース／荒れ地 願望（する）d the 知事 to spare him some men; and, as I was 知らせるd, had a 約束 to be 供給（する）d out of the homeward-bound Dutch East India ships that were now 推定する／予想するd every day, and we waited for them. In the 合間 in （機の）カム the James and Mary, and the Josiah of London, bound home. Out of these we thought to have been furnished with men; but they had only enough for themselves; therefore we waited yet longer for the Dutch (n)艦隊／(a)素早い, which at last arrived; but we could get no men from them.

Captain ヒース／荒れ地 was therefore 軍隊d to get men by stealth such as he could 選ぶ up whether 兵士s or seamen. The Dutch knew our want of men, therefore 近づく forty of them, those that had a design to return to Europe, （機の）カム 個人として and 申し込む／申し出d themselves, and waited in the night at places 任命するd, where our boats went and fetched three or four 船内に at a time and hid them, 特に when any Dutch boat （機の）カム 船内に our ship. Here at the Cape I met my friend Daniel Wallis, the same who leapt into the sea and swam at Pulo Condore. After several 横断するs to Madagascar, Don Mascarin, Pondicherry, Pegu, Cunnimere, マドラス, and the river of Hooghly he was now got hither in a homeward-bound Dutch ship. I soon 説得するd him to come over to us and 設立する means to get him 船内に our ship.

A GREAT SWELLING SEA FROM SOUTH-WEST.

About the 23rd of May we sailed from the Cape in the company of the James and Mary and the Josiah, directing our course に向かって the island St. Helena. We met nothing of 発言／述べる in this voyage except a 広大な／多数の／重要な swelling sea out of the south-west which, taking us on the broadside, made us roll 十分に. Such of our water-樽s as were between decks running from 味方する to 味方する were in a short time all 突き破るd, and the deck 井戸／弁護士席 washed with the fresh water. The 発射 宙返り／暴落するd out the lockers and garlands; and rung a loud peal, rumbling from 味方する to 味方する every roll that the ship made; neither was it an 平易な 事柄 to 減ずる them again within bounds. The guns, 存在 carefully looked after and 攻撃するd 急速な／放蕩な, never budged, but the 取り組むs or pulleys and lashings made 広大な／多数の／重要な music too. The sudden and violent 動議 of the ship made us fearful lest some of the guns should have broken loose, which must have been very detrimental to the ship's 味方するs. The masts were also in 広大な／多数の／重要な danger to be rolled by the board; but no 害（を与える） happened to any of us besides the loss of three or four buts of water, and a バーレル／樽 or two of good Cape ワイン, which was 突き破るd in the 広大な／多数の／重要な cabin.

This 広大な／多数の／重要な 宙返り／暴落するing sea took us すぐに after we （機の）カム from the Cape. The 暴力／激しさ of it lasted but one night; yet we had a continual swelling （機の）カム out of the south-west almost during all the passage to St. Helena; which was an 著名な 記念品 that the south-west 勝利，勝つd were now violent in the higher latitudes に向かって the South 政治家; for this was the time of the year for those 勝利，勝つd.

THEY ARRIVE AT ST. HELENA AND THERE MEET WITH THE PRINCESS ANN, HOMEWARD BOUND.

Notwithstanding this boisterous sea coming thus obliquely upon us we had 罰金 （疑いを）晴らす 天候 and a 穏健な 強風 at south-east, or between that and the east, till we （機の）カム to the island St. Helena, where we arrived the 20th day of June. There we 設立する the Princess Ann at an 錨，総合司会者 waiting for us.

THE AIR, SITUATION, AND SOIL OF THAT ISLAND.

The island St. Helena lies in about 16 degrees south latitude. The 空気／公表する is 一般的に serene and （疑いを）晴らす except in the months that 産する／生じる rain; yet we had one or two very 雨の days even while we were here. Here are moist seasons to 工場／植物 and （種を）蒔く and the 天候 is temperate enough as to heat, though so 近づく the 赤道, and very healthy.

The island is but small, not above nine or ten leagues in length, and stands 3 or 400 leagues from the 本土／大陸. It is bounded against the sea with 法外な 激しく揺するs so that there is no 上陸 but at two or three places. The land is high and 山地の and seems to be very 乾燥した，日照りの and poor; yet they are 罰金 valleys, proper for cultivation. The mountains appear 明らかにする, only in some places you may see a few low shrubs, but the valleys afford some trees fit for building, as I was 知らせるd.

ITS FIRST DISCOVERY, AND CHANGE OF MASTERS SINCE.

This island is said to have been first discovered and settled by the Portuguese, who 在庫／株d it with goats and hogs. But it 存在 afterwards 砂漠d by them it lay waste till the Dutch, finding it convenient to relieve their east India ships, settled it again; but they afterwards 放棄するd it for a more convenient place; I mean the Cape of Good Hope. Then the English East India Company settled their servants there and began to 防備を堅める／強化する it, but they 存在 yet weak the Dutch about the year 1672 （機の）カム hither and re-took it and kept it in their 所有／入手.

HOW THE ENGLISH GOT IT.

This news 存在 報告（する）／憶測d in England, Captain Monday was sent to re-take it who, by the advice and 行為／行う of one that had 以前は lived there, landed a party of 武装した men in the night in a small cove, unknown to the Dutch then in 守備隊, and, climbing the 激しく揺するs, got up into the island, and so （機の）カム in the morning to the hills hanging over the fort, which stands by the sea in a small valley. From thence 解雇する／砲火／射撃ing into the fort they soon made them 降伏する. There were at this time two or three Dutch East India ships either at 錨，総合司会者 or coming thither when our ships were there. These, when they saw that the English were masters of the island again, made sail to be gone; but 存在 chased by the English フリゲート艦s two of them became rich prizes to Captain Monday and his men.

ITS STRENGTH, TOWN, INHABITANTS, AND THE PRODUCT OF THEIR PLANTATIONS.

The island has continued ever since in the 手渡すs of the English East India Company, and has been 大いに 強化するd both with men and guns; so that at this day it is 安全な・保証する enough from the 侵略 of any enemy. For ありふれた 上陸-place is a small bay like a half moon, 不十分な 500 paces wide between the two points. の近くに by the seaside are good guns 工場／植物d at equal distances lying along from one end of the bay to the other; besides a small fort a little その上の in from the sea, 近づく the 中央 of the bay. All which makes the bay so strong that it is impossible to 軍隊 it. The small cove where Captain Monday landed his men when he took the island from the Dutch is 不十分な fit for a boat to land at; and yet that is now also 防備を堅める／強化するd.

There is a small English town within the 広大な／多数の／重要な bay standing in a little valley between two high 法外な mountains. There may be about twenty or thirty small houses whose 塀で囲むs are built with rough 石／投石するs: the inside furniture is very mean. The 知事 has a pretty tolerable handsome low house by the fort; where he 一般的に lives, having a few 兵士s to …に出席する him and to guard the fort. But the houses in the town before について言及するd stand empty save only when ships arrive here; for their owners have all 農園s さらに先に in the island where they 絶えず 雇う themselves. But when ships arrive they all flock to the town where they live all the time that the ships 嘘（をつく） here; for then is their fair or market to buy such necessaries as they want and to sell off the 製品 of their 農園s.

Their 農園s afford potatoes, yams, and some plantains and 気が狂って. Their 在庫／株 consists 主として of hogs, bullocks, cocks and 女／おっせかい屋s, ducks, geese, and turkeys, of which they have 広大な／多数の／重要な plenty, and sell them at a lower 率 to the sailors, taking in 交流 shirts, drawers, or any light 着せる／賦与するs; pieces of calico, silks, or muslins: arak, sugar, and lime-juice is also much esteemed and coveted by them. But now they are in hopes to produce ワイン and brandy in a short time; for they do already begin to 工場／植物 vines for that end, there 存在 a few Frenchmen there to manage that 事件／事情／状勢. This I was told but I saw nothing of it, for it rained so hard when I was 岸に that I had not the 適切な時期 of seeing their 農園s.

THE ST. HELENA MANATEE NO OTHER THAN THE SEA-LION.

I was also 知らせるd that they get manatee or sea-cows here, which seemed very strange to me. Therefore enquiring more 厳密に into the 事柄 I 設立する the St. Helena manatee to be, by their 形態／調整s and manner of lying 岸に on the 激しく揺するs, those creatures called sea-lions; for the manatee never come 岸に, neither are they 設立する 近づく any rocky shores as this island is, there 存在 no feeding for them in such places. Besides in this island there is no river for them to drink at, though there is a small brook runs into the sea out of the valley by the fort.

OF THE ENGLISH WOMEN AT THIS ISLE. THE ENGLISH SHIPS REFRESH THEIR MEN HERE; AND DEPART ALL TOGETHER.

We stayed here five or six days; all which time the islanders lived at the town to entertain the seamen; who 絶えず flock 岸に to enjoy themselves の中で their country people. Our touching at the Cape had 大いに drained the seamen of their loose coins, at which these islanders as 大いに repined; and some of the poorer sort 率直に complained against such doings, 説 it was fit that the East India Company should be 熟知させるd with it, that they might 妨げる their ships from touching at the Cape. Yet they were 極端に 肉親，親類d, in hopes to get what was remaining. They are most of them very poor: but such as could get a little アルコール飲料 to sell to the seamen at this time got what the seamen could spare; for the punch-houses were never empty. But, had we all come 直接／まっすぐに hither and not touched at the Cape, even the poorest people の中で them would have gotten something by entertaining sick men. For 一般的に the seamen coming home are troubled more or いっそう少なく with scorbutic distempers: and their only hopes are to get refreshment and health at this island; and these hopes seldom or never fail them if once they get 地盤 here. For the islands afford 豊富 of delicate herbs, wherewith the sick are first bathed to supple their 共同のs, and then the fruits and herbs and fresh food soon after cure them of their scorbutic humours. So that in a week's time men that have been carried 岸に in hammocks and they who were wholly unable to go have soon been able to leap and dance. Doubtless the serenity and wholesomeness of the 空気／公表する 与える／捧げるs much to the carrying off of these distempers; for here is 絶えず a fresh 微風. While we stayed here many of the seamen got sweethearts. One young man belonging to the James and Mary was married and brought his wife to England with him. Another brought his sweetheart to England, they 存在 each engaged by 社債s to marry at their arrival in England; and several other of our men were over 長，率いる and ears in love with the St. Helena maids who, though they were born there, yet very 真面目に 願望（する）d to be 解放（する）d from that 刑務所，拘置所, which they have no other way to compass but by marrying seamen or 乗客s that touch here. The young women born here are but one 除去する from English, 存在 the daughters of such. They are 井戸／弁護士席-形態／調整d, proper and comely, were they in a dress to 始める，決める them off.

My stay 岸に here was but two days to get refreshments for myself and Jeoly, whom I carried 岸に with me: and he was very diligent to 選ぶ up such things as the islands afforded, carrying 岸に with him a 捕らえる、獲得する which the people of the 小島 filled with roots for him. They flocked about him and seemed to admire him much. This was the last place where I had him at my own 処分, for the mate of the ship who had Mr. Moody's 株 in him left him 完全に to my 管理／経営, I 存在 to bring him to England. But I was no sooner arrived in the Thames but he was sent 岸に to be seen by some 著名な persons; and I, 存在 in want of money, was 勝つ／広く一帯に広がるd upon to sell first part of my 株 in him, and by degrees all of it. After this I heard he was carried about to be shown as a sight and that he died of the smallpox at Oxford.

OF THE DIFFERENT COURSES FROM HENCE TO ENGLAND.

But to proceed, our water 存在 filled and the ship all 在庫／株d with fresh 準備／条項, we sailed from hence in company of the Princess Ann, the James and Mary, and the Josiah, July the 2nd 1691, directing our course に向かって England, and designing to touch nowhere by the way. We were now in the way of the tradewinds, which we 一般的に find at east-south-east or south-east by east or south-east till we draw 近づく the Line, and いつかs till we are eight or ten degrees to the north of the Line. For which 推論する／理由 ships might 形態／調整 their course so as to keep on the African shore and pass between Cape Verde and Cape Verde Islands; for that seems to be the directest course to England. But experience often shows us that the farthest way about is the nearest way home, and so it is here. For by 努力する／競うing to keep 近づく the African shore you 会合，会う with the 勝利，勝つd more uncertain and 支配する to 静めるs; 反して in keeping the 中途の between Africa and America, or rather nearer the American continent, till you are north of the Line you have a きびきびした constant 強風.

THEIR COURSE AND ARRIVAL IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL AND THE DOWNS.

This was the way we took, and in our passage before we got to the Line we saw three ships and, making に向かって them we 設立する two of them to be Portuguese, bound to Brazil. The third kept on a 勝利，勝つd so that we could not speak with her; but we 設立する by the Portuguese it was an English ship called the Dorothy, Captain 妨害する 指揮官, bound to the East Indies. After this we kept company still with our three consorts till we （機の）カム 近づく England, and then were separated by bad 天候; but before we （機の）カム within sight of land we got together again, all but the James and Mary. She got into the Channel before us and went to Plymouth, and there gave an account of the 残り／休憩（する） of us; その結果 our men-of-war who lay there （機の）カム out to join us and, 会合 us, brought us off of Plymouth. There our consort the James and Mary （機の）カム to us again, and from thence we all sailed in company of several men-of-war に向かって Portsmouth. There our first 軍用車隊 left us and went in thither. But we did not want 軍用車隊s, for our (n)艦隊／(a)素早いs were then 修理ing to their winter harbours to be laid up; so that we had the company of several English ships to the 負かす／撃墜するs, and a 騎兵大隊 also of Dutch sailed up the Channel, but kept off さらに先に from our English coast, they 存在 bound home to Holland. When we （機の）カム as high as the south foreland we left them standing on their course, keeping on the 支援する of the Goodwin Sands; and we luffed in for the 負かす／撃墜するs where we 錨，総合司会者d September the 16th 1691.

INDEX.

End of this 事業／計画（する） Gutenberg of Australia eBook
A NEW VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY WILLIAM DAMPIER.

This 場所／位置 is 十分な of FREE ebooks - 事業／計画（する） Gutenberg Australia